diff options
21 files changed, 22435 insertions, 7383 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/apacite/apa5ex.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/apacite/apa5ex.bib index cbaeb444e8d..6d13bbe77c3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/apacite/apa5ex.bib +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/apacite/apa5ex.bib @@ -1,39 +1,56 @@ -@string{comment = { -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% This is file `apa5ex.bib'. -% -% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed -% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the `apacite' package. -% ------------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a -% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'. -% -% \fi - +%% +%% This is file `apa5ex.bib', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `bibdb') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +%% apa5ex.bib +%% [2007/09/03 v4.00 bibliography database for apacite manual] + + +%% %% apa5ex.bib: References from the 5th edition of the Publication Manual %% of the APA, plus a few additional references -%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl> -%% This version: [2005/06/08] +%% Written by Erik Meijer -% Entry labels are section number of the APA manual (5th ed.) -% plus a sequence number within the section. -% -% Note that this ``string'' is used as a comment, because the -% @comment construction of BibTeX does not work: `@'-sign in the -% e-mail address above would be taken as the beginning of an entry. -}} +%% Entry labels are section number of the APA manual (5th ed.) +%% plus a sequence number within the section. @misc{3.94-1, author = {Walker}, @@ -81,7 +98,7 @@ author = {J{\"{o}}reskog, K[arl] G. and S{\"{o}}rbom, D[ag]}, year = {1989}, title = {{LISREL} 7: {A} Guide to the Program and Applications}, - edition = {2nd}, + edition = {2}, address = {Chicago}, publisher = {SPSS} } @@ -108,7 +125,7 @@ title = {Jaarverslag 2002}, englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002}, address = {Amsterdam}, - publisher = {Author}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with same key, but with different firstkey.} } @@ -121,7 +138,7 @@ title = {Jaarverslag 2003}, englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003}, address = {Amsterdam}, - publisher = {Author}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with same key, but with different firstkey.} } @@ -134,7 +151,7 @@ title = {Jaarverslag 2002}, englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002}, address = {Amsterdam}, - publisher = {Author}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with same key, but with different firstkey.} } @@ -147,7 +164,7 @@ title = {Jaarverslag 2003}, englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003}, address = {Amsterdam}, - publisher = {Author}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with same key, but with different firstkey.} } @@ -342,6 +359,13 @@ note = {no example, but rule given in text} } +@misc{3.100-1b, + author = {Author}, + year = {2003 version}, + type = {Unknown}, + note = {no example, but rule given in text} +} + @book{3.100-2, author = {Aristotle}, year = {1931}, @@ -570,7 +594,8 @@ } @misc{4.08-3, - author = {Bulatao, E. {\bibliteral{(with Winford, C. A.)}}}, + author = {Bulatao, E. {\protect\bibliteral{(with + Winford, C.~A.)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, year = {\bibnodate}, type = {Unknown} } @@ -578,7 +603,7 @@ @article{4.09-1, author = {Fowers, B. J. and Olson, D. H.}, year = {1993}, - title = {{ENRICH} {M}arital {S}atisfaction {S}cale: + title = {{ENRICH} {Marital} {Satisfaction} {Scale}: {A} Brief Research and Clinical Tool}, journal = {Journal of Family Psychology}, volume = {7}, @@ -588,7 +613,7 @@ @article{4.10-1, author = {Deutsch, F. M. and Lussier, J. B. and Servis, L. J.}, year = {1993}, - title = {Husbands At Home: {P}redictors of Paternal Participation + title = {Husbands At Home: Predictors of Paternal Participation in Childcare and Housework}, journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, volume = {65}, @@ -599,7 +624,7 @@ author = {O'Neil, J. M. and Egan, J.}, year = {1992}, title = {Men's and Women's Gender Role Journeys: - {M}etaphor for Healing, Transition, and Transformation}, + Metaphor for Healing, Transition, and Transformation}, editor = {Wainrib, B. R.}, booktitle = {Gender Issues Across the Life Cycle}, pages = {107--123}, @@ -610,7 +635,7 @@ @article{4.11-1, author = {Buss, D. M. and Schmitt, D. P.}, year = {1993}, - title = {Sexual Strategies Theory: {A}n Evolutionary Perspective + title = {Sexual Strategies Theory: An Evolutionary Perspective on Human Mating}, journal = {Psychological Review}, volume = {100}, @@ -631,7 +656,7 @@ @book{4.12-1, author = {Saxe, G. B.}, year = {1991}, - title = {Cultural and Cognitive Development: {S}tudies in + title = {Cultural and Cognitive Development: Studies in Mathematical Understanding}, address = {Hillsdale, NJ}, publisher = {Erlbaum} @@ -668,21 +693,21 @@ } @misc{4.15-1, - key = {{\APACcitebtitle{Electronic Reference Formats}}}, - title = {Electronic Reference Formats Recommended by the - {A}merican {P}sychological {A}ssociation}, - year = {2000}, - month = oct, - day = {12}, - howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from - \url{http://www.apa.org/journals/webref.html}\bibnodot{.}} + key = {{\APACcitebtitle{Electronic Reference Formats}}}, + title = {Electronic Reference Formats Recommended by the + {American} {Psychological} {Association}}, + year = {2000}, + month = oct, + day = {12}, + lastchecked = {October 23, 2000}, + URL = {http://www.apa.org/journals/webref.html} } @article{4.15-2, author = {Eid, M. and Langeheine, R.}, year = {1999}, title = {The Measurement of Consistency and Occasion Specificity - with Latent Class Models: {A} New Model and its + with Latent Class Models: A New Model and its Application to the Measurement of Affect}, journal = {Psychological Methods}, volume = {4}, @@ -690,13 +715,6 @@ howpublished = {Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database} } -@string{comment = { -% -% The rest is from section 4.16. Section number is omitted, -% but A-I are used instead. For the numbered examples, these -% letters are also omitted in favor of ``ex''. -% -}} @article{A-1, author = {Herman, L. M. and Kuczaj, III, S. A. and Holder, M. D.}, @@ -784,7 +802,7 @@ @article{ex7, author = {Brown, L. S.}, year = {1993}, - month = {Spring}, + month = spring, title = {Antidomination Training as a Central Component of Diversity in Clinical Psychology Education}, journal = {The Clinical Psychologist}, @@ -794,7 +812,7 @@ @article{ex8, year = {1993}, - month = {August/September}, + month = aug # "/" # sep, title = {The New Health-Care Lexicon}, journal = {Copy Editor}, volume = {4}, @@ -837,7 +855,7 @@ editor = {Barlow, D. H.}, year = {1991}, title = {Diagnoses, Dimensions, and \emph{DSM-IV}: - {T}he Science of Classification}, + The Science of Classification}, type = {Special issue}, journal = {Journal of Abnormal Psychology}, volume = {100}, @@ -850,14 +868,14 @@ title = {Young Children's Understanding of Pretense}, journal = {Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development}, volume = {58}, - number = {1, Serial No.~231} + number = {1, Serial No.~231}, } @article{ex14, author = {Battig, W. F. and Montague, W. E.}, year = {1969}, title = {Category Norms for Verbal Items in 56 Categories: - {A} Replication and Extension of the {C}onnecticut + A Replication and Extension of the {Connecticut} Category Norms}, journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology Monographs}, volume = {80}, @@ -868,7 +886,7 @@ author = {Ganster, D. C. and Schaubroeck, J. and Sime, W. E. and Mayes, B. T.}, year = {1991}, - title = {The Nomological Validity of the {T}ype~{A} Personality + title = {The Nomological Validity of the {Type}~{A} Personality Among Employed Adults}, type = {Monograph}, journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology}, @@ -882,7 +900,7 @@ year = {1991}, title = {{MAP}-2 Expression in Cholinoceptive Pyramidal Cells of Rodent Cortex and Hippocampus is Altered by - {P}avlovian Conditioning}, + {Pavlovian} Conditioning}, type = {Abstract}, journal = {Society for Neuroscience Abstracts}, volume = {17}, @@ -892,8 +910,8 @@ @article{ex17, author = {Nakazato, K. and Shimonaka, Y. and Homma, A.}, year = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}}, - title = {Cognitive Functions of Centenarians: {T}he {T}okyo - {M}etropolitan {C}entenarian {S}tudy}, + title = {Cognitive Functions of Centenarians: The {Tokyo} + {Metropolitan} {Centenarian} {Study}}, journal = {Japanese Journal of Developmental Psychology}, volume = {3}, pages = {9--16}, @@ -905,7 +923,7 @@ @article{ex18, author = {Regier, A. A. and Narrow, W. E. and Rae, D. S.}, year = {1990}, - title = {The Epidemiology of Anxiety Disorders: {T}he Epidemiologic + title = {The Epidemiology of Anxiety Disorders: The Epidemiologic Catchment Area ({ECA}) Experience}, journal = {Journal of Psychiatric Research}, volume = {24}, @@ -925,11 +943,11 @@ @article{ex20, author = {Ising, M.}, year = {2000}, - title = {Intensit{\"{a}}tsabh{\"{a}}ngigkeit evozierter {P}otenzial im - {EEG}: {S}ind impulsive {P}ersonen {A}ugmenter oder - {R}educer?}, + title = {Intensit{\"{a}}tsabh{\"{a}}ngigkeit evozierter {Potenzial} im + {EEG}: Sind impulsive {Personen} {Augmenter} oder + {Reducer}?}, englishtitle = {Intensity Dependence in Event-Related {EEG} Potentials: - {A}re Impulsive Individuals Augmenters or Reducers?}, + Are Impulsive Individuals Augmenters or Reducers?}, journal = {Zeitschrift f{\"{u}}r Differentielle und Diagnostische Psychologie}, volume = {21}, @@ -949,7 +967,7 @@ @article{ex22, author = {Coltheart, M. and Curtis, B. and Atkins, P. and Haller, M.}, year = {1993}, - title = {Models of Reading Aloud: {D}ual-Route and + title = {Models of Reading Aloud: Dual-Route and Parallel-Distributed-Processing Approaches}, journal = {Psychological Review}, volume = {100}, @@ -959,17 +977,17 @@ @book{B-1, author = {Beck, C. A. J. and Sales, B. D.}, year = {2001}, - title = {Family Mediation: {F}acts, Myths, and Future Prospects}, + title = {Family Mediation: Facts, Myths, and Future Prospects}, address = {Washington, DC}, publisher = {American Psychological Association} } @book{ex23, - author = {Mitchell, T. R. and Larson, Jr., J. R.}, + author = {Mitchell, T. R. and Larson, Jr.\hbox{}, J. R.}, year = {1987}, - title = {People in Organizations: {A}n Introduction to + title = {People in Organizations: An Introduction to Organizational Behavior}, - edition = {3rd}, + edition = {3}, address = {New York}, publisher = {McGraw-Hill} } @@ -978,16 +996,17 @@ author = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}}, year = {1991}, title = {Estimated Resident Population by Age and Sex in - Statistical Local Areas, {N}ew {S}outh {W}ales, {J}une 1990}, + Statistical Local Areas, {New} {South} {Wales}, + {June} 1990}, number = {3209.1}, address = {Canberra, Australian Capital Territory}, - publisher = {Author} + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}} } @book{ex25, editor = {Gibbs, J. T. and Huang, L. N.}, year = {1991}, - title = {Children of Color: {P}sychological Interventions with + title = {Children of Color: Psychological Interventions with Minority Youth}, address = {San Francisco}, publisher = {Jossey-Bass} @@ -1017,8 +1036,8 @@ @book{ex26, year = {1993}, - title = {Merriam-{W}ebster's Collegiate Dictionary}, - edition = {10th}, + title = {Merriam-{Webster}'s Collegiate Dictionary}, + edition = {10}, address = {Springfield, MA}, publisher = {Merriam-Webster} } @@ -1027,7 +1046,7 @@ author = {Rosenthal, R.}, year = {1987}, title = {Meta-Analytic Procedures for Social Research}, - edition = {Rev.{}}, + edition = {Rev.\hbox{}}, address = {Newbury Park, CA}, publisher = {Sage} } @@ -1042,37 +1061,22 @@ } @book{ex29, - firstkey = {{American Psychiatric Association}}, - key = {{\APACcitebtitle{DSM-IV}}}, + key = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric + Association}{Diagnostic and Statistical Manual + of Mental Disorders}{4th ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}}, author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}}, year = {1994}, title = {Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders}, - edition = {4th}, + edition = {4}, address = {Washington, DC}, - publisher = {Author} -} - -@misc{ex29-2, - author = {Americana}, - year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown}, - note = {Test for sorting of American Psychiatric Association - in \BibTeX{} and \MakeIndex{}.} -} - -@misc{ex29-3, - author = {Americans}, - year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown}, - note = {Test for sorting of American Psychiatric Association - in \BibTeX{} and \MakeIndex{}.} + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}} } @book{ex30, editor = {Sadie, S.}, year = {1980}, title = {The New {G}rove Dictionary of Music and Musicians}, - edition = {6th}, + edition = {6}, volume = {1--20}, address = {London}, publisher = {Macmillan} @@ -1120,18 +1124,19 @@ year = {1993}, title = {Guidelines for Reporting and Writing About People with Disabilities}, - edition = {4th}, + edition = {4}, type = {Brochure}, address = {Lawrence, KS}, - publisher = {Author} + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Research and Training Center on + Independent Living}}} } @incollection{B-2, author = {Massaro, D.}, year = {1992}, title = {Broadening the Domain of the Fuzzy Logical Model of Perception}, - editor = {Pick, Jr., H. L. and van den Broek, P. and Knill, D. C.}, - booktitle = {Cognition: {C}onceptual and Methodological Issues}, + editor = {Pick, Jr.\hbox{}, H. L. and van den Broek, P. and Knill, D. C.}, + booktitle = {Cognition: Conceptual and Methodological Issues}, pages = {51--84}, address = {Washington, DC}, publisher = {American Psychological Association} @@ -1152,10 +1157,10 @@ author = {Auerbach, J. S.}, year = {\BIP}, title = {The Origins of Narcissism and Narcissistic Personality - Disorder: {A} Theoretical and Empirical Reformulation}, + Disorder: A Theoretical and Empirical Reformulation}, editor = {Masling, J. M. and Bornstein, R. F.}, booktitle = {Empirical Studies of Psychoanalytic Theories: - {V}ol.~4. {P}sychoanalytic Perspectives on Psychopathology}, + {Vol}.~4. {Psychoanalytic} Perspectives on Psychopathology}, address = {Washington, DC}, publisher = {American Psychological Association} } @@ -1164,12 +1169,12 @@ author = {Maccoby, E. E. and Martin, J.}, year = {1983}, title = {Socialization in the Context of the Family: - {P}arent-Child Interaction}, - editor = {Mussen (Series Ed.), P. H. and - Hetherington{\bibeditortype{Vol.\ Ed.}}, E. M.}, + Parent-Child Interaction}, + editor = {Mussen (Series Ed.\hbox{}), P. H. and + Hetherington{\bibeditortype{Vol.\ Ed.\hbox{}}}, E. M.}, booktitle = {Handbook of Child Psychology: - {V}ol.~4. {S}ocialization, Personality, and Social Development}, - edition = {4th}, + {Vol}.~4. {Socialization}, Personality, and Social Development}, + edition = {4}, pages = {1--101}, address = {New York}, publisher = {Wiley} @@ -1179,9 +1184,9 @@ author = {Davydov, V. V.}, year = {1972}, title = {De Introductie van het Begrip Grootheid in de Eerste - Klas van de Basisschool: {E}en Experimenteel Onderzoek}, + Klas van de Basisschool: Een Experimenteel Onderzoek}, englishtitle = {The Introduction of the Concept of Quantity in the - First Grade of the Primary School: {A}n Experimental Study}, + First Grade of the Primary School: An Experimental Study}, editor = {Van Parreren, C. F. and Carpay, J. A. M.}, booktitle = {Sovjetpsychologen aan het Woord}, pages = {227--289}, @@ -1193,7 +1198,7 @@ author = {Bergmann, P. G.}, year = {1993}, title = {Relativity}, - booktitle = {The New Encyclopaedia {B}ritannica}, + booktitle = {The New Encyclopaedia {Britannica}}, volume = {26}, pages = {501--508}, address = {Chicago}, @@ -1207,7 +1212,7 @@ editor = {Strachey, J.}, translator = {Strachey, J.}, booktitle = {The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological - Works of {S}igmund {F}reud}, + Works of {Sigmund} {Freud}}, volume = {19}, pages = {3--66}, address = {London}, @@ -1218,10 +1223,10 @@ @incollection{ex40, author = {Piaget, J.}, year = {1988}, - title = {Extracts from {P}iaget's Theory}, + title = {Extracts from {Piaget}'s Theory}, translator = {Gellerier, G. and Langer, J.}, editor = {Richardson, K. and Sheldon, S.}, - booktitle = {Cognitive Development to Adolescence: {A} Reader}, + booktitle = {Cognitive Development to Adolescence: A Reader}, pages = {3--18}, address = {Hillsdale, NJ}, publisher = {Erlbaum}, @@ -1233,6 +1238,22 @@ originalpublisher = {Wiley} } +@incollection{ex40-t1, + author = {Browne, M[ichael] W.}, + year = {1977}, + title = {Generalized Least Squares Estimators in the Analysis + of Covariance Structures}, + editor = {Aigner, D[ennis] J. and Goldberger, A[rthur] S.}, + booktitle = {Latent Variables in Socio-Economic Models}, + pages = {205--226}, + address = {Amsterdam}, + publisher = {North Holland}, + originalyear = {1974}, + originaljournal = {South African Statistical Journal}, + originalvolume = {8}, + originalpages = {1--24}, +} + @techreport{C-1, author = {Mazzeo, J. and Druesne, B. and Raffeld, P. C. and Checketts, K. T. and Muhlstein, A.}, @@ -1264,19 +1285,19 @@ type = {\bibnotype}, address = {Lincoln}, institution = {University of Nebraska}, - note = {NTIS No.{} PB~91-154~377/AS} + note = {NTIS No.\hbox{} PB~91-154~377/AS} } @techreport{ex43, author = {Mead, J. V.}, year = {1992}, - title = {Looking at Old Photographs: {I}nvestigating the Teacher + title = {Looking at Old Photographs: Investigating the Teacher Tales that Novice Teachers Bring with Them}, type = {Report}, number = {NCRTL-RR-92-4}, address = {East Lansing, MI}, institution = {National Center for Research on Teacher Learning}, - note = {ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.{} ED346082} + note = {ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.\hbox{} ED346082} } @techreport{ex44, @@ -1285,17 +1306,18 @@ firstkey = {{U.S. Department of Health and Human Services [DHHS]}}, key = {{DHHS}}, year = {1992}, - title = {Pressure Ulcers in Adults: {P}rediction and Prevention}, + title = {Pressure Ulcers in Adults: Prediction and Prevention}, type = {AHCPR Publication}, number = {92-0047}, address = {Rockville, MD}, - institution = {Author} + institution = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and + Human Services}}} } @intechreport{ex45, author = {Matthews, K. A.}, year = {1985}, - title = {Assessment of {T}ype~{A} Behavior, Anger, and Hostility + title = {Assessment of {Type}~{A} Behavior, Anger, and Hostility in Epidemiologic Studies of Cardiovascular Disease}, editor = {Ostfield, A. M. and Eaker, E. D.}, booktitle = {Measuring Psychological Variables in Epidemiologic Studies @@ -1319,8 +1341,8 @@ @techreport{ex47, editor = {Shuker, R. and Openshaw, R. and Soler, J.}, year = {1990}, - title = {Youth, Media, and Moral Panic in {N}ew {Z}ealand: - {F}rom Hooligans to Video Nasties}, + title = {Youth, Media, and Moral Panic in {New} {Zealand}: + From Hooligans to Video Nasties}, type = {Delta Research Monograph}, number = {11}, address = {Palmerston North, New Zealand}, @@ -1338,17 +1360,17 @@ type = {Issue Brief}, number = {123}, address = {Washington, DC}, - institution = {Author} + institution = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}} } @incollection{ex49, author = {Deci, E. L. and Ryan, R. M.}, year = {1991}, title = {A Motivational Approach to Self: - {I}ntegration in Personality}, + Integration in Personality}, editor = {Dienstbier, R.}, - booktitle = {Nebraska {S}ymposium on {M}otivation: {V}ol.~38. - {P}erspectives on Motivation}, + booktitle = {Nebraska {Symposium} on {Motivation}: Vol.~38. + {Perspectives} on Motivation}, pages = {237--288}, address = {Lincoln}, publisher = {University of Nebraska Press} @@ -1373,47 +1395,48 @@ chair = {Rosenthal, T. L.}, symposium = {Reducing Medication in Geriatric Populations}, howpublished = {Symposium conducted at the meeting of the First - International Congress of Behavioral Medicine, - Uppsala, Sweden} + International Congress of Behavioral Medicine}, + address = {Uppsala, Sweden} } @lecture{ex52, author = {Lanktree, C. and Briere, J.}, year = {1991}, month = jan, - title = {Early Data on the {T}rauma {S}ymptom {C}hecklist - for {C}hildren ({TSC-C})}, + title = {Early Data on the {Trauma} {Symptom} {Checklist} + for {Children} ({TSC-C})}, howpublished = {Paper presented at the meeting of the American - Professional Society on the Abuse of Children, - San Diego, CA} + Professional Society on the Abuse of Children}, + address = {San Diego, CA} } @lecture{ex53, author = {Ruby, J. and Fulton, C.}, year = {1993}, month = jun, - title = {Beyond Redlining: {E}diting Software that Works}, + title = {Beyond Redlining: Editing Software that Works}, howpublished = {Poster session presented at the annual meeting of the - Society for Scholarly Publishing, Washington, DC} + Society for Scholarly Publishing}, + address = {Washington, DC} } @phdthesis{ex54, author = {Bower, D. L.}, year = {1993}, title = {Employee Assistant Programs Supervisory Referrals: - {C}haracteristics of Referring and Nonreferring + Characteristics of Referring and Nonreferring Supervisors}, journal = {Dissertation Abstracts International}, volume = {54}, number = {01}, pages = {534B}, - note = {UMI No.{} 9315947} + note = {UMI No.~9315947} } @phdthesis{ex55, author = {Ross, D. F.}, year = {1990}, - title = {Unconscious Transference and Mistaken Identity: {W}hen + title = {Unconscious Transference and Mistaken Identity: When a Witness Misidentifies a Familiar but Innocent Person from a Lineup}, school = {Cornell University}, @@ -1426,7 +1449,7 @@ @phdthesis{ex56, author = {Wilfley, D. E.}, year = {1989}, - title = {Interpersonal Analyses of Bulimia: {N}ormalweight + title = {Interpersonal Analyses of Bulimia: Normalweight and Obese}, school = {University of Missouri}, address = {Columbia} @@ -1435,8 +1458,8 @@ @mastersthesis{ex57, author = {Almeida, D. M.}, year = {1990}, - title = {Fathers' Participation in Family Work: {C}onsequences - for Fathers' Stress and Father-Child Relations}, + title = {Fathers' Participation in Family Work: Consequences + for Fathers' Stress and Father--Child Relations}, school = {University of Victoria}, address = {Victoria, British Columbia, Canada} } @@ -1452,7 +1475,7 @@ @unpublished{ex59, author = {D{\'{e}}pret, E. F. and Fiske, S. T.}, year = {1993}, - title = {Perceiving the Powerful: {I}ntriguing Individuals Versus + title = {Perceiving the Powerful: Intriguing Individuals Versus Threatening Groups}, howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript}, organization = {University of Massachusetts at Amherst} @@ -1476,8 +1499,8 @@ @misc{ex62, editor = {Klombers, N.}, year = {1993}, - month = {Spring}, - title = {{ADAA} {R}eporter}, + month = spring, + title = {{ADAA} {Reporter}}, note = {Available from the Anxiety Disorders Association of America, 6000 Executive Boulevard, Suite 513, Rockville, MD 20852} @@ -1508,7 +1531,7 @@ @article{ex64, author = {Kraus, S. J.}, year = {1992}, - title = {Visions of Psychology: {A} Videotext of Classic Studies}, + title = {Visions of Psychology: A Videotext of Classic Studies}, type = {Review of the motion picture {\APACcitebtitle{Discovering Psychology}}}, journal = {Contemporary Psychology}, @@ -1517,8 +1540,9 @@ } @misc{ex65-1, - author = {Scorsese, M. {\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot} - and Lonergan, K. {\bibliteral{(Writer/Director)}}}, + author = {Scorsese, M. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot} + and Lonergan, K. + {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer/Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, year = {2000}, title = {You Can Count On Me}, type = {Motion picture}, @@ -1527,10 +1551,11 @@ } @misc{ex65-2, - author = {Harrison, J. {\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot} - and Schmiechen, R. {\bibliteral{(Director)}}}, + author = {Harrison, J. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot} + and Schmiechen, R. + {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, year = {1992}, - title = {Changing Our Minds: {T}he Story of {E}velyn {H}ooker}, + title = {Changing Our Minds: The Story of {Evelyn} {Hooker}}, type = {Motion picture}, note = {Available from Changing Our Minds, Inc., 170 West End Avenue, Suite 25R, New York, NY 10023} @@ -1542,25 +1567,26 @@ key = {{APA}}, year = {2000}, title = {Responding Therapeutically to Patient Expressions of - Sexual Attraction: {A} Stimulus Training Tape}, + Sexual Attraction: A Stimulus Training Tape}, type = {Motion picture}, note = {Available from the American Psychological Association, 750 First Street, NE, Washington, DC 20002-4242} } @misc{ex66, - author = {Crystal, L. {\bibliteral{(Executive Producer)}}}, + author = {Crystal, L. {\protect\bibliteral{(Executive + Producer)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, year = {1993}, month = oct, day = {11}, - title = {The {M}ac{N}eil/{L}ehrer News Hour}, + title = {The {MacNeil}/{Lehrer} News Hour}, type = {Television broadcast}, address = {New York and Washington, DC}, publisher = {Public Broadcasting Service} } @misc{ex67, - editor = {Miller, {\bibliteral{R\protect\bibeditortype{Producer}}}}, + editor = {Miller, {\bibinitial{R\bibeditortype{Producer}}}}, year = {1989}, title = {The Mind}, type = {Television series}, @@ -1569,8 +1595,9 @@ } @incollection{ex68, - author = {Hall, B. {\bibliteral{(Writer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot} - and Bender, J. {\bibliteral{(Director)}}}, + author = {Hall, B. {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot} + and Bender, J. + {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, year = {1991}, title = {The Rules of the Game}, type = {Television series episode}, @@ -1605,7 +1632,7 @@ } @misc{ex70, - author = {Costa, Jr. {\bibliteral{(Speaker)}}, P. T.}, + author = {Costa, Jr.\hbox{} {\protect\bibliteral{(Speaker)}}, P. T.}, year = {1988}, title = {Personality, Continuity, and Changes of Adult Life}, type = {Cassette Recording}, @@ -1626,102 +1653,100 @@ } @article{ex71-2, - author = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.}, - year = {2001}, - title = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources - by Psychology Undergraduates}, - journal = {Journal of Bibliographic Research}, - volume = {5}, - pages = {117--123}, - howpublished = {Retrieved October 13, 2001, from - \url{http://jbr.org/articles.html}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.}, + year = {2001}, + title = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources + by Psychology Undergraduates}, + journal = {Journal of Bibliographic Research}, + volume = {5}, + pages = {117--123}, + lastchecked = {October 13, 2001}, + url = {http://jbr.org/articles.html} } @article{ex72, - author = {Fredrickson, B. L.}, - year = {2000}, - month = mar, - day = {7}, - title = {Cultivating Positive Emotions to Optimize Health - and Well-Being}, - journal = {Prevention \& Treatment}, - volume = {3}, - pages = {Article 0001a}, - howpublished = {Retrieved November 20, 2000, from - \url{http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume3/ - pre0030001a.html}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {Fredrickson, B. L.}, + year = {2000}, + month = mar, + day = {7}, + title = {Cultivating Positive Emotions to Optimize Health + and Well-Being}, + journal = {Prevention \& Treatment}, + volume = {3}, + pages = {Article 0001a}, + lastchecked = {November 20, 2000}, + url = {http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume3/pre0030001a.html} } @article{ex73, - author = {Crow, T. J.}, - year = {2000}, - title = {Did \emph{Homo} {\emph{Sapiens}} Speciate on the - {\emph{Y}} Chromosome?}, - journal = {Psycoloquy}, - volume = {11}, - howpublished = {Retrieved March 25, 2001, from - \url{ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/2000.volume.11/ - psyc.00.11.001.language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {Crow, T. J.}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Did \emph{Homo} {\emph{Sapiens}} Speciate on the + {\emph{Y}} Chromosome?}, + journal = {Psycoloquy}, + volume = {11}, + lastchecked = {March 25, 2001}, + url = {ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/ + 2000.volume.11/psyc.00.11.001. + language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow} } @article{ex74, - author = {Glueckauf, R. L. and Whitton, J. and Baxter, J. and Kain, J. - and Vogelgesang, S. and Hudson, M. and others}, - year = {1998}, - month = jul, - title = {Videocounseling for Families of Rural Teens with - Epilepsy---{P}roject Update}, - journal = {Telehealth News}, - volume = {2}, - number = {2}, - howpublished = {Retrieved June 6, 2000, from - \url{http://www.telehealth.net/subscribe/newslettr_4a.html#1}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {Glueckauf, R. L. and Whitton, J. and Baxter, J. and Kain, J. + and Vogelgesang, S. and Hudson, M. and others}, + year = {1998}, + month = jul, + title = {Videocounseling for Families of Rural Teens with + Epilepsy---{P}roject Update}, + journal = {Telehealth News}, + volume = {2}, + number = {2}, + lastchecked = {June 6, 2000}, + url = {http://www.telehealth.net/subscribe/newslettr_4a.html#1} } @misc{ex75, - author = {{\bibcorporate{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy - Community 2000, - Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues}}}, - firstkey = {{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy Community 2000, - Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues [TFTAI]}}, - key = {{TFTAI}}, - year = {\bibnodate}, - title = {Who Has Time for a Family Meal? {Y}ou Do!}, - howpublished = {Retrieved October 5, 2000, from - \url{http://www.familymealtime.org}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {{\bibcorporate{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy + Community 2000, + Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues}}}, + firstkey = {{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy Community 2000, + Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues [TFTAI]}}, + key = {{TFTAI}}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + title = {Who Has Time for a Family Meal? {You} Do!}, + lastchecked = {October 5, 2000}, + url = {http://www.familymealtime.org} } @incollection{ex76, - author = {{\bibcorporate{Benton Foundation}}}, - year = {1998}, - month = jul, - day = {7}, - title = {Barriers to Closing the Gap}, - booktitle = {Losing Ground Bit by Bit: {L}ow-Income Communities in the - Information Age}, - chapter = {2}, - howpublished = {Retrieved August 18, 2001, from - \url{http://www.benton.org/Library/Low-Income/ - two.html}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {{\bibcorporate{Benton Foundation}}}, + year = {1998}, + month = jul, + day = {7}, + title = {Barriers to Closing the Gap}, + booktitle = {Losing Ground Bit by Bit: Low-Income Communities in the + Information Age}, + chapter = {2}, + lastchecked = {August 18, 2001}, + url = {http://www.benton.org/Library/Low-Income/two.html}, } @misc{ex77, - year = {\bibnodate}, - title = {{GVU}'s 8th {WWW} User Survey}, - howpublished = {Retrieved August 8, 2000, from - \url{http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/ - survey-1997-10/}\bibnodot{.}} + year = {\bibnodate}, + title = {{GVU}'s 8th {WWW} User Survey}, + lastchecked = {August 8, 2000}, + url = {http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/survey-1997-10/} } @misc{ex78, author = {Chou, L. and McClintock, R. and Moretti, F. and Nix, D. H.}, year = {1993}, - title = {Technology and Education: {N}ew Wine in New Bottles: - {C}hoosing Pasts and Imagining Educational Futures}, + title = {Technology and Education: New Wine in New Bottles: + Choosing Pasts and Imagining Educational Futures}, howpublished = {Retrieved August 24, 2000, from Columbia University, Institute for Learning Technologies Web site: - \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/publications/papers/ - newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}} + \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/ + publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}} } @misc{ex79, @@ -1739,26 +1764,26 @@ } @misc{ex80, - author = {{\bibcorporate{United States Sentencing Commission}}}, - firstkey = {{United States Sentencing Commission [USSC]}}, - key = {{USSC}}, - year = {\bibnodate}, - title = {{\APACSortNoop{Nineteen Ninety-Seven}}1997 Sourcebook of - Federal Sentencing Statistics}, - howpublished = {Retrieved December 8, 1999, from - \url{http://www.ussc.gov/annrpt/1997/sbtoc97.htm}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {{\bibcorporate{United States Sentencing Commission}}}, + firstkey = {{United States Sentencing Commission [USSC]}}, + key = {{USSC}}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + title = {{\APACSortNoop{Nineteen Ninety-Seven}}1997 Sourcebook of + Federal Sentencing Statistics}, + lastchecked = {December 8, 1999}, + url = {http://www.ussc.gov/annrpt/1997/sbtoc97.htm} } @misc{ex81, - author = {{\bibcorporate{Canarie, Inc.}}}, - year = {1997}, - month = sep, - day = {27}, - title = {Towards a {C}anadian Health {IWAY}: {V}ision, Opportunities - and Future Steps}, - howpublished = {Retrieved November 8, 2000, from - \url{http://www.canarie.ca/press/publications/pdf/health/ - healthvision.doc}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {{\bibcorporate{Canarie, Inc.}}}, + year = {1997}, + month = sep, + day = {27}, + title = {Towards a {Canadian} Health {IWAY}: Vision, Opportunities + and Future Steps}, + lastchecked = {November 8, 2000}, + url = {http://www.canarie.ca/press/publications/pdf/ + health/healthvision.doc} } @techreport{ex82, @@ -1766,10 +1791,9 @@ year = {1995}, title = {Extensions to the Delta Rule of Associative Learning}, type = {Indiana University Cognitive Science Research Report}, - number = {14}, - howpublished = {Abstract retrieved October 21, 2000, from - \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~kruschke/ - deltarule_abstract.html}\bibnodot{.}} + number = {14\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}, + lastchecked = {October 21, 2000}, + url = {http://www.indiana.edu/~kruschke/deltarule_abstract.html}, } @lecture{ex83, @@ -1780,19 +1804,19 @@ title = {Two-Handed Direct Manipulation on the Responsive Workbench}, howpublished = {Paper presented at the 1997 Symposium on Interactive 3D - Graphics. Abstract retrieved June 12, 2000, from - \url{http://www.graphics.stanford.edu/papers/ - twohanded/}\bibnodot{.}} + Graphics\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}, + lastchecked = {June 12, 2000}, + url = {http://www.graphics.stanford.edu/papers/twohanded/}, } @lecture{ex84, author = {Tan, G. and Lewandowsky, S.}, year = {1996}, title = {A Comparison of Operator Trust in Humans Versus Machines}, - howpublished = {Paper presented at the CybErg 96 virtual conference. - Retrieved May 16, 2000, from - \url{http://www.curtin.edu.au/conference/cyberg/centre/ - outline.cgi/frame?dir=tan}\bibnodot{.}} + howpublished = {Paper presented at the CybErg 96 virtual conference}, + lastchecked = {May 16, 2000}, + url = {http://www.curtin.edu.au/conference/cyberg/ + centre/outline.cgi/frame?dir=tan}, } @misc{ex85, @@ -1803,8 +1827,7 @@ title = {Seeing with Sound}, type = {\bibmessage}, number = {1}, - howpublished = {Message posted to - \url{news://sci.psychology.consciousness}\bibnodot{.}} + url = {news://sci.psychology.consciousness} } @misc{ex86, @@ -1815,9 +1838,7 @@ title = {News Resources for Visual Cognition}, type = {\bibmessage}, number = {31}, - howpublished = {Message posted to - \url{http://groups.yahoo.com/group/visualcognition/message/ - 31}\bibnodot{.}} + url = {http://groups.yahoo.com/group/visualcognition/message/31} } @misc{ex87, @@ -1825,12 +1846,11 @@ year = {2000}, month = nov, day = {20}, - title = {{YAHC}: {H}andle {P}arameters, {DOI} {G}enres, etc.}, + title = {{YAHC}: {Handle} {Parameters}, {DOI} {Genres}, etc.}, type = {\bibmessage}, howpublished = {Message posted to Ref-Links electronic mailing list, - archived at - \url{http://www.doi.org/mail-archive/ref-link/ - msg00088.html}\bibnodot{.}} + archived at \url{http://www.doi.org/mail-archive/ + ref-link/msg00088.html}\bibnodot{.}} } @article{ex88, @@ -1841,24 +1861,24 @@ journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology}, volume = {78}, pages = {443--449}, - howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from PsycARTICLES database} + howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database} } @newspaper{ex89, - author = {Hilts, P. J.}, - year = {1999}, - month = feb, - day = {16}, - title = {In Forecasting Their Emotions, Most People Flunk Out}, - journal = {New York Times}, - howpublished = {Retrieved November 21, 2000, from - \url{http://www.nytimes.com}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {Hilts, P. J.}, + year = {1999}, + month = feb, + day = {16}, + title = {In Forecasting Their Emotions, Most People Flunk Out}, + journal = {New York Times}, + lastchecked = {November 21, 2000}, + url = {http://www.nytimes.com} } @article{ex90, author = {Fournier, M. and {\lowercase{D}}e Ridder, D. and Bensing, J.}, year = {1999}, - title = {Optimism and Adaptation to Multiple Sclerosis: {W}hat Does + title = {Optimism and Adaptation to Multiple Sclerosis: What Does Optimism Mean?}, journal = {Journal of Behavioral Medicine}, volume = {22}, @@ -1870,39 +1890,48 @@ author = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. General Accounting Office}}}, year = {1997}, month = feb, - title = {Telemedicine: {F}ederal Strategy is Needed to Guide Investments}, + title = {Telemedicine: Federal Strategy is Needed to Guide Investments}, type = {Publication}, number = {GAO/NSAID/HEHS-97-67}, howpublished = {Retrieved September 15, 2000, from General Accounting Office Reports Online via GPO Access: - \url{http://www.access.gpo.gov/su_docs/aces/aces160.shtml?/ - gao/index.html}\bibnodot{.}} + \url{http://www.access.gpo.gov/su_docs/aces/ + aces160.shtml?/gao/index.html}\bibnodot{.}} } @misc{ex92, author = {Miller, M. E.}, year = {1993}, - title = {The {I}nteractive {T}ester ({V}ersion~4.0)}, + title = {The {Interactive} {Tester}}, + edition = {Version~4.0\noedition\ignorespaces}, type = {\bibcomputersoftware}, address = {Westminster, CA}, publisher = {Psytek Services} } @misc{ex93, - author = {Schwarzer, R.}, - year = {1989}, - title = {Statistics Software for Meta-Analysis}, - type = {\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}, - howpublished = {Retrieved from - \url{http://www.yorku.ca/faculty/academic/schwarze/ - meta_e.htm}\bibnodot{.}} + author = {Schwarzer, R.}, + year = {1989}, + title = {Statistics Software for Meta-Analysis}, + type = {\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}, + lastchecked = {March 23, 2001}, + url = {http://www.yorku.ca/faculty/academic/schwarze/meta_e.htm} +} + +@manual{ex93-t1, + author = {{\bibcorporate{R Development Core Team}}}, + year = {2004}, + title = {R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing}, + address = {Vienna, Austria}, + publisher = {R Foundation for Statistical Computing}, + url = {http://www.r-project.org} } @misc{ex94, key = {{\APACcitebtitle{National Health Interview Survey}}}, - title = {National {H}ealth {I}nterview {S}urvey---{C}urrent Health - Topics: 1991---{L}ongitudinal Study of Aging - {\upshape(\uppercase{V}ersion~4)}}, + title = {National {Health} {Interview} {Survey}---{Current} Health + Topics: 1991---{Longitudinal} Study of Aging}, + edition = {Version~4\noedition\ignorespaces}, type = {Data file}, year = {\bibnodate}, address = {Hyattsville, MD}, @@ -1916,7 +1945,7 @@ National Center for Health Statistics [DHHS-NCHS]}}, key = {{DHHS-NCHS}}, year = {1991}, - title = {National {H}ealth {P}rovider {I}nventory: {H}ome Health + title = {National {Health} {Provider} {Inventory}: Home Health Agencies and Hospices, 1991}, type = {Data file}, howpublished = {Available from National Technical Information Service @@ -1924,23 +1953,17 @@ } -@string{comment = { -% -% Additional references. -% -}} - @book{APAManual3, author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}}, firstkey = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}}, key = {{APA}}, year = {1984}, - title = {Publication Manual of the {A}merican {P}sychological - {A}ssociation}, - edition = {3rd}, + title = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological} + {Association}}, + edition = {3}, address = {Washington, DC}, - publisher = {Author}, - note = {with revisions} + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}}, + note = {with revisions}, } @book{APAManual, @@ -1948,40 +1971,47 @@ firstkey = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}}, key = {{APA}}, year = {2001}, - title = {Publication Manual of the {A}merican {P}sychological - {A}ssociation}, - edition = {5th}, + title = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological} + {Association}}, + edition = {5}, address = {Washington, DC}, - publisher = {Author} + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}}, } -@book{TeXbook, - author = {Knuth, Donald E.}, - year = {1986}, - title = {The {\APACSortNoop{TeX}}{\TeX}book}, - address = {Reading, MA}, - publisher = {Addison Wesley}, - note = {Reprinted with corrections September, 1993. Therefore, - the year should officially be 1986/1993 I guess, but - the corrections are presumably very minor.} +@book{chicago, + title = {The {Chicago} Manual of Style}, + edition = {15}, + year = {2003}, + address = {Chicago}, + publisher = {The University of Chicago Press}, } @book{LaTeXbook, author = {Lamport, Leslie}, year = {1994}, - title = {{\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}: {A} Document Preparation System. - {U}ser's Guide and Reference Manual}, - edition = {2nd}, + title = {{\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}: A Document Preparation System. + {User}'s Guide and Reference Manual}, + edition = {2}, address = {Reading, MA}, - publisher = {Addison-Wesley} + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, } -@book{LaTeXcomp, - author = {Goossens, Michel and Mittelbach, Frank and Samarin, Alexander}, - year = {1994}, +@book{KoDa04, + author = {Kopka, Helmut and Daly, Patrick W.}, + year = {2004}, + title = {Guide To {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}}, + edition = {4}, + address = {Boston, MA}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, +} + +@book{TLC2, + author = {Mittelbach, Frank and Goossens, Michel}, + year = {2004}, title = {The {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX} Companion}, - address = {Reading, MA}, - publisher = {Addison-Wesley} + edition = {2}, + address = {Boston, MA}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, } @book{meijer1998, @@ -1989,7 +2019,7 @@ year = {1998}, title = {Structural Equation Models for Nonnormal Data}, address = {Leiden, The Netherlands}, - publisher = {DSWO Press} + publisher = {DSWO Press}, } @book{WaMe00, @@ -1997,7 +2027,7 @@ year = {2000}, title = {Measurement Error and Latent Variables in Econometrics}, address = {Amsterdam}, - publisher = {North-Holland} + publisher = {North-Holland}, } @unpublished{APA-3rd-ed-ex53, @@ -2008,6 +2038,9 @@ howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript}, organization = {Johns Hopkins University, Center for Social Organization of Schools}, - address = {Baltimore} + address = {Baltimore}, } +%% +%% +%% End of file `apa5ex.bib'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacite.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacite.bst index 0097506a45e..8b416318614 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacite.bst +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacite.bst @@ -1,33 +1,60 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% This is file `apacite.bst'. -% -% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed -% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the `apacite' package. -% ------------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a -% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'. -% -% \fi +%% +%% This is file `apacite.bst', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `bibstyle') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +%% apacite.bst +%% [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style] + %% apacite.bst : reference list according to APA manual -%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl> -%% This version: [2005/06/08] +%% Written by Erik Meijer + +FUNCTION {identify.apacite.version} +{ % Put identifying string in the .blg file + "apacite.bst" + " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style]" + * top$ +} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% DECLARATION OF FIELDS, INTEGERS, AND STRINGS FOR EACH % -% ENTRY % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% ENTRY @@ -47,6 +74,7 @@ ENTRY journal key % key for second and later citations, or all % citations if firstkey is missing + lastchecked % for URL's month note number % number of journal or report @@ -78,6 +106,7 @@ ENTRY type % type of phdthesis (e.g., Doctoral dissertation) % or type of article (e.g., Letter to the editor) % etc. + url volume year } @@ -96,16 +125,17 @@ ENTRY % should be cited and whether a, b, etc. % after year is necessary title.sort.label % for sorting titles + type.2 % Replacement for type with misc entries and + % entries that revert to misc. } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% DECLARATION OF GLOBAL INTEGERS AND STRINGS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INTEGERS { len pos name.max old.number numnames numnames.old nameptr lastname format.num.names cite.initials.old cite.num.names.old add.to.year.old forward - multiresult dot + multiresult dot brace.level } STRINGS { s t u old.label field @@ -119,66 +149,53 @@ STRINGS { s t u old.label field } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% A small function for testing purposes. FUNCTION {test} { #0 } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% A small function (ideally replaced by a user-definable -% MACRO) that indicates whether index entries must be -% generated. FUNCTION {make.index} { #0 } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% MONTH MACROS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -MACRO {jan} {"{\APACSortNoop{01}}January"} -MACRO {feb} {"{\APACSortNoop{02}}February"} +MACRO {jan} {"{\APACmonth{01}}"} + +MACRO {feb} {"{\APACmonth{02}}"} + +MACRO {mar} {"{\APACmonth{03}}"} + +MACRO {apr} {"{\APACmonth{04}}"} + +MACRO {may} {"{\APACmonth{05}}"} + +MACRO {jun} {"{\APACmonth{06}}"} -MACRO {mar} {"{\APACSortNoop{03}}March"} +MACRO {jul} {"{\APACmonth{07}}"} -MACRO {apr} {"{\APACSortNoop{04}}April"} +MACRO {aug} {"{\APACmonth{08}}"} -MACRO {may} {"{\APACSortNoop{05}}May"} +MACRO {sep} {"{\APACmonth{09}}"} -MACRO {jun} {"{\APACSortNoop{06}}June"} +MACRO {oct} {"{\APACmonth{10}}"} -MACRO {jul} {"{\APACSortNoop{07}}July"} +MACRO {nov} {"{\APACmonth{11}}"} -MACRO {aug} {"{\APACSortNoop{08}}August"} +MACRO {dec} {"{\APACmonth{12}}"} -MACRO {sep} {"{\APACSortNoop{09}}September"} +MACRO {winter} {"{\APACmonth{13}}"} -MACRO {oct} {"{\APACSortNoop{10}}October"} +MACRO {spring} {"{\APACmonth{14}}"} -MACRO {nov} {"{\APACSortNoop{11}}November"} +MACRO {summer} {"{\APACmonth{15}}"} -MACRO {dec} {"{\APACSortNoop{12}}December"} +MACRO {fall} {"{\APACmonth{16}}"} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% LOGICAL `NOT', `AND', AND `OR' % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Logical 'not': -% If the first element on the stack is A then this function -% does the following: -% push { #0 } -% push { #1 } -% So now the first 3 elements of the stack are -% { #1 } { #0 } A -% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if': -% If A > 0 then { #0 } is executed, else { #1 } is executed: -% if A > 0 -% then 0 -% else 1 -% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false, -% then this does -% (if A then false else true) -% which is a logical 'not'. FUNCTION {not} { { #0 } @@ -187,23 +204,6 @@ FUNCTION {not} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Logical 'and': -% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B -% then this function does the following: -% push 'skip$ -% push { pop$ #0 } -% So now first 4 elements are -% { pop$ #0 } 'skip$ A B -% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of -% the stack): -% If A > 0 then 'skip$ is executed, else { pop$ #0 } is executed: -% if A > 0 -% then (B stays on top of stack) -% else (B is popped and #0 is pushed) -% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false, -% then this does -% (if A then B else false) -% which is a logical 'and'. FUNCTION {and} { 'skip$ @@ -212,23 +212,6 @@ FUNCTION {and} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Logical 'or': -% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B -% then this function does the following: -% push { pop$ #1 } -% push 'skip$ -% So now first 4 elements are -% 'skip$ { pop$ #1 } A B -% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of -% the stack): -% If A > 0 then { pop$ #1 } is executed, else 'skip$ is executed: -% if A > 0 -% then (B is popped and #1 is pushed) -% else (B stays on top of stack) -% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false, -% then this does -% (if A then true else B) -% which is a logical 'or'. FUNCTION {or} { { pop$ #1 } @@ -236,9 +219,7 @@ FUNCTION {or} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR FORMATTING % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -255,27 +236,19 @@ FUNCTION {warning.if.empty} if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % issues warning if title, type, and howpublished are empty % FUNCTION {check.relevant.fields} -{ title empty$ - type empty$ - howpublished empty$ - and - and +{ title empty$ + type empty$ and + howpublished empty$ and { "No title, type, and howpublished in " cite$ * warning$ } 'skip$ if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % delivers 1 if (both editor and translator @@ -299,7 +272,6 @@ FUNCTION {editor.ne.trans} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Convert integer to string, assume that integer < 100,000 FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str} { duplicate$ #10 < @@ -320,12 +292,7 @@ FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Delivers 1 if possibly editor in author position -% 2 if editor not in author position -% 3 if not applicable: use key -% 0 if unknown type FUNCTION {ref.type} { type$ "article" = @@ -354,7 +321,9 @@ FUNCTION {ref.type} type$ "lecture" = type$ "inbook" = type$ "inproceedings" = - type$ "intechreport" = + type$ "conference" = + type$ "intechreport" = + or or or or @@ -373,17 +342,19 @@ FUNCTION {ref.type} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Delivers 1 if title is formatted as an "article"-type, -% 0 otherwise FUNCTION {is.atype} -{ type$ "article" = - type$ "magazine" = - type$ "newspaper" = +{ type$ "article" = + type$ "magazine" = + type$ "newspaper" = type$ "incollection" = type$ "inbook" = type$ "inproceedings" = - type$ "intechreport" = + type$ "conference" = + type$ "intechreport" = + type$ "manual" = + or + or or or or @@ -400,8 +371,7 @@ FUNCTION {is.atype} and { #1 } { type$ "misc" = - type empty$ not - and + type empty$ not and { type "\bibmessage" = type "\bibcomputerprogram" = type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" = @@ -484,21 +454,18 @@ FUNCTION {connect.check} if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % connects two strings with space ("\ ") - % if length of second is 3 or larger, + % if length of second is 4 or larger, % connects them with non-breaking space ("tie", "~") - % if length of second smaller than 3 + % if length of second smaller than 4 % % call with S1 S2 tie.or.space.connect % result: "S1\ S2" or "S1~S2" % FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #4 < { "~" } { "\ " } if$ @@ -538,7 +505,6 @@ FUNCTION {connect.with.semicolon.check} FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check} { ": " connect.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % connects two strings with space ("\ ") @@ -549,8 +515,6 @@ FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check} FUNCTION {connect.with.space.check} { "\ " connect.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % encloses string in pre- and postfix string @@ -579,7 +543,6 @@ FUNCTION {emphasize.check} enclose.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % brackets top of stack @@ -642,14 +605,20 @@ FUNCTION {multi.result.check} multiresult } +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % Checks whether an author is a corporate author, i.e., + % whether the field starts with "{\bibcorporate". + % Call with + % field is.bibcorporate + % +FUNCTION {is.bibcorporate} +{ #1 #14 substring$ "{\bibcorporate" = } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Remove non-alphanumeric characters -% and change to lower case . FUNCTION {sortify} { purify$ @@ -657,14 +626,6 @@ FUNCTION {sortify} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Remove spaces from a string. Used for sorting. -% -% Call with -% string remove.spaces -% -% E.g., -% "fine old day" remove.spaces -% gives "fineoldday" . FUNCTION {remove.spaces} { % Remove spaces from string. @@ -696,10 +657,8 @@ FUNCTION {remove.spaces} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% BASIC OUTPUT FUNCTIONS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack, @@ -711,7 +670,6 @@ FUNCTION {output.end.block} newline$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack, @@ -720,10 +678,10 @@ FUNCTION {output.end.block} % FUNCTION {output.new.block} { output.end.block - "\newblock{}" write$ + "\newblock" write$ + newline$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack, @@ -736,13 +694,11 @@ FUNCTION {output.dot.new.block} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Starting new block assuming that stack is empty. -% Starting a new line and adding some extra space or -% whatever is more defined in \newblock FUNCTION {start.new.block} { newline$ - "\newblock{}" write$ + "\unskip\ " write$ newline$ + "\newblock " write$ newline$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -752,6 +708,7 @@ FUNCTION {start.new.block} % FUNCTION {fin.entry} { output.end.block + "\PrintBackRefs{\CurrentBib}" write$ newline$ test { "\vspace{\baselineskip}" write$ newline$ } 'skip$ @@ -759,27 +716,21 @@ FUNCTION {fin.entry} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING BY AUTHOR (OR SUBSTITUTE), YEAR, % -% TITLE % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%MACRO {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{ f{}}{ vv{}}{ jj{}}" } - FUNCTION {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{ f{}}{ vv{}}{ jj{}}" } FUNCTION {cite.name.format} { "{ll}" } -FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f. }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } +FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } -FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f.}{ vv}{, jj}" } +FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" } -FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f.~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } +FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } -FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f.}{ vv}{, jj}" } +FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (1). -% Initialization. FUNCTION {init.initials} { "yyyyy" 'aut1f.old := @@ -788,11 +739,6 @@ FUNCTION {init.initials} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (2). -% Update when author, editor, and key fields are not used. -% -% Call with -% field update.no.initials FUNCTION {update.no.initials} { 'field := @@ -802,7 +748,6 @@ FUNCTION {update.no.initials} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (3). FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut} { % @@ -832,9 +777,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (4). -% Call with -% field check.add.initials.field FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field} { 'field := @@ -847,7 +789,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (4). FUNCTION {check.add.initials} { % @@ -907,9 +848,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (1). -% Call with -% field tentative.cite.num.names.field FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field} { 'field := @@ -938,7 +876,6 @@ FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (2). FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names} { % @@ -997,8 +934,6 @@ FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Initialize "number of names to be cited" before -% looping over entries. FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names} { #0 'cite.num.names.old := @@ -1014,7 +949,6 @@ FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Update "number of names to be cited" . FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names} { cite.num.names.short 'cite.num.names.old := @@ -1030,10 +964,6 @@ FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format (maximally) 6 authors for comparison issues -% to determine number of authors that must be cited. -% It is assumed that the 'field' and 'numnames' variables -% have already been defined. FUNCTION {format.6.authors} { % @@ -1125,9 +1055,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.6.authors} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited -% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1). -% a's or b's are necessary: update add.to.year variable FUNCTION {change.add.to.year} { @@ -1151,12 +1078,6 @@ FUNCTION {change.add.to.year} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited -% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1). -% Current and/or previous entry has 1 or 2 authors -% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the -% same year. The number of authors does not need to be changed -% in this case, but a's or b's may be necessary. FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2} { % @@ -1203,13 +1124,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited -% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (2). -% Both current and previous entries have 3 or more authors -% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the -% same year. FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more} { % @@ -1475,18 +1390,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited -% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (3). -% Current entry has an author or editor acting as author. -% -% Call with -% field definitive.cite.num.names.field -% -% What should we do with explicit "others"? Is now ignored. -% If this causes ambiguity that could be resolved, the user -% should have added additional author names. FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field} { 'field := @@ -1557,16 +1461,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field} update.cite.num.names } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (4) -% and especially whether a's and b's should be added. -% This function is for the situation when author or editor -% are not used and firstkey, key, or something else is -% used to cite the referenced work. -% -% Call with -% formatted.field definitive.cite.no.names FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names} { % @@ -1600,7 +1495,6 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (5). FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names} { % @@ -1647,7 +1541,6 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make a tentative year sorting label (without `a' and `b'). FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label} { % @@ -1679,71 +1572,11 @@ FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Give month (converted to number) and day when available. FUNCTION {month.number.day} { month empty$ { "" } - { % -% month jan = -% { "01" } -% { month feb = -% { "02" } -% { month mar = -% { "03" } -% { month apr = -% { "04" } -% { month may = -% { "05" } -% { month jun = -% { "06" } -% { month jul = -% { "07" } -% { month aug = -% { "08" } -% { month sep = -% { "09" } -% { month oct = -% { "10" } -% { month nov = -% { "11" } -% { month dec = -% { "12" } -% { % - % Month is something - % else, e.g., "Spring" - % or jul # "/" # aug. - % Currently too - % difficult to figure - % out: user should - % trick the system. - % - month sortify - remove.spaces -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ + { month sortify remove.spaces % % Add the day when available. day empty$ @@ -1757,12 +1590,6 @@ FUNCTION {month.number.day} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make tentative sort label with names in field on top of -% the stack. -% -% Call with -% field make.name.sort.label -% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role. FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label} { % @@ -1873,17 +1700,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label} 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative -% sort label if key or firstkey is available or author and -% editor are empty or unusable. -% -% Call with -% field make.field.year.sort.label -% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role, -% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the -% beginning. FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label} { % @@ -1921,11 +1738,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label} 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative -% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and -% author or editor may be used FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label} { author empty$ @@ -1943,9 +1756,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative -% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and -% author (but not editor) may be used FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label} { author empty$ @@ -1958,10 +1768,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make tentative label for citing and sorting and do some -% preprocessing. FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label} { % @@ -2066,15 +1873,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label} author.year.sort.label 'sort.key$ := } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make final sort label with names in field on top of -% the stack. -% -% Call with -% field make.definitive.name.sort.label -% -% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role. FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label} { % @@ -2097,7 +1896,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label} { name.max 'format.num.names := } { numnames 'format.num.names := } if$ - % Initialize stack with empty stringh + % Initialize stack with empty string "" % % Cycle over authors. @@ -2126,16 +1925,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label} 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called to make definitive sort label if author and -% editor are empty or unusable. -% -% Call with -% field make.definitive.field.year.sort.label -% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role, -% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the -% beginning. FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label} { % @@ -2168,10 +1958,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label} 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.final.sort.key if author or editor -% may be used. FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label} { author empty$ @@ -2189,8 +1976,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.final.sort.key if author but not editor -% may be used. FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label} { author empty$ @@ -2203,11 +1988,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label} if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make final sort key . FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key} { % @@ -2260,24 +2041,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key} author.year.sort.label 'sort.key$ := } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% FUNCTIONS THAT ALLOW SORTING BY TITLE % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Remove first N characters of string if they are equal to -% teststring . -% -% Call with -% teststring N string chop.word -% -% E.g., -% "A " #2 "A fine old day" chop.word -% gives "fine old day" -% and -% "A " #2 "The fine old day" chop.word -% gives "The fine old day". FUNCTION {chop.word} { 's := @@ -2289,10 +2056,6 @@ FUNCTION {chop.word} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from beginning of string. -% -% Call with -% string chop.articles FUNCTION {chop.articles} { 's := @@ -2306,12 +2069,6 @@ FUNCTION {chop.articles} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format title and other non-name/date entries for sort key. -% -% Call with -% field format.sort.title -% -% Make sure that field is not empty, this is not checked here! FUNCTION {format.sort.title} { % @@ -2323,7 +2080,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.sort.title} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make title sorting label or substitute. FUNCTION {make.sort.title} { title empty$ @@ -2331,9 +2087,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.sort.title} { type empty$ { howpublished empty$ { note empty$ - { "no title, type, howpublished, or note in " cite$ * - warning$ - " " + { url empty$ + { " " } + { url format.sort.title } + if$ } { note format.sort.title } if$ @@ -2355,7 +2112,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.sort.title} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make title number: rank number of sorted title . FUNCTION {make.title.number} { title.sort.label old.label = @@ -2373,11 +2129,235 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.number} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% CITATION LABELS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +FUNCTION {last.part.name.format} { "{ll}" } + +FUNCTION {initials.with.space.name.format} { "{f.}" } + +FUNCTION {von.last.junior.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } + +FUNCTION {von.junior.name.format} { "{ vv}{, jj}" } + +FUNCTION {one.complete.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +FUNCTION {string.length} +{ #0 'pos := + % If the next character exists, i.e., is not empty, + % add 1 to the string length. + % We cannot use empty$ because " " empty$ is true. + { duplicate$ pos #1 + #1 substring$ "" = not } + { pos #1 + 'pos := } + while$ + pop$ pos +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +FUNCTION {transform.spaces.and.hyphens} +{ 's := % The original string + s string.length 'len := % Its length (no. of characters) + "" 't := % Initialize the transformed string + #1 'pos := + #0 'brace.level := + % + % while (pos < len) do + % + { pos len < } + { % First, check whether we are at brace level 0 + brace.level #0 = + { + % At least two characters left: check for ". ", ".~", and ".-". + % If so, replace and shift two positions. + s pos #2 substring$ ". " = + s pos #2 substring$ ".~" = or + { t "\BPBI " * 't := + pos #2 + 'pos := + } + { s pos #2 substring$ ".-" = + { t "\BHBI " * 't := + pos #2 + 'pos := + } + { % neither is true, copy one character and shift one position + t s pos #1 substring$ * 't := + % Check whether we need to increase brace level. + % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture + % \{, \verb+}+, etc. + % Note also that unbalanced braces cause problems. + s pos #1 substring$ "{" = + { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := } + 'skip$ + if$ + pos #1 + 'pos := + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { % Not at brace level 0: copy result literally + t s pos #1 substring$ * 't := + % Check whether we need to increase or decrease brace level. + % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture + % \{, \verb+}+, etc. + s pos #1 substring$ "{" = + { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := } + { s pos #1 substring$ "}" = + { brace.level #1 - 'brace.level := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pos #1 + 'pos := + } + if$ + } + while$ + % + pos len = + { % Last character, copy + t s pos #1 substring$ * 't := + } + { % pos = len + 1, so s ends with ". " or ".-" + % This should not have happened, but make the best out of it. + % Push last two characters of s on the stack, i.e., ". " or ".-". + s len #1 - #2 substring$ + % Remove "\BPBI " or "\BHBI " from t + t text.length$ 'len := % Length of t (no. of characters) + t #1 len #6 - substring$ + % Concatenate and assign to t + swap$ * 't := + } + if$ + % + % Now push the result back on the stack + t +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +FUNCTION {format.initials.with.hyphen} +{ % Format initials. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.initials.with.hyphen + % e.g. + % author #1 format.initials.with.hyphen + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + % First, format initials in the default way, retaining spaces + % and hyphens. + initials.with.space.name.format format.name$ + transform.spaces.and.hyphens +} + +FUNCTION {format.last.part.name} +{ % Format a name with last.part.name.format, + % as part of more complicated things. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.last.part.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.last.part.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + last.part.name.format format.name$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.von.last.junior.name} +{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format, + % for citing or as part of more complicated things. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.von.last.junior.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.von.last.junior.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + von.last.junior.name.format format.name$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.von.junior.name} +{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format, + % for citing or as part of more complicated things. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.von.junior.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.von.junior.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + von.junior.name.format format.name$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.cite.initials.name} +{ % Format a name for citing with initials. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.cite.initials.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.cite.initials.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form, + % and push on the stack. + one.complete.name.format format.name$ + % + % Format the initials and push on the stack. + duplicate$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen + % + % Format the von-last-junior part and push on the stack. + swap$ #1 format.von.last.junior.name + % + % Connect with "~" hyphen (if they're both non-empty). + "~" connect.check +} + +FUNCTION {format.author.name} +{ % Format an author name for the reference list. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.author.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.author.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form, + % and push on the stack. + one.complete.name.format format.name$ + % + % Make two copies of the name, format the last name and push on the stack. + duplicate$ duplicate$ #1 format.last.part.name + % + % Format the initials and push on the stack. + swap$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen + % + % Connect with last name. + connect.with.comma.check + % + % Format the von-junior part and connect with initials. + swap$ #1 format.von.junior.name "" connect.check +} + +FUNCTION {format.editor.name} +{ % Format a name for the reference list as an editor. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.editor.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.editor.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + format.cite.initials.name +} + +FUNCTION {format.index.name} +{ % Format an author name for the index. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.index.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.index.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + format.author.name +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Some macro strings about commas, etc. between authors FUNCTION {comma.between.two} { "\BCBT{}" } @@ -2394,35 +2374,28 @@ FUNCTION {et.al.string} { "\ \BOthers{.}" } FUNCTION {et.al.string.period} { "\ \BOthersPeriod{.}" } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Add author index entry when desired. -% "field" must have been defined before and must contain the -% contents of the relevant author field. -% "nameptr" must also have been defined before. It is the -% number of the author that must be formatted. (So if it is -% #2, then the 2nd author must be formatted.) -% What's on top of the stack (the formatted author) is written -% to the .bbl file. FUNCTION {add.name.index} { % % make.index { "%" * write$ newline$ - "\protect\AX{" write$ + % Check for corporate author + field is.bibcorporate + { "\corporateAX{" } + { "\AX{" } + if$ + write$ field nameptr sort.name.format format.name$ sortify write$ newline$ "@" write$ - field nameptr index.name.format format.name$ "}%" * write$ newline$ + field nameptr format.index.name + "}%" * write$ newline$ } { "%" * write$ newline$ } if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Citation labels when author or editor may be used. -% Field is on top of the stack. -% -% Call with -% format.num.names field make.name.cite.label FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label} { 'field := @@ -2444,8 +2417,8 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label} % #1 'nameptr := cite.initials #1 = - { field nameptr cite.initials.name.format format.name$ } - { field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ } + { field nameptr format.cite.initials.name } + { field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ } if$ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. % @@ -2544,8 +2517,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Citation labels when no author, editor, firstkey or key -% is available. FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label} { % @@ -2562,7 +2533,11 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label} { type empty$ { howpublished empty$ { note empty$ - { cite$ } + { url empty$ + { cite$ } + { url } + if$ + } { note } if$ } @@ -2588,7 +2563,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Citation labels when author or editor may be used. FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label} { author empty$ @@ -2615,7 +2589,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Citation labels when author (but not editor) may be used. FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label} { author empty$ @@ -2634,9 +2607,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make "a" or "b" supplement to year label when necessary. FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement} { % @@ -2663,7 +2634,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Add \protect if year is \BIP or \bibnodate. FUNCTION {protect.year} { year empty$ @@ -2681,7 +2651,6 @@ FUNCTION {protect.year} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make year label that is used for citations in text. FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label} { "{\protect\APACyear{" @@ -2717,16 +2686,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label} make.definitive.year.supplement enclose.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make citation labels: -% - Full formatted author list (or substitute if no author -% available) for first citation; -% - Short formatted author list (ditto) for subsequent -% citations; -% - Year, with originalyear when applicable, and "a" or "b" -% etc. addendum when necessary. FUNCTION {make.cite.labels} { newline$ @@ -2806,14 +2766,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.cite.labels} "}%" write$ newline$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% FORMATTING OF REFERENCE LIST % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% "(Ed.)" or "(Eds.)" postfix. -% editor must not be empty FUNCTION {editor.postfix} { editor num.names$ #1 > @@ -2823,8 +2779,6 @@ FUNCTION {editor.postfix} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% "(Ed. \& Trans.)" postfix -% editor must not be empty FUNCTION {editor.trans.postfix} { editor num.names$ #1 > @@ -2846,15 +2800,6 @@ FUNCTION {trans.postfix} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format authors (or editors acting as authors) for -% reference list. -% -% Call with -% dot field format.author.names -% where field is the field (string) that contains the authors -% (or editors acting as authors) that must be formatted and -% dot is 1 or 0 indicating whether or not a period must end -% the formatting. FUNCTION {format.author.names} { 'field := @@ -2880,7 +2825,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} % Format first author % #1 'nameptr := - field nameptr author.name.format format.name$ + field nameptr format.author.name % % Add period if required and if this is the only author. % @@ -2917,7 +2862,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} % Format second author. % #2 'nameptr := - field nameptr author.name.format format.name$ 's := + field nameptr format.author.name 's := % % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others". % If so, insert "et al." string. @@ -2962,7 +2907,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} % % Format and add next author % - field nameptr author.name.format format.name$ + field nameptr format.author.name add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. % % Move to next author @@ -2974,7 +2919,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} % nameptr = format.num.names % Format this author. % - field nameptr author.name.format format.name$ 's := + field nameptr format.author.name 's := % format.num.names numnames = { % @@ -3035,8 +2980,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format authors in reference list, where it is given that -% the author field is not empty. FUNCTION {format.authors} { #1 author format.author.names @@ -3044,14 +2987,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.authors} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format editors in reference list in case editors act as -% authors (such as reference to entire edited book) -% -% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds.). -% or -% Letheridge, S. (Ed.). (if only 1 editor) -% -% editor must not be empty FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors} { #0 editor format.author.names @@ -3059,16 +2994,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% Format editors in reference list in case editors are also -% translators and act as authors (such as reference to entire -% edited book of translated articles) -% -% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds. and Trans.). -% or -% Letheridge, S. (Ed. and Trans.). (if only 1 editor) -% -% editor must not be empty FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors} { #0 editor format.author.names @@ -3076,14 +3001,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format a list of names with the initials before the -% last names (i.e., names in the editor position), -% commas between names (not between 2), -% and ampersand (\&) before last name. -% These names are not put in the author index. -% -% Call with -% field format.editor.names FUNCTION {format.editor.names} { 'field := @@ -3098,7 +3015,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} % % Format first editor % - field #1 editor.name.format format.name$ + field #1 format.editor.name % numnames #1 = 'skip$ @@ -3109,7 +3026,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} % Given that format.num.names > 1, it is 2. % No comma. Format second editor. % - field #2 editor.name.format format.name$ 's := + field #2 format.editor.name 's := % % Check if 2nd editor is explicit "others". % If so, insert "et al." string. @@ -3133,7 +3050,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} % % Format and add next editor % - field nameptr editor.name.format format.name$ * + field nameptr format.editor.name * % % Move to next editor % @@ -3144,7 +3061,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} % nameptr = format.num.names % Format this editor. % - field nameptr editor.name.format format.name$ 's := + field nameptr format.editor.name 's := % format.num.names numnames = { % @@ -3176,7 +3093,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format editors in case editors do not act as authors @@ -3195,7 +3111,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.in.line} editor.postfix connect.with.space.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format editors in case editors are also translators @@ -3216,7 +3131,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.trans.in.line} editor.trans.postfix connect.with.space.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format translators in case translators act as editors @@ -3235,7 +3149,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.translators.in.line} trans.postfix connect.with.space.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format translators in case translator does not act as editor @@ -3312,9 +3225,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.translators.in.paren.check} FUNCTION {format.atrans.check} { format.translators.in.paren.check parenthesize.check } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format "In editor (Ed.), " @@ -3327,7 +3237,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.editors} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format "In translator (Trans.)," @@ -3340,8 +3249,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.trans} if$ } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format "In editor (Ed. and Trans.)" @@ -3369,69 +3276,54 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.editors.trans} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% DATE % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Formats year (+ extra label) between parentheses (which -% may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP). -% Extra label can be used for -% Bentler, P. M. (1983a) <article 1> -% Bentler, P. M. (1983b) <article 2> FUNCTION {format.year.check} -{ "\BBOP{}" "\BBCP{}" % Opening and closing parentheses +{ "\APACrefYear{" year empty$ - { "\bibnodate{}" } - { year } + { "\bibnodate{}" * } + { year * } if$ % % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary. % make.definitive.year.supplement * - % - % Combine everything - % - enclose.check + "}" * } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Formats year (+ extra label) + month + day between -% parentheses (which may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP). -% Extra label can be used for -% Bentler, P. M. (1983a, June 7) <article 1> -% Bentler, P. M. (1983b, April 4) <article 2> FUNCTION {format.year.month.day.check} -{ "\BBOP{}" "\BBCP{}" % Opening and closing parentheses +{ "\APACrefYearMonthDay{" year empty$ - { "\bibnodate{}" } - { year } + { "\bibnodate{}" * } + { year * } if$ % % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary. % make.definitive.year.supplement * + "}{" * % % Add month and day when present. % - month connect.with.comma.check - day connect.with.space.check - % - % Combine everything - % - enclose.check + month empty$ + 'skip$ + { month * } + if$ + "}{" * + day empty$ + 'skip$ + { day * } + if$ + "}" * } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% TITLE FORMATTING % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of article in journal or book @@ -3444,13 +3336,16 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot} "\BBCQ{}" swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "t" change.case$ } + { duplicate$ + % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ + "t" change.case$ + * "}" * + } if$ enclose.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of article in journal or book @@ -3460,15 +3355,19 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot} % FUNCTION {format.atitle.dot} { "\BBOQ{}" swap$ - "\BBCQ{} " swap$ + "\BBCQ{}" swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "t" change.case$ add.period$ } + { duplicate$ + % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ + "t" change.case$ + * "}" * add.period$ + } if$ enclose.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of article in journal or book @@ -3491,39 +3390,37 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.connect} if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % - % title of book or so, no period - % + % title of book or so, without period % call with % field format.btitle.no.dot % FUNCTION {format.btitle.no.dot} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "t" change.case$ emphasize.check } + { duplicate$ + % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefbtitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ + "t" change.case$ + * "}" * + } if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of book or so, with period - % (maybe emphasize and add.period$ should be reversed) % call with % field format.btitle.dot % FUNCTION {format.btitle.dot} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "t" change.case$ add.period$ emphasize.check } + { add.period$ format.btitle.no.dot } if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of book and similar @@ -3569,10 +3466,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect.no.dot} % % format englishtitle (of nonenglish article, etc.) % -FUNCTION {format.etitle.check} +FUNCTION {format.aetitle.check} { englishtitle empty$ { "" } - { englishtitle "t" change.case$ bracket.check } + { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefaetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" * + englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format englishtitle (of nonenglish book, etc.) + % +FUNCTION {format.betitle.check} +{ englishtitle empty$ + { "" } + { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefbetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" * + englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" * + } if$ } @@ -3583,53 +3497,51 @@ FUNCTION {format.etitle.check} FUNCTION {format.atype.check} { type bracket.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format title and englishtitle (of article, etc.) % FUNCTION {format.atitle.check} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.aetitle.check title format.atitle.connect } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format title, englishtitle, and type % (of article, etc.) % FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.check} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.aetitle.check format.atype.check connect.with.space.check title format.atitle.connect } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format title, englishtitle, % and translator (of article, etc.) % FUNCTION {format.atitle.trans.check} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.aetitle.check format.atrans.check connect.with.space.check title format.atitle.connect } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format title, englishtitle, type, % and translator (of article, etc.) % FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.aetitle.check format.atype.check connect.with.space.check format.atrans.check connect.with.space.check title format.atitle.connect } +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -3639,13 +3551,24 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check} % FUNCTION { format.journal.vol.num.pages.check } { "journal" journal warning.if.empty - journal emphasize.check - volume emphasize.check connect.with.comma.check - number parenthesize.check "" connect.check - swap$ connect.with.comma.check + duplicate$ empty$ + journal empty$ and + volume empty$ and + number empty$ and + { pop$ "" } + { "\APACjournalVolNumPages{" journal "" connect.check + "}{" * volume "" connect.check + "}{" * number "" connect.check + "}{" * swap$ "" connect.check + "}" * + } + if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % volume of book, checks whether % "Volume" or "Volumes" @@ -3658,14 +3581,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check} 'skip$ { duplicate$ multi.result.check { "\BVOLS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } - { "\BVOL" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BVOL" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } if$ } if$ } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % edition of book, must not be empty @@ -3675,11 +3596,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check} FUNCTION {format.edition.check} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "\BEd" connect.with.space.check } + { "\PrintCardinal{" swap$ * "}" * + "\BEd" connect.with.space.check + } if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % volume and edition of book @@ -3690,9 +3612,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.check} connect.with.comma.check } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % volume and edition of book @@ -3737,7 +3656,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.bpages.check} 'skip$ { duplicate$ multi.result.check { "\BPGS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } - { "\BPG" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BPG~" swap$ * } if$ } if$ @@ -3764,7 +3683,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.bchapter.check} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % volume, edition, and pages or chapter of article in book etc. @@ -3778,25 +3696,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.pages} parenthesize.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title, volume, edition of book % FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.betitle.check format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check title format.btitle.connect.no.dot } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title, volume, edition, and translator of book % FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.betitle.check format.bvol.edition.trans connect.with.space.check title format.btitle.connect.no.dot } @@ -3806,12 +3721,15 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans} % title, volume, edition, editor, and translator of book % FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.betitle.check format.bvol.edition.editor.trans connect.with.space.check title format.btitle.connect.no.dot } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format address and publisher of book etc. % @@ -3822,10 +3740,28 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans} % New York (if publisher empty) % FUNCTION {format.address.publisher} -{ address publisher connect.with.colon.check } - - - +{ % + % If publisher = author or publisher = "author" or publisher = "Author" + % then hand over the final choice how to format this to \LaTeX. + % (I could imagine similar code for editors, but the APA manual does + % not mention it and then we'd have to check whether the editor is in + % the author position, so let's keep it simple until someone complains.) + % + author empty$ + publisher empty$ or + { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" } + { author publisher = + "author" publisher = or + "Author" publisher = or + { author "\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth{" } + { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" } + if$ + } + if$ + address "" connect.check "}{" * + % Recover publisher that was pushed onto the stack previously. + swap$ "" connect.check "}" * +} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -3842,10 +3778,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.address.publisher} FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.check} { "publisher" publisher warning.if.empty "address" address warning.if.empty - format.address.publisher + publisher empty$ + address empty$ + and + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.address.publisher + } + if$ } - +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -3858,7 +3806,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check} 'skip$ { duplicate$ multi.result.check { "\BNUMS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } - { "\BNUM" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BNUM" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } if$ } if$ @@ -3871,16 +3819,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check} % format.type.number % FUNCTION { format.type.number } -{ number empty$ - { type bracket.check } - { type - number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check +{ type empty$ + { type.2 } + { type } + if$ + number empty$ + { bracket.check } + { number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check parenthesize.check } if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format howpublished if not empty, % for various entry types @@ -3890,8 +3844,12 @@ FUNCTION { format.type.number } FUNCTION {format.howpublished} { howpublished empty$ 'skip$ - { output.dot.new.block - howpublished + { % clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + { output.dot.new.block } + if$ + "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * } if$ } @@ -3906,26 +3864,71 @@ FUNCTION {format.howpublished} FUNCTION {output.howpublished} { howpublished empty$ 'skip$ - { howpublished + { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * output.dot.new.block } if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% NOTE FORMATTING FUNCTIONS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % begin and end of url environment + % +FUNCTION {begin.end.url.env} +{ " \begin{APACrefURL} " + % For "Retrieved <date>, from" + lastchecked empty$ + 'skip$ + { "[{" * lastchecked * "}]" * } + if$ + " \end{APACrefURL} " +} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % - % format optional note + % begin and end of message environment % -FUNCTION {format.note} -{ note parenthesize.check } +FUNCTION {begin.end.msg.env} +{ " \begin{APACrefURLmsg} " + " \end{APACrefURLmsg} " +} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format url given that it is not empty, + % for various entry types + % call with + % format.url + % +FUNCTION {format.url} +{ % First format begin and end of the enclosing environment. + % With posted messages, a different environment is used. + type.2 empty$ + { begin.end.url.env } + { type.2 "\bibmessage" = + { begin.end.msg.env } + { begin.end.url.env } + if$ + } + if$ + % The url string. + "\url{" url * "}" * + % Enclose in begin and end environment + enclose.check +} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format optional note + % +FUNCTION {format.note} +{ "\APACrefnote{" "}" note enclose.check } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -3934,33 +3937,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.note} % FUNCTION {format.orig.year.note} { originalyear empty$ - { note parenthesize.check } - { originalyear "\bibnodate" = - { note parenthesize.check } - { "\BOWP{} " originalyear * % original work published - note connect.with.semicolon.check - parenthesize.check - } - if$ + { format.note } + { "\APACorigyearnote{" + originalyear "" connect.check "}{" * + note "" connect.check "}" * } if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format original journal of publication and note % (reprint or translation) % FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note} -{ "\BREPR{} " % reprinted from - originaljournal emphasize.check * - originalyear connect.with.comma.check - originalvolume emphasize.check connect.with.comma.check - originalnumber bracket.check "" connect.check - originalpages connect.with.comma.check - note connect.with.semicolon.check - parenthesize.check +{ "\APACorigjournalnote{" + originalyear "" connect.check "}{" * + originaljournal "" connect.check "}{" * + originalvolume "" connect.check "}{" * + originalnumber "" connect.check "}{" * + originalpages "" connect.check "}{" * + note "" connect.check "}" * } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -3969,42 +3966,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note} % (reprint or translation) % FUNCTION {format.orig.book.note} -{ "\BREPR{}" % Reprinted from - % - % title of the book the work was originally published in - % - originalbooktitle format.btitle.no.dot connect.with.space.check - % - % volume, edition, pages - % - originaledition format.edition.check connect.with.comma.check - originalvolume format.bvolume.check connect.with.comma.check - originalpages format.bpages.check connect.with.comma.check - % - % editor of the original book +{ "\APACorigbooknote{" originalyear "" connect.check "}{" * % originaleditor empty$ 'skip$ - { "by " originaleditor format.editor.names * - originaleditor num.names$ #1 > - { ", \BEDS{}" * } - { ", \BED{}" * } + { originaleditor num.names$ #1 > + { "\APACorigEDS{" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * } + { "\APACorigED{" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * } if$ - connect.with.comma.check } if$ % - % year of the original publication - % - originalyear connect.with.comma.check - % - originaladdress originalpublisher connect.with.colon.check - connect.with.comma.check - note connect.with.semicolon.check - parenthesize.check + "}{" * + originalbooktitle format.btitle.no.dot "" connect.check "}{" * + originaledition format.edition.check "" connect.check "}{" * + originalvolume format.bvolume.check "" connect.check "}{" * + originalpages format.bpages.check "" connect.check "}{" * + originaladdress "" connect.check "}{" * + originalpublisher "" connect.check "}{" * + note "" connect.check "}" * } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format information about original publication of reprint @@ -4015,38 +3997,35 @@ FUNCTION {format.orig.note} { originalbooktitle empty$ { note empty$ { originalyear empty$ - { add.period$ } + 'skip$ { originalyear "\bibnodate" = - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { output.new.block format.orig.year.note } if$ } if$ } - { output.dot.new.block + { output.new.block format.orig.year.note } if$ } - { output.dot.new.block + { output.new.block format.orig.book.note } if$ } - { output.dot.new.block + { output.new.block format.orig.journal.note } if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% PERIODICALS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % article in periodical: journal, magazine, newspaper, ... @@ -4110,7 +4089,20 @@ FUNCTION {periodical} % if not empty, insert howpublished. % (used if article is retrieved from the internet) % - format.howpublished + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % possible reprint and optional note % @@ -4118,8 +4110,6 @@ FUNCTION {periodical} fin.entry } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % journal article @@ -4127,8 +4117,6 @@ FUNCTION {periodical} FUNCTION {article} { pages format.year.month.day.check periodical } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % magazine article @@ -4136,8 +4124,6 @@ FUNCTION {article} FUNCTION {magazine} { pages format.year.month.day.check periodical } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % newspaper article @@ -4145,8 +4131,6 @@ FUNCTION {magazine} FUNCTION {newspaper} { pages format.bpages.check format.year.month.day.check periodical } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % (translation of) entire book @@ -4168,7 +4152,7 @@ FUNCTION {book} { format.btitle.vol.edition.trans format.type.number connect.with.space.check output.dot.new.block - format.year.check output.dot.new.block + format.year.check add.period$ } % % format editor and year, and check if year is present @@ -4196,7 +4180,7 @@ FUNCTION {book} } if$ format.type.number connect.with.space.check - output.dot.new.block + add.period$ } if$ } @@ -4208,7 +4192,7 @@ FUNCTION {book} format.year.check output.dot.new.block format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans format.type.number connect.with.space.check - output.dot.new.block + add.period$ } if$ % @@ -4216,6 +4200,24 @@ FUNCTION {book} % format.address.publisher.check % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if book is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % % format original publication (of reprint/translation) % and optional note % @@ -4223,7 +4225,6 @@ FUNCTION {book} fin.entry } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % (translated) article or chapter in edited book @@ -4246,7 +4247,7 @@ FUNCTION {incollection} % esp. for ``collections'' that are not books, % such as parts of internet documents % - format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ } % % format author and year, and check if year is present @@ -4258,25 +4259,38 @@ FUNCTION {incollection} { format.atitle.type.trans.check } { format.atitle.type.check } if$ - output.new.block } if$ % % format "In " editor " (Ed. \& Trans.), " % booktitle, volume, edition, pages % + output.new.block format.in.editors.trans format.bvol.edition.pages - booktitle format.btitle.connect * output.dot.new.block + booktitle format.btitle.connect * add.period$ % % format address and publisher, check if publisher present % format.address.publisher.check - % - % if not empty, insert howpublished. - % (used if article is retrieved from the internet) - % - format.howpublished + % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if article is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % format original publication (of reprint/translation) % and optional note @@ -4286,10 +4300,8 @@ FUNCTION {incollection} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% REPORTS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % technical report number @@ -4311,14 +4323,36 @@ FUNCTION {format.tr.number} % title, volume, edition, report number % FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number} -{ format.etitle.check - format.bvol.edition.check - format.tr.number connect.with.semicolon.check - parenthesize.check connect.with.space.check +{ format.betitle.check + % Single out the situation in which there is no number + % and type = {\bibnotype}, i.e., no type as well. + % (Why not use book then?) + type empty$ + { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a + % number, a type, a volume, or an edition. + "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" * + format.tr.number * "}" * + } + { type "\bibnotype" = + number empty$ + volume empty$ + edition empty$ + and + and + and + { "" } + { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a + % number, a type, a volume, or an edition. + "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" * + format.tr.number * "}" * + } + if$ + } + if$ + connect.with.space.check title format.btitle.connect } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format address and institution of reports etc. @@ -4332,10 +4366,38 @@ FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number} FUNCTION {format.address.institution.check} { "institution" institution warning.if.empty "address" address warning.if.empty - address institution connect.with.colon.check + institution empty$ + address empty$ + and + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + % + % If institution = author or institution = "author" + % or institution = "Author" then hand over the final choice how to + % format this to \LaTeX. See also format.address.publisher + % + author empty$ + institution empty$ or + { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" } + { author institution = + "author" institution = or + "Author" institution = or + { author "\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth{" } + { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" } + if$ + } + if$ + address "" connect.check "}{" * + % Recover institution that was pushed onto the stack previously. + swap$ "" connect.check "}" * + } + if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % reports @@ -4351,7 +4413,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport} % title formatted as book title % { format.tr.title.number output.dot.new.block - format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ } % % format editor and year, and check if year is present @@ -4360,7 +4422,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport} % { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - format.tr.title.number output.dot.new.block + format.tr.title.number add.period$ } if$ } @@ -4371,7 +4433,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport} % { format.authors start.new.block format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - format.tr.title.number output.dot.new.block + format.tr.title.number add.period$ } if$ % @@ -4382,21 +4444,36 @@ FUNCTION {techreport} % if not empty, insert howpublished. % (used if report is retrieved from the internet) % - format.howpublished + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ format.note } if$ fin.entry } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % (translated) article or chapter in report @@ -4437,13 +4514,13 @@ FUNCTION {intechreport} % % volume, edition, report type and number, pages % - format.bvol.edition.check - format.tr.number connect.with.semicolon.check - pages format.bpages.check connect.with.comma.check - parenthesize.check + "\APACbVolEdTRpgs{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" * + format.tr.number * + "}{" * pages format.bpages.check * + "}" * % booktitle format.btitle.connect * - output.dot.new.block + add.period$ % % format address and publisher, check if publisher present % @@ -4452,7 +4529,20 @@ FUNCTION {intechreport} % if not empty, insert howpublished. % (used if report is retrieved from the internet) % - format.howpublished + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % format original publication (of reprint/translation) % and optional note @@ -4477,12 +4567,15 @@ FUNCTION {lecture} % format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block symposium empty$ - { format.etitle.check + { format.betitle.check title format.btitle.connect output.new.block howpublished empty$ - { "symposium and howpublished missing in " * cite$ warning$ } - { howpublished } + { "symposium and howpublished missing in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * } if$ + address connect.with.comma.check } { format.atitle.type.check output.new.block "\BIn{} " @@ -4498,26 +4591,42 @@ FUNCTION {lecture} if$ symposium format.btitle.no.dot * format.howpublished + address connect.with.comma.check + } + if$ + add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url } if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ format.note } if$ fin.entry } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% THESES % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % default thesis type is on top of stack @@ -4535,8 +4644,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.type.school} school connect.with.comma.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % phd theses, etc. @@ -4583,7 +4690,7 @@ FUNCTION {thesis} parenthesize.check } if$ - format.etitle.check + format.aetitle.check swap$ connect.with.space.check "title" title warning.if.empty title format.atitle.connect output.new.block @@ -4594,20 +4701,36 @@ FUNCTION {thesis} % if not empty, insert howpublished. % (used if thesis is retrieved from the internet) % - format.howpublished + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ format.note } if$ fin.entry } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % phd theses, etc. @@ -4615,7 +4738,6 @@ FUNCTION {thesis} FUNCTION {phdthesis} { "\BPhD" "\BUPhD" thesis } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % master's theses, etc. @@ -4623,13 +4745,9 @@ FUNCTION {phdthesis} FUNCTION {mastersthesis} { "\BMTh" "\BUMTh" thesis } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% OTHER % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of something (used in unpublished and misc) @@ -4637,7 +4755,8 @@ FUNCTION {mastersthesis} % type and number of something % FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.betitle.check + format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check format.type.number connect.with.space.check title empty$ @@ -4653,11 +4772,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num} % type and number of something % FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num} -{ format.etitle.check - type "\bibmessage" = +{ format.aetitle.check + format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check + type.2 "\bibmessage" = { number empty$ 'skip$ - { type number connect.with.space.check + { type.2 number tie.or.space.connect bracket.check connect.with.space.check } @@ -4679,23 +4799,16 @@ FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num} % type and number of something (used in misc) % FUNCTION {output.misctitle.type.num} -{ type empty$ +{ type.2 empty$ { format.btitle.type.num } - { type "\bibmessage" = - type "\bibcomputerprogram" = - type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" = - type "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" = - type "\bibcomputersoftware" = - type "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" = - type "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" = - type "\bibprogramminglanguage" = - or - or - or - or - or - or - or + { type.2 "\bibmessage" = + type.2 "\bibcomputerprogram" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputersoftware" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" = or + type.2 "\bibprogramminglanguage" = or { format.mtitle.type.num } { format.btitle.type.num } if$ @@ -4718,8 +4831,8 @@ FUNCTION {unpublished} % no author or editor: title serves as author. % title formatted as book title % - { format.btitle.type.num output.dot.new.block - format.year.month.day.check + { format.btitle.type.num output.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ } % % format editor and year, and check if year is present @@ -4742,36 +4855,59 @@ FUNCTION {unpublished} } if$ howpublished empty$ - organization empty$ - address empty$ - and - and + organization empty$ and + address empty$ and 'skip$ - { output.dot.new.block - howpublished + { output.new.block + "\APAChowpublished{" "}" howpublished enclose.check organization connect.with.comma.check address connect.with.comma.check + add.period$ + } + if$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url } if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ format.note } if$ fin.entry } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % nonprint media and other things that don't fit % FUNCTION {misc} -{ author empty$ +{ % + % To handle @manual: use type.2 instead of type. + type.2 empty$ + type empty$ not and + { type 'type.2 := } + 'skip$ + if$ + % + author empty$ % % no author: possibly edited item with editors as authors % @@ -4782,19 +4918,20 @@ FUNCTION {misc} % % if no title and no type, howpublished is title % - { title empty$ - type empty$ - and + { title empty$ + type.2 empty$ and { howpublished empty$ { "No author, editor, title, type, and howpublished in " - cite$ * warning$ } - { howpublished output.dot.new.block } + cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * add.period$ } if$ - format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ } { output.misctitle.type.num output.new.block - format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - output.howpublished + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ + format.howpublished add.period$ } if$ } @@ -4804,8 +4941,8 @@ FUNCTION {misc} % { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - output.misctitle.type.num output.new.block - output.howpublished + output.misctitle.type.num + format.howpublished add.period$ } if$ } @@ -4816,24 +4953,47 @@ FUNCTION {misc} % { format.authors start.new.block format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - output.misctitle.type.num output.new.block - output.howpublished + output.misctitle.type.num + format.howpublished add.period$ } if$ - address empty$ - publisher empty$ - and + % + address empty$ + publisher empty$ and + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.address.publisher add.period$ + } + if$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ 'skip$ - { format.address.publisher - output.dot.new.block + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url } if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { "" } - { format.note } + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.note + } if$ fin.entry } @@ -4853,16 +5013,26 @@ FUNCTION {literal} fin.entry } +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % technical documentation + % +FUNCTION {manual} +{ % + % If type is empty, assume that it is a computer software manual. + % + type empty$ + { "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" 'type.2 := } + 'skip$ + if$ + misc +} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % following functions not used for APA Manual examples % - - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % booklet @@ -4870,7 +5040,6 @@ FUNCTION {literal} FUNCTION {booklet} { misc } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % part of a book @@ -4878,7 +5047,6 @@ FUNCTION {booklet} FUNCTION {inbook} { incollection } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % article in proceedings @@ -4886,16 +5054,12 @@ FUNCTION {inbook} FUNCTION {inproceedings} { incollection } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % - % technical documentation + % article in proceedings (Kopka & Daly, 2004, p. 230) % -FUNCTION {manual} -{ misc } - - +FUNCTION {conference} +{ inproceedings } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -4904,7 +5068,6 @@ FUNCTION {manual} FUNCTION {proceedings} { misc } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % unknown types @@ -4912,17 +5075,13 @@ FUNCTION {proceedings} FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% INITIALIZATION FUNCTIONS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% FUNCTION {initialize} { % % Maximum number of names to be formatted . #6 'name.max := -% #250 'entry.max$ := -% #5000 'global.max$ := } FUNCTION {init.old.number} @@ -4961,12 +5120,9 @@ FUNCTION {move.backward} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% BASIC BIBLIOGRAPHY OUTPUT FUNCTIONS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Beginning of the thebibliography environment: -% Write preamble if there is one, write \begin command FUNCTION {begin.bib} { preamble$ empty$ @@ -4977,7 +5133,6 @@ FUNCTION {begin.bib} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Write \end{thebibliography} command FUNCTION {end.bib} { newline$ @@ -4985,8 +5140,6 @@ FUNCTION {end.bib} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Write the citation labels and reference list entry to -% the .bbl file. FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry} { % @@ -5000,20 +5153,17 @@ FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% READ AND PROCESS ENTRIES, MAKE THEBIBLIOGRAPHY % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Read entries . - READ -% Some initializations . + +EXECUTE { identify.apacite.version } + EXECUTE { initialize } -% Sort items by title in order to replace each title by -% its number in later sorting . ITERATE { make.sort.title } @@ -5025,17 +5175,11 @@ EXECUTE { init.old.label } ITERATE { make.title.number } -% Now generate some tentative author-year labels and do some -% preprocessing for the later definitive author and year -% labels. ITERATE { make.tentative.sort.label } SORT -% Now check whether initials must be added to first author, -% how many authors must be formatted, whether an "a", "b", -% etc., must be added to the year label. ITERATE { init.cite.initials.add.to.year } @@ -5062,30 +5206,21 @@ EXECUTE { move.backward } REVERSE { definitive.cite.num.names } -% Make final sorting label and do definitive sorting . - ITERATE { make.final.sort.key } SORT -% Write preamble and \begin{thebibliography}{} statement EXECUTE { begin.bib } -% Make final cite labels, format reference list entry, -% and write to .bbl file. ITERATE { write.bbl.entry } -% Write \end{thebibliography} statement - EXECUTE { end.bib } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% DONE % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% EOF apacite.bst -% +%% +%% +%% End of file `apacite.bst'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacitex.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacitex.bst index 604ac347770..0bfa3a538ee 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacitex.bst +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacitex.bst @@ -1,33 +1,61 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% This is file `apacitex.bst'. -% -% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed -% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the `apacite' package. -% ------------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a -% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'. -% -% \fi +%% +%% This is file `apacitex.bst', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `xbibstyle') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +%% apacitex.bst +%% [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info] + %% apacitex.bst : reference list according to APA manual -%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl> -%% This version: [2005/06/08] +%% with author indexing information +%% Written by Erik Meijer + +FUNCTION {identify.apacite.version} +{ % Put identifying string in the .blg file + "apacitex.bst" + " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info]" + * top$ +} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% DECLARATION OF FIELDS, INTEGERS, AND STRINGS FOR EACH % -% ENTRY % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% ENTRY @@ -47,6 +75,7 @@ ENTRY journal key % key for second and later citations, or all % citations if firstkey is missing + lastchecked % for URL's month note number % number of journal or report @@ -78,6 +107,7 @@ ENTRY type % type of phdthesis (e.g., Doctoral dissertation) % or type of article (e.g., Letter to the editor) % etc. + url volume year } @@ -96,16 +126,17 @@ ENTRY % should be cited and whether a, b, etc. % after year is necessary title.sort.label % for sorting titles + type.2 % Replacement for type with misc entries and + % entries that revert to misc. } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% DECLARATION OF GLOBAL INTEGERS AND STRINGS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INTEGERS { len pos name.max old.number numnames numnames.old nameptr lastname format.num.names cite.initials.old cite.num.names.old add.to.year.old forward - multiresult dot + multiresult dot brace.level } STRINGS { s t u old.label field @@ -119,66 +150,53 @@ STRINGS { s t u old.label field } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% A small function for testing purposes. FUNCTION {test} { #0 } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% A small function (ideally replaced by a user-definable -% MACRO) that indicates whether index entries must be -% generated. FUNCTION {make.index} { #1 } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% MONTH MACROS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -MACRO {jan} {"{\APACSortNoop{01}}January"} -MACRO {feb} {"{\APACSortNoop{02}}February"} +MACRO {jan} {"{\APACmonth{01}}"} + +MACRO {feb} {"{\APACmonth{02}}"} + +MACRO {mar} {"{\APACmonth{03}}"} + +MACRO {apr} {"{\APACmonth{04}}"} + +MACRO {may} {"{\APACmonth{05}}"} + +MACRO {jun} {"{\APACmonth{06}}"} -MACRO {mar} {"{\APACSortNoop{03}}March"} +MACRO {jul} {"{\APACmonth{07}}"} -MACRO {apr} {"{\APACSortNoop{04}}April"} +MACRO {aug} {"{\APACmonth{08}}"} -MACRO {may} {"{\APACSortNoop{05}}May"} +MACRO {sep} {"{\APACmonth{09}}"} -MACRO {jun} {"{\APACSortNoop{06}}June"} +MACRO {oct} {"{\APACmonth{10}}"} -MACRO {jul} {"{\APACSortNoop{07}}July"} +MACRO {nov} {"{\APACmonth{11}}"} -MACRO {aug} {"{\APACSortNoop{08}}August"} +MACRO {dec} {"{\APACmonth{12}}"} -MACRO {sep} {"{\APACSortNoop{09}}September"} +MACRO {winter} {"{\APACmonth{13}}"} -MACRO {oct} {"{\APACSortNoop{10}}October"} +MACRO {spring} {"{\APACmonth{14}}"} -MACRO {nov} {"{\APACSortNoop{11}}November"} +MACRO {summer} {"{\APACmonth{15}}"} -MACRO {dec} {"{\APACSortNoop{12}}December"} +MACRO {fall} {"{\APACmonth{16}}"} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% LOGICAL `NOT', `AND', AND `OR' % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Logical 'not': -% If the first element on the stack is A then this function -% does the following: -% push { #0 } -% push { #1 } -% So now the first 3 elements of the stack are -% { #1 } { #0 } A -% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if': -% If A > 0 then { #0 } is executed, else { #1 } is executed: -% if A > 0 -% then 0 -% else 1 -% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false, -% then this does -% (if A then false else true) -% which is a logical 'not'. FUNCTION {not} { { #0 } @@ -187,23 +205,6 @@ FUNCTION {not} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Logical 'and': -% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B -% then this function does the following: -% push 'skip$ -% push { pop$ #0 } -% So now first 4 elements are -% { pop$ #0 } 'skip$ A B -% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of -% the stack): -% If A > 0 then 'skip$ is executed, else { pop$ #0 } is executed: -% if A > 0 -% then (B stays on top of stack) -% else (B is popped and #0 is pushed) -% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false, -% then this does -% (if A then B else false) -% which is a logical 'and'. FUNCTION {and} { 'skip$ @@ -212,23 +213,6 @@ FUNCTION {and} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Logical 'or': -% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B -% then this function does the following: -% push { pop$ #1 } -% push 'skip$ -% So now first 4 elements are -% 'skip$ { pop$ #1 } A B -% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of -% the stack): -% If A > 0 then { pop$ #1 } is executed, else 'skip$ is executed: -% if A > 0 -% then (B is popped and #1 is pushed) -% else (B stays on top of stack) -% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false, -% then this does -% (if A then true else B) -% which is a logical 'or'. FUNCTION {or} { { pop$ #1 } @@ -236,9 +220,7 @@ FUNCTION {or} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR FORMATTING % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -255,27 +237,19 @@ FUNCTION {warning.if.empty} if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % issues warning if title, type, and howpublished are empty % FUNCTION {check.relevant.fields} -{ title empty$ - type empty$ - howpublished empty$ - and - and +{ title empty$ + type empty$ and + howpublished empty$ and { "No title, type, and howpublished in " cite$ * warning$ } 'skip$ if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % delivers 1 if (both editor and translator @@ -299,7 +273,6 @@ FUNCTION {editor.ne.trans} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Convert integer to string, assume that integer < 100,000 FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str} { duplicate$ #10 < @@ -320,12 +293,7 @@ FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Delivers 1 if possibly editor in author position -% 2 if editor not in author position -% 3 if not applicable: use key -% 0 if unknown type FUNCTION {ref.type} { type$ "article" = @@ -354,7 +322,9 @@ FUNCTION {ref.type} type$ "lecture" = type$ "inbook" = type$ "inproceedings" = - type$ "intechreport" = + type$ "conference" = + type$ "intechreport" = + or or or or @@ -373,17 +343,19 @@ FUNCTION {ref.type} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Delivers 1 if title is formatted as an "article"-type, -% 0 otherwise FUNCTION {is.atype} -{ type$ "article" = - type$ "magazine" = - type$ "newspaper" = +{ type$ "article" = + type$ "magazine" = + type$ "newspaper" = type$ "incollection" = type$ "inbook" = type$ "inproceedings" = - type$ "intechreport" = + type$ "conference" = + type$ "intechreport" = + type$ "manual" = + or + or or or or @@ -400,8 +372,7 @@ FUNCTION {is.atype} and { #1 } { type$ "misc" = - type empty$ not - and + type empty$ not and { type "\bibmessage" = type "\bibcomputerprogram" = type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" = @@ -484,21 +455,18 @@ FUNCTION {connect.check} if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % connects two strings with space ("\ ") - % if length of second is 3 or larger, + % if length of second is 4 or larger, % connects them with non-breaking space ("tie", "~") - % if length of second smaller than 3 + % if length of second smaller than 4 % % call with S1 S2 tie.or.space.connect % result: "S1\ S2" or "S1~S2" % FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #4 < { "~" } { "\ " } if$ @@ -538,7 +506,6 @@ FUNCTION {connect.with.semicolon.check} FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check} { ": " connect.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % connects two strings with space ("\ ") @@ -549,8 +516,6 @@ FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check} FUNCTION {connect.with.space.check} { "\ " connect.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % encloses string in pre- and postfix string @@ -579,7 +544,6 @@ FUNCTION {emphasize.check} enclose.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % brackets top of stack @@ -642,14 +606,20 @@ FUNCTION {multi.result.check} multiresult } +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % Checks whether an author is a corporate author, i.e., + % whether the field starts with "{\bibcorporate". + % Call with + % field is.bibcorporate + % +FUNCTION {is.bibcorporate} +{ #1 #14 substring$ "{\bibcorporate" = } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Remove non-alphanumeric characters -% and change to lower case . FUNCTION {sortify} { purify$ @@ -657,14 +627,6 @@ FUNCTION {sortify} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Remove spaces from a string. Used for sorting. -% -% Call with -% string remove.spaces -% -% E.g., -% "fine old day" remove.spaces -% gives "fineoldday" . FUNCTION {remove.spaces} { % Remove spaces from string. @@ -696,10 +658,8 @@ FUNCTION {remove.spaces} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% BASIC OUTPUT FUNCTIONS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack, @@ -711,7 +671,6 @@ FUNCTION {output.end.block} newline$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack, @@ -720,10 +679,10 @@ FUNCTION {output.end.block} % FUNCTION {output.new.block} { output.end.block - "\newblock{}" write$ + "\newblock" write$ + newline$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack, @@ -736,13 +695,11 @@ FUNCTION {output.dot.new.block} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Starting new block assuming that stack is empty. -% Starting a new line and adding some extra space or -% whatever is more defined in \newblock FUNCTION {start.new.block} { newline$ - "\newblock{}" write$ + "\unskip\ " write$ newline$ + "\newblock " write$ newline$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -752,6 +709,7 @@ FUNCTION {start.new.block} % FUNCTION {fin.entry} { output.end.block + "\PrintBackRefs{\CurrentBib}" write$ newline$ test { "\vspace{\baselineskip}" write$ newline$ } 'skip$ @@ -759,27 +717,21 @@ FUNCTION {fin.entry} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING BY AUTHOR (OR SUBSTITUTE), YEAR, % -% TITLE % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%MACRO {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{ f{}}{ vv{}}{ jj{}}" } - FUNCTION {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{ f{}}{ vv{}}{ jj{}}" } FUNCTION {cite.name.format} { "{ll}" } -FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f. }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } +FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } -FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f.}{ vv}{, jj}" } +FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" } -FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f.~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } +FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } -FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f.}{ vv}{, jj}" } +FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (1). -% Initialization. FUNCTION {init.initials} { "yyyyy" 'aut1f.old := @@ -788,11 +740,6 @@ FUNCTION {init.initials} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (2). -% Update when author, editor, and key fields are not used. -% -% Call with -% field update.no.initials FUNCTION {update.no.initials} { 'field := @@ -802,7 +749,6 @@ FUNCTION {update.no.initials} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (3). FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut} { % @@ -832,9 +778,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (4). -% Call with -% field check.add.initials.field FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field} { 'field := @@ -847,7 +790,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Check whether initials must be added (4). FUNCTION {check.add.initials} { % @@ -907,9 +849,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (1). -% Call with -% field tentative.cite.num.names.field FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field} { 'field := @@ -938,7 +877,6 @@ FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (2). FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names} { % @@ -997,8 +935,6 @@ FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Initialize "number of names to be cited" before -% looping over entries. FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names} { #0 'cite.num.names.old := @@ -1014,7 +950,6 @@ FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Update "number of names to be cited" . FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names} { cite.num.names.short 'cite.num.names.old := @@ -1030,10 +965,6 @@ FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format (maximally) 6 authors for comparison issues -% to determine number of authors that must be cited. -% It is assumed that the 'field' and 'numnames' variables -% have already been defined. FUNCTION {format.6.authors} { % @@ -1125,9 +1056,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.6.authors} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited -% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1). -% a's or b's are necessary: update add.to.year variable FUNCTION {change.add.to.year} { @@ -1151,12 +1079,6 @@ FUNCTION {change.add.to.year} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited -% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1). -% Current and/or previous entry has 1 or 2 authors -% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the -% same year. The number of authors does not need to be changed -% in this case, but a's or b's may be necessary. FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2} { % @@ -1203,13 +1125,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited -% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (2). -% Both current and previous entries have 3 or more authors -% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the -% same year. FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more} { % @@ -1475,18 +1391,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited -% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (3). -% Current entry has an author or editor acting as author. -% -% Call with -% field definitive.cite.num.names.field -% -% What should we do with explicit "others"? Is now ignored. -% If this causes ambiguity that could be resolved, the user -% should have added additional author names. FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field} { 'field := @@ -1557,16 +1462,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field} update.cite.num.names } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (4) -% and especially whether a's and b's should be added. -% This function is for the situation when author or editor -% are not used and firstkey, key, or something else is -% used to cite the referenced work. -% -% Call with -% formatted.field definitive.cite.no.names FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names} { % @@ -1600,7 +1496,6 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (5). FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names} { % @@ -1647,7 +1542,6 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make a tentative year sorting label (without `a' and `b'). FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label} { % @@ -1679,71 +1573,11 @@ FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Give month (converted to number) and day when available. FUNCTION {month.number.day} { month empty$ { "" } - { % -% month jan = -% { "01" } -% { month feb = -% { "02" } -% { month mar = -% { "03" } -% { month apr = -% { "04" } -% { month may = -% { "05" } -% { month jun = -% { "06" } -% { month jul = -% { "07" } -% { month aug = -% { "08" } -% { month sep = -% { "09" } -% { month oct = -% { "10" } -% { month nov = -% { "11" } -% { month dec = -% { "12" } -% { % - % Month is something - % else, e.g., "Spring" - % or jul # "/" # aug. - % Currently too - % difficult to figure - % out: user should - % trick the system. - % - month sortify - remove.spaces -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ -% } -% if$ + { month sortify remove.spaces % % Add the day when available. day empty$ @@ -1757,12 +1591,6 @@ FUNCTION {month.number.day} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make tentative sort label with names in field on top of -% the stack. -% -% Call with -% field make.name.sort.label -% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role. FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label} { % @@ -1873,17 +1701,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label} 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative -% sort label if key or firstkey is available or author and -% editor are empty or unusable. -% -% Call with -% field make.field.year.sort.label -% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role, -% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the -% beginning. FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label} { % @@ -1921,11 +1739,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label} 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative -% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and -% author or editor may be used FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label} { author empty$ @@ -1943,9 +1757,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative -% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and -% author (but not editor) may be used FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label} { author empty$ @@ -1958,10 +1769,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make tentative label for citing and sorting and do some -% preprocessing. FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label} { % @@ -2066,15 +1874,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label} author.year.sort.label 'sort.key$ := } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make final sort label with names in field on top of -% the stack. -% -% Call with -% field make.definitive.name.sort.label -% -% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role. FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label} { % @@ -2097,7 +1897,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label} { name.max 'format.num.names := } { numnames 'format.num.names := } if$ - % Initialize stack with empty stringh + % Initialize stack with empty string "" % % Cycle over authors. @@ -2126,16 +1926,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label} 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called to make definitive sort label if author and -% editor are empty or unusable. -% -% Call with -% field make.definitive.field.year.sort.label -% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role, -% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the -% beginning. FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label} { % @@ -2168,10 +1959,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label} 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.final.sort.key if author or editor -% may be used. FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label} { author empty$ @@ -2189,8 +1977,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Called by make.final.sort.key if author but not editor -% may be used. FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label} { author empty$ @@ -2203,11 +1989,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label} if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make final sort key . FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key} { % @@ -2260,24 +2042,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key} author.year.sort.label 'sort.key$ := } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% FUNCTIONS THAT ALLOW SORTING BY TITLE % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Remove first N characters of string if they are equal to -% teststring . -% -% Call with -% teststring N string chop.word -% -% E.g., -% "A " #2 "A fine old day" chop.word -% gives "fine old day" -% and -% "A " #2 "The fine old day" chop.word -% gives "The fine old day". FUNCTION {chop.word} { 's := @@ -2289,10 +2057,6 @@ FUNCTION {chop.word} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from beginning of string. -% -% Call with -% string chop.articles FUNCTION {chop.articles} { 's := @@ -2306,12 +2070,6 @@ FUNCTION {chop.articles} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format title and other non-name/date entries for sort key. -% -% Call with -% field format.sort.title -% -% Make sure that field is not empty, this is not checked here! FUNCTION {format.sort.title} { % @@ -2323,7 +2081,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.sort.title} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make title sorting label or substitute. FUNCTION {make.sort.title} { title empty$ @@ -2331,9 +2088,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.sort.title} { type empty$ { howpublished empty$ { note empty$ - { "no title, type, howpublished, or note in " cite$ * - warning$ - " " + { url empty$ + { " " } + { url format.sort.title } + if$ } { note format.sort.title } if$ @@ -2355,7 +2113,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.sort.title} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make title number: rank number of sorted title . FUNCTION {make.title.number} { title.sort.label old.label = @@ -2373,11 +2130,235 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.number} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% CITATION LABELS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +FUNCTION {last.part.name.format} { "{ll}" } + +FUNCTION {initials.with.space.name.format} { "{f.}" } + +FUNCTION {von.last.junior.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } + +FUNCTION {von.junior.name.format} { "{ vv}{, jj}" } + +FUNCTION {one.complete.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +FUNCTION {string.length} +{ #0 'pos := + % If the next character exists, i.e., is not empty, + % add 1 to the string length. + % We cannot use empty$ because " " empty$ is true. + { duplicate$ pos #1 + #1 substring$ "" = not } + { pos #1 + 'pos := } + while$ + pop$ pos +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +FUNCTION {transform.spaces.and.hyphens} +{ 's := % The original string + s string.length 'len := % Its length (no. of characters) + "" 't := % Initialize the transformed string + #1 'pos := + #0 'brace.level := + % + % while (pos < len) do + % + { pos len < } + { % First, check whether we are at brace level 0 + brace.level #0 = + { + % At least two characters left: check for ". ", ".~", and ".-". + % If so, replace and shift two positions. + s pos #2 substring$ ". " = + s pos #2 substring$ ".~" = or + { t "\BPBI " * 't := + pos #2 + 'pos := + } + { s pos #2 substring$ ".-" = + { t "\BHBI " * 't := + pos #2 + 'pos := + } + { % neither is true, copy one character and shift one position + t s pos #1 substring$ * 't := + % Check whether we need to increase brace level. + % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture + % \{, \verb+}+, etc. + % Note also that unbalanced braces cause problems. + s pos #1 substring$ "{" = + { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := } + 'skip$ + if$ + pos #1 + 'pos := + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { % Not at brace level 0: copy result literally + t s pos #1 substring$ * 't := + % Check whether we need to increase or decrease brace level. + % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture + % \{, \verb+}+, etc. + s pos #1 substring$ "{" = + { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := } + { s pos #1 substring$ "}" = + { brace.level #1 - 'brace.level := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pos #1 + 'pos := + } + if$ + } + while$ + % + pos len = + { % Last character, copy + t s pos #1 substring$ * 't := + } + { % pos = len + 1, so s ends with ". " or ".-" + % This should not have happened, but make the best out of it. + % Push last two characters of s on the stack, i.e., ". " or ".-". + s len #1 - #2 substring$ + % Remove "\BPBI " or "\BHBI " from t + t text.length$ 'len := % Length of t (no. of characters) + t #1 len #6 - substring$ + % Concatenate and assign to t + swap$ * 't := + } + if$ + % + % Now push the result back on the stack + t +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +FUNCTION {format.initials.with.hyphen} +{ % Format initials. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.initials.with.hyphen + % e.g. + % author #1 format.initials.with.hyphen + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + % First, format initials in the default way, retaining spaces + % and hyphens. + initials.with.space.name.format format.name$ + transform.spaces.and.hyphens +} + +FUNCTION {format.last.part.name} +{ % Format a name with last.part.name.format, + % as part of more complicated things. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.last.part.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.last.part.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + last.part.name.format format.name$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.von.last.junior.name} +{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format, + % for citing or as part of more complicated things. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.von.last.junior.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.von.last.junior.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + von.last.junior.name.format format.name$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.von.junior.name} +{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format, + % for citing or as part of more complicated things. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.von.junior.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.von.junior.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + von.junior.name.format format.name$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.cite.initials.name} +{ % Format a name for citing with initials. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.cite.initials.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.cite.initials.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form, + % and push on the stack. + one.complete.name.format format.name$ + % + % Format the initials and push on the stack. + duplicate$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen + % + % Format the von-last-junior part and push on the stack. + swap$ #1 format.von.last.junior.name + % + % Connect with "~" hyphen (if they're both non-empty). + "~" connect.check +} + +FUNCTION {format.author.name} +{ % Format an author name for the reference list. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.author.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.author.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form, + % and push on the stack. + one.complete.name.format format.name$ + % + % Make two copies of the name, format the last name and push on the stack. + duplicate$ duplicate$ #1 format.last.part.name + % + % Format the initials and push on the stack. + swap$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen + % + % Connect with last name. + connect.with.comma.check + % + % Format the von-junior part and connect with initials. + swap$ #1 format.von.junior.name "" connect.check +} + +FUNCTION {format.editor.name} +{ % Format a name for the reference list as an editor. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.editor.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.editor.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + format.cite.initials.name +} + +FUNCTION {format.index.name} +{ % Format an author name for the index. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.index.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.index.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + format.author.name +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Some macro strings about commas, etc. between authors FUNCTION {comma.between.two} { "\BCBT{}" } @@ -2394,35 +2375,28 @@ FUNCTION {et.al.string} { "\ \BOthers{.}" } FUNCTION {et.al.string.period} { "\ \BOthersPeriod{.}" } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Add author index entry when desired. -% "field" must have been defined before and must contain the -% contents of the relevant author field. -% "nameptr" must also have been defined before. It is the -% number of the author that must be formatted. (So if it is -% #2, then the 2nd author must be formatted.) -% What's on top of the stack (the formatted author) is written -% to the .bbl file. FUNCTION {add.name.index} { % % make.index { "%" * write$ newline$ - "\protect\AX{" write$ + % Check for corporate author + field is.bibcorporate + { "\corporateAX{" } + { "\AX{" } + if$ + write$ field nameptr sort.name.format format.name$ sortify write$ newline$ "@" write$ - field nameptr index.name.format format.name$ "}%" * write$ newline$ + field nameptr format.index.name + "}%" * write$ newline$ } { "%" * write$ newline$ } if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Citation labels when author or editor may be used. -% Field is on top of the stack. -% -% Call with -% format.num.names field make.name.cite.label FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label} { 'field := @@ -2444,8 +2418,8 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label} % #1 'nameptr := cite.initials #1 = - { field nameptr cite.initials.name.format format.name$ } - { field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ } + { field nameptr format.cite.initials.name } + { field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ } if$ add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. % @@ -2544,8 +2518,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Citation labels when no author, editor, firstkey or key -% is available. FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label} { % @@ -2562,7 +2534,11 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label} { type empty$ { howpublished empty$ { note empty$ - { cite$ } + { url empty$ + { cite$ } + { url } + if$ + } { note } if$ } @@ -2588,7 +2564,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Citation labels when author or editor may be used. FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label} { author empty$ @@ -2615,7 +2590,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Citation labels when author (but not editor) may be used. FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label} { author empty$ @@ -2634,9 +2608,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make "a" or "b" supplement to year label when necessary. FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement} { % @@ -2663,7 +2635,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Add \protect if year is \BIP or \bibnodate. FUNCTION {protect.year} { year empty$ @@ -2681,7 +2652,6 @@ FUNCTION {protect.year} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make year label that is used for citations in text. FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label} { "{\protect\APACyear{" @@ -2717,16 +2687,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label} make.definitive.year.supplement enclose.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Make citation labels: -% - Full formatted author list (or substitute if no author -% available) for first citation; -% - Short formatted author list (ditto) for subsequent -% citations; -% - Year, with originalyear when applicable, and "a" or "b" -% etc. addendum when necessary. FUNCTION {make.cite.labels} { newline$ @@ -2806,14 +2767,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.cite.labels} "}%" write$ newline$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% FORMATTING OF REFERENCE LIST % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% "(Ed.)" or "(Eds.)" postfix. -% editor must not be empty FUNCTION {editor.postfix} { editor num.names$ #1 > @@ -2823,8 +2780,6 @@ FUNCTION {editor.postfix} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% "(Ed. \& Trans.)" postfix -% editor must not be empty FUNCTION {editor.trans.postfix} { editor num.names$ #1 > @@ -2846,15 +2801,6 @@ FUNCTION {trans.postfix} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format authors (or editors acting as authors) for -% reference list. -% -% Call with -% dot field format.author.names -% where field is the field (string) that contains the authors -% (or editors acting as authors) that must be formatted and -% dot is 1 or 0 indicating whether or not a period must end -% the formatting. FUNCTION {format.author.names} { 'field := @@ -2880,7 +2826,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} % Format first author % #1 'nameptr := - field nameptr author.name.format format.name$ + field nameptr format.author.name % % Add period if required and if this is the only author. % @@ -2917,7 +2863,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} % Format second author. % #2 'nameptr := - field nameptr author.name.format format.name$ 's := + field nameptr format.author.name 's := % % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others". % If so, insert "et al." string. @@ -2962,7 +2908,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} % % Format and add next author % - field nameptr author.name.format format.name$ + field nameptr format.author.name add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. % % Move to next author @@ -2974,7 +2920,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} % nameptr = format.num.names % Format this author. % - field nameptr author.name.format format.name$ 's := + field nameptr format.author.name 's := % format.num.names numnames = { % @@ -3035,8 +2981,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format authors in reference list, where it is given that -% the author field is not empty. FUNCTION {format.authors} { #1 author format.author.names @@ -3044,14 +2988,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.authors} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format editors in reference list in case editors act as -% authors (such as reference to entire edited book) -% -% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds.). -% or -% Letheridge, S. (Ed.). (if only 1 editor) -% -% editor must not be empty FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors} { #0 editor format.author.names @@ -3059,16 +2995,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% Format editors in reference list in case editors are also -% translators and act as authors (such as reference to entire -% edited book of translated articles) -% -% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds. and Trans.). -% or -% Letheridge, S. (Ed. and Trans.). (if only 1 editor) -% -% editor must not be empty FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors} { #0 editor format.author.names @@ -3076,14 +3002,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Format a list of names with the initials before the -% last names (i.e., names in the editor position), -% commas between names (not between 2), -% and ampersand (\&) before last name. -% These names are not put in the author index. -% -% Call with -% field format.editor.names FUNCTION {format.editor.names} { 'field := @@ -3098,7 +3016,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} % % Format first editor % - field #1 editor.name.format format.name$ + field #1 format.editor.name % numnames #1 = 'skip$ @@ -3109,7 +3027,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} % Given that format.num.names > 1, it is 2. % No comma. Format second editor. % - field #2 editor.name.format format.name$ 's := + field #2 format.editor.name 's := % % Check if 2nd editor is explicit "others". % If so, insert "et al." string. @@ -3133,7 +3051,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} % % Format and add next editor % - field nameptr editor.name.format format.name$ * + field nameptr format.editor.name * % % Move to next editor % @@ -3144,7 +3062,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} % nameptr = format.num.names % Format this editor. % - field nameptr editor.name.format format.name$ 's := + field nameptr format.editor.name 's := % format.num.names numnames = { % @@ -3176,7 +3094,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format editors in case editors do not act as authors @@ -3195,7 +3112,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.in.line} editor.postfix connect.with.space.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format editors in case editors are also translators @@ -3216,7 +3132,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.trans.in.line} editor.trans.postfix connect.with.space.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format translators in case translators act as editors @@ -3235,7 +3150,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.translators.in.line} trans.postfix connect.with.space.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format translators in case translator does not act as editor @@ -3312,9 +3226,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.translators.in.paren.check} FUNCTION {format.atrans.check} { format.translators.in.paren.check parenthesize.check } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format "In editor (Ed.), " @@ -3327,7 +3238,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.editors} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format "In translator (Trans.)," @@ -3340,8 +3250,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.trans} if$ } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format "In editor (Ed. and Trans.)" @@ -3369,69 +3277,54 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.editors.trans} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% DATE % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Formats year (+ extra label) between parentheses (which -% may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP). -% Extra label can be used for -% Bentler, P. M. (1983a) <article 1> -% Bentler, P. M. (1983b) <article 2> FUNCTION {format.year.check} -{ "\BBOP{}" "\BBCP{}" % Opening and closing parentheses +{ "\APACrefYear{" year empty$ - { "\bibnodate{}" } - { year } + { "\bibnodate{}" * } + { year * } if$ % % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary. % make.definitive.year.supplement * - % - % Combine everything - % - enclose.check + "}" * } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Formats year (+ extra label) + month + day between -% parentheses (which may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP). -% Extra label can be used for -% Bentler, P. M. (1983a, June 7) <article 1> -% Bentler, P. M. (1983b, April 4) <article 2> FUNCTION {format.year.month.day.check} -{ "\BBOP{}" "\BBCP{}" % Opening and closing parentheses +{ "\APACrefYearMonthDay{" year empty$ - { "\bibnodate{}" } - { year } + { "\bibnodate{}" * } + { year * } if$ % % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary. % make.definitive.year.supplement * + "}{" * % % Add month and day when present. % - month connect.with.comma.check - day connect.with.space.check - % - % Combine everything - % - enclose.check + month empty$ + 'skip$ + { month * } + if$ + "}{" * + day empty$ + 'skip$ + { day * } + if$ + "}" * } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% TITLE FORMATTING % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of article in journal or book @@ -3444,13 +3337,16 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot} "\BBCQ{}" swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "t" change.case$ } + { duplicate$ + % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ + "t" change.case$ + * "}" * + } if$ enclose.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of article in journal or book @@ -3460,15 +3356,19 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot} % FUNCTION {format.atitle.dot} { "\BBOQ{}" swap$ - "\BBCQ{} " swap$ + "\BBCQ{}" swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "t" change.case$ add.period$ } + { duplicate$ + % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ + "t" change.case$ + * "}" * add.period$ + } if$ enclose.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of article in journal or book @@ -3491,39 +3391,37 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.connect} if$ } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % - % title of book or so, no period - % + % title of book or so, without period % call with % field format.btitle.no.dot % FUNCTION {format.btitle.no.dot} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "t" change.case$ emphasize.check } + { duplicate$ + % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefbtitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ + "t" change.case$ + * "}" * + } if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of book or so, with period - % (maybe emphasize and add.period$ should be reversed) % call with % field format.btitle.dot % FUNCTION {format.btitle.dot} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "t" change.case$ add.period$ emphasize.check } + { add.period$ format.btitle.no.dot } if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of book and similar @@ -3569,10 +3467,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect.no.dot} % % format englishtitle (of nonenglish article, etc.) % -FUNCTION {format.etitle.check} +FUNCTION {format.aetitle.check} { englishtitle empty$ { "" } - { englishtitle "t" change.case$ bracket.check } + { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefaetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" * + englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format englishtitle (of nonenglish book, etc.) + % +FUNCTION {format.betitle.check} +{ englishtitle empty$ + { "" } + { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefbetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" * + englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" * + } if$ } @@ -3583,53 +3498,51 @@ FUNCTION {format.etitle.check} FUNCTION {format.atype.check} { type bracket.check } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format title and englishtitle (of article, etc.) % FUNCTION {format.atitle.check} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.aetitle.check title format.atitle.connect } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format title, englishtitle, and type % (of article, etc.) % FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.check} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.aetitle.check format.atype.check connect.with.space.check title format.atitle.connect } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format title, englishtitle, % and translator (of article, etc.) % FUNCTION {format.atitle.trans.check} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.aetitle.check format.atrans.check connect.with.space.check title format.atitle.connect } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format title, englishtitle, type, % and translator (of article, etc.) % FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.aetitle.check format.atype.check connect.with.space.check format.atrans.check connect.with.space.check title format.atitle.connect } +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -3639,13 +3552,24 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check} % FUNCTION { format.journal.vol.num.pages.check } { "journal" journal warning.if.empty - journal emphasize.check - volume emphasize.check connect.with.comma.check - number parenthesize.check "" connect.check - swap$ connect.with.comma.check + duplicate$ empty$ + journal empty$ and + volume empty$ and + number empty$ and + { pop$ "" } + { "\APACjournalVolNumPages{" journal "" connect.check + "}{" * volume "" connect.check + "}{" * number "" connect.check + "}{" * swap$ "" connect.check + "}" * + } + if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % volume of book, checks whether % "Volume" or "Volumes" @@ -3658,14 +3582,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check} 'skip$ { duplicate$ multi.result.check { "\BVOLS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } - { "\BVOL" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BVOL" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } if$ } if$ } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % edition of book, must not be empty @@ -3675,11 +3597,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check} FUNCTION {format.edition.check} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "\BEd" connect.with.space.check } + { "\PrintCardinal{" swap$ * "}" * + "\BEd" connect.with.space.check + } if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % volume and edition of book @@ -3690,9 +3613,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.check} connect.with.comma.check } - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % volume and edition of book @@ -3737,7 +3657,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.bpages.check} 'skip$ { duplicate$ multi.result.check { "\BPGS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } - { "\BPG" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BPG~" swap$ * } if$ } if$ @@ -3764,7 +3684,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.bchapter.check} if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % volume, edition, and pages or chapter of article in book etc. @@ -3778,25 +3697,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.pages} parenthesize.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title, volume, edition of book % FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.betitle.check format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check title format.btitle.connect.no.dot } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title, volume, edition, and translator of book % FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.betitle.check format.bvol.edition.trans connect.with.space.check title format.btitle.connect.no.dot } @@ -3806,12 +3722,15 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans} % title, volume, edition, editor, and translator of book % FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.betitle.check format.bvol.edition.editor.trans connect.with.space.check title format.btitle.connect.no.dot } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format address and publisher of book etc. % @@ -3822,10 +3741,28 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans} % New York (if publisher empty) % FUNCTION {format.address.publisher} -{ address publisher connect.with.colon.check } - - - +{ % + % If publisher = author or publisher = "author" or publisher = "Author" + % then hand over the final choice how to format this to \LaTeX. + % (I could imagine similar code for editors, but the APA manual does + % not mention it and then we'd have to check whether the editor is in + % the author position, so let's keep it simple until someone complains.) + % + author empty$ + publisher empty$ or + { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" } + { author publisher = + "author" publisher = or + "Author" publisher = or + { author "\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth{" } + { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" } + if$ + } + if$ + address "" connect.check "}{" * + % Recover publisher that was pushed onto the stack previously. + swap$ "" connect.check "}" * +} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -3842,10 +3779,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.address.publisher} FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.check} { "publisher" publisher warning.if.empty "address" address warning.if.empty - format.address.publisher + publisher empty$ + address empty$ + and + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.address.publisher + } + if$ } - +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -3858,7 +3807,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check} 'skip$ { duplicate$ multi.result.check { "\BNUMS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } - { "\BNUM" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BNUM" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } if$ } if$ @@ -3871,16 +3820,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check} % format.type.number % FUNCTION { format.type.number } -{ number empty$ - { type bracket.check } - { type - number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check +{ type empty$ + { type.2 } + { type } + if$ + number empty$ + { bracket.check } + { number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check parenthesize.check } if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format howpublished if not empty, % for various entry types @@ -3890,8 +3845,12 @@ FUNCTION { format.type.number } FUNCTION {format.howpublished} { howpublished empty$ 'skip$ - { output.dot.new.block - howpublished + { % clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + { output.dot.new.block } + if$ + "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * } if$ } @@ -3906,26 +3865,71 @@ FUNCTION {format.howpublished} FUNCTION {output.howpublished} { howpublished empty$ 'skip$ - { howpublished + { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * output.dot.new.block } if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% NOTE FORMATTING FUNCTIONS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % begin and end of url environment + % +FUNCTION {begin.end.url.env} +{ " \begin{APACrefURL} " + % For "Retrieved <date>, from" + lastchecked empty$ + 'skip$ + { "[{" * lastchecked * "}]" * } + if$ + " \end{APACrefURL} " +} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % - % format optional note + % begin and end of message environment % -FUNCTION {format.note} -{ note parenthesize.check } +FUNCTION {begin.end.msg.env} +{ " \begin{APACrefURLmsg} " + " \end{APACrefURLmsg} " +} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format url given that it is not empty, + % for various entry types + % call with + % format.url + % +FUNCTION {format.url} +{ % First format begin and end of the enclosing environment. + % With posted messages, a different environment is used. + type.2 empty$ + { begin.end.url.env } + { type.2 "\bibmessage" = + { begin.end.msg.env } + { begin.end.url.env } + if$ + } + if$ + % The url string. + "\url{" url * "}" * + % Enclose in begin and end environment + enclose.check +} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format optional note + % +FUNCTION {format.note} +{ "\APACrefnote{" "}" note enclose.check } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -3934,33 +3938,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.note} % FUNCTION {format.orig.year.note} { originalyear empty$ - { note parenthesize.check } - { originalyear "\bibnodate" = - { note parenthesize.check } - { "\BOWP{} " originalyear * % original work published - note connect.with.semicolon.check - parenthesize.check - } - if$ + { format.note } + { "\APACorigyearnote{" + originalyear "" connect.check "}{" * + note "" connect.check "}" * } if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format original journal of publication and note % (reprint or translation) % FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note} -{ "\BREPR{} " % reprinted from - originaljournal emphasize.check * - originalyear connect.with.comma.check - originalvolume emphasize.check connect.with.comma.check - originalnumber bracket.check "" connect.check - originalpages connect.with.comma.check - note connect.with.semicolon.check - parenthesize.check +{ "\APACorigjournalnote{" + originalyear "" connect.check "}{" * + originaljournal "" connect.check "}{" * + originalvolume "" connect.check "}{" * + originalnumber "" connect.check "}{" * + originalpages "" connect.check "}{" * + note "" connect.check "}" * } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -3969,42 +3967,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note} % (reprint or translation) % FUNCTION {format.orig.book.note} -{ "\BREPR{}" % Reprinted from - % - % title of the book the work was originally published in - % - originalbooktitle format.btitle.no.dot connect.with.space.check - % - % volume, edition, pages - % - originaledition format.edition.check connect.with.comma.check - originalvolume format.bvolume.check connect.with.comma.check - originalpages format.bpages.check connect.with.comma.check - % - % editor of the original book +{ "\APACorigbooknote{" originalyear "" connect.check "}{" * % originaleditor empty$ 'skip$ - { "by " originaleditor format.editor.names * - originaleditor num.names$ #1 > - { ", \BEDS{}" * } - { ", \BED{}" * } + { originaleditor num.names$ #1 > + { "\APACorigEDS{" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * } + { "\APACorigED{" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * } if$ - connect.with.comma.check } if$ % - % year of the original publication - % - originalyear connect.with.comma.check - % - originaladdress originalpublisher connect.with.colon.check - connect.with.comma.check - note connect.with.semicolon.check - parenthesize.check + "}{" * + originalbooktitle format.btitle.no.dot "" connect.check "}{" * + originaledition format.edition.check "" connect.check "}{" * + originalvolume format.bvolume.check "" connect.check "}{" * + originalpages format.bpages.check "" connect.check "}{" * + originaladdress "" connect.check "}{" * + originalpublisher "" connect.check "}{" * + note "" connect.check "}" * } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format information about original publication of reprint @@ -4015,38 +3998,35 @@ FUNCTION {format.orig.note} { originalbooktitle empty$ { note empty$ { originalyear empty$ - { add.period$ } + 'skip$ { originalyear "\bibnodate" = - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { output.new.block format.orig.year.note } if$ } if$ } - { output.dot.new.block + { output.new.block format.orig.year.note } if$ } - { output.dot.new.block + { output.new.block format.orig.book.note } if$ } - { output.dot.new.block + { output.new.block format.orig.journal.note } if$ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% PERIODICALS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % article in periodical: journal, magazine, newspaper, ... @@ -4110,7 +4090,20 @@ FUNCTION {periodical} % if not empty, insert howpublished. % (used if article is retrieved from the internet) % - format.howpublished + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % possible reprint and optional note % @@ -4118,8 +4111,6 @@ FUNCTION {periodical} fin.entry } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % journal article @@ -4127,8 +4118,6 @@ FUNCTION {periodical} FUNCTION {article} { pages format.year.month.day.check periodical } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % magazine article @@ -4136,8 +4125,6 @@ FUNCTION {article} FUNCTION {magazine} { pages format.year.month.day.check periodical } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % newspaper article @@ -4145,8 +4132,6 @@ FUNCTION {magazine} FUNCTION {newspaper} { pages format.bpages.check format.year.month.day.check periodical } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % (translation of) entire book @@ -4168,7 +4153,7 @@ FUNCTION {book} { format.btitle.vol.edition.trans format.type.number connect.with.space.check output.dot.new.block - format.year.check output.dot.new.block + format.year.check add.period$ } % % format editor and year, and check if year is present @@ -4196,7 +4181,7 @@ FUNCTION {book} } if$ format.type.number connect.with.space.check - output.dot.new.block + add.period$ } if$ } @@ -4208,7 +4193,7 @@ FUNCTION {book} format.year.check output.dot.new.block format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans format.type.number connect.with.space.check - output.dot.new.block + add.period$ } if$ % @@ -4216,6 +4201,24 @@ FUNCTION {book} % format.address.publisher.check % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if book is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % % format original publication (of reprint/translation) % and optional note % @@ -4223,7 +4226,6 @@ FUNCTION {book} fin.entry } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % (translated) article or chapter in edited book @@ -4246,7 +4248,7 @@ FUNCTION {incollection} % esp. for ``collections'' that are not books, % such as parts of internet documents % - format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ } % % format author and year, and check if year is present @@ -4258,25 +4260,38 @@ FUNCTION {incollection} { format.atitle.type.trans.check } { format.atitle.type.check } if$ - output.new.block } if$ % % format "In " editor " (Ed. \& Trans.), " % booktitle, volume, edition, pages % + output.new.block format.in.editors.trans format.bvol.edition.pages - booktitle format.btitle.connect * output.dot.new.block + booktitle format.btitle.connect * add.period$ % % format address and publisher, check if publisher present % format.address.publisher.check - % - % if not empty, insert howpublished. - % (used if article is retrieved from the internet) - % - format.howpublished + % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if article is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % format original publication (of reprint/translation) % and optional note @@ -4286,10 +4301,8 @@ FUNCTION {incollection} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% REPORTS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % technical report number @@ -4311,14 +4324,36 @@ FUNCTION {format.tr.number} % title, volume, edition, report number % FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number} -{ format.etitle.check - format.bvol.edition.check - format.tr.number connect.with.semicolon.check - parenthesize.check connect.with.space.check +{ format.betitle.check + % Single out the situation in which there is no number + % and type = {\bibnotype}, i.e., no type as well. + % (Why not use book then?) + type empty$ + { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a + % number, a type, a volume, or an edition. + "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" * + format.tr.number * "}" * + } + { type "\bibnotype" = + number empty$ + volume empty$ + edition empty$ + and + and + and + { "" } + { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a + % number, a type, a volume, or an edition. + "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" * + format.tr.number * "}" * + } + if$ + } + if$ + connect.with.space.check title format.btitle.connect } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % format address and institution of reports etc. @@ -4332,10 +4367,38 @@ FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number} FUNCTION {format.address.institution.check} { "institution" institution warning.if.empty "address" address warning.if.empty - address institution connect.with.colon.check + institution empty$ + address empty$ + and + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + % + % If institution = author or institution = "author" + % or institution = "Author" then hand over the final choice how to + % format this to \LaTeX. See also format.address.publisher + % + author empty$ + institution empty$ or + { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" } + { author institution = + "author" institution = or + "Author" institution = or + { author "\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth{" } + { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" } + if$ + } + if$ + address "" connect.check "}{" * + % Recover institution that was pushed onto the stack previously. + swap$ "" connect.check "}" * + } + if$ } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % reports @@ -4351,7 +4414,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport} % title formatted as book title % { format.tr.title.number output.dot.new.block - format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ } % % format editor and year, and check if year is present @@ -4360,7 +4423,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport} % { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - format.tr.title.number output.dot.new.block + format.tr.title.number add.period$ } if$ } @@ -4371,7 +4434,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport} % { format.authors start.new.block format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - format.tr.title.number output.dot.new.block + format.tr.title.number add.period$ } if$ % @@ -4382,21 +4445,36 @@ FUNCTION {techreport} % if not empty, insert howpublished. % (used if report is retrieved from the internet) % - format.howpublished + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ format.note } if$ fin.entry } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % (translated) article or chapter in report @@ -4437,13 +4515,13 @@ FUNCTION {intechreport} % % volume, edition, report type and number, pages % - format.bvol.edition.check - format.tr.number connect.with.semicolon.check - pages format.bpages.check connect.with.comma.check - parenthesize.check + "\APACbVolEdTRpgs{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" * + format.tr.number * + "}{" * pages format.bpages.check * + "}" * % booktitle format.btitle.connect * - output.dot.new.block + add.period$ % % format address and publisher, check if publisher present % @@ -4452,7 +4530,20 @@ FUNCTION {intechreport} % if not empty, insert howpublished. % (used if report is retrieved from the internet) % - format.howpublished + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % format original publication (of reprint/translation) % and optional note @@ -4477,12 +4568,15 @@ FUNCTION {lecture} % format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block symposium empty$ - { format.etitle.check + { format.betitle.check title format.btitle.connect output.new.block howpublished empty$ - { "symposium and howpublished missing in " * cite$ warning$ } - { howpublished } + { "symposium and howpublished missing in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * } if$ + address connect.with.comma.check } { format.atitle.type.check output.new.block "\BIn{} " @@ -4498,26 +4592,42 @@ FUNCTION {lecture} if$ symposium format.btitle.no.dot * format.howpublished + address connect.with.comma.check + } + if$ + add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url } if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ format.note } if$ fin.entry } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% THESES % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % default thesis type is on top of stack @@ -4535,8 +4645,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.type.school} school connect.with.comma.check } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % phd theses, etc. @@ -4583,7 +4691,7 @@ FUNCTION {thesis} parenthesize.check } if$ - format.etitle.check + format.aetitle.check swap$ connect.with.space.check "title" title warning.if.empty title format.atitle.connect output.new.block @@ -4594,20 +4702,36 @@ FUNCTION {thesis} % if not empty, insert howpublished. % (used if thesis is retrieved from the internet) % - format.howpublished + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ format.note } if$ fin.entry } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % phd theses, etc. @@ -4615,7 +4739,6 @@ FUNCTION {thesis} FUNCTION {phdthesis} { "\BPhD" "\BUPhD" thesis } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % master's theses, etc. @@ -4623,13 +4746,9 @@ FUNCTION {phdthesis} FUNCTION {mastersthesis} { "\BMTh" "\BUMTh" thesis } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% OTHER % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % title of something (used in unpublished and misc) @@ -4637,7 +4756,8 @@ FUNCTION {mastersthesis} % type and number of something % FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num} -{ format.etitle.check +{ format.betitle.check + format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check format.type.number connect.with.space.check title empty$ @@ -4653,11 +4773,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num} % type and number of something % FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num} -{ format.etitle.check - type "\bibmessage" = +{ format.aetitle.check + format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check + type.2 "\bibmessage" = { number empty$ 'skip$ - { type number connect.with.space.check + { type.2 number tie.or.space.connect bracket.check connect.with.space.check } @@ -4679,23 +4800,16 @@ FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num} % type and number of something (used in misc) % FUNCTION {output.misctitle.type.num} -{ type empty$ +{ type.2 empty$ { format.btitle.type.num } - { type "\bibmessage" = - type "\bibcomputerprogram" = - type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" = - type "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" = - type "\bibcomputersoftware" = - type "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" = - type "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" = - type "\bibprogramminglanguage" = - or - or - or - or - or - or - or + { type.2 "\bibmessage" = + type.2 "\bibcomputerprogram" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputersoftware" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" = or + type.2 "\bibprogramminglanguage" = or { format.mtitle.type.num } { format.btitle.type.num } if$ @@ -4718,8 +4832,8 @@ FUNCTION {unpublished} % no author or editor: title serves as author. % title formatted as book title % - { format.btitle.type.num output.dot.new.block - format.year.month.day.check + { format.btitle.type.num output.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ } % % format editor and year, and check if year is present @@ -4742,36 +4856,59 @@ FUNCTION {unpublished} } if$ howpublished empty$ - organization empty$ - address empty$ - and - and + organization empty$ and + address empty$ and 'skip$ - { output.dot.new.block - howpublished + { output.new.block + "\APAChowpublished{" "}" howpublished enclose.check organization connect.with.comma.check address connect.with.comma.check + add.period$ + } + if$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url } if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { add.period$ } - { output.dot.new.block + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ format.note } if$ fin.entry } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % nonprint media and other things that don't fit % FUNCTION {misc} -{ author empty$ +{ % + % To handle @manual: use type.2 instead of type. + type.2 empty$ + type empty$ not and + { type 'type.2 := } + 'skip$ + if$ + % + author empty$ % % no author: possibly edited item with editors as authors % @@ -4782,19 +4919,20 @@ FUNCTION {misc} % % if no title and no type, howpublished is title % - { title empty$ - type empty$ - and + { title empty$ + type.2 empty$ and { howpublished empty$ { "No author, editor, title, type, and howpublished in " - cite$ * warning$ } - { howpublished output.dot.new.block } + cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * add.period$ } if$ - format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ } { output.misctitle.type.num output.new.block - format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - output.howpublished + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ + format.howpublished add.period$ } if$ } @@ -4804,8 +4942,8 @@ FUNCTION {misc} % { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - output.misctitle.type.num output.new.block - output.howpublished + output.misctitle.type.num + format.howpublished add.period$ } if$ } @@ -4816,24 +4954,47 @@ FUNCTION {misc} % { format.authors start.new.block format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block - output.misctitle.type.num output.new.block - output.howpublished + output.misctitle.type.num + format.howpublished add.period$ } if$ - address empty$ - publisher empty$ - and + % + address empty$ + publisher empty$ and + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.address.publisher add.period$ + } + if$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ 'skip$ - { format.address.publisher - output.dot.new.block + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url } if$ % % format optional note % note empty$ - { "" } - { format.note } + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.note + } if$ fin.entry } @@ -4853,16 +5014,26 @@ FUNCTION {literal} fin.entry } +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % technical documentation + % +FUNCTION {manual} +{ % + % If type is empty, assume that it is a computer software manual. + % + type empty$ + { "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" 'type.2 := } + 'skip$ + if$ + misc +} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % following functions not used for APA Manual examples % - - - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % booklet @@ -4870,7 +5041,6 @@ FUNCTION {literal} FUNCTION {booklet} { misc } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % part of a book @@ -4878,7 +5048,6 @@ FUNCTION {booklet} FUNCTION {inbook} { incollection } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % article in proceedings @@ -4886,16 +5055,12 @@ FUNCTION {inbook} FUNCTION {inproceedings} { incollection } - - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % - % technical documentation + % article in proceedings (Kopka & Daly, 2004, p. 230) % -FUNCTION {manual} -{ misc } - - +FUNCTION {conference} +{ inproceedings } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -4904,7 +5069,6 @@ FUNCTION {manual} FUNCTION {proceedings} { misc } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % unknown types @@ -4912,17 +5076,13 @@ FUNCTION {proceedings} FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% INITIALIZATION FUNCTIONS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% FUNCTION {initialize} { % % Maximum number of names to be formatted . #6 'name.max := -% #250 'entry.max$ := -% #5000 'global.max$ := } FUNCTION {init.old.number} @@ -4961,12 +5121,9 @@ FUNCTION {move.backward} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% BASIC BIBLIOGRAPHY OUTPUT FUNCTIONS % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Beginning of the thebibliography environment: -% Write preamble if there is one, write \begin command FUNCTION {begin.bib} { preamble$ empty$ @@ -4977,7 +5134,6 @@ FUNCTION {begin.bib} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Write \end{thebibliography} command FUNCTION {end.bib} { newline$ @@ -4985,8 +5141,6 @@ FUNCTION {end.bib} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Write the citation labels and reference list entry to -% the .bbl file. FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry} { % @@ -5000,20 +5154,17 @@ FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry} } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% READ AND PROCESS ENTRIES, MAKE THEBIBLIOGRAPHY % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Read entries . - READ -% Some initializations . + +EXECUTE { identify.apacite.version } + EXECUTE { initialize } -% Sort items by title in order to replace each title by -% its number in later sorting . ITERATE { make.sort.title } @@ -5025,17 +5176,11 @@ EXECUTE { init.old.label } ITERATE { make.title.number } -% Now generate some tentative author-year labels and do some -% preprocessing for the later definitive author and year -% labels. ITERATE { make.tentative.sort.label } SORT -% Now check whether initials must be added to first author, -% how many authors must be formatted, whether an "a", "b", -% etc., must be added to the year label. ITERATE { init.cite.initials.add.to.year } @@ -5062,30 +5207,21 @@ EXECUTE { move.backward } REVERSE { definitive.cite.num.names } -% Make final sorting label and do definitive sorting . - ITERATE { make.final.sort.key } SORT -% Write preamble and \begin{thebibliography}{} statement EXECUTE { begin.bib } -% Make final cite labels, format reference list entry, -% and write to .bbl file. ITERATE { write.bbl.entry } -% Write \end{thebibliography} statement - EXECUTE { end.bib } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% DONE % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% EOF apacitex.bst -% +%% +%% +%% End of file `apacitex.bst'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/README index 169ae847d17..b37c2945d3e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/README @@ -1,70 +1,66 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `README'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-THE APACITE PACKAGE [2005/06/08]
-================================
-
-The apacite package (for LaTeX and BibTeX) attempts to capture the
-requirements of the American Psychological Association concerning citations
-and reference list as closely as possible. In addition, it provides a large
-number of options and other possibilities for customization, so that a wide
-range of citation styles and reference list styles can be handled.
-Furthermore, it also provides the possibility of automatically generating an
-author index.
-
-The documentation of the apacite package is in the file apacite.pdf. This file
-can also be generated by processing the file apacite.tex, which in this way
-acts as an extensive test of the package. To get the references, the author
-index, and the table of contents of apacite.tex right, the following list of
-commands must be executed:
-
-latex apacite
-bibtex apacite
-latex apacite
-latex apacite
-latex apacite
-makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx
-latex apacite
-latex apacite
-makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx
-latex apacite
-
-So 10 runs are necessary in order to get everything OK. Apart from this, the
-url package (url.sty) must be available in a place where TeX can find it. This
-is not necessary for the apacite package itself, but for the test examples
-from the APA manual that are used in the document apacite.tex. Furthermore,
-the index package (index.sty, available from CTAN; search for index.sty or
-index.dtx) must be available in a place where TeX can find it. This is
-necessary for the apacite package if an author index is requested, and this is
-done in the document apacite.tex.
-
-If you have a problem with the package/bibstyle that is not described in the
-documentation, please locate it as specifically as possible and E-Mail me a
-short but comprehensive description of the problem and the pieces of the .tex
-and .bib files that seem to be invoking the problem. If I have time, I will
-have a look and answer (and, I hope, solve the problem).
-
-Good luck with it!
-
-Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-
+ +THE APACITE PACKAGE +=================== + +Description +----------- + +The apacite package (for LaTeX and BibTeX) implements the requirements +of the American Psychological Association concerning citations and +reference list. In addition, it provides a large number of options and +other possibilities for customization, so that a wide range of citation +styles and reference list styles can be handled. Furthermore, it also +provides the possibility of automatically generating an author index. + + +Copyright and license +--------------------- + +Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +elsewhere in this package. + +This package may be distributed and/or modified under the +conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +version. The latest version of this license is in: + + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + +and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. + +See the file apacite.dtx for more details. + + +Building the package and its documentation +------------------------------------------ + +The generated LaTeX package (.sty), BibTeX style (.bst), and supporting +files (.apc, .bib, .drv) are extracted by running: + +tex apacite.ins + + +The documentation is generated by the following sequence: + +pdflatex apacite.drv <== Produces apacite.pdf (documentation) +bibtex apacite <== Produces apacite.bbl (reference list) +pdflatex apacite.drv <== Include ref. list +pdflatex apacite.drv <== Resolve citations +pdflatex apacite.drv <== 'Labels may have changed' +makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx <== (author index) +pdflatex apacite.drv <== Include author index +pdflatex apacite.drv <== Resolve table of contents + +Note that apacite comes with pre-built documentation (PDF format, +U.S. letter-sized paper), so you only need to regenerate the +documentation if you are unhappy with the documentation as +provided. For example, if you want to generate a version for +A4 paper, or if you want the full reference manual, including the +documented source code and change log. In the latter case, +insert the following lines in the sequence, after generating +the author index: + +makeindex -s gind.ist apacite <== Produces apacite.ind (code index) +makeindex -s gglo.ist -o apacite.gls apacite.glo <== (change log) + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.pdf Binary files differindex 8cb868f330c..ed50e7a8167 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 5f7c318f3d9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4082 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% This is file `apacite.tex'. -% -% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed -% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the `apacite' package. -% ------------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a -% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'. -% -% \fi - -%% apacite.tex : User's manual and test of the apacite package -%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl> -%% This version: [2005/06/08] -%% -%% See the README file for instructions how to process this file. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% BASIC DOCUMENTCLASS AND LOADING OF PACKAGES -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\documentclass{article} - -%%% The following line can be uncommented to test compatibility with TeX4ht. -%\usepackage{tex4ht} - -%%% The following line is used for references to internet sources. -%%% It is not generally necessary for apacite, but used in the examples. -\usepackage{url} - -%%% The following lines can be uncommented to test compatibility with -%%% the mentioned other packages and test the language support of -%%% apacite. -%\usepackage[dvips,pagebackref]{hyperref}% citations are not links here -%\usepackage[english]{babel}% babel must be loaded before apacite -%\usepackage{german} - -%%% Loading apacite with (or without) author index option. -%\usepackage[tocindex,hyper]{apacite} -\usepackage[tocindex]{apacite} -%\usepackage{apacite} - -%%% More compatibility tests with other packages. -%\usepackage{backref}% the order of backref vs. apacite seems irrelevant -%\usepackage[dvips,pagebackref]{hyperref} % 1991a does not work here - -%%% Explicitly check loading of backref. This information -%%% is used at the end of the document to change a few settings in order -%%% to prevent some errors. This explicit check is more convenient than -%%% simply defining the corresponding \if..., because the \usepackage's -%%% above can now be commented or uncommented without having to worry -%%% about these side-effects. -\makeatletter -\newif\ifbackrefloaded -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{\backrefloadedtrue}{\backrefloadedfalse}% -} -\makeatother - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS THAT MAY BE USEFUL FOR WIDER USE. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Corporate author -\newcommand{\bibcorporate}[1]{#1} - -% Echo argument literally. Can be used to define a certain author type -% (``Producer'') in a place where \BibTeX{} expects a first name. -% Using this command between a pair of braces makes sure that the text -% is not abbreviated into an initial. -\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{#1} - -% If the argument is a period (`.'), \BibTeX{} puts no period after it. -\newcommand{\bibnodot}[1]{} - -% For ``On cdtitle [CD]'' etc., to be used instead of ``In''. -\newcommand{\BOn}{On} - -% Reverse order. Can be used for various reasons. -\newcommand{\SwapArgs}[2]{#2#1} - -% The following macro is esp. useful if the year field must be different -% in text and in reference list. E.g., if 1992/1993 in text and 1992 -% in reference list. Then year can be defined as \bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}. -% The definition below displays only the second argument (``text''). -% Just before the reference list, this can then be changed to -% display only the first argument (``ref''). -\newcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{#2} - -% The same command, but now intended for Dutch-style ``von'' parts. -\newcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{#2} - -% The following macro changes the definitions of the macros \BED and \BEDS -% to the argument and then immediately changes the definitions back to their -% old definitions. So it makes a one-time change. Can be used to use -% ``Producer'' instead of ``Ed.'' etc. -\newcommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{\relax}% -\def\renewbibeditortype{% - \def\oldBED{}% - \def\oldBEDS{}% - \def\bibeditortype##1{% - \global\let\oldBED\BED - \global\let\oldBEDS\BEDS - \global\def\BED{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}% - \global\def\BEDS{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}% - }% -} - -% The following macro changes the definition of the macro \BIn to the -% argument and then immediately changes the definition back to the old -% definition. So it makes a one-time change. Can be used to use ``On'' -% instead of ``In'' for a CD-track. -\newcommand{\bibInstring}[1]{% - \global\let\oldBIn\BIn - \global\def\BIn{#1\global\let\BIn\oldBIn}% -} - -% The \bibskipbracenodot macro suppresses the period after a following closing -% brace. It does not work entirely well at the moment. In particular, it -% works differently in an \AX macro in text and an \AX macro in the -% reference list. This has something to do with robust vs. fragile macros -% and/or expansion of the macro. I have experimented a lot with many -% variations, but don't seem to get it right. I don't understand these -% issues well yet. -\makeatletter -\def\swallownext#1{\relax} -\def\swallowdot{% - \@ifnextchar.% - {\swallownext}% - {\relax}% -} - -% When the above does not work, \bibskipbracenodot should reduce to nothing. -% This is the current definition. Just before the bibliography, it is -% redefined. -\def\bibskipbracenodot{\noexpand\bibskipbracenodot} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% CITATIONS TO THE BIBLE -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% The APA manual gives some rules how the Bible and other classic -% works should be cited. These rules are not implemented in standard -% apacite, so I provide a workaround here. - -%%% To define which Bible version you used. -\def\bibleversion#1{\gdef\@bibleversion{#1}} -\def\@bibleversion{Revised Standard Version} - -\def\bibleciteA#1{% - % If this is the first citation, add bible version. - {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}% - {\fullbibleciteA{#1}}% - {\shortbibleciteA{#1}}% - }% -} - -\def\fullbibleciteA#1{% - % Insert relevant chapter and verse. - {#1}% - { \BBOP\@bibleversion\BBCP}% - % Flag that bible has been cited. - {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% -} - -\def\shortbibleciteA#1{% - % Insert relevant chapter and verse. - {#1}% - % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?). - {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% -} - -\def\biblecite#1{% - % If this is the first citation, add bible version. - {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}% - {\fullbiblecite{#1}}% - {\shortbiblecite{#1}}% - }% -} - -\def\fullbiblecite#1{% - % Open parenthesis. - {\BBOP}% - % Insert relevant chapter and verse. - {#1}% - % Add bible version. - {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}% - % Close parenthesis. - {\BBCP}% - % Flag that bible has been cited. - {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% -} - -\def\shortbiblecite#1{% - % Open parenthesis. - {\BBOP}% - % Insert relevant chapter and verse. - {#1}% - % Close parenthesis. - {\BBCP}% - % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?). - {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% -} - -\def\bibleciteNP#1{% - % If this is the first citation, add bible version. - {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}% - {\fullbibleciteNP{#1}}% - {\shortbibleciteNP{#1}}% - }% -} - -\def\fullbibleciteNP#1{% - % Insert relevant chapter and verse. - {#1}% - % Add bible version. - {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}% - % Flag that bible has been cited. - {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% -} - -\def\shortbibleciteNP#1{% - % Insert relevant chapter and verse. - {#1}% - % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?). - {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% COMMANDS TO CITE SONGS. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% The APA manual gives some rules how songs should be cited. These -% rules require some tweaking of standard apacite. This is done here. - -\newcommand{\bibsong}[4]{} - -\newcommand{\citeAsong}[1]{% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% - \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% - }% - \citeauthor{#1}% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% -} - -\newcommand{\fullciteAsong}[1]{% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% - \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% - }% - \fullciteauthor{#1}% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% -} - -\newcommand{\shortciteAsong}[1]{% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% - \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% - }% - \shortciteauthor{#1}% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% -} - -\newcommand{\citesong}[1]{% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% - {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% - }% - \citeauthor{#1}% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% -} - -\newcommand{\fullcitesong}[1]{% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% - {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% - }% - \fullciteauthor{#1}% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% -} - -\newcommand{\shortcitesong}[1]{% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% - {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% - }% - \shortciteauthor{#1}% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% -} - -\newcommand{\citesongNP}[1]{% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% - \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}% - }% - \citeauthor{#1}% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% -} - -\newcommand{\fullcitesongNP}[1]{% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% - \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}% - }% - \fullciteauthor{#1}% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% -} - -\newcommand{\shortcitesongNP}[1]{% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% - \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}% - }% - \shortciteauthor{#1}% - \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% COMMANDS TO CITE DSM. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% The APA manual gives some rules how the DSM should be cited, which -% is a bit different from ordinary citations. These rules are not -% implemented in standard apacite, so I provide a workaround here. - -\newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{% - \@for\@citec:=#1\do{% - % Check whether citation is defined. - \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}% - {\citeA{\@citec}}% - {\citeauthor{\@citec}}% - }% -} - -\newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{% - \fullciteA{#1}% -} - -\newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{% - \shortciteauthor{#1}% -} - -\newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{% - {\BBOP}% - \@for\@citec:=#1\do{% - % Check whether citation is defined. - \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}% - {\citeNP{\@citec}}% - {\citeauthor{\@citec}}% - }% - {\BBCP}% -} - -\newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{% - \fullcite{#1}% -} - -\newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{% - {\BBOP}\shortciteauthor{#1}{\BBCP}% -} - -\newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{% - \@for\@citec:=#1\do{% - % Check whether citation is defined. - \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}% - {\citeNP{\@citec}}% - {\citeauthor{\@citec}}% - } -} - -\newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{% - \fullciteNP{#1}% -} - -\newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{% - \shortciteauthor{#1}% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% These are some commands that are used in this document, but are -% presumably not especially relevant for users. - -\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em - T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}% copied from bibtex.web -\newcommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}} -\newcommand{\latextohtml}{\textup{\LaTeX2\texttt{HTML}}}% from html.sty -\newcommand{\LaTeXrtf}{\textup{\LaTeX2RTF}}% -\newcommand{\TeXht}{\textup{\TeX4ht}}% -\newcommand{\Perl}{\textsl{Perl}}% - -% My comments accompanying the examples. -\newcommand{\EM}{\ensuremath{\triangleright\quad}} - -% The date of a version of apacite. Makes it easy to search the document -% for these dates. The \relax is a safety measure (probably not needed), -% which ensures that the square brackets are never interpreted as an -% optional argument. -\newcommand{\APACversiondate}[1]{\relax [#1]} - -\newcommand{\LC}{\mbox{${}^{\dag}$}}% \LaTeX{} Companion -\newcommand{\X}{\ensuremath{\times}}% for one table -\newcommand{\Y}{\ensuremath{c}}% for one table - -\newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}% package name -\newcommand{\fname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% file name -\newcommand{\fieldname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% field name -\newcommand{\entryname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% entry type name -\newcommand{\pkgoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% package option -\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}% command, incl. `\' - -% Some trickery with backslashes and @ signs. -\newcommand{\bs}{{\ttfamily \@backslashchar}}% backslash -\newcommand{\opt}[1]{$\langle${\itshape #1}$\rangle$}% generic text - -% For \nocite{keys}: -\newcommand{\cmdtwo}[2]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1\{}\opt{#2}% - \texttt{\}}}}% -% For \cite[post]{keys}: -\newcommand{\cmdthree}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}% - \texttt{]\{}\opt{#3}% - \texttt{\}}}}% -% For \cite<pre>{keys}: -\newcommand{\cmdthreepre}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}% - \texttt{>\{}\opt{#3}% - \texttt{\}}}}% -% For \usepackage[options]{apacite}: -\newcommand{\cmdthreealt}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}% - \texttt{]\{#3\}}}}% -% For all \cite<pre>[post]{keys} variants: -\newcommand{\cmdfour}[4]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}% - \texttt{>[}\opt{#3}% - \texttt{]\{}\opt{#4}% - \texttt{\}}}}% - -% It is not clear where and how the \flqq command is defined, so provide -% an escape if it is not available. -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{flqq}{% - \newcommand{\flqq}{\raisebox{2pt}{\ensuremath{{\scriptscriptstyle\ll}}}}% - \newcommand{\frqq}{\raisebox{2pt}{\ensuremath{{\scriptscriptstyle\gg}}}}% - }{}}% - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\makeatother -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% START OF ``NORMAL'' PART OF DOCUMENT -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\title{The \pkg{apacite} package\vspace{0.3\baselineskip}\\ - \large Citation and reference list with \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} - according to the rules of the American Psychological Association} -\author{Erik Meijer\\ - \normalsize\itshape - Department of Econometrics, - University of Groningen\\ - \normalsize\itshape - PO Box 800, - 9700 AV Groningen, - The Netherlands\\ - \normalsize - E-Mail: \textsf{e.meijer@eco.rug.nl} -} -\date{June 8, 2005} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\begin{document} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\maketitle -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\begin{abstract} - \noindent - This document describes and tests the \pkg{apacite} package - \APACversiondate{2005/06/08}. This is a package that can be used with - \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} to generate citations and a reference list, - formatted according to the rules of the American Psychological Association. - Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} contains an option to (almost) automatically - generate an author index as well. The package can be customized in many - ways. -\end{abstract} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\tableofcontents -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Introduction} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The American Psychological Association (APA) is very strict about the style in -which manuscripts submitted to its journals are written and formatted. The -requirements of the APA are described in the \emph{Publication Manual of the -American Psychological Association}, the latest version of which is the 5th -edition \cite{APAManual}. In the sequel, this is simply called the \emph{APA -manual}. - -The APA manual discusses how candidate authors should write their manuscripts: -writing style, parts of a manuscript and their order, presentation of the -results in the form of tables and figures, and so forth. Candidate authors -should study this and adhere to this. - -The APA manual also gives specific rules about the formatting of a manuscript. -This includes double spacing, a running head, the typographic style of section -headings, the placement of tables and figures on separate pages at the end of -the document, and so forth. \LaTeX{} users will recognize these as ``style'' -elements that should be defined in a package (\fname{.sty} file) or class -(\fname{.cls} file). Their specific documents (\fname{.tex} file) should be -largely style-independent. This idea of separating content and logical -structure from specific formatting is one of the basic elements of \LaTeX{} -\cite[p.~7]{LaTeXbook}. - -An implementation of the formatting rules of the APA manual for use with -\LaTeX{} is the \pkg{apa} class of Athanassios Protopapas. This handles all -kinds of issues about general document formatting, title page, section -headings, figures and tables, and so forth. Therefore, if you intend to submit -a manuscript to an APA journal, I strongly recommend using the \pkg{apa} -class. - -An important part of the APA style is the way citations and the reference list -should be formatted. This takes 75 pages in the APA manual (pp.~207--281, -excluding the references to legal materials). This part is not handled by the -\pkg{apa} class, but by the \pkg{apacite} package. The \pkg{apa} class -requires the \pkg{apacite} package, but \pkg{apacite} can be used without -\pkg{apa}. The current document, for example, does not use the \pkg{apa} -class, because I find it desirable that possible users can study the -\pkg{apacite} package and its documentation without having to install several -other classes and packages first. Therefore, the current document uses -standard \LaTeX{} as much as possible. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection*{Some history} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -Before the advent of the first version of \pkg{apacite} in 1994, several -authors have written \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} packages (\fname{.sty}) and \BibTeX{} -style files (\fname{.bst}) with suggestive names as \pkg{apalike}, -\pkg{newapa}, and \pkg{theapa} to try to capture some of the requirements of -the APA manual. A severe problem with the APA citations is that, if the number -of authors is between three and five, inclusive, the first citation must -include all authors, whereas subsequent citations should refer to the first -author ``et al.''. This problem had been solved by the \pkg{newapa} and -\pkg{theapa} packages. - -A lot of APA peculiarities, however, were not covered by these citation -styles. Examples are: -\begin{itemize} - \item In the reference list, authors should be formatted with - their initials after their surnames. Editors, however, - should be formatted with their initials \emph{before} their - surnames if they are not in the author position. - \item If the work referred to is a non-English-language source, - the English translation of the title should be given in - brackets after the title. - \item Edition and volume of a book and the pages of an article - in that book should be gathered between a single pair - of parentheses. - \item The publisher of a book and its address should be given as - ``address: publisher'', and not as ``publisher, address''. - \item When the work used is a reprint or translation of an - earlier work, this should be mentioned in the reference - list. In text, the year must be given in the form - ``1923/1961''. - \item There are several ``tricky'' things with brackets and - parentheses, for example, with the type of an article - (e.g., ``Letter to the editor'', - ``Review of the book \emph{The social life of information}'', - ``Abstract'', ``Special issue''). Furthermore, magazine and - newspaper articles are treated differently than journal - articles; papers presented at meetings must be treated - differently; translators of articles and books and chairs - of symposia must be introduced; an article can have editors - instead of authors (e.g., with a special issue); a PhD thesis - can be abstracted in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts International}; - a (technical) report of some institution can be an (edited) - collection of articles. -\end{itemize} -The \pkg{apacite} package is devised to get (much) closer to the APA rules -than the abovementioned other packages and styles. - -The original version of the \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package consisted for -a large part of the citation part of \fname{theapa.sty}. The current version, -however, has been changed and extended in many ways and can therefore not be -considered a straightforward adaptation of \fname{theapa.sty} anymore, -although it provides largely the same commands, such as \cmd{\citeA}, and -peculiarities in the command definitions, such as the use of \verb+<...>+ for -a prefix note and \verb+[...]+ for a postfix note. - -Although the \fname{apacite.bst} \BibTeX{} style started out as a slightly -adapted version of \fname{theapa.bst}, the number of changes became so large -and things became so unmanageable that I decided to write a completely new -bibstyle, although using some small parts of the original. The -\fname{apacite.bst} file can therefore not anymore be seen as an adaptation of -\fname{theapa.bst}. Due to the complex rules of the APA manual, it has become -a large file. In the original process of writing (back in 1994), the error -\begin{verbatim} -You've exceeded BibTeX's wizard-defined function space -\end{verbatim} -was very hard to overcome. It appears that later versions of \BibTeX{} allowed -much more space, because I have not received this message anymore in recent -years, although the bibstyle has been expanded considerably. However, if you -run an old \BibTeX{}, you may encounter this (and similar) error messages. - -In the ``dark years'' between 1994 and 2003, in which there was no official -new version of \pkg{apacite}, I have been fixing small bugs, discovered either -by me or by users who sent in their bug reports, and adding some small options -that were easy to incorporate and that I found useful or that were requested -by a user. Furthermore, in 1998, I spent considerable effort in adding an -(almost) automatic author indexing option, first used for my PhD thesis -\cite{meijer1998}. - -In the first few months of 2003, I fixed a number of problems with the -compatibility between \pkg{apacite} and some other important packages. -Although I had been planning (or wishing, rather) to release a proper official -update of \pkg{apacite} for some time, I had not done so, mainly because I had -not yet taken the time to update the documentation. The compatibility issues -were so severe, however, that I decided in March 2003 to release an -intermediate update, which thus became the first official release since the -original version. This version contained a lot of files with compatibility -patches and tests. The main shortcomings of that version were the lack of -up-to-date documentation and the lack of agreement with the latest version of -the APA manual (5th ed., 2001). - -In September 2003, I finally released a complete, fully updated and -significantly extended version of \pkg{apacite}, including extensive -documentation. However, that version still was not able to format some -citations correctly. The \APACversiondate{2004/07/01} version was a small -improvement of the \APACversiondate{2003/09/05} version, but fixed the -important inadequacies of previous versions. - -The current version is also a relatively minor update, but it may be important -for some users. The main difference with previous versions is that it offers -support of non-English languages, although this is still limited. Moreover, -this is clearly a non-APA direction, because all APA publications are in -English. However, many journals, universities, etc.\ in non-English speaking -countries base their rules on the APA rules, and thus it may be useful to have -the possibility to use \pkg{apacite} in combination with documents in -non-English languages as well. See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a -description of the implementation of this feature. - -Apart from this language support and the facilities for customization, the -current version of \pkg{apacite} is aimed at conforming with the 5th edition -of the APA manual. It remains, however, imperfect, although the instances of -wrongly formatted cases will be rare. Many problems can be solved by -``tricking'' the style (e.g., by defining the \fieldname{number} field as -``\verb+2, Serial No. 186+'' if the issue number and serial number of a -journal are both important), but this makes the \fname{.bib} file less -compatible with other styles. In the test examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} -below, many tricks are used and discussed. Remaining problems, omissions, and -things-to-be-done can be found in section~\ref{sec:todo}. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection*{Philosophy of \pkg{apacite}} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -As can be deduced from the discussion thus far, the first priority of -\pkg{apacite} is to implement the rules of the APA manual with regard to -citation and reference list as closely as possible. However, just like its -predecessors, \pkg{apacite} offers some possibilities for customization as -well. Many details of \pkg{apacite}, particularly punctuation and some fixed -texts (e.g., ``Tech.\ Rep.'') can be changed easily by the user by redefining -some commands in \LaTeX{}. Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} also offers several -proper options to change some of its settings. - -Whether certain options or customizable aspects are implemented depends on two -criteria: (1) Is it possible, easy (enough), and convenient to implement them -without compromising the ability to adhere to the APA rules, and (2) Do I (EM) -consider them important or useful enough to spend time to implement them. -Actually, the decision process is the reverse of this: First, I decide whether -I find it a relevant or useful option. If not, I will not implement it. If so, -I will think about if and how I can implement it. If I have an idea for a -solution that is practically feasible, I will pursue it. If I don't see a -solution, if I think it will take me too much time, or if I think a solution -will be inconvenient to other users, then I will not pursue it. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection*{Changes since the \APACversiondate{2004/07/01} version} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The changes since the \APACversiondate{2004/07/01} version are: -\begin{itemize} -\item Addition of the \cmd{\BBYY} command (see page~\pageref{cmd:BBYY}). -\item Limited language support (see section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}). -\item Resolved some compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite} and - \pkg{natbib} (see section~\ref{sec:compat-natbib}). -\item Fixed a bug that caused a compatibility problem when \pkg{apacite} - was used without one of the author indexing options, but other - indexes were requested in the document. -\item Updated the manual (the current document); rewrote some sections. -\item Improved some of the ``dirty tricks'' in \fname{apacite.tex} - (see section~\ref{sec:xmpl}). -\item Some minor changes that most users will not notice. -\end{itemize} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Basic usage and options} -\label{sec:usage} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The current \pkg{apacite} distribution consists of the following files: -\begin{description} -\item[\fname{apacite.sty}] The \LaTeX{} citation package. This must - be placed in a directory where \TeX{} can find it; -\item[\fname{apacite.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style. This - must be placed in a directory where \BibTeX{} can find it; -\item[\fname{apacitex.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style with - added author index support. This must also be placed in a directory - where \BibTeX{} can find it; -\item[\fname{apacite.tex}] Extensive user's manual and test of the - \pkg{apacite} package; -\item[\fname{apacite.pdf}] The processed version of \fname{apacite.tex} - so you can read the manual without having to install the package first; -\item[\fname{apa5ex.bib}] The file with bibliographic information - about the references in \fname{apacite.tex}; -\item[\fname{manifest.txt}] The list of files belonging to the \pkg{apacite} - package, with a short description; -\item[\fname{README}] A brief description of the package; -\item[\fname{lang/}] A directory containing language-specific files - (see section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}). -\end{description} -The \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package is loaded by putting -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -\cmdthreealt{usepackage}{options}{apacite} -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -somewhere in your document between \verb+\documentclass+ and -\verb+\begin{document}+, or putting -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -\cmdthreealt{RequirePackage}{options}{apacite} -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -in your own personal \LaTeX{} package (say, \fname{mysettings.sty}) -that is loaded by your document. - -The following options are recognized by \pkg{apacite}: -\begin{description} -\item[\pkgoption{BCAY}] \mbox{}\\ - This is a technical option for backwards compatibility with old versions - (pre-\APACversiondate{2003/09/05}) of \pkg{apacite}. In those versions of - \pkg{apacite}, the \cmd{\BCAY} construction was used to pass relevant - citation information from the \fname{.bbl} file (\BibTeX{}'s output) to - \LaTeX{}. This was taken over from its immediate predecessor, Young U. Ryu's - \pkg{theapa}. However, \pkg{natbib} does not recognize the \cmd{\BCAY} - construction, but it does recognize the analogous \cmd{\citeauthoryear} - construction, which was also used by an earlier predecessor of - \pkg{apacite}, \pkg{newapa}. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} has reverted to - \cmd{\citeauthoryear} as well. This makes different versions of - \pkg{apacite} incompatible with each other, because it is not possible to - support both constructions at the same time. This option is used to fix - that: In the (unlikely) event that you \emph{must} use a \fname{.bbl} file - that is generated by an old version of \pkg{apacite}, you can turn this - option on. - -\item[\pkgoption{accentfix}] \mbox{}\\ - A cedilla accent (`\c{c}': \verb+\c{c}+) in an author name used to lead to - errors, only due to the check whether subsequent authors in the same - citation are equivalent. The same problem is anticipated with the - \verb+\b{...}+ (`\b{o}') accent, the \verb+\d{...}+ (`\d{o}') accent, and - the \verb+\copyright+ (\copyright) symbol (Will the latter ever turn up in - an author name?), due to the same use of \cmd{\crcr}, cf.\ - \citeA[p.~356]{TeXbook}. - - This fix therefore redefines these to sensible alternatives, only for - comparison of authors, not for any real formatting. Therefore, the user - should not notice this, apart from the lack of error messages, of course. - Therefore, it is also a default option. However, because I am not entirely - sure that there are no possible adverse effects, I give the user the option - to turn it off (\pkgoption{noaccentfix}). The user is then responsible for - fixing any error messages generated by such characters. - -\item[\pkgoption{noaccentfix}] \mbox{}\\ - Turns \pkgoption{accentfix} off. - -\item[\pkgoption{index}] -\item[\pkgoption{stdindex}] -\item[\pkgoption{tocindex}] -\item[\pkgoption{emindex}] \mbox{}\\ - These four options turn author indexing on, but differ in the way the index - is formatted. See section~\ref{sec:autindex} for a discussion of the author - indexing facility. These should be used with the \fname{apacitex.bst} - \BibTeX{} style, see below, although they also work with - \fname{apacite.bst}, but that does not give author index entries, so these - options then typically do not have any effect (and an undesirable effect if - they do). - -\item[\pkgoption{noindex}] \mbox{}\\ - Turns author indexing off (the default). Typically used with - \fname{apacite.bst}, but can also be used with \fname{apacitex.bst}. In the - latter case, the author indexing commands are simply ignored. Therefore, - \fname{apacite.bst} is actually superfluous, but because author indexing - will be used rarely and it is more likely to lead to errors or - incompatibilities, a ``clean'' (no author indexing) version, - \fname{apacite.bst}, is provided as well. - -\item[\pkgoption{numberedbib}] \mbox{}\\ - This option implies that the bibliography (reference list) is a numbered - section or chapter, e.g., ``6.~References'', instead of just ``References''. - -\item[\pkgoption{unnumberedbib}] \mbox{}\\ - The reverse of \pkgoption{numberedbib}: The bibliography is an unnumbered - section or chapter. This is the default. However, it is possible that when - using the \pkg{apa} document class, then \pkgoption{numberedbib} works - better, because that class turns section numbering off anyway and it may be - that \pkg{apa}'s page headings work well if the reference list is a - \cmd{\section} and not if it is a \cmd{\section*}. I have not experimented - with this (yet), however. - -\item[\pkgoption{sectionbib}] \mbox{}\\ - With this option, the bibliography is a section and not a chapter. Mainly - useful in combination with the \pkg{chapterbib} package. Therefore, it will - be discussed in more detail in section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}. - -\item[\pkgoption{nosectionbib}] \mbox{}\\ - With this option, the bibliography is a chapter, if the \cmd{\chapter} - command is defined. Otherwise, it is always a section. Again, see - section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}. - -\item[\pkgoption{tocbib}] \mbox{}\\ - This puts the bibliography in the table of contents, even if it is - unnumbered, provided of course that a table of contents is requested in the - document (by \cmd{\tableofcontents}). This is the default. - -\item[\pkgoption{notocbib}] \mbox{}\\ - This does not put the bibliography in the table of contents if it is an - unnumbered section or chapter. If it's numbered, it is always in the table - of contents. - -\item[\pkgoption{bibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\ - The bibliography is started on a new page. This is required by some journal - styles, including the APA manual. The \pkg{apa} class already contained this - in its \pkgoption{man} option, but now it has been made available directly - in \pkg{apacite}. - -\item[\pkgoption{nobibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\ - The bibliography is not explicitly started on a new page, although if the - bibliography is a chapter, it will be started on a new page anyway, because - chapters are started on a new page. This is the default in \pkg{apacite} and - thus is the only time a non-APA setting is used as default instead of an - available APA setting. Therefore, to satisfy the APA rules, you have to - request the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option explicitly. - -\item[\pkgoption{hyper}] \mbox{}\\ - This switches on some code provided by Ross Moore that makes \pkg{apacite} - and \pkg{hyperref} compatible to some extent. However, this also violates - the APA manual rules somewhat, so it is not a default option. See - section~\ref{sec:compat-hyper} for a more detailed description. - -\item[\pkgoption{nohyper}] \mbox{}\\ - This switches off the code of the \pkgoption{hyper} option mentioned above. - This is the default. -\end{description} -% -To load the \fname{apacite.bst} or \fname{apacitex.bst} bibliography style in -\BibTeX{}, put -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -\verb+\bibliographystyle{apacite}+ -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -or -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -\verb+\bibliographystyle{apacitex}+ -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -respectively, in your document before the \cmd{\bibliography} command. The -position of the bibliography (reference list) is determined by the line -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -\cmdtwo{bibliography}{bibfiles} -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -where \opt{bibfiles} is a list of filenames with \fname{.bib} extension, which -contain the bibliographic information that is used by \BibTeX{} to construct -the reference list. Usually, the \cmd{\bibliographystyle} and -\cmd{\bibliography} are kept together (immediately follow each other) in the -document, although when you are using the \pkg{apa} document class, -\pkg{apacite} is used by definition and you are not supposed to use the -\cmd{\bibliographystyle} command yourself. See the documentation of the -\pkg{apa} documentclass for details about this. - -If you use one of the author indexing options, the author index is put in -the \LaTeX{} output by the line -\begin{verbatim} -\printindex[autx] -\end{verbatim} -If you put this line in your document, but use the \pkgoption{noindex} option -(either explicitly or implicitly by requesting no other index option), it will -be ignored. For more on author indexing, see section~\ref{sec:autindex}. - -To get all parts in the final output, the following sequence of runs should -typically be taken (when starting from scratch): (1) \LaTeX{}, (2) \BibTeX{}, -(3) \LaTeX{}, (4) \LaTeX{}, and, when author indexing is on, (5) \MakeIndex{}, -(6) \LaTeX{}, and (7) \LaTeX{}. The last one is to get the index in the table -of contents. If the table of contents is on a regular page, i.e., an -arabic-numbered page instead of a roman-numbered page in the front matter, it -may even be necessary to run \MakeIndex{} another time, followed by \LaTeX{} -once or twice. Occasionally, somewhere in the process, \LaTeX{} may complain -about labels that may have changed, which requires even more additional -\LaTeX{} runs at that stage. So the number of runs that are necessary to get -everything right may become large. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{The citation commands} -\label{sec:cite} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -In this section, the commands are described that can be used to cite a work. -Their default behavior will be explained. In section~\ref{sec:custom}, -customization of this behavior will be discussed. Extensive examples are given -in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. - -If the \pkg{apacite} package is loaded, the following citation commands can be -used. -\begin{description} - \item[\cmdfour{cite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] - \item[\cmdfour{fullcite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] - \item[\cmdfour{shortcite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ - These three commands produce parenthetical citations of the - following form: - ``(\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Year1}; - \opt{Authors2}, \opt{Year2}; \ldots; \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{YearN}, - \opt{postfix})''. - The command \cmd{\fullcite} uses the ``full'' author list, and - the \cmd{\shortcite} command uses the abbreviated author list. - The \cmd{\cite} command uses the ``full'' list the first time - a work is referenced and the ``short'' list the second and - subsequent times. In accordance with the APA manual, the - ``full'' list consists of all authors if their number is five - or less, and the first author suffixed with ``et al.{}'' - if their number is six or more. Similarly, the ``short'' list - consists of all authors if their number is two or less and the - first author with ``et al.{}'' if their number is three or more. - There are some nuances for complicated situations. These will - be discussed in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. - - If the (full) author lists of subsequent citations within the - same citation command are the same, they are not repeated; only - the years of the later citations are given. - This holds for all analogous cases as well. - - The prefix and postfix are optional. Thus, e.g., - \cmdtwo{cite}{keys}, \cmdthree{cite}{postfix}{keys}, - and \cmdthreepre{cite}{prefix}{keys} are also allowed. - This holds for all analogous cases as well. - - \item[\cmdfour{citeA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] - \item[\cmdfour{fullciteA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] - \item[\cmdfour{shortciteA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ - These commands are similar to the commands without the - ``\verb+A+'' suffix. They produce in-text citations of the form - ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1} (\opt{Year1}), - \opt{Authors2} (\opt{Year2}), \ldots, - \opt{AuthorsN} (\opt{YearN}, \opt{postfix})''. - Typically, the \opt{prefix} will be empty, because it is - part of the main text, and there typically will only be - one citation in \opt{keys} (unless the authors of - multiple citations are the same), because the authors' - names are also part of the main text. But it was easy - to provide the additional options, and this enhances - the similarity with the other citation commands, which - I found desirable. - - \item[\cmdfour{citeauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] - \item[\cmdfour{fullciteauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] - \item[\cmdfour{shortciteauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ - These commands are similar to their \cmd{\cite}-type - counterparts, except that they produce citations of the form - ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Authors2}, \ldots, - \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{postfix}'' - (the years and parentheses are left out). - This is typically used in a paragraph when a proper - citation (incl.\ year) to the same work has already been - given in the paragraph.% - \footnote{Note that a paragraph is not - a section. Nor does it need to be declared as a - \cmd{\paragraph}. A reminder for Dutch readers: - ``section'' = ``paragraaf'' and ``paragraph'' = ``alinea''.} - In such a case, according to the APA manual, the year must not be - repeated for repeated references to the same work in the same - paragraph. - - A second important application of these commands is - when some complex citations must be constructed, like - ``\citeauthor{4.05-1}'s \citeyear{4.05-1} theory'', - which makes combined use of \cmd{\citeauthor} and - \cmd{\citeyear}, see below. - - Normally, I would expect only one citation per - \cmd{\citeauthor}-type command, and no \opt{prefix} - or \opt{postfix}. - - \item[\cmdfour{citeyear}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ - Produces citations of the form - ``(\opt{prefix} \opt{Year1}, \opt{Year2}, \ldots, \opt{YearN}, - \opt{postfix})''. - See the discussion of \cmd{\citeauthor} above. Typically, - the \opt{prefix} would be empty and multiple citations - would only be used if they have the same authors. - - \item[\cmdfour{citeyearNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ - A ``no parentheses'' version of \cmd{\citeyear}. - Produces citations of the form - ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Year1}, \opt{Year2}, \ldots, \opt{YearN}, - \opt{postfix}''. Can be used for complex citations within - parenthetical material, like - ``the work of \citeauthor{3.99-15} (\citeyearNP{3.99-15}; - but see also \citeNP{3.99-16,3.99-17})'', - which also uses the \cmd{\citeNP} command, see below. - - \item[\cmdfour{citeNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] - \item[\cmdfour{fullciteNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] - \item[\cmdfour{shortciteNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ - ``No parentheses'' versions of \cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\fullcite}, - and \cmd{\shortcite}. They produce citations of the form - ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Year1}; - \opt{Authors2}, \opt{Year2}; \ldots; \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{YearN}, - \opt{postfix}''. Can be used for complex citations within - parenthetical material, see the discussion of - \cmd{\citeyearNP} above. - - \item[\cmdtwo{nocite}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ - The entries are included in the bibliography without - being cited in text. This is standard \LaTeX. - Note that the APA manual normally does not allow this. - The only exception concerns works that are studied in a - meta-analysis, but for these the \cmd{\nocitemeta} - command should be used. - - \item[\cmdtwo{nocitemeta}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ - This is similar to \cmd{\nocite}. It is used to get the - list of works included in a meta-analysis in the - bibliography. This command has the additional effect that - the corresponding items in the bibliography are preceded - by an asterisk ($\star$) and a remark explaining this - is inserted just before the bibliography, as required - by the APA manual. -\end{description} -In order to format the examples from the APA manual correctly in -section~\ref{sec:xmpl}, I have also defined the following additional citation -commands: \cmd{\DSMcite}, \cmd{\biblecite}, and \cmd{\citesong}, and obvious -variations with \verb+full+, \verb+short+, \verb+A+, and \verb+NP+. However, I -have decided not to include these in \fname{apacite.sty}. The most important -reason for this is that I find it unattractive to introduce different types of -citation commands for different types of citations. This also makes it more -difficult to use the same document with another citation package. I hope to be -able to provide, in a future version of \pkg{apacite}, more elegant solutions -to the problems for which these commands were defined. - -Nevertheless, I used these commands for the examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} -and therefore included their definitions at the top of the file -\fname{apacite.tex}. Thus, if you want to use them, you can copy their -definitions to the top of your own document or personal style file (say, -\fname{mysettings.sty}, do not change \fname{apacite.sty}), you can study -their behavior, and perhaps improve them. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Contents of the \fname{.bib} file} -\label{sec:bib} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The information that is used by \LaTeX/\BibTeX{} to generate -the citations and reference list must be stored by the user in one -or more files with the \fname{.bib} extension. -A detailed overview of the contents of the \fname{.bib} file is -given in \citeA[section~13.5]{LaTeXcomp}. Roughly speaking, the -\fname{.bib} file consists of a collection of \emph{entries} -of the form -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{contents}\verb+}+ -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -Most entries describe a work that may be referenced, e.g., a book -or article. There are, however, two exceptions: a \entryname{preamble} -entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+preamble+) and a \entryname{string} -entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+string+). There is typically -at most one \entryname{preamble} entry. Its \opt{contents} consist of a -string---according to \BibTeX, i.e., between double quotes (\verb+"+) -or an additional pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+). This -string, which typically consists of \LaTeX{} commands like -\verb+\newcommand{\SortNoop}[1]{}+, is literally included -in the document before the bibliography. It can therefore be used -to define commands that are used in the (other) entries of the -\fname{.bib} file and that are not standard \LaTeX{}. - -A \entryname{string} entry is similar, but the contents are now not -included in the document. Instead, the string is assigned to a kind of -``variable'', the name of which may contain characters -not usually associated with variable names, like colons and -hyphens, see \citeA[pp.~402--403]{LaTeXcomp}. An example of a -\entryname{string} entry is -\begin{verbatim} -@string{ JPSP = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology} } -\end{verbatim} -Then, if in a later entry, the journal is -\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, you can format this -as -\begin{verbatim} - journal = JPSP, -\end{verbatim} -instead of the usual -\begin{verbatim} - journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, -\end{verbatim} -This is not only convenient because it saves typing of common -long journal names, but it can also be used to define -style-specific variations. For example, some styles abbreviate -journal names, such as -\emph{J. Pers. Soc. Psych.} instead of -\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}. -You could then put the definitions of all full journal names -in one \fname{.bib} file (\fname{fulljou.bib}, say) and the definitions -of the abbreviated journal names in another (\fname{abbrjou.bib}, say). -Suppose that the information about the referenced works is stored in a -third file, say, \fname{myrefs.bib}, and that the ``NotAPA'' -style rules, implemented in the \fname{notapa.bst} \BibTeX{} style file, -require the abbreviated journal names. Then you can use -\begin{verbatim} -\bibliographystyle{notapa} -\bibliography{abbrjou,myrefs} -\end{verbatim} -to obtain a reference list complying with the ``NotAPA'' rules. If -you change your mind and decide to switch to using the rules of the -APA manual, you only need to change the two lines above into -\begin{verbatim} -\bibliographystyle{apacite} -\bibliography{fulljou,myrefs} -\end{verbatim} -(and additionally load the \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package -through \cmd{\usepackage}). - -In the accompanying \fname{.bib} file, I have used the -\entryname{string} entry -to put some comments in the file: -\begin{verbatim} -@string{ comment = { -\end{verbatim} -$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{comment text} -\begin{verbatim} -}} -\end{verbatim} -This is useful because \BibTeX{} does not have a comment character, e.g., the -percent sign does not work. If you put text between entries, this is ignored, -so you may not need a comment character, but I wanted to put my e-mail address -in the comments at the top of the file, and the \verb+@+ sign of an e-mail -address is interpreted as the start of a new entry by \BibTeX{}, unless it is -put into a string. - -The remaining entry types are types that correspond with the -type of a referenced work, e.g., \entryname{book} or -\entryname{article}. These entry types (reference types) are -discussed in section~\ref{subsec:types} below. -Such entries have the following structure: -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{key}\verb+,+\\ -$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname1}\verb+ = +\opt{value1}\verb+,+\\ -$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname2}\verb+ = +\opt{value2}\verb+,+\\ -$\mbox{}\qquad\qquad\vdots$\\ -$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldnameN}\verb+ = +\opt{valueN}\\ -\verb+}+ -\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ -where \opt{key} corresponds to the key used in the citation -commands and matches the entry with the citation (and should -therefore be unique). The fieldnames are \verb+author+, \verb+year+, -etc., which are described in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below. -The values are strings, either defined previously by a -\entryname{string} entry or explicitly indicated as such here -by putting the relevant information between double quotes -(\verb+"+) or a pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+). - -To be able to obey the rules of the APA manual, \pkg{apacite} -provides several fields and reference types that are not -described in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation -\cite<e.g.,>[chap.~13]{LaTeXcomp}. Furthermore, -the meaning and usage of many fields and reference types that -\emph{are} described there have been altered somewhat. Therefore, -a complete description is given here. -The symbol \LC{} will be used to indicate that the field or -reference type is also described in \citeA[Appendix~B]{LaTeXbook} -or \citeA[chapter~13]{LaTeXcomp}, although, as mentioned above, the -specific meaning of the item may have been changed. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection{Types of references} -\label{subsec:types} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -In this section, the list of reference types that are recognized by -\pkg{apacite} is given. An overview of which fields can be used for which -reference type is given in Table~\ref{tab:fieldref}. If fields are not -relevant, but you use them anyway in your \fname{.bib} file, they are ignored. -The fields and their use are described in more detail in -section~\ref{subsec:fields}, but here some specific issues will already be -mentioned. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\begin{table}[p] -\begin{center} -\caption{List of fields that are used by the various reference types - (blank = not used; \X{} = used; - \Y{} = used, but only for citations).} -\label{tab:fieldref} -\small -\makebox[0pt]{% some manipulation to squeeze the table onto the page -\newlength{\oldtabcolsep} -\setlength{\oldtabcolsep}{\tabcolsep} -\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt} -\begin{tabular}{@{}lcccccccccc@{}} -\hline - & \multicolumn{10}{c}{Reference type}\\ - \cline{2-11} -% -% Normally, I would use the sideways environment of the rotating -% package to format this nicely, but I do not want to require -% other packages to format this document, so I choose an uglier -% solution here. -% - & article\\ - & magazine & & & & & - & phdthesis\\ -Field - & newspaper & book & incollection & techreport & intechreport & lecture - & mastersthesis - & unpublished - & misc - & literal\\ -\hline -address & &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X&\X&\X& \\ -annote & & & & & & & & & & \\ -author &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ -booktitle & & &\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -chair & & & & & &\X& & & & \\ -chapter & & &\X& & & & & & & \\ -day &\X& &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X&\X& \\ -edition & &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & \\ -editor &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& & &\X&\X& \\ -englishtitle &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ -firstkey &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\ -howpublished &\X& &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ -institution & & & &\X&\X& & & & & \\ -journal &\X& & & & & &\X& & & \\ -key &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\ -month &\X& &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X&\X& \\ -note &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ -number &\X&\X& &\X&\X& &\X&\X&\X& \\ -organization & & & & & & & &\X& & \\ -originaladdress &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -originalbooktitle &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -originaledition &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -originaleditor &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -originaljournal &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -originalnumber &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -originalpages &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -originalpublisher &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -originalvolume &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ -originalyear &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y\\ -pages &\X& &\X& &\X& &\X& & & \\ -publisher & &\X&\X& & & & & &\X& \\ -school & & & & & & &\X& & & \\ -series & & & & & & & & & & \\ -symposium & & & & & &\X& & & & \\ -text & & & & & & & & & &\X\\ -title &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ -translator &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\ -type &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ -volume &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & \\ -year &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\Y\\ -\hline -\end{tabular}% -\setlength{\tabcolsep}{\oldtabcolsep} -} -\end{center} -% -\end{table} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -The following entry types (reference types) are defined in \pkg{apacite}: -\begin{description} - \item[\entryname{article}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - A journal article or comparable. If the - ``article'' referenced to is a special issue of a journal or - something else that has editors instead of authors, the - \fieldname{author} field should be empty and the \fieldname{editor} - field should be used for the editors. If the journal paginates - by issue instead of by volume, or when you are referring to a - whole special issue, the issue number should be given - in the \fieldname{number} field. In all other cases (including - referring to an article within a special issue), the - \fieldname{number} field must not be used. The \fieldname{type} - field can be used to denote the type of article, for example, - ``\verb+Letter to the editor+'', or - ``\verb+Review of the book \emph{Life in the middle}+''. - - \item[\entryname{magazine}] \mbox{}\\ - A magazine article. Unlike in previous versions of \pkg{apacite}, - this is now equivalent to \entryname{article}. However, with - an \entryname{article}, the \fieldname{month} and \fieldname{day} - fields should generally not be used, unless there is a compelling - reason to use them. For a magazine, the \fieldname{month}, and - \fieldname{day} (for weeklies) fields are commonly used. - - \item[\entryname{newspaper}] \mbox{}\\ - A newspaper article. This is similar to \entryname{article} and - \fieldname{magazine}, except that the pages are formatted a little - different, with ``pp. 23--49'' instead of just ``23--49''. - - \item[\entryname{book}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - An entire book. The \fieldname{type} field can now be used - to denote a specific type of item (so generally not strictly - a book), e.g., ``\verb+Brochure+''. Similarly, the - \fieldname{number} field can be used if this is considered - useful. (It is used in example 24 in the APA manual, see - below.) This seems quite rare to me, however. It should - certainly \emph{not} be used for ISBN numbers and the like. - - \item[\entryname{incollection}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - An article in a (usually edited) book, or other kind of larger - work, except a report, for which the \entryname{intechreport} - entry is used. The \fieldname{booktitle} field contains the - title of the whole collection (book). The \fieldname{type} - field is currently used to denote the type of article, as - with the \entryname{article} reference type, although in some - cases, it may be more naturally to let the \fieldname{type} - field contain the type of the whole work (e.g., CD). Therefore, - I may change this somewhat in future versions of \pkg{apacite}. - - \item[\entryname{techreport}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - A report. This may be a ``technical'' report such as published - by universities, or a report from government organizations or - private companies. The \fieldname{type} field can be used to - indicate what kind of report it is, e.g., - ``\verb+College Board Rep.+'' or ``\verb+{DHHS} Publication+''. - If the \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type - ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.{}+'' is used. If no type description should - be given, \verb+\bibnotype+ should be used as the contents of - the \fieldname{type} field. The \fieldname{number} field can - be used to give the report number. The organization that - published the report should be given in the \fieldname{institution} - field. - - \item[\entryname{intechreport}] \mbox{}\\ - An article in a (usually edited) report. This is more or less - a combination of \entryname{incollection} and - \entryname{techreport}. It uses the same fields as the former - to describe the article itself, except \fieldname{type}, e.g., - \fieldname{booktitle}, which is in this case the title of the - entire report, - and the same fields as the latter to describe the report. - In particular, the \fieldname{type}, \fieldname{number}, - and \fieldname{institution} fields are used for the report. - - \item[\entryname{lecture}] \mbox{}\\ - A paper presented at a meeting. According to the APA manual, - the year and month should be given, but \pkg{apacite} also - uses the \fieldname{day} field when available. - The \fieldname{symposium} field can be used for the - name of the symposium and the \fieldname{chair} field for the chair of - the meeting. The \fieldname{howpublished} field should be used to - indicate the occasion at which the paper was presented if the - \fieldname{symposium} field is empty, e.g., - ``\texttt{Paper presented at the meeting of the American - Professional Society on the Abuse of Children, - San Diego, CA}''. - It can also be used to give additional information about - the symposium if the \fieldname{symposium} field is not empty. - - \item[\entryname{phdthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - A doctoral dissertation. The \fieldname{school} field is used - to denote the university for which the thesis was written. - The \fieldname{type} field can be used for the thesis type, - e.g., ``\verb+PhD thesis+''. If it is empty, the default type - is used, which is ``\verb+Unpublished doctoral dissertation+'' - or ``\verb+Doctoral dissertation+'', depending on whether - the \fieldname{journal} field is empty or not. - - If the thesis is abstracted in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts - International} or similar, then the \fieldname{journal}, - \fieldname{volume}, \fieldname{number}, and \fieldname{pages} fields - can be used as with journal articles. The \fieldname{year} field - should denote the year of the ``journal''. - The \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year - of the original thesis, even if it is the same as the year of the - abstract, provided that the original thesis is used, and not - the abstract. Then, the \fieldname{school} field should also - be used, and optionally the \fieldname{type} field. If only - the abstract is used, it should presumably be treated as a - journal article. - - - \item[\entryname{mastersthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - This is equivalent to the \entryname{phdthesis} type, except that - the default ``unpublished'' and ``published'' \fieldname{type}s are - ``\verb+Unpublished master's thesis+'' and - ``\verb+Master's thesis+''. - - \item[\entryname{unpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - For unpublished manuscripts and similarly ``obscure'' material. - The \fieldname{howpublished} field will typically be used to - indicate what kind of work is referred to (e.g., - ``\verb+Unpublished manuscript+''). The \fieldname{organization} - field can be used to denote the organization in which the document - was produced, e.g., ``\texttt{Johns Hopkins University, Center - for Social Organization of Schools}''. Note that the larger - organization should be given first and the department after that. - The address (city and state, etc., see the discussion of the - \fieldname{address} field in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below) - of the organization should be given in the \fieldname{address} - field, unless it is already mentioned in the name of the - organization. Presumably, if the organization is - ``\verb+University of Groningen+'', the city name ``Groningen'' - should not be given in the \fieldname{address} field, but - the country ``The Netherlands'' should. When both the - \fieldname{organization} and the \fieldname{address} field - are available, \pkg{apacite} formats these as - ``organization, address''. This is different from the - usual ``address: publisher'' form. This behavior cannot - explicitly be deduced from the 5th edition, nor from the - 4th edition, of the APA manual, but the 3rd edition - \cite{APAManual3} gives an explicit example (example 53, - p.~131): \citeA{APA-3rd-ed-ex53}. - - \item[\entryname{misc}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - For works that do not fit into the other categories, such as - motion pictures, cassette recordings, computer software, etc. - The \fieldname{type} field can be used to indicate the type - of work, and \pkg{apacite} recognizes a few specific types - that should be formatted a little differently, see the discussion - of the \fieldname{type} field below. If the \fieldname{address} - and \fieldname{publisher} fields are available, the address and - publisher part is formatted as with books. The \entryname{unpublished} - and \entryname{misc} types are very similar, but there are some - differences. For example, \entryname{unpublished} uses the - \entryname{organization} field and \entryname{misc} uses the - \fieldname{publisher} field, and this part is formatted differently. - Further, the \entryname{unpublished} type requires - \fieldname{author}, \fieldname{editor}, \fieldname{title}, or - \fieldname{type}, whereas with \fieldname{misc}, - \fieldname{howpublished} takes the first position if these fields - are all empty. Finally, as briefly indicated above and discussed - in more detail below, \entryname{misc} recognizes some special - types in the \fieldname{type} field. - - \item[\entryname{literal}] \mbox{}\\ - If the other categories do not format the item correctly, this - category can be used. The \fieldname{text} field is copied literally - to the bibliography. The \fieldname{firstkey}, \fieldname{key}, - \fieldname{year}, and possibly \fieldname{originalyear} and - \fieldname{translator} fields are necessary to get correct - in-text citations. However, I have never needed to use this - entry type and I think that \entryname{misc} should also - be able to format the entry correctly. Furthermore, the - correct placement of \entryname{literal} references in the - reference list (alphabetizing, sorting), may be problematic. - - \item[\entryname{booklet}\LC] - \item[\entryname{inbook}\LC] - \item[\entryname{inproceedings}\LC] - \item[\entryname{manual}\LC] - \item[\entryname{proceedings}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - These categories are defined by all standard citation styles. They - are, however, not needed for the examples in the APA manual. For - compatibility, however, they are included and defined as follows: - \entryname{booklet} = \entryname{manual} = \entryname{proceedings} = - \entryname{misc}; \entryname{inbook} = \entryname{inproceedings} = - \entryname{incollection}. -\end{description} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection{Fields} -\label{subsec:fields} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The following fields can be used to describe a reference in the -\fname{.bib} file: -\begin{description} - - \item[\fieldname{address}\LC] \mbox{}\\% - The address (usually the city and state or country) of the - publisher, school, institution, or organization that published - the item or at which the item was produced. The APA manual - requires that the state or territory of a U.S.-city must be given - in the official two-letter U.S. Postal Services form. Only for - a specific list of 17 specific cities that are ``well known - for publishing'' can (must) the state and/or country - description be omitted. - - \item[\fieldname{annote}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - This is used in some annotated bibliography - styles. It is not used by \pkg{apacite}, but no warning - is given either. It is thus simply ignored. - - \item[\fieldname{author}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The author(s) of the work. This may also be a corporate - author when applicable, but some specific measures must - then be taken to prevent the corporate name from being - interpreted as a first name and last name - (such as ``Association, A. P.''), see the examples. - - As discussed in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation, - multiple authors must be separated by the word \verb+and+, - and each author's name can either be given in the form - ``\opt{firstnames}\verb+ +\opt{lastnames}'' or - ``\opt{lastnames}\verb+, +\opt{firstnames}''. However, - ``von'' parts and ``junior'' parts complicate issues - a bit. See the examples and the discussion of them. - - I would generally give the full first name(s) in the \fname{.bib} - file, even though the APA manual only requires initials, - because other styles require full first name(s) and - \pkg{apacite} abbreviates to initials automatically. - I have done this only occasionally with the examples, - because the APA manual only gives the initials. - Therefore, I have only provided first names with a few - examples for which I knew the authors' first names. - - If there are more than 6 authors, the APA manual requires - that the first 6 should be named in the reference list, - followed by ``et al.''. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} uses - only the names of the first 6 authors, and inserts an - ``et al.'' when applicable. Therefore, in the \fname{.bib} - file, the first 6 (or more) authors may be given (separated by - ``\verb+and+''), followed by ``\verb+and others+''. This phrase - is recognized by \pkg{apacite}. - It is, however, better to give all authors in - the \fname{.bib} file, so that each style can select its - own truncation number. - - \item[\fieldname{booktitle}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The title of the larger work, typically book, but sometimes - something else, like a report, in which the referenced item - (article) was published. - - \item[\fieldname{chair}] \mbox{}\\ - The chair(s) of a symposium or meeting. Used for lectures. - It is formatted the same way as editors. - - \item[\fieldname{chapter}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The chapter number if the referenced item is a chapter in - a larger collection. Typically used if the referenced work - is a chapter in an internet document. If the collection is - a book, page numbers (in the \fieldname{pages} field) - should be used instead according to the APA rules. - - \item[\fieldname{crossref}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The \pkg{apacite} package does not recognize this field, - because the APA manual does not discuss explicit - cross-referencing. If the referenced work is a chapter - (article) in an edited book, all relevant information - should be given in the reference list as part of the - information about the referenced chapter, not as, e.g., - ``In Wainrib (1992)''. If several chapters from the - book edited by Wainrib are referenced, the same information - about this book is given with each referenced chapter, - and the work itself is not a separate entry in the reference - list (unless it is explicitly referred to). - - However, the \fieldname{crossref} field - \emph{can} be used, as part of standard \BibTeX{} usage. - Missing fields for the referenced work are then copied from - the cross-referenced entry, which must come \emph{after} - the referring entry in the \fname{.bib} file. If you use - this, remember to put the title of the book (also) in the - \fieldname{booktitle} field, because the \fieldname{title} - field of the referring entry is not empty (it contains - the chapter title). - - I have not tested cross-referencing in detail, so I do not - know if it behaves well (i.e., complies with the implicit - or explicit APA rules) under various circumstances. - Therefore, I do not recommend using it without thorough - testing. - - \item[\fieldname{day}] \mbox{}\\ - The day of the month on which the referenced item was published, - produced, or presented. Mainly used for articles in daily or - weekly magazines or newspapers, for lectures (although the - APA manual only specifies the month), and electronic documents. - - \item[\fieldname{edition}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The edition of the book or report. This must be of the form 1st, 2nd, - 3rd, etc., or ``Rev.'' for a revised edition. Future work may provide - routines to handle numbers only (1, 2, 3, etc.), so that - language-specific texts are avoided. - - \item[\fieldname{editor}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The editor(s) of a book, report, or special issue of a journal. - In the examples, this field is also ``misused'' for the - producer of a television series. - - \item[\fieldname{englishtitle}] \mbox{}\\ - The English translation of the title of an item with a non-English - title. The APA manual requires that if the referenced work has a - non-English title, an English translation should be given as well. For - an article in a journal with a non-English name or in a book with a - non-English title, the journal name or book title should not be - translated or put in this field, only the title of the referenced work - itself must be translated. Because, as of version - \APACversiondate{2005/06/01}, \pkg{apacite} contains some support of - other languages for the main document (see - section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}), this field needs rethinking, which - will be deferred to a future version. - - \item[\fieldname{firstkey}] \mbox{}\\ - The \fieldname{firstkey} field, if not empty, is used as - ``author'' for the first citation to an item. Subsequent citations - then use the \fieldname{key} field. This can be used if there is - no author or editor field that can be used for citations, or in - certain cases with corporate authors, where the citation in the - text uses an abbreviation of the author's name for second and - subsequent citations, where the abbreviation is introduced in the - first citation. It can also be used to ``trick'' the system - in difficult cases. See also \fieldname{key}. - - \item[\fieldname{howpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - A description of how something was published. For example, - ``Unpublished manuscript'' or ``Paper presented at the meeting - of the American Professional Society on the Abuse of Children, - San Diego, CA''. Also used for retrieval information about - electronic documents, e.g., ``Retrieved October 13, 2001, from - \url{http://jbr.org/articles.html}\bibnodot{.}''. See also - the \fieldname{note} field. - - \item[\fieldname{institution}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The institution, university, or company that published a - (technical) report. - - \item[\fieldname{journal}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The journal, magazine, newspaper, etc.{} in which an - article, a review, or an abstract of a thesis was published. - - \item[\fieldname{key}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - See \fieldname{firstkey}. The \fieldname{key} field, if not - empty, is used for second and subsequent citations, or all citations - if \fieldname{firstkey} is missing. If \fieldname{author} is - empty and \fieldname{editor} is empty or can not be used as - author (e.g., in \entryname{incollection}), the \fieldname{key} - field may be necessary to obtain a useful citation. This is - so, because the APA manual requires an abbreviation of the - title as in-text citation, and the abbreviation must be - sensible. In the current version, \pkg{apacite} uses the - whole title if \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} are missing. - Therefore, if the title is considered too long to use in citations, - the user must provide an abbreviation in the \fieldname{key} field. - Furthermore, the user must then also define the formatting: - If the key is used for a difficult kind of author (e.g., - corporate author), it should be formatted as an author, - i.e., in plain text, with names capitalized. - If the key is used for an abbreviation of an article - title, it should be in plain text, with major words capitalized - (unlike in the reference list), and between double quotes - (`` and ''; also unlike in the reference list). - If the key is used for an abbreviation of a book title, it - should be emphasized, with major words capitalized - (unlike in the reference list), but not between quotes. - - In a field in the \fname{.bib} file that is also - used for the citations, such as the \fieldname{key} field, - formatting through, e.g., -\begin{verbatim} - key = {{\itshape Text}}, - key = {{\em Text\/}}, -\end{verbatim} - can be done (note the extra pair of braces!), but the - seemingly more logical variations -\begin{verbatim} - key = {\textit{Text}}, - key = {{\textit{Text}}}, - key = {\emph{Text}}, - key = {{\emph{Text}}}, -\end{verbatim} - do not work. - However, it is generally preferable to use as less explicit - formatting in the \fname{.bib} files as possible, because this - decreases the possibilities of successfully using the - same \fname{.bib} file with other styles. The following works - excellent: -\begin{verbatim} - key = {{\APACcitebtitle{Text}}}, -\end{verbatim} - where the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} macro recognizes that the argument - should be formatted as a booktitle (i.e., in italics according to the - APA rules). This macro, and its companion \cmd{\APACciteatitle} for - article title formatting, are used by \pkg{apacite} if the - \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} fields are missing, - but can also be used by the user. Note that if you use such a - \fname{.bib} file with another style, you have to provide - definitions of these macros yourself. - - \emph{Warning:} the \fieldname{key} field, which acts - as a kind of pseudo-author, should not be confused with the - (citation) \opt{key} that is used to match citations with - entries in a \fname{.bib} file. - - \item[\fieldname{month}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The month something was published. Mainly used for - magazine or newspaper articles, lectures, and electronic documents. - Use the month macros \verb+jan+, \verb+feb+, etc. These are - predefined strings in \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst}, - but can be overridden when desired, e.g., when using another - language (see section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}). - - \item[\fieldname{note}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - A note. This puts additional information between parentheses - at the end of a reference list entry. In the examples from - the APA manual, it is used for NTIS No., ERIC No., and UMI No., - and for notes about how to obtain the work - (``Available from \opt{organization}, \opt{full address}''). - If however, the work has been obtained from the internet - or from an ``aggregated database'', then the - \fieldname{howpublished} field should be used, because it - should not be between parentheses then. - - Finally, the \fieldname{note} field is used to give the - recording date (i.e., year) of a song when this is different - from the date (year) of copyright. The latter should be - put in the \fieldname{year} field. - - Do not use the \fieldname{note} field to denote the original - publication of a reprint or translation, because the - \fieldname{originalyear} field must be used in those cases to - obtain the correct citation in the text \cite<e.g.,>{ex39}. - - \item[\fieldname{number}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The number of a journal issue or a report. This can be quite - complex, for example, ``\verb+PRM~92-01+'', or - ``\verb+3, Pt.~2+'', or ``\verb+1, Serial No.~231+''. - These latter examples imply that the generality (language and - style independence) of the \fname{.bib} file is somewhat lost. - Furthermore, if the journal paginates by year and not by issue, - the issue number should not be mentioned at all (except when - referring to a whole special issue). Of course, \pkg{apacite} - does not know whether the journal paginates by issue or by year. - If the \fieldname{number} field is available, \pkg{apacite} - simply assumes that it should be included. It is the user's - responsibility to ensure that this is indeed the case. - - \item[\fieldname{organization}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - Used for the \entryname{unpublished} reference type to denote - the organization in which the unpublished work was produced. - - \item[\fieldname{originaladdress}] - \item[\fieldname{originalbooktitle}] - \item[\fieldname{originaledition}] - \item[\fieldname{originaleditor}] - \item[\fieldname{originaljournal}] - \item[\fieldname{originalnumber}] - \item[\fieldname{originalpages}] - \item[\fieldname{originalpublisher}] - \item[\fieldname{originalvolume}] - \item[\fieldname{originalyear}] \mbox{}\\ - These (\fieldname{original*-}) fields have the same - meaning as their counterparts without the ``original'' prefix, - except that they refer to the book or journal in which the - work was originally published. This can be used in referring to - translations or reprints of articles in journals or books. If the - original work is a book or other ``standalone'' work, - only the \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used. If the - original work is a (PhD or Master's) thesis that is also abstracted - in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts International}, - \emph{Masters Abstracts International}, or comparable, the - \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year - of the dissertation and the \fieldname{year} field to - denote the year of publication of the abstract, even if they - are the same. - - \item[\fieldname{pages}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The (inclusive) page numbers of the article that is referred to, - in the journal or book in which it was published. If a range of - pages is given (which is usually the case), an en-dash should - be used: ``\verb+29--43+''. Other styles sometimes allow a - single hyphen (``\verb+29-43+''), which is then automatically - formatted as an en-dash (``29--43''), rather than as a hyphen - (``29-43''), but I have encountered situations, esp.\ software - manuals, in which the page number was of the form ``II-3'', - meaning page~3 of chapter~2. In such a situation, you may - get page numbers like ``II-1--II-15'', where the distinction - between a hyphen and an en-dash becomes important. Therefore, - \pkg{apacite} does not perform such automatic transformations. - - \item[\fieldname{publisher}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The publisher of the item. Primarily used for books. - - \item[\fieldname{school}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The school or university for which a PhD thesis or - master's thesis was written. - - \item[\fieldname{series}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - Not used, although the APA manual has a rule for series. - If you refer to a volume in a series, the series title, - volume number, and volume title should be joined into - a two-part title , e.g., \emph{Handbook of child psychology: - Vol.~4. Socialization, personality, and social development}, - see ex.~36. In the current version of \pkg{apacite} this - whole part must be put in the \fieldname{title} or - \fieldname{booktitle} field (whichever is appropriate). - Maybe in a next version I will use the \fieldname{series} - field to allow disentangling such situations. - - \item[\fieldname{symposium}] \mbox{}\\ - The name of the symposium or meeting at which a - lecture was given. This is typically used for the - construction ``In \opt{chair} (Chair), \opt{symposium}'', - see ex.~51. I have never used it myself, however, - I always use the ``Paper presented \ldots'' form, - which puts this information in the \fieldname{howpublished} - field. - - \item[\fieldname{text}] \mbox{}\\ - Used for items of type \entryname{literal}. This field contains - the complete literal text to be used in the bibliography. - - \item[\fieldname{title}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The title of the work. - - \item[\fieldname{translator}] \mbox{}\\ - The translator of a book or article. This should - be formatted in the same way as \fieldname{author} and - \fieldname{editor}. If the \fieldname{translator} and - \fieldname{editor} fields are identical, they are - formatted as if there were only an editor, except that the - editor receives the suffix ``(Ed. \& Trans.)'' instead of - just ``(Ed.)'', or similarly if there is more than 1 editor. - - \item[\fieldname{type}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The type of \entryname{phdthesis} (e.g., - ``Doctoral dissertation''), type of \entryname{article} - (e.g., ``Letter to the editor''), type of \entryname{techreport} - (e.g., ``DHHS Publication''), type of \entryname{book} - (e.g., ``Brochure''), type of \entryname{misc} - (e.g., ``Cassette recording''), and so forth. - - With a review (which is typically an \entryname{article}), - the \fieldname{type} field contains a lot of information - and formatting, e.g.: -\begin{verbatim} - type = {Review of the book {\APACcitebtitle{Life in the middle: - Psychological and social development in middle age}}}, -\end{verbatim} - where I used the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} command introduced above in - the discussion of the \fieldname{key} field. - - In one of the APA manual examples, I used the \fieldname{type} - field to give a description of the subject of an unpublished - raw data file (``Auditory response latencies in rat auditory - cortex''), leaving the \fieldname{title} field blank. - - For most reference types, if the \fieldname{type} field - is missing, it is simply ignored and no type description - is given. For a \entryname{techreport}, however, if the - \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type - (``Tech. Rep.'') is inserted. In ex.~42 of the APA manual, - a report without a type description is given. To make it - possible to format a report successfully without a - type description, \pkg{apacite} recognizes -\begin{verbatim} - type = {\bibnotype}, -\end{verbatim} - indicating that there should be no type description. - - Another special purpose use of the \fieldname{type} - field is for a computer program, software, programming - language and/or manual. These are put into a \entryname{misc} - entry, but unlike other \entryname{misc} types (such as - motion pictures) the titles of these types should not - be italicized. This is now recognized by \pkg{apacite} - in the following way: When referring to a computer program, - software, programming language and/or manual, you should - use the \entryname{misc} reference type with - one of the following commands in the \fieldname{type} field:\\ - \cmd{\bibcomputerprogram},\\ - \cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual},\\ - \cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual},\\ - \cmd{\bibcomputersoftware},\\ - \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual},\\ - \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}, or\\ - \cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}.\\ - Using any of these commands as type designator of a - \entryname{misc} entry ensures that the title is not italicized, - as required. Note that the \entryname{manual} entry reduces to - \entryname{misc}, so can be used sensibly, but only if the - \fieldname{type} field is defined as above. Perhaps it would - be logical to define a default type for this, but this is not - implemented. Anyway, adding a \fieldname{type} field to a - \entryname{manual} entry in a \fname{.bib} file will probably - do not any harm with other bibstyles, so this is probably only - a minor nuisance. - - Similarly, if you refer to a message that has been posted to - a newsgroup, internet forum, etc., you should use the - \entryname{misc} reference type with \cmd{\bibmessage} as - \fieldname{type} field. - - \item[\fieldname{volume}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The volume or volumes of the referenced book(s) or - of the book in which the referenced article was published, - or the volume of the journal (magazine, newspaper, \ldots) - in which the referenced article was published. - - \item[\fieldname{year}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - The year in which the referenced item was published, or - if it was not published, the year in which it was written - or presented. For manuscripts or books that are accepted - for publication but have not yet been published, ``in press'' - should be used according to the APA rules. The best way to do - this is to use the ``\cmd{\BIP}'' command, which can be redefined - by the user if the language or editorial style requires - something else than ``in press''. Furthermore, \cmd{\BIP} - is recognized by \pkg{apacite} and treated a little differently, - because for multiple ``in press'' references with the same - author(s), a hyphen (``-'') should be inserted between the - ``year'' (i.e., ``in press'') and the ``a'', ``b'', etc., that - follow it to distinguish the works, whereas this hyphen must - be omitted if the ``year'' is an ordinary year (1991a, 1991b). - - If no date is explicitly given in (or on) the referenced work, - a ``n.d.'' (no date) should be given as year description. - For this, \pkg{apacite} supports the \cmd{\bibnodate} - command. This sometimes leads to different formatting as well, - e.g., by referencing a translation of a work of which there - is no original date. Then the \fieldname{originalyear} - field should be \cmd{\bibnodate} and the \fieldname{year} field - is then, e.g., \verb+1931+. If the \fieldname{translator} - field is not empty, the citation in the text is then formatted - as, e.g., ``\citeA{3.100-2}''. -\end{description} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Customization} -\label{sec:custom} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The description in the previous sections, with the exception of -section~\ref{sec:usage}, almost exclusively discussed the default behavior of -\pkg{apacite}. However, as mentioned in the introduction, in addition to the -options, \pkg{apacite} offers many possibilities for customization. Most -punctuation used in the citations and reference list are implemented through -\LaTeX{} commands instead of explicit symbols. Consequently, the user can -fine-tune the behavior of \pkg{apacite} by redefining these commands, through -\cmd{\renewcommand} after \pkg{apacite} has been loaded. Analogously, most -fixed texts, like ``Tech.\ Rep.{}'' and ``Eds.{}'' are implemented through -\LaTeX{} commands as well, and can similarly be changed by the user. The -commands used by \pkg{apacite} are discussed in this section. Of course, the -defaults are based on the rules of the APA manual. - -Some commands, predominantly punctuation, are used both in citations and in -the reference list. If you want their definitions in citations to be different -from their definitions in the reference list, you can simply redefine their -definitions before starting the bibliography. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection{Punctuation and formatting} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The following punctuation commands are provided and used for -the citations and reference list. -\begin{description} - \item[\cmd{\BAstyle}] This defines the text style of the authors - (or whatever takes their place) for an in-text citation. It - defaults to nothing: The authors use the same fonts as the - text surrounding it. Introduced because some journals use - a different style. For example, \emph{Statistica Neerlandica} - uses small-caps, so for that journal, you would define -\begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape} -\end{verbatim} - Do not use the \cmd{\textsc}-type commands, but \cmd{\scshape}, - \cmd{\bfseries}, etc. The \cmd{\BAstyle} command is used for - the author-part by the citation commands - \cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\shortcite}, \cmd{\fullcite}, - \cmd{\citeA}, \cmd{\shortciteA}, \cmd{\fullciteA}, - \cmd{\citeNP}, \cmd{\shortciteNP}, and \cmd{\fullciteNP}. - - \item[\cmd{\BAastyle}] This is the same as \cmd{\BAstyle}, except that - \cmd{\BAastyle} is used for \cmd{\citeauthor}, \cmd{\shortciteauthor}, - and \cmd{\fullciteauthor}. - - \item[\cmd{\BBOP}] Open parenthesis, used for parentheses opening - a citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973)'' or ``Rao (1973)'', and the - year in the reference list, as in ``Rao, C. R. (1973).'' - Default is ``\verb+(+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BBCP}] The corresponding closing parenthesis. - Default is ``\verb+)+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BAP}] This command is inserted after the prefix and before - the first citation in a \cmd{\cite} command. It defaults to an - ordinary space. - - \item[\cmd{\BBAA}] Last ``and'' between authors in a citation - between parentheses and in the reference list, as in - ``(Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)'' or ``Mooijaart, A., \& - Bentler, P. M. (1986).''. Default is ``\verb+\&+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BBAB}] Last ``and'' between authors in a citation in text, - as in ``Mooijaart and Bentler (1986)''. Default is ``\verb+and+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BBAY}] Punctuation between author(s) and year in a citation - between parentheses, as in ``(Rao, 1973)''. Default is ``\verb+, +''. - - \item[\cmd{\BBYY}] \label{cmd:BBYY} - Punctuation between two subsequent years, if two works - by the same author(s) are referenced in a single citation command, - as in ``(Rao, 1965, 1973)'' or ``Rao (1965, 1973)''. - Default is ``\verb+, +''. - - \item[\cmd{\BBC}] Punctuation between multiple cites, as in - ``(Rao, 1973; Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)''. - Default is ``\verb+; +''. - - \item[\cmd{\BBN}] Punctuation before a note (postfix) after - a citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973, chap.~2)''. - Default is ``\verb+, +''. - - \item[\cmd{\BBOQ}] Opening quote for an article title in the - reference list, as in - ``\flqq Random polynomial factor analysis.\frqq'' Default is - the empty string: no quotes used. - - \item[\cmd{\BBCQ}] Closing quote for an article title in the - reference list. Default is the empty string. - (The \pkg{theapa} package required the closing period to be part - of the closing quote, but this has been - changed, because the period must be left out if title comments, - such as type, English translation of non-English title, or - translator follow the title.) - - \item[\cmd{\BCBT}] Comma between authors in the reference section when - the number of authors is two, as in - ``Mooijaart, A., \& Bentler, P. M. (1986).'' The comma - after the ``A.'' is this one. Default is ``\verb+,+''. - The APA manual requires it, but other styles leave out this - comma. In such a case, you would redefine this ``comma'' to - be the empty string: -\begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand{\BCBT}{} -\end{verbatim} - - \item[\cmd{\BCBL}] Comma before the last author (for 3 or more authors) - in a citation and in the reference section, as in ``(Gill, Murray, - \& Wright, 1981)'' or ``Gill, P. E., Murray, W., \& Wright, M. H. - (1981).'' Default is ``\verb+,+''. The APA manual requires it, - which is standard U.S. usage, but other styles, particularly - European, such as British English, leave out this comma. Again, - in such a case, you would redefine this ``comma'' to - be the empty string. - - \item[\cmd{\BAnd}] This is the ``and'' that is used in the reference list - if someone is both editor and translator: - ``In J. Strachey (Ed. \& Trans),''. Default is ``\verb+\&+''. - - \item[\cmd{\theBibCnt}] If there are multiple citations with the same - author and year, a letter should be added to the year to distinguish - the references. For example, one may refer to two or more articles - by J. Smith published in 1982. They should be referred to as - ``Smith (1982a)'', ``Smith (1982b)'', and so forth. To accomplish - this, the counter \verb+BibCnt+ is defined in \fname{apacite.sty}. - The \cmd{\theBibCnt} command defines how the value of \verb+BibCnt+ - is formatted. The default is ``\verb+\alph{BibCnt}+''. To - emphasize (italicize) the ``a'', ``b'', etc., you can redefine - this as -\begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}} -\end{verbatim} - (This presumably works better than ``\verb+\emph{\alph{BibCnt}}+''.) - To control this behavior, redefining the \cmd{\theBibCnt} command - should normally be sufficient. However, the complete formatting - commands are \cmd{\BCnt}, \cmd{\BCntIP}, and \cmd{\BCntND}. The - second of these is for ``in press'' works, which need an extra hyphen - between ``in press'' and the ``a'' and ``b'' suffixes. The third is - similar, for works without a date. Their default definitions - in \fname{apacite.sty} are -\begin{verbatim} -\newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\theBibCnt} -\newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt} -\newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt} -\end{verbatim} - - \item[\cmd{\APACciteatitle}] The formatting of the title of an - article (or similar work) - when used as a citation in the text when no author or editor - is available for that purpose. Its default definition - in \fname{apacite.sty} is -\begin{verbatim} -\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''} -\end{verbatim} - i.e., the title is put between double quotes. - - \item[\cmd{\APACcitebtitle}] The formatting of the title of a book - (or other independent work) - when used as a citation in the text when no author or editor - is available for that purpose. Its default definition - in \fname{apacite.sty} is -\begin{verbatim} -\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}} -\end{verbatim} - i.e., the title is emphasized (in italics) but not put between - double quotes. - - \item[\cmd{\APACmetastar}] The asterisk that precedes an item in the - bibliography to denote that it is included in the meta-analysis. - The default value is ``\verb+$\star$\ +''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibnewpage}] If the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option - is chosen, this command is included before the bibliography. - Its default definition is \cmd{\clearpage}, but \fname{apa.cls} - uses a similar construction with its \pkgoption{man} option - through \cmd{\newpage}. - See \citeA[p.~215]{LaTeXbook} for the differences between - \cmd{\clearpage} and \cmd{\newpage}. - - \item[\cmd{\bibliographytypesize}] This command is used before - the reference list, but after the section or chapter heading. - It is intended for the font size of the reference list: - For \citeA{WaMe00}, I defined it as \cmd{\small} (and even then - the reference list took up 34 pages). The default value is - \cmd{\normalsize}. - - \item[\cmd{\bibleftmargin}] This gives the indentation of the second - and subsequent lines of a reference list entry, relative to the - usual left margin. It is not a proper command, but a - ``skip'' (rubber length), which means that it cannot be changed by - \cmd{\renewcommand}, but by \cmd{\setlength}. Its default - value is \verb+2.5em+. - - \item[\cmd{\bibindent}] This gives the indentation of the first - line of a reference list entry, relative to the second line. - It is also a ``skip''. Its default value is \verb+-\bibleftmargin+, - which means that the first line starts at the original left margin, - and the second and subsequent lines are indented by 2.5em. - - \item[\cmd{\bibitemsep}] This gives the vertical separation - between two reference list entries. It is also a ``skip'', with - default value ``\verb+\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax+'', i.e., 0pt, - but it may be stretched a little to fill the page nicely. - This is an old (Plain \TeX) style definition, I will probably - change that in a next version. If you want to change it, - e.g., to get a blank line between reference list entries, - you can use -\begin{verbatim} -\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip} -\end{verbatim} -\end{description} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection{Labels} -\label{sec:labels} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -There are a lot of specific pieces of text that can be put into the reference -list or a citation by \pkg{apacite}. Here, these pieces are called -\emph{labels}. Almost all of these are to some extent language-specific, and -sometimes style-specific even within the same language. Therefore, they are -implemented through \LaTeX{} commands, so that users can easily change them. -In this section, these commands and their purposes are described, and their -(U.S.\ English) defaults are given. Section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} below will -discuss how these commands are changed if another language is used. - -The following label commands are used: -\begin{description} - \item[\cmd{\bibmessage}] This is the first of 9 specific type - commands that are recognized by \pkg{apacite}. If you - define the \fieldname{type} field of a \entryname{misc} - entry as ``\cmd{\bibmessage}'', the formatting of the - entry is changed (e.g., the title is not italicized), - see the discussion of the \fieldname{type} field in - section~\ref{subsec:fields} above. This one is used for - messages in newsgroups, internet forums, etc. - Default is ``\verb+Msg+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogram}] - Default is ``\verb+Computer program+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}] - Default is ``\verb+Computer program manual+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}] - Default is ``\verb+Computer program and manual+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftware}] - Default is ``\verb+Computer software+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}] - Default is ``\verb+Computer software manual+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}] - Default is ``\verb+Computer software and manual+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}] - Default is ``\verb+Programming language+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibnotype}] - This one is a bit different from the previous 8. It is used for - \entryname{techreport} entries to indicate that the type specifier - should be suppressed. Its default value is the empty string, but this - will not have an effect on \pkg{apacite} behavior, because the type - specifier is suppressed anyway by \pkg{apacite}. However, by defining it - as the empty string, formatting may become better (i.e., closer to the - desired formatting) with other styles. - - \item[\cmd{\bibnodate}] Used in the \fieldname{year} and - \fieldname{originalyear} fields to indicate that no - publication date has been given. Default value is ``\verb+n.d.{}+''. - The extra pair of braces ensures that \TeX\ does not treat - the period before them as a sentence-ending period, after which - more space is inserted. This also applies to several other - labels discussed below. - - \item[\cmd{\BOthers}] Used for ``others'' if the number of authors - or editors is too large, as in ``(Gill et al., 1981)''. - The default is ``\verb+et al.{}+''. - - However, the definition contains a slight adaptation, because - in a previous version of \pkg{apacite}, there was a problem - implying that in some cases \BibTeX{} might put an extra period after - \cmd{\BOthers}, not recognizing that it already contains a period, - so that you would get ``et al.{}.'', which is undesirable. - It depends on the definition of \cmd{\BOthers} whether there should - be a period or not: If it is defined as ``\verb+et al.{}+'', - there should not be an additional period, but if it is defined - as, say, ``\verb+and others+'', then there should be an additional - period. But \BibTeX{} does not know what the (later) definition - of this command will be in \LaTeX{}. Therefore, the \cmd{\BOthers} - command is defined to have one argument. In \BibTeX{}, - \pkg{apacite} inserts \verb+\BOthers{.}+ in the output, so no - additional period is inserted by \BibTeX{}. By default, this - command is defined as ``\verb+et al.{}+'', and the argument is - simply ignored. - - If you redefine the \cmd{\BOthers} command and need the additional - period, you can redefine it appropriately. However, in the current - version, the \cmd{\BOthers} command is distinguished from the - \cmd{\BOthersPeriod} command and I think the mentioned problems - do not occur anymore. Nevertheless, I have kept the definition of the - previous version. I may decide, after thorough testing, to change - this again in a next version. - - There is still a complication, however. If you use a \cmd{\citeauthor} - at the end of a sentence, there may be a period too many, if - you end the sentence explicitly with it and \cmd{\BOthers} is - ``et al.{}''. On the other hand, if you omit the sentence-finishing - period but decide to redefine \cmd{\BOthers} to ``and others'', - the period is missing. Therefore, it seems wise not to end a sentence - with a \cmd{\citeauthor}, or you could define a command, e.g., - \cmd{\finishsentence}, and insert it in an appropriate place. - Then, this command should be changed along with \cmd{\BOthers}. - - \item[\cmd{\BOthersPeriod}] Also used for ``others'' if the number of - authors or editors is too large, as in ``Gill, P. E., et al. (1981)''. - But this one is used for situations when it should always end with - a period. The default is ``\verb+et al.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BIP}] ``In press'', the string to be used as year for - in-press references. In the \fname{.bib} file, the \fieldname{year} - field should be ``\verb+\BIP+'', so that \pkg{apacite} can recognize - this and use appropriate formatting and sorting. - The default value is ``\verb+in press+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BIn}] Used for \entryname{incollection} and - \entryname{intechreport}, for ``In \opt{editor} (Ed.{}), - \opt{booktitle}'', and similar phrases. Default value is ``\verb+In+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BCHAP}] Used for \entryname{incollection} if the - \fieldname{pages} field is empty, to denote the chapter number - of the referenced work in the collection. Used primarily for - internet documents, where there are no page numbers. - Default value is ``\verb+chap.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BCHAPS}] Just like \cmd{\BCHAP}, but this one is used - if the \fieldname{chapter} field refers to more than 1 chapter. - Default value is ``\verb+chap.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BED}] Editor in reference list, as in - ``In P. R. Krishnaiah (Ed.{})''. Default is ``\verb+Ed.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BEDS}] Editors (more than one editor) in reference list, - as in ``In C. R. Rao \& J. K. Ghosh (Eds.{})''. - Default is ``\verb+Eds.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BTRANS}] Translator, as in ``(J. Strachey, Trans.{})''. - Default is ``\verb+Trans.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BTRANSS}] Translators. Default is ``\verb+Trans.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BTRANSL}] Translation. Used in a text citation when - referring to a translated work for which there is no date - for the original work. This is then formatted as - ``Aristotle (trans.{} 1931)''. Default is ``\verb+trans.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BCHAIR}] Chair of a symposium, etc. - Default is ``\verb+Chair+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BCHAIRS}] Chairs. Default is ``\verb+Chairs+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BVOL}] Volume, as in ``Vol.\ 1''. - Default is ``\verb+Vol.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BVOLS}] Volumes, as in ``Vols.{} 1--4''. - Default is ``\verb+Vols.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BNUM}] Number, as in ``Tech.\ Rep.{} No.{} 12''. - Default is ``\verb+No.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BNUMS}] Numbers, as in ``Nos.{} 3--5''. - Default is ``\verb+Nos.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BEd}] Edition, as in ``2nd ed.{}''. - Default is ``\verb+ed.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BPG}] Page, default is ``\verb+p.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BPGS}] Pages, default is ``\verb+pp.{}+''. - - \item[\cmd{\BTR}] The (default) technical report type name, which can be - overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is - ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.{}+'' - - \item[\cmd{\BPhD}] The (default) PhD thesis type name, which can be - overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is - ``\texttt{Doctoral dissertation}''. - - \item[\cmd{\BUPhD}] The (default) Unpublished PhD thesis type name, - which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is - ``\texttt{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}''. - - \item[\cmd{\BMTh}] The (default) master's thesis type name, which can be - overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is - ``\texttt{Master's thesis}''. - - \item[\cmd{\BUMTh}] The (default) unpublished master's thesis type name, - which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is - ``\texttt{Unpublished master's thesis}''. - - \item[\cmd{\BOWP}] ``Original work published'', default is - ``\texttt{Original work published}''. - - \item[\cmd{\BREPR}] ``Reprinted from'', default is - ``\texttt{Reprinted from}''. - - \item[\cmd{\refname}] Name of the reference list if it's a section. - (So it's the section name.) Default is ``\verb+References+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibname}] Name of the reference list if it's a chapter. - Default is ``\verb+References+''. - - \item[\cmd{\bibliographyprenote}] This command is used before - the reference list, but after the section or chapter heading, - and immediately after \cmd{\bibliographytypesize}. - It is intended for an optional note just before the references - in the reference list. It defaults to nothing, but can be changed - to a list of commands (e.g., if some commands should be different - in the reference list than in the text) and/or some text. - - \item[\cmd{\APACmetaprenote}] If a meta-analysis is reported, the - works included in the meta-analysis should in the bibliography be - preceded by an asterisk, see the description of \cmd{\APACmetastar} - above. This should then be explained in a note before the references. - This command contains the text of that note. Default is - ``\texttt{References marked with an asterisk indicate studies - included in the meta-analysis.}''. - - \item[\cmd{\authorindexname}] Name (heading) of the author index. - Default is ``\verb+Author Index+''. -\end{description} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Language support} -\label{sec:compat-babel} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The APA is, of course, American, and therefore the rules in the APA manual -are also based on the (U.S.) English language. Because \pkg{apacite} was -primarily designed to implement the APA rules, and because I write all -my scientific work in English, \pkg{apacite} never contained explicit -support for other languages. However, most language-specific elements -have been implemented in the form of \LaTeX{} commands, so that users -could define their own \LaTeX{} package in which these elements were -changed. The labels discussed in section~\ref{sec:labels} above are the -most important part of this. - -Furthermore, when writing in a non-English language, the \pkg{babel} package -will usually be loaded. The \pkg{babel} package is an extensive package that -facilitates using \LaTeX{} for documents in languages other than English. -There have been some compatibility problems between \pkg{babel} and -\pkg{apacite}, and therefore since 2003 \pkg{apacite} contained some -explicit code to overcome the compatibility problems. I think this works -well, provided that \pkg{apacite} is loaded \emph{after} \pkg{babel}. - -Thus, although \pkg{apacite} did not support non-English languages -explicitly, it did facilitate them. Supporting non-English languages is -not a main objective of \pkg{apacite}, because it is not needed for -the APA. Nevertheless, it would be a useful addition. Many journals in -non-English languages and universities in countries where other languages -are spoken base their rules on the APA manual. Therefore, it would be -efficient if, with a few adaptations, \pkg{apacite} could also be used in -these circumstances. For this reason, and based on user requests, the -current version of \pkg{apacite} contains a first attempt at explicit -language support. - -The \pkg{apacite} distribution now contains a subdirectory \fname{lang}, -which contains files that have names according to the construction -\opt{language}\fname{.apc}, i.e., \fname{english.apc}, \fname{dutch.apc}, etc. -These files contain the language-specific modifications of \pkg{apacite}, -mainly translations of terms like ``and'', ``Ed.{}'', etc., and have been -written by \pkg{apacite} users that are (native) speakers of the languages -involved. If the \pkg{babel}, \pkg{german}, or \pkg{ngerman} package is -loaded, \pkg{apacite} is able to determine the language of the document that -is processed. Then the corresponding \fname{.apc} file, when available, is -read. In this way, language-specific elements are changed to the relevant -language. This is done fully automatically, the user does not have to do -anything explicitly. However, sometimes an \fname{.apc} file makes some -assumptions (such as \fname{greek.apc}, which assumes ISO-8859-7 encoding) -or makes some choices that are nontrivial. Therefore, look at the source -code of the \fname{.apc} file if you obtain unexpected results. These files -contain some brief documentation of the specific issues relevant for the -language at hand. - -The list with available \fname{.apc} files can be found in the file -\fname{manifest.txt}. One file is defined for each ``language'', which can be -used for several ``dialects'' (in \pkg{babel} terminology). For example, -\fname{english.apc} is also used if the language is ``american''. See the -documentation of the \pkg{babel} and \pkg{(n)german} packages for a list of -dialects of the language files supplied. If an \fname{.apc} file is not -available for the language you need, you can use one of the supplied ones as a -template and write your own. If you send it to me, I can include it in a next -version of \pkg{apacite}. - -Note, however, that this form of language support is still very limited. -There are many aspects that are not yet covered, like different forms of -dates (month-day vs.\ day-month). I have recently discovered the -\pkg{babelbib} package, which offers very sophisticated support of -different languages. I will study this and see whether I can use some -of its features in a future version of \pkg{apacite}. - -One of the issues that is not yet settled is how to treat the months. -I could define these as commands like \cmd{\January} or according -to a construction like \verb+\bibmonth{1}+. The months are now still -hard-coded in English as macros in \fname{apacite.bst}. -This means that, when using a different language, they can (and must) -be redefined in the \fname{.bib} file, by including lines like: -\begin{verbatim} - @string{jan = "{\APACSortNoop{01}}January"} -\end{verbatim} -etc., where you replace ``\verb+January+'' by the translation of January -in the desired language. The ``\verb+{\APACSortNoop{01}}+'' ensures that -\BibTeX{} sorts January before, say, April, when that is needed. - -It is likely that you would use these month definitions a lot, in which case -an even better solution would be to write a special \fname{.bib} file, say -\opt{language}\fname{.bib}, which only contains these month redefinitions. -Then you could put this file somewhere where \BibTeX{} can find it and include -this before your (other) \fname{.bib} file(s) that contain the actual -references: -\begin{verbatim} -\bibliographystyle{apacite} -\bibliography{language,otherbibfiles} -\end{verbatim} -See \citeA[p.~159]{LaTeXbook} or \citeA[p.~403]{LaTeXcomp} for a discussion -of these issues. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Compatibility} -\label{sec:compat} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -Generally speaking, I would want \pkg{apacite} to be compatible with other -packages, of course. However, what does compatibility mean? It can mean -various things: -\begin{enumerate} -\item \label{compat1}% - The same \fname{.bib} file can be used with - different \BibTeX{} styles and \LaTeX{} citation packages; -\item \label{compat2}% - The same citation commands as other citation packages; -\item \label{compat3}% - Another \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a - \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by the \pkg{apacite} - \BibTeX{} style; -\item \label{compat4}% - The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a - \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by another \BibTeX{} style; -\item \label{compat5}% - The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be loaded at the - same time as other packages without errors or undesirable - side-effects. -\end{enumerate} -Because of the complicated rules of the APA manual, it is not always possible -to achieve all kinds of compatibility with all other packages. Later in this -section, I will discuss compatibility issues with other packages with which -known incompatibility problems exist or have existed. A first example of this, -the \pkg{babel} package, has already been mentioned above in -section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}. - -Point~\ref{compat1} is the most important. If you have to write a completely -different \fname{.bib} file for different citation styles, there does not seem -to be an advantage in using \BibTeX{}. You might as well write the reference -list explicitly in \LaTeX{} then. However, not even this point can be achieved -completely, although the vast majority of the items will be the same for -different styles. But there remain a number of choices that are style-specific -and that lead to differences in the \fname{.bib} file. Examples from the APA -manual are: -\begin{itemize} -\item If a referenced book is volume~III according to its title - page, this should be referenced as Vol.~3 according to the - APA manual rules, but that may not be the case with other - styles; -\item Journal names are abbreviated by some styles, but not - according to the APA manual rules; -\item Publisher names should be abbreviated according to the - APA manual, e.g., ``John Wiley \& Sons'' becomes ``Wiley''. - Other styles do not do this; -\item The issue number of a journal should only be given if - the journal starts each issue with page~1, not if page - numbers of different issues in the same volume are consecutive. - Other styles may require the issue number in all cases; -\item Page ranges are given as ``341--351'' in APA style, whereas - other styles use ``341--51''; -\item The APA rules require a capital after a colon (`\verb+:+'), - so that subtitles start with a capital as well. Other styles - may not do this; -\item The APA has specific rules about the address: For a U.S. city, - the state (or territory) should be given as a 2-letter code - from the U.S. Postal Services, and the province and country - should be given if it is a non-U.S. city, unless it is one of - the 17 (U.S. and non-U.S.) cities that are ``well-known for - publishing''. Then, only the city should be mentioned. There - are similar exceptions if the name of the state (and sometimes - even city) is already mentioned in the university name and - the university acts as publisher; -\item Yearbooks like \emph{Annual Review of Psychology} should be treated - as journals according to the APA rules, whereas other styles - treat these as books; -\item The additional fields (such as \fieldname{translator} and the - \fieldname{original*}-fields) that are used by \pkg{apacite} but are - not defined in other \BibTeX{} styles are of course - \pkg{apacite}-specific. -\end{itemize} -Some of these problems can be handled relatively elegantly. For example, -the user could use a command like ``\verb+\RomanVol{3}+'' in the -\fieldname{volume} field. Then, the user could define a counter, -\verb+RomanVolcounter+, say, in \LaTeX{} and then define -\cmd{\RomanVol} (similar to \cmd{\BCnt} discussed earlier) as -\begin{verbatim} -\newcommand{\RomanVol}[1]{% - \setcounter{RomanVolcounter}{#1}\theRomanVolcounter} -\end{verbatim} -where \cmd{\theRomanVolcounter} is defined as \verb+\arabic{RomanVolcounter}+ -if \pkg{apacite} is loaded and as \verb+\Roman{RomanVolcounter}+ if another -package is loaded that desires this. The example with style-specific -\fname{.bib} files that contain the definitions of journal-strings was already -given in section~\ref{sec:bib} above. However, many users will not go through -all this trouble, and not all problems can be solved in this way. So we have -to realize that not all entries in the \fname{.bib} file will be suitable for -all citation styles. On the other hand, most citation styles and journals are -not as critical as APA journals and many styles in psychology and other social -sciences (including economics) are very similar, so a \fname{.bib} file that -is tailor-made for \pkg{apacite} is likely to be suitable enough for the -styles of most relevant alternative journals. - -Point~\ref{compat2} above is currently not fulfilled. The \pkg{apacite} -citation commands are directly based on those of its immediate predecessor, -\pkg{theapa}. But the use of `\verb+<+' and `\verb+>+' for prefixes is not -used by other packages. The influential \pkg{natbib} package uses \cmd{\citep} -and \cmd{\citet} instead of \cmd{\cite} and \cmd{\citeA}, and uses many more -alternative commands, see section~\ref{sec:compat-natbib} below. The -\pkg{chicago} package uses \cmd{\citeA} instead of \cmd{\citeauthor}, many -``numerical'' citation styles only recognize \cmd{\cite}, and so forth. As -discussed below, I now consider \pkg{natbib} as the standard with which other -packages should comply. Therefore, future versions of \pkg{apacite} will -support the \pkg{natbib} citation commands, but the current version does not -do that. - -I think that points~\ref{compat3} and~\ref{compat4} are not that important. It -seems to me that there is not much wrong with defining a style through a -combination of a \fname{.sty} and \fname{.bst} file, each requiring the other -to work. However, given the possibilities and philosophy of the \pkg{natbib} -package, it would be desirable that \fname{natbib.sty} can be used with -\fname{apacite.bst}. As discussed below, this works to some extent, although -it requires \fname{apacite.sty} to be loaded as well, before -\fname{natbib.sty}. - -Point~\ref{compat5} is very important, especially with other packages that are -complementary to \pkg{apacite} in some sense. It would be very annoying having -to choose between using \pkg{babel} and \pkg{apacite}, or between -\pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{apacite}, etc. These packages serve totally different -purposes, cannot usefully be compared, and are more valuable when they can be -used jointly. The rest of this section addresses this issue for a number of -packages with which compatibility problems are known to exist or have existed. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection{Compatibility of \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{natbib}} -\label{sec:compat-natbib} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The \pkg{natbib} package is a general purpose citation package that is -intended to work with a broad range of \BibTeX{} (and non-\BibTeX{}) styles -that generate the bibliography. The \pkg{natbib} package is quite advanced and -can be used to switch easily between completely different citation styles. -Furthermore, the apparent popularity of \pkg{natbib} has inspired writers of -packages that would otherwise be incompatible with \pkg{natbib} to write code -to resolve these incompatibilities. I will mention some of these packages -below. - -I consider \pkg{natbib} as the \emph{de facto} standard with which -other packages should be compatible. Unfortunately, \pkg{apacite} is still -not entirely compatible with \pkg{natbib}. The main incompatibility is that -different citation commands are used, so that it is not possible to use the -same document with \pkg{natbib} or \pkg{apacite}. - -\pkg{apacite}, building on its predecessors, uses \cmd{\cite} for -parenthetical citations and \cmd{\citeA} for in-text citations, whereas -\pkg{natbib} uses \cmd{\citep} and \cmd{\citet} for these purposes. Moreover, -text that should precede the citation is entered between \verb+<+ and \verb+>+ -marks and text that should follow the citation is entered between square -brackets (\verb+[+ and \verb+]+, i.e., a standard \LaTeX{} optional argument) -in \pkg{apacite}, whereas \pkg{natbib} uses \emph{two} optional arguments -between brackets. If there is one optional argument, \pkg{natbib} interprets -this as text following the citation (just like \pkg{apacite}). If there is -text that should precede the citation, but not text that should follow the -citation, two optional arguments must be used in \pkg{natbib}, the second -being empty. - -Furthermore, both packages have defined some alternative citation commands, -such as \cmd{\citeNP} (\pkg{apacite}) and \cmd{\citealp} (\pkg{natbib}), some -of which serve the same purpose and could therefore be mapped onto each other -easily, but some others have no equivalent in the other package. - -A partial conversion table, listing the main \pkg{apacite} commands and their -(closest) \pkg{natbib} equivalent is given in Table~\ref{tab:APAnatConv}. The -APA requirement and \pkg{apacite} behavior of listing the full author list for -the first citation (if there are at most 5 authors) and the short author list -in subsequent citations is accomplished by loading \pkg{natbib} with the -\pkgoption{longnamesfirst} option. This is assumed in the table. An example of -better APA-like behavior of \pkg{natbib} is that, by using the -\pkgoption{sort} option, \pkg{natbib} is able to sort the references within -the same citation command, as required by the APA manual, whereas -\pkg{apacite} does not have this option yet. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\begin{table}[htp] -\caption{Partial conversion table of the main \pkg{apacite} - citation commands and their (closest) \pkg{natbib} equivalents.} -\label{tab:APAnatConv} -\begin{tabular}{lcl} -\hline -\pkg{apacite} & $\mbox{}\qquad\qquad\mbox{}$ & \pkg{natbib} \\ -\cline{1-1}\cline{3-3} -\cmd{\cite} & & \cmd{\citep} \\ -\cmd{\citeA} & & \cmd{\citet} \\ -\cmd{\citeNP} & & \cmd{\citealp} \\ -\cmd{\citeauthor} & & \cmd{\citeauthor} \\ -\\ -\cmd{\fullcite} & & \cmd{\citep*} \\ -\cmd{\fullciteA} & & \cmd{\citet*} \\ -\cmd{\fullciteNP} & & \cmd{\citealp*} \\ -\cmd{\fullciteauthor} & & \cmd{\citeauthor*} \\ -\\ -\cmd{\shortcite} & & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citep} \\ -\cmd{\shortciteA} & & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citet} \\ -\cmd{\shortciteNP} & & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citealp} \\ -\cmd{\shortciteauthor} & & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citeauthor} \\ -\\ -\cmd{\citeyear} & & \cmd{\citeyearpar} \\ -\cmd{\citeyearNP} & & \cmd{\citeyear} \\ -\cmd{\nocite} & & \cmd{\nocite} \\ -\hline -\end{tabular} -\end{table} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -Many labeling and punctuation commands are also different but similar between -\pkg{natbib} and \pkg{apacite}. I haven't studied the \pkg{natbib} commands -in detail, but will do so in the future. It is my intention to add -\pkg{natbib}-compatible commands to apacite in the future, so that the same -document can be processed either with \pkg{natbib} or with \pkg{apacite}. - -With previous versions of \pkg{apacite}, there used to be some erratic -behavior (error messages and wrong formatting) when the \pkg{natbib} -\LaTeX{} package (\fname{natbib.sty}) was used with the \pkg{apacite} -\BibTeX{} style (\fname{apacite.bst} or \fname{apacitex.bst}). These -problems have now been almost entirely resolved (I believe). - -When you want to use \pkg{natbib} for citation and \pkg{apacite} for the -reference list, you still need to load the \LaTeX{} package \fname{apacite.sty} -(with \cmd{\usepackage}), because of the commands that are included in the -\BibTeX{} output (as defined in section~\ref{sec:custom} above). The -\fname{apacite.sty} file must be loaded \emph{before} \fname{natbib.sty}, -otherwise you will get lots of error messages. I may try to fix that for -a future version of \pkg{apacite}. - -Using \pkg{natbib} for the citations has some advantages over using -\pkg{apacite} for the citations. Apart from the abovementioned sorting -of citations within a single citation command, these are mainly -\pkg{natbib}'s better compatibility with other important packages, -such as \pkg{hyperref}. - -However, \pkg{natbib} does not fully comply with the APA rules. -Known incompatibilities between \pkg{natbib} and the APA rules are: (1) -Multiple adjacent citations with the same author and year are formatted -as ``Johnson, 1991a,b'' by \pkg{natbib}, whereas the APA manual requires -this to be ``Johnson, 1991a, 1991b''; (2) The APA manual requires ``and'' -between authors to be ``and'' in text and ``\&'' in parenthetical citation. - -I could change the \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst} \BibTeX{} -style files so that \pkg{natbib} would be ``fooled'' and the first -problem would be resolved. However, this has the drawback of imposing APA -style citations when you request \pkg{natbib} style citations, and you -may actually want the behavior mentioned above. I am only able to provide -one of these possibilities. It would be better to add an option to -\pkg{natbib} with which the desired behavior can be chosen. Thus, you -could try to put pressure on the author of \pkg{natbib} to achieve this. -Alternatively, I might attempt to provide an option to \pkg{apacite} -in the future that controls this behavior of \pkg{natbib}. - -The second incompatibility between \pkg{natbib} and the APA rules mentioned -above occurs because \pkg{apacite} uses the re-definable \cmd{\BBA} -command for this usage of ``and''. With \pkg{natbib}, it is not possible -that \cmd{\BBA} ``knows'' whether it is parenthetical or in-text, so you can -choose only one of these, or you must redefine \cmd{\BBA} explicitly before -each citation. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection{Compatibility of \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{hyperref}} -\label{sec:compat-hyper} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The \pkg{hyperref} package turns (cross-) references into hypertext links. -This can be used in conjunction with a program such as \latextohtml{} to -compose \fname{.html} files with clickable links, to internet pages or within -the same document, or it can be used to create a \fname{.pdf} document with -clickable crossreferences. Evidently, citations are also references. -Therefore, the \pkg{hyperref} package transforms these into hypertext links as -well, and needs to redefine the citation commands and reference list commands -in order to do so. These redefinitions are incompatible with redefinitions of -the citation commands by \pkg{apacite}. - -Similar problems occur between \pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{natbib}, and some code -is included in both packages, which jointly resolves these incompatibilities. -In order to make \pkg{apacite} compatible with \pkg{hyperref}, similar code -should be developed and included in \pkg{apacite}. - -An attempt to achieve this can be tried through the \pkgoption{hyper} option -of \pkg{apacite}. This activates some code provided by Ross Moore (thanks, -Ross) that makes \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{hyperref} work together to some -extent. However, different things go wrong depending on the order in which the -two packages are loaded. - -If the \pkg{hyperref} package is loaded \emph{after} \pkg{apacite}, different -citations with the same author(s) and year do not work well: \pkg{hyperref} -suppresses the ``a'', ``b'', etc., so ``(Johnson, 1991a)'' becomes ``(Johnson, -1991)'', which is undesirable. If the \pkg{hyperref} package is loaded -\emph{before} \pkg{apacite}, this problem does not occur, but the citations in -the text do not link to the reference list anymore. - -The following problems are independent of the order of loading: -(1) Citations of the form ``(Author, year1, year2)'', i.e., with multiple - references to the same author(s) in the same citation command are not - recognized as such and are thus formatted as ``(Author, year1; Author, - year2)''; -(2) If the \cmd{\url} command from the \pkg{url} package is used for internet - addresses (e.g., for retrieval information in the reference list), line - breaks are not inserted within the address, even if it's way too long for - the line, and ``\verb+#+'' characters in the internet address are not - processed well, see the discussion of the \pkg{backref} package below. - -Because of these known problems, the \pkgoption{hyper} option is not executed -by default (the \pkgoption{nohyper} option is), but if you find the advantages -more important than the disadvantages, you can request this option. Note that -you should load the \pkg{hyperref} package yourself, this is not done by -\pkg{apacite}. Thus, you can choose the order in which to load the packages. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection{Compatibility of \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{backref}} -\label{sec:compat-backref} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The \pkg{backref} package adds to each entry in the bibliography a list -of pages (or sections) on which it is referenced. Hence, it serves as -an alternative to an author index, in which not the entries themselves -are backreferenced, but the authors of these entries, see -section~\ref{sec:autindex}. Note that \pkg{natbib} offers yet another -possibility, viz.\ the citations in the standard index, or a separate -citation index, see the \pkg{natbib} documentation. In my opinion, -the \pkg{backref} way of indexing the page numbers of the citations -is more logical. Moreover, it is more condensed as well. - -Obviously, the \pkg{backref} package has to change the citation commands -and reference list to be able to do its backreferencing. -Because \pkg{apacite} redefines these as well, they are conflicting -to some degree. A similar compatibility problem between \pkg{backref} -and \pkg{natbib} was noticed by the author of \pkg{backref}. Therefore, -\pkg{backref} contains some code to make it compatible with \pkg{natbib}. -This code has been adapted for \pkg{apacite} and incorporated in -\pkg{apacite}. Thus, \pkg{backref} as a standalone package has been made -compatible with \pkg{apacite}. The drawback of this solution is that if -changes are made in the \pkg{backref} package, this may result in new -incompatibilities with \pkg{apacite} unless \pkg{apacite} is changed as -well. Whether, and if so, when, this will occur will be a question for -the future. - -Ex.~74 of the APA manual references an internet address that contains a -``\verb+#+''. This leads to an error with \pkg{backref} and when entered -through, \LaTeX{} inserts ``\verb+##+'' in the output instead of ``\verb+#+''. -This will not occur often in practice, but unfortunately occurs in the -mentioned example, which might give the impression that it is an \pkg{apacite} -bug, but it is not an \pkg{apacite} problem or even a compatibility problem, -but a \pkg{backref} problem. I had to use some nasty code in the current -document (\fname{apacite.tex}) to have the bibliography entry of this -reference formatted correctly when \pkg{backref} is loaded. When you -encounter this problem, you can use this code. - -Apart from being a standalone package, \pkg{backref} can also be -combined with \pkg{hyperref}. It is then not loaded separately, -but through the \pkgoption{backref} or \pkgoption{pagebackref} -option of the \pkg{hyperref} package. In this case, the backreferences -become hypertext links. See the discussion of the \pkg{hyperref} -package above. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection{Multiple bibliographies} -\label{sec:compat-chapterbib} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The \pkg{chapterbib} package allows separate bibliographies for separate -chapters of a book, or, technically, separate \cmd{\include}d files. To work -properly, it needs some small changes to the citation package, which are -clearly described in the \pkg{chapterbib} documentation. These changes have -been incorporated in \pkg{apacite}, and therefore \pkg{apacite} is compatible -with \pkg{chapterbib}. - -It is generally advisable not to use the \pkgoption{sectionbib} option of -\pkg{chapterbib}, because this redefines \cmd{\thebibliography}, which -interferes with the redefinition by \pkg{apacite}. You can use the -\pkgoption{sectionbib} option of \pkg{apacite} to accomplish that the -bibliography or bibliographies are sections, rather than chapters. - -Moreover, \pkg{apacite} is configured such that it takes a section as default -if it is in the main matter (signified by \cmd{\mainmatter}) of the document. -In the back matter (\cmd{\backmatter}) the bibliography is put in a chapter. -This is also the case if \cmd{\chapter} is defined but \cmd{\mainmatter} not. -(Is this possible? Perhaps for reports?) Consequently, the -\pkgoption{sectionbib} option is only useful in specific circumstances. The -\pkgoption{nosectionbib} forces the bibliography to be a chapter, provided -\cmd{\chapter} is defined. (I figured a \pkgoption{chapterbib} option would be -a bit confusing, so I stuck with \pkgoption{nosectionbib}.) - -The \pkg{bibunits} package is an alternative to \pkg{chapterbib}. It allows a -greater flexibility in choosing the scope of a bibliography (chapter, section, -or arbitrarily defined part of the document). I haven't tested it thoroughly, -but it seems like there are no compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite} -and \pkg{bibunits}. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\subsection{Programs for conversion to html, rtf, etc.} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -There are several programs that convert \LaTeX{} files to other types -of files, most notably html and rtf. This may, for example, be useful if you -want to publish your document on the internet or if you are requested to send -a ``Word'' file to a journal. I have received reports that \latextohtml{} -and \LaTeXrtf{} do not handle documents that use \pkg{apacite} well. -Therefore, I have studied these programs. - -\latextohtml{} is a \Perl{} program that converts a \LaTeX{} input -file into one or more \fname{.html} files, so that a document that is prepared -with \LaTeX{} can be used as a (user-friendly) internet document. For papers, -lecture notes, and transparencies of classes, I always convert the -\fname{.dvi} file output by \LaTeX{} to a \fname{.pdf} file (through the -\pkg{dvipdfm} program), which can be read by most people, e.g., using the -\pkg{Adobe Reader} program or browser plug-in. I find \fname{.pdf} files -more convenient, because I can download a whole paper or presentation -with a single click and then print it and read it when and where I desire, -whereas typical examples of conversions to \fname{.html} use many -\fname{.html} files, which can only be conveniently read from the computer -screen when and where you're connected to the internet. Nevertheless, I can -imagine that someone would like to convert a document to \fname{.html}, e.g., -because it loads faster and reads easier from the screen, because for some -documents most people will have to use only a small part and can easier browse -or search through it, or just because you want to make a home page and do not -want to learn the html-language. - -Similarly, \LaTeXrtf{} is a standalone program that converts a \LaTeX{} -document to \fname{.rtf} format, which can be read by most word processors. -This may be convenient if you (a \LaTeX{} user) want to share a document with -someone who does not work with \LaTeX{}, or as mentioned above, if you are -required to send a ``Word'' file to a journal. - -Both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} implement \LaTeX{} macros etc.\ in -another programming language (\latextohtml{}: \Perl{}; \LaTeXrtf{}: C) and -process the \fname{.tex} files directly. This design implies that the -conversion program must know the definitions of all \LaTeX{} macros that -are used. A drawback of this design is that essentially the same code has -to be written in different programming languages (\LaTeX{} macros for the -\fname{.sty} file, \Perl{} for \latextohtml{}, and C for \LaTeXrtf{}), but -typically with some adaptations specific for the application at hand. - -With \LaTeXrtf{}, the \LaTeX{} macros that it is able to process are included -in the C source code that is compiled. Consequently, no user additions are -possible in principle. However, the source code is freely available, so if you -define a \LaTeX{} macro, you could adapt \LaTeXrtf{}'s source code and -recompile \LaTeXrtf{}. It is obvious that this is very inconvenient, -especially if \LaTeX{} macros are defined differently for different styles or -if they are defined differently in different parts of the same document. - -Version~1.9.15 and higher of \LaTeXrtf{} contains some support for -\pkg{apacite}, but lags a few versions of \pkg{apacite} behind and thus -doesn't work with recent versions of \pkg{apacite}. Moreover, even if this -would be fixed, e.g., because I (or you) send patches to the \LaTeXrtf{} -authors, this wouldn't do justice to the flexibility of \pkg{apacite}, i.e., -its customization options. - -In contrast with this, \latextohtml{} allows the possibility to supply -external \Perl{} scripts. If \latextohtml{} encounters a -\cmdtwo{usepackage}{package} command in the document, it attempts to read the -corresponding \opt{package}\fname{.perl} \Perl{} script. \latextohtml{} is -shipped with many such \Perl{} scripts. There is not one for \pkg{apacite}, -but there is one for \pkg{natbib}, which could possibly be adapted for -\pkg{apacite}. Alternatively, you could use the \pkg{natbib} citation commands -and use the \pkg{natbib} package, which should work. This will become more -straightforward when, in a future version, \pkg{apacite} also supports the -\pkg{natbib} citation commands. Then the \fname{natbib.perl} script may -possibly be copied to \fname{apacite.perl} without having to adapt much. -However, I have never studied \Perl{}, and I do not particularly like the -idea of having to learn that language for this purpose, so it is not very -likely that in the near future \latextohtml{} will work well with -\pkg{apacite}. - -Note, however, that the design with the \Perl{} scripts has the advantage -that, if you customize the usage of \pkg{apacite} by writing your own -\fname{.sty} file that renews the definitions of some macros, you can also -supply a corresponding \Perl{} script, so that your customizations are -processed. - -An alternative to both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} is \TeXht{}. This is -a collection of programs and style files that convert \LaTeX{} to -various formats, such as html, xml, and OpenOffice format. If you have -OpenOffice, the latter can be used to convert to Word (or rtf) format. -The principle of \TeXht{} is to let \LaTeX{} do most of the formatting and -processing of commands, and do the conversion at low-level \TeX{} commands. -In this way, all newly defined commands and user-defined changes are -automatically supported. This even carries over to redefinitions of macros -in the middle of a document. However, for some specific purposes, there are -some additional things that must be arranged. Therefore, \TeXht{} contains a -large list of \fname{.4ht} files that are necessary to support various -\LaTeX{} packages. One of these is the \fname{apacite.4ht} file. The main -purpose of this file is to make citations into hyperlinks to the corresponding -entries in the reference list. Currently, this only works partially, but -the citation text itself is formatted correctly, so this is only a -relatively minor inconvenience. But, of course, it would be better if this -would work perfectly. I suspect that this issue is related to the problems -with the compatibility of \pkg{apacite} with \pkg{hyperref}, and can be -solved in the same way. I intend to study this issue in the near future and -hope to solve this for a future version (although, technically, it is a -\TeXht{} problem and not an \pkg{apacite} problem). - -The choice of which converter to use will typically not (only) depend on how -good it works in conjunction with \pkg{apacite}. Furthermore, apart from the -converters mentioned above, there are several additional converters that I -haven't studied at all. I will only study them if I receive reports about -incompatibility and even then it is far from certain that I will be willing or -able to fix the problems. It would be very demanding if I would have to define -the \pkg{apacite} commands in a large number of programming languages for a -large number of different converters. Because I prefer the design of \TeXht{} -and because this converter seems to work best at the moment, I will give a -bit more attention to this one. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Generating an author index} -\label{sec:autindex} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The \pkg{apacite} package contains an option to (almost) automatically -generate an author index. This is done by using the \fname{apacitex.bst} -\BibTeX{} style file instead of \fname{apacite.bst} and loading the -\fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package with one of the \pkgoption{index}, -\pkgoption{stdindex}, \pkgoption{tocindex}, or \pkgoption{emindex} options. In -that case, the \pkg{apacite} package automatically loads the \pkg{index} -package that supports multiple indexes, so that you can have a subject index -as well as an author index. Consequently, the \pkg{index} package must be -available in a directory that is read by \LaTeX{}. If a subject index is -desired, it must be defined by the user, it is not defined by \pkg{apacite}. -See the manual of the \pkg{index} package on how to do this. A default author -index \emph{is} defined by \pkg{apacite}. The author index is then requested -by putting -\begin{verbatim} -\printindex[autx] -\end{verbatim} -at the point in the \LaTeX{} document where the index is supposed to appear. -To include the author index in the processed document, the following sequence -must be followed: First, \LaTeX{}, which puts citation entries in the -\fname{.aux} file. Second, \BibTeX{}, which generates the bibliography in the -\fname{.bbl} file. Third, \LaTeX{} (at least) twice, which puts index entries -in a \fname{.adx} file, Fourth, \MakeIndex{}, which uses the \fname{.adx} file -as input and puts the formatted index in a \fname{.and} file, which can be -processed by \LaTeX{}. So, if the main document is \fname{filename.tex}, then -\MakeIndex{} must be called as follows: -\begin{verbatim} -makeindex -o filename.and filename.adx -\end{verbatim} -although the command with which the \MakeIndex{} program must be called may on -some systems be slightly different, e.g., \fname{makeinde} or -\fname{makeindx}. Furthermore, several additional options may be chosen on the -\MakeIndex{} command line. Fifth, run \LaTeX{} again, which (finally) includes -the formatted author index in the \fname{.dvi} file. - -The \pkg{apacite} package provides some options to change the appearance of -the index somewhat. With the \pkgoption{index} option, the indexing facility -is turned on, but the \cmd{theindex} environment is not explicitly (re)defined -by \pkg{apacite}. This means that this environment is defined just like in the -\pkg{index} package, unless it is overridden by the \pkgoption{tocindex} or -\pkgoption{emindex} options or redefined by the user or another package that -is loaded. - -The \pkgoption{stdindex} option explicitly uses the definition of the -\cmd{theindex} environment that is defined in the \pkg{index} package -[1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)]. -With this definition, the index does not appear in the table of contents. With -the \pkgoption{tocindex} option, this definition is augmented with a table of -contents entry. Finally, with the \pkgoption{emindex} option, there are some -alternative definitions. It writes a table of contents entry as well, but the -index itself is now set in two columns using the \pkg{multicol} package -instead of the \cmd{\twocolumn} command, the text of the index is set in small -type, and the page head is not put in uppercase. - -When a table of contents entry is desired, another additional \LaTeX{} run is -required to obtain the table of contents with the author index included. In -exceptional cases, such as the current document, the extra line in de table of -contents may cause the text to be moved as well, so that it may be necessary -to run \MakeIndex{} a second time, followed by yet another \LaTeX{} run. - -The definitions of the index discussed apply to all indexes in the document, -so to, e.g., the subject index as well as the author index. Finally, the -formatting of the index itself can be changed by writing a \fname{.ist} file -containing the preferred options. \MakeIndex{} should then be called with the -filename of this index style file after a ``\verb+-s+'' option on the command -line, so, e.g., -\begin{verbatim} -makeindex -s mystyle.ist -o filename.and filename.adx -\end{verbatim} -The \MakeIndex{} documentation discusses the possible options that can be put -into the \fname{.ist} file. - -If you process the file \fname{apacite.tex} in the way discussed above (look -at the instructions in the \fname{README} file), it becomes clear that the -author index is almost as desired, but there are a few exceptions. First, I -can imagine that you would not want corporate authors, such as ``American -Psychological Association'', in the author index, but only human authors. I -haven't (yet) figured out a way to do this (semi-) automatically, so this has -to be done manually by editing the \fname{.bbl} file, see below. - -Second, serious problems occur with cases such as ``Bender, J.~{(Director)}.'' -and ``Bulatao, E.~{(with Winford, C. A.)}.''. Obviously, the description -``{(Director)}.'' should not be in the index and Winford should not be listed -as part of Bulatao, but as a separate author. These problems are caused by the -``tricks'' I used to make \BibTeX{} format them correctly in the reference -list, see section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. They can also be manually solved by -editing the \fname{.bbl} file as discussed below. - -The author index does not contain entries for the authors Shocked and -Goodenough (as well as several corporate authors) as cited in text, although -it does for the reference list part, because the \fieldname{key} field was -used for the citations. If you use the \fieldname{key} (and -\fieldname{firstkey}) field and you want the authors in the author index as -well, you have to include the index command \verb+\protect\AX+ explicitly. For -example, the ``tricked'' \fieldname{key} field for Michelle Shocked is -\begin{verbatim} - key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked}{1992}{Over the - Waterfall}{track~5}}}, -\end{verbatim} -and if we change this into -\begin{verbatim} - key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked\protect\AX{shocked m - @Shocked, M.}}{1992}{Over the Waterfall}{track~5}}}, -\end{verbatim} -then citations to her are included in the author index. The \cmd{\AX} command -will be discussed below. - -Summarizing, the author indexing part works very well for most commonly -encountered cases. However, it does not work (entirely) correctly if special -measures need to be taken to get them formatted correctly in \BibTeX{} -(citations, reference list). - -An easy solution to incorrect formatting and/or sorting in the author index is -to edit the \fname{.bbl} file manually. This should be done at a time when -\BibTeX{} will not have to be run again. Otherwise, the changes would be -overwritten by the next \BibTeX{} run. This editing of the \fname{.bbl} file -is not in the \TeX-spirit, but in my experience --- I used it for two books -with lots of references \cite{meijer1998,WaMe00}, with a previous version of -\pkg{apacite} that caused many more problematic cases --- this takes very -little time, usually only minutes (compare that with the time spent on writing -a book, or with the time that would be necessary to manually make an author -index). - -The connection between the \fname{.bbl} file and the author index is through -\cmd{\AX} commands that are entered by \fname{apacitex.bst} in the -\fname{.bbl} file. These are responsible for the author indexing facilities. -By looking at the contents of the \fname{.bbl} file, some changes that lead to -correct formatting are immediately obvious. For example, the entry for Bender -is generated by the following lines: -\begin{verbatim} -\protect\AX{bender jdirector -@Bender, J.~{\bibliteral{(Director)}}.}}{% -\end{verbatim} -It is immediately clear that this can be changed to -\begin{verbatim} -\protect\AX{bender j -@Bender, J.}}{% -\end{verbatim} -Then, this author will be placed and formatted correctly in the author index. -Note that \pkg{apacite} uses the \opt{key}\verb+@+\opt{visual} form of -indexing. This form is used in \MakeIndex{} to distinguish between the actual -representation in the index and the place where it should occur. The \opt{key} -is used by \MakeIndex{} to sort the entry, but the entry actually appearing in -the index is \opt{visual}. In the \opt{key} part as formatted by -\pkg{apacite}, all names are in lower case letters and all accents and -punctuation are removed. Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} inserts \emph{two} spaces -between surname and initials, and to \MakeIndex{}, two spaces are different -from one space. Spaces between surnames are removed, as well as spaces between -initials. - -The correct author index could also be accomplished by editing the final -\fname{.and} file, which contains the final formatted author index. However, -it is more convenient to edit the \fname{.bbl} file, which is usually -``final'' in a much earlier stage. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Known problems, things to be done, etc.} -\label{sec:todo} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -With any kind of software, there is usually a list with known problems (bugs) -and desirable future work (to-do), and \pkg{apacite} is no exception. These -subjects will be discussed in this section. - -A class of problems was already discussed in section~\ref{sec:compat} above. -This concerns the incompatibility of the \fname{.bib} file with other citation -styles, through \pkg{apacite}-specific fields, APA-specific contents of -fields, or through special tricks. These lead to correctly formatted -references in APA style, but may cause problems with using the \fname{.bib} -file with other styles (in case APA journals reject your article~\ldots). As -discussed there, however, this problem is unavoidable and presumably not a -very big problem to most users. - -An incomplete list of other known problems and things that I would -like to do with \pkg{apacite} is: -\begin{itemize} -\item Sort entries within a single citation command. The \pkg{natbib} - package already offers this option; -\item Swap (optionally?) the order of closing quotes and various other - punctuation marks (\verb+.,;!?+) in a citation, for articles where - there is no named author and the title (between quotes) takes the - role of the author; -\item If a work is authored by someone, ``with'' someone else: This - currently must be tricked in a nonelegant way. Perhaps I can - think of a better solution. -\item Add the \fieldname{address} field for \entryname{lecture} entries. - In the current version, the address is part of the description of - the meeting in the \fieldname{howpublished} field, but it makes - sense to disentangle these; -\item Give explicit support for citation to the Bible and other - ``classic'' works and the \emph{DSM}; -\item Give explicit support for music recordings in \entryname{incollection} - entries; -\item Study referencing legal materials (Appendix~D of the APA manual); -\item Define \BibTeX{} macros or strings for commonly encountered - journals (at least the APA journals); -\item Support \pkg{natbib} citation commands (\cmd{\citet}, \cmd{\citep}, - etc.); -\item Improve and extend language support; -\item Make a \pkg{doc}/\pkg{docstrip} version, so that the whole suite - consists of a \fname{.dtx} file containing all code, documentation, - and test documents, and a \fname{.ins} file that extracts the various - desired files from the \fname{.dtx} file. -\end{itemize} -Quite likely, other problems will come up when using the current version of -\pkg{apacite}, but at least I got it working on the APA manual examples, see -section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. I have lots of ideas for improvements, -extensions, options, etc., but not much time to devote to it. Therefore, it is -difficult to give a good estimate of when I will release a new update. -However, in the meantime, if you have questions, remarks, suggestions, or bug -reports, you can e-mail them to me. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Examples of the APA manual} -\label{sec:xmpl} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -In this section, the \pkg{apacite} package is tested by citing the examples of -the APA manual (5th ed., pp.~207--281), and some additional references for -additional purposes. - -The following list gives the examples from chapter~3 of the APA manual, with -section number. For these and all later examples, whenever I thought it -necessary or desirable, I added some comments. These are indicated by the \EM{} -symbol. Especially for later examples (from chap.~4), the comments frequently -pertain to the corresponding reference list entry. - -\begin{itemize} -\item[3.94] \citeA{3.94-1} compared reaction times\\ - In a recent study of reaction times \cite{3.94-1}\\ - In \citeyearNP{3.94-1} \citeauthor{3.94-1} compared - reaction times\\ - In a recent study of reaction times, \citeA{3.94-1} - described the method\ldots. \citeauthor{3.94-1} also found -\item[3.95] \citeA{3.95-1} found\\ - \citeA{3.95-1} found\\ - \citeauthor{3.95-1} found\\ - \fullcite{3.95-2} and \fullcite{3.95-3}\\ - \citeA{3.95-2} and \citeA{3.95-3}\\ - \EM It seems that if ``et al.'' would refer to one additional - author, then this author is named instead of the ``et al.'' - clause.\\ - \citeA{3.95-4} and \citeA{3.95-5}\\ - as \citeA{3.95-6} demonstrated\\ - \EM The comma after ``Nightlinger'' in the reference list - does not look right, but is explicitly required by the APA. - Of course, with people as authors, - one almost always has initials (although I have seen - an example of an econometrician who only had - one name), so this problem is not likely to occur. - With nicknames (``screen names'' as they are called in the - APA manual below ex. 85) in messages to newsgroups, initials - are typically missing, but then there is usually (always?) - only one author, so the problem does not exist either. - The problem can, however, come up when there are two authors, - the first of which is a corporate author, or with artists, - e.g., the song ``Into the Groove'' is written by - Madonna and Stephen Bray. (But perhaps the APA would want - Madonna to be referred to as ``Ciccone, M.'').\\ - as has been shown \cite{3.95-7} -\item[3.96] \cite{3.96-1}\\ - \cite{3.96-1}\\ - \cite{3.96-2}\\ - \EM For this document, I defined the \cmd{\bibcorporate} - macro, which indicates that the author is a corporate - author. The way it is used now only has the effect that - in the reference list, the name is treated as a whole, - and not as a firstname-lastname combination. My idea is - to think of a way to define this macro such that it is - able to suppress inclusion of the corporate author in the - author index, but I have not succeeded in this. - Note, however, that this is not part of \pkg{apacite}, but - part of the trick box of the user.\\ - \EM If the \fieldname{firstkey} field is different - and the \fieldname{key} field is the same, then, analogous - to the use of extra authors in 3.95 above, \pkg{apacite} - uses the \fieldname{firstkey} field for all citations:\\ - \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6};\\ - \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6}.\\ - Although this is a constructed example, these organizations - really exist. The ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond'' - is the Royal Dutch Chess Association and the - ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond'' is the Royal Dutch - Skating Association. Both are abbreviated to KNSB and - presumably, both publish an annual report each year. -\item[3.97] on free care \cite{3.97-1}\\ - \EM The order of the - closing quotes and the comma is different from the - APA manual. I think this one is more logical, although the - APA manual's is the conventional one, presumably for - aesthetic reasons. I hope to implement this in a future - version.\\ - the book \citeA{3.97-2}\\ - \cite{3.97-3}\\ - \EM If two articles both have no author and the title and - the year are the same, a's and b's should be used: - \citeA{3.97-4}, \citeA{3.97-5}, and \citeA{3.97-6}. - The latter two entries are correctly sorted by month, - through the way the month macros are defined in - \fname{apacitex.bst}. -\item[3.98] \citeA{3.98-1} and \citeA{3.98-2} also found\\ - \citeA{3.98-3} and \citeA{3.98-4} studied -\item[3.99] Past research \cite{3.99-1,3.99-2}\\ - Past research \cite{3.99-3,3.99-4,3.99-5}\\ - Several studies - \cite{3.99-6,3.99-7,3.99-8,3.99-9,3.99-10,3.99-11}\\ - Several studies \cite{3.99-12,3.99-13,3.99-14}\\ - \EM \pkg{apacite} does not (yet?) sort the cited - references in the text (of course it does for the reference - list), as required by the APA manual.\\ - (\citeNP{3.99-15}; see also \citeNP{3.99-16,3.99-17})\\ - \EM Note that I had to use \cmd{\citeNP} here. -\item[3.100] \cite{3.100-1}\\ - \EM This is not an example, but a rule in the text. - The ``\bibnodate'' is handled by the \cmd{\bibnodate} - macro. It is not clear whether it is really meant that the - in-text form is \citeauthor{3.100-1}, \citeyearNP{3.100-1} - or the more logically consistent \citeA{3.100-1}. - The former can (currently) only be accomplished by using - \cmd{\citeauthor} and \cmd{\citeyearNP} explicitly, - whereas the latter is simply obtained by \cmd{\citeA}.\\ - \cite{3.100-2}\\ - \citeA{3.100-3} - - \EM For citations to the bible, I defined a \cmd{\biblecite} - command and several obvious variations on it. For example:\\ - \cmd{\bibleciteA}, first cite: \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\ - \cmd{\bibleciteA}, second cite: \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\ - \cmd{\biblecite}, first cite: \fullbiblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\ - \cmd{\biblecite}, second cite: \biblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\ - (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, first cite: - \fullbibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\ - (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, second cite: - \bibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\ - \EM Here, there probably should be a comma if it's the first - cite and not a comma when it's a later cite. A difficult one.\\ - \EM Are there other ``classical works'' that should be treated - like this? If so, which and how? -\item[3.101] \cite[p.~332]{3.101-1}\\ - \cite[chap.~3]{3.101-2}\\ - \EM If you like, you can use the \pkg{apacite}-defined - abbreviation commands \verb+\BPG+ and \verb+\BCHAP+.\\ - \cite[\P~5]{3.101-3}\\ - \cite[Conclusion section, para.~1]{3.101-4} -\item[3.102] \EM Personal communication is not really citation and should - be done manually:\\ - T.~K. Lutes (personal communication, April 18, 2001)\\ - (V.-G. Nguyen, personal communication, September 28, 1998) -\item[3.103] \cite<see Table~2 of>[for complete data]{3.103-1} -\end{itemize} - -\noindent -Chapter~4 of the APA manual deals with the reference list -and only mentions some in-text citation issues in passing. -Therefore, the rest mainly requires a lot of moving back and forth -between the reference list and this part. I start with the -more ``general'' part, sections 4.01--4.15, presented similar to -the sections from chapter~3 as presented above. -\begin{itemize} -\item[4.04] \EM First, some examples mentioned in the text:\\ - \citeA{4.04-t1}, - \citeA{4.04-t2}, - \citeA{4.04-t3}, - \citeA{4.04-t4}, - \citeA{4.04-t5}, - \citeA{4.04-t6}, - \citeA{4.04-t7}, - \citeA{4.04-t8}, - \citeA{4.04-t9}\\ - \EM The APA manual states that prefixes must be treated - according to the rules of the language of origin. These rules - can differ a lot between languages (and countries) and it - is impossible to know all these rules. The APA manual gives two - examples, one in which ``De Vries'' is treated as the surname, - and one in which ``Helmholtz'' is the surname and ``von'' is - the ``von'' part of the name. - - In the former case, the author is referred to as, say, ``De Vries - (1999)'' in text and ``De Vries, J. (1999).'', alphabetized under - ``D'' in the reference list. In the second example, the author is - referred to as, say, ``Helmholtz (1870)'' and listed in the - reference list as ``Helmholtz, H. L. F. von. (1870).'', - alphabetized under ``H''. To get this right, the author must be - defined as -\begin{verbatim} - author = {H. L. F. von Helmholtz}, -\end{verbatim} - or -\begin{verbatim} - author = {von Helmholtz, H. L. F.}, -\end{verbatim} - then \BibTeX{} will assign the correct parts to the first names, - ``von''-part, and last name. The seemingly logical -\begin{verbatim} - author = {Helmholtz, H. L. F. von}, -\end{verbatim} - will not be formatted correctly, because ``von'' is now - considered to be part of the first names and therefore - abbreviated to ``v.''. - - Below, under example B-2, I will further discuss some - issues about ``von'' parts. - - \EM The APA manual requires that numerals are alphabetized - as if they were spelled out. This is not done by \pkg{apacite}, - so when applicable should be done by the user, e.g.\ by using - the \cmd{\SortNoop} command as defined in - \citeA[p.~404]{LaTeXcomp}. I give one fictitious example - \cite{4.04-t10}. - - \citeA{4.04-1}\\ - \citeA{4.04-2}\\ - \citeA{4.04-3}\\ - \citeA{4.04-4}\\ - \citeA{4.04-5}\\ - \citeA{4.04-6}\\ - \citeA{4.04-7}\\ - \citeA{4.04-8}\\ - \citeA{4.04-9}\\ - \citeA{4.04-10}\\ - \citeA{4.04-11}\\ - \citeA{4.04-12}\\ - \citeA{4.04-13}\\ - \citeA{4.04-14}\\ - \EM I have not (yet?) studied referencing legal materials. - In the first version of \pkg{apacite}, I defined a - \entryname{literal} type, so that the users can - literally format such entries themselves. However, - I think that if you need to refer to legal cases, you - can find a way to use the \entryname{misc} type to get - it right. I might study this and give examples in a - next version of \pkg{apacite}. -\item[4.05] \citeA{4.05-1}\\ - \nocitemeta{4.05-2}\citeA{4.05-2}\\ - \EM Here I used the \cmd{\nocitemeta} command to let - \pkg{apacite} know that a meta-analysis is reported and this - work is included in it. As you can see, you can still cite - the work by using the normal citation commands such as - \cmd{\citeA}. -\item[4.08] \citeA{4.08-1}\\ - \citeA{4.08-2}\\ - \citeA{4.08-3}\\ - \EM I used the \verb+\bibliteral+ construction, - which echoes its argument literally, to obtain the - ``(with \ldots)'' description in the reference list. However, - to \BibTeX{}, this is not a description, but a complicated - accented character which is the second initial of the author. - Consequently, this does not work properly with styles that put - the initials \emph{before} the surnames, and care must be - exercised with ``junior'' parts (see ex. 70). Furthermore, - this construction must be put between a pair of - braces in order for \BibTeX{} to treat it as an accented letter. -\item[4.09] \citeA{4.09-1} -\item[4.10] \citeA{4.10-1}\\ - \citeA{4.10-2} -\item[4.11] \citeA{4.11-1}\\ - \citeA{4.11-2}\\ - \EM Note that in the \fname{.bib} file, the ``junior'' part comes - directly after the surname and a comma, with the initials - after the ``junior'' part, whereas in the formatted - reference list, the more logical order \opt{surname}, - \opt{initials}, \opt{junior}, is used. -\item[4.12] \citeA{4.12-1} -\item[4.13] \citeA{4.13-1}\\ - \EM ``For substantial reference works with a large editorial - board, naming the lead editor followed by \texttt{et al.} is - acceptable''. This is now implemented in \pkg{apacite} as - follows: If there are 7 or more editors, only the first one - is named, followed by ``et al.'' \cite{4.13-2}.\\ -\item[4.15] \citeA{4.15-1}\\ - \EM I used the \cmd{\url} command from the \pkg{url} - package to format internet addresses. This command, however, - breaks addresses at different positions than the APA requires - (in particular, \emph{after} a dot and \emph{before} the - double slashes). Furthermore, I used a construction - through a \verb+\bibnodot{.}+ expression, which swallows - the dot, to prevent \BibTeX{} from adding a period - after the internet address.\\ - \citeA{4.15-2} -\end{itemize} - -\noindent -The rest is from section 4.16, the examples section. The section number -is omitted, but A--I are used instead for the unnumbered examples. For -the numbered examples, only the number is given. - -The following enumerated list gives the example number, and -the two basic in-text citation commands, both in a full and -short form, of the examples. -\begin{enumerate} -\item[A-1] \cite{A-1} \\ \cite{A-1} \\ \fullciteA{A-1} \\ \citeA{A-1} -\item \cite{ex1} \\ \cite{ex1} \\ \fullciteA{ex1} \\ \citeA{ex1} -\item \cite{ex2} \\ \cite{ex2} \\ \fullciteA{ex2} \\ \citeA{ex2} -\item \cite{ex3} \\ \cite{ex3} \\ \fullciteA{ex3} \\ \citeA{ex3} -\item \cite{ex4} \\ \cite{ex4} \\ \fullciteA{ex4} \\ \citeA{ex4}\\ - \cite{ex4-2} \\ \cite{ex4-2} \\ \fullciteA{ex4-2} \\ \citeA{ex4-2}\\ - \EM Note that the list of authors can be finished with - ``\verb+and others+'' if there are more than 6 authors, or - all authors can be given, in which case \pkg{apacite} truncates - the list after the first 6. For compatibility with other styles, - the latter is preferable. -\item \cite{ex5} \\ \cite{ex5} \\ \fullciteA{ex5} \\ \citeA{ex5} -\item \cite{ex6} \\ \cite{ex6} \\ \fullciteA{ex6} \\ \citeA{ex6} -\item \cite{ex7} \\ \cite{ex7} \\ \fullciteA{ex7} \\ \citeA{ex7}\\ - \EM Here, I used -\begin{verbatim} - month = {Spring}, -\end{verbatim} - which is perfectly fine to \BibTeX{}. -\item \cite{ex8} \\ \cite{ex8} \\ \fullciteA{ex8} \\ \citeA{ex8}\\ - \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the - following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules. -\item \cite{ex9} \\ \cite{ex9} \\ \fullciteA{ex9} \\ \citeA{ex9}\\ - \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the - following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules. -\item \cite{ex10} \\ \cite{ex10}\\ \fullciteA{ex10}\\ \citeA{ex10} -\item \cite{ex11} \\ \cite{ex11}\\ \fullciteA{ex11}\\ \citeA{ex11}\\ - \EM Apparently, a weekly newspaper is not a magazine and should - therefore include ``p.'' or ``pp.'' in front of the page - number(s), whereas a magazine article should not. I do not - understand the distinction very well and find it not very - useful as well, but will adhere to it. It means that the - \entryname{newspaper} type gets the ``pp.'', whereas - \entryname{magazine} and \entryname{article}, which are now - identical, do not. -\item \cite{ex12} \\ \cite{ex12}\\ \fullciteA{ex12}\\ \citeA{ex12}\\ - \EM Here, \verb+\emph{DSM-IV}+ must be entered without an extra - pair of braces in the title field, see ex.~73 for the intricacies - of braces and \verb+\emph+ in the title field. -\item \cite{ex13} \\ \cite{ex13}\\ \fullciteA{ex13}\\ \citeA{ex13} -\item \cite{ex14} \\ \cite{ex14}\\ \fullciteA{ex14}\\ \citeA{ex14} -\item \cite{ex15} \\ \cite{ex15}\\ \fullciteA{ex15}\\ \citeA{ex15} -\item \cite{ex16} \\ \cite{ex16}\\ \fullciteA{ex16}\\ \citeA{ex16} -\item \cite{ex17} \\ \cite{ex17}\\ \fullciteA{ex17}\\ \citeA{ex17}\\ - \EM This case is the opposite of the more common situation where a - reprint is cited and an original publication year is given. I could - implement similar code to handle this case (and I may if I get requests - to do this), but for the moment, I decided to trick the system: I - defined a macro \cmd{\bibreftext} which must be called with two - arguments. Initially, it places the second argument in the text, but - just before the bibliography, its definition is changed so that the - first argument is placed in the reference list. By defining -\begin{verbatim} - year = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}}, -\end{verbatim} - in the \fname{.bib} file, the year is ``1992'' in the reference - list and ``1992/1993'' in the text citations. The \cmd{\protect} - is necessary to make sure that the \cmd{\bibreftext} macro is not - written out in the label-part of the bibliography, because then - only ``1992'' would appear in the text reference. The additional - pair of braces are necessary to make sure that the entry - is alphabetized correctly. When these are omitted, the entry - is alphabetized under the ``P'' of ``protect''. Of course, the - latter is only important if the reference list contains - multiple works by the same author(s), but the same phenomenon - is encountered when the \fieldname{author} or \fieldname{editor} - field starts with a command, or when there is no author or editor - and the \fieldname{title} field starts with a command, as in - the entry \citeA{4.04-t10} introduced in 4.04 above. - - Of course, you can save yourself a lot of trouble by - obtaining the original article and citing that. -\item \cite{ex18} \\ \cite{ex18}\\ \fullciteA{ex18}\\ \citeA{ex18} -\item \cite{ex19} \\ \cite{ex19}\\ \fullciteA{ex19}\\ \citeA{ex19} -\item \cite{ex20} \\ \cite{ex20}\\ \fullciteA{ex20}\\ \citeA{ex20} -\item \cite{ex21} \\ \cite{ex21}\\ \fullciteA{ex21}\\ \citeA{ex21}\\ - \EM Apparently, a translator and original publication date - do not have to be mentioned here. -\item Seidenberg and McClelland's study \cite<as cited in>{ex22}\\ - %\cite{ex22} \\ \cite{ex22}\\ \fullciteA{ex22}\\ \citeA{ex22} -\item[B-1] \cite{B-1} \\ \cite{B-1} \\ \fullciteA{B-1} \\ \citeA{B-1} -\item \cite{ex23} \\ \cite{ex23}\\ \fullciteA{ex23}\\ \citeA{ex23} -\item \cite{ex24} \\ \cite{ex24}\\ \fullciteA{ex24}\\ \citeA{ex24}\\ - \EM The APA manual gives a number, which would not ordinarily be - done with proper books and which suggests that it could also - be treated as a report. In that case, the default ``Tech. Rep.'' - description should be left out, however. This can be accomplished - by defining -\begin{verbatim} - type = {\bibnotype}, -\end{verbatim} - which flags that the type must be left out, see example 42. - However, for books, it now works fine leaving the \fieldname{type} - field empty and giving the number in the \fieldname{number} field. -\item \cite{ex25} \\ \cite{ex25}\\ \fullciteA{ex25}\\ \citeA{ex25}\\ - \EM According to the note after ex.~25 in the APA manual, - an edited book with ``just one'' author should list - the editor (and translator, when available) after the - title, just like the translator. An example of this is - \citeA{ex25-t1}. (Should the original years of publication - be used here?) - - However, what does ``just one author'' mean here? Does it mean that if - there are 2 authors and 1 or more editors, the editors should - not be mentioned, or the authors should not be mentioned? - Presumably, it means the following: - In the default case, an edited book consists of several chapters, - with different chapters written by different authors. In this case, - the reference to the whole book lists only the editor(s). - If every chapter is written by the same author, and there are 1 - or more editors, their condition holds. I think that if all - chapters are written by the same $n$ ($\geq 2$) authors, it should - also be treated in this way, i.e., with the authors in the - author position and the editor behind the title. A difficult - case would appear if the book were a collection of works of, say, - 2 authors, with some chapters written by one and some by the - other, and some jointly, as in \citeA{ex25-t2}. These choices have - to be made by the user, however, \pkg{apacite} will format author, - editor, and translator, whenever available. -\item \cite{ex26} \\ \cite{ex26}\\ \fullciteA{ex26}\\ \citeA{ex26}\\ - \EM According to section~3.97, the title should be in italics. - In this example, in the citation, it is not given in italics, - but this must be an error, because they do give it in italics - on p.~219 (but give no date there). -\item \cite{ex27} \\ \cite{ex27}\\ \fullciteA{ex27}\\ \citeA{ex27} -\item \cite{ex28} \\ \cite{ex28}\\ \fullciteA{ex28}\\ \citeA{ex28} -\item \EM I defined a \verb+\DSMcite+ macro and some related - alternatives to get the \emph{DSM} references right:\\ - \cmd{\DSMcite}, first citation: \DSMcite{ex29} \\ - \cmd{\DSMcite}, second citation: \DSMcite{ex29} \\ - \cmd{\DSMciteA}, first citation: \DSMfullciteA{ex29} \\ - \cmd{\DSMciteA}, second citation: \DSMciteA{ex29} \\ - \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, first citation: \DSMfullciteNP{ex29} \\ - \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, second citation: \DSMciteNP{ex29} \\ - \EM Actually, these macros are not related to the \emph{DSM} at all, - except that they are defined to handle these. These macros - act as a normal citation the first time a \emph{DSM} is - referenced and all subsequent times as a suitably formatted - \cmd{\citeauthor}. So the only difference with ordinary - citations is that the year is left out the second and later - times. By defining -\begin{verbatim} - firstkey = {{American Psychiatric Association}}, - key = {{\APACcitebtitle{DSM-IV}}}, -\end{verbatim} - using the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} macro introduced before, - the \emph{DSM} citations are correctly formatted. - However, the \cmd{\DSM*} macros are still very rough. Multiple - citations are not handled well, so only one work should - be cited with such a macro. Furthermore, the pre- and - postfixes (through \verb+<...>+ and \verb+[...]+) are not - available. - - \EM The following two are for testing the ordering (sorting) - in \BibTeX{} and \MakeIndex{} \cite{ex29-2,ex29-3}. - -\item \cite{ex30} \\ \cite{ex30}\\ \fullciteA{ex30}\\ \citeA{ex30}\\ - \EM Here, ``6th ed.'' comes before ``Vols.\ 1--20'', so it is - Vols.\ 1--20 of the 6th edition. \pkg{apacite} now uses this - order. Pre-[2003/09/05] versions placed volumes before editions, - which is appropriate when different volumes of a series - are not updated jointly, so that you may have the 3rd edition - of Vol.~2, but only the 1st edition of Vol.~6. Should you - want this, you have to trick the system by putting both - elements in the \fieldname{edition} field: -\begin{verbatim} - edition = {\BVOLS\ 1--20, 6th}, -\end{verbatim} - and leaving the \fieldname{volume} field empty.\\ - \EM Does the remark about large editorial boards mean that the - APA intended to add ``et al.'' here? Anyway, here is an example - of such a situation: \citeA{ex30-2}. -\item \cite{ex31} \\ \cite{ex31}\\ \fullciteA{ex31}\\ \citeA{ex31} -\item \cite{ex32} \\ \cite{ex32}\\ \fullciteA{ex32}\\ \citeA{ex32} -\item \cite{ex33} \\ \cite{ex33}\\ \fullciteA{ex33}\\ \citeA{ex33} -\item[B-2] \cite{B-2} \\ \cite{B-2} \\ \fullciteA{B-2} \\ \citeA{B-2} \\ - \EM This is a suitable point to discuss ``von'' parts further. - One of the editors in the current example is called - P. van den Broek. I am Dutch and I recognize this as a Dutch - name, so let's assume that this person is Dutch. Let us now - consider the situation that this person is the (only) author. - Then according to the Dutch rules, this person would be listed in the - reference list as ``Broek, P. van den. (1992)'' and listed under ``B'', - but referred to in the text as ``Van den Broek (1992)'', including - the ``von'' part and capitalizing the first letter. When an - initial precedes the ``von'' part (e.g., when there are two - primary authors with this surname, but with different initials), - then this person would be referred to in the text as - ``P. van den Broek (1992)'', including the ``von'' part, but now - in lower case. The Dutch rules are very difficult to do right in - \BibTeX{}/\LaTeX{} and they conflict with the rules for other - languages, and presumably with the rules of the APA, which would - require this person to be alphabetized under ``V'', at least. - - For the current editor position, there is no big problem with - the APA rules. The ``von'' part can really be put in the ``von'' - part as recognized by \BibTeX{}, which I did, or it can be enclosed - in braces, making the whole last name one part. Either will come - out right and the editor will not be referred to in the text - anyway. With styles that put the initials behind the surname, - it will only work right when put in the ``von'' part. In the - author position, however, things are different. Then this author - could be formatted as -\begin{verbatim} - author = {Van {\lowercase{D}}en Broek, P.}, -\end{verbatim} - where the \verb+{\lowercase{D}}+ construction is used to prevent - \BibTeX{} from interpreting it as a ``von'' part, or -\begin{verbatim} - author = {Van{\ }den{\ }Broek, P.}, - author = {{Van den Broek}, P.}, -\end{verbatim} - which in most situations gives the correct version according to the - Dutch rules with the correct alphabetizing according to the APA - rules. Only in situations when the initial would appear - \emph{before} the surname (when there are other authors with the - same surname or when using other styles), this would lead to - unwanted results. - - If you really want to alphabetize according to the Dutch rules - (which is \emph{not} APA in my interpretation), you can use the - following trick. Define a macro \verb+\Dutchvon+ with - two arguments which is equivalent to the \verb+\bibreftext+ - macro discussed in ex.~17 above. That is, in the beginning - of the document, it is defined as echoing its second argument, - and just before the reference list, it is redefined to echo - its first argument. Then define the author as -\begin{verbatim} - author = {van den {\protect\Dutchvon{Broek}{Van den Broek}}, P.}, -\end{verbatim} - which, combined with the \pkg{apacite} formatting implies - that in text, ``Van den Broek'' is used, whereas the author - is alphabetized under ``B'' in the reference list, and listed - as ``Broek, P. van den''. Of course, we could simply have - used \verb+\bibreftext+ again, but that was used to cover a - completely different situation, and I can easily imagine that - when switching to another citation style, the former application - (i.e., 1992/1993) must be kept, but the ``von'' part is handled - differently, so that \verb+\Dutchvon+ must be redefined. - Based on this example, users should be able to define their - own tricks for similar peculiarities. - - Finally, note that in Belgium, where many people - speak Dutch as well, it is customary to alphabetize under ``V'' - anyway (``Van Damme''). -\item \cite{ex34} \\ \cite{ex34}\\ \fullciteA{ex34}\\ \citeA{ex34} -\item \cite{ex35} \\ \cite{ex35}\\ \fullciteA{ex35}\\ \citeA{ex35} -\item \cite{ex36} \\ \cite{ex36}\\ \fullciteA{ex36}\\ \citeA{ex36}\\ - \EM I had to use some tricks to get the Series and Volume Editors' - descriptions right. The ``(Series Ed.)'' is according to - \BibTeX{} part of the last name of the first editor, - and I used a \verb+\bibeditortype+ macro to get the volume - editor right. The \verb+\bibeditortype+ macro has one argument. - The macro changes the definitions of the macros \verb+\BED+ and - \verb+\BEDS+ to the argument and then immediately changes the - definitions back to their old definitions. So it makes a one-time - change. - - It seems to me that only mentioning the - volume editor as ``editor'' would be sufficient, but the APA - requires both. It raises the question when series editors - should be mentioned: only if the specific volume in the - series is itself an edited work (as with this handbook), - or also with books that are published in a series. Many books - are published in some series, with one or more series editors - and I have never seen any mentioning of the series editors of - such books, but it is not clear to me when this should be done - then. -\item \cite{ex37} \\ \cite{ex37}\\ \fullciteA{ex37}\\ \citeA{ex37} -\item \cite{ex38} \\ \cite{ex38}\\ \fullciteA{ex38}\\ \citeA{ex38} -\item \cite{ex39} \\ \cite{ex39}\\ \fullciteA{ex39}\\ \citeA{ex39}\\ - \EM Here, it is stated that the translator's name should be put - after the editor's name when both are different, but in example - 40, the translators are put after the title, before the editors. - Apparently, if the book is a collection of works by one - author(-group), edited and translated, then the translator - should come after the editor, but if different chapters - are translated by different translators, or perhaps not all - are translated works, then the translator should come after - the title. Of course, \pkg{apacite} has no way of knowing this. - In the current implementation, for an \entryname{incollection}, - if the editor and translator are the same, they are formatted as - in this example, whereas if they are different, they are treated - as in example 40 below. I think this will be satisfactory in - most cases. If you really want the translator after the editor - when they are different, you can trick the system in a way - similar to example 36. -\item \cite{ex40} \\ \cite{ex40}\\ \fullciteA{ex40}\\ \citeA{ex40}\\ - \EM See my comments to example 39 above. -\item[C-1] \cite{C-1} \\ \cite{C-1} \\ \fullciteA{C-1} \\ \citeA{C-1} -\item \cite{ex41} \\ \cite{ex41}\\ \fullciteA{ex41}\\ \citeA{ex41} -\item \cite{ex42} \\ \cite{ex42}\\ \fullciteA{ex42}\\ \citeA{ex42}\\ - \EM I used the \cmd{\bibnotype} construction discussed - in example~24 to suppress the default ``(Tech.\ Rep.{})'' - description. Actually, I don't think there is anything wrong with - calling a report a report, be it ``technical'' by default, or by - specifying -\begin{verbatim} - type = {Report}, -\end{verbatim} - except that it's not done so in this specific example in the - APA manual. But there does not seem to be a rule against it. -\item \cite{ex43} \\ \cite{ex43}\\ \fullciteA{ex43}\\ \citeA{ex43} -\item \cite{ex44} \\ \cite{ex44}\\ \fullciteA{ex44}\\ \citeA{ex44} -\item \cite{ex45} \\ \cite{ex45}\\ \fullciteA{ex45}\\ \citeA{ex45} -\item \cite{ex46} \\ \cite{ex46}\\ \fullciteA{ex46}\\ \citeA{ex46}\\ - \EM Note that in the example in the APA manual, ``Western Australia'' - \emph{is} mentioned in the publisher location, whereas their rule - explicitly states that this should not be the case in this - situation, and they stress that again below the example. - Therefore, I did not mention ``Western Australia'' in the - \fieldname{publisher} field. -\item \cite{ex47} \\ \cite{ex47}\\ \fullciteA{ex47}\\ \citeA{ex47} -\item \cite{ex48} \\ \cite{ex48}\\ \fullciteA{ex48}\\ \citeA{ex48} -\item \cite{ex49} \\ \cite{ex49}\\ \fullciteA{ex49}\\ \citeA{ex49} -\item \cite{ex50} \\ \cite{ex50}\\ \fullciteA{ex50}\\ \citeA{ex50} -\item \cite{ex51} \\ \cite{ex51}\\ \fullciteA{ex51}\\ \citeA{ex51} -\item \cite{ex52} \\ \cite{ex52}\\ \fullciteA{ex52}\\ \citeA{ex52} -\item \cite{ex53} \\ \cite{ex53}\\ \fullciteA{ex53}\\ \citeA{ex53} -\item \cite{ex54} \\ \cite{ex54}\\ \fullciteA{ex54}\\ \citeA{ex54} -\item \cite{ex55} \\ \cite{ex55}\\ \fullciteA{ex55}\\ \citeA{ex55}\\ - \EM It seems logical to suppress the original year if it's the - same as the year of the abstract. - - \EM According to example 54 and the text below it, an ``A'' - or ``B'' should be added to the volume number of \emph{DAI} - of this entry, presumably an ``A'', but because they did not - give one, I left it out as well. -\item \cite{ex56} \\ \cite{ex56}\\ \fullciteA{ex56}\\ \citeA{ex56} -\item \cite{ex57} \\ \cite{ex57}\\ \fullciteA{ex57}\\ \citeA{ex57} -\item \cite{ex58} \\ \cite{ex58}\\ \fullciteA{ex58}\\ \citeA{ex58} -\item \cite{ex59} \\ \cite{ex59}\\ \fullciteA{ex59}\\ \citeA{ex59} -\item \cite{ex60} \\ \cite{ex60}\\ \fullciteA{ex60}\\ \citeA{ex60} -\item \cite{ex61} \\ \cite{ex61}\\ \fullciteA{ex61}\\ \citeA{ex61}\\ - \EM The description of the data goes into the - \fieldname{type} field. It may be more logical to put it - in the \fieldname{title} field, with some trickery to indicate - that it's a description and not a title, but putting it in the - \fieldname{type} field already ensures that it's formatted - correctly, so I think I'm gonna be lazy on this one. The same - applies more or less to reviews (G-1, 63, 64), although there - it is logical to put at least ``Review'' in the \fieldname{type} - field, so as we're already there, we might as well make it - complete. -\item \cite{ex62} \\ \cite{ex62}\\ \fullciteA{ex62}\\ \citeA{ex62} -\item[G-1] \cite{G-1} \\ \cite{G-1} \\ \fullciteA{G-1} \\ \citeA{G-1}\\ - \EM See my comments to example 61 above about the logic of the - \fieldname{type} field. For a review, the \fieldname{type} - field must contain the message that it is a review of a - \emph{book} (or motion picture, or whatever it is a review of) - and give the title of the reviewed work in italics, which must - be manually formatted, e.g., by using the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} - macro. The author of the reviewed work should apparently not be - mentioned. -\item \cite{ex63} \\ \cite{ex63}\\ \fullciteA{ex63}\\ \citeA{ex63} -\item \cite{ex64} \\ \cite{ex64}\\ \fullciteA{ex64}\\ \citeA{ex64} -\item \EM The rules for movies, television series, etc.\ do not appeal - very much to me, although they are not nearly as bad as those - for music recordings (ex.~69 and further, see below). My - primary objection is that when referring to movies and TV series, - the title is the most important characteristic. The director - may be a good second in some cases, but producers and writers are - almost always unknown to the general public and not relevant - when referring to them. You talk about the movie \emph{Jaws} - and not about Spielberg (1975) or whoever wrote the script. - Recognizing the primary creative input or authorship may be - politically correct, but not particularly informative. - However, you may think that my objections are mainly - driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries - in \BibTeX{}. Anyway, here are my attempts to implement - the APA rules.\\ - \cite{ex65-1} \\ \cite{ex65-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-1}\\ \citeA{ex65-1} \\ - \cite{ex65-2} \\ \cite{ex65-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-2}\\ \citeA{ex65-2} \\ - \EM Note that this and the following ``Available from'' must be between - parentheses (accomplished by putting it in the \fieldname{note} field), - whereas ``Available from'' some web site must not be between - parentheses, cf.\ ex.~95 (accomplished by putting it in the - \fieldname{howpublished} field). - - \EM Here I also used the \cmd{\bibliteral} construction again, which - was introduced in my discussion of 4.08 above. - Furthermore, I used the \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot} - macro, which suppresses the period after the closing - brace after ``(Producer)''.\\ - \cite{ex65-3} \\ \cite{ex65-3}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-3}\\ \citeA{ex65-3}\\ - \EM Here, I simply let ``(Producer)'' be part of the author name, - but because of this addendum, the entry is not sorted correctly - in the reference list: It should be before \citeA{APAManual}, - but because of the addendum, the authors are different to \BibTeX{} - and this one comes after \citeA{APAManual}. I don't see an easy - solution to this (presumably extremely rare) problem. Therefore, - in such a case, the \fname{.bbl} file should be edited manually. -\item \cite{ex66} \\ \cite{ex66}\\ \fullciteA{ex66}\\ \citeA{ex66} \\ - \EM Here, I used the same tricks as in example 65. -\item \cite{ex67} \\ \cite{ex67}\\ \fullciteA{ex67}\\ \citeA{ex67} \\ - \EM I used several tricks introduced before: the \cmd{\bibeditortype} - (cf.\ ex.~36) construction to be able to use ``(Producer)'' in - the editor position instead of ``(Ed.)'', and the ones used - in the previous examples. Because there is another Miller as well, - the initial is given here. To make sure that \BibTeX{} thinks - that there is only one initial, but the ``(Producer)'' is formatted - correctly, the name is defined as follows: -\begin{verbatim} - editor = {Miller, {\bibliteral{R\protect\bibeditortype{Producer}}}}, -\end{verbatim} - It is then formatted correctly both in the text and in the reference - list if \cmd{\bibeditortype} is defined to swallow its argument - in the text, and redefined prior to the bibliography. After the - bibliography (before the index), it has to be redefined again - to swallow its argument. However, it leads to two different entries - in the author index, so if you're requesting an author index, - you still have to edit the \fname{.bbl} file manually, as with - all such types of ``authors'' or ``editors''. -\item \cite{ex68} \\ \cite{ex68}\\ \fullciteA{ex68}\\ \citeA{ex68}\\ - \EM Again, I used several tricks that were also used in the previous - examples. -\item \EM The rules for music recordings do not make any sense, and they - are not entirely clear as well. It would seem to me that - most pop, rock, and other ``light'' music songs are almost always - attributed to the performing artist. You can usually read who the - composer and lyricist of the song are on the inlay-details - of the CD, but if you want the reader to refer to ``My Way'', - the reader will easier find it (in a CD store or on the - internet, for example) under ``Frank Sinatra'' than under - the composer's name (whoever that may be). Furthermore, the - year of release of the CD (or other medium) seems more relevant - in referring to the CD than the year of copyright of the - specific song, or the recording date. - - For classical music, things are different. Then, the writer (composer) - is usually more important than the performing artist, although - the percentage of people who know who wrote the lyrics for - Mozart's operas may not be high. Furthermore, it may be - time-consuming and not very relevant for most authors and - readers to find the year in which a certain piece was written, - although strictly speaking, we should use the ``date of copyright'', - which is not relevant for a lot of classical music. - - However, when referring to Beethoven's 9th symphony, say, it will - typically not be very informative to refer to a specific recording on a - specific CD, unless that specific recording is the subject of interest, - but then it would seem that the ``performing artist'' (conductor or - orchestra) should take the role of ``author''. For example, when - comparing a performance of this symphony conducted in 1975 by Masur with - a performance of this symphony conducted in 1990 by Bernstein (assuming - this exists), it does not seem logical to compare ``9th Symphony'' - (Beethoven, 1823a, tracks~1--4) with ``9th Symphony'' (Beethoven, 1823b, - tracks~1--4), but more logical to compare Masur (1975) with - Bernstein (1990). - - Finally, it seems a bit strange that the track number should be - mentioned in text, but not in the reference list. - - Again, you may think that my objections are mainly - driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries - in \BibTeX{}. Nevertheless, here are my attempts to implement - the APA rules.\\ - \begin{tabular}{ll} - \verb+\citeAsong+: & \citeAsong{ex69-1} \\ - \verb+\citesong+: & \citesong{ex69-1} \\ - \verb+\citesongNP+: & \citesongNP{ex69-1}\\ - \verb+\citeAsong+: & \citeAsong{ex69-2} \\ - \verb+\citesong+: & \citesong{ex69-2} \\ - \verb+\citesongNP+: & \citesongNP{ex69-2} - \end{tabular}\\ - \EM I defined and used several macros, i.e., \verb+\citesong+ - and some variations. These cite a song as required by the APA - (except for the relative placement of closing quotes and comma). - For that, the \fieldname{key} field (and possibly \fieldname{firstkey}) - should contain the relevant information in the form of a protected - \verb+\bibsong+ command: -\begin{verbatim} - key = {{\protect\bibsong{author}{year}{song title}{track info}}}, -\end{verbatim} - Furthermore, I used some tricks to get the reference list - entry right. I used the \entryname{incollection} type as - a basis, with the CD title in the \fieldname{booktitle} field. - At first sight, it seems natural to define -\begin{verbatim} - type = {CD}, -\end{verbatim} - but with an \entryname{incollection}, the \fieldname{type} - field is put after the title, not after the book title. - I plan to change this for music-types (CD, record, etc.), - but this is currently not yet implemented. This means that the - ``[CD]'' description must be put in the \fieldname{booktitle} - field, after the CD title and with explicit formatting - commands: -\begin{verbatim} - booktitle = {Arkansas Traveler {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}}, -\end{verbatim} - On the other hand, we can now use the \fieldname{type} - field to put the recording artists in for the second example: -\begin{verbatim} - type = {Recorded by G. Bok, A. Mayo, \& E. Trickett}, -\end{verbatim} - We have to change the ``In'' string to ``On'' - (``In'' a book versus ``On'' a CD). This is done with a - macro similar to the \verb+\bibeditortype+ macro discussed - in example 36. In this case, the macro is \verb+\bibInstring+, - which has one argument. The macro changes the definition of - the macro \verb+\BIn+ to the argument and then immediately changes - the definition back to the old definition. So it makes a one-time - change. Of course, the \verb+\bibInstring+ macro only works - if it is executed \emph{before} the \verb+\BIn+ macro. The latter - macro comes before the \fieldname{booktitle}, so - \verb+\bibInstring+ must be added to a field that comes before - that. I put it in the \fieldname{title} field: -\begin{verbatim} - title = {Over the Waterfall{\bibInstring{\BOn}}}, -\end{verbatim} - where \verb+\BOn+ is defined by default as ``\BOn''. - Finally, the recording date of the second example (1990) must - be put in the \fieldname{note} field. - - Note that this is all trickery within the \LaTeX{} domain - and the \fname{.bib} file, i.e., the user-definable and - user-customizable area. -\item \cite{ex70} \\ \cite{ex70}\\ \fullciteA{ex70}\\ \citeA{ex70} -\item \cite{ex71-1} \\ \cite{ex71-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-1}\\ \citeA{ex71-1} \\ - \cite{ex71-2} \\ \cite{ex71-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-2}\\ \citeA{ex71-2} \\ - \EM Here and in almost all remaining examples, the - ``Retrieved \ldots'' message must be put in the - \fieldname{howpublished} field if it refers to an internet - address or aggregated database. See the discussion of 4.15 - above for the use of \verb+\url+ and \verb+\bibnodot{.}+. -\item \cite{ex72} \\ \cite{ex72}\\ \fullciteA{ex72}\\ \citeA{ex72} -\item \cite{ex73} \\ \cite{ex73}\\ \fullciteA{ex73}\\ \citeA{ex73} \\ - \EM Note that the APA manual breaks a line \emph{after} a - period instead of before. I take it that it's not very - detrimental to use slightly different line breaking through - the \pkg{url} package. Furthermore, the APA manual uses a - typeface in which `1' (one) and `l' (ell) are not distinguishable. - This requires some guessing of the correct url's. I think that this - conflicts with their own stress on accuracy w.r.t.\ url's. - - \EM Note the subtle use of braces to get \emph{Homo sapiens} - correctly formatted: The capital in \verb+\emph{Homo}+ - is retained by \BibTeX{}, whereas the capital in - \verb+{\emph{Sapiens}}+ is changed into a lower case letter - by \BibTeX{}, because of the extra pair of braces. -\item \cite{ex74} \\ \cite{ex74}\\ \fullciteA{ex74}\\ \citeA{ex74}\\ - \EM As mentioned in section~\ref{sec:compat-backref}, I had - to use some nasty code in the current document to have the - bibliography entry of this reference formatted correctly - when \pkg{backref} is loaded. -\item \cite{ex75} \\ \cite{ex75}\\ \fullciteA{ex75}\\ \citeA{ex75} -\item \cite{ex76} \\ \cite{ex76}\\ \fullciteA{ex76}\\ \citeA{ex76} -\item \cite{ex77} \\ \cite{ex77}\\ \fullciteA{ex77}\\ \citeA{ex77} -\item \cite{ex78} \\ \cite{ex78}\\ \fullciteA{ex78}\\ \citeA{ex78} -\item \cite{ex79} \\ \cite{ex79}\\ \fullciteA{ex79}\\ \citeA{ex79} -\item \cite{ex80} \\ \cite{ex80}\\ \fullciteA{ex80}\\ \citeA{ex80} -\item \cite{ex81} \\ \cite{ex81}\\ \fullciteA{ex81}\\ \citeA{ex81} -\item \cite{ex82} \\ \cite{ex82}\\ \fullciteA{ex82}\\ \citeA{ex82} -\item \cite{ex83} \\ \cite{ex83}\\ \fullciteA{ex83}\\ \citeA{ex83} \\ - \EM Here and in the next example, both ``Paper presented \ldots'' - and ``Retrieved \ldots'' must be put in a single - \fieldname{howpublished} field. -\item \cite{ex84} \\ \cite{ex84}\\ \fullciteA{ex84}\\ \citeA{ex84} -\item \cite{ex85} \\ \cite{ex85}\\ \fullciteA{ex85}\\ \citeA{ex85} \\ - \EM When referring to a message to a newsgroup, internet forum, etc., - use the \entryname{misc} type. Then define -\begin{verbatim} - type = {\bibmessage}, -\end{verbatim} - and use the \fieldname{number} field when relevant. Furthermore, - you should include a description like ``Message posted to ... '' - in the \fieldname{howpublished} field. Then the entry is formatted - correctly: If the message has a number, say 1, it reverts to - ``\verb+[\bibmessage\ 1]+'', i.e., ``[Msg\ 1]'' with the default - definition of \cmd{\bibmessage}. If there is no number, the - type identifier is omitted (because it must be mentioned in the - \fieldname{howpublished} field anyway). In both cases, - however, the title is formatted as an article title, i.e., not - italicized. -\item \cite{ex86} \\ \cite{ex86}\\ \fullciteA{ex86}\\ \citeA{ex86} -\item \cite{ex87} \\ \cite{ex87}\\ \fullciteA{ex87}\\ \citeA{ex87} -\item \cite{ex88} \\ \cite{ex88}\\ \fullciteA{ex88}\\ \citeA{ex88} -\item \cite{ex89} \\ \cite{ex89}\\ \fullciteA{ex89}\\ \citeA{ex89} -\item \cite{ex90} \\ \cite{ex90}\\ \fullciteA{ex90}\\ \citeA{ex90} \\ - \EM Here, ``de Ridder'' may well be a Dutch name. If the APA - manual is serious about its rule to format names as they - should according to the rule of the country of origin, - this name should then be formatted as ``De Ridder''. -\item \cite{ex91} \\ \cite{ex91}\\ \fullciteA{ex91}\\ \citeA{ex91} -\item \cite{ex92} \\ \cite{ex92}\\ \fullciteA{ex92}\\ \citeA{ex92} -\item \cite{ex93} \\ \cite{ex93}\\ \fullciteA{ex93}\\ \citeA{ex93}\\ - \EM Strangely enough, the APA apparently does not find it necessary - to give a retrieval date or more exact publication date for - downloaded software, whereas it does require a retrieval date - for downloaded papers. -\item \cite{ex94} \\ \cite{ex94}\\ \fullciteA{ex94}\\ \citeA{ex94}\\ - \EM The example in the APA manual does not list a date, not even - a ``n.d.''. Given the logic of the APA manual, this seems an error - to me, so I added a ``\verb+\bibnodate+'' in the \fieldname{year} - field, which becomes ``\bibnodate'' in the output. If it would - really be the rule to omit the year, then it is not clear when - a year must be omitted and when not, or replaced by ``n.d.''. - Furthermore, formatting in both the \fname{.sty} file and - the \fname{.bst} file would have to be adapted to anticipate - a missing year. Currently, I assume that there should always - be something that acts like a date (a year, an ``in press'', - or a ``n.d.''). - - \EM To get the version number correctly formatted, I added the - information and the correct formatting to the title field: - \verb+{\upshape(\uppercase{V}ersion~4)}+. A version is a kind - of edition, but it is more difficult to obtain the correct - formatting if the \fieldname{edition} field would be used, - because ``Version'' comes before the number and ``ed.'' after. -\item \cite{ex95} \\ \cite{ex95}\\ \fullciteA{ex95}\\ \citeA{ex95}\\ - \EM Note that here, unlike ex.~44 and ex.~91, - ``U.S.'' is omitted before ``Department of Health and Human - Services''. -\end{enumerate} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography. -\renewcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{#1}% -\renewcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{#1}% -\renewbibeditortype -\def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot} -% -% Dirty trick: request apacitex.bst if apacite is loaded with one of the -% index options, and request apacite.bst otherwise. -\makeatletter -\if@APAC@index - \bibliographystyle{apacitex}% with index option -\else - \bibliographystyle{apacite}% or without -\fi -\makeatother -% -% Solve the `#' problem of backref, see the backref section above. -% This hack provided by Heiko Oberdiek. -\ifbackrefloaded - \catcode`\#=12\relax -\fi -% -% Include the bibliography -\bibliography{apa5ex} -% -% Reset the above hack. -\ifbackrefloaded - \catcode`\#=6\relax -\fi -% -% Again redefine a command. -\renewcommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{}% -% -% Include the author index if the index option is on. -\printindex[autx] -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\end{document} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% EOF apacite.tex - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/manifest.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 26d670ce0c1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/manifest.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% This is file `manifest.txt'. -% -% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed -% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the `apacite' package. -% ------------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a -% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'. -% -% \fi - -CONTENTS OF THE APACITE PACKAGE [2005/06/08] -============================================ - -apacite.sty -> The LaTeX citation package. This must - be placed in a directory where TeX can find it; - -apacite.bst -> The BibTeX reference list style. This must be placed - in a directory where BibTeX can find it; - -apacitex.bst -> The BibTeX reference list style with added author - index support. This must also be placed in a directory - where BibTeX can find it; - -apacite.tex -> Extensive user's manual and test of the apacite package; - -apacite.pdf -> The processed file apacite.tex, so you can read the manual - without having to install the package first; - -apa5ex.bib -> The file with bibliographic information about the - references in apacite.tex; - -manifest.txt -> The list of files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a - short description; - -README -> A brief description of the package; - - -Directory lang/ -=============== - -This subdirectory contains files that contain language-specific -modifications of apacite, mainly translations of terms like "and", "Ed.", -etc., and have been written by apacite users that are (native) speakers -of the languages involved. See the documentation for further details. -The following files are currently available (note that most of these -are also used for ``dialects'' in the sense of babel): - -dutch.apc -> dutch -english.apc -> english -german.apc -> german -greek.apc -> greek -ngerman.apc -> german (new orthography) -swedish.apc -> swedish - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.drv b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.drv new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..383bcf7baa4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.drv @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +%% +%% This is file `apacite.drv', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `driver') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +%% You are allowed to make changes to this file, in order to generate +%% the user's manual with your preferred settings (e.g., to choose +%% whether or not to include the documented source code). Please +%% do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. +%% +\ProvidesFile{apacite.drv} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation driver file] +\documentclass{ltxdoc} +%\documentclass[twoside]{ltxdoc} +%\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc} +%\documentclass[twoside,a4paper]{ltxdoc} +%% +\usepackage{apacdoc}[2007/09/03] +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% LOADING OF PACKAGES +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% The following line can be uncommented to test compatibility with TeX4ht. +%% \usepackage{tex4ht} +%% +%% The following line is used for references to internet sources. +%% It is not generally necessary for apacite, but used in the examples. +\usepackage{url} +%% +%% The following lines can be uncommented to test compatibility with +%% the mentioned other packages and test the language support of +%% apacite. +%% \usepackage[dvips,pagebackref]{hyperref} +%% \usepackage[pdftex,pagebackref]{hyperref} +%% \usepackage[english]{babel}% babel must be loaded before apacite +%% \usepackage{german} +%% +%% Loading apacite with author index option. +\usepackage[ltxemindex,bibnewpage]{apacite}[2007/09/03] +%% +\raggedbottom +%% +%% To include the detailed explanation of the coding, comment out +%% the next line +\OnlyDescription +%% +%% To produce a command index: add the following line for one run, +%% then run makeindex -s gind.ist apacite +%% and reprocess, with or without this line (much faster without) +% \EnableCrossrefs\CodelineIndex +%% +%% To produce a change history: add the following line for one run, +%% then run makeindex -s gglo.ist -o apacite.gls apacite.glo +%% and reprocess, with or without this line (faster without) +% \RecordChanges +%% +\DisableCrossrefs %May stay; zapped by \EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineNumbered %May stay +%% +%% For getting something useful out of greek.apc in the documentation. +\IfFileExists{iso-8859-7.def}{% + \usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}}{} +\begin{document} + \DocInput{apacite.dtx} +\end{document} + + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `apacite.drv'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2a2c665f398 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,17010 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +% elsewhere in this file. +% +% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +% version. The latest version of this license is in: +% +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +% +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +% +% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +% the generated files. +% +% \fi +% +% \CheckSum{4973} +% \CharacterTable +% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +% +% \iffalse +%<*dtx> +\ProvidesFile{apacite.dtx} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite dtx file] +%</dtx> +%<driver>\ProvidesFile{apacite.drv} +%<package|docpkg>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01] +%<package>\ProvidesPackage{apacite} +%<docpkg>\ProvidesPackage{apacdoc} +%<english>\ProvidesFile{english.apc} +%<dutch>\ProvidesFile{dutch.apc} +%<finnish>\ProvidesFile{finnish.apc} +%<german>\ProvidesFile{german.apc} +%<ngerman>\ProvidesFile{ngerman.apc} +%<greek>\ProvidesFile{greek.apc} +%<norsk>\ProvidesFile{norsk.apc} +%<spanish>\ProvidesFile{spanish.apc} +%<swedish>\ProvidesFile{swedish.apc} +%<bibdb>%% apa5ex.bib +%<bibstyle>%% apacite.bst +%<xbibstyle>%% apacitex.bst +%^^A +%^^A I have to find out how I can replace the hard-coded date+version with a command +%^^A such that the value of the command is written to the file instead of the name. +%^^A +%<driver> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation driver file] +%<package> [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA citation] +%<docpkg> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation style] +%<english> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] +%<dutch> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] +%<finnish> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] +%<german> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] +%<ngerman> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] +%<greek> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] +%<norsk> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] +%<spanish> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] +%<swedish> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] +%<bibdb>%% [2007/09/03 v4.00 bibliography database for apacite manual] +%<bibstyle>%% [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style] +%<xbibstyle>%% [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info] +% +%<*install> +%^^A ============================================= +%^^A Here is the docstrip installation file +%^^A It is written on first LaTeX run if it +%^^A does not already exist +%^^A ============================================= +\begin{filecontents*}{apacite.ins} +%% +%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation +%% driver files from apacite.dtx when run through LaTeX. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. + +\input docstrip.tex +\keepsilent + +\declarepreamble\mainpreamble + +This is a generated file. + +Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +elsewhere in this file. + +This file is part of the `apacite' package. +------------------------------------------- + +It may be distributed and/or modified under the +conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +version. The latest version of this license is in: + + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + +and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. + +The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. + +This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' + +The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer + +This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +the generated files. + +\endpreamble + +\declarepreamble\drvpreamble + +This is a generated file. + +Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +elsewhere in this file. + +This file is part of the `apacite' package. +------------------------------------------- + +It may be distributed and/or modified under the +conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +version. The latest version of this license is in: + + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + +and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. + +The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. + +This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' + +The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer + +This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +the generated files. + +You are allowed to make changes to this file, in order to generate +the user's manual with your preferred settings (e.g., to choose +whether or not to include the documented source code). Please +do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. + +\endpreamble + +\edef\noendinputpostamble{% + \MetaPrefix ^^J% + \MetaPrefix\space End of file `\outFileName'.% +} + +\askonceonly +\generate{% + \usepreamble\mainpreamble + \file{apacite.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{package}} + \file{apacdoc.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{docpkg}} + \file{english.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{english}} + \file{dutch.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{dutch}} + \file{finnish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{finnish}} + \file{german.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{german}} + \file{ngerman.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{ngerman}} + \file{greek.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{greek}} + \file{norsk.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{norsk}} + \file{spanish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{spanish}} + \file{swedish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{swedish}} + \usepreamble\drvpreamble + \file{apacite.drv}{\from{apacite.dtx}{driver}} + \usepreamble\mainpreamble + \usepostamble\noendinputpostamble + \file{apa5ex.bib}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibdb}} + \file{apacite.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle}} + \file{apacitex.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle}} +} + +\obeyspaces +\Msg{*****************************************************} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the *} +\Msg{* following files into a directory searched by TeX: *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* All *.apc, *.sty *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* and to move the following files into a directory *} +\Msg{* searched by BibTeX: *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* All *.bib, *.bst *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* To produce the documentation, run the following *} +\Msg{* script (or something similar, depending on your *} +\Msg{* operating system): *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* bibtex apacite *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* See the README file for a brief explanation and *} +\Msg{* the file apacite.drv for how to customize the *} +\Msg{* manual (e.g., to include the documented source *} +\Msg{* code. *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* Happy TeXing! *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{*****************************************************} + +\endbatchfile +\end{filecontents*} +%</install> +%<*gobble> +\IfFileExists{apacdoc.sty}{% + \let\finishprematurely\relax +}{% + \typeout{**************************************************% + ********************}% + \typeout{*}% + \typeout{* To extract the package, style, and support files + of apacite,}% + \typeout{* run TeX on apacite.ins}% + \typeout{*}% + \typeout{* To (re)generate the apacite documentation, first + run TeX on}% + \typeout{* apacite.ins and then run LaTeX on apacite.drv + or apacite.dtx}% + \typeout{*}% + \typeout{**************************************************% + ********************^^J}% + \makeatletter + \edef\finishprematurely{\csname @@end\endcsname}% + \makeatother +} +\finishprematurely +%</gobble> +% \fi +% +% \DoNotIndex{\begin,\CodelineIndex,\CodelineNumbered,\def,\DisableCrossrefs} +% \DoNotIndex{\DocInput,\documentclass,\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\GetFileInfo} +% \DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\OnlyDescription,\RecordChanges,\usepackage} +% \DoNotIndex{\ProvidesClass,\ProvidesPackage,\ProvidesFile,\RequirePackage} +% \DoNotIndex{\LoadClass,\PassOptionsToClass,\PassOptionsToPackage} +% \DoNotIndex{\DeclareOption,\CurrentOption,\ProcessOptions,\ExecuteOptions} +% \DoNotIndex{\AtEndOfClass,\AtEndOfPackage,\AtBeginDocument,\AtEndDocument} +% \DoNotIndex{\InputIfFileExists,\IfFileExists,\ClassError,\PackageError} +% \DoNotIndex{\ClassWarning,\PackageWarning,\ClassWarningNoLine} +% \DoNotIndex{\PackageWarningNoLine,\ClassInfo,\PackageInfo,\MessageBreak} +% \DoNotIndex{\space,\protect,\DeclareRobustCommand,\CheckCommand} +% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\renewcommand,\providecommand,\newenvironment} +% \DoNotIndex{\renewenvironment,\newif,\newlength,\newcounter,\setlength} +% \DoNotIndex{\setcounter,\if,\ifx,\ifcase,\ifnum,\ifdim,\else,\fi} +% \DoNotIndex{\texttt,\textbf,\textrm,\textsl,\textsc,\reset@font} +% \DoNotIndex{\textup,\textit,\textmd,\textsf,\emph,\futurelet} +% \DoNotIndex{\ttfamily,\rmfamily,\sffamily,\mdseries,\bfseries,\upshape} +% \DoNotIndex{\slshape,\scshape,\itshape,\em,\LaTeX,\LaTeXe} +% \DoNotIndex{\filename,\fileversion,\filedate,\let,\makeindex} +% \DoNotIndex{\@auxout,\@for,\@gobble,\@ifnextchar,\@m,\@mkboth,\@nil} +% \DoNotIndex{\@noitemerr,\@tempa,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@warning} +% \DoNotIndex{\advance,\arabic,\AtBeginDocument,\bf,\bibname,\chapter} +% \DoNotIndex{\citation,\clubpenalty,\CodelineNumbered,\csname} +% \DoNotIndex{\DisableCrossrefs,\do,\edef,\else,\endcsname,\endlist} +% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\gdef,\global,\hbox,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace} +% \DoNotIndex{\if,\if@filesw,\if@tempswa,\ifx,\immediate,\itemindent,\labelsep} +% \DoNotIndex{\labelwidth,\lastskip,\leftmargin,\list,\mbox,\newblock} +% \DoNotIndex{\newpage,\p@enumiv,\parindent,\penalty,\refname} +% \DoNotIndex{\relax,\section,\settowidth,\sfcode,\sloppy,\small,\string} +% \DoNotIndex{\theenumiv,\thepage,\unskip,\uppercase,\usecounter,\vskip} +% \DoNotIndex{\widowpenalty,\write,\xdef,\z@,\catcode,\ifnum,\the} +% \DoNotIndex{\@empty,\@ifundefined,\@latex@warning,\@minus,\@plus,\ } +% \DoNotIndex{\document,\@namedef,\@listi,\markboth,\or,\p@} +% \DoNotIndex{\listparindent,\noexpand,\par,\parsep,\pb,\pbf,\pbfseries} +% \DoNotIndex{\pc,\pd,\pem,\pit,\pitshape,\pmdseries,\prm,\prmfamily,\psc} +% \DoNotIndex{\pscshape,\psf,\psffamily,\psl,\pslshape,\ptt,\pttfamily} +% \DoNotIndex{\pupshape,\@iden,\@firstofone,\@unexpandable@protect} +% \DoNotIndex{\if@draft,\typeout} +% \DoNotIndex{\@ifclassloaded,\@ifstar,\@onlypreamble,\@preamblecmds} +% \DoNotIndex{\addtolength,\endinput,\@bsphack,\begingroup,\@wrindex} +% \DoNotIndex{\@listctr,\bibname,\enddocument,\hfil,\ignorespaces,\item} +% \DoNotIndex{\NAT@temp,\refname,\stepcounter,\@ifpackageloaded} +% \DoNotIndex{\@gobbletwo,\index,\itemsep,\markright,\scriptsize} +% \DoNotIndex{\textsuperscript,\@undefined} +% \DoNotIndex{\@celt,\@cite@list,\@citea,\@citeb,\@compress@cite} +% \DoNotIndex{\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@h@ld,\@make@cite@list,\@ne} +% \DoNotIndex{\@sort@celt,\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\delimiter,\endgroup} +% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\m@ne,\number} +% \DoNotIndex{\@markboth,\@mkboth,\nobreak,\SK@,\SK@@citex} +% \DoNotIndex{\SK@@label,\SK@@ref,SK@def,\SK@lbibitem,\bbl@redefine} +% \DoNotIndex{\@safe@activesfalse,\@save@activestrue,\active@prefix} +% +% \DoNotIndex{\ ,\&,\{,\},\.,\!,\",\#,\%,\',\(,\),\*,\,,\-,\/} +% \DoNotIndex{\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\@,\[,\\,\],\^,\_,\`,\|,\~} +% \DoNotIndex{\@backslashchar,\@citec,\@element@,\@input@,\@nameuse} +% \DoNotIndex{\@makeschapterhead,\@restonecolfalse,\@restonecoltrue} +% \DoNotIndex{\@old@endthebibliography,\@oldbibpreamble,\@orig@@cite} +% \DoNotIndex{\@orig@@nocitemeta,\@orig@nocite} +% \DoNotIndex{\@tmp@arg,\@xp,\AA,\aa,\addcontentsline} +% \DoNotIndex{\afterassignment,\aftergroup,\alph,\ast,\b@ex} +% \DoNotIndex{\backslash,\baselineskip,\BibTeX,\bigskip,\bs} +% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\cmd,\cmdfour,\cmdthree,\cmdthreealt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cmdthreepre,\cmdtwo,\columnsep,\columnseprule,\count@} +% \DoNotIndex{\dag,\do@url@hyp,\EM,\ensuremath,\entryname,\envirname} +% \DoNotIndex{\evensidemargin,\fieldname,\flqq,\fname,\fontencoding} +% \DoNotIndex{\fontfamily,\footnotesize,\footskip,\frqq} +% \DoNotIndex{\g@addto@macro,\GlossaryPrologue,\headheight,\headsep} +% \DoNotIndex{\hoffset,\if@mainmatter,\ifcodeline@index,\iffalse} +% \DoNotIndex{\ifhave@multicol,\index@prologue,\IndexMin,\IndexParms} +% \DoNotIndex{\IndexPrologue,\input,\jobname,\kern,\langle,\LaTeXrtf} +% \DoNotIndex{\latextohtml,\lbrace,\LC,\ldots,\linewidth,\lower} +% \DoNotIndex{\makeatletter,\makeatother,\MakeIndex,\MakeUppercase} +% \DoNotIndex{\marginparpush,\marginparsep,\marginparwidth,\mid} +% \DoNotIndex{\mathbin,\mathchar,\mathord,\newskip,\newwrite} +% \DoNotIndex{\normalsize,\oddsidemargin,\oldBED,\oldBEd,\oldBEDS} +% \DoNotIndex{\oldbibinitial,\oldbibliteral,\oldbibskipbracenodot} +% \DoNotIndex{\oldBIn,\oldBRetrieved,\oldevensidemargin,\oldfootskip} +% \DoNotIndex{\oldheadheight,\oldheadsep,\oldhoffset,\oldlinewidth} +% \DoNotIndex{\oldmarginparpush,\oldmarginparsep,\oldmarginparwidth} +% \DoNotIndex{\oldoddsidemargin,\oldtextheight,\oldtextwidth} +% \DoNotIndex{\oldtopmargin,\oldvoffset,\onecolumn,\openout,\opt} +% \DoNotIndex{\orig@printindex,\origbibDSM,\parskip,\Perl,\pfill} +% \DoNotIndex{\pkg,\pkgoption,\protected@edef,\protected@write} +% \DoNotIndex{\quad,\raggedright,\raisebox,\rangle,\rbrace,\rm,\sc} +% \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\simpleguillemots,\symbol,\TeX,\TeXht} +% \DoNotIndex{\textheight,\textwidth,\thinspace,\thispagestyle} +% \DoNotIndex{\thr@@,\times,\tiny,\topmargin,\triangleright} +% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\undefined,\voffset,\vspace,\X,\Y} +% +% \iffalse +%<*driver> +\documentclass{ltxdoc} +%<driver>%\documentclass[twoside]{ltxdoc} +%<driver>%\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc} +%<driver>%\documentclass[twoside,a4paper]{ltxdoc} +%% +\usepackage{apacdoc}[2007/09/03] +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% LOADING OF PACKAGES +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% The following line can be uncommented to test compatibility with TeX4ht. +%% \usepackage{tex4ht} +%% +%% The following line is used for references to internet sources. +%% It is not generally necessary for apacite, but used in the examples. +\usepackage{url} +%% +%% The following lines can be uncommented to test compatibility with +%% the mentioned other packages and test the language support of +%% apacite. +%% \usepackage[dvips,pagebackref]{hyperref} +%% \usepackage[pdftex,pagebackref]{hyperref} +%% \usepackage[english]{babel}% babel must be loaded before apacite +%% \usepackage{german} +%% +%% Loading apacite with author index option. +\usepackage[ltxemindex,bibnewpage]{apacite}[2007/09/03] +%% +\raggedbottom +%% +%% To include the detailed explanation of the coding, comment out +%% the next line +\OnlyDescription +%% +%% To produce a command index: add the following line for one run, +%% then run makeindex -s gind.ist apacite +%% and reprocess, with or without this line (much faster without) +%<driver>% \EnableCrossrefs\CodelineIndex +%% +%% To produce a change history: add the following line for one run, +%% then run makeindex -s gglo.ist -o apacite.gls apacite.glo +%% and reprocess, with or without this line (faster without) +%<driver>% \RecordChanges +%% +\DisableCrossrefs %May stay; zapped by \EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineNumbered %May stay +%% +%% For getting something useful out of greek.apc in the documentation. +\IfFileExists{iso-8859-7.def}{% + \usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}}{} +\begin{document} + \DocInput{apacite.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% \fi +% +% ^^A (I have to find out how to get the following remark in the right +% ^^A place in the documentation.) +% ^^A The version numbers have been assigned afterwards; originally, +% ^^A apacite had only release dates. +% +% \changes{v1.0}{1994/11/30}{First public version} +% \changes{v2.0}{2000/09/22}{Second packaged version, the result of +% continuous updating over many years. Not officially released through +% ctan because there was no update of the documentation, but this was +% available through my homepage at the time. Many additions in terms +% of customizability, and introduction of the author indexing +% facilities, which were first used in my PhD thesis in 1998.} +% \changes{v2.1}{2003/03/27}{First official release since 1994. Compared +% to 2.0, this primarily solved some important compatibility problems +% with other packages.} +% \changes{v2.2}{2003/09/05}{Updated for the 5th edition of the APA +% manual, up to date documentation and test document, reorganized the +% material, and improved compatibility.} +% \changes{v3.0}{2004/07/01}{Now adds initials if necessary to +% distinguish first authors; now adds 2nd and later authors if necessary +% to distinguish references; now truncates author list after 6th author +% and editor list after 1st in reference list if there are more than 6 +% authors/editors; improved sorting for reference list; improved author +% index support; added explicit support for reporting a meta-analysis.} +% \changes{v3.1}{2005/06/01}{Introduces explicit non-English language +% support, solves some compatibility problems.} +% \changes{v3.2}{2005/06/08}{Fix of a small but annoying bug.} +% \changes{v4.00}{2007/09/03}{Solved many compatibility issues; improved +% and extended language support; more extensive customizability.} +% +% \GetFileInfo{apacite.sty} +% +% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} +% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm} +% +% ^^A Start documentation here. +% +% \iffalse +%<*dtx> +% \fi +\MakePercentComment +% +% Previously apacite.tex : +% User's reference manual and test of the apacite package. +% Written by Erik Meijer +% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% START OF ``NORMAL'' PART OF DOCUMENT +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\title{The \pkg{apacite} package% + \thanks{This document describes \pkg{apacite} version~\fileversion{} + dated \filedate.} + \vspace{0.3\baselineskip}\\ + \large Citation and reference list with \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} + according to the rules of the American Psychological Association} +\author{Erik Meijer\\ + \textsf{apacite at gmail.com} +} +\date{\filedate} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% If ecmr (T1) font not available: +\simpleguillemots +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\maketitle +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\begin{abstract} + \noindent + This document describes and tests the \pkg{apacite} package + \APACversiondate{\filedate}. This is a package that can be used with + \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} to generate citations and a reference list, + formatted according to the rules of the American Psychological Association. + Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} contains an option to (almost) automatically + generate an author index as well. The package can be customized in many + ways. +\end{abstract} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\clearpage +\tableofcontents +\clearpage +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Introduction} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The American Psychological Association (APA) is very strict about the style in +which manuscripts submitted to its journals are written and formatted. The +requirements of the APA are described in the \emph{Publication Manual of the +American Psychological Association}, the latest version of which is the 5th +edition \cite{APAManual}. In the sequel, this is simply called the \emph{APA +manual}. + +The APA manual discusses how candidate authors should write their manuscripts: +writing style, parts of a manuscript and their order, presentation of the +results in the form of tables and figures, and so forth. Candidate authors +should study this and adhere to this. + +The APA manual also gives specific rules about the formatting of a manuscript. +This includes double spacing, a running head, the typographic style of section +headings, the placement of tables and figures on separate pages at the end of +the document, and so forth. \LaTeX{} users will recognize these as ``style'' +elements that should be defined in a package (\fname{.sty} file) or class +(\fname{.cls} file). Their specific documents (\fname{.tex} file) should be +largely style-independent. This idea of separating content and logical +structure from specific formatting is one of the basic elements of \LaTeX{} +\cite[p.~7]{LaTeXbook}. + +An implementation of the formatting rules of the APA manual for use with +\LaTeX{} is the \pkg{apa} class of Athanassios Protopapas. This handles all +kinds of issues about general document formatting, title page, section +headings, figures and tables, and so forth. Therefore, if you intend to submit +a manuscript to an APA journal, I strongly recommend using the \pkg{apa} +class. + +An important part of the APA style is the way citations and the reference list +should be formatted. This takes 75 pages in the APA manual (pp.~207--281, +excluding the references to legal materials). This part is not handled by the +\pkg{apa} class, but by the \pkg{apacite} package. The \pkg{apa} class +requires the \pkg{apacite} package, but \pkg{apacite} can be used without +\pkg{apa}. The current document, for example, does not use the \pkg{apa} +class, because I find it desirable that possible users can study the +\pkg{apacite} package and its documentation without having to install several +other classes and packages first. Therefore, the current document uses +standard \LaTeX{} as much as possible. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection*{Some history} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +Before the advent of the first version of \pkg{apacite} in 1994, several +authors have written \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} packages (\fname{.sty}) and \BibTeX{} +style files (\fname{.bst}) with suggestive names as \pkg{apalike}, +\pkg{newapa}, and \pkg{theapa} to try to capture some of the requirements of +the APA manual. A severe problem with the APA citations is that, if the number +of authors is between three and five, inclusive, the first citation must +include all authors, whereas subsequent citations should refer to the first +author ``et al.''. This problem had been solved by the \pkg{newapa} and +\pkg{theapa} packages. + +A lot of APA peculiarities, however, were not covered by these citation +styles. Examples are: +\begin{itemize} +\item In the reference list, authors should be formatted with + their initials after their surnames. Editors, however, + should be formatted with their initials \emph{before} their + surnames if they are not in the author position. +\item If the work referred to is a non-English-language source, + the English translation of the title should be given in + brackets after the title. +\item Edition and volume of a book and the pages of an article + in that book should be gathered between a single pair + of parentheses. +\item The publisher of a book and its address should be given as + ``address: publisher'', and not as ``publisher, address''. +\item When the work used is a reprint or translation of an + earlier work, this should be mentioned in the reference + list. In text, the year must be given in the form + ``1923/1961''. +\item There are several ``tricky'' things with brackets and + parentheses, for example, with the type of an article + (e.g., ``Letter to the editor'', + ``Review of the book \emph{The social life of information}'', + ``Abstract'', ``Special issue''). Furthermore, magazine and + newspaper articles are treated differently than journal + articles; papers presented at meetings must be treated + differently; translators of articles and books and chairs + of symposia must be introduced; an article can have editors + instead of authors (e.g., with a special issue); a PhD thesis + can be abstracted in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts International}; + a (technical) report of some institution can be an (edited) + collection of articles. +\end{itemize} +The \pkg{apacite} package is devised to get (much) closer to the APA rules +than the abovementioned other packages and styles. + +The original version of the \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package consisted for +a large part of the citation part of \fname{theapa.sty}. The current version, +however, has been changed and extended in many ways and can therefore not be +considered a straightforward adaptation of \fname{theapa.sty} anymore, +although it provides largely the same commands, such as \cmd{\citeA}, and +peculiarities in the command definitions, such as the use of \verb+<...>+ for +a prefix note and \verb+[...]+ for a postfix note. + +Although the \fname{apacite.bst} \BibTeX{} style started out as a slightly +adapted version of \fname{theapa.bst}, the number of changes became so large +and things became so unmanageable that I decided to write a completely new +bibstyle, although using some small parts of the original. The +\fname{apacite.bst} file can therefore not anymore be seen as an adaptation of +\fname{theapa.bst}. Due to the complex rules of the APA manual, it has become +a large file. In the original process of writing (back in 1994), the error +\begin{verbatim} +You've exceeded BibTeX's wizard-defined function space +\end{verbatim} +was very hard to overcome. It appears that later versions of \BibTeX{} allowed +much more space, because I have not received this message anymore in recent +years, although the bibstyle has been expanded considerably. However, if you +run an old \BibTeX{}, you may encounter this (and similar) error messages. + +In the ``dark years'' between 1994 and 2003, in which there was no official +new version of \pkg{apacite}, I have been fixing small bugs, discovered either +by me or by users who sent in their bug reports, and adding some small options +that were easy to incorporate and that I found useful or that were requested +by a user. Furthermore, in 1998, I spent considerable effort in adding an +(almost) automatic author indexing option, first used for my PhD thesis +\cite{meijer1998}. + +In the first few months of 2003, I fixed a number of problems with the +compatibility between \pkg{apacite} and some other important packages. +Although I had been planning (or wishing, rather) to release a proper official +update of \pkg{apacite} for some time, I had not done so, mainly because I had +not yet taken the time to update the documentation. The compatibility issues +were so severe, however, that I decided in March 2003 to release an +intermediate update, which thus became the first official release since the +original version. This version contained a lot of files with compatibility +patches and tests. The main shortcomings of that version were the lack of +up-to-date documentation and the lack of agreement with the latest version of +the APA manual (5th ed., 2001). + +In September 2003, I finally released a complete, fully updated and +significantly extended version of \pkg{apacite}, including extensive +documentation. However, that version still was not able to format some +citations correctly. The \APACversiondate{2004/07/01} version was a small +improvement of the \APACversiondate{2003/09/05} version, but fixed the +important inadequacies of previous versions. + +The \APACversiondate{2005/06/08} version introduced (limited) support of +non-English languages. This is clearly a non-APA direction, because all +APA publications are in English. However, many journals, universities, +etc.\ in non-English speaking countries base their rules on the APA rules, +and thus it may be useful to have the possibility to use \pkg{apacite} +in combination with documents in non-English languages as well. This +language feature has been further extended in the current version. +See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a description of the implementation +of this feature. + +The most salient differences in the current version are the much improved +compatibility with a large number of other packages (most notably +\pkg{hyperref}) and the shift of many formatting decisions from \BibTeX\ +to \LaTeX, so that they are easier to change by the user. + +Apart from the language support and the facilities for customization, the +current version of \pkg{apacite} is aimed at conforming with the 5th edition +of the APA manual. It remains, however, imperfect, although the instances of +incorrectly formatted cases will be rare. The problems can be solved by +``tricking'' the style (e.g., by defining the \fieldname{number} field as +``\verb+2, Serial No. 186+'' if the issue number and serial number of a +journal are both important), but this makes the \fname{.bib} file less +compatible with other styles. In the test examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} +below, many tricks are used and discussed. Remaining problems, omissions, and +things-to-be-done can be found in section~\ref{sec:todo}. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection*{Philosophy of \pkg{apacite}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +As can be deduced from the discussion thus far, the first priority of +\pkg{apacite} is to implement the rules of the APA manual with regard to +citation and reference list as closely as possible. However, just like its +predecessors, and actually expanding much beyond their realm, +\pkg{apacite} offers many possibilities for customization as +well. Many details of \pkg{apacite}, particularly punctuation and some fixed +texts (e.g., ``Tech.\ Rep.'') can be changed easily by the user by redefining +some commands in \LaTeX{}. Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} also offers several +proper options to change some of its settings. + +Whether certain options or customizable aspects are implemented depends on two +criteria: (1) Is it possible, easy (enough), and convenient to implement them +without compromising the ability to adhere to the APA rules, and (2) Do I (EM) +consider them important or useful enough to spend time to implement them. +Actually, the decision process is the reverse of this: First, I decide whether +I find it a relevant or useful option. If not, I will not implement it. If so, +I will think about if and how I can implement it. If I have an idea for a +solution that is practically feasible, I will pursue it. If I don't see a +solution, if I think it will take me too much time, or if I think a solution +will be inconvenient to other users, then I will not pursue it. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection*{New in this version} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The changes since the \APACversiondate{2005/06/08} version are: +\begin{itemize} +\item \pkg{apacite} is now packaged in \fname{dtx} + (\pkg{doc}/\pkg{docstrip}) form, as is usual for \LaTeX{} packages. + However, this is still rudimentary and considerable work is still + needed to separate documentation from source code and to insert + the convenient margin par notes and index entries. +\item The \pkg{apacite} manual-specific commands are now put in a separate + package file, \fname{apacdoc.sty}. Apart from specific commands and + settings that are only of interest for this manual, this contains + the definitions of commands that are considered too ad hoc, + ill-designed, or otherwise not generally useful, but that are + necessary to handle certain complicated references satisfactorily. + For the latter reason, these may be interesting for users who + encounter similar problems. See section~\ref{sec:apacdoc} for usage + instructions. +\item Improved customizability of the reference list by replacing many + formatting decisions made by \fname{apacite.bst}, i.e., in the + \BibTeX{} stage, by \LaTeX{} commands in the \fname{.bbl} file; + see section~\ref{sec:custom-big-formatting}. + In this way, formatting can be changed by the user by redefining + the \LaTeX\ commands through \cmd{\renewcommand}. Hence, many new + formatting commands have been introduced in \LaTeX. The drawback + of this is that it is less easy to read the \fname{.bbl} file + and make small changes by editing this file. +\item Added \pkgoption{indexpackage}, \pkgoption{noindexpackage}, and + \pkgoption{ltxemindex} options to be able to generate an author + index with or without the \pkg{index} package. +\item Resolved many compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite} and + other packages, esp.\ \pkg{natbib}, \pkg{hyperref}, and several + packages that can be used to generate multiple bibliographies + (see section~\ref{sec:compat}). The \pkgoption{hyper} and + \pkgoption{nohyper} have thus become obsolete and now give + innocuous warnings. +\item Added \pkgoption{includecorporate} and \pkgoption{suppresscorporate} + options that determine whether corporate authors are to be included + in the author index or not (with one of the indexing options, + of course). This works by using the \cmd{\bibcorporate} command + in the \fname{.bib} file. Also, if the author is the publisher as well, + the decision of how to indicate this in the reference list is now + deferred to the \LaTeX{} realm, so that the user can choose whether + to use the APA-dictated ``Author'' or the name of the publisher itself. +\item Added \cmd{\citeauthorNP}, \cmd{\fullciteauthorNP}, and + \cmd{\shortciteauthorNP} commands, which are equivalent to the non-\verb+NP+ + versions, except that they use the parenthetical ``and'' (`\&' by + default) between authors. +\item The citation commands now allow spaces between the works cited:\\ + \verb+\cite{Jones:1999, Smith:2001}+. This is more convenient + with word-wrapping text editors and corresponds to the implementation + of other citation packages, as well as standard \LaTeX. +\item Explicit (and thus improved) support of the \entryname{manual} + reference type. +\item The \fieldname{edition} and \fieldname{originaledition} fields can + now be supplied as numbers; the ``st'', ``nd'', ``rd'', and ``th'' + suffixes are automatically inserted in this case. If it is not a + number (e.g., ``Rev.'' or ``2nd'', then the argument is copied + literally, as in previous versions. +\item The location of a \entryname{lecture} can now be given in the + \fieldname{address} field and does not need to be included in the + \fieldname{howpublished} field anymore. +\item Added support for the \fieldname{url} and \fieldname{lastchecked} + fields to improve references to websites. Also, the number of other + fields that are supported has been increased, most notably + \fieldname{howpublished} for \entryname{book}s and \fieldname{address} + for \entryname{lecture}s; see Table~\ref{tab:fieldref}. Defined + URL formatting styles for usage with the \pkg{url} package that + adhere to the APA rules in this regard (esp.\ line-breaking). +\item Improved and extended language support (see section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}): + new added languages, thanks to \pkg{apacite} users, and extended + customizability. Additional commands that anticipate further + language-improvements are + \cmd{\BPBI}, \cmd{\BPBI}, \cmd{\APACmonth}, \cmd{\Bby}, \cmd{\BAuthor}, + \cmd{\BAvailFrom}, \cmd{\BRetrieved}, and \cmd{\BMsgPostedTo}. + However, these commands have not been defined in the language + files yet. +\item A few small changes to the examples from the APA manual + (section~\ref{sec:xmpl}), incorporating a few errata to + the APA manual published on the APA's web site. + Also, some improved tricks in the examples. + These primarily fix some problems with + the author index induced by earlier tricks. +\item Some minor changes and bug fixes that most users will not notice. + One consequence is that the earlier \pkgoption{accentfix} and + \pkgoption{noaccentfix} options have become obsolete and now give + innocuous warnings. +\end{itemize} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Installation, package loading, and running \BibTeX{}} +\label{sec:usage} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +As of this version, \pkg{apacite} is distributed as a \fname{.dtx} +file, like most \LaTeX{} packages. This file, \fname{apacite.dtx}, +is supplemented by a \fname{README} file, which gives a brief +introduction and installation instructions, the user's manual +in the file \fname{apacite.pdf} (which you are reading right now), +and the installation file \fname{apacite.ins}. Strictly speaking, +only the \fname{apacite.dtx} file is necessary, because the +installation file is regenerated from it if it is not available, +and the user's manual is generated by running \LaTeX{} on +\fname{apacite.dtx}. But it is customary (and convenient for +potential users) to include the other files as well. + +The \LaTeX{} packages, \BibTeX{} style files, and other files in the +distribution are generated by running \LaTeX{} on \fname{apacite.ins}. +This generates the following files: +\begin{description} +\item[\fname{apacite.sty}] The \LaTeX{} citation package. This must + be placed in a directory where \TeX{} can find it. +\item[\fname{apacite.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style. This + must be placed in a directory where \BibTeX{} can find it. +\item[\fname{apacitex.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style with + added author index support. This must also be placed in a directory + where \BibTeX{} can find it. +\item[\fname{apa5ex.bib}] The file with bibliographic information + about the references used in the user's manual (i.e., the + current document). This is also useful for users to find out how + certain nontrivial problems can be solved. This can best be kept + in the same directory as \fname{apacite.dtx}. +\item[\fname{apacite.drv}] Documentation driver. Run \LaTeX{} on this + file to regenerate the user's manual. This is the current document, + and can also be ontained by running \LaTeX{} on \fname{apacite.dtx}, + but you can edit the file \fname{apacite.drv} to change some settings, + e.g., choose whether or not the documented source code must be + included in the manual or not. Please don't edit \fname{apacite.dtx} + itself. The file \fname{apacite.drv} can best be kept + in the same directory as \fname{apacite.dtx}. +\item[\fname{*.apc}] Language-specific modifications of \pkg{apacite}. + See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a discussion of these. + These must be placed in a directory where \LaTeX{} can find them. + The files that are currently supplied are \fname{english.apc}, + \fname{dutch.apc}, \fname{finnish.apc}, \fname{german.apc}, + \fname{ngerman.apc}, \fname{greek.apc}, \fname{norsk.apc}, + \fname{spanish.apc}, and \fname{swedish.apc}. +\item[\fname{apacdoc.sty}] A \LaTeX{} package that contains commands + and settings used in this user's manual. This can be placed in a + directory where \TeX{} can find it, but given that it is primarily + useful for processing the user's manual and not intended as a + package for wider usage, it can also be left in the same directory as + \fname{apacite.dtx}. See section~\ref{sec:apacdoc} for a further discussion + of this package. +\end{description} +Previous versions of \pkg{apacite} provided the file \fname{apacite.tex}, +which contained the user's manual, but this is now included in +\fname{apacite.dtx} and can be formatted by running \LaTeX{} on +\fname{apacite.drv}. + +The \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package is loaded by putting +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\cmdthreealt{usepackage}{options}{apacite} +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +somewhere in your document between \cmd{\documentclass} and +\verb+\begin{document}+, or putting +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\cmdthreealt{RequirePackage}{options}{apacite} +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +in your own personal \LaTeX{} package (say, \fname{mysettings.sty}) +that is loaded by your document. + +To load the \fname{apacite.bst} or \fname{apacitex.bst} bibliography style in +\BibTeX{}, put +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\verb+\bibliographystyle{apacite}+ +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +or +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\verb+\bibliographystyle{apacitex}+ +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +respectively, in your document before the \cmd{\bibliography} command. The +position of the bibliography (reference list) is determined by the line +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\cmdtwo{bibliography}{bibfiles} +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +where \opt{bibfiles} is a list of filenames with \fname{.bib} extension, which +contain the bibliographic information that is used by \BibTeX{} to construct +the reference list. Usually, the \cmd{\bibliographystyle} and +\cmd{\bibliography} are kept together (immediately follow each other) in the +document, although when you are using the \pkg{apa} document class, +\pkg{apacite} is used by definition and you are not supposed to use the +\cmd{\bibliographystyle} command yourself. See the documentation of the +\pkg{apa} documentclass for details about this. + +If you use one of the author indexing options, the author index is put in +the \LaTeX{} output by the line +\begin{verbatim} +\printindex[autx] +\end{verbatim} +If you put this line in your document, but don't use one of the author +indexing options, it will be ignored. For more on author indexing, see +section~\ref{sec:autindex}. + +To get all parts in the final output, the following sequence of runs should +typically be taken (when starting from scratch): (1) \LaTeX{}, (2) \BibTeX{}, +(3) \LaTeX{}, (4) \LaTeX{}, and, when author indexing is on, (5) \MakeIndex{}, +(6) \LaTeX{}, and (7) \LaTeX{}. The last one is to get the index in the table +of contents. If the table of contents is on a regular page, i.e., an +arabic-numbered page instead of a roman-numbered page in the front matter, it +may even be necessary to run \MakeIndex{} another time, followed by \LaTeX{} +once or twice. Occasionally, somewhere in the process, \LaTeX{} may complain +about labels that may have changed, which requires even more additional +\LaTeX{} runs at that stage. So the number of runs that are necessary to get +everything right may become large. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Package options} +\label{sec:options} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The following options are recognized by \pkg{apacite}: +\begin{description} +\item[\pkgoption{BCAY}] \mbox{}\\ + This is a technical option for backwards compatibility with old versions + (pre-\APACversiondate{2003/09/05}) of \pkg{apacite}. In those versions of + \pkg{apacite}, the \cmd{\BCAY} construction was used to pass relevant + citation information from the \fname{.bbl} file (\BibTeX{}'s output) to + \LaTeX{}. This was taken over from its immediate predecessor, Young U. Ryu's + \pkg{theapa}. However, \pkg{natbib} does not recognize the \cmd{\BCAY} + construction, but it does recognize the analogous \cmd{\citeauthoryear} + construction, which was also used by an earlier predecessor of + \pkg{apacite}, \pkg{newapa}. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} has reverted to + \cmd{\citeauthoryear} as well. This makes different versions of + \pkg{apacite} incompatible with each other, because it is not possible to + support both constructions at the same time. This option is used to fix + that: In the (unlikely) event that you \emph{must} use a \fname{.bbl} file + that is generated by an old version of \pkg{apacite}, you can turn this + option on. + +\item[\pkgoption{index}] +\item[\pkgoption{indexpackage}] +\item[\pkgoption{noindexpackage}] + The \pkgoption{index} option turns author indexing on. See + section~\ref{sec:autindex} for a discussion of the author indexing facility. + The \pkgoption{index} option should be used with the \fname{apacitex.bst} + \BibTeX{} style, although it does not give errors with \fname{apacite.bst}, + but simply does not give author index entries, so then this option + typically does not have any effect (and an undesirable effect if + it does). The \pkgoption{indexpackage} and \pkgoption{noindexpackage} + select whether the author index entries should be generated according + to the method of the \pkg{index} package or using a more standard-\LaTeX{} + method. + + By default, if the \pkgoption{index} option is requested, the + \pkgoption{indexpackage} option is turned on as well, consistent with + the behavior of previous versions of \pkg{apacite}. + +\item[\pkgoption{noindex}] \mbox{}\\ + Turns author indexing off (the default). Typically used with + \fname{apacite.bst}, but can also be used with \fname{apacitex.bst}. In the + latter case, the author indexing commands are simply ignored. Therefore, + \fname{apacite.bst} is actually superfluous, but because author indexing + will be used rarely and \fname{apacitex.bst} is more likely to lead to errors + or incompatibilities, a ``clean'' (no author indexing) version, + \fname{apacite.bst}, is provided as well. + +\item[\pkgoption{suppresscorporate}] \mbox{}\\ + Excludes corporate authors from the author index. The \cmd{\bibcorporate} + command must be used in the \fname{.bib} file to denote a corporate author; + see sections~\ref{subsec:fields}, \ref{subsec:labels}, and~\ref{sec:autindex}. + +\item[\pkgoption{includecorporate}] \mbox{}\\ + Includes corporate authors in the author index, provided that an author index + is requested of course. + +\item[\pkgoption{stdindex}] +\item[\pkgoption{tocindex}] +\item[\pkgoption{emindex}] +\item[\pkgoption{ltxemindex}] \mbox{}\\ + These options select the style of index formatting. They all imply the + \pkgoption{index} option. The first three of these imply the + \pkgoption{indexpackage} option, whereas the fourth implies + \pkgoption{noindexpackage}. See section~\ref{sec:autindex}. + +\item[\pkgoption{numberedbib}] \mbox{}\\ + This option implies that the bibliography (reference list) is a numbered + section or chapter, e.g., ``6.~References'', instead of just ``References''. + +\item[\pkgoption{unnumberedbib}] \mbox{}\\ + The reverse of \pkgoption{numberedbib}: The bibliography is an unnumbered + section or chapter. This is the default. However, it is possible that when + using the \pkg{apa} document class, then \pkgoption{numberedbib} works + better, because that class turns section numbering off anyway and it may be + that \pkg{apa}'s page headings work well if the reference list is a + \cmd{\section} and not if it is a \cmd{\section*}. I have not experimented + with this (yet), however. + +\item[\pkgoption{sectionbib}] \mbox{}\\ + With this option, the bibliography is a section and not a chapter. Mainly + useful in combination with the \pkg{chapterbib} package. Therefore, it will + be discussed in more detail in section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}. + +\item[\pkgoption{nosectionbib}] \mbox{}\\ + With this option, the bibliography is a chapter, if the \cmd{\chapter} + command is defined. Otherwise, it is always a section. Again, see + section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}. + +\item[\pkgoption{tocbib}] \mbox{}\\ + This puts the bibliography in the table of contents, even if it is + unnumbered, provided of course that a table of contents is requested in the + document (by \cmd{\tableofcontents}). This is the default. + +\item[\pkgoption{notocbib}] \mbox{}\\ + This does not put the bibliography in the table of contents if it is an + unnumbered section or chapter. If it's numbered, it is always in the table + of contents. + +\item[\pkgoption{bibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\ + The bibliography is started on a new page. This is required by some journal + styles, including the APA manual. The \pkg{apa} class already contained this + in its \pkgoption{man} option, but now it has been made available directly + in \pkg{apacite}. + +\item[\pkgoption{nobibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\ + The bibliography is not explicitly started on a new page, although if the + bibliography is a chapter, it will be started on a new page anyway, because + chapters are started on a new page. This is the default in \pkg{apacite} and + thus is the only time a non-APA setting is used as default instead of an + available APA setting. Therefore, to satisfy the APA rules, you have to + request the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option explicitly. +\end{description} +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{The citation commands} +\label{sec:cite} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +In this section, the commands are described that can be used to cite a work. +Their default behavior will be explained. In section~\ref{sec:custom}, +customization of this behavior will be discussed. Extensive examples are given +in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. Table~\ref{tab:basic-cite} gives a brief +impression of the usage and results of the most common citation commands. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\begin{table}[tp] +\begin{center} +\caption{Examples of usage of basic citation commands.} +\label{tab:basic-cite} +\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +\hline +Command & Result \\ +\hline +\verb+\cite<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+ & + (e.g., Jones, 2001; Ross, 1987, p.~11) \\ +\verb+\citeNP<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+ & + e.g., Jones, 2001; Ross, 1987, p.~11 \\ +\verb+\citeA<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+ & + e.g., Jones (2001); Ross (1987, p.~11) \\ +\verb+\citeauthor<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+ & + e.g., Jones; Ross, p.~11 \\ +\verb+\citeyear<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+ & + (e.g., 2001; 1987, p.~11) \\ +\verb+\citeyearNP<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+ & + e.g., 2001; 1987, p.~11 \\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +If the \pkg{apacite} package is loaded, the following citation commands can be +used. +\begin{description} + \item[\cmdfour{cite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{fullcite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{shortcite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ + These three commands produce parenthetical citations of the + following form: + ``(\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Year1}; + \opt{Authors2}, \opt{Year2}; \ldots; \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{YearN}, + \opt{postfix})''. + The command \cmd{\fullcite} uses the ``full'' author list, and + the \cmd{\shortcite} command uses the abbreviated author list. + The \cmd{\cite} command uses the ``full'' list the first time + a work is referenced and the ``short'' list the second and + subsequent times. In accordance with the APA manual, the + ``full'' list consists of all authors if their number is five + or less, and the first author suffixed with ``et al.{}'' + if their number is six or more. Similarly, the ``short'' list + consists of all authors if their number is two or less and the + first author with ``et al.{}'' if their number is three or more. + There are some nuances for complicated situations. These will + be discussed in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. + + If the (full) author lists of subsequent citations within the + same citation command are the same, they are not repeated; only + the years of the later citations are given. + This holds for all analogous cases as well. + + The prefix and postfix are optional. Thus, e.g., + \cmdtwo{cite}{keys}, \cmdthree{cite}{postfix}{keys}, + and \cmdthreepre{cite}{prefix}{keys} are also allowed. + This holds for all analogous cases as well. + + \item[\cmdfour{citeNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{fullciteNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{shortciteNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ + ``No parentheses'' versions of \cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\fullcite}, + and \cmd{\shortcite}. They produce citations of the form + ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Year1}; + \opt{Authors2}, \opt{Year2}; \ldots; \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{YearN}, + \opt{postfix}''. Can be used for complex citations within + parenthetical material, see the discussion of + \cmd{\citeyearNP} below. + + \item[\cmdfour{citeA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{fullciteA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{shortciteA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ + These commands are similar to the commands without the + ``\verb+A+'' suffix. They produce in-text citations of the form + ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1} (\opt{Year1}), + \opt{Authors2} (\opt{Year2}), \ldots, + \opt{AuthorsN} (\opt{YearN}, \opt{postfix})''. + Typically, the \opt{prefix} will be empty, because it is + part of the main text, and there typically will only be + one citation in \opt{keys} (unless the authors of + multiple citations are the same), because the authors' + names are also part of the main text. But it was easy + to provide the additional options, and this enhances + the similarity with the other citation commands, which + I found desirable. + + \item[\cmdfour{citeauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{fullciteauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{shortciteauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{citeauthorNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{fullciteauthorNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] + \item[\cmdfour{shortciteauthorNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ + These commands are similar to their \cmd{\cite}-type + counterparts, except that they produce citations of the form + ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Authors2}, \ldots, + \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{postfix}'' + (the years and parentheses are left out). + This is typically used in a paragraph when a proper + citation (incl.\ year) to the same work has already been + given in the paragraph.% + \footnote{Note that a paragraph is not + a section. Nor does it need to be declared as a + \cmd{\paragraph}. A reminder for Dutch readers: + ``section'' = ``paragraaf'' and ``paragraph'' = ``alinea''.} + In such a case, according to the APA manual, the year must not be + repeated for repeated references to the same work in the same + paragraph. + + A second important application of these commands is + when some complex citations must be constructed, like + ``\citeauthor{4.05-1}'s \citeyear{4.05-1} theory'', + which makes combined use of \cmd{\citeauthor} and + \cmd{\citeyear}, see below. + + Normally, I would expect only one citation per + \cmd{\citeauthor}-type command, and no \opt{prefix} + or \opt{postfix}. + + The difference between the ``non-\verb+NP+'' versions and the + ``\verb+NP+'' versions is that the latter are intended to + be used parenthetically, like \cmd{\cite}, whereas the former + are intended to be used in the running text, like \cmd{\citeA}. + Neither of these generate the parentheses, though. Thus, the + only real difference is that the ``non-\verb+NP+'' versions + use ``and'' between authors and the ``\verb+NP+'' versions + use ``\&''. + + Following the \cmd{\cite}--\cmd{\citeNP}--\cmd{\citeA} logic, + \cmd{\citeauthor} should actually be called \cmd{\citeauthorA} + and a \cmd{\citeauthor} command should be supplied that is the + same as the current \cmd{\citeauthorNP} but with parentheses + added. For historical reasons and some compatibility with + other citation packages, this is currently not the case. I may + try to invent a decent solution for a next release of + \pkg{apacite}. + + \item[\cmdfour{citeyear}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ + Produces citations of the form + ``(\opt{prefix} \opt{Year1}, \opt{Year2}, \ldots, \opt{YearN}, + \opt{postfix})''. + See the discussion of \cmd{\citeauthor} above. Typically, + the \opt{prefix} would be empty and multiple citations + would only be used if they have the same authors. + + \item[\cmdfour{citeyearNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ + A ``no parentheses'' version of \cmd{\citeyear}. + Produces citations of the form + ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Year1}, \opt{Year2}, \ldots, \opt{YearN}, + \opt{postfix}''. Can be used for complex citations within + parenthetical material, like + ``the work of \citeauthor{3.99-15} (\citeyearNP{3.99-15}; + but see also \citeNP{3.99-16,3.99-17})'', + which also uses the \cmd{\citeNP} command. + + \item[\cmdtwo{nocite}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ + The entries are included in the bibliography without + being cited in text. This is standard \LaTeX. + Note that the APA manual normally does not allow this. + The only exception concerns works that are studied in a + meta-analysis, but for these the \cmd{\nocitemeta} + command should be used. + + \item[\cmdtwo{nocitemeta}{keys}] \mbox{}\\ + This is similar to \cmd{\nocite}. It is used to get the + list of works included in a meta-analysis in the + bibliography. This command has the additional effect that + the corresponding items in the bibliography are preceded + by an asterisk (\APACmetastar) and a remark explaining this + is inserted just before the bibliography, as required + by the APA manual. +\end{description} +In order to format the examples from the APA manual correctly in +section~\ref{sec:xmpl}, the \fname{apacdoc.sty} package defines the +following additional citation +commands: \cmd{\DSMcite}, \cmd{\biblecite}, and \cmd{\citesong}, and obvious +variations with \verb+full+, \verb+short+, \verb+A+, and \verb+NP+. I +have decided not to include these in \fname{apacite.sty}, primarily because +I find it unattractive to introduce different types of citation commands for +different types of citations. This also makes it more difficult to use the +same document with another citation package. Perhaps I'll be able to provide, +in a future version of \pkg{apacite}, more elegant solutions to the problems +for which these commands were defined. +See section~\ref{sec:apacdoc} for a description of the \fname{apacdoc.sty} +package and some brief usage instructions. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Contents of the bibliography database file} +\label{sec:bib} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The information that is used by \LaTeX/\BibTeX{} to generate +the citations and reference list must be stored by the user in one +or more files with the \fname{.bib} extension. +A detailed overview of the contents of the \fname{.bib} file is +given in \citeA[section~12.2]{KoDa04} and \citeA[section~13.2]{TLC2}. +Roughly speaking, the +\fname{.bib} file consists of a collection of \emph{entries} +of the form +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{contents}\verb+}+ +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +Most entries describe a work that may be referenced, e.g., a book +or article. There are, however, two exceptions: a \entryname{preamble} +entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+preamble+) and a \entryname{string} +entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+string+). There is typically +at most one \entryname{preamble} entry. Its \opt{contents} consist of a +string---according to \BibTeX, i.e., between double quotes (\verb+"+) +or an additional pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+). This +string, which typically consists of \LaTeX{} commands like +\verb+\newcommand{\SortNoop}[1]{}+, is literally included +in the document before the bibliography. It can therefore be used +to define commands that are used in the (other) entries of the +\fname{.bib} file and that are not standard \LaTeX{}. + +A \entryname{string} entry is similar, but the contents are now not +included in the document. Instead, the string is assigned to a kind of +``variable'', the name of which may contain characters +not usually associated with variable names, like colons and +hyphens, see \citeA[p.~769]{TLC2}. An example of a +\entryname{string} entry is +\begin{verbatim} +@string{ JPSP = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology} } +\end{verbatim} +Then, if in a later entry, the journal is +\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, you can format this +as +\begin{verbatim} + journal = JPSP, +\end{verbatim} +instead of the usual +\begin{verbatim} + journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, +\end{verbatim} +This is not only convenient because it saves typing of common +long journal names (and reduces the likelihood of typos), but it can +also be used to define style-specific variations. For example, some +styles abbreviate journal names, such as +\emph{J.~Pers.\ Soc.\ Psych.}\hbox{} instead of +\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}. +You could then put the definitions of all full journal names +in one \fname{.bib} file (\fname{fulljou.bib}, say) and the definitions +of the abbreviated journal names in another (\fname{abbrjou.bib}, say). +Suppose that the information about the referenced works is stored in a +third file, say, \fname{myrefs.bib}, and that the ``NotAPA'' +style rules, implemented in the \fname{notapa.bst} \BibTeX{} style file, +require the abbreviated journal names. Then you can use +\begin{verbatim} +\bibliographystyle{notapa} +\bibliography{abbrjou,myrefs} +\end{verbatim} +to obtain a reference list complying with the ``NotAPA'' rules. If +you change your mind and decide to switch to using the rules of the +APA manual, you only need to change the two lines above into +\begin{verbatim} +\bibliographystyle{apacite} +\bibliography{fulljou,myrefs} +\end{verbatim} +(and additionally load the \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package +through \cmd{\usepackage}). + +The remaining entry types are types that correspond with the +type of a referenced work, e.g., \entryname{book} or +\entryname{article}. These entry types (reference types) are +discussed in section~\ref{subsec:types} below. +Such entries have the following structure: +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{key}\verb+,+\\ +$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname1}\verb+ = +\opt{value1}\verb+,+\\ +$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname2}\verb+ = +\opt{value2}\verb+,+\\ +$\mbox{}\qquad\qquad\vdots$\\ +$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldnameN}\verb+ = +\opt{valueN}\verb+,+\\ +\verb+}+ +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +where \opt{key} corresponds to the key used in the citation +commands and matches the entry with the citation (and should +therefore be unique). The fieldnames are \verb+author+, \verb+year+, +etc., which are described in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below. +The values are strings, either defined previously by a +\entryname{string} entry or explicitly indicated as such here +by putting the relevant information between double quotes +(\verb+"+) or a pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+). + +To be able to obey the rules of the APA manual, \pkg{apacite} +provides several fields and reference types that are not +described in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation +\cite<e.g.,>[chap.~13]{TLC2}. Furthermore, +the meaning and usage of many fields and reference types that +\emph{are} described there have been altered somewhat. Therefore, +a complete description is given here. +The symbol \LC{} will be used to indicate that the field or +reference type is also described in \citeA[Appendix~B]{LaTeXbook}, +\citeA[chap.~12]{KoDa04}, or \citeA[chap.~13]{TLC2}, although, as +mentioned above, the specific meaning of the item may have been +changed. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{Types of references} +\label{subsec:types} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +In this section, the list of reference types that are recognized by +\pkg{apacite} is given. An overview of which fields can be used for which +reference type is given in Table~\ref{tab:fieldref}. If fields are not +relevant, but you use them anyway in your \fname{.bib} file, they are ignored. +The fields and their use are described in more detail in +section~\ref{subsec:fields}, but here some specific issues will already be +mentioned. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\begin{table}[p] +\centering +\caption{List of fields that are used by the various reference types + (blank = not used; \X{} = used; + \Y{} = used, but only for citations).} +\label{tab:fieldref} +\small +\makebox[0pt]{% some manipulation to squeeze the table onto the page +\newlength{\oldtabcolsep} +\setlength{\oldtabcolsep}{\tabcolsep} +\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt} +\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}cccccccccc@{}} +\hline + & \multicolumn{10}{c}{Reference type}\\ + \cline{2-11} +% +% Normally, I would use the sideways environment of the rotating +% package to format this nicely, but I do not want to require +% other packages to format this document, so I choose an uglier +% solution here. +% + & article\\ + & magazine & & & & & + & phdthesis + & + & manual\\ +Field + & newspaper & book & incollection & techreport & intechreport & lecture + & mastersthesis + & unpublished + & misc + & literal\\ +\hline +address & &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ +annote & & & & & & & & & & \\ +author &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ +booktitle & & &\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +chair & & & & & &\X& & & & \\ +chapter & & &\X& & & & & & & \\ +day &\X& &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X&\X& \\ +edition & &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X& &\X& \\ +editor &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& & &\X&\X& \\ +englishtitle &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ +firstkey &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\ +howpublished &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ +institution & & & &\X&\X& & & & & \\ +journal &\X& & & & & &\X& & & \\ +key &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\ +lastchecked &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ +month &\X& &\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X&\X& \\ +note &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ +number &\X&\X& &\X&\X& &\X&\X&\X& \\ +organization & & & & & & & &\X& & \\ +originaladdress &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +originalbooktitle &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +originaledition &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +originaleditor &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +originaljournal &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +originalnumber &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +originalpages &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +originalpublisher &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +originalvolume &\X&\X&\X& &\X& & & & & \\ +originalyear &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y\\ +pages &\X& &\X& &\X& &\X& & & \\ +publisher & &\X&\X& & & & & &\X& \\ +school & & & & & & &\X& & & \\ +series & & & & & & & & & & \\ +symposium & & & & & &\X& & & & \\ +text & & & & & & & & & &\X\\ +title &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ +translator &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\ +type &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ +url &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ +volume &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& &\X& &\X& \\ +year &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\Y\\ +\hline +\end{tabular}% +\setlength{\tabcolsep}{\oldtabcolsep} +} +% +\end{table} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +The following entry types (reference types) are defined in \pkg{apacite}: +\begin{description} + \item[\entryname{article}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + A journal article or comparable. If the + ``article'' referenced to is a special issue of a journal or + something else that has editors instead of authors, the + \fieldname{author} field should be empty and the \fieldname{editor} + field should be used for the editors. If the journal paginates + by issue instead of by volume, or when you are referring to a + whole special issue, the issue number should be given + in the \fieldname{number} field. In all other cases (including + referring to an article within a special issue), the + \fieldname{number} field must not be used. The \fieldname{type} + field can be used to denote the type of article, for example, + ``\verb+Letter to the editor+'', or + ``\verb+Review of the book \emph{Life in the middle}+''. + + \item[\entryname{magazine}] \mbox{}\\ + A magazine article. Unlike in early versions of \pkg{apacite}, + this is now equivalent to \entryname{article}. However, with + an \entryname{article}, the \fieldname{month} and \fieldname{day} + fields should generally not be used, unless there is a compelling + reason to use them. For a magazine, the \fieldname{month}, and + \fieldname{day} (for weeklies) fields are commonly used. + + \item[\entryname{newspaper}] \mbox{}\\ + A newspaper article. This is similar to \entryname{article} and + \fieldname{magazine}, except that the pages are formatted a little + different, with ``pp.~23--49'' instead of just ``23--49''. + + \item[\entryname{book}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + An entire book. The \fieldname{type} field can be used + to denote a specific type of item (so generally not strictly + a book), e.g., ``\verb+Brochure+''. Similarly, the + \fieldname{number} field can be used if this is considered + useful. (It is used in example 24 in the APA manual, see + below.) This seems quite rare to me, however. It should + certainly \emph{not} be used for ISBN numbers and the like. + + \item[\entryname{incollection}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + An article in a (usually edited) book, or other kind of larger + work, except a report, for which the \entryname{intechreport} + entry is used. The \fieldname{booktitle} field contains the + title of the whole collection (book). The \fieldname{type} + field is currently used to denote the type of article, as + with the \entryname{article} reference type, although in some + cases, it may be more naturally to let the \fieldname{type} + field contain the type of the whole work (e.g., CD). Therefore, + I may change this somewhat in future versions of \pkg{apacite}. + + \item[\entryname{techreport}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + A report. This may be a ``technical'' report such as published + by universities, or a report from government organizations or + private companies. The \fieldname{type} field can be used to + indicate what kind of report it is, e.g., + ``\verb+College Board Rep.+'' or ``\verb+{DHHS} Publication+''. + If the \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type + ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}+'' is used. (The \verb+\hbox{}+ + ensures that \TeX{} does not view the period as the end of a + sentence, which would insert too much space.) If no type + description should + be given, \verb+\bibnotype+ should be used as the contents of + the \fieldname{type} field. The \fieldname{number} field can + be used to give the report number. The organization that + published the report should be given in the \fieldname{institution} + field. + + \item[\entryname{intechreport}] \mbox{}\\ + An article in a (usually edited) report. This is more or less + a combination of \entryname{incollection} and + \entryname{techreport}. It uses the same fields as the former + to describe the article itself, except \fieldname{type}, e.g., + \fieldname{booktitle}, which is in this case the title of the + entire report, + and the same fields as the latter to describe the report. + In particular, the \fieldname{type}, \fieldname{number}, + and \fieldname{institution} fields are used for the report. + + \item[\entryname{lecture}] \mbox{}\\ + A paper presented at a meeting. According to the APA manual, + the year and month should be given, but \pkg{apacite} also + uses the \fieldname{day} field when available. + The \fieldname{symposium} field can be used for the + name of the symposium and the \fieldname{chair} field for the chair of + the meeting. The \fieldname{howpublished} field should be used to + indicate the occasion at which the paper was presented if the + \fieldname{symposium} field is empty, e.g., + ``\texttt{Paper presented at the meeting of the American + Professional Society on the Abuse of Children}''. + It can also be used to give additional information about + the symposium if the \fieldname{symposium} field is not empty. + + \item[\entryname{phdthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + A doctoral dissertation. The \fieldname{school} field is used + to denote the university for which the thesis was written. + The \fieldname{type} field can be used for the thesis type, + e.g., ``\verb+PhD thesis+''. If it is empty, the default type + is used, which is ``\verb+Unpublished doctoral dissertation+'' + or ``\verb+Doctoral dissertation+'', depending on whether + the \fieldname{journal} field is empty or not. + + If the thesis is abstracted in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts + International} or similar, then the \fieldname{journal}, + \fieldname{volume}, \fieldname{number}, and \fieldname{pages} fields + can be used as with journal articles. The \fieldname{year} field + should denote the year of the ``journal''. + The \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year + of the original thesis, even if it is the same as the year of the + abstract, provided that the original thesis is used, and not + the abstract. Then, the \fieldname{school} field should also + be used, and optionally the \fieldname{type} field. If only + the abstract is used, it should presumably be treated as a + journal article. + + + \item[\entryname{mastersthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + This is equivalent to the \entryname{phdthesis} type, except that + the default ``unpublished'' and ``published'' \fieldname{type}s are + ``\verb+Unpublished master's thesis+'' and + ``\verb+Master's thesis+''. + + \item[\entryname{unpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + For unpublished manuscripts and similarly ``obscure'' material. + The \fieldname{howpublished} field will typically be used to + indicate what kind of work is referred to (e.g., + ``\verb+Unpublished manuscript+''). The \fieldname{organization} + field can be used to denote the organization in which the document + was produced, e.g., ``\texttt{Johns Hopkins University, Center + for Social Organization of Schools}''. Note that the larger + organization should be given first and the department after that. + The address (city and state, etc., see the discussion of the + \fieldname{address} field in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below) + of the organization should be given in the \fieldname{address} + field, unless it is already mentioned in the name of the + organization. Presumably, if the organization is + ``\verb+University of Groningen+'', the city name ``Groningen'' + should not be given in the \fieldname{address} field, but + the country ``The Netherlands'' should. When both the + \fieldname{organization} and the \fieldname{address} field + are available, \pkg{apacite} formats these as + ``organization, address''. This is different from the + usual ``address: publisher'' form. This behavior cannot + explicitly be deduced from the 5th edition, nor from the + 4th edition, of the APA manual, but the 3rd edition + \cite{APAManual3} gives an explicit example (example 53, + p.~131): \citeA{APA-3rd-ed-ex53}. + + \item[\entryname{misc}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + For works that do not fit into the other categories, such as + motion pictures, cassette recordings, computer software, etc. + The \fieldname{type} field can be used to indicate the type + of work, and \pkg{apacite} recognizes a few specific types + that should be formatted a little differently, see the discussion + of the \fieldname{type} field below. If the \fieldname{address} + and \fieldname{publisher} fields are available, the address and + publisher part is formatted as with books. The \entryname{unpublished} + and \entryname{misc} types are very similar, but there are some + differences. For example, \entryname{unpublished} uses the + \entryname{organization} field and \entryname{misc} uses the + \fieldname{publisher} field, and this part is formatted differently. + Further, the \entryname{unpublished} type requires + \fieldname{author}, \fieldname{editor}, \fieldname{title}, or + \fieldname{type}, whereas with \fieldname{misc}, + \fieldname{howpublished} takes the first position if these fields + are all empty. Finally, as briefly indicated above and discussed + in more detail below, \entryname{misc} recognizes some special + types in the \fieldname{type} field. + + \item[\entryname{literal}] \mbox{}\\ + If the other categories do not format the item correctly, this + category can be used. The \fieldname{text} field is copied literally + to the bibliography. The \fieldname{firstkey}, \fieldname{key}, + \fieldname{year}, and possibly \fieldname{originalyear} and + \fieldname{translator} fields are necessary to get correct + in-text citations. However, I have never needed to use this + entry type and I think that \entryname{misc} should also + be able to format the entry correctly. Furthermore, the + correct placement of \entryname{literal} references in the + reference list (alphabetizing, sorting), may be problematic. + + \item[\entryname{manual}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + This is treated as a \entryname{misc}, except that when the + \fieldname{type} field is empty, it is assumed to be a + \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}. See also the description of + the \fieldname{type} field below. + + \item[\entryname{booklet}\LC] + \item[\entryname{inbook}\LC] + \item[\entryname{inproceedings}\LC] + \item[\entryname{proceedings}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + These categories are defined by all standard citation styles. They + are, however, not needed for the examples in the APA manual. For + compatibility, however, they are included and defined as follows: + \entryname{booklet} = \entryname{proceedings} = + \entryname{misc}; \entryname{inbook} = \entryname{inproceedings} = + \entryname{incollection}. \citeA[p.~230]{KoDa04} also mention + \entryname{conference} as being the same as \entryname{inproceedings}; + for compatibility, this is now supported in \pkg{apacite}. +\end{description} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{Fields} +\label{subsec:fields} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The following fields can be used to describe a reference in the +\fname{.bib} file: +\begin{description} + + \item[\fieldname{address}\LC] \mbox{}\\% + The address (usually the city and state or country) of the + publisher, school, institution, or organization that published + the item or at which the item was produced. The APA manual + requires that the state or territory of a U.S.-city must be given + in the official two-letter U.S. Postal Services form. Only for + a specific list of 17 specific cities that are ``well known + for publishing'' can (must) the state and/or country + description be omitted. + + \item[\fieldname{annote}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + This is used in some annotated bibliography + styles. It is not used by \pkg{apacite}, but no warning + is given either. It is thus simply ignored. + + \item[\fieldname{author}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The author(s) of the work. This may also be a corporate + author when applicable, but some specific measures must + then be taken to prevent the corporate name from being + interpreted as a first name and last name + (such as ``Association, A. P.''): +\begin{verbatim} + author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}}, +\end{verbatim} + It is important to surround the \cmd{\bibcorporate}\marg{Author} + by an additional pair of braces. Otherwise, \BibTeX{} sorts + the entry as if its name was ``Bibcorporate\marg{Author}''. + Section~\ref{sec:xmpl} contains more examples. + + As discussed in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation, + multiple authors must be separated by the word \verb+and+, + and each author's name can either be given in the form + ``\opt{firstnames}\verb+ +\opt{lastnames}'' or + ``\opt{lastnames}\verb+, +\opt{firstnames}''. However, + ``von'' parts and ``junior'' parts complicate issues + a bit. See the examples and the discussion of them. + + I would generally give the full first name(s) in the \fname{.bib} + file, even though the APA manual only requires initials, + because other styles require full first name(s) and + \pkg{apacite} abbreviates to initials automatically. + I have done this only occasionally with the examples, + because the APA manual only gives the initials. + Therefore, I have only provided first names with a few + examples for which I knew the authors' first names. + + If there are more than 6 authors, the APA manual requires + that the first 6 should be named in the reference list, + followed by ``et al.''. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} uses + only the names of the first 6 authors, and inserts an + ``et al.\hbox{}'' when applicable. Therefore, in the \fname{.bib} + file, the first 6 (or more) authors may be given (separated by + ``\verb+and+''), followed by ``\verb+and others+''. This phrase + is recognized by \pkg{apacite}. + It is, however, better to give all authors in + the \fname{.bib} file, so that each style can select its + own truncation number. + + \item[\fieldname{booktitle}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The title of the larger work, typically book, but sometimes + something else, like a report, in which the referenced item + (article) was published. + + \item[\fieldname{chair}] \mbox{}\\ + The chair(s) of a symposium or meeting. Used for lectures. + It is formatted the same way as editors. + + \item[\fieldname{chapter}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The chapter number if the referenced item is a chapter in + a larger collection. Typically used if the referenced work + is a chapter in an internet document. If the collection is + a book, page numbers (in the \fieldname{pages} field) + should be used instead according to the APA rules. + + \item[\fieldname{crossref}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The \pkg{apacite} package does not recognize this field, + because the APA manual does not discuss explicit + cross-referencing. If the referenced work is a chapter + (article) in an edited book, all relevant information + should be given in the reference list as part of the + information about the referenced chapter, not as, e.g., + ``In Wainrib (1992)''. If several chapters from the + book edited by Wainrib are referenced, the same information + about this book is given with each referenced chapter, + and the work itself is not a separate entry in the reference + list (unless it is explicitly referred to). + + However, the \fieldname{crossref} field + \emph{can} be used, as part of standard \BibTeX{} usage. + Missing fields for the referenced work are then copied from + the cross-referenced entry, which must come \emph{after} + the referring entry in the \fname{.bib} file. If you use + this, remember to put the title of the book (also) in the + \fieldname{booktitle} field, because the \fieldname{title} + field of the referring entry is not empty (it contains + the chapter title). + + I have not tested cross-referencing in detail, so I do not + know whether it behaves well (i.e., complies with the implicit + or explicit APA rules) under various circumstances. + Therefore, I do not recommend using it without thorough + testing. + + \item[\fieldname{day}] \mbox{}\\ + The day of the month on which the referenced item was published, + produced, or presented. Mainly used for articles in daily or + weekly magazines or newspapers, for lectures (although the + APA manual only specifies the month), and electronic documents. + + \item[\fieldname{edition}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The edition of the book or report. Traditionally, this is of the + form ``1st'', ``2nd'', ``3rd'', etc., or ``Rev.'' for a revised edition. + This form is still supported, but \pkg{apacite} now also supports + the form in which only the number is given: ``1'', ``2'', etc. + If \pkg{apacite} detects that only a number is given, it inserts + ``\cmd{\PrintCardinal}\marg{number}'' in the \fname{.bbl} file. + This \LaTeX{} function converts the number again to ``1st'', etc. + The advantage of this is that the same bibliography database can be + used for documents in different languages. At least in principle, + because language-specific versions of \cmd{\PrintCardinal} have + not yet been implemented in \pkg{apacite}. + + \item[\fieldname{editor}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The editor(s) of a book, report, or special issue of a journal. + In the examples, this field is also ``misused'' for the + producer of a television series. + + \item[\fieldname{englishtitle}] \mbox{}\\ + The English translation of the title of an item with a non-English + title. The APA manual requires that if the referenced work has a + non-English title, an English translation should be given as well. For + an article in a journal with a non-English name or in a book with a + non-English title, the journal name or book title should not be + translated or put in this field, only the title of the referenced work + itself must be translated. Because, as of version + \APACversiondate{2005/06/01}, \pkg{apacite} contains some support of + other languages for the main document (see + section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}), this field needs rethinking, which + will be deferred to a future version (but, as always, suggestions + are welcome). + + \item[\fieldname{firstkey}] \mbox{}\\ + The \fieldname{firstkey} field, if not empty, is used as + ``author'' for the first citation to an item. Subsequent citations + then use the \fieldname{key} field. This can be used if there is + no author or editor field that can be used for citations, or in + certain cases with corporate authors, where the citation in the + text uses an abbreviation of the author's name for second and + subsequent citations, where the abbreviation is introduced in the + first citation. It can also be used to ``trick'' the system + in difficult cases. See also \fieldname{key}. + + \item[\fieldname{howpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + A description of how something was ``published''. For example, + ``Unpublished manuscript'' or ``Paper presented at the meeting + of the American Professional Society on the Abuse of Children''. + Also used for more retrieval information about electronic + documents, e.g., ``Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the + PsycARTICLES database'', or +\begin{verbatim} + howpublished = {Retrieved August 24, 2000, from Columbia University, + Institute for Learning Technologies Web site: + \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/ + publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}} +\end{verbatim} + However, if the retrieval information consists only of a + date and/or a URL, it is better to use the \fieldname{lastchecked} + and \fieldname{url} fields for this and let \pkg{apacite} + format this information. See also the \fieldname{note} field + for an alternative to the \fieldname{howpublished} field. + + \item[\fieldname{institution}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The institution, university, or company that published a + (technical) report. + + \item[\fieldname{journal}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The journal, magazine, newspaper, etc.{} in which an + article, a review, or an abstract of a thesis was published. + + \item[\fieldname{key}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + See \fieldname{firstkey}. The \fieldname{key} field, if not + empty, is used for second and subsequent citations, or all citations + if \fieldname{firstkey} is missing. If \fieldname{author} is + empty and \fieldname{editor} is empty or can not be used as + author (e.g., in \entryname{incollection}), the \fieldname{key} + field may be necessary to obtain a useful citation. This is + so, because the APA manual requires an abbreviation of the + title as in-text citation, and the abbreviation must be + sensible. In the current version, \pkg{apacite} uses the + whole title if \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} are missing. + Therefore, if the title is considered too long to use in citations, + the user must provide an abbreviation in the \fieldname{key} field. + Furthermore, the user must then also define the formatting: + If the key is used for a difficult kind of author (e.g., + corporate author), it should be formatted as an author, + i.e., in plain text, with names capitalized. + If the key is used for an abbreviation of an article + title, it should be in plain text, with major words capitalized + (unlike in the reference list), and between double quotes + (`` and ''; also unlike in the reference list). + If the key is used for an abbreviation of a book title, it + should be emphasized, with major words capitalized + (unlike in the reference list), but not between quotes. + + In a field in the \fname{.bib} file that is also + used for the citations, such as the \fieldname{key} field, + formatting through, e.g., +\begin{verbatim} + key = {{\itshape Text}}, + key = {{\em Text\/}}, +\end{verbatim} + can be done (note the extra pair of braces!), but the + seemingly more logical variations +\begin{verbatim} + key = {\textit{Text}}, + key = {{\textit{Text}}}, + key = {\emph{Text}}, + key = {{\emph{Text}}}, +\end{verbatim} + do not work. + However, it is generally preferable to use as less explicit + formatting in the \fname{.bib} files as possible, because this + decreases the possibilities of successfully using the + same \fname{.bib} file with other styles. The following works + excellent: +\begin{verbatim} + key = {{\APACcitebtitle{Text}}}, +\end{verbatim} + where the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} macro recognizes that the argument + should be formatted as a booktitle (i.e., in italics according to the + APA rules). This macro, and its companion \cmd{\APACciteatitle} for + article title formatting, are used by \pkg{apacite} if the + \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} fields are missing, + but can also be used by the user. Note that if you use such a + \fname{.bib} file with another style, you have to provide + definitions of these macros yourself (which can be copied from + the \pkg{apacite} source code). + + \emph{Warning:} the \fieldname{key} field, which acts + as a kind of pseudo-author, should not be confused with the + (citation) \opt{key} that is used to match citations with + entries in a \fname{.bib} file. + + \item[\fieldname{lastchecked}] \mbox{}\\ + The date on which a web page was last visited. Only used in + combination with the \fieldname{url} field. Currently, + \pkg{apacite} does not contain language-specific code to + dissect this date, but copies its contents literally to the + \fname{.bbl} file. Hence, if you intend to use the same + bibliography database for documents in different languages, + you may have to use a self-defined command for this. You can + use the \pkg{apacite} commands \cmd{\APACrefYearMonthDay} + and \cmd{\APACmonth} as templates for this. I will probably + provide such a facility in a future version of \pkg{apacite}. + + \item[\fieldname{month}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The month something was published. Mainly used for + magazine or newspaper articles, lectures, and electronic documents. + Use the month macros \verb+jan+, \verb+feb+, etc. These are + predefined strings in \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst}, + reverting to \verb+{\APACmonth{01}}+'', etc., with \verb+winter+, + \verb+spring+, \verb+summer+, and \verb+fall+ being 13--16. The + \cmd{\APACmonth} command translates the numbers to the month or + season names. This system allows language-specific behavior at + the \LaTeX{} stage, although \cmd{\APACmonth} has not yet been + defined for non-English languages. This will be done in a future + version of \pkg{apacite}. For the moment, you can easily do this + yourself, using the default in \fname{apacite.sty} as a template. + If desired, the macros can be overridden by using lines like +\begin{verbatim} +@string{jan = "januari"} +\end{verbatim} + at the top of your \fname{.bib} file, but it seems better to redefine + the \cmd{\APACmonth} command in your \LaTeX{} document. + + \item[\fieldname{note}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + A note. This puts additional information between parentheses + at the end of a reference list entry. In the examples from + the APA manual, it is used for NTIS No., ERIC No., and UMI No., + and for notes about how to obtain the work + (``Available from \opt{organization}, \opt{full address}''). + If however, the work has been obtained from the internet + or from an ``aggregated database'', then the + \fieldname{howpublished} or \fieldname{url} field should be + used, because it should not be between parentheses then. + + Finally, the \fieldname{note} field is used to give the + recording date (i.e., year) of a song when this is different + from the date (year) of copyright. The latter should be + put in the \fieldname{year} field. + + Do not use the \fieldname{note} field to denote the original + publication of a reprint or translation, because the + \fieldname{originalyear} field must be used in those cases to + obtain the correct citation in the text \cite<e.g.,>{ex39}. + + \item[\fieldname{number}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The number of a journal issue or a report. This can be quite + complex, for example, ``\verb+PRM~92-01+'', or + ``\verb+3, Pt.~2+'', or ``\verb+1, Serial No.~231+''. + These latter examples imply that the generality (language and + style independence) of the \fname{.bib} file is somewhat lost. + Furthermore, if the journal paginates by year and not by issue, + the issue number should not be mentioned at all (except when + referring to a whole special issue). Of course, \pkg{apacite} + does not know whether the journal paginates by issue or by year. + If the \fieldname{number} field is available, \pkg{apacite} + simply assumes that it should be included. It is the user's + responsibility to ensure that this is indeed the case. + + \item[\fieldname{organization}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + Used for the \entryname{unpublished} reference type to denote + the organization in which the unpublished work was produced. + + \item[\fieldname{originaladdress}] + \item[\fieldname{originalbooktitle}] + \item[\fieldname{originaledition}] + \item[\fieldname{originaleditor}] + \item[\fieldname{originaljournal}] + \item[\fieldname{originalnumber}] + \item[\fieldname{originalpages}] + \item[\fieldname{originalpublisher}] + \item[\fieldname{originalvolume}] + \item[\fieldname{originalyear}] \mbox{}\\ + These (\fieldname{original*-}) fields have the same + meaning as their counterparts without the ``original'' prefix, + except that they refer to the book or journal in which the + work was originally published. This can be used in referring to + translations or reprints of articles in journals or books. If the + original work is a book or other ``standalone'' work, + only the \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used. If the + original work is a (PhD or Master's) thesis that is also abstracted + in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts International}, + \emph{Masters Abstracts International}, or comparable, the + \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year + of the dissertation and the \fieldname{year} field to + denote the year of publication of the abstract, even if they + are the same. + + \item[\fieldname{pages}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The (inclusive) page numbers of the article that is referred to, + in the journal or book in which it was published. If a range of + pages is given (which is usually the case), an en-dash should + be used: ``\verb+29--43+''. Other styles sometimes allow a + single hyphen (``\verb+29-43+''), which is then automatically + formatted as an en-dash (``29--43''), rather than as a hyphen + (``29-43''), but I have encountered situations, such as software + manuals (LISREL) and reports for the U.S. Government, in which + the page number was of the form ``II-3'', + meaning page~3 of chapter~2. In such a situation, you may + get page numbers like ``II-1--II-15'', where the distinction + between a hyphen and an en-dash becomes important. Therefore, + \pkg{apacite} does not perform such automatic transformations. + + \item[\fieldname{publisher}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The publisher of the item. Primarily used for books. + + \item[\fieldname{school}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The school or university for which a PhD thesis or + master's thesis was written. + + \item[\fieldname{series}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + Not used, although the APA manual has a rule for series. + If you refer to a volume in a series, the series title, + volume number, and volume title should be joined into + a two-part title , e.g., \emph{Handbook of child psychology: + Vol.~4. Socialization, personality, and social development}, + see ex.~36. In \pkg{apacite} this whole part must be put in + the \fieldname{title} or \fieldname{booktitle} field + (whichever is appropriate). + + For a long time, I have intended to support the + \fieldname{series} field to allow disentangling such + situations. However, in the end, I have decided not to + do this. The reason for this is that, according to my + interpretation, the meaning of ``series'' in the APA manual + is quite different from the meaning of the \fieldname{series} + field, as intended by Oren Patashnik (the author of \BibTeX{} + and the original style files). Many books are published in + some sort of series. For example, my book with Tom Wansbeek + \cite{WaMe00}, is vol.~37 in the \emph{Advanced Textbooks + in Economics} series, of which the series editors are + C.~J. Bliss and M.~D. Intriligator. The intention of the + \fieldname{series} field is to generate a reference list entry + like +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\begin{list}{\relax}{\labelsep=0em% + \parsep=0pt% + \itemsep=0pt plus .3pt\relax% + \leftmargin=2.5em% + \itemindent=-2.5em}% +\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000 +\sfcode`\.=1000\relax +\item +Wansbeek, T., \& Meijer, E. +\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em +(2000). +\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em +\Bem{Measurement error and latent variables in econometrics} +(Advanced Textbooks in Economics No.~37). +\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em +Amsterdam: North-Holland. +\end{list} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + In economics (and often in psychology, I guess), mentioning + the series usually does not add much relevant information, + and it is therefore typically omitted. I think this is how + the APA intends it as well. However, in computer science, it + is often very convenient, because certain series, like Springer's + \emph{Lecture Notes in Computer Science} (LNCS) have a certain + status of their own, and researchers know how to find volumes + in this series. + + In my interpretation, the APA ``series'' refers to a single + multivolume work with separate editors for the constituent + volumes, but with a series editor who initiates the whole + series. In the example from the APA manual, the + \emph{Handbook of child psychology} is not a loose collection + of separate books by different authors, but a combined effort + managed by the series editor to give an overview of the field. + In this case, the series editor may be considered the primary + author and it makes sense to have the different volumes of the + series together in the reference list. With my book with + Tom Wansbeek, the series editors act more like journal editors, + and different volumes of the series are unrelated books that + do not need to be gathered together in the reference list. + It would make no sense to cite this book as + ``Bliss, Intriligator, Wansbeek, \& Meijer (2000)''. + + Because in my interpretation, the usual meaning of the + \fieldname{series} field should not be included in the + reference list according to the APA rules, \pkg{apacite} + ignores the \fieldname{series} field. Perhaps I'll + implement the APA manual ``series'' rules by introducing + a \fieldname{volumetitle} field, but this will further reduce + compatibility with other citation styles. + + \item[\fieldname{symposium}] \mbox{}\\ + The name of the symposium or meeting at which a + lecture was given. This is typically used for the + construction ``In \opt{chair} (Chair), \opt{symposium}'', + see ex.~51. I have never used it myself, however, + I always use the ``Paper presented \dots'' form, + which puts this information in the \fieldname{howpublished} + field. + + \item[\fieldname{text}] \mbox{}\\ + Used for items of type \entryname{literal}. This field contains + the complete literal text to be used in the bibliography. + I've never used it. + + \item[\fieldname{title}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The title of the work. + + \item[\fieldname{translator}] \mbox{}\\ + The translator of a book or article. This should + be formatted in the same way as \fieldname{author} and + \fieldname{editor}. If the \fieldname{translator} and + \fieldname{editor} fields are identical, they are + formatted as if there were only an editor, except that the + editor receives the suffix ``(Ed. \& Trans.)'' instead of + just ``(Ed.)'', or similarly if there is more than 1 editor. + + \item[\fieldname{type}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The type of \entryname{phdthesis} (e.g., + ``Doctoral dissertation''), type of \entryname{article} + (e.g., ``Letter to the editor''), type of \entryname{techreport} + (e.g., ``DHHS Publication''), type of \entryname{book} + (e.g., ``Brochure''), type of \entryname{misc} + (e.g., ``Cassette recording''), and so forth. + + With a review (which is typically an \entryname{article}), + the \fieldname{type} field contains a lot of information + and formatting, e.g.: +\begin{verbatim} + type = {Review of the book {\APACcitebtitle{Life in the middle: + Psychological and social development in middle age}}}, +\end{verbatim} + where I used the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} command introduced above in + the discussion of the \fieldname{key} field. + + In one of the APA manual examples, I used the \fieldname{type} + field to give a description of the subject of an unpublished + raw data file (``Auditory response latencies in rat auditory + cortex''), leaving the \fieldname{title} field blank. + + For most reference types, if the \fieldname{type} field + is missing, it is simply ignored and no type description + is given. For a \entryname{techreport}, however, if the + \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type + (``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}'') is inserted. In ex.~42 of the APA manual, + a report without a type description is given. To make it + possible to format a report successfully without a + type description, \pkg{apacite} recognizes +\begin{verbatim} + type = {\bibnotype}, +\end{verbatim} + indicating that there should be no type description. + + Another special purpose use of the \fieldname{type} + field is for a computer program, software, programming + language and/or manual. These are put into a \entryname{misc} + entry, but unlike other \entryname{misc} types (such as + motion pictures) the titles of these types should not + be italicized. This is now recognized by \pkg{apacite} + in the following way: When referring to a computer program, + software, programming language and/or manual, you should + use the \entryname{misc} reference type with + one of the following commands in the \fieldname{type} field:\\ + \cmd{\bibcomputerprogram},\\ + \cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual},\\ + \cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual},\\ + \cmd{\bibcomputersoftware},\\ + \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual},\\ + \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}, or\\ + \cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}.\\ + Using any of these commands as type designator of a + \entryname{misc} entry ensures that the title is not italicized, + as required. The \entryname{manual} entry is now equal to + \entryname{misc} with default type \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual} + if the \fieldname{type} field is empty. + + Similarly, if you refer to a message that has been posted to + a newsgroup, internet forum, etc., you should use the + \entryname{misc} reference type with \cmd{\bibmessage} as + \fieldname{type} field. + + \item[\fieldname{url}] \mbox{}\\ + The web address of a web page. Used if the cited document (or + other work) is a web page or was obtained from a website. + + \item[\fieldname{volume}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The volume or volumes of the referenced book(s) or + of the book in which the referenced article was published, + or the volume of the journal (magazine, newspaper, \ldots) + in which the referenced article was published. + + \item[\fieldname{year}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + The year in which the referenced item was published, or + if it was not published, the year in which it was written + or presented. For manuscripts or books that are accepted + for publication but have not yet been published, ``in press'' + should be used according to the APA rules. The best way to do + this is to use the ``\cmd{\BIP}'' command, which can be redefined + by the user if the language or editorial style requires + something else than ``in press''. Furthermore, \cmd{\BIP} + is recognized by \pkg{apacite} and treated a little differently, + because for multiple ``in press'' references with the same + author(s), a hyphen (``-'') should be inserted between the + ``year'' (i.e., ``in press'') and the ``a'', ``b'', etc., that + follow it to distinguish the works, whereas this hyphen must + be omitted if the ``year'' is an ordinary year (1991a, 1991b). + + If no date is explicitly given in (or on) the referenced work, + a ``n.d.'' (no date) should be given as year description. + For this, \pkg{apacite} supports the \cmd{\bibnodate} + command. This sometimes leads to different formatting as well, + e.g., by referencing a translation of a work of which there + is no original date. Then the \fieldname{originalyear} + field should be \cmd{\bibnodate} and the \fieldname{year} field + is then, e.g., \verb+1931+. If the \fieldname{translator} + field is not empty, the citation in the text is then formatted + as, e.g., ``\citeA{3.100-2}''. +\end{description} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{Overriding the default sorting orders} +\label{subsec:sort} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +Occasionally, it may be necessary to override \BibTeX's default sorting. +For example, the way \BibTeX{} handles accents and other nonstandard +characters, which is typically fine for documents in English, may +not be acceptable for documents in other languages: +``\verb+\"{u}+'' is treated as ``\verb+u+'', ``\verb+\ss+'' is treated as +``\verb+ss+'', and ``\verb+\ae+'' is treated as ``\verb+ae+''. +In non-English languages this sorting may not be appropriate and one +may desire that ``\verb+\"{u}+'' is treated as ``\verb+ue+''. +Numerous problems are caused by different conventions in different languages. +Some examples are given in the documentation of the \textsf{amsrefs} +package. Non-latin scripts (Greek, Hebrew, Arabic, Chinese, etc.) may not be +handled correctly as well. I am not able to judge this, nor does it seem +to be a problem that must be solved in \textsf{apacite}. It has been +announced that \BibTeX~1.0, when it will be released, will support +non-English languages as well. + +An issue that occurs in English (APA) documents is that, according to +the APA, numbers should be sorted as if they were spelled in words: +``2003'' must be sorted as if it says ``\mbox{twothousandandthree}''; +see example~4.04 in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. + +Overriding the default sorting order can be done by using the +\cmd{\APACSortNoop} command in the \fname{.bib} file. This is a \LaTeX{} +command provided by \pkg{apacite}. It has one mandatory argument, but it +outputs nothing. However, \BibTeX{} does not know this and uses the +contents of this command to sort the entry. For example, +\begin{verbatim} + author = {M{\"{u}}ller, Gerd}, +\end{verbatim} +is sorted as ``\verb*+muller g+'', whereas +\begin{verbatim} + author = {{\APACSortNoop{Mueller}}M{\"{u}}ller, Gerd}, +\end{verbatim} +is sorted as ``\verb*+muellermuller g+'', which typically results +in the correct ordering. In the typeset document, both look like +``M{\"{u}}ller''. Note that the extra pair of braces around the +\cmd{\APACSortNoop} command are necessary to suggest to \BibTeX{} +that it is an ``accent''. The specification +\begin{verbatim} + author = {\APACSortNoop{Mueller}M{\"{u}}ller, Gerd}, +\end{verbatim} +is sorted as ``\verb*+apacsortnoopmuellermuller g+'', which is +incorrect. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Customization} +\label{sec:custom} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The description in the previous sections, with the exception of +section~\ref{sec:options}, primarily discussed the default behavior of +\pkg{apacite}. However, as mentioned in the introduction, in addition to the +options, \pkg{apacite} offers many possibilities for customization. Most +punctuation used in the citations and reference list are implemented through +\LaTeX{} commands instead of explicit symbols. Consequently, the user can +fine-tune the behavior of \pkg{apacite} by redefining these commands, through +\cmd{\renewcommand} after \pkg{apacite} has been loaded. Analogously, most +fixed texts, like ``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}'' and ``Eds.\hbox{}'' are implemented +through \LaTeX{} commands as well, and can similarly be changed by the user. +The commands used by \pkg{apacite} are discussed in this section. Of course, +the defaults are based on the rules of the APA manual. + +Some commands, predominantly punctuation, are used both in citations and in +the reference list. If you want their definitions in citations to be different +from their definitions in the reference list, you can simply redefine their +definitions before starting the bibliography. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{Punctuation and small formatting issues} +\label{sec:custom-punct} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The following punctuation commands are provided and used for +the citations and reference list. +\begin{description} + \item[\cmd{\BAstyle}] This defines the text style of the authors + (or whatever takes their place) for an in-text citation. It + defaults to nothing: The authors use the same fonts as the + text surrounding it. Introduced because some journals use + a different style. For example, \emph{Statistica Neerlandica} + uses small-caps, so for that journal, you would define +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape} +\end{verbatim} + Do not use the \cmd{\textsc}-type commands, but \cmd{\scshape}, + \cmd{\bfseries}, etc. The \cmd{\BAstyle} command is used for + the author-part by the citation commands + \cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\shortcite}, \cmd{\fullcite}, + \cmd{\citeA}, \cmd{\shortciteA}, \cmd{\fullciteA}, + \cmd{\citeNP}, \cmd{\shortciteNP}, and \cmd{\fullciteNP}. + + \item[\cmd{\BAastyle}] This is the same as \cmd{\BAstyle}, except that + \cmd{\BAastyle} is used for \cmd{\citeauthor}, \cmd{\shortciteauthor}, + and \cmd{\fullciteauthor}. + + \item[\cmd{\BBOP}] Open parenthesis, used for parentheses opening + a citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973)'' or ``Rao (1973)'', and the + year in the reference list, as in ``Rao, C. R. (1973).'' + Default is ``\verb+(+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BBCP}] The corresponding closing parenthesis. + Default is ``\verb+)+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BAP}] This command is inserted after the prefix and before + the first citation in a \cmd{\cite} command. It defaults to an + ordinary space. + + \item[\cmd{\BBAA}] Last ``and'' between authors in a citation + between parentheses and in the reference list, as in + ``(Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)'' or ``Mooijaart, A., \& + Bentler, P. M. (1986).''. Default is ``\verb+\&+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BBAB}] Last ``and'' between authors in a citation in text, + as in ``Mooijaart and Bentler (1986)''. Default is ``\verb+and+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BBAY}] Punctuation between author(s) and year in a citation + between parentheses, as in ``(Rao, 1973)''. Default is ``\verb+, +''. + + \item[\cmd{\BBYY}] \label{cmd:BBYY} + Punctuation between two subsequent years, if two works + by the same author(s) are referenced in a single citation command, + as in ``(Rao, 1965, 1973)'' or ``Rao (1965, 1973)''. + Default is ``\verb+, +''. + + \item[\cmd{\BBC}] Punctuation between multiple cites, as in + ``(Rao, 1973; Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)''. + Default is ``\verb+; +''. + + \item[\cmd{\BBN}] Punctuation before a note (postfix) after + a citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973, chap.~2)''. + Default is ``\verb+, +''. + + \item[\cmd{\BBOQ}] Opening quote for an article title in the + reference list, as in + ``\flqq Random polynomial factor analysis.\frqq'' Default is + the empty string: no quotes used. + + \item[\cmd{\BBCQ}] Closing quote for an article title in the + reference list. Default is the empty string. + (The \pkg{theapa} package required the closing period to be part + of the closing quote, but this has been + changed, because the period must be left out if title comments, + such as type, English translation of non-English title, or + translator follow the title.) + + \item[\cmd{\BPBI}] Period between initials. Default is ``\verb+.~+'', + i.e., a period and a non-breaking space, as required by the APA + manual. However, many users prefer removing or reducing the space + and in some non-English speaking countries this is customary. This + can be achieved by redefining this command to, e.g., ``\verb+.+'' + (no space) or ``\verb+.\,+'' (small space). This command cannot + be used to remove periods altogether, because there is still a + period at the end. I.e., redefining it as an empty string gives + awkward results like ``Bentler, PM., \& Mooijaart, A.''. + + \item[\cmd{\BHBI}] Hyphen between initials. Introduced for analogy with + \cmd{\BPBI} and used for authors who have two or more first names + with a hyphen between them, e.g., Jean-Paul Sartre. Default is + ``\verb+.-+'', i.e., a period and a hyphen. Unlike \cmd{\BPBI}, + I think this one will not be changed often, although \BibTeX{} + suppresses hyphens when it suppresses spaces between initials + as well, so there are people who have different preferences. + (Hence, \pkg{apacite} partly bypasses the standard \BibTeX{} + formatting functions to make this work.) + + \item[\cmd{\BCBT}] Comma between authors in the reference section when + the number of authors is two, as in + ``Mooijaart, A., \& Bentler, P.~M. (1986).'' The comma + after the ``A.'' is this one. Default is ``\verb+,+''. + The APA manual requires it, but other styles leave out this + comma. In such a case, you would redefine this ``comma'' to + be the empty string: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{} +\end{verbatim} + + \item[\cmd{\BCBL}] Comma before the last author (for 3 or more authors) + in a citation and in the reference section, as in ``(Gill, Murray, + \& Wright, 1981)'' or ``Gill, P.~E., Murray, W., \& Wright, M.~H. + (1981).'' Default is ``\verb+,+''. The APA manual requires it, + which is standard U.S. usage, but other styles, particularly + European, such as British English, leave out this comma. Again, + in such a case, you would redefine this ``comma'' to + be the empty string. + + \item[\cmd{\BAnd}] This is the ``and'' that is used in the reference list + if someone is both editor and translator: + ``In J. Strachey (Ed. \& Trans),''. Default is ``\verb+\&+''. + + \item[\cmd{\theBibCnt}] If there are multiple citations with the same + author and year, a letter should be added to the year to distinguish + the references. For example, one may refer to two or more articles + by J. Smith published in 1982. They should be referred to as + ``Smith (1982a)'', ``Smith (1982b)'', and so forth. To accomplish + this, the counter \verb+BibCnt+ is defined in \fname{apacite.sty}. + The \cmd{\theBibCnt} command defines how the value of \verb+BibCnt+ + is formatted. The default is ``\verb+\alph{BibCnt}+''. To + emphasize (italicize) the ``a'', ``b'', etc., you can redefine + this as +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}} +\end{verbatim} + (This presumably works better than ``\verb+\emph{\alph{BibCnt}}+''.) + To control this behavior, redefining the \cmd{\theBibCnt} command + should normally be sufficient. However, the complete formatting + commands are \cmd{\BCnt}, \cmd{\BCntIP}, and \cmd{\BCntND}. The + second of these is for ``in press'' works, which need an extra hyphen + between ``in press'' and the ``a'' and ``b'' suffixes. The third is + similar, for works without a date. Their default definitions + in \fname{apacite.sty} are +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\theBibCnt} +\newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt} +\newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt} +\end{verbatim} + + \item[\cmd{\APACciteatitle}] The formatting of the title of an + article (or similar work) + when used as a citation in the text when no author or editor + is available for that purpose. Its default definition + in \fname{apacite.sty} is +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''} +\end{verbatim} + i.e., the title is put between double quotes. + + \item[\cmd{\APACcitebtitle}] The formatting of the title of a book + (or other independent work) + when used as a citation in the text when no author or editor + is available for that purpose. Its default definition + in \fname{apacite.sty} is +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}} +\end{verbatim} + i.e., the title is emphasized (in italics) but not put between + double quotes. + + \item[\cmd{\APACmetastar}] The asterisk that precedes an item in the + bibliography to denote that it is included in the meta-analysis. + The default value is ``\verb+\ensuremath{{}^\ast}+'', which + prints as ``\APACmetastar''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibnewpage}] If the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option + is chosen, this command is included before the bibliography. + Its default definition is \cmd{\clearpage}, but \fname{apa.cls} + uses a similar construction with its \pkgoption{man} option + through \cmd{\newpage}. + See \citeA[p.~215]{LaTeXbook} or \citeA[p.~37]{KoDa04} for the + differences between \cmd{\clearpage} and \cmd{\newpage}. + + \item[\cmd{\bibliographytypesize}] This command is used before + the reference list, but after the section or chapter heading. + It is intended for the font size of the reference list: + For \citeA{WaMe00}, I defined it as \cmd{\small} (and even then + the reference list took up 34 pages). The default value is + \cmd{\normalsize}. + + \item[\cmd{\bibleftmargin}] This gives the indentation of the second + and subsequent lines of a reference list entry, relative to the + usual left margin. It is not a proper command, but a + ``skip'' (rubber length), which means that it cannot be changed by + \cmd{\renewcommand}, but by \cmd{\setlength}. Its default + value is \verb+2.5em+. + + \item[\cmd{\bibindent}] This gives the indentation of the first + line of a reference list entry, relative to the second line. + It is also a ``skip''. Its default value is \verb+-\bibleftmargin+, + which means that the first line starts at the original left margin, + and the second and subsequent lines are indented by 2.5em. + + \item[\cmd{\bibitemsep}] This gives the vertical separation + between two reference list entries. It is also a ``skip'', with + default value ``\verb+\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax+'', i.e., 0pt, + but it may be stretched a little to fill the page nicely. + This is an old (Plain \TeX) style definition, I will probably + change that in a next version. If you want to change it, + e.g., to get a blank line between reference list entries, + you can use +\begin{verbatim} +\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip} +\end{verbatim} + \item[\cmd{\bibparsep}] This gives the vertical separation + between two paragraphs in the same reference list entry. Such a + situation does not occur in the default setup, so it is not + used, but it is conceivable that certain customizations lead + to its use. It is a ``skip'' with default value 0pt. +\end{description} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{Labels} +\label{subsec:labels} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +There are many specific pieces of text that can be put into the reference +list or a citation by \pkg{apacite}. Here, these pieces are called +\emph{labels}. Almost all of these are to some extent language-specific, and +sometimes style-specific even within the same language. Therefore, they are +implemented through \LaTeX{} commands, so that users can easily change them. +In this section, these commands and their purposes are described, and their +(U.S.\ English) defaults are given. Section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} below will +discuss how these commands are changed if another language is used. + +The following label commands are used: +\begin{description} + \item[\cmd{\bibmessage}] This is the first of 9 specific type + commands that are recognized by \pkg{apacite}. If you + define the \fieldname{type} field of a \entryname{misc} + entry as ``\cmd{\bibmessage}'', the formatting of the + entry is changed (e.g., the title is not italicized), + see the discussion of the \fieldname{type} field in + section~\ref{subsec:fields} above. This one is used for + messages in newsgroups, internet forums, etc. + Default is ``\verb+Msg+''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogram}] + Default is ``\verb+Computer program+''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}] + Default is ``\verb+Computer program manual+''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}] + Default is ``\verb+Computer program and manual+''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftware}] + Default is ``\verb+Computer software+''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}] + Default is ``\verb+Computer software manual+''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}] + Default is ``\verb+Computer software and manual+''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}] + Default is ``\verb+Programming language+''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibnotype}] + This one is a bit different from the previous 8. It is used for + \entryname{techreport} entries to indicate that the type specifier + should be suppressed. Its default value is the empty string, but this + will not have an effect on \pkg{apacite} behavior, because the type + specifier is suppressed anyway by \pkg{apacite}. However, by defining it + as the empty string, formatting may become better (i.e., closer to the + desired formatting) with other styles. + + \item[\cmd{\bibnodate}] Used in the \fieldname{year} and + \fieldname{originalyear} fields to indicate that no + publication date has been given. Default value is ``\verb+n.d.\hbox{}+''. + The ``\verb+\hbox{}+'' ensures that \TeX{} does not treat + the last period as a sentence-ending period, after which + more space is inserted. This also applies to several other + labels discussed below. + + \item[\cmd{\BOthers}] Used for ``others'' if the number of authors + or editors is too large, as in ``(Gill et al., 1981)''. + The default is ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+''. + + However, the definition contains a slight adaptation, because + in a previous version of \pkg{apacite}, there was a problem + implying that in some cases \BibTeX{} might put an extra period after + \cmd{\BOthers}, not recognizing that it already contains a period, + so that you would get ``et al.\hbox{}.'', which is undesirable. + It depends on the definition of \cmd{\BOthers} whether there should + be a period or not: If it is defined as ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+'', + there should not be an additional period, but if it is defined + as, say, ``\verb+and others+'', then there should be an additional + period. But \BibTeX{} does not know what the (later) definition + of this command will be in \LaTeX{}. Therefore, the \cmd{\BOthers} + command is defined to have one argument. In \BibTeX, + \pkg{apacite} inserts \verb+\BOthers{.}+ in the output, so no + additional period is inserted by \BibTeX. By default, this + command is defined as ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+'', and the argument is + simply ignored. + + If you redefine the \cmd{\BOthers} command and need the additional + period, you can redefine it appropriately. However, in the current + version, the \cmd{\BOthers} command is distinguished from the + \cmd{\BOthersPeriod} command and I think the mentioned problems + do not occur anymore. Nevertheless, I have kept the definition of the + previous version. I may decide, after thorough testing, to change + this again in a next version. + + There is still a complication, however. If you use a \cmd{\citeauthor} + at the end of a sentence, there may be a period too many, if + you end the sentence explicitly with it and \cmd{\BOthers} is + ``et al.\hbox{}''. On the other hand, if you omit the sentence-finishing + period but decide to redefine \cmd{\BOthers} to ``and others'', + the period is missing. Therefore, it seems wise not to end a sentence + with a \cmd{\citeauthor}, or you could define a command, e.g., + \cmd{\finishsentence}, and insert it in an appropriate place. + Then, this command should be changed along with \cmd{\BOthers}. + + \item[\cmd{\BOthersPeriod}] Also used for ``others'' if the number of + authors or editors is too large, as in + ``Gill, P. E., et al.\hbox{} (1981)''. + But this one is used for situations when it should always end with + a period. The default is ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\bibcorporate}] This command can be used in the \fieldname{author} + field (and \fieldname{editor} and \fieldname{translator}) to tell + \pkg{apacite} that the author is a corporate author. See + section~\ref{subsec:fields} for an example of its usage. In combination + with the \pkgoption{includecorporate} and \pkgoption{suppresscorporate} + options, it can be used to include or exclude corporate authors from + the author index. The usage as described above is structured as if + \cmd{\bibcorporate} has an argument, the corporate author name, but + by default, this argument simply would have to be copied to the output + without further processing. Therefore, in the actual implementation, + \cmd{\bibcorporate} does not have an argument and reduces to \cmd{\relax}, + i.e., it does nothing in \LaTeX{} and exerts its influence at the + \BibTeX{} stage. + + \item[\cmd{\BIP}] ``In press'', the string to be used as year for + in-press references. In the \fname{.bib} file, the \fieldname{year} + field should be ``\verb+\BIP+'', so that \pkg{apacite} can recognize + this and use appropriate formatting and sorting. + The default value is ``\verb+in press+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BIn}] Used for \entryname{incollection} and + \entryname{intechreport}, for ``In \opt{editor} (Ed.\hbox{}), + \opt{booktitle}'', and similar phrases. Default value is ``\verb+In+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BCHAP}] Used for \entryname{incollection} if the + \fieldname{pages} field is empty, to denote the chapter number + of the referenced work in the collection. Used primarily for + internet documents, where there are no page numbers. + Default value is ``\verb+chap.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BCHAPS}] Just like \cmd{\BCHAP}, but this one is used + if the \fieldname{chapter} field refers to more than 1 chapter. + Default value is ``\verb+chap.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BED}] Editor in reference list, as in + ``In P. R. Krishnaiah (Ed.\hbox{})''. Default is ``\verb+Ed.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BEDS}] Editors (more than one editor) in reference list, + as in ``In C.~R. Rao \& J.~K. Ghosh (Eds.\hbox{})''. + Default is ``\verb+Eds.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BTRANS}] Translator, as in ``(J. Strachey, Trans.\hbox{})''. + Default is ``\verb+Trans.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BTRANSS}] Translators. Default is ``\verb+Trans.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BTRANSL}] Translation. Used in a text citation when + referring to a translated work for which there is no date + for the original work. This is then formatted as + ``Aristotle (trans.\hbox{} 1931)''. Default is + ``\verb+trans.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BCHAIR}] Chair of a symposium, etc. + Default is ``\verb+Chair+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BCHAIRS}] Chairs. Default is ``\verb+Chairs+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BVOL}] Volume, as in ``Vol.\hbox{}~1''. + Default is ``\verb+Vol.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BVOLS}] Volumes, as in ``Vols.\hbox{} 1--4''. + Default is ``\verb+Vols.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BNUM}] Number, as in ``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{} + No.\hbox{}~12''. + Default is ``\verb+No.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BNUMS}] Numbers, as in ``Nos.\hbox{} 3--5''. + Default is ``\verb+Nos.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BEd}] Edition, as in ``2nd ed.\hbox{}''. + Default is ``\verb+ed.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BPG}] Page, default is ``\verb+p.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BPGS}] Pages, default is ``\verb+pp.\hbox{}+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BTR}] The (default) technical report type name, which can be + overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is + ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}+'' + + \item[\cmd{\BPhD}] The (default) PhD thesis type name, which can be + overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is + ``\texttt{Doctoral dissertation}''. + + \item[\cmd{\BUPhD}] The (default) Unpublished PhD thesis type name, + which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is + ``\texttt{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}''. + + \item[\cmd{\BMTh}] The (default) master's thesis type name, which can be + overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is + ``\texttt{Master's thesis}''. + + \item[\cmd{\BUMTh}] The (default) unpublished master's thesis type name, + which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is + ``\texttt{Unpublished master's thesis}''. + + \item[\cmd{\BOWP}] ``Original work published'', default is + ``\texttt{Original work published}''. + + \item[\cmd{\BREPR}] ``Reprinted from'', default is + ``\texttt{Reprinted from}''. + + \item[\cmd{\Bby}] ``by'' in the construction + ``by P.~R. Krishnaiah, Ed.\hbox{}'' referring to the original + editor of a reprinted work. Default is ``\verb+by+''. + + \item[\cmd{\BAuthor}] ``Author'' as a description of the publisher + if the author and publisher are the same. Default is + ``\verb+Author+'' + + \item[\cmd{\BAvailFrom}] ``Available from'', used if the \fieldname{url} + field is specified but the \fieldname{lastchecked} field is not. + Default is ``\verb+Available from\ +''. Note the extra space. + This construction allows customization by redefining this command + as being empty, thereby omitting the phrase altogether, without + undesirable extra space. + + \item[\cmd{\BRetrieved}] ``Retrieved from'', used if both the + \fieldname{url} field and the \fieldname{lastchecked} field are + specified. It has one argumnt: the date, i.e., the contents of + the \fieldname{lastchecked} field. The default is + ``\verb+Retrieved {#1}, from\ +'', again with extra space. + + \item[\cmd{\BMsgPostedTo}] Used for messages to newsgroups and the like. + Default is ``\verb+Message posted to\ +'', with space. + + \item[\cmd{\refname}] Name of the reference list if it's a section. + (So it's the section name.) Default is ``\verb+References+''. + A problem with the current implementation is, that if you use + \pkg{babel}'s \cmd{\selectlanguage} command, then \cmd{\refname} + and \cmd{\bibname} are overwritten. Because \pkg{babel}'s + definitions of these commands are often (for various languages) + different from the names prescribed by the APA manual and analogous + bodies in other countries, it will often be necessary to redefine + \cmd{\refname} or \cmd{\bibname} if you have used + \cmd{\selectlanguage}. I hope to provide a fix in a next version + of \pkg{apacite}. + + \item[\cmd{\bibname}] Name of the reference list if it's a chapter. + Default is ``\verb+References+''. See also \cmd{\refname}. + + \item[\cmd{\bibliographyprenote}] This command is used before + the reference list, but after the section or chapter heading, + and immediately after \cmd{\bibliographytypesize}. + It is intended for an optional note just before the references + in the reference list. It defaults to nothing, but can be changed + to a list of commands (e.g., if some commands should be different + in the reference list than in the text) and/or some text. + + \item[\cmd{\APACmetaprenote}] If a meta-analysis is reported, the + works included in the meta-analysis should in the bibliography be + preceded by an asterisk, see the description of \cmd{\APACmetastar} + above. This should then be explained in a note before the references. + This command contains the text of that note. Default is + ``\texttt{References marked with an asterisk indicate studies + included in the meta-analysis.}''. + + \item[\cmd{\authorindexname}] Name (heading) of the author index. + Default is ``\verb+Author Index+''. +\end{description} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{More drastic formatting changes to the reference list} +\label{sec:custom-big-formatting} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +In earlier versions of \pkg{apacite}, most of the formatting of the +reference list is done in the \BibTeX{} stage, i.e., by the \fname{.bst} +files. This corresponds with most other \BibTeX{} styles. This makes +it difficult for users to customize the formatting of the reference +list: They would have to make their own \fname{.bst} file, by adapting +\fname{apacite.bst}. Certain small changes are relatively easy to make, +but \BibTeX's ``bst'' language is not easy to understand for most users, +and thus most desired changes, though seemingly small, may be too +complicated to implement. Another drawback of this setup is that, each +time I release a new version of \pkg{apacite}, users would have to make +the same adaptations again. In the early days of \pkg{apacite}, wasting +disk space was another drawback, but this is not important anymore. + +To overcome the most salient of these problems, \pkg{apacite} has always +deferred some formatting choices to the \LaTeX{} stage, by using +tailor-made formatting commands instead of explicit formatting, +as discussed in sections~\ref{sec:custom-punct} and~\ref{subsec:labels} +above. The amount of formatting thus handled has slightly grown over +time, but still most choices were hard wired in the \BibTeX{} styles. + +In the current version of \pkg{apacite}, a big step has been made in +transferring these choices to the \LaTeX{} domain. Hence, a much +larger set of commands, with wider-ranging scope, has been defined, +and considerably fewer choices are made at the \BibTeX{} stage. For +example, \fname{apacite.bst} now inserts +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\mbox{\cmd{\APACjournalVolNumPages}% + \marg{journal}% + \marg{volume}% + \marg{number}% + \marg{pages}% + } +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +in the \fname{.bbl} file for an \entryname{article} entry, and +the actual formatting of this information is defined in +\fname{apacite.sty}. If all four components are available, the +default (APA manual) formatting of this looks like +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\mbox{\Bem{Acta Paedopsychiatrica}, + \Bem{38}(9), + {229--231}} +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +but by redefining this command, users can change this, e.g., to +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\mbox{\Bem{Acta Paedopsychiatrica} + \textbf{38}, No.~9: + {229--231}} +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +The advantage of this is that users can fairly easily construct a +customized style by redefining only a few commands in \LaTeX, by +using \cmd{\renewcommand}. Users will generally find it much easier +to do this than adapt the \fname{.bst} files. Furthermore, only +the affected commands need to be redefined, so that, when a new +version of \pkg{apacite} becomes available, all the new features +can be used---with the exception of the redefined commands, of +course---without having to adapt everything again. The drawback +is that the \fname{.bbl} file becomes less readable and more +difficult to adapt: Previously, it was easy to make ad-hoc changes +by editing the \fname{.bbl} file, but this has now become more +difficult. However, I intend to make this facility more user-friendly +in the future, e.g., by introducing options in the \LaTeX{} package +(say, \pkgoption{boldvolume}) or by introducing user-friendly +commands that accomplish the same (say, \cmd{\boldvolume}), so that +the advantages will clearly outweigh the disadvantages for the vast +majority of users. + +Some packages (\pkg{amsrefs} and \pkg{biblatex} are the ones I am +aware of) handle the formatting of the reference list completely +in the \LaTeX{} domain, using \BibTeX{} only for sorting the reference +list. The current version of \pkg{apacite} does not go that far; +there are still certain choices that are hardwired in the \BibTeX{} +code. Examples are the ordering of the various blocks (most notably +the position of the year; some styles have this at the end) and the +formatting of names. It is doubtful whether \pkg{apacite} will follow +the path toward the end, like these other packages. Some formatting +choices are closely connected with sorting of entries (e.g., by title +if there is no author; this assumes that the title then takes the +author position) or other cross-entry relations (such as adding +`a' and `b' suffixes to the year). Therefore, it does not seem +useful to disconnect these choices by handing them over to \LaTeX. + +The following commands are currently implemented to format the reference +list. If you want to customize them, you can study the source code in +the file \pkg{apacite.sty}, copy it to you own package file, and adapt +the code as desired. +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +\cmd{\APACmonth} & Month name (as function of a number) \\ +\cmd{\APACrefYear} & Year in the reference list \\ +\cmd{\APACrefYearMonthDay} & Year + month + day \\ +\cmd{\APACrefatitle} & Title (article style, default upright) \\ +\cmd{\APACrefbtitle} & Title (book style, default italicized) \\ +\cmd{\APACrefaetitle} & English translation of title (article) \\ +\cmd{\APACrefbetitle} & English translation of title (book) \\ +\cmd{\APACjournalVolNumPages} & Journal, volume, number, and pages \\ +\cmd{\APACaddressPublisher} & Address and publisher \\ +\cmd{\APACaddressInstitution} & Address and institution (for technical reports) \\ +\cmd{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth} & Address and publisher if the publisher is the author \\ +\cmd{\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth} & Address and institution if the latter is the author \\ +\cmd{\APAChowpublished} & \fieldname{howpublished} field \\ +\cmd{\APACorigED} & Original editor for reprints and translations \\ +\cmd{\APACorigEDS} & Ditto, multiple editors \\ +\cmd{\APACrefnote} & Formatting of \fieldname{note} field \\ +\cmd{\APACorigyearnote} & Original year + optional note \\ +\cmd{\APACorigjournalnote} & Original journal (+ volume, number, pages) + optional note \\ +\cmd{\APACorigbooknote} & Formatting of ``original'' information if the original is a book \\ +\cmd{\APACbVolEdTR} & Technical report information \\ +\cmd{\APACbVolEdTRpgs} & Ditto, for \entryname{intechreport} +\end{tabular} +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +In addition, the following environments are used: +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +\envirname{APACrefURL} & Formatting of \fieldname{url} field \\ +\envirname{APACrefURLmsg} & Formatting of \fieldname{url} field for messages +\end{tabular} +\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ +It is likely that these lists will be expanded in future versions of +\pkg{apacite}. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Language support} +\label{sec:compat-babel} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The APA is, of course, American, and therefore the rules in the APA manual +are also based on the (U.S.) English language. Because \pkg{apacite} was +primarily designed to implement the APA rules, and because I write all +my scientific work in English, \pkg{apacite} originally did not contain +explicit support for other languages. However, most language-specific +elements have been implemented in the form of \LaTeX{} commands, so that +users could define their own \LaTeX{} package in which these elements were +changed. The labels discussed in section~\ref{subsec:labels} above are the +most important part of this. + +Furthermore, when writing in a non-English language, the \pkg{babel} package +will usually be loaded. The \pkg{babel} package is an extensive package that +facilitates using \LaTeX{} for documents in languages other than English. +There have been some compatibility problems between \pkg{babel} and +\pkg{apacite}, and therefore since 2003 \pkg{apacite} contained some +explicit code to overcome the compatibility problems. I think this works +well, provided that \pkg{apacite} is loaded \emph{after} \pkg{babel}. + +Thus, although \pkg{apacite} did not support non-English languages +explicitly, it did facilitate them. Supporting non-English languages is +not a main objective of \pkg{apacite}, because it is not needed for +the APA. Nevertheless, it potentially is a useful addition. Many journals in +non-English languages and universities in countries where other languages +are spoken base their rules on the APA manual. Therefore, it is +efficient if, with a few adaptations, \pkg{apacite} can also be used in +these circumstances. For this reason, and based on user requests, +\pkg{apacite} has contained some explicit language support since June 2005. + +The unpacked \pkg{apacite} distribution contains files that have names +according to the construction \opt{language}\fname{.apc}, i.e., +\fname{english.apc}, \fname{dutch.apc}, etc. +These files define the language-specific modifications of \pkg{apacite}, +mainly translations of terms like ``and'', ``Ed.\hbox{}'', etc. They have been +written by \pkg{apacite} users who are (native) speakers of the languages +involved. If the \pkg{babel}, \pkg{german}, or \pkg{ngerman} package is +loaded, \pkg{apacite} is able to determine the language of the document that +is processed. Then the corresponding \fname{.apc} file, when available, is +read. In this way, language-specific elements are changed to the relevant +language. This is done fully automatically, the user does not have to do +anything explicitly. However, sometimes an \fname{.apc} file makes some +assumptions (such as \fname{greek.apc}, which assumes ISO-8859-7 encoding) +or makes some choices that are nontrivial. Therefore, look at the source +code of the \fname{.apc} file (or in the Implementation section of this +manual if you have generated this manual with the \cmd{\AlsoImplementation} +option) if you obtain unexpected results. These files contain some brief +documentation of the specific issues relevant for the language at hand. + +The list with available \fname{.apc} files has been given in +section~\ref{sec:usage}. One file is defined for each ``language'', which can +be used for several ``dialects'' (in \pkg{babel} terminology). For example, +\fname{english.apc} is also used if the language is ``american''. See the +documentation of the \pkg{babel} and \pkg{(n)german} packages for a list of +dialects of the language files supplied. If an \fname{.apc} file is not +available for the language you need, you can use one of the supplied ones as a +template and write your own. If you send it to me, I can include it in a next +version of \pkg{apacite}. + +Note, however, that this form of language support is still very limited. +There are many aspects that are not yet covered, like different forms of +dates (month-day vs.\ day-month). As is clear from this manual, some +facilities for expanded language support have been implemented in +\pkg{apacite}, but this has often not yet been applied in the \fname{.apc} +files. Thus, future versions of \pkg{apacite} need to improve on this. + +The \pkg{babelbib} package offers very sophisticated support of +different languages. Perhaps some of the features that it offers are +useful additions to \pkg{apacite} as well, and this these may be included +in a future version of \pkg{apacite}. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Compatibility} +\label{sec:compat} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +Generally speaking, I would want \pkg{apacite} to be compatible with other +packages, of course. However, what does compatibility mean? It can mean +various things: +\begin{enumerate} +\item \label{compat1}% + The same \fname{.bib} file can be used with + different \BibTeX{} styles and \LaTeX{} citation packages; +\item \label{compat2}% + The same citation commands as other citation packages; +\item \label{compat3}% + Another \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a + \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by the \pkg{apacite} + \BibTeX{} style; +\item \label{compat4}% + The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a + \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by another \BibTeX{} style; +\item \label{compat5}% + The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be loaded at the + same time as other packages without errors or undesirable + side-effects. +\end{enumerate} +Because of the complicated rules of the APA manual, it is not always possible +to achieve all kinds of compatibility with all other packages. Later in this +section, I will discuss compatibility issues with other packages with which +known incompatibility problems exist or have existed. A first example of this, +the \pkg{babel} package, has already been mentioned above in +section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}. + +Point~\ref{compat1} is the most important. If you have to write a completely +different \fname{.bib} file for different citation styles, there does not seem +to be an advantage in using \BibTeX{}. You might as well write the reference +list explicitly in \LaTeX{} then. However, not even this point can be achieved +completely, although the vast majority of the items will be the same for +different styles. But there remain a number of choices that are style-specific +and that lead to differences in the \fname{.bib} file. Examples from the APA +manual are: +\begin{itemize} +\item If a referenced book is volume~III according to its title + page, this should be referenced as Vol.~3 according to the + APA manual rules, but that may not be the case with other + styles; +\item Journal names are abbreviated by some styles, but not + according to the APA manual rules; +\item Publisher names should be abbreviated according to the + APA manual, e.g., ``John Wiley \& Sons'' becomes ``Wiley''. + Other styles do not do this; +\item The issue number of a journal should only be given if + the journal starts each issue with page~1, not if page + numbers of different issues in the same volume are consecutive. + Other styles may require the issue number in all cases; +\item Page ranges are given as ``341--351'' in APA style, whereas + other styles use ``341--51''; +\item The APA rules require a capital after a colon (`\verb+:+'), + so that subtitles start with a capital as well. Other styles + may not do this; +\item The APA has specific rules about the address: For a U.S. city, + the state (or territory) should be given as a 2-letter code + from the U.S. Postal Services, and the province and country + should be given if it is a non-U.S. city, unless it is one of + the 17 (U.S. and non-U.S.) cities that are ``well-known for + publishing''. Then, only the city should be mentioned. There + are similar exceptions if the name of the state (and sometimes + even city) is already mentioned in the university name and + the university acts as publisher; +\item Yearbooks like \emph{Annual Review of Psychology} should be treated + as journals according to the APA rules, whereas other styles + treat these as books; +\item The additional fields (such as \fieldname{translator} and the + \fieldname{original*}-fields) that are used by \pkg{apacite} but are + not defined in other \BibTeX{} styles are of course + \pkg{apacite}-specific. +\end{itemize} +Some of these problems can be handled relatively elegantly. For example, +the user could use a command like ``\verb+\RomanVol{3}+'' in the +\fieldname{volume} field. Then, the user could define a counter, +\verb+RomanVolcounter+, say, in \LaTeX{} and then define +\cmd{\RomanVol} (similar to \cmd{\BCnt} discussed earlier) as +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\RomanVol}[1]{% + \setcounter{RomanVolcounter}{#1}\theRomanVolcounter} +\end{verbatim} +where \cmd{\theRomanVolcounter} is defined as \verb+\arabic{RomanVolcounter}+ +if \pkg{apacite} is loaded and as \verb+\Roman{RomanVolcounter}+ if another +package is loaded that desires this. The example with style-specific +\fname{.bib} files that contain the definitions of journal-strings was already +given in section~\ref{sec:bib} above. However, many users will not go through +all this trouble, and not all problems can be solved in this way. So we have +to realize that not all entries in the \fname{.bib} file will be suitable for +all citation styles. On the other hand, most citation styles and journals are +not as critical as APA journals and many styles in psychology and other social +sciences (including economics) are very similar, so a \fname{.bib} file that +is tailor-made for \pkg{apacite} is likely to be suitable enough for the +styles of most relevant alternative journals. + +Point~\ref{compat2} above is currently not fulfilled. The \pkg{apacite} +citation commands are directly based on those of its immediate predecessor, +\pkg{theapa}. But the use of `\verb+<+' and `\verb+>+' for prefixes is not +used by other packages. The influential \pkg{natbib} package uses \cmd{\citep} +and \cmd{\citet} instead of \cmd{\cite} and \cmd{\citeA}, and uses many more +alternative commands, see section~\ref{sec:compat-natbib} below. The +\pkg{chicago} package uses \cmd{\citeA} instead of \cmd{\citeauthor}, many +``numerical'' citation styles only recognize \cmd{\cite}, and so forth. As +discussed below, I now consider \pkg{natbib} as the standard with which other +packages should comply. Therefore, future versions of \pkg{apacite} will +support the \pkg{natbib} citation commands, but the current version does not +do that. + +I think that points~\ref{compat3} and~\ref{compat4} are not that important. It +seems to me that there is not much wrong with defining a style through a +combination of a \fname{.sty} and \fname{.bst} file, each requiring the other +to work. However, given the possibilities and philosophy of the \pkg{natbib} +package, it would be desirable that \fname{natbib.sty} can be used with +\fname{apacite.bst}. As discussed below, this works, although it requires +\fname{apacite.sty} to be loaded as well, before \fname{natbib.sty}. + +Point~\ref{compat5} is very important, especially with other packages that are +complementary to \pkg{apacite} in some sense. It would be very annoying having +to choose between using \pkg{babel} and \pkg{apacite}, or between +\pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{apacite}, etc. These packages serve totally different +purposes, cannot usefully be compared, and are more valuable when they can be +used jointly. The rest of this section addresses this issue for a number of +packages with which compatibility problems are known to exist or have existed. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{\pkg{natbib}} +\label{sec:compat-natbib} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The \pkg{natbib} package is a general purpose citation package that is +intended to work with a broad range of \BibTeX{} (and non-\BibTeX{}) styles +that generate the bibliography. The \pkg{natbib} package is quite advanced and +can be used to switch easily between completely different citation styles. +Furthermore, the apparent popularity of \pkg{natbib} has inspired writers of +packages that would otherwise be incompatible with \pkg{natbib} to write code +to resolve these incompatibilities. I will mention some of these packages +below. + +I consider \pkg{natbib} as the \emph{de facto} standard with which +other packages should be compatible. Unfortunately, \pkg{apacite} is still +not entirely compatible with \pkg{natbib}. The main incompatibility is that +different citation commands are used, so that it is not possible to use the +same document with \pkg{natbib} or \pkg{apacite}. + +\pkg{apacite}, building on its predecessors, uses \cmd{\cite} for +parenthetical citations and \cmd{\citeA} for in-text citations, whereas +\pkg{natbib} uses \cmd{\citep} and \cmd{\citet} for these purposes. Moreover, +text that should precede the citation is entered between \verb+<+ and \verb+>+ +marks and text that should follow the citation is entered between square +brackets (\verb+[+ and \verb+]+, i.e., a standard \LaTeX{} optional argument) +in \pkg{apacite}, whereas \pkg{natbib} uses \emph{two} optional arguments +between brackets. If there is one optional argument, \pkg{natbib} interprets +this as text following the citation (just like \pkg{apacite}). If there is +text that should precede the citation, but not text that should follow the +citation, two optional arguments must be used in \pkg{natbib}, the second +being empty. + +Furthermore, both packages have defined some alternative citation commands, +such as \cmd{\citeNP} (\pkg{apacite}) and \cmd{\citealp} (\pkg{natbib}), some +of which serve the same purpose and could therefore be mapped onto each other +easily, but some others have no equivalent in the other package. + +A partial conversion table, listing the main \pkg{apacite} commands and their +(closest) \pkg{natbib} equivalent is given in Table~\ref{tab:APAnatConv}. The +APA requirement and \pkg{apacite} behavior of listing the full author list for +the first citation (if there are at most 5 authors) and the short author list +in subsequent citations is accomplished by loading \pkg{natbib} with the +\pkgoption{longnamesfirst} option. This is assumed in the table. An example of +better APA-like behavior of \pkg{natbib} is that, by using the +\pkgoption{sort} option, \pkg{natbib} is able to sort the references within +the same citation command, as required by the APA manual, whereas +\pkg{apacite} does not have this option yet. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\begin{table}[htp] +\caption{Partial conversion table of the main \pkg{apacite} + citation commands and their (closest) \pkg{natbib} equivalents.} +\label{tab:APAnatConv} +\begin{tabular}{lcl} +\hline +\pkg{apacite} & $\mbox{}\qquad\qquad\mbox{}$ & \pkg{natbib} \\ +\cline{1-1}\cline{3-3} +\cmd{\cite} & & \cmd{\citep} \\ +\cmd{\citeNP} & & \cmd{\citealp} \\ +\cmd{\citeA} & & \cmd{\citet} \\ +\cmd{\citeauthor} & & \cmd{\citeauthor} \\ +\cmd{\citeauthorNP} & & \cmd{\citeauthor} \\ +\\ +\cmd{\fullcite} & & \cmd{\citep*} \\ +\cmd{\fullciteNP} & & \cmd{\citealp*} \\ +\cmd{\fullciteA} & & \cmd{\citet*} \\ +\cmd{\fullciteauthor} & & \cmd{\citeauthor*} \\ +\cmd{\fullciteauthorNP} & & \cmd{\citeauthor*} \\ +\\ +\cmd{\shortcite} & & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citep} \\ +\cmd{\shortciteNP} & & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citealp} \\ +\cmd{\shortciteA} & & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citet} \\ +\cmd{\shortciteauthor} & & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citeauthor} \\ +\cmd{\shortciteauthorNP} & & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citeauthor} \\ +\\ +\cmd{\citeyear} & & \cmd{\citeyearpar} \\ +\cmd{\citeyearNP} & & \cmd{\citeyear} \\ +\cmd{\nocite} & & \cmd{\nocite} \\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\end{table} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +Many labeling and punctuation commands are also different but similar between +\pkg{natbib} and \pkg{apacite}. I haven't studied the \pkg{natbib} commands +in detail, but will do so in the future. It is my intention to add +\pkg{natbib}-compatible commands to apacite in the future, so that the same +document can be processed either with \pkg{natbib} or with \pkg{apacite}. + +When you want to use \pkg{natbib} for citation and \pkg{apacite} for the +reference list, you still need to load the \LaTeX{} package \fname{apacite.sty} +(with \cmd{\usepackage}), because of the commands that are included in the +\BibTeX{} output (as defined in section~\ref{sec:custom} above). The +\fname{apacite.sty} file must be loaded \emph{before} \fname{natbib.sty}, +otherwise you will get lots of error messages. I may try to fix that for +a future version of \pkg{apacite}. + +Using \pkg{natbib} for the citations has some advantages over using +\pkg{apacite} for the citations. Apart from the abovementioned sorting +of citations within a single citation command, these are mainly +\pkg{natbib}'s better compatibility with some other important packages, +although many compatibility problems with \pkg{apacite} have now been +solved. + +However, \pkg{natbib} does not fully comply with the APA rules. +Known incompatibilities between \pkg{natbib} and the APA rules are: (1) +Multiple adjacent citations with the same author and year are formatted +as ``Johnson, 1991a,b'' by \pkg{natbib}, whereas the APA manual requires +this to be ``Johnson, 1991a, 1991b''; (2) The APA manual requires ``and'' +between authors to be ``and'' in text and ``\&'' in parenthetical citation, +but \pkg{natbib} does not make this distinction. + +I could change the \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst} \BibTeX{} +style files so that \pkg{natbib} would be ``fooled'' and the first +problem would be resolved. However, this has the drawback of imposing APA +style citations when you request \pkg{natbib} style citations, and you +may actually want the behavior mentioned above. I am only able to provide +one of these possibilities. It would be better to add an option to +\pkg{natbib} with which the desired behavior can be chosen. Thus, you +could try to put pressure on the author of \pkg{natbib} to achieve this. +Alternatively, I might attempt to provide an option to \pkg{apacite} +in the future that controls this behavior of \pkg{natbib}. + +The second incompatibility between \pkg{natbib} and the APA rules mentioned +above occurs because \pkg{apacite} uses the re-definable \cmd{\BBA} +command for this usage of ``and''. The \pkg{natbib} citation commands +do not redefine \cmd{\BBA}, so you can choose only one of these, or you +must redefine \cmd{\BBA} explicitly before each citation. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{\pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{backref}, and \pkg{url}} +\label{sec:compat-hyper} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The \pkg{hyperref} package turns (\mbox{cross-}) references into hypertext +links. This can be used in conjunction with a program such as \latextohtml{} +to compose \fname{.html} files with clickable links, to internet pages or +within the same document, or it can be used to create a \fname{.pdf} document +with clickable crossreferences. Evidently, citations are also references. +Therefore, the \pkg{hyperref} package transforms these into hypertext links as +well, and needs to redefine the citation commands and reference list commands +in order to do so. These redefinitions have caused severe incompatibility +problems between \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{hyperref} in the past. Previous +versions of \pkg{apacite} contained an experimental \pkgoption{hyper} +option that solved some problems, but left others. In the current version +of \pkg{apacite}, the incompatibility problems have been solved, and +the \pkgoption{hyper} and \pkgoption{nohyper} options are now obsolete. +However, some of the ``dirty tricks'' I needed for complicated examples +in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} still conflict with \pkg{hyperref}. You will +probably not encounter these problems very often, but if you do these can +be easily solved by editing the \fname{.bbl} file instead of using +dangerous tricks; see also section~\ref{sec:autindex} below. + +The \pkg{backref} package adds to each entry in the bibliography a list +of pages (or sections) on which it is referenced. Hence, it serves as +an alternative to an author index, in which not the entries themselves +are backreferenced, but the authors of these entries, see +section~\ref{sec:autindex}. Note that \pkg{natbib} offers yet another +possibility, viz.\ the citations in the standard index, or a separate +citation index, see the \pkg{natbib} documentation. In my opinion, +the \pkg{backref} way of indexing the page numbers of the citations +is more logical. Moreover, it is more condensed as well. + +Obviously, the \pkg{backref} package has to change the citation commands +and reference list to be able to do its backreferencing. +Because \pkg{apacite} redefines these as well, they are conflicting +to some degree. A similar compatibility problem between \pkg{backref} +and \pkg{natbib} was noticed by the author of \pkg{backref}. Therefore, +\pkg{backref} contains some code to make it compatible with \pkg{natbib}. +This code has been adapted for \pkg{apacite} and incorporated in +\pkg{apacite}. Thus, \pkg{backref} as a standalone package has been made +compatible with \pkg{apacite}. The drawback of this solution is that if +changes are made in the \pkg{backref} package, this may result in new +incompatibilities with \pkg{apacite} unless \pkg{apacite} is changed as +well. Whether, and if so, when, this will occur will be a question for +the future. + +Apart from being a standalone package, \pkg{backref} can also be +combined with \pkg{hyperref}. It is then not loaded separately, +but through the \pkgoption{backref} or \pkgoption{pagebackref} +option of the \pkg{hyperref} package. In this case, the backreferences +become hypertext links. See the discussion of the \pkg{hyperref} +package above. + +The \pkg{url} package provides the \cmd{\url} command for formatting URLs, +i.e., web addresses. It is typically loaded if \pkg{hyperref} is also +loaded, but it is very useful on its own as well. There are no +compatibility problems with \pkg{apacite} and it is not required when +using \pkg{apacite}. However, if you use the \fieldname{url} field, +\pkg{apacite} puts it into a \cmd{\url} command. If the \pkg{url} +command is not defined by another package, \pkg{apacite} provides a +crude definition, so that no errors are generated. But the formatting +thus obtained usually does not satisfy the APA rules about formatting, +especially its rules about line breaking within a URL. The default +line breaking rules of the \pkg{url} package are fairly close to the +APA rules, but there are some differences. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} +provides several URL-styles that adhere to the APA line breaking +rules, supplemented by the additional suggestions in +\citeA[p.~645]{chicago}. + +The only difference between the URL styles defined by \pkg{apacite} +is which font family they use: \verb+APACtt+ uses \cmd{\ttfamily}, +\verb+APACsf+ uses \cmd{\sffamily}, \verb+APACrm+ uses \cmd{\rmfamily}, +and \verb+APACsame+ does not define a font family, and thus uses the +font family that is active at the start of the URL. \verb+APACtt+ is +selected by default, but you can select another URL style by inserting +the command \cmd{\urlstyle}\marg{style} in your document, after +\verb+\begin{document}+. See the documentation of the \pkg{url} +package for more details. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{Multiple bibliographies} +\label{sec:compat-chapterbib} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The \pkg{chapterbib} package allows separate bibliographies for separate +chapters of a book, or, technically, separate \cmd{\include}d files. To work +properly, it needs some small changes to the citation package, which are +clearly described in the \pkg{chapterbib} documentation. These changes have +been incorporated in \pkg{apacite}, and therefore \pkg{apacite} is compatible +with \pkg{chapterbib}. + +It is generally advisable not to use the \pkgoption{sectionbib} option of +\pkg{chapterbib}, because this redefines \cmd{\thebibliography}, which +interferes with the redefinition by \pkg{apacite}. You can use the +\pkgoption{sectionbib} option of \pkg{apacite} to accomplish that the +bibliography or bibliographies are sections, rather than chapters. + +Moreover, \pkg{apacite} is configured such that it takes a section as default +if it is in the main matter (signified by \cmd{\mainmatter}) of the document. +In the back matter (\cmd{\backmatter}) the bibliography is put in a chapter. +This is also the case if \cmd{\chapter} is defined but \cmd{\mainmatter} not. +(Is this possible? Perhaps for reports?) Consequently, the +\pkgoption{sectionbib} option is only useful in specific circumstances. The +\pkgoption{nosectionbib} forces the bibliography to be a chapter, provided +\cmd{\chapter} is defined. (I figured a \pkgoption{chapterbib} option would be +a bit confusing, so I stuck with \pkgoption{nosectionbib}.) + +The \pkg{bibunits} package is an alternative to \pkg{chapterbib}. It allows a +greater flexibility in choosing the scope of a bibliography (chapter, section, +or arbitrarily defined part of the document). In previous versions, there +have been some compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{bibunits}, +but these have now been solved. + +The \pkg{multibib} and \pkg{multibbl} packages support using multiple +bibliographies simultaneously. Thus, one can cite entries from multiple +bibliographies in the same part of the document. This may be useful of one +wants thematically different bibliographies or separate bibliographies for +references in different scripts (e.g., Latin and Greek). These packages +accomplish this by introducing different citation commands for the different +bibliographies. \pkg{apacite} contains compatibility code such that these +packages can be used jointly with \pkg{apacite}. + +The \pkg{bibtopic} package offers a similar functionality, but instead of +using separate citation commands, it requires the user to keep the references +in different \fname{.bib} files, so that there is one bibliography per +\fname{.bib} file. \pkg{apacite} contains a little bit of compatibility code, +which largely seems to work, but ``and'' between authors is always ``\&'', even +in \cmd{\citeA}. I hope to fix this in a future version of \pkg{apacite}. + +Another package that offers similar functionality is \pkg{splitbib}. This +uses neither different citation commands, nor separate \fname{.bib} files. +rather, it requires the user to declare the ``category'' of each cited +reference, typically at the beginning of the document. Again, \pkg{apacite} +contains compatibility code such that simultaneous redefinitions of some +of the citation and reference list commands do not conflict. + +A few caveats must be mentioned here. First, simultaneous bibliographies +only work well if it is guaranteed that there are no ambiguities in the +reference lists. With a single bibliography, ambiguities are resolved at the +\BibTeX{} stage by adding initials to ambiguous first author names, +adding additional authors before (or instead of) ``et al.\hbox{}'' to +ambiguous multiple-author lists, and adding ``a'' and ``b'' suffixed to +the year for references to different documents with the same authors published +in the same year. Because, with the exception of \pkg{splitbib}, these +packages require multiple \BibTeX{} runs on separate selections of references, +\fname{apacite.bst} can only resolve ambiguities within the same bibliography. +When there are cross-bibliography ambiguities, these are not resolved. It +seems like these packages are primarily intended to work with numbered +citation styles, or otherwise labeled citation styles, so that unique +cross-bibliography numbers or labels can be generated at the \LaTeX{} stage. + +Second, I wrote the compatibility code in early 2006 (sorry about the long +delay for this release) and have only superficially tested it recently. +It seems to work, apart from minor details, but there may be problems I am +not aware of. Please let me know if you encounter such problems. Then I'll +try to fix them or at the least mention them in the next version of the +manual. In particular, I believe that usage of \cmd{\nocitemeta} is not +prefectly integrated yet: You may get the ``References marked\dots'' message +even if the relevant bibliography does not contain marked references, +or references that are \cmd{\nocitemeta}'d for one bibliography but not +for another are marked for both. I don't think the \cmd{\nocitemeta} +command is used much, so I would be surprised if anybody encountered +such problems, but please let me know if you do. Then I'll try to fix them. + +Third, the compatibility code for all of these packages either follows +instructions given in those packages, or brutally redefines part of the +code of those packages. If these packages change, this may mean that +new compatibility problems are created, or that improved features of +these packages are not available when combined with \pkg{apacite}. I do +not have the time to regularly check for updates of these packages and +then study changes and/or test compatibility again. Instead, I only take +action when a user notifies me of a problem, or I coincidentally find out +myself. Therefore, again, please let me know if you encounter problems. + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection{Programs for conversion to html, rtf, etc.} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +There are several programs that convert \LaTeX{} files to other types +of files, most notably \fname{html} and \fname{rtf}. This may, for example, +be useful if you want to publish your document on the internet or if you +are requested to send a ``Word'' file to a journal. I have received reports +that \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} do not handle documents that use +\pkg{apacite} well. Therefore, I have studied these programs. This section +contains my observations. Note that these are quite old and not updated, and +it is quite likely that the software mentioned in this section has been +altered (improved) considerably. Therefore, the information may be outdated. +Please let me know if there are major changes that I should be aware of. + +\latextohtml{} is a \Perl{} program that converts a \LaTeX{} input +file into one or more \fname{.html} files, so that a document that is prepared +with \LaTeX{} can be used as a (user-friendly) internet document. For papers, +lecture notes, and transparencies of classes, I always convert the +\fname{.dvi} file output by \LaTeX{} to a \fname{.pdf} file (through the +\pkg{dvipdfm} program), which can be read by most people, e.g., using the +\pkg{Adobe Reader} program or browser plug-in. I find \fname{.pdf} files +more convenient, because I can download a whole paper or presentation +with a single click and then print it and read it when and where I desire, +whereas typical examples of conversions to \fname{.html} use many +\fname{.html} files, which can only be conveniently read from the computer +screen when and where you're connected to the internet. Nevertheless, I can +imagine that someone would like to convert a document to \fname{.html}, e.g., +because it loads faster and reads easier from the screen, because for some +documents most people will have to use only a small part and can easier browse +or search through it, or just because you want to make a home page and do not +want to learn the html-language. + +Similarly, \LaTeXrtf{} is a standalone program that converts a \LaTeX{} +document to \fname{.rtf} format, which can be read by most word processors. +This may be convenient if you (a \LaTeX{} user) want to share a document with +someone who does not work with \LaTeX{}, or as mentioned above, if you are +required to send a ``Word'' file to a journal. + +Both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} implement \LaTeX{} macros etc.\ in +another programming language (\latextohtml{}: \Perl{}; \LaTeXrtf{}: C) and +process the \fname{.tex} files directly. This design implies that the +conversion program must know the definitions of all \LaTeX{} macros that +are used. A drawback of this design is that essentially the same code has +to be written in different programming languages (\LaTeX{} macros for the +\fname{.sty} file, \Perl{} for \latextohtml{}, and C for \LaTeXrtf{}), but +typically with some adaptations specific for the application at hand. + +With \LaTeXrtf{}, the \LaTeX{} macros that it is able to process are included +in the C source code that is compiled. Consequently, no user additions are +possible in principle. However, the source code is freely available, so if you +define a \LaTeX{} macro, you could adapt \LaTeXrtf{}'s source code and +recompile \LaTeXrtf{}. It is obvious that this is very inconvenient, +especially if \LaTeX{} macros are defined differently for different styles or +if they are defined differently in different parts of the same document. + +Version~1.9.15 and higher of \LaTeXrtf{} contains some support for +\pkg{apacite}, but lags a few versions of \pkg{apacite} behind and thus +doesn't work with recent versions of \pkg{apacite}. Moreover, even if this +would be fixed, e.g., because I (or you) send patches to the \LaTeXrtf{} +authors, this wouldn't do justice to the flexibility of \pkg{apacite}, i.e., +its customization options. + +In contrast with this, \latextohtml{} allows the possibility to supply +external \Perl{} scripts. If \latextohtml{} encounters a +\cmdtwo{usepackage}{package} command in the document, it attempts to read the +corresponding \opt{package}\fname{.perl} \Perl{} script. \latextohtml{} is +shipped with many such \Perl{} scripts. There is not one for \pkg{apacite}, +but there is one for \pkg{natbib}, which could possibly be adapted for +\pkg{apacite}. Alternatively, you could use the \pkg{natbib} citation commands +and use the \pkg{natbib} package, which should work. This will become more +straightforward when, in a future version, \pkg{apacite} also supports the +\pkg{natbib} citation commands. Then the \fname{natbib.perl} script may +possibly be copied to \fname{apacite.perl} without having to adapt much. +However, I have never studied \Perl{}, and I do not particularly like the +idea of having to learn that language for this purpose, so it is not very +likely that in the near future \latextohtml{} will work well with +\pkg{apacite}. + +Note, however, that the design with the \Perl{} scripts has the advantage +that, if you customize the usage of \pkg{apacite} by writing your own +\fname{.sty} file that renews the definitions of some macros, you can also +supply a corresponding \Perl{} script, so that your customizations are +processed. + +An alternative to both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} is \TeXht{}. This is +a collection of programs and style files that convert \LaTeX{} to +various formats, such as html, xml, and OpenOffice format. If you have +OpenOffice, the latter can be used to convert to Word (or rtf) format. +The principle of \TeXht{} is to let \LaTeX{} do most of the formatting and +processing of commands, and do the conversion at low-level \TeX{} commands. +In this way, all newly defined commands and user-defined changes are +automatically supported. This even carries over to redefinitions of macros +in the middle of a document. However, for some specific purposes, there are +some additional things that must be arranged. Therefore, \TeXht{} contains a +large list of \fname{.4ht} files that are necessary to support various +\LaTeX{} packages. One of these is the \fname{apacite.4ht} file. The main +purpose of this file is to make citations into hyperlinks to the corresponding +entries in the reference list. Currently, this only works partially, but +the citation text itself is formatted correctly, so this is only a +relatively minor inconvenience. But, of course, it would be better if this +would work perfectly. Perhaps I'll study the problems in the future and +solve this for a future version (although, technically, it is a \TeXht{} +problem and not an \pkg{apacite} problem). + +The choice of which converter to use will typically not (only) depend on how +good it works in conjunction with \pkg{apacite}. Furthermore, apart from the +converters mentioned above, there are several additional converters that I +haven't studied at all. I will only study them if I receive reports about +incompatibility and even then it is far from certain that I will be willing or +able to fix the problems. It would be very demanding if I would have to define +the \pkg{apacite} commands in a large number of programming languages for a +large number of different converters. Because I prefer the design of \TeXht{} +and because this converter seems to work best at the moment, I will give a +bit more attention to this one. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Generating an author index} +\label{sec:autindex} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The \pkg{apacite} package contains an option to (almost) automatically +generate an author index. This is done by using the \fname{apacitex.bst} +\BibTeX{} style file instead of \fname{apacite.bst} and loading the +\fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package with the \pkgoption{index} option, +either explicitly or implicitlt through one of the \pkgoption{stdindex}, +\pkgoption{tocindex}, \pkgoption{emindex}, or \pkgoption{ltxemindex} options. + +In previous versions of \pkg{apacite}, the \pkgoption{index} option +automatically loaded the \pkg{index} package for multiple indexes, so that +you can have a subject index as well as an author index. However, +the current document uses the standard \pkg{ltxdoc} class for documenting +\LaTeX{} packages, and this class uses another method for supporting +multiple indexes, which appears incompatible with the \pkg{index} package. +I have yet been unable to resolve these compatibility problems and, +therefore, have implemented another way to generate an author index in +addition to other indexes. This uses the same principles as \pkg{ltxdoc} +and thus does work for this user's manual. As a consequence, +\pkg{apacite} now offers options that generate the author index either +with the \pkg{index} package or without it. + +The \pkgoption{indexpackage} option implies that author indexing is done +according to the \pkg{index}-scheme, whereas the \pkgoption{noindexpackage} +uses the \pkg{ltxdoc}-based scheme. These options are ignored if the +\pkgoption{index} option of \pkg{apacite} is not requested. When the +\pkgoption{index} option is requested, the \pkgoption{indexpackage} option +loads the \pkg{index} package. This is the default unless it is disabled +by using either the \pkgoption{noindexpackage} option or the +\pkgoption{ltxemindex} option. + +Obviously, the \pkg{index} package must be available in a directory that +is read by \LaTeX{} if the \pkgoption{indexpackage} option is requested, +either explicitly or implicitly. If a subject index is desired, it must be +defined by the user, it is not defined by \pkg{apacite}. See the manual of +the \pkg{index} package on how to do this. A default author index \emph{is} +defined by \pkg{apacite}. The author index is then requested by putting +\begin{verbatim} +\printindex[autx] +\end{verbatim} +at the point in the \LaTeX{} document where the index is supposed to appear. +To include the author index in the processed document, the following sequence +must be followed: First, \LaTeX{}, which puts citation entries in the +\fname{.aux} file. Second, \BibTeX{}, which generates the bibliography in the +\fname{.bbl} file. Third, \LaTeX{} (at least) twice, which puts index entries +in a \fname{.adx} file, Fourth, \MakeIndex{}, which uses the \fname{.adx} file +as input and puts the formatted index in a \fname{.and} file, which can be +processed by \LaTeX{}. So, if the main document is \fname{filename.tex}, then +\MakeIndex{} must be called as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +makeindex -o filename.and filename.adx +\end{verbatim} +although the command with which the \MakeIndex{} program must be called may on +some systems be slightly different, e.g., \fname{makeinde} or +\fname{makeindx}. Furthermore, several additional options may be chosen on the +\MakeIndex{} command line. Fifth, run \LaTeX{} again, which (finally) includes +the formatted author index in the \fname{.dvi} file. + +The \pkg{apacite} package provides some options to change the appearance of +the index somewhat. With (only) the \pkgoption{index} option, the indexing +facility is turned on, but the \envirname{theindex} environment is not explicitly +(re)defined by \pkg{apacite}. This means that this environment is defined just +like in standard \LaTeX{}, or the \pkg{index} package, or some other package +that be loaded that redefines this environment. + +The \pkgoption{stdindex} option explicitly uses the definition of the +\envirname{theindex} environment that is defined in the \pkg{index} package +[1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)]. +With this definition, the index does not appear in the table of contents. With +the \pkgoption{tocindex} option, this definition is augmented with a table of +contents entry. With the \pkgoption{emindex} option, there are some alternative +definitions. It writes a table of contents entry as well, but the index itself +is now set in two columns using the \pkg{multicol} package instead of the +\cmd{\twocolumn} command, the text of the index is set in small type, and the +page head is not put in uppercase. The \pkgoption{ltxemindex} option uses +the same style as the \pkgoption{emindex} option, except that it does not +load the \pkg{index} package and is thus tailored to a somewhat different +indexing method. + +When a table of contents entry is desired, another additional \LaTeX{} run is +required to obtain the table of contents with the author index included. In +exceptional cases, the extra line in de table of contents may cause the text +to be moved as well, so that it may be necessary to run \MakeIndex{} a second +time, followed by yet one or two more \LaTeX{} runs. + +The definitions of the index discussed apply to all indexes in the document, +so to, e.g., the subject index as well as the author index. This may be +undesirable, and therefore future versions of \pkg{apacite} may contain +options or commands to switch index styles. In fact, this is done in the +current document (if you generate it with \cmd{\AlsoImplementation}), +using the \cmd{\APACdocindex} command defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}. +In the absence of explicit options, if you want a different index style, +either for all indexes in your document or only for some indexes, you can +define such a style using the \cmd{\renewenvironment} command in the +appropriate place. See the standard \LaTeX{} documentation for this +command. You can use the source code of the \pkg{index} package, or +the \pkg{apacite} source code for that matter, as a template. + +Finally, some elements of the formatting of the index itself can be changed +by using (and/or writing) an \fname{.ist} file containing the preferred +options. \MakeIndex{} should then be called with the filename of this index +style file after a ``\verb+-s+'' option on the command line, so, e.g., +\begin{verbatim} +makeindex -s mystyle.ist -o filename.and filename.adx +\end{verbatim} +The \MakeIndex{} documentation discusses the possible options that can be put +into the \fname{.ist} file. + +As discussed in sections~\ref{sec:options}, \ref{subsec:fields}, and +\ref{subsec:labels}, the \pkgoption{suppresscorporate} and +\pkgoption{includecorporate} options can be used to either +excludes corporate authors from the author index or include them in it. +The \cmd{\bibcorporate} command must be used in the \fname{.bib} file +to denote a corporate author. + +For some of the examples from the APA manual, I had to use quite advanced +\LaTeX{} tricks to obtain the correct formatting in the text, the reference +list, and the author index; see section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. This will +typically not be necessary in practice. In the unlikely event that you +encounter similar difficult cases, it will usually be sufficient to use +a relatively simple trick in the \fname{.bib} file. In rare situations, +this may still give incorrect formatting, most likely in the author index. +Somewhat less rare is the situation when there is such a problematic case +but you also want to use the \pkg{hyperref} package. The tricks I used +conflict with \pkg{hyperref}. + +An easy solution to incorrect formatting and/or sorting in the author index is +to edit the \fname{.bbl} file manually. This should be done at a time when +\BibTeX{} will not have to be run again. Otherwise, the changes would be +overwritten by the next \BibTeX{} run. This editing of the \fname{.bbl} file +is not in the \TeX-spirit, but in my experience---I used it for two books +with lots of references \cite{meijer1998,WaMe00}, with a previous version of +\pkg{apacite} that caused a fair amount of problematic cases---this takes very +little time, usually only minutes (compare that with the time spent on writing +a book, or with the time that would be necessary to manually make an author +index). + +The connection between the \fname{.bbl} file and the author index is through +\cmd{\AX} commands that are entered by \fname{apacitex.bst} in the +\fname{.bbl} file. These are responsible for the author indexing facilities. +By looking at the contents of the \fname{.bbl} file, some changes that lead to +correct formatting are immediately obvious. For example, the entry for Bender +is generated by the following lines: +\begin{verbatim} +\AX{bender jdirector +@Bender, J\BPBI + {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}.}% +\end{verbatim} +It is immediately clear that this can be changed to +\begin{verbatim} +\AX{bender j +@Bender, J.}% +\end{verbatim} +Then, this author will be formatted correctly in the author index, +and conflicts with \pkg{hyperref} are resolved. +Note that \pkg{apacite} uses the \opt{key}\verb+@+\opt{visual} form of +indexing. This form is used in \MakeIndex{} to distinguish between the actual +representation in the index and the place where it should occur. The \opt{key} +is used by \MakeIndex{} to sort the entry, but the entry actually appearing in +the index is \opt{visual}. In the \opt{key} part as formatted by +\pkg{apacite}, all names are in lower case letters and all accents and +punctuation are removed. Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} inserts \emph{two} spaces +between surname and initials, and to \MakeIndex{}, two spaces are different +from one space. Spaces between surnames are removed, as well as spaces between +initials. Finally, note that \pkg{apacite} always inserts a new line before +the ``\verb+@+''. This is to avoid bad line breaks by \BibTeX. To \MakeIndex, +this means that each citation \opt{key} ends with a space. + +The author index of the current document does not contain entries for the authors +Shocked and Goodenough as cited in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}, although it does for +the reference list part. The reason for this is that the \fieldname{key} field was +used for the citations. If you use the \fieldname{key} (and \fieldname{firstkey}) +field and you want the authors in the author index as well, you have to include +the index command \cmd{\AX} explicitly. For example, the \fieldname{key} field +for Michelle Shocked is +\begin{verbatim} + key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked}{1992}{Over the + Waterfall}{track~5}}}, +\end{verbatim} +and if we change this into +\begin{verbatim} + key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked\AX{shocked m + @Shocked, M.}}{1992}{Over the Waterfall}{track~5}}}, +\end{verbatim} +then citations to her are included in the author index. + +For corporate authors, the \cmd{\corporateAX} command is used instead of the +\cmd{\AX} command. Depending on whether the \pkgoption{suppresscorporate} +option or the \pkgoption{includecorporate} option is requested, either explicitly +or implicitly, \cmd{\corporateAX} either swallows its argument or is equivalent +to \cmd{AX}. To make sure that this ends up correctly in the author index, +it is important that this command as entered in the \fieldname{key} and/or +\fieldname{firstkey} field is exactly as output by \fname{apacite.bst} for +the \fieldname{author} field. The easiest way to accomplish this is to start +with \fieldname{key} and/or \fieldname{firstkey} fields that do not have +the \cmd{\corporateAX} command yet. Then, run \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} and +extract the correct \cmd{\corporateAX} command from the \fname{.bbl} file +and insert this in the \fieldname{key} and/or \fieldname{firstkey} fields. +Rerun \BibTeX{} and after that proceed as usual. For example, the following +is an excerpt from an entry for one of the examples from section~3.96 in the +APA manual: +\begin{verbatim} + author = {{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}, + firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}}, + key = {{NIMH}}, +\end{verbatim} +If I run \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} on the current document, the \fname{.bbl} +file contains the lines +\begin{verbatim} +\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth +@{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}% +\end{verbatim} +Note the \cmd{\bibcorporate} command and the additional braces. If these +are left out, +\begin{verbatim} + firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health + [NIMH]}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth + @{National Institute of Mental Health}}}, + key = {{NIMH}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth + @{National Institute of Mental Health}}}, +\end{verbatim} +then this organization gets two separate entries in the author index, which +is incorrect. Instead, if we copy them literally, +\begin{verbatim} + firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health + [NIMH]}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth + @{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}}, + key = {{NIMH}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth + @{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}}, +\end{verbatim} +then evrything is as desired. The additional spaces before the ``\verb+@+'' +sign make no difference, but percentage signs should not be included in +the \fname{.bib} file at the end of lines to hide a line break (as in +\LaTeX{}), because \BibTeX{} does not recognize the percentage sign as +a comment. Rather, it includes it in the \fname{.bbl} file and sometimes +puts additional code behind it, which would then not be read by \LaTeX{} +because \LaTeX{} does interpret the percent sign as a comment. This +behavior has now become less likely, because \pkg{apacite} inserts +numerous line breaks in the \fname{.bbl} file to avoid this problem and, +more importantly, line breaks inserted by \BibTeX{} at undesired +locations (e.g., in the middle of a command name or in the argument of +a \cmd{url} command), but is still a possibility. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{\fname{apacdoc.sty}} +\label{sec:apacdoc} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +Section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below cites all examples from the APA manual. +This is a test of \pkg{apacite} and a proof that it does what it's +supposed to do---format citations and reference lists complying with +the APA rules. However, the APA manual discusses many nonstandard +issues and several of them need nonstandard treatment. Some of these +can only be formatted by what I call ``tricking'' the system. This +has been done by defining several \LaTeX{} commands that are too +specifically tailored for a certain reference, or ad hoc in other +ways, or more generally experimental and not well tested, and likely +to lead to more (compatibility) errors. Therefore, +I do not consider these commands suitable for inclusion in the +\pkg{apacite} package proper, i.e., the file \fname{apacite.sty}. + +They are not important enough for that, and thus you would rarely need +them, and for most of them I anticipated (or hoped) at one point that +better solutions would be available in the future. Thus, it seemed +quite likely that major changes in these commands would be made, +and I didn't want to feel obliged to keep supporting them for backwards +compatibility. Rather, I considered these as illustrations of the +power of \LaTeX{} and templates that users can base their own tricks +upon. Accordingly, these commands were defined in the preamble of +previous versions of the user's manual, which used to be the file +\fname{apacite.dtx}. + +I still largely feel the same way about these commands, although +I'm not convinced anymore that within reasonable time I will come up +with elegant solutions that make them obsolete. Nevertheless, I still +make improvements in this direction, and the support of the +\fieldname{url} and \fieldname{lastchecked} fields in his version of +\pkg{apacite} is an example of this. + +With the restructuring of the distribution in a \fname{.dtx} file, +I have reconsidered the position of these commands, and have decided +to put them in a supplementary package file, \fname{apacdoc.sty}. As +this name indicates, it is a package that is intended to be used +for the \pkg{apacite} documentation (i.e., the current document). + +It contains several commands and settings (like page margins) that +are not interesting outside this document. However, as mentioned +above, I needed many of the commands defined in this file for the +examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. Thus, you might encounter +similar situations as well, and these commands may be useful for you. + +Because most of the commands in \fname{apacdoc.sty} will not be +useful for you (or may even interfere with your document), and +because the settings defined in it will most likely not be what you +want, it is generally not a good idea to load this file with +\cmd{\usepackage} to use the commands that are useful to you. +Instead, if you want to use them, you can copy their definitions +to the top of your own document or personal style file (say, +\fname{mysettings.sty}, study their behavior, and perhaps improve +them. This reflects the ``illustration'' or ``template'' nature +of these commands. + +Accordingly, this section briefly mentions the commands that may +be useful outside the context of the current document. Thorough +documentation is outside the scope of this manual; their definitions +can be studied in the source code of \fname{apacdoc.sty}, and their +usage is illustrated in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. I will mildly +support them, though: If you want to use them, you can ask me +questions, but I will not put as much effort in fixing possible +problems as I do with proper \pkg{apacite} issues. + +The list below mentions (some of) the numbered examples in +section~\ref{sec:xmpl} in which the commands are used. +\begin{description} +\item[\cmd{\bibleciteA}] +\item[\cmd{\fullbibleciteA}] +\item[\cmd{\shortbibleciteA}] +\item[\cmd{\biblecite}] +\item[\cmd{\fullbiblecite}] +\item[\cmd{\shortbiblecite}] +\item[\cmd{\bibleciteNP}] +\item[\cmd{\fullbibleciteNP}] +\item[\cmd{\shortbibleciteNP}] \mbox{}\\ +Citing the Bible. One mandatory argument: relevant chapter and verse, e.g., +\verb+\biblecite{1~Cor.\ 13:1}+ (ex.~3.100-3). + +\item[\cmd{\bibleversion}] \mbox{}\\ +Defines the version of the Bible used: +\verb+\bibleversion{Revised Standard Version}+. Use this before using +the bible citing commands, typically in the preamble of your document. +Note that the Bible is not included in the reference list. You can use +these commands as templates for references to other ``classic'' works. +See ex.~3.100-3. + +\item[\cmd{\citesong}] +\item[\cmd{\fullcitesong}] +\item[\cmd{\shortcitesong}] +\item[\cmd{\citeAsong}] +\item[\cmd{\fullciteAsong}] +\item[\cmd{\shortciteAsong}] +\item[\cmd{\citesongNP}] +\item[\cmd{\fullcitesongNP}] +\item[\cmd{\shortcitesongNP}] \mbox{}\\ +These cite a song as required by the APA (except for the relative +placement of closing quotes and comma). See ex.~69. + +\item[\cmd{\bibsong}] \mbox{}\\ +For \cmd{\citesong} and its siblings, the \fieldname{key} field +(and possibly \fieldname{firstkey}) should contain the relevant +information in the form of a protected \cmd{\bibsong} command: +\begin{verbatim} + key = {{\protect\bibsong{author}{year}{song title}{track info}}}, +\end{verbatim} +See ex.~69. + +\item[\cmd{\bibInstring}] \mbox{}\\ +This command has one argument. The macro changes the definition of +the macro \cmd{\BIn} to the argument and then immediately changes +the definition back to the old definition. So it makes a one-time +change. Used to change ``In'' a book to ``On'' a CD for citing songs. +See ex.~69. + +\item[\cmd{\BOn}] \mbox{}\\ +``On'', for citing songs ``On'' a CD. See ex.~69. + +\item[\cmd{\DSMcite}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMfullcite}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMshortcite}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMciteA}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMfullciteA}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMshortciteA}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMciteNP}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMfullciteNP}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMshortciteNP}] \mbox{}\\ +Commands to cite the DSM. See ex.~29. Can also be used for other +``named'' works. \pkg{natbib} offers a similar functionality +through the definition of an \emph{alias}, but I think that to +get this working in the way the APA wants (i.e., the alias is not +used for the first citation, but only for second and subsequent +citations), it cannot be directly used. But the technical +implementation of its functionality may form a useful basis +for a better (more elegant) solution for this type of citation. + +\item[\cmd{\bibDSM}] \mbox{}\\ +For \cmd{\DSMcite} and its siblings, the \fieldname{key} field +(and possibly \fieldname{firstkey}) should contain the relevant +\cmd{\bibDSM} command: +\begin{verbatim} + key = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric Association}{Diagnostic + and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders}{4th + ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}}, +\end{verbatim} +See ex.~29. + +\item[\cmd{\DSMauthor}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMfulltitle}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMedition}] +\item[\cmd{\DSMshorttitle}] \mbox{}\\ +These four commands extract the four elements of a \cmd{\bibDSM} +command. They are used in the \cmd{\DSMcite} command and its +siblings, but may occasionally be useful by themselves. + +\item[\cmd{\bibliteral}] \mbox{}\\ +This command is used in some of the examples in +section~\ref{sec:xmpl} to put some literal text into the +reference list that would otherwise be abbreviated to a +single ``initial'' at the \BibTeX{} stage. For example, in +ex.~4.08, the authors are ``Bulatao, E. (with Winford, C.~A.)'', +where ``(with Winford, C.~A.)'' is inserted by wrapping it +in a \cmd{\bibliteral} command, which itself is wrapped in +an additional pair of braces, so that \BibTeX{} treats it a +a complicated ``accent'' and the argument as a complicated +single character. This text should not be put in the author +index, and therefore some manipulation through redefining +the meaning of this command before and after the reference +list is used to suppress this text, as well as an additional +period, there. Used in examples 4.08, 65, 66, 68, and 70. + +\item[\cmd{\bibinitial}] \mbox{}\\ +This command is similar to \cmd{\bibliteral}. It is used in +one example (ex.~67), where the ``author'' is a ``(Producer)'', +but the initial of the author is put in the text because there +is another author with the same surname (Miller). This +causes problems not encountered in the examples where +\cmd{\bibliteral} is used, and after a lot of trial and error, +the current definition of \cmd{\bibinitial} was developed +to format this particular author correctly in text, reference +list, and author index. It looks like this is an improved +version of the \cmd{\bibliteral} command, so perhaps in the +next release I'll use \cmd{\bibinitial} for all the examples +in which now \cmd{\bibliteral} is used. + +\item[\cmd{\bibreftext}] \mbox{}\\ +This command takes two arguments. By default, it ignores the +first and inserts the second in the output. In this manual, +it is redefined before the reference list to ignore its +second argument and insert the first argument in the output. +This is used in ex.~17, where the year in the in-text +citation should be ``1992/1993'', whereas in the reference +list, it should be 1992 (and the 1993 is listed elsewhere). +For reprints and translations, this is handled automatically +by \pkg{apacite} if you use the \fieldname{original*} fields, +but this one is different. + +\item[\cmd{\Dutchvon}] \mbox{}\\ +This command is equivalent to \cmd{\bibreftext}, but is used +for a different situation, and therefore, depending on +language, subtle style differences, and other preferences, +you might want to change the definition of one but not of +the other. This one illustrates how the Dutch way to treat +``von'' parts of surnames can be handled. It is discussed +in ex.~B-2, although it is not actually used in the examples, +because the Dutch way to treat ``von'' parts is not APA +style. + +\item[\cmd{\SwapArgs}] \mbox{}\\ +This command takes two arguments and swaps their order. This +is useful if you cite a work whose title, (corporate) author, +or other element starts with an article that should be +disregarded for ordering. \pkg{apacite} disregards ``a'', +``an'', and ``the'' in the sorting of titles, but these are +obviously English. For French, you could say +\begin{verbatim} + title = {\SwapArgs{Marseillaise}{La }}, +\end{verbatim} +which is thus alphabetized under M. (Not used in the examples.) + +\item[\cmd{\swallownext}] \mbox{}\\ +Eats up the next character. Dangerous but sometimes useful. +Used in the definitions of some of the following commands. + +\item[\cmd{\swallowdot}] \mbox{}\\ +Eats up the next character, but only if it's a dot (`.'). +Used in the definitions of some of the following commands. + +\item[\cmd{\bibnodot}] \mbox{}\\ +Used as \verb+\bibnodot{.}+. Eats the period, but prevents \BibTeX{} +from adding one. Used in examples 78, 79, 87, 91, and 95. +This is likely to be useful for many users, and is stable, so it +may be upgraded to \fname{apacite.sty} in the next release of +\pkg{apacite}. The only thing against this is that it is used in +highly unelegant manual formatting of a fairly large piece of the +description of a reference to a website in a +\fieldname{howpublished} field. I'd prefer to avoid this, but that +would require either adding another idiosyncratic field or even +less elegant trickery in the \fname{.bib} file. + +\item[\cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}] \mbox{}\\ +Suppresses the period after a subsequent closing brace. Quickly leads +to errors because it uses very low level \TeX{} code that (locally) +changes some fundamental settings. This is used in some examples +(65, 68) where \cmd{\bibliteral} is used to insert a description +of a first ``author'', such as ``(Producer)''. This is +interpreted by \BibTeX{} as a complicated one-letter first +name, and thus it adds a period to make it into an initial. +This period is the one that's eaten by this command. +Used in examples 65 and 68. + +\item[\cmd{\indexskipbracenodot}] \mbox{}\\ +This serves the same purpose as \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}, and it +uses the same code, but whereas \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot} is +activated for the reference list, \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot} +is only activated for the author index. This has technical +reasons and it does not work under all circumstances. Used in +examples 4.08-3, 65, 66, and 68. + +\item[\cmd{\bibeditortype}] \mbox{}\\ +This has one argument. The macro changes the definitions of the macros +\cmd{\BED} and \cmd{\BEDS} to the argument and then immediately +changes the definitions back to their old definitions. So it makes a +one-time change. This is used when there is someone in an ``editor-type'' +role, but with another designation, such as ``producer'' or ``director''. +Ex.\ 36, 67, and 68. + +\item[\cmd{\renewbibeditortype}] \mbox{}\\ +The above-mentioned definition of \cmd{\bibeditortype} is only relevant +in the reference list: In the citations in the text and in the author +index, the command should do nothing. Therefore, the command is +initially defined as ``nothing''. The definition discussed above is +initialized by \cmd{\renewbibeditortype}. This command is executed +just before the reference list in the current document. (After the +reference list, \cmd{\bibeditortype} becomes ``nothing'' again.) + +\item[\cmd{\BAbstractRetrieved}] \mbox{}\\ +This command is similar to \cmd{\BRetrieved}, except that it +inserts ``Abstract retrieved'' instead of ``Retrieved''. Used in +examples 82 and 83. + +\item[\cmd{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}] \mbox{}\\ +This command functions much like \cmd{\bibeditortype}: It replaces +the next instance of \cmd{\BRetrieved} by \cmd{\BAbstractRetrieved}. +Used in examples 82 and 83. + +\item[\cmd{\noedition}] \mbox{}\\ +Suppresses the ``ed.'' (or ``\cmd{\BEd}'', rather) of an +\fieldname{edition}. Used in examples 92 and 94 to format a +string like ``Version~4'' as an \fieldname{edition}. + +\item[\cmd{\APACmanBeforeBib}] \mbox{}\\ +Illustrates how some of the commands defined above are used in practice: +This command is given just before the \cmd{\bibliography} command, and +redefines some of the commands above, so that their meaning +is different in the reference list from their meaning in the main text. +Similar commands: \cmd{\APACmanBeforeIndex}, \cmd{\APACmanAfterIndex}. + +\end{description} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Known problems and todo-list} +\label{sec:todo} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +With any kind of software, there is usually a list with known problems (bugs) +and desirable future work (to-do), and \pkg{apacite} is no exception. These +subjects will be discussed in this section. + +A class of problems was already discussed in section~\ref{sec:compat} above. +This concerns the incompatibility of the \fname{.bib} file with other citation +styles, through \pkg{apacite}-specific fields, APA-specific contents of +fields, or through special tricks. These lead to correctly formatted +references in APA style, but may cause problems with using the \fname{.bib} +file with other styles (in case APA journals reject your article~\ldots). As +discussed there, however, this problem is unavoidable and presumably not a +very big problem to most users. + +An incomplete list of other known problems and things that I would +like to do with \pkg{apacite} follows below. Several items of this list +are the direct result of the tricks I had to use for the examples in +section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. +\begin{itemize} +\item Sort entries within a single citation command. The \pkg{natbib} + package already offers this option. +\item Swap (optionally) the order of closing quotes and various other + punctuation marks (\verb+.,;!?+) in a citation, for articles where + there is no named author and the title (between quotes) takes the + role of the author. +\item If a work is authored by someone, ``with'' someone else: This + currently must be tricked in a nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you) + can think of a better solution. +\item Support nonstandard types of authors, like ``Director'' and + ``Series Ed.\hbox{}''. This currently must be tricked in a + nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you) can think of a better solution. +\item Give explicit support for citation to the Bible and other + ``classic'' works and the \emph{DSM}. +\item Give explicit support for music recordings in \entryname{incollection} + entries. +\item Perhaps study referencing legal materials (Appendix~D of the APA + manual). This is actually not high on my priority list. Perhaps + you can use the \pkg{camel} package if you do this often. +\item Define \BibTeX{} macros or strings for commonly encountered + journals (at least the APA journals). +\item Support \pkg{natbib} citation commands (\cmd{\citet}, \cmd{\citep}, + etc.). +\item Improve and extend language support. Most importantly, make sure that + all the \fname{.apc} files support all the new commands with possibly + language-specific code. +\item Continue with transferring reference list formatting code from + \BibTeX{} to \LaTeX. +\item Add options and/or commands for easier customization of reference + list and author index. +\item Introduce options for the \BibTeX{} part, e.g., index vs.\ noindex (so + that \fname{apacitex.bst} becomes superfluous); full first names + instead of only initials, or perhaps options for putting initials + in front of (2nd and later) author names; unsorted reference lists + or lists sorted chronologically (forward or reverse; for CVs); etc. +\item Improve the source code documentation, esp.\ the formatting, + indexing, and cross-referencing. (You only see this if you regenerate + this manual with the \cmd{\AlsoImplementation} flag set.) +\item The APA has recently (June 2007) published the 24-page electronic + document \APACcitebtitle{APA Style Guide to Electronic References}, + see \url{http://books.apa.org/books.cfm?id=4210509} I will + probably purchase this and study it, and incorporate my findings + in the next version of \pkg{apacite}. +\end{itemize} +Quite likely, other problems will come up when using the current version of +\pkg{apacite}, but at least I got it working on the APA manual examples, see +section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. I have lots of ideas for improvements, +extensions, options, etc., but not much time to devote to it. Therefore, it is +difficult to give a good estimate of when I will release a new update. +However, in the meantime, if you have questions, remarks, suggestions, or bug +reports, you can e-mail them to me. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Examples of the APA manual} +\label{sec:xmpl} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +In this section, the \pkg{apacite} package is tested by citing the examples of +the APA manual (5th ed., pp.~207--281), and some additional references for +additional purposes. + +The following list gives the examples from chapter~3 of the APA manual, with +section number. For these and all later examples, whenever I thought it +necessary or desirable, I added some comments. These are indicated by the \EM{} +symbol. Especially for later examples (from chap.~4), the comments frequently +pertain to the corresponding reference list entry. + +\begin{itemize} +\item[3.94] \citeA{3.94-1} compared reaction times\\ + In a recent study of reaction times \cite{3.94-1}\\ + In \citeyearNP{3.94-1} \citeauthor{3.94-1} compared + reaction times\\ + In a recent study of reaction times, \citeA{3.94-1} + described the method\ldots. \citeauthor{3.94-1} also found +\item[3.95] \citeA{3.95-1} found\\ + \citeA{3.95-1} found\\ + \citeauthor{3.95-1} found\\ + \fullcite{3.95-2} and \fullcite{3.95-3}\\ + \citeA{3.95-2} and \citeA{3.95-3}\\ + \EM It seems that if ``et al.\hbox{}'' would refer to one additional + author, then this author is named instead of the ``et al.\hbox{}'' + clause.\\ + \citeA{3.95-4} and \citeA{3.95-5}\\ + as \citeA{3.95-6} demonstrated\\ + \EM The comma after ``Nightlinger'' in the reference list + does not look right, but is explicitly required by the APA. + Of course, with people as authors, + one almost always has initials (although I have seen + an example of an econometrician who only had + one name), so this problem is not likely to occur. + With nicknames (``screen names'' as they are called in the + APA manual below ex. 85) in messages to newsgroups, initials + are typically missing, but then there is usually (always?) + only one author, so the problem does not exist either. + The problem can, however, come up when there are two authors, + the first of which is a corporate author, or with artists, + e.g., the song ``Into the Groove'' is written by + Madonna and Stephen Bray. \\ + as has been shown \cite{3.95-7} +\item[3.96] \cite{3.96-1}\\ + \cite{3.96-1}\\ + \cite{3.96-2}\\ + \EM If the \fieldname{firstkey} field is different for different + references + and the \fieldname{key} field is the same, then, analogous + to the use of extra authors in 3.95 above, \pkg{apacite} + uses the \fieldname{firstkey} field for all citations:\\ + \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6};\\ + \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6}.\\ + Although this is a constructed example, these organizations + really exist. The ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond'' + is the Royal Dutch Chess Association and the + ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond'' is the Royal Dutch + Skating Association. Both are abbreviated to KNSB and + presumably, both publish an annual report each year. + Furthermore, in these examples, I copied the contents of the + \fieldname{author} field to the \fieldname{publisher} field. + \pkg{apacite} recognizes this and puts the APA-requirement + ``Author'' as publisher description in the reference list. + Other styles may prefer the full publisher name again. +\item[3.97] on free care \cite{3.97-1}\\ + \EM The order of the + closing quotes and the comma is different from the + APA manual. I think this one is more logical, although the + APA manual's is the conventional one, presumably for + aesthetic reasons. I hope to implement this in a future + version.\\ + the book \citeA{3.97-2}\\ + \cite{3.97-3}\\ + \EM If two articles both have no author and the title and + the year are the same, a's and b's should be used: + \citeA{3.97-4}, \citeA{3.97-5}, and \citeA{3.97-6}. + The latter two entries are correctly sorted by month, + through the way the month macros are defined in + the \fname{.bst} files. +\item[3.98] \citeA{3.98-1} and \citeA{3.98-2} also found\\ + \citeA{3.98-3} and \citeA{3.98-4} studied +\item[3.99] Past research \cite{3.99-1,3.99-2}\\ + Past research \cite{3.99-3,3.99-4,3.99-5}\\ + Several studies + \cite{3.99-6,3.99-7,3.99-8,3.99-9,3.99-10,3.99-11}\\ + Several studies \cite{3.99-12,3.99-13,3.99-14}\\ + \EM \pkg{apacite} does not (yet?) sort the cited + references in the text (of course it does for the reference + list), as required by the APA manual.\\ + (\citeNP{3.99-15}; see also \citeNP{3.99-16,3.99-17})\\ + \EM Note that I had to use \cmd{\citeNP} here. +\item[3.100] \cite{3.100-1}\\ + \EM This is not an example, but a rule in the text. + The ``\bibnodate'' is handled by the \cmd{\bibnodate} + macro. It is not clear whether it is really meant that the + in-text form is \citeauthor{3.100-1}, \citeyearNP{3.100-1} + or the more logically consistent \citeA{3.100-1}. + The former can (currently) only be accomplished by using + \cmd{\citeauthor} and \cmd{\citeyearNP} explicitly, + whereas the latter is simply obtained by \cmd{\citeA}.\\ + \cite{3.100-1b}\\ + \EM Again, this is not an example, but a rule in the text.\\ + \cite{3.100-2}\\ + \citeA{3.100-3}\\ + \EM For citations to the bible, I used \cmd{\biblecite} and + several obvious variations on it, as discussed in + section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}:\\ + \cmd{\bibleciteA}, first cite: \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\ + \cmd{\bibleciteA}, second cite: \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\ + \cmd{\biblecite}, first cite: \fullbiblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\ + \cmd{\biblecite}, second cite: \biblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\ + (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, first cite: + \fullbibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\ + (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, second cite: + \bibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\ + \EM Here, there probably should be a comma if it's the first + cite and not a comma when it's a later cite. A difficult one.\\ + \EM Ancient Greek and Roman works should be treated similarly, + i.e., not be listed in the reference list. But it seems to me + that title and/or author must be given in the text as well. + Maybe I will try to construct a tentative example of this in + a future release. +\item[3.101] \cite[p.~332]{3.101-1}\\ + \cite[chap.~3]{3.101-2}\\ + \EM If you like, you can use the \pkg{apacite}-defined + abbreviation commands \verb+\BPG+ and \verb+\BCHAP+.\\ + \cite[\P~5]{3.101-3}\\ + \cite[Conclusion section, para.~1]{3.101-4} +\item[3.102] \EM Personal communication is not really citation and should + be done manually:\\ + T.~K. Lutes (personal communication, April 18, 2001)\\ + (V.-G. Nguyen, personal communication, September 28, 1998) +\item[3.103] \cite<see Table~2 of>[for complete data]{3.103-1} +\end{itemize} + +\noindent +Chapter~4 of the APA manual deals with the reference list +and only mentions some in-text citation issues in passing. +Therefore, the rest mainly requires a lot of moving back and forth +between the reference list and this part. I start with the +more general part, sections 4.01--4.15, presented similar to +the sections from chapter~3 as presented above. +\begin{itemize} +\item[4.04] \EM First, some examples mentioned in the text:\\ + \citeA{4.04-t1}, + \citeA{4.04-t2}, + \citeA{4.04-t3}, + \citeA{4.04-t4}, + \citeA{4.04-t5}, + \citeA{4.04-t6}, + \citeA{4.04-t7}, + \citeA{4.04-t8}, + \citeA{4.04-t9}\\ + \EM The APA manual states that prefixes must be treated + according to the rules of the language of origin. These rules + can differ a lot between languages (and countries) and it + is impossible to know all these rules. The APA manual gives two + examples, one in which ``De Vries'' is treated as the surname, + and one in which ``Helmholtz'' is the surname and ``von'' is + the ``von'' part of the name. + + In the former case, the author is referred to as, say, ``De Vries + (1999)'' in text and ``De Vries, J. (1999).'', alphabetized under + ``D'' in the reference list. In the second example, the author is + referred to as, say, ``Helmholtz (1870)'' and listed in the + reference list as ``Helmholtz, H. L. F. von. (1870).'', + alphabetized under ``H''. To get this right, the author must be + defined as +\begin{verbatim} + author = {H. L. F. von Helmholtz}, +\end{verbatim} + or +\begin{verbatim} + author = {von Helmholtz, H. L. F.}, +\end{verbatim} + then \BibTeX{} will assign the correct parts to the first names, + ``von''-part, and last name. The seemingly logical +\begin{verbatim} + author = {Helmholtz, H. L. F. von}, +\end{verbatim} + will not be formatted correctly, because ``von'' is now + considered to be part of the first names and therefore + abbreviated to ``v.''. + + Below, under example B-2, I will further discuss some + issues about ``von'' parts. + + \EM The APA manual requires that numerals are alphabetized + as if they were spelled out. This is not done by \pkg{apacite}, + so when applicable should be done by the user, e.g.\ by using + the \cmd{\APACSortNoop} command as discussed in + section~\ref{subsec:sort}. I give one fictitious example + \cite{4.04-t10}. + + \citeA{4.04-1}\\ + \citeA{4.04-2}\\ + \citeA{4.04-3}\\ + \citeA{4.04-4}\\ + \citeA{4.04-5}\\ + \citeA{4.04-6}\\ + \citeA{4.04-7}\\ + \citeA{4.04-8}\\ + \citeA{4.04-9}\\ + \citeA{4.04-10}\\ + \citeA{4.04-11}\\ + \citeA{4.04-12}\\ + \EM As stated in the APA manual, an exception to the rule + of sorting by title if author and year are the same occurs + when the works are identified as a series. Then ordering + the parts of the series sequentially can be done using the + \cmd{\APACSortNoop} command.\\ + \EM Here, it says that only ``A'' and ``The'' are excluded + from the sorting (if they are the initial words), but I + assume they mean ``An'' as well. This is how it is + implemented in \pkg{apacite}. + + \citeA{4.04-13}\\ + \citeA{4.04-14}\\ + \EM I have not (yet?) studied referencing legal materials. + In the first version of \pkg{apacite}, I defined a + \entryname{literal} type, so that the users can + literally format such entries themselves. This is still + available. However, I think that if you need to refer to + legal cases, you can find a way to use the + \entryname{misc} type to get it right. I might study this + and give examples in a next version of \pkg{apacite}. +\item[4.05] \citeA{4.05-1}\\ + \nocitemeta{4.05-2}\citeA{4.05-2}\\ + \EM Here I used the \cmd{\nocitemeta} command to let + \pkg{apacite} know that a meta-analysis is reported and this + work is included in it. As you can see, you can still cite + the work by using the normal citation commands such as + \cmd{\citeA}. +\item[4.08] \citeA{4.08-1}\\ + \citeA{4.08-2}\\ + \citeA{4.08-3}\\ + \EM To obtain the ``(with \dots)'' description in the + reference list, I used the \cmd{\bibliteral} command. + Furthermore, to get this formatted correctly in the author + index, I used the \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot} command to + suppress an additional period. These commands are described + in section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}. + + To \BibTeX{}, the \cmd{\bibliteral} construction is a complicated + accented character, which is the second initial of the author. + Consequently, this does not work properly with styles that put + the initials \emph{before} the surnames, and care must be + exercised with ``junior'' parts (see ex.~70). Furthermore, + this construction must be put between a pair of + braces in order for \BibTeX{} to treat it as an accented letter, + instead of abbreviating it. +\item[4.09] \citeA{4.09-1} +\item[4.10] \citeA{4.10-1}\\ + \citeA{4.10-2} +\item[4.11] \citeA{4.11-1}\\ + \citeA{4.11-2}\\ + \EM Note that in the \fname{.bib} file, the ``junior'' part comes + directly after the surname and a comma, with the initials + after the ``junior'' part, whereas in the formatted + reference list, the more logical order \opt{surname}, + \opt{initials}, \opt{junior}, is used. +\item[4.12] \citeA{4.12-1} +\item[4.13] \citeA{4.13-1}\\ + \EM ``For substantial reference works with a large editorial + board, naming the lead editor followed by \texttt{et al.} is + acceptable''. This is now implemented in \pkg{apacite} as + follows: If there are 7 or more editors, only the first one + is named, followed by ``et al.\hbox{}'' \cite{4.13-2}. +\item[4.15] \citeA{4.15-1}\\ + \EM Here I used the new \fieldname{url} and + \fieldname{lastchecked} fields.\\ + \citeA{4.15-2} +\end{itemize} + +\noindent +The rest is from section~4.16, the examples section. The section number +is omitted, but A--I are used instead for the unnumbered examples. For +the numbered examples, only the number is given. +The following enumerated list gives the example number, and +the two basic in-text citation commands, both in a full and +short form, of the examples. +\begin{enumerate} +\item[A-1] \cite{A-1} \\ \cite{A-1} \\ \fullciteA{A-1} \\ \citeA{A-1} +\item \cite{ex1} \\ \cite{ex1} \\ \fullciteA{ex1} \\ \citeA{ex1} +\item \cite{ex2} \\ \cite{ex2} \\ \fullciteA{ex2} \\ \citeA{ex2} +\item \cite{ex3} \\ \cite{ex3} \\ \fullciteA{ex3} \\ \citeA{ex3} +\item \cite{ex4} \\ \cite{ex4} \\ \fullciteA{ex4} \\ \citeA{ex4}\\ + \cite{ex4-2} \\ \cite{ex4-2} \\ \fullciteA{ex4-2} \\ \citeA{ex4-2}\\ + \EM Note that the list of authors can be finished with + ``\verb+and others+'' if there are more than 6 authors, or + all authors can be given, in which case \pkg{apacite} truncates + the list after the first~6. For compatibility with other styles, + the latter is preferable. +\item \cite{ex5} \\ \cite{ex5} \\ \fullciteA{ex5} \\ \citeA{ex5} +\item \cite{ex6} \\ \cite{ex6} \\ \fullciteA{ex6} \\ \citeA{ex6} +\item \cite{ex7} \\ \cite{ex7} \\ \fullciteA{ex7} \\ \citeA{ex7}\\ + \EM Here, I used +\begin{verbatim} + month = spring, +\end{verbatim} + using the new \verb+spring+ macro defined in the \fname{.bst} files. +\item \cite{ex8} \\ \cite{ex8} \\ \fullciteA{ex8} \\ \citeA{ex8}\\ + \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the + following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules.\\ + \EM The \fieldname{month} field is formatted as +\begin{verbatim} + month = aug # "/" # sep, +\end{verbatim} + which uses the month macros and \BibTeX's concatenation + operator `\verb+#+'. +\item \cite{ex9} \\ \cite{ex9} \\ \fullciteA{ex9} \\ \citeA{ex9}\\ + \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the + following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules. +\item \cite{ex10} \\ \cite{ex10}\\ \fullciteA{ex10}\\ \citeA{ex10} +\item \cite{ex11} \\ \cite{ex11}\\ \fullciteA{ex11}\\ \citeA{ex11}\\ + \EM Apparently, a weekly newspaper is not a magazine and should + therefore include ``p.\hbox{}'' or ``pp.\hbox{}'' in front of + the page + number(s), whereas a magazine article should not. I do not + understand the distinction very well and find it not very + useful as well, but will adhere to it. It means that the + \entryname{newspaper} type gets the ``pp.\hbox{}'', whereas + \entryname{magazine} and \entryname{article}, which are now + identical, do not. +\item \cite{ex12} \\ \cite{ex12}\\ \fullciteA{ex12}\\ \citeA{ex12}\\ + \EM Here, \verb+\emph{DSM-IV}+ must be entered without an extra + pair of braces in the title field; see ex.~73 for the intricacies + of braces and \verb+\emph+ in the title field. +\item \cite{ex13} \\ \cite{ex13}\\ \fullciteA{ex13}\\ \citeA{ex13}\\ + \EM Here, the \fieldname{number} field is \verb+1, Serial No.~231+. +\item \cite{ex14} \\ \cite{ex14}\\ \fullciteA{ex14}\\ \citeA{ex14}\\ + \EM Here, the \fieldname{number} field is \verb+3, Pt.~2+. +\item \cite{ex15} \\ \cite{ex15}\\ \fullciteA{ex15}\\ \citeA{ex15} +\item \cite{ex16} \\ \cite{ex16}\\ \fullciteA{ex16}\\ \citeA{ex16} +\item \cite{ex17} \\ \cite{ex17}\\ \fullciteA{ex17}\\ \citeA{ex17}\\ + \EM This case is the opposite of the more common situation where a + reprint is cited and an original publication year is given. I could + implement similar code to handle this case (and I may if I get requests + to do this), but for the moment, I decided to trick the system: I + used the \cmd{\bibreftext} command mentioned in + section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}. It must be called with two + arguments. Initially, it places the second argument in the text, but + just before the bibliography, its definition is changed so that the + first argument is placed in the reference list. By defining +\begin{verbatim} + year = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}}, +\end{verbatim} + in the \fname{.bib} file, the year is ``1992'' in the reference + list and ``1992/1993'' in the text citations. The \cmd{\protect} + is necessary to make sure that the \cmd{\bibreftext} macro is not + written out in the label-part of the bibliography, because then + only ``1992'' would appear in the text reference. The additional + pair of braces are necessary to make sure that the entry + is alphabetized correctly. When these are omitted, the entry + is alphabetized under the ``P'' of ``protect''. Of course, the + latter is only important if the reference list contains + multiple works by the same author(s), but the same phenomenon + is encountered when the \fieldname{author} or \fieldname{editor} + field starts with a command, or when there is no author or editor + and the \fieldname{title} field starts with a command, as in + the entry \citeA{4.04-t10} introduced in 4.04 above. + + Of course, you can save yourself a lot of trouble by + obtaining the original article and citing that. +\item \cite{ex18} \\ \cite{ex18}\\ \fullciteA{ex18}\\ \citeA{ex18}\\ + \EM Here, the \fieldname{number} field is \verb+Suppl.~2+. +\item \cite{ex19} \\ \cite{ex19}\\ \fullciteA{ex19}\\ \citeA{ex19}\\ + \EM Other styles treat the \emph{Annual Review} as a book + (\emph{Sociological Methodology} is an even stronger example), + so this is a point where the \fname{.bib} file becomes + highly incompatible between styles. This cannot be avoided. +\item \cite{ex20} \\ \cite{ex20}\\ \fullciteA{ex20}\\ \citeA{ex20}\\ + \EM Here, the \fieldname{englishtitle} field is used for the + English translation of the German title. To get the German + capitalization of the title right, the capitalized words must + be protected by an additional pair of braces. +\item \cite{ex21} \\ \cite{ex21}\\ \fullciteA{ex21}\\ \citeA{ex21}\\ + \EM Apparently, a translator and original publication date + do not have to be mentioned here. +\item Seidenberg and McClelland's study \cite<as cited in>{ex22}\\ + %\cite{ex22} \\ \cite{ex22}\\ \fullciteA{ex22}\\ \citeA{ex22}\\ + \EM The APA website (\url{http://www.apastyle.org/faqs.html}) + mentions that the year should generally also be mentioned, + making it a complete cite, except that there is no reference + list entry. In my opinion, it would be better to list the + complete original work in the reference list as well, in case + readers do have access to the original work, but not to the + secondary source. But this is not the APA rule. \\ + \EM You may like to have the authors of the unlisted reference + in the author index as well. Use the \cmd{\AX} command for + this, as explained in section~\ref{sec:autindex}. +\item[B-1] \cite{B-1} \\ \cite{B-1} \\ \fullciteA{B-1} \\ \citeA{B-1} +\item \cite{ex23} \\ \cite{ex23}\\ \fullciteA{ex23}\\ \citeA{ex23}\\ + \EM Here, and in several other references, I put \verb+\hbox{}+ + after the ``\verb+Jr.+'', so that \TeX{} does not consider the + period as a sentence-ending period.\\ + \EM \pkg{apacite} now supports only an integer value (``\verb+3+'') + in the \fieldname{edition} field, and transforms this to + ``3rd''. +\item \cite{ex24} \\ \cite{ex24}\\ \fullciteA{ex24}\\ \citeA{ex24}\\ + \EM The APA manual gives a number, which would not ordinarily be + done with proper books and which suggests that it could also + be treated as a report. In that case, the default + ``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}'' + description should be left out, however. This can be accomplished + by defining +\begin{verbatim} + type = {\bibnotype}, +\end{verbatim} + which flags that the type must be left out, see ex.~42. + However, for books, it now works fine leaving the \fieldname{type} + field empty and giving the number in the \fieldname{number} field. +\item \cite{ex25} \\ \cite{ex25}\\ \fullciteA{ex25}\\ \citeA{ex25}\\ + \EM According to the note after ex.~25 in the APA manual, + an edited book with ``just one'' author should list + the editor (and translator, when available) after the + title, just like the translator. An example of this is + \citeA{ex25-t1}. (Should the original years of publication + be used here?) + + However, what does ``just one author'' mean here? Does it mean that if + there are 2 authors and 1 or more editors, the editors should + not be mentioned, or the authors should not be mentioned? + Presumably, it means the following: + In the default case, an edited book consists of several chapters, + with different chapters written by different authors. In this case, + the reference to the whole book lists only the editor(s). + If every chapter is written by the same author, and there are 1 + or more editors, their condition holds. I think that if all + chapters are written by the same $n$ ($\geq 2$) authors, it should + also be treated in this way, i.e., with the authors in the + author position and the editor behind the title. A difficult + case would appear if the book were a collection of works of, say, + 2 authors, with some chapters written by one and some by the + other, and some jointly, as in \citeA{ex25-t2}. These choices have + to be made by the user, however, \pkg{apacite} will format author, + editor, and translator, whenever available. +\item \cite{ex26} \\ \cite{ex26}\\ \fullciteA{ex26}\\ \citeA{ex26}\\ + \EM According to section~3.97, the title should be in italics. + In this example, in the citation, it is not given in italics, + but this must be an error, because they do give it in italics + on p.~219 (but give no date there). +\item \cite{ex27} \\ \cite{ex27}\\ \fullciteA{ex27}\\ \citeA{ex27}\\ + \EM Here, the \fieldname{edition} field has value + ``\verb+Rev.\hbox{}+'' and \pkg{apacite} handles this + noninteger value correctly as well. +\item \cite{ex28} \\ \cite{ex28}\\ \fullciteA{ex28}\\ \citeA{ex28}\\ + \EM Use the en-dash (``\verb+--+'') and not simply a hyphen + (``\verb+-+''), because the latter is not considered to mean + ``to'' by \pkg{apacite} (cf.\hbox{} ``Vol.~A-1''). +\item \EM As mentioned in section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}, \fname{apacdoc.sty} + provides the \cmd{\DSMcite} macro and some related + alternatives to get the \emph{DSM} references right. On rereading + the description in the APA manual, I discovered that previous + versions of \pkg{apacite} did not format the first citation + correctly, although the description is a bit ambiguous as to + how exactly the first citation should be formatted. Therefore, + I looked at a recent issue of + \emph{Journal of Abnormal Psychology}, \emph{116}(3); and + \emph{Psychological Assessment}, \emph{19}(2). These show + some slight variations, some of which have good reasons, but + others seem arbitrary. In all articles I looked at, the first + citation was an in-text citation, and the following form was + the most frequently used, and thus implemented in + \fname{apacdoc.sty}:\\ + \cmd{\DSMciteA}, first citation: \DSMciteA{ex29} \\ + \EM The following citations then only use the abbreviated title:\\ + \cmd{\DSMciteA}, second citation: \DSMciteA{ex29} \\ + \EM Because I haven't found a parenthetical first cite, I + have to use some logic and common sense to define it:\\ + \cmd{\DSMcite}, first citation: \DSMfullcite{ex29} \\ + \EM Subsequent parenthetical cites are formatted as\\ + \cmd{\DSMcite}, second citation: \DSMcite{ex29} \\ + \EM Finally, here are ``\verb+NP+'' versions of them:\\ + \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, first citation: \DSMfullciteNP{ex29} \\ + \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, second citation: \DSMciteNP{ex29} \\ + To use these citation commands, you have to provide a + \fieldname{key} field that contains a \cmd{\bibDSM} + command: +\begin{verbatim} + key = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric Association}{Diagnostic + and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders}{4th + ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}}, +\end{verbatim} + As is evident from this example, the four arguments are + author, full title, edition, short title. Thus, because + all this information is provided in the \fname{.bib} + entry (and not preprogrammed in \pkg{apacite}), it is + conceivable that this command is useful for other types + of works as well. The generality is a bit limited, though, + because all four arguments must be available and have + meaningful content (i.e., should not be empty). But it + is relatively straightforward to write your own specialized + citation commands, based on the \cmd{\DSMcite} code, + which do not require all parts to be available. + + However, the \cmd{\DSM*} macros are still very rough. Multiple + citations are not handled well, so only one work should + be cited with such a macro. Furthermore, the pre- and + postfixes (through \verb+<...>+ and \verb+[...]+) are not + available. Note also that the edition should be spelled + out as ``\verb+4th ed.\hbox{}+''. When I experimented with + just ``\verb+4+'', trying to use the \cmd{\PrintCardinal} + function, things went terribly wrong. Even if I put + \verb+\PrintCardinal{4}+ in the \fieldname{key} field, it + didn't work. Finally, the ``ed.\hbox{}'' must be added + to allow reference to the ``3rd ed., rev.\hbox{}'' and the + ``4th ed., text rev.\hbox{}'' as well. + + \EM In some of the articles I studied, ordinary citations + were used, esp.\ when page numbers were given in + parenthetical cites. Thus, you can also use\\ + \verb+\cite[p.~25]{ex29}+: \cite[p.~25]{ex29} +\item \cite{ex30} \\ \cite{ex30}\\ \fullciteA{ex30}\\ \citeA{ex30}\\ + \EM Here, ``6th ed.'' comes before ``Vols.\ 1--20'', so it is + Vols.\ 1--20 of the 6th edition. Pre-[2003/09/05] versions + of \pkg{apacite} placed volumes before editions, + which is appropriate when different volumes of a series + are not updated jointly, so that you may have the 3rd edition + of Vol.~2, but only the 1st edition of Vol.~6. Should you + want this, you have to trick the system by putting both + elements in the \fieldname{edition} field: +\begin{verbatim} + edition = {\BVOLS\ 1--20, 6th}, +\end{verbatim} + and leaving the \fieldname{volume} field empty.\\ + \EM Does the remark about large editorial boards mean that the + APA intended to add ``et al.\hbox{}'' here? Anyway, here is an + example of such a situation: \citeA{ex30-2}. +\item \cite{ex31} \\ \cite{ex31}\\ \fullciteA{ex31}\\ \citeA{ex31} +\item \cite{ex32} \\ \cite{ex32}\\ \fullciteA{ex32}\\ \citeA{ex32} +\item \cite{ex33} \\ \cite{ex33}\\ \fullciteA{ex33}\\ \citeA{ex33}\\ + \EM This illustrates that a \fieldname{type} field can be used + with a \entryname{book} entry. +\item[B-2] \cite{B-2} \\ \cite{B-2} \\ \fullciteA{B-2} \\ \citeA{B-2} \\ + \EM This is a suitable point to discuss ``von'' parts further. + One of the editors in the current example is called + P. van den Broek. I am Dutch and I recognize this as a Dutch + name, so let's assume that this person is Dutch. Let us now + consider the situation that this person is the (only) author. + Then according to the Dutch rules, this person would be listed in the + reference list as ``Broek, P. van den. (1992)'' and listed under ``B'', + but referred to in the text as ``Van den Broek (1992)'', including + the ``von'' part and capitalizing the first letter. When an + initial precedes the ``von'' part (e.g., when there are two + primary authors with this surname, but with different initials), + then this person would be referred to in the text as + ``P. van den Broek (1992)'', including the ``von'' part, but now + in lower case. The Dutch rules are very difficult to do right in + \BibTeX{}/\LaTeX{} and they conflict with the rules for other + languages, and presumably with the rules of the APA, which would + require this person to be alphabetized under ``V'', at least. + + For the current editor position, there is no big problem with + the APA rules. The ``von'' part can really be put in the ``von'' + part as recognized by \BibTeX{}, which I did, or it can be enclosed + in braces, making the whole last name one part. Either will come + out right and the editor will not be referred to in the text + anyway. With styles that put the initials behind the surname, + it will only work right when put in the ``von'' part. In the + author position, however, things are different. Then this author + could be formatted as +\begin{verbatim} + author = {Van {\lowercase{D}}en Broek, P.}, +\end{verbatim} + where the \verb+{\lowercase{D}}+ construction is used to prevent + \BibTeX{} from interpreting it as a ``von'' part, or +\begin{verbatim} + author = {Van{\ }den{\ }Broek, P.}, + author = {{Van den Broek}, P.}, +\end{verbatim} + which in most situations gives the correct version according to the + Dutch rules with the correct alphabetizing according to the APA + rules. Only in situations when the initial would appear + \emph{before} the surname (when there are other authors with the + same surname or when using other styles), this would lead to + unwanted results. + + If you really want to alphabetize according to the Dutch rules + (which is \emph{not} APA in my interpretation), you can use the + following trick. \fname{apacdoc.sty} defines a macro \cmd{\Dutchvon} + with two arguments, which is equivalent to the \cmd{\bibreftext} + macro discussed in ex.~17 above. That is, in the beginning + of the document, it is defined as echoing its second argument, + and just before the reference list, it is redefined to echo + its first argument. Then define the author as +\begin{verbatim} + author = {van den {\protect\Dutchvon{Broek}{Van den Broek}}, P.}, +\end{verbatim} + which, combined with the \pkg{apacite} formatting implies + that in text, ``Van den Broek'' is used, whereas the author + is alphabetized under ``B'' in the reference list, and listed + as ``Broek, P. van den''. Of course, we could simply have + used \cmd{\bibreftext} again, but that was used to cover a + completely different situation, and I can easily imagine that + when switching to another citation style, the former application + (i.e., 1992/1993) must be kept, but the ``von'' part is handled + differently, so that \cmd{\Dutchvon} must be redefined. + Based on this example, users should be able to define their + own tricks for similar peculiarities. + + Finally, note that in Belgium, where many people + speak Dutch as well, it is customary to alphabetize under ``V'' + anyway (``Van Damme''). +\item \cite{ex34} \\ \cite{ex34}\\ \fullciteA{ex34}\\ \citeA{ex34} +\item \cite{ex35} \\ \cite{ex35}\\ \fullciteA{ex35}\\ \citeA{ex35}\\ + \EM The series title, volume number, and volume title are all + put into the \fieldname{booktitle} field. +\item \cite{ex36} \\ \cite{ex36}\\ \fullciteA{ex36}\\ \citeA{ex36}\\ + \EM Again, the series title, volume number, and volume title are + all put into the \fieldname{booktitle} field.\\ + \EM I had to use some tricks to get the Series and Volume Editors' + descriptions right. The ``(Series Ed.\hbox{})'' is according to + \BibTeX{} part of the last name of the first editor, + and I used the \cmd{\bibeditortype} macro from + \fname{apacdoc.sty} to get the volume editor right. + See section~\ref{subsec:fields} for my interpretation of + APA's usage of the term ``series''. +\item \cite{ex37} \\ \cite{ex37}\\ \fullciteA{ex37}\\ \citeA{ex37}\\ + \EM Note that ``Van'' in the first editor's surname is + capitalized here, as in the APA manual. In the original Dutch, + this would be in lower case. +\item \cite{ex38} \\ \cite{ex38}\\ \fullciteA{ex38}\\ \citeA{ex38} +\item \cite{ex39} \\ \cite{ex39}\\ \fullciteA{ex39}\\ \citeA{ex39}\\ + \EM Here, it is stated that the translator's name should be put + after the editor's name when both are different, but in ex.~40, + the translators are put after the title, before the editors. + Apparently, if the book is a collection of works by one + author(-group), edited and translated, then the translator + should come after the editor, but if different chapters + are translated by different translators, or perhaps not all + are translated works, then the translator should come after + the title. Of course, \pkg{apacite} has no way of knowing this. + In the current implementation, for an \entryname{incollection}, + if the editor and translator are the same, they are formatted as + in this example, whereas if they are different, they are treated + as in ex.~40 below. I think this will be satisfactory in + most cases. If you really want the translator after the editor + when they are different, you can trick the system in a way + similar to ex.~36. +\item \cite{ex40} \\ \cite{ex40}\\ \fullciteA{ex40}\\ \citeA{ex40}\\ + \EM See my comments to ex.~39 above. + + A test of the \fieldname{originaljournal} formatting: + \citeA{ex40-t1}. +\item[C-1] \cite{C-1} \\ \cite{C-1} \\ \fullciteA{C-1} \\ \citeA{C-1}\\ + \EM The APA manual initially formats the number with an + en-dash: ``91--5''. When it discusses the number separately, + however (p.~256), it uses a single hyphen: ``91-5''. Logically, + the latter makes more sense to me (and is generally used in + other numbers in the APA manual as well), so that's what I + did here. Moreover, if the en-dash would be entered as + ``\verb+--+'' in the \fieldname{number} field, \pkg{apacite} + would interpret this as ``to'' and insert ``Nos.\hbox{}'' + instead of ``No.\hbox{}''. Thus, if you want the en-dash, + you have to put this in the \fname{.bib} file in a different + way, e.g., using the \cmd{\textendash} command. +\item \cite{ex41} \\ \cite{ex41}\\ \fullciteA{ex41}\\ \citeA{ex41} +\item \cite{ex42} \\ \cite{ex42}\\ \fullciteA{ex42}\\ \citeA{ex42}\\ + \EM I used the \cmd{\bibnotype} command to suppress the default + ``(Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{})'' description. Actually, I don't think + there is anything wrong with calling a report a report, be it + ``technical'' by default, or by specifying +\begin{verbatim} + type = {Report}, +\end{verbatim} + except that it's not done so in this specific example in the + APA manual. But there does not seem to be a rule against it. + + \EM The NTIS information is put in a \fieldname{note} field. +\item \cite{ex43} \\ \cite{ex43}\\ \fullciteA{ex43}\\ \citeA{ex43}\\ + \EM The ERIC number is given in the \fieldname{note} field. +\item \cite{ex44} \\ \cite{ex44}\\ \fullciteA{ex44}\\ \citeA{ex44} +\item \cite{ex45} \\ \cite{ex45}\\ \fullciteA{ex45}\\ \citeA{ex45} +\item \cite{ex46} \\ \cite{ex46}\\ \fullciteA{ex46}\\ \citeA{ex46}\\ + \EM Note that in the example in the APA manual, ``Western Australia'' + \emph{is} mentioned in the publisher location, whereas their rule + explicitly states that this should not be the case in this + situation, and they stress that again below the example. + Therefore, I did not mention ``Western Australia'' in the + \fieldname{publisher} field. +\item \cite{ex47} \\ \cite{ex47}\\ \fullciteA{ex47}\\ \citeA{ex47} +\item \cite{ex48} \\ \cite{ex48}\\ \fullciteA{ex48}\\ \citeA{ex48} +\item \cite{ex49} \\ \cite{ex49}\\ \fullciteA{ex49}\\ \citeA{ex49} +\item \cite{ex50} \\ \cite{ex50}\\ \fullciteA{ex50}\\ \citeA{ex50} +\item \cite{ex51} \\ \cite{ex51}\\ \fullciteA{ex51}\\ \citeA{ex51}\\ + \EM As of this version of \pkg{apacite}, the location of a + \entryname{lecture} can be given in the \fieldname{address} + field. +\item \cite{ex52} \\ \cite{ex52}\\ \fullciteA{ex52}\\ \citeA{ex52} +\item \cite{ex53} \\ \cite{ex53}\\ \fullciteA{ex53}\\ \citeA{ex53} +\item \cite{ex54} \\ \cite{ex54}\\ \fullciteA{ex54}\\ \citeA{ex54} +\item \cite{ex55} \\ \cite{ex55}\\ \fullciteA{ex55}\\ \citeA{ex55}\\ + \EM It seems logical to suppress the original year in the + citation if it's the same as the year of the abstract, cf.\ + the comment to ex.~17 in the APA manual (p.~245). + + \EM According to example 54 and the text below it, an ``A'' + or ``B'' should be added to the volume number of \emph{DAI} + of this entry, presumably an ``A'', but because they did not + give one, I left it out as well. +\item \cite{ex56} \\ \cite{ex56}\\ \fullciteA{ex56}\\ \citeA{ex56} +\item \cite{ex57} \\ \cite{ex57}\\ \fullciteA{ex57}\\ \citeA{ex57}\\ + \EM In ex.~59, the city should not be mentioned because it is + already mentioned in the name of the university. Here, the + city \emph{is} mentioned again, which seems contradictory. + This is all in the \fname{.bib} file; \pkg{apacite} uses + whatever is given there, so this is not a formatting problem + for \pkg{apacite} itself. +\item \cite{ex58} \\ \cite{ex58}\\ \fullciteA{ex58}\\ \citeA{ex58} +\item \cite{ex59} \\ \cite{ex59}\\ \fullciteA{ex59}\\ \citeA{ex59}\\ + \EM See ex.~57 for the city issue. +\item \cite{ex60} \\ \cite{ex60}\\ \fullciteA{ex60}\\ \citeA{ex60} +\item \cite{ex61} \\ \cite{ex61}\\ \fullciteA{ex61}\\ \citeA{ex61}\\ + \EM The description of the data goes into the + \fieldname{type} field. It may be more logical to put it + in the \fieldname{title} field, with some trickery to indicate + that it's a description and not a title, but putting it in the + \fieldname{type} field already ensures that it's formatted + correctly, so I think I'm gonna be lazy on this one. The same + applies more or less to reviews (G-1, 63, 64), although there + it is logical to put at least ``Review'' in the \fieldname{type} + field, so as we're already there, we might as well make it + complete. +\item \cite{ex62} \\ \cite{ex62}\\ \fullciteA{ex62}\\ \citeA{ex62}\\ + \EM ``Available from'' an address should be spelled out in the + \fieldname{note} field, to get the parentheses. ``Available + from'' a website is without parentheses, see ex.~95. +\item[G-1] \cite{G-1} \\ \cite{G-1} \\ \fullciteA{G-1} \\ \citeA{G-1}\\ + \EM See my comments to ex.~61 above about the logic of the + \fieldname{type} field. For a review, the \fieldname{type} + field must contain the message that it is a review of a + \emph{book} (or motion picture, or whatever it is a review of) + and give the title of the reviewed work in italics, which must + be manually formatted, e.g., by using the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} + macro. The author of the reviewed work should apparently not be + mentioned. +\item \cite{ex63} \\ \cite{ex63}\\ \fullciteA{ex63}\\ \citeA{ex63} +\item \cite{ex64} \\ \cite{ex64}\\ \fullciteA{ex64}\\ \citeA{ex64} \\ + \EM Here, the title of the motion picture, + \APACcitebtitle{Discovering Psychology}, is capitalized, + whereas this was not done with book titles in ex.~G-1 and 63. + I don't know whether this is an error or an implicit rule, + but this formatting must be done in the \fname{.bib} file, + so it's up to the user to do this as desired. +\item \EM The rules for movies, television series, etc.\ do not appeal + very much to me, although they are not nearly as bad as those + for music recordings (ex.~69 and further, see below). My + primary objection is that when referring to movies and TV series, + the title is the most important characteristic. The director + may be a good second in some cases, but producers and writers are + almost always unknown to the general public and not relevant + when referring to them. You talk about the movie \emph{Jaws} + and not about Spielberg (1975) or whoever wrote the script. + Recognizing the primary creative input or authorship may be + politically correct, but not particularly informative. + However, you may think that my objections are mainly + driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries + in \BibTeX{}. Anyway, here are my attempts to implement + the APA rules.\\ + \cite{ex65-1} \\ \cite{ex65-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-1}\\ \citeA{ex65-1} \\ + \EM I find ``United States'' a somewhat uninformative address. + + \cite{ex65-2} \\ \cite{ex65-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-2}\\ \citeA{ex65-2} \\ + \EM Note again that this and the following ``Available from'' + must be between + parentheses (accomplished by putting it in the \fieldname{note} field), + whereas ``Available from'' some web site must not be between + parentheses, cf.\ ex.~95. + + \EM In these examples, I used the \cmd{\bibliteral}, + \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}, and \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot} commands + from \fname{apacdoc.sty}.\\ + \cite{ex65-3} \\ \cite{ex65-3}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-3}\\ \citeA{ex65-3}\\ + \EM Here, I simply let ``(Producer)'' be part of the author name, + but because of this addendum, the entry is not sorted correctly + in the reference list: It should be before \citeA{APAManual}, + but because of the addendum, the authors are different to \BibTeX{} + and this one comes after \citeA{APAManual}. The ordering can be + corrected by using the \cmd{\APACSortNoop} command as discussed in + section~\ref{subsec:sort}. However, the authors of these entries will + still be different. If it's important that they are the same (e.g., + for the author index), the \fname{.bbl} file should be edited manually. + This seems an extremely rare event, though. +\item \cite{ex66} \\ \cite{ex66}\\ \fullciteA{ex66}\\ \citeA{ex66} \\ + \EM Here, I used the same tricks as in ex.~65. +\item \cite{ex67} \\ \cite{ex67}\\ \fullciteA{ex67}\\ \citeA{ex67} \\ + \EM I used several tricks introduced before: the \cmd{\bibeditortype} + (cf.\ ex.~36) construction to be able to use ``(Producer)'' in + the editor position instead of ``(Ed.\hbox{})'', and the ones used + in the previous examples. Because there is another Miller as well, + the initial is given here. To make sure that \BibTeX{} thinks + that there is only one initial, but the ``(Producer)'' is formatted + correctly, the name is defined as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + editor = {Miller, {\bibinitial{R\bibeditortype{Producer}}}}, +\end{verbatim} + using the \cmd{\bibinitial} and \cmd{\bibeditortype} commands from + \fname{apacdoc.sty}. + It is then formatted correctly both in the text and in the reference + list if \cmd{\bibeditortype} is defined to swallow its argument + in the text, and redefined prior to the bibliography. After the + bibliography (before the index), it has to be redefined again + to swallow its argument. +\item \cite{ex68} \\ \cite{ex68}\\ \fullciteA{ex68}\\ \citeA{ex68}\\ + \EM Again, I used several tricks that were also used in the previous + examples. +\item \EM The rules for music recordings do not make any sense, and they + are not entirely clear as well. It would seem to me that + most pop, rock, and other ``light'' music songs are almost always + attributed to the performing artist. You can usually read who the + composer and lyricist of the song are on the inlay-details + of the CD, but if you want the reader to refer to ``My Way'', + the reader will easier find it (in a CD store or on the + internet, for example) under ``Frank Sinatra'' than under + the composer's name (whoever that may be). Furthermore, the + year of release of the CD (or other medium) seems more relevant + in referring to the CD than the year of copyright of the + specific song, or the recording date. + + For classical music, things are different. Then, the writer (composer) + is often more important than the performing artist, although + the percentage of people who know who wrote the lyrics for + Mozart's operas may not be high. Furthermore, it may be + time-consuming and not very relevant for most authors and + readers to find the year in which a certain piece was written, + although strictly speaking, we should use the ``date of copyright'', + which is not relevant for a lot of classical music. + + However, when referring to Beethoven's 9th symphony, say, it will + typically not be very informative to refer to a specific recording on a + specific CD, unless that specific recording is the subject of interest, + but then it would seem that the ``performing artist'' (conductor or + orchestra) should take the role of ``author''. For example, when + comparing a performance of this symphony conducted in 1975 by Masur with + a performance of this symphony conducted in 1990 by Bernstein (assuming + this exists), it does not seem logical to compare ``9th Symphony'' + (Beethoven, 1823a, tracks~1--4) with ``9th Symphony'' (Beethoven, 1823b, + tracks~1--4), but more logical to compare Masur (1975) with + Bernstein (1990). + + Finally, it seems a bit strange that the track number should be + mentioned in text, but not in the reference list. + + Again, you may think that my objections are mainly + driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries + in \BibTeX. Nevertheless, here are my attempts to implement + the APA rules, using variations of the \cmd{\citesong} + command, defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}:\\ + \begin{tabular}{ll} + \cmd{\citeAsong}: & \citeAsong{ex69-1} \\ + \cmd{\citesong}: & \citesong{ex69-1} \\ + \cmd{\citesongNP}: & \citesongNP{ex69-1}\\ + \cmd{\citeAsong}: & \citeAsong{ex69-2} \\ + \cmd{\citesong}: & \citesong{ex69-2} \\ + \cmd{\citesongNP}: & \citesongNP{ex69-2} + \end{tabular}\\ + \EM The \fieldname{key} field contains the relevant + information in the form of a protected \cmd{\bibsong} command: +\begin{verbatim} + key = {{\protect\bibsong{author}{year}{song title}{track info}}}, +\end{verbatim} + Furthermore, I used some tricks to get the reference list + entry right. I used the \entryname{incollection} type as + a basis, with the CD title in the \fieldname{booktitle} field. + At first sight, it seems natural to define +\begin{verbatim} + type = {CD}, +\end{verbatim} + but with an \entryname{incollection}, the \fieldname{type} + field is put after the title, not after the book title. + I may change this for music-types (CD, record, etc.), + but this is currently not yet implemented. This means that the + ``[CD]'' description must be put in the \fieldname{booktitle} + field, after the CD title and with explicit formatting + commands: +\begin{verbatim} + booktitle = {Arkansas Traveler {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}}, +\end{verbatim} + On the other hand, we can now use the \fieldname{type} + field to put the recording artists in for the second example: +\begin{verbatim} + type = {Recorded by G. Bok, A. Mayo, \& E. Trickett}, +\end{verbatim} + We have to change the ``In'' string to ``On'' + (``In'' a book versus ``On'' a CD). This is done with a + macro similar to the \cmd{\bibeditortype} macro discussed + in ex.~36. In this case, the macro is \cmd{\bibInstring}, + defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}, + which has one argument. The macro changes the definition of + the macro \cmd{\BIn} to the argument and then immediately changes + the definition back to the old definition. So it makes a one-time + change. Of course, the \cmd{\bibInstring} macro only works + if it is executed \emph{before} the \cmd{\BIn} macro. The latter + macro comes before the \fieldname{booktitle}, so + \cmd{\bibInstring} must be added to a field that comes before + that. I put it in the \fieldname{title} field: +\begin{verbatim} + title = {Over the Waterfall{\bibInstring{\BOn}}}, +\end{verbatim} + where \cmd{\BOn} is defined by default as ``\BOn''. + Finally, the recording date of the second example (1990) must + be put in the \fieldname{note} field. + + If you want an author index, you would want the authors of + these works in the index as well. Because of the usage of the + \fieldname{key} field, this is not automatically done for the + citations. The \cmd{\AX} command has to be inserted explicitly, + see section~\ref{sec:autindex} above. + + Note that this is all trickery within the \LaTeX{} domain + and the \fname{.bib} file, i.e., the user-definable and + user-customizable area. +\item \cite{ex70} \\ \cite{ex70}\\ \fullciteA{ex70}\\ \citeA{ex70} +\item \cite{ex71-1} \\ \cite{ex71-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-1}\\ \citeA{ex71-1} \\ + \cite{ex71-2} \\ \cite{ex71-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-2}\\ \citeA{ex71-2} \\ + \EM In contrast with earlier versions of \pkg{apacite}, in which + the ``Retrieved \dots'' message had to be formatted in the + \fieldname{howpublished} field, this is now formatted + automatically by using the \fieldname{url} and + \fieldname{lastchecked} fields. +\item \cite{ex72} \\ \cite{ex72}\\ \fullciteA{ex72}\\ \citeA{ex72} +\item \cite{ex73} \\ \cite{ex73}\\ \fullciteA{ex73}\\ \citeA{ex73} \\ + \EM Note that the APA manual breaks a line \emph{after} a + period instead of before, against their own rules. Furthermore, + the APA manual uses a typeface in which `1' (one) and `l' (ell) + are not distinguishable. This requires some guessing of the + correct URLs. I think that this conflicts with their own stress + on accuracy w.r.t.\ URLs. + + \EM Note the subtle use of braces to get \emph{Homo sapiens} + correctly formatted: The capital in \verb+\emph{Homo}+ + is retained by \BibTeX, whereas the capital in + \verb+{\emph{Sapiens}}+ is changed into a lower case letter + by \BibTeX, because of the extra pair of braces. +\item \cite{ex74} \\ \cite{ex74}\\ \fullciteA{ex74}\\ \citeA{ex74} +\item \cite{ex75} \\ \cite{ex75}\\ \fullciteA{ex75}\\ \citeA{ex75}\\ + \EM Note that \BibTeX{} does not consider a question mark + or an exclamation point as the end of the title and the beginning + of the subtitle. Hence, if there is a subtitle after it, the + capitalization of its first word is not retained (unlike + after a colon), so we have to protect it using braces in the + \fname{.bib} file. +\item \cite{ex76} \\ \cite{ex76}\\ \fullciteA{ex76}\\ \citeA{ex76} +\item \cite{ex77} \\ \cite{ex77}\\ \fullciteA{ex77}\\ \citeA{ex77} +\item \cite{ex78} \\ \cite{ex78}\\ \fullciteA{ex78}\\ \citeA{ex78}\\ + \EM For this example, the source is not simply the URL, but + with the qualification ``Columbia University, Institute for + Learning Technologies Web site:''. This means that we cannot + simply use the \fieldname{lastchecked} and \fieldname{url} + fields, but must revert to the way I proposed to format + references to electronic sources in previous versions of + \pkg{apacite}: by putting all the information in a + \fieldname{howpublished} field. This includes explicitly using + the \cmd{\url} command and adding ``\verb+\bibnodot{.}+'' + immediately after the URL. The \cmd{\bibnodot} command, + defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}, swallows the period, so that + there is no period after the URL in the reference list, thus + complying with the APA rules. This also applies to examples + 79, 87, 91, and 95, and all the examples that do not list + a specific URL, but only a description, like + ``the PsycARTICLES database'' (ex.~88). +\item \cite{ex79} \\ \cite{ex79}\\ \fullciteA{ex79}\\ \citeA{ex79} +\item \cite{ex80} \\ \cite{ex80}\\ \fullciteA{ex80}\\ \citeA{ex80} +\item \cite{ex81} \\ \cite{ex81}\\ \fullciteA{ex81}\\ \citeA{ex81} +\item \cite{ex82} \\ \cite{ex82}\\ \fullciteA{ex82}\\ \citeA{ex82}\\ + \EM Here and in ex.~83, I used the \cmd{\BAbstractRetrieved} + and \cmd{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved} commands defined in + \fname{apacdoc.sty} to replace ``Retrieved'' by + ``Abstract retrieved''. +\item \cite{ex83} \\ \cite{ex83}\\ \fullciteA{ex83}\\ \citeA{ex83} \\ +\item \cite{ex84} \\ \cite{ex84}\\ \fullciteA{ex84}\\ \citeA{ex84} +\item \cite{ex85} \\ \cite{ex85}\\ \fullciteA{ex85}\\ \citeA{ex85} \\ + \EM When referring to a message to a newsgroup, internet forum, etc., + use the \entryname{misc} type. Then define +\begin{verbatim} + type = {\bibmessage}, +\end{verbatim} + and use the \fieldname{number} field when relevant. The URL + of the message is given in the \fieldname{url} field. Then + the entry is formatted + correctly: If the message has a number, say 1, it reverts to + ``\verb+[\bibmessage~1]+'', i.e., ``[Msg~1]'' with the default + definition of \cmd{\bibmessage}. If there is no number, the + type identifier is omitted (because it is mentioned as + ``Message posted to [\dots]'' anyway). In both cases, + the title is formatted as an article title, i.e., not + italicized. +\item \cite{ex86} \\ \cite{ex86}\\ \fullciteA{ex86}\\ \citeA{ex86} +\item \cite{ex87} \\ \cite{ex87}\\ \fullciteA{ex87}\\ \citeA{ex87} +\item \cite{ex88} \\ \cite{ex88}\\ \fullciteA{ex88}\\ \citeA{ex88} +\item \cite{ex89} \\ \cite{ex89}\\ \fullciteA{ex89}\\ \citeA{ex89} +\item \cite{ex90} \\ \cite{ex90}\\ \fullciteA{ex90}\\ \citeA{ex90} \\ + \EM Here, ``de Ridder'' may well be a Dutch name. If the APA + manual is serious about its rule to format names as they + should according to the rule of the country of origin, + this name should then be formatted as ``De Ridder''. +\item \cite{ex91} \\ \cite{ex91}\\ \fullciteA{ex91}\\ \citeA{ex91} +\item \cite{ex92} \\ \cite{ex92}\\ \fullciteA{ex92}\\ \citeA{ex92}\\ + \EM From ex.~94 below, I deduce that the version information + should be treated as an edition and not as part of the title. + Therefore, in this example and ex.~94, the version is formatted + in the \fieldname{edition} field: +\begin{verbatim} + edition = {Version~4.0\noedition\ignorespaces}, +\end{verbatim} + using the \cmd{\noedition} command from \fname{apacdoc.sty}, + which temporarily redefines \cmd{\BEd} to do nothing, and + \cmd{\ignorespaces}, which eats up the space that is ordinarily + present between the edition number and the ``ed.\hbox{}'' string. +\item \cite{ex93} \\ \cite{ex93}\\ \fullciteA{ex93}\\ \citeA{ex93}\\ + \EM To test the \entryname{manual} entry: \citeA{ex93-t1}. +\item \cite{ex94} \\ \cite{ex94}\\ \fullciteA{ex94}\\ \citeA{ex94}\\ + \EM The example in the APA manual does not list a date, not even + a ``n.d.\hbox{}''. Given the logic of the APA manual, this seems + an error to me, so I added a ``\cmd{\bibnodate}'' in the + \fieldname{year} field, which becomes ``\bibnodate'' in the + output. If it would really be the rule to omit the year, then + it is not clear when a year must be omitted and when not, or + replaced by ``n.d.\hbox{}''. Furthermore, formatting in both + the \fname{.sty} file and the \fname{.bst} file would have to + be adapted to anticipate a missing year. Currently, I assume + that there should always be something that acts like a date + (a year, an ``in press'', or a ``n.d.\hbox{}''). + + \EM See ex.~92 for the treatment of the version. +\item \cite{ex95} \\ \cite{ex95}\\ \fullciteA{ex95}\\ \citeA{ex95}\\ + \EM Note that here, unlike ex.~44 and ex.~91, + ``U.S.'' is omitted before ``Department of Health and Human + Services''. +\end{enumerate} + +\StopEventually{% +\MakePercentComment +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Change History +\PrintChanges +% +% Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography. +\APACmanBeforeBib +% +% Request apacite or apacitex bibliography style +% depending on whether an index option was requested or not. +\bibliographystyle{\APACbibstyle}% +% Include the bibliography +\bibliography{apa5ex}% +% +% Again redefine commands. +\APACmanBeforeIndex +% +% Include the author index if the index option is on. +\printindex[autx] +% +% Again redefine commands. +\APACmanAfterIndex +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\PrintIndex +\MakePercentIgnore +} +% +\MakePercentIgnore +% \iffalse +%</dtx> +% \fi +% +% \clearpage +% \APACcodePageLayout +% \section{Implementation} +% The following sections describe the source code of the various +% constituent parts of \pkg{apacite}. +% + +% +% \section{\LaTeX\ package (\fname{apacite.sty})} +% This is the \LaTeX\ package part of \pkg{apacite}. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +%% +%% apacite.sty : citation and reference list according to APA manual +%% Written by Erik Meijer +%% +%% Contains code adapted from +%% index.sty [1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)], +%% hyperref.dtx [6.71, 2000/10/04], +%% babel.def [2001/03/01, v3.7h], +%% backref.dtx [1.20, 2002/06/09], +%% ltbibl.dtx [2004/02/15 v1.1q LaTeX Kernel (Bibliography)], +%% bibtopic.dtx [2002/08/22 v1.0k], +%% multibib.dtx [2004/01/28 v1.3 Multiple bibliographies for one document.], +%% multibbl.dtx [2004/07/27 v1.1], +%% amsrefs.dtx [2004/06/30 v2.0] +%% ltidxglo.dtx [1996/01/20 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Index and Glossary)] +%% doc.dtx [2004/02/09 v2.1b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)] +%% and code (used with permission) provided by: +%% Stefan Bj\"ork. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Default. The ``old'' version +%%% \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3} +%%% cannot exist jointly with this, so has to be moved to an option. +\def\@year@\citeauthoryear#1#2#3{#3} + +\DeclareOption{BCAY}{% kept for compatibility with old versions + \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3}% +} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%% No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% The \if is necessary because packages can not be required here, so +% we must handle the consequences of the index and noindex options +% later. +% +\newif\if@APAC@index +\DeclareOption{noindex}{\@APAC@indexfalse}% +% +%%%%%% End No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%% Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +\DeclareOption{index}{\@APAC@indextrue}% +% +%%%%%% End Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%% Include Corporate Authors in index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Use an \if here, the real definitions are handled within the +% index options. +% +\newif\if@APAC@include@corporate +\DeclareOption{includecorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatetrue}% +\DeclareOption{suppresscorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatefalse}% +% +%%%%%% End Corporate Author options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%% Use index package or standard LaTeX index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Use an \if here, the real definitions are handled within the +% index options. +% +\newif\if@APAC@index@package +\DeclareOption{indexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagetrue}% +\DeclareOption{noindexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagefalse}% +% +%%%%%% End index package options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%% Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% +%% Standard index: from the index package +\DeclareOption{stdindex}{% + %% + %% Index style as defined in the index package + %% [1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)], + %% which is the same code as in (v3.02, 15 September 1993), + %% i.e., without table of contents entry. + %% + \ExecuteOptions{index}% + %% + %% This option requires the index package + \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% + %% + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \@ifclassloaded{article}{% + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[% + \section*{\indexname}% + \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else + \index@prologue + \bigskip + \fi + ]% + \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + }{% + \if@restonecol + \onecolumn + \else + \clearpage + \fi + } + }{% + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[% + \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}% + \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else + \index@prologue + \bigskip + \fi + ]% + \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + }{% + \if@restonecol + \onecolumn + \else + \clearpage + \fi + }% + }% + }% +}% +% +\DeclareOption{tocindex}{% + %% + %% Index style as with the stdindex option, but with an + %% added table of contents entry. + %% + \ExecuteOptions{index}% + %% + %% This option requires the index package + \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% + %% + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \@ifclassloaded{article}{% + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[% + \section*{\indexname}% + \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else + \index@prologue + \bigskip + \fi + ]% + \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + % + % the following line added by EM + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\indexname}% + % + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + }{% + \if@restonecol + \onecolumn + \else + \clearpage + \fi + } + }{% + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[% + \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}% + \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else + \index@prologue + \bigskip + \fi + ]% + \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + % + % the following line added by EM + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}% + % + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + }{% + \if@restonecol + \onecolumn + \else + \clearpage + \fi + }% + }% + }% +} +% +\DeclareOption{emindex}{% + %% + %% My (EM) own favorite index style. Maybe you like it too. + %% + \ExecuteOptions{index}% + %% + %% This option requires the index package + \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% + %% + \AtEndOfPackage{% + %% + %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section + %% title is generated, with a corresponding table of contents + %% entry. theindex is now in multicol environment. + %% + \RequirePackage{multicol} + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\@indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\section*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}% + }% + {\chapter*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}% + }% + \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% do we need this? + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + \setlength{\columnsep}{2em} + \small + \begin{multicols}{2} + \raggedright + }% + {\end{multicols}\normalsize + }% + }% +}% +% +\DeclareOption{ltxemindex}{% + %% + %% Variation on emindex, without the `index' package + %% + \ExecuteOptions{index}% + %% + %% This option drops the index package + \ExecuteOptions{noindexpackage}% + %% + \AtEndOfPackage{% + %% + %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section + %% title is generated, with a corresponding table of contents + %% entry. theindex is now in multicol environment. + %% + \RequirePackage{multicol} + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + % The index naming scheme of the `index' package is also absent, + % therefore try to guess an index name. + \@ifundefined{currentindexname}{% + \@ifundefined{indexname}{% + \edef\@indexname{Index}% + }{\edef\@indexname{\indexname}}% + }{\edef\@indexname{\currentindexname}}% + \@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\section*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}% + }% + {\chapter*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}% + }% + \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% do we need this? + \def\pfill{\relax{}}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + \setlength{\columnsep}{2em} + \small + \begin{multicols}{2} + \raggedright + }% + {\end{multicols}\normalsize + }% + }% +} +%%%%%% End Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%% Some options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +\newif\if@numberedbib +\DeclareOption{numberedbib}{% + % + % The bibliography is a section or chapter with a number (e.g., + % section 6 or chapter 10). I think this does not work (i.e., it is + % still unnumbered) when the section/chapter is in the backmatter. + % + \@numberedbibtrue +} + +\DeclareOption{unnumberedbib}{% + % + % The bibliography is a section or chapter without a number (i.e., + % a section* or chapter*). This is the default. + % + \@numberedbibfalse +} + +\DeclareOption{sectionbib}{% + % + % The bibliography is a section. Typically used with the chapterbib + % package, then each chapter has a bibliography section. The + % nosectionbib option makes the bibliography a chapter (if chapters + % are defined). If none of these options are requested, apacite tries + % to guess the most logical choice. The bibliography is a section if + % chapters are not defined or if we are in the ``mainmatter'' of a + % document. Otherwise, it is a chapter. + % + \@ifundefined{@sectionbibtrue}{\newif\if@sectionbib}{}% + % + \@sectionbibtrue +} + +\DeclareOption{nosectionbib}{% + % + % The bibliography is a chapter if chapters are defined + % (otherwise, it is always a section). See the description + % of the sectionbib option above for its usage. + % + \@ifundefined{@sectionbibfalse}{\newif\if@sectionbib}{}% + % + \@sectionbibfalse +} + +\newif\if@tocbib +\DeclareOption{tocbib}{% + % + % The bibliography in the table of contents, even if it's + % unnumbered. This is the default. + % + \@tocbibtrue +} + +\DeclareOption{notocbib}{% + % + % The bibliography not in the table of contents if it's + % unnumbered. (Will be ignored if it's numbered.) + % + \@tocbibfalse +} + +\DeclareOption{bibnewpage}{% + % + % The bibliography is started on a new page if it's a section. + % (Will be ignored if it's a chapter.) + % + \def\@bibnewpage{\bibnewpage} +} + +\DeclareOption{nobibnewpage}{% + % + % The bibliography is started on the same page if it's a section. + % (Will be ignored if it's a chapter.) + % + \let\@bibnewpage\relax +} + + +%%%%%% End options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%% Obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% (For compatibility with previous versions of apacite.) +% +\DeclareOption{hyper}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `hyper' ignored}% +} +\DeclareOption{nohyper}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `nohyper' ignored}% +} +%%%%%% End obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%% Obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% (For compatibility with previous versions of apacite.) +% +\DeclareOption{accentfix}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `accentfix' ignored}% +} +\DeclareOption{noaccentfix}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `noaccentfix' ignored}% +} +%%%%%% End obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%% Execute default options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +\ExecuteOptions{noindex,indexpackage,unnumberedbib,tocbib,% + nobibnewpage,suppresscorporate} + +%%%%%% Execute user-requested options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +\ProcessOptions + +%%%%%% Define author indexing stuff when requested +% +\newcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index} +\if@APAC@index + % + % Author index requested. + % + \if@APAC@index@package + % + % Load \pkg{index} package. + \RequirePackage{index}[1995/09/28] + % + % Define Author Index. + % This may be changed in the preamble of the + % document (or in a user-provided package) + % by a \renewindex command. + % + \newindex{autx}{adx}{and}{\authorindexname} + % + % Author indexing command + % + \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{% + \if@filesw{% + \protected@write\@auxout{}{% + \string\protected@write\string\tf@autx{}{% + \string\string\string + \indexentry{\string#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}}% + }% + \fi + }% + \else + % + % Without \pkg{index} package (experimental). + % A bit of code adapted from ltidxglo.dtx + \newwrite\@AXfile + \immediate\openout\@AXfile=\jobname.adx + \typeout + {Writing author index file \jobname.adx }% + % + \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{% + \protected@write\@AXfile{}% + {\string\indexentry{\string#1}{\thepage}}% + }% + % + % Some code adapted from doc.dtx + \def\PrintAX{\edef\currentindexname{\authorindexname}% + \@input@{\jobname.and}% + \global\let\PrintAX\@empty + }% + % + % Do some hacking to make sure both \printindex and \printindex[autx] are defined + % As yet untested. + \AtBeginDocument{% + % Make sure \printindex is defined. + \@ifundefined{printindex}{\makeindex}{}% + % Now, redefine \printindex to accommodate both \printindex and \printindex[autx] + \let\orig@printindex\printindex + \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\APAC@printindex}{% + \orig@printindex}}% + % + \def\APAC@printindex[autx]{\PrintAX}% + }% + \fi + % + % Index corporate authors? + \if@APAC@include@corporate + % Include corporate authors in index. + \let\corporateAX\AX + \else + % Swallow argument (do not index). + \let\corporateAX\@gobble + \fi + % +\else + % + % No author index. + % + % Wait till \begin{document} for checking whether another + % package is loaded that defines \printindex. + % + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{printindex}% + {%% \printindex not defined. Define \printindex so that it + % suppresses the indexes. + \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{% + \check@printindex[]}}% + % + \def\check@printindex[#1]{\relax }% + }% + {% \printindex defined, so save its definition. + \let\orig@printindex\printindex + % + % Redefine \printindex so that it suppresses the author index + % but does not change other indexes. + % 1. If there is no optional argument, use the original + % definition. + \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{\orig@printindex}}% + % + % 2. If there is an optional argument, check whether it is + % equal to `autx'. If so, suppress this (author) index. + % If not, use the original definition. + \def\check@printindex[#1]{% + % Use a clumsy way to check whether #1 = autx + % but seemingly more elegant ways somehow didn't work. + \expandafter\def\csname APAC@#1\endcsname{DUMMY}% + \@ifundefined{APAC@autx}% + {\orig@printindex[#1]}% + {\let\APAC@autx\@undefined}% + }% + }% + }% + % + % Empty author indexing commands + % + \let\AX\@gobble + \let\corporateAX\@gobble + % +\fi + + +%%%%%% Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% From the instructions of the chapterbib package. + +\@ifundefined{@extra@b@citeb}{\def\@extra@b@citeb{}}{} +\gdef\@extra@binfo{} + +%%%%%% End Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These are recognized by apacite.bst. +\newcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg} +\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program} +\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual} +\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual} +\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software} +\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual} +\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual} +\newcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Command for corporate authors. +%%% This is recognized by apacite.bst. +\let\bibcorporate\relax + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The following commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +%%% They denote that the publication date is unknown, +%%% and that the type should be left empty (for @techreport, where +%%% ``Tech. Rep.'' is the default type if the field is left empty). +\newcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}} +\newcommand{\bibnotype}{} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% cite punctuations % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% text style of authors in-text citation +% (\cite, \shortcite, \fullcite, +% \citeA, \shortciteA, \fullciteA, +% \citeNP, \shortciteNP, \fullciteNP) +\newcommand{\BAstyle}{}% + +% text style of authors in-text citation +% (\citeauthor, \shortciteauthor, \fullciteauthor) +\newcommand{\BAastyle}{}% + +\newcommand{\BBOP}{(} % open parenthesis +\newcommand{\BBCP}{)} % closing parenthesis +\newcommand{\BAP}{ } % after prefix, before first citation +\newcommand{\BBAA}{\&} % between authors in parentheses and ref. sec. +\newcommand{\BBAB}{and} % between authors in text +\newcommand{\BBAY}{, } % between author(s) and year +\newcommand{\BBYY}{, } % between years of multiple citations with same author +\newcommand{\BBC}{; } % between cites +\newcommand{\BBN}{, } % before note +\newcommand{\BBOQ}{} % open quote for article title +\newcommand{\BBCQ}{} % closing quote for article title +% +\newcommand{\BCBT}{,} % comma between authors in ref. sec + % when no. of authors = 2 +\newcommand{\BCBL}{,} % comma before last author +\newcommand{\BAnd}{\&} % for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +% +\newcommand{\BBA}{\BBAA} +% +\let\Bem\emph + +\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''}% Format as article title in text +\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}}% Format as book title in text +\newcommand{\APACSortNoop}[1]{} % Can be used to change the sorting order: + % When put between a pair of braces at the + % front of a field, the entry is sorted on + % the argument of this command, but the + % argument is never displayed. + +% Two commands that are used to trick natbib. +\newcommand{\APACyear}[1]{{#1}}% +\newcommand{\APACexlab}[1]{{#1}}% + +% +% For multiple citations with same author-year. +% (Kruskal, 1964a, 1964b) +% The \protect is necessary when natbib is used. +% +\newcounter{BibCnt} +\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{\alph{BibCnt}} +\newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\protect\theBibCnt} +% +% In press, no date. +% The \mbox prevents a line break at the hyphen. +% +\newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}} +\newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Labels, mostly for reference list % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one +% in the reference list. Here and in other cases, the \hbox{} ensures that +% TeX does not mistake the abbreviation period for a sentence-ending period. +\newcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} +% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one +% in the reference list. The difference with \BOthers is that, if another +% string is used to define \BOthers, this one should always finish with a +% period and the previous one not necessarily (e.g., if explicit ``others'' +% is used). +\newcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} +\newcommand{\BIP}{in press} % used as year for in-press citations +\newcommand{\BIn}{In} % for ``In '' editor... +\newcommand{\Bby}{by} % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints) +\newcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapter +\newcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapters +\newcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}} % editor +\newcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}} % editors +\newcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translator +\newcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translators +\newcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}} % translation, for the year field +\newcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair} % chair of symposium +\newcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs} % chairs +\newcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}} % volume +\newcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}} % volumes +\newcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}} % number +\newcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}} % numbers +\newcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}} % edition +\newcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}} % page +\newcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}} % pages +\newcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}} % (default) technical report type name +\newcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name +% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name +\newcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation} +\newcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis} % (default) master's thesis type name +% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name +\newcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis} +\newcommand{\BAuthor}{Author} % Used if publisher = author +\newcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published} +\newcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from} +\newcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }% Websites; note the space. +\newcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% Websites; note the space. +\newcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }% Messages; note the space. +% +\def\refname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\def\bibname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +% +% An optional note just before the references in the reference list. +% Defaults to nothing, but can be changed to a list of commands +% (e.g., if author formatting should be different in the reference +% list) and/or text (e.g., for an explanatory note). +% +\newcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{} + +% +% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list +% when a meta-analysis is reported. +% +\newcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + References marked with an asterisk indicate studies + included in the meta-analysis.} +% +% The star that's put in front of the entries used in the meta-analysis +% +\newcommand{\APACmetastar}{\ensuremath{{}^\ast}} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Load language dependent sections from an external file. +% (Based on code by Stefan Bj\"ork, 2004/12/25.) +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\AtBeginDocument{% + % + % Both babel and (n)german use \iflanguage to check the main + % language. They both also use \languagename, but that gives + % more problems with dialects. E.g., if \languagename = austrian + % then \iflanguage{german}{Yes}{No} gives Yes. This allows us + % to provide only .apc files for the language class without + % complicated code to check whether a certain dialect is used. + % + % Check whether \iflanguage is defined. If not, no language support + % is offered. + % + \@ifundefined{iflanguage}% + {\relax }% + {% % + % My teTeX under Cygwin automatically loads babel with + % default language "nohyphenation", so this language should + % revert to doing nothing. Strangely enough \iflanguage + % does not work correctly, so I'll use a trick. (Some trial + % and error, because babel.dtx states that there must be + % a '\string ' before the 'nohyphenation', but apparently in + % this situation it's the other way around.) + % + \edef\APAC@tmp{nohyphenation}% + \ifx\languagename\APAC@tmp + \else + \InputIfFileExists{\languagename.apc}{}{% + % + % \languagename.apc does not exist; try whether the current + % language is a dialect of one of the known languages. This + % is not perfect, because languages for which no hyphenation + % patterns have been found revert to the default language, + % so that the wrong language file may be loaded here in that + % case. + % + % Define a modification of \iflanguage that executes the "true" + % code if the language is defined and equal to the current + % language and does nothing otherwise. (Just \iflanguage gives + % an error if the language is not loaded.) + % + \def\APAC@iflang##1##2{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname l@##1\endcsname\relax + \else + \ifnum\csname l@##1\endcsname=\language + {##2}% + \fi + \fi + }% + % Define language support file. The \def instead of a direct \input + % is done to provide a mechanism to check whether a language file + % has been defined. + % + \APAC@iflang{dutch}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{dutch.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{finnish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{finnish.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{german}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{german.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{ngerman}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{ngerman.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{greek}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{greek.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{norsk}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{norsk.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{spanish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{spanish.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{swedish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{swedish.apc}}% + % + % The default English as last one. + \APAC@iflang{english}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}% + % + \@ifundefined{APAC@apcfile}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{% + No suitable language definition file (\languagename.apc) found}% + }{% + \InputIfFileExists{\APAC@apcfile}{}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{% + Language definition file \APAC@apcfile\space not found}% + }% + }% + \let\APAC@apcfile\@undefined + }% + \fi + \let\APAC@tmp\@undefined + }% + \let\APAC@iflang\@undefined +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Bibliography style parameters. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\bibnewpage{\clearpage}% apa.cls uses \newpage, change with \renewcommand +\let\bibliographytypesize\normalsize +% +%%% declare four parameters +\newskip{\bibleftmargin} +\newskip{\bibindent} +\newskip{\bibparsep} +\newskip{\bibitemsep} +% +%%% and give them default values +\bibleftmargin=2.5em +\bibindent=-\bibleftmargin +\bibparsep=0pt% +\bibitemsep\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + +% +% To force another order (in Part 1, Part 2 cases) +% Actually, this is the same as \SortNoop used in the examples, +% so I do not discuss this in the documentation. It should +% not be considered part of apacite, but I keep it for backwards +% compatibility. +\newcommand{\bibphant}[1]{} + +% +% Replacement of the chapterbib `\@extra@b@citeb' command. This one +% accumulates all kinds of `extra' flags to accommodate multiple +% bibliographies of various packages (chapterbib, bibunits). +\def\APAC@extra@b@citeb{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@b@citeb}% +\def\APAC@extra@binfo{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@binfo}% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% label-bibitem % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{% + \def\BBA{\BBAA}% + % For compatibility with chapterbib, bibunits, backref, and hyperref. + % Adapted from natbib.dtx. + \item[\hyper@natanchorstart{#2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + \@biblabel{#1}% + \hyper@natanchorend]% + \if@filesw{% + \def\BBA{\string\BBA}% + \let\protect\noexpand + % bibunits redefines \bibcite through \AtBeginDocument + % in a way that is incompatible with apacite's definition. + % The simplest way to get things working automatically + % seems to be introducing the parallel \APACbibcite command. + % This should also solve many other compatibility problems. + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}% + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\APACbibcite{#2}{#1}}% + \def\BBA{\BBAA}% + }% + \fi + \ignorespaces +} + +% Year is separately handled by \Y@<citation key> +\def\APACbibcite#1#2{% + \global\expandafter + \def\csname b@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{#2}% names + \global\expandafter + \def\csname Y@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{\@year@#2}% year +} +% We don't need this one anymore, but other packages may use it. +\let\bibcite\APACbibcite + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BABEL %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% +%% COMMENTS FROM hyperref.dtx: +%% +%% Package |babel| redefines \cmd{\bibcite} with +%% macro \cmd{\bbl@cite@choice}. It needs to be overwritten +%% to avoid the warning ``Label(s) may have changed.''. +%% +%% END COMMENTS +%% +%% Here, a slightly adapted version of the code mentioned above is inserted. +%% The other \bibcite-restoring compatibility code above does something +%% similar, but does not do the job correctly if babel is loaded (why?). +%% Clearly, this only works if babel is loaded before apacite, but +%% putting it in a \AtBeginDocument does not work well. + +\@ifundefined{bbl@cite@choice}{}{% + \g@addto@macro\bbl@cite@choice{% + \let\bibcite\APACbibcite + }% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBTOPIC %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{bibtopic}{% + % + % Somewhat rudely disable this command to prevent an undesired + % error message of bibtopic. + \renewcommand*\bt@change@thb{\relax}% + }{% + % + % These bibtopic hooks are included in the thebibliography + % environment, so bibtopic should work correctly. If bibtopic is + % not loaded, they should do nothing. + \providecommand{\bt@beg@thb@hook}{\relax} + \providecommand{\bt@end@thb@hook}{\relax} + }% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBUNITS %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Store the default apacite definitions. +\AtEndOfPackage{% + \let\APACstd@cite\cite + \let\APACstd@nocite\nocite + \let\APACstd@lbibitem\@lbibitem +} + +% Default definition. +\@ifundefined{APAC@bu}{\def\APAC@bu{}}{} + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{bibunits}{% + % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.). + \def\APAC@bu{% + \ifx\cite\std@cite + % Outside a bibunit; the `@APACbu' strings are intended to + % minimize the possibility of wrong matches, such as + % \b@ex11 = ex11 from the global aux + % or + % \b@ex11 = ex1 from bibunit 1, + % and the last `@' is similarly intended to avoid confusion + % if both bibunits and chapterbib are loaded (`11@1' = 11th + % bibunit, 1st chapterbib unit; `1@11' = 1st bibunit, 11th + % chapterbib unit). It seems unlikely that both packages would + % be used at the same time, but safety first. + @APACbu0@% + \else + % Within a bibunit: use bibunit number to distinguish the bibunits. + @APACbu\the\@bibunitauxcnt @% + \fi + }%% + % Standard apacite definition of \cite and \nocite commands. + \let\std@cite\APACstd@cite + % This is mainly necessary to avoid incorrect `Citation undefined' + % warnings. + \let\std@nocite\APACstd@nocite + % Restore apacite definition of \bibitem, mainly because of the + % \@newciteauxhandle instead of \@auxout. + \def\std@lbibitem[#1]#2{% + \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@bibunitaux + \APACstd@lbibitem[#1]{#2}% + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout + }%% + % To make sure everything works whether bibunits is loaded + % before or after apacite. + \let\@lbibitem\std@lbibitem + % + }{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBBL %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Almost all of multibbl's code is redefined here, mainly because +% apacite needs to distinguish which citation refers to which +% bibliography, so that flags can be correctly set whether a citation +% is the first citation to the work in from the specific bibliography +% and correctly includes the meta-analysis flags with the various +% bibliographies. +% +% Default flag definition if multibbl is not loaded. +\@ifundefined{APAC@curr@aux}{\def\APAC@curr@aux{}}{} +% +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{multibbl}{% + % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.). + \def\APAC@def@curr@aux#1{\def\APAC@curr@aux{@APACaux@#1@}}% + % Ditto. This puts the \bibcite commands in #1.aux instead + % of in the main aux file, so that the flags can be differentiated. + % This also means that the aux file has to be read by LaTeX + % before it is overwritten. + \def\newbibliography#1{% + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% + \@input@{#1.aux}% + \begingroup + \if@filesw + \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname + \expandafter\immediate\openout + \csname #1@auxfile\endcsname #1.aux\relax + \typeout{Writing auxiliary file #1.aux }% + \fi + \endgroup + }%% + % Add the flag to the bibliography. + \let\APAC@mbbl@bibliography\bibliography + \def\bibliography#1#2#3{% + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% + \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle + \def\@APACtemp{\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname}% + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp + \APAC@mbbl@bibliography{#1}{#2}{#3}% + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout + }%% + % Add an extra argument to \@@cite. + \let\@orig@@cite\@@cite + \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3#4{% + \nocite{#3}{#4}% + \let\@temp@nocite\nocite + \let\nocite\@gobble + % + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#3}% + \@orig@@cite<#1>[#2]{#4}% + % + \let\nocite\@temp@nocite + \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined + }%% + % + % Add an extra argument to \nocite. + \let\@orig@nocite\nocite + \def\nocite#1#2{% + % Define a flag. + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% + % + % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite, + % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite. + \@bsphack + \ifx\@onlypreamble\document + % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations: + \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib + % #1@auxfile for compatibility with multibbl + \@ifundefined{#1@auxfile}{% + \if@filesw + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% + \fi + }{\if@filesw + \expandafter\immediate% + \write\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% + \fi + }% + % + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{% + \edef\B@my@dummy{*}% + \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy + \else + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% + \fi + }{}% + }% + \else + % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work + % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested + % in ltbibl.dtx: + \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}{#2}}% + \fi + \@esphack + % + % For compatibility with multibib. + \@restore@auxhandle + }%% + % + % Add an extra argument to \nocitemeta. + \let\@orig@@nocitemeta\nocitemeta + \def\nocitemeta#1#2{% + \nocite{#1}{#2}% + \let\@temp@nocite\nocite + \let\nocite\@gobble + % + \@orig@@nocitemeta{#2}% + % + \let\nocite\@temp@nocite + \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined + }% + }{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBIB %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% From instructions in multibib.dtx. +\providecommand\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout} +\def\@restore@auxhandle{\gdef\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}} +% List of citation commands +\def\@mb@citenamelist{% + cite,fullcite,shortcite,citeNP,fullciteNP,shortciteNP,% + citeA,fullciteA,shortciteA,citeauthor,fullciteauthor,shortciteauthor,% + citeauthorNP,fullciteauthorNP,shortciteauthorNP,% + citeyear,citeyearNP,nocite,nocitemeta% +}% +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{newcites}{\global\let\@restore@auxhandle\relax}{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH SPLITBIB %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{splitbib}{% + % Presumably, this doesn't hurt without splitbib as well. + \def\citeauthoryear{\string\citeauthoryear}% + }{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH NATBIB %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% + % + % Redefine a natbib command. This may be ethically dubious, but + % without it, natbib simply cannot handle apacite-generated .bbl + % files. The only reason I can think of why both apacite.sty + % and natbib would be loaded is exactly the situation when you + % want to use natbib for the citations and apacite for the reference + % list. In this situation you would load apacite.sty, not for the + % citation commands, but for the punctuation commands and labels + % defined by apacite. In this situation, the redefinition below + % is necessary and therefore I do this here. + % + \def\NAT@parse@date#1#2#3#4#5#6@@{% + \def\NAT@year{{#1}}\def\NAT@exlab{{#2}}% + }% + % + % natbib redefines \thebibliography, which interferes a little + % with our purposes. Therefore, add some patches. + % + \let\@oldbibpreamble\bibpreamble + \def\bibpreamble{% This goes wrong if \bibpreamble is redefined + % later on, i.e., by the user, but I haven't thought + % of a better hack yet. + \@oldbibpreamble% + \bibliographytypesize% + \bibliographyprenote% + \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {}% skip + {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + }% + \let\@old@endthebibliography\endthebibliography + \def\endthebibliography{\@old@endthebibliography% + \normalsize}% + }{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH HYPERREF %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% The code here is adapted from hyperref, natbib, and their respective +% documentation, to make use of their interoperability. + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{NAT@parse}{% + \def\NAT@parse{This is a fake natbib command to fool hyperref.}}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkstart}{% + \let\hyper@natlinkstart\@gobble}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkend}{% + \let\hyper@natlinkend\relax}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorstart}{% + \let\hyper@natanchorstart\@gobble}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorend}{% + \let\hyper@natanchorend\relax}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyperpage}{% + \def\hyperpage#1{#1}}{}% +} +% +% Remove spaces from hyperlinks (hyperref keeps them, even if they +% are removed from the visible output, so you'd get awkward results +% like \href{http://my .link}{http://my.link}. +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% + % The next should always be true, but just to be sure... + \@ifpackageloaded{url}{% + % Is obeyspaces option requested? If not, then... + \ifx\@empty\Url@ObeySp\@empty + % remove spaces from hyperlinks. + \def\url@#1{\def\@tmp@arg{\string#1}% + \HyPsd@Subst{ }{}{\@tmp@arg}% + \hyper@linkurl{\Hurl{#1}}{\@tmp@arg}}% + \fi + }{}% + }{}} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BACKREF %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% +%% A bit of code that makes life a little easier +%% (adapted from amsrefs.dtx). +\def\back@cite{}% +\def\CurrentBib{}% +\def\PrintBackRefs{}% +\def\APACrestorebibitem{}% +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{% + % Make sure that \ifBR@verbose is defined. + \@ifundefined{ifBR@verbose}{% + \let\ifBR@verbose\iffalse + \let\fi\fi}{}% + % A backcite command that makes the code of other commands better + % readable. + \def\back@cite#1{% + \ifBR@verbose + \PackageInfo{backref}{back cite \string`#1\string'}% + \fi + \Hy@backout{#1\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + }%% + % Adaptation of the \bibitem command so that backref does not + % scan the whole entry. The placement of the backrefs is explicitly + % done through \PrintBackRefs. + \def\APACrestorebibitem{% + \def\BR@@lbibitem[##1]##2{% + \BRorg@bibitem[{##1}]{##2}% + \def\CurrentBib{##2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + }%% + }% + % Printing the backrefs: revert to the standard backrefs macro. + \def\PrintBackRefs#1{\BR@backref{#1}}% + }{%%% + % backref not loaded. + \let\back@cite\@gobble + \let\PrintBackRefs\@gobble + }% +} + +\def\BR@@lbibitem[#1]#2#3\par{% + \BRorg@bibitem[#1]{#2}#3% + \BR@backref{#2}% +}% + +% +% Setting catcode of `#'; mainly useful in case the bibliography +% contains url's containing `#' symbols. Analogous to \makeatother and +% \makeatletter. +% Undocumented! [EM, 2007/08/30] +\def\makehashother{\catcode`\#=12\relax}% +\def\makehashmacropar{\catcode`\#=6\relax}% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% FOR USE WITH THE URL PACKAGE (AND HYPERREF) %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% APA requires breaking of url's AFTER a slash or BEFORE a dot. +% In particular, there should not be a break between "http:" and "//". +% url.sty also defines many other (punctuation) symbols at which a +% break may occur. APA does not mention this, but it seems in the spirit +% of the APA manual +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{url}{% + % To circumvent an ``undefined'' error + \@ifundefined{Url@force@Tilde}{\def\Url@force@Tilde{\relax}}{}% + % + % The original dot. (Simply using `.' causes an infinite loop. + % This command is used below, so that encoding-issues can be resolved + % easier by redefining \Url@APACdot.) + \def\Url@APACdot{\mathchar"2E }% + \def\Url@APACcomma{\mathchar"2C }% + \def\Url@APACquestionmark{\mathchar"3F }% + \def\Url@APACexclamation{\mathchar"21 }% + \def\Url@APAChyphen{\mathchar"2D }% + \def\Url@APACunderscore{\_}% + % + % APA-definitions. + \def\APACurlBreaks{% + % Remove dot and slash from ordinary breaks. + \def\UrlBreaks{\do\@\do\\\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]\do\)\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#}% + % Add slash to big breaks, so that http:// is broken after the second + % slash instead of after the colon. + \def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\/\do\:\do@url@hyp}% + % These are the default ones. Repeat them to get a complete style and + % we don't have to rely on what is the default (which might change). + \def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}% + \def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\~\do\'\do\"}% + % Define a dot as an empty binary relation (after which a break may + % occur) followed by a dot-symbol (after which no break may occur). + % The Chicago Manual of Style requests the same treatment of + % a couple of other punctuation marks, different from url.sty's + % default behavior. + \def\UrlSpecials{% + \do\.{\mathbin{}\Url@APACdot }\do\,{\mathbin{}\Url@APACcomma }% + \do\-{\mathbin{}\Url@APAChyphen }% + \do\?{\mathbin{}\Url@APACquestionmark }% + \do\!{\mathbin{}\Url@APACexclamation }% + \do\_{\mathbin{}\Url@APACunderscore }% + \do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}% + \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tilde + }%% + % Change underscore for when a non-tt font is used. + \def\Url@OTnonTT{\do\<{\langle}\do\>{\mathbin{\rangle}}\do + \_{\mathbin{}\_}\do\|{\mid}\do\{{\lbrace}\do\}{\mathbin{\rbrace}}\do + \\{\mathbin{\backslash}}\UrlTildeSpecial} + + % Now define four APA url-styles, based on the standard styles in + % url.sty. + \def\url@APACttstyle{\def\UrlFont{\ttfamily}\APACurlBreaks }% + \def\url@APACrmstyle{\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}\APACurlBreaks }% + \def\url@APACsfstyle{\def\UrlFont{\sffamily}\APACurlBreaks }% + \def\url@APACsamestyle{\def\UrlFont{}\APACurlBreaks }% + % + % Use APACtt-style by default. + \urlstyle{APACtt}% + }{}% +} + +% In case \url is undefined, define a very simple version. +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{url}{% + \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}% + }{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% THE CITATION COMMANDS %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% First citation in multi-citation. +\newif\if@F@cite\@F@citetrue + +% Two flags to denote whether only author or year must be cited or both. +\newif\if@A@cite\@A@citefalse +\newif\if@Y@cite\@Y@citefalse + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \cite<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \fullcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \shortcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% writes \citation{keys} on .aux +% produces (prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\cite{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% + \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis + \@ifnextchar<% % > + {\@cite}% + {\@cite<>}% +} + +\def\fullcite{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% + \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis + \@ifnextchar<% % > + {\@cite}% + {\@cite<>}% +} + +\def\shortcite{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% + \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis + \@ifnextchar<% % > + {\@cite}% + {\@cite<>}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \citeNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \fullciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \shortciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% writes \citation{keys} on .aux +% produces prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\citeNP{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% + \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis + \@ifnextchar<%% > + {\@cite}% + {\@cite<>}% +} + +\def\fullciteNP{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% + \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis + \@ifnextchar<%% > + {\@cite}% + {\@cite<>}% +} + +\def\shortciteNP{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% + \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis + \@ifnextchar<%% > + {\@cite}% + {\@cite<>}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% second layer of \cite command +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\@cite<#1>{% + % + % definition of some parameters + % + \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation + \def\@BBA{\BBAA}% % `and' between authors + \def\@BBAY{\BBAY}% % between author and year + \def\@BAY{}% % after year + \def\@BBY{\BBYY}% % between years of multiple citations with same author + \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites + \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2] + \def\@BAstyle{\BAstyle}% text style of authors + \@A@citetrue% % cite authors + \@Y@citetrue% % cite years + \@ifnextchar[% % ] + {\@@cite<#1>}% + {\@@cite<#1>[]}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \citeA<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \fullciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \shortciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% writes \citation{keys} on .aux +% produces prefix Authors1 (Year1), ..., AuthorN (YearN, postfix) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\citeA{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeA}% + {\@citeA<>}% +} + +\def\fullciteA{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeA}% + {\@citeA<>}% +} + +\def\shortciteA{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeA}% + {\@citeA<>}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% second layer of \citeA command +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\@citeA<#1>{% + % + % definition of some parameters + % + \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis. + \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation + \def\@BBA{\BBAB}% % `and' between authors + \def\@BBAY{ \BBOP}%% between author and year + \def\@BAY{\BBCP}% % after year + \def\@BBY{\BBYY}% % between years of multiple citations with same author + \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites + \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2] + \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis + \def\@BAstyle{\BAstyle}% text style of authors + \@A@citetrue% % cite authors + \@Y@citetrue% % cite years + \@ifnextchar[% % ] + {\@@cite<#1>}% + {\@@cite<#1>[]}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \citeauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \fullciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \shortciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% writes \citation{keys} on .aux +% produces prefix Authors1, ..., AuthorsN, postfix +% +% \citeauthorNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \fullciteauthorNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% \shortciteauthorNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% does the same, but for a parenthetical citation +% (the difference being `\&' instead of `and' between authors) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\citeauthor{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeauthor}% + {\@citeauthor<>}% +} + +\def\fullciteauthor{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeauthor}% + {\@citeauthor<>}% +} + +\def\shortciteauthor{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeauthor}% + {\@citeauthor<>}% +} + +\def\citeauthorNP{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeauthorNP}% + {\@citeauthorNP<>}% +} + +\def\fullciteauthorA{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeauthorNP}% + {\@citeauthorNP<>}% +} + +\def\shortciteauthorA{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeauthorNP}% + {\@citeauthorNP<>}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% second layer of \citeauthor and \citeauthorNP commands +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\@citeauthor<#1>{% + % + % definition of some parameters + % + \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation + \def\@BBA{\BBAB}% % `and' between authors + \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year + \def\@BAY{}% % after year + \def\@BBY{}% % between years of multiple citations with same author + \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites + \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2] + \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis + \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors + \@A@citetrue% % cite authors + \@Y@citefalse% % do not cite years + \@ifnextchar[% % ] + {\@@cite<#1>}% + {\@@cite<#1>[]}% +} + +\def\@citeauthorNP<#1>{% + % + % definition of some parameters + % + \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation + \def\@BBA{\BBAA}% % `and' between authors + \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year + \def\@BAY{}% % after year + \def\@BBY{}% % between years of multiple citations with same author + \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites + \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2] + \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis + \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors + \@A@citetrue% % cite authors + \@Y@citefalse% % do not cite years + \@ifnextchar[% % ] + {\@@cite<#1>}% + {\@@cite<#1>[]}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \citeyear<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% writes \citation{keys} on .aux +% produces (prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix) +% +% \citeyearNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} +% writes \citation{keys} on .aux +% produces prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\citeyear{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% + \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis + \@ifnextchar<% % > + {\@citeyear}% + {\@citeyear<>}% +} + +\def\citeyearNP{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% + \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis + \@ifnextchar<% % > + {\@citeyear}% + {\@citeyear<>}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% second layer of \citeyear command +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\@citeyear<#1>{% + % + % definition of some parameters + % + \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation + \def\@BBA{}% % `and' between authors + \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year + \def\@BAY{}% % after year + \def\@BBY{\BBYY}% % between years of multiple citations with same author + \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites + \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2] + \def\@BAstyle{}% % text style of authors + \@A@citefalse% % do not cite authors + \@Y@citetrue% % cite years + \@ifnextchar[% % ] + {\@@cite<#1>}% + {\@@cite<#1>[]}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% +%% The core citation routines +%% The following commands must have been defined: +%% \@BBOP open parenthesis +%% \@BAP after precitation [=#1] before first citation +%% \@BBA `and' between authors +%% \@BBAY between author and year +%% \@BAY after year +%% \@BBY between years of multiple citations with same author +%% \@BBC between cites +%% \@BBN after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2] +%% \@BBCP close parenthesis +%% \@BAstyle formatting style of authors (e. g., \scshape) +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%% Code to be executed if current author(s) equal previous +\def\@ifauthorsequalc@de#1{% + \if@F@cite% + \@F@citefalse% + \else% + \if@Y@cite% + {\@BBY}% + \fi% + \fi% + \if@Y@cite% + \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}% + {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \hyper@natlinkend + \fi% +} + +%%% Code to be executed if current author(s) do not equal previous +\def\@ifauthorsunequalc@de#1{% + \if@F@cite% + \@F@citefalse% + \else% + \if@Y@cite% + {\@BAY}% + \fi% + {\@BBC}% + \fi% + \edef\@cite@undefined{?}% + \def\BBA{\@BBA}% + \if@A@cite% + \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}% + {\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \hyper@natlinkend + \if@Y@cite% + {\@BBAY}% + \fi% + \fi% + \if@Y@cite% + \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}% + {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \hyper@natlinkend + \fi% + \let\BBA\relax% +} + +\def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3{% + % + % Write citation(s) to .aux file(s) + % + \nocite{#3}% + % + % the previous cite, for multiple citations with same author + % + \edef\@citeP{}% + % + % open parenthesis and pre-note + % The \mbox is to avoid hyperref problems if a \citeA follows an \item. + \mbox{\@BBOP}% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else% + {\ignorespaces #1\@BAP}% + \fi% + % + % loop over citation entries + % + \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{% + % Removes a possible space before the citation key, so that + % e.g. \cite{key1, key2} can be done. + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % For backref. + \back@cite{\@citeb}% + % + % check whether citation is defined + % + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\expandafter\def\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}% + \expandafter\def\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}% + % The following is now handled by \nocite + %\G@refundefinedtrue + %\@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% + }%% + % If citation is defined: + % check whether flag is set that identifies that + % this is not the first citation to the work + % if flag is not set, it will be set to DUMMY + % if this is the first citation to the work, + % the full citation is used; else the short version + % is used + % + {\@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\global\expandafter + \def\csname flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}% + \def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##1}}% + }% + {\def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##2}}% + }% + }% + % Check whether current author(s) is (are) equivalent + % to previous. If so, only year is cited in text + % and a \@BBY (probably comma and space) is inserted between + % the two years. + % + % The \protected@edef fixes the problem with authors with accents + % (e.g., J{\"{o}}reskog). Previous versions of apacite solved this + % less elegantly (accentfix option). This fix provided by Robert Schlicht. + % See also the new definition of \@citeP below. + \protected@edef\B@my@dummy{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy% + \@ifauthorsequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + \else% + \@ifauthorsunequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + \fi% + % define previous citation-author as current + % + \protected@edef\@citeP{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + % + \let\BCA\relax% + }%% + % end loop over citation entries + % add note [=#2] and closing parenthesis + % + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else% + {\@BBN #2}% + \fi% + \if@Y@cite% + {\@BAY}% + \fi% + {\@BBCP}% + % + % define first citation true for next \@@cite + % + \@F@citetrue % +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \nocite{key} : entry in reference list, not in text +% +% This is a little different from \@@cite with +% \@A@citefalse and \@Y@citefalse +% because of the `*' variant (cite all entries in bibfile) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\nocite#1{% + % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite, + % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite. + \@bsphack + \ifx\@onlypreamble\document + % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations: + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib + \if@filesw + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% + \fi + % + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{% + \edef\B@my@dummy{*}% + \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy + \else + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% + \fi + }{}% + }% + \else + % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work + % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested + % in ltbibl.dtx: + \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}}% + \fi + \@esphack + % + % For compatibility with multibib. + \@restore@auxhandle +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \nocitemeta{key} : entry in reference list, not in text, +% for entries that are used in a meta-analysis. +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\nocitemeta#1{% + \nocite{#1}% + \@bsphack% + \expandafter\global\expandafter\def + \csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{% + \APACmetaprenote}% + % + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % Define meta-analysis flag for current item + \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\global\expandafter + \def\csname flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}% + }% + {}% + }% + \@esphack% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \APACinsertmetastar{key}: insert an asterisk before the names in the +% reference list for entries that are used in a meta-analysis. +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\def\APACinsertmetastar#1{% + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {}% skip + {{\APACmetastar}}% + }% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% No labels in the bibliography. +% +\def\@biblabel#1{} + +% +\def\st@rtbibsection{% + \@bibnewpage% start a new page if desired + \if@numberedbib% + \section{\refname}% e.g., 6. References + \else% + \section*{\refname}% e.g., References + \if@tocbib% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% + \fi% + \@ifundefined{chapter} + {\@mkboth{{\refname}}{{\refname}}}% do we need this? yep. why? + {\markright{{\refname}}}% do we need this? yep. why? + % + \fi% +}% +% +\def\st@rtbibchapter{% + % here no \@bibnewpage, because it is assumed that + % the \chapter starts a new page + \if@numberedbib% + \chapter{\bibname}% e.g., 6. References + \else% + \chapter*{\bibname}% e.g., References + \if@tocbib% + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}% + \fi% + \@mkboth{{\bibname}}{{\bibname}}% do we need this? yep. why? + % + \fi% +}% +% +% +\def\thebibliography#1{% + % + % Start the bibliography section or chapter + % + \@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\st@rtbibsection}% +% else: chapter is defined + {\@ifundefined{@sectionbibtrue}% we have to guess + {\@ifundefined{@mainmatterfalse}% check if mainmatter exists + {\st@rtbibchapter}% +% else: mainmatter is defined + {\if@mainmatter% + \st@rtbibsection% typically, a chapter-specific bibliogr. + \else% + \st@rtbibchapter% a bibliography at the end + \fi% + }% + }% + {% an explicit option has been chosen + % + \if@sectionbib% + \st@rtbibsection% bibliography is a section + \else% + \st@rtbibchapter% bibliography is a chapter + \fi% + }% + }% + % + \bibliographytypesize% e.g., to put the bibliography in \small type + \bibliographyprenote% some explanatory note before the references + % + \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {}% skip + {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + % + \list{\relax}{\labelsep=0em% +% \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \parsep=\bibparsep% + \itemsep=\bibitemsep% + \leftmargin=\bibleftmargin% + \itemindent=\bibindent}% changed to cope with 4th ed. + \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% + \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000 + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax + % For compatibility with bibtopic. + \bt@beg@thb@hook + % To overrule backref. + \APACrestorebibitem +} +\def\endthebibliography{% + % For compatibility with bibtopic. + \bt@end@thb@hook + % + \def\@noitemerr{% + \@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}% + }% + \endlist\normalsize +} +% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% REFERENCE LIST FORMATTING COMMANDS %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Dates +% +\newcommand{\APACrefYear}[1]{% + % Should never be empty. + {\BBOP}{#1}{\BBCP}% +} +\newcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or January\or February\or March\or + April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or + November\or December\or Winter\or Spring\or Summer\or Fall\else + {#1}\fi} +% This command should be replaced by a language-dependent one. +\newcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + % year (+ addendum) + {\BBOP}{#1}% + % month + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% + \fi + % day + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip\ {#3}% + \fi + {\BBCP}% +} +% +% Titles +% Arguments: #1 = capitalized title, #2 = not capitalized title +% +% Article title (roman, not capitalized) +\newcommand{\APACrefatitle}[2]{#2} +% Book title (italic, not capitalized) +\newcommand{\APACrefbtitle}[2]{\Bem{#2}} +% English translation of foreign article title (bracketed, roman, not capitalized) +\newcommand{\APACrefaetitle}[2]{[#2]} +% English translation of foreign book title (bracketed, roman, not capitalized) +\newcommand{\APACrefbetitle}[2]{[#2]} +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% I copied the following couple of functions literally from +% amsrefs.dtx (\PrintEdition ff.) and made only one slight +% adaptation: removing \editiontext. +% Perhaps I can make this more language-neutral, but I think +% separate functions are needed for different languages. +\let\@xp\expandafter +% \PrintCardinal{2} gives `2nd' etc. +% If the argument is not an integer number, it is copied literally +% to the output. (At least, apparently, because I do not really +% understand how it works.) +\newcommand{\PrintCardinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@cardinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +} +\def\print@cardinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??th% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +} +\newcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + th% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1th\or st\or nd\or rd\else th\fi + \fi +} +\def\keep@last@digit#1#2{% + \ifx\relax#2% + \@xp\@gobbletwo + \else + #1=#2\relax + \fi + \keep@last@digit#1% +} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Journal, volume, number, pages +% (#1 = journal, #2 = volume, #3 = number, #4 = formatted pages) +\newcommand{\APACjournalVolNumPages}[4]{% + % journal + \Bem{#1}% + % volume + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, \Bem{#2}% + \fi + % issue number + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip({#3})% + \fi + % pages + \ifx\@empty#4\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#4}% + \fi +} +% +% Addres and publisher/institution +% (#1 = address, #2 = publisher) +\newcommand{\APACaddressPublisher}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + % publisher + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + {#2}% + \fi + % + \else + % address + {#1}% + % publisher + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip: {#2}% + \fi + % + \fi +} +% +\let\APACaddressInstitution\APACaddressPublisher +% +% Addres and publisher/institution if the latter is also the author. +% (#1 = address, #2 = publisher) +\newcommand{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + % Publisher. This cannot be empty, because it is equal to the author. + {\BAuthor{}}% + % + \else + % Address and publisher. These are not empty. + {#1\unskip: \BAuthor{}}% + % + \fi +} +% +\let\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth +% +% Howpublished. +% \APAChowpublished is only inserted in the .bbl file if the +% argument is nonempty. Because we don't want any special formatting, +% and \def\APAChowpublished#1{#1} leads to problems with hash marks +% in url's that may be present in howpublished, we simply pretend +% that \APAChowpublished does not have an argument and does nothing. +%\def\APAChowpublished{}% +\let\APAChowpublished\relax +% +% URL formatting +\newenvironment{APACrefURL}[1][]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \BAvailFrom + \else + \BRetrieved{#1}% + \fi +}{} +% URLs of messages +\newenvironment{APACrefURLmsg}{% + \BMsgPostedTo +}{} +% +% Original editor(s) for reprints and translations. +\newcommand{\APACorigED}[1]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else + % ``by E. D. Itor (Ed.)'' + \Bby\ {#1}, \BED{}% + \fi +} +% +\newcommand{\APACorigEDS}[1]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else + % ``by E. D. Itor \& A. N. Other (Eds.)'' + \Bby\ {#1}, \BEDS{}% + \fi +} +% +% Various note formatting functions. +% +% Only note +\newcommand{\APACrefnote}[1]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else + ({#1})% + \fi +} +% +% Original year + optional note. +% Arguments: #1 = year, #2 = note. +\newcommand{\APACorigyearnote}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + % Original year empty: format note. + \APACrefnote{#2}% + \else + % Check for \bibnodate. I think the following command does not check + % whether #1 = `\bibnodate', but expands them, but that should + % also be OK and saves a lot of juggling with \expandafter commands. + \ifx\bibnodate#1\@empty + % Original year unknown: format (only) note. + \APACrefnote{#2}% + \else + % Original year has been given: ``Original work published''. + (\BOWP{} {#1}% + % Note + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip; {#2}% + \fi + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + % + \fi + \fi +} +% +% Original journal + optional note +% Arguments: #1 = year, #2 = journal, #3 = volume, #4 = issue number, +% #5 = formatted pages, #6 = note. +\newcommand{\APACorigjournalnote}[6]{% + % "(Reprinted from " (note the space) + (\BREPR{} % + % Journal (should not be empty) + \Bem{#2}% + % Year + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#1}% + \fi + % Volume + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip, \Bem{#3}% + \fi + % Issue number + \ifx\@empty#4\@empty + \else + \unskip{[#4]}% + \fi + % Pages + \ifx\@empty#5\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#5}% + \fi + % Note + \ifx\@empty#6\@empty + \else + \unskip; {#6}% + \fi + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + % +} +% +% An auxiliary function: make a comma-separated output list of the +% input, recognizing empty arguments. Must be called with one +% argument, and the argument contains a comma-separated list of elements. +% The elements of this should generally be enclosed in braces. +\def\@connect@with@commas#1{% + % Commas should only be inserted if both sides are nonempty. + \def\@comma@space{\unskip, }% + \let\@connect@string\relax + % Loop over elements. + \@for\@element@:=#1\do{% + \ifx\@empty\@element@% + \else + % Not empty: insert connect string (nothing for the first + % nonempty element, a comma and space afterwards). + \@connect@string\@element@% + \let\@connect@string\@comma@space + \fi + }% + \let\@connect@string\@undefined + \let\@comma@space\@undefined +} +% +% Original book + optional note. +% Arguments: +% #1 = year, #2 = formatted editor, #3 = formatted title, +% #4 = formatted edition, #5 = formatted volume, #6 = formatted pages, +% #7 = address, #8 = publisher, #9 = note. +\newcommand{\APACorigbooknote}[9]{% + % + % "(Reprinted from " (note the space) + (\BREPR{} % + % + % Title, edition, volume, pages, editor, year, address: publisher + % These should not all be empty, but this is not checked here + % (because it's done in the .bst file). + \@connect@with@commas{% + {#3},{#4},{#5},{#6},{#2},{#1},{\APACaddressPublisher{#7}{#8}}% + }%% + % + % Add optional note. + \ifx\@empty#9\@empty + \else + ; #9% + \fi + % + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + % +} +% +% Formatting of Technical Report information. +% +% Volume, edition, type, number. +% Arguments: #1 = formatted edition + volume, +% #2 = formatted technical report type + number +\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTR}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + % (Technical Report No.\ <no>) + {(#2)}% + \fi + \else + % (2nd ed., Vol.~1 + ({#1}% + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + % ; Technical Report No.\ <no> + \unskip; {#2}% + \fi + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + \fi +} +% +% Volume, edition, type, number, pages (for @intechreport). +% Arguments: #1 = formatted edition + volume, +% #2 = formatted technical report type + number, #3 = formatted pages. +\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}[3]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + % (pp. 10--30) + {(#3)}% + \fi + \else + % (Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30) + (\@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}})% + \fi + \else + % (2nd ed., Vol.~1 + ({#1}% + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + % ; pp. 10--30 + \unskip; {#3}% + \fi + \else + % ; Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30 + \unskip; \@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}}% + \fi + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + \fi +} +%% +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{Documentation package (\fname{apacdoc.sty})} +% The \pkg{apacdoc} package is written for generating the \pkg{apacite} +% user's manual. But it also contains a few commands that are too +% experimental or otherwise unsuitable to be included in \fname{apacite.sty}, +% but which are necessary to format some examples from the APA manual +% correctly. As such, these commands may be useful for users if they +% encounter similar citation problems. In such a case, it is probably +% better to copy the definitions of the desired commands to the top +% of your \fname{.tex} document (before \verb+\begin{document}+) or +% to a tailor-made \fname{.sty} file, rather than loading the \pkg{apacdoc} +% package. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*docpkg> +%% +%% apacdoc.sty : Style package that is used for the apacite documentation. +%% Written by Erik Meijer + +% Generate Author Index? +\newif\if@APACdoc@AX +\DeclareOption{makeAX}{\@APACdoc@AXtrue}% +\@APACdoc@AXfalse +\ProcessOptions + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS THAT MAY BE USEFUL FOR WIDER USE. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Echo argument literally. Can be used to define a certain author type +% (``Producer'') in a place where \BibTeX{} expects a first name. +% Using this command between a pair of braces makes sure that the text +% is not abbreviated into an initial. +%%\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}} +%%\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{#1} +%%\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}} +%% This is the result of lots of trial and error. If I change something +%% in another part, I typically have to change something here as well. +%% The \space is necessary because in the current setup, an additional +%% space is inserted in the bibliography, and MakeIndex is space-sensitive. +\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral\space{#1}} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibinitial}[1]{\string#1} +%\newcommand{\bibinitial}{\string\bibinitial\space} + +% If the argument is a period (`.'), \BibTeX{} puts no period after it. +\newcommand{\bibnodot}[1]{} + +% For ``On cdtitle [CD]'' etc., to be used instead of ``In''. +\newcommand{\BOn}{On} + +% Reverse order. Can be used for various reasons. +\newcommand{\SwapArgs}[2]{#2#1} + +% The following macro is esp. useful if the year field must be different +% in text and in reference list. E.g., if 1992/1993 in text and 1992 +% in reference list. Then year can be defined as \bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}. +% The definition below displays only the second argument (``text''). +% Just before the reference list, this can then be changed to +% display only the first argument (``ref''). +\newcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{#2} + +% The same command, but now intended for Dutch-style ``von'' parts. +\newcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{#2} + +% The following macro changes the definitions of the macros \BED and \BEDS +% to the argument and then immediately changes the definitions back to their +% old definitions. So it makes a one-time change. Can be used to use +% ``Producer'' instead of ``Ed.'' etc. +\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{\relax }% +\def\renewbibeditortype{% + \def\oldBED{}% + \def\oldBEDS{}% + \DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{% + \global\let\oldBED\BED + \global\let\oldBEDS\BEDS + \global\def\BED{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}% + \global\def\BEDS{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}% + }% +} + +% The following macro changes the definition of the macro \BIn to the +% argument and then immediately changes the definition back to the old +% definition. So it makes a one-time change. Can be used to use ``On'' +% instead of ``In'' for a CD-track. +\newcommand{\bibInstring}[1]{% + \global\let\oldBIn\BIn + \global\def\BIn{#1\global\let\BIn\oldBIn}% +} + +% The following macros are used to change ``Retrieved'' into +% ``Abstract retrieved''. They use the same principle as \renewbibeditortype. +\global\def\BAbstractRetrieved#1{Abstract retrieved {#1}, from\ }% +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}{% + \global\def\oldBRetrieved{}% + \global\let\oldBRetrieved\BRetrieved + \global\def\BRetrieved##1{% + \BAbstractRetrieved{##1}% + \global\let\BRetrieved\oldBRetrieved% + }% +} + +% Suppress ``ed.'' to format ``Version 4.0'' in an edition field. +\DeclareRobustCommand{\noedition}{% + \global\def\oldBEd{}% + \global\let\oldBEd\BEd + \global\def\BEd{% + \unskip + \global\let\BEd\oldBEd + }% +} + +% The \bibskipbracenodot macro suppresses the period after a following closing +% brace. It does not work entirely well at the moment. In particular, it +% works differently in an \AX macro in text and an \AX macro in the +% reference list. This has something to do with robust vs. fragile macros +% and/or expansion of the macro. I have experimented a lot with many +% variations, but don't seem to get it right. I don't understand these +% issues well yet. +\def\swallownext#1{\relax} +\def\swallowdot{% + \@ifnextchar.% + {\swallownext}% + {\relax}% +} + +% When the above does not work, \bibskipbracenodot should reduce to nothing. +% This is the current definition. Just before the bibliography, it is +% redefined. +%\def\bibskipbracenodot{\string\bibskipbracenodot} +\def\bibskipbracenodot{\noexpand\bibskipbracenodot} +%\def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot} +%\let\bibskipbracenodot\relax +\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot} + +\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeBib}{% + % Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography. + \renewcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{##1}% + \renewcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{##1}% + \renewbibeditortype + \global\let\oldbibskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot + \global\def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot}% + \global\let\oldbibliteral\bibliteral + \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{##1}% + \global\let\oldbibinitial\bibinitial + \renewcommand{\bibinitial}[1]{##1}% +} + +% Dirty trick: request apacitex.bst if apacite is loaded with one of the +% index options, and request apacite.bst otherwise. +\def\APACbibstyle{% + \if@APAC@index + apacitex% with index option + \else + apacite% without index option + \fi +} + +\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeIndex}{% + \clearpage + % Redefine commands that should be different in the author index. + \renewcommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{}% + \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\unskip}% + \global\let\indexskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot +} + +\newcommand{\APACmanAfterIndex}{% + % Revert to old definitions of commands. + \global\let\bibskipbracenodot\oldbibskipbracenodot + \global\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot}% + \APACdocindex +} + +% Redefine some indexing-related commands from doc.sty and ltxdoc.cls +% Unfortunately, I couldn't get the code index and change history +% working with the index package, so I have to tweak everything so +% that the apacite manual does not use the index package (which is +% loaded by apacite when an index option is requested). + +\@ifundefined{IndexPrologue}{}{% + \IndexPrologue{\clearpage\section*{{Code Index}}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Code Index}% + \markboth{{Code Index}}{{Code Index}}% + Numbers written in italic refer to the page + where the corresponding entry is described; + numbers underlined refer to the + \ifcodeline@index + code line of the + \fi + definition; numbers in roman refer to the + \ifcodeline@index + code lines + \else + pages + \fi + where the entry is used. + }% +} +\@ifundefined{GlossaryPrologue}{}{% + \GlossaryPrologue{\section{{Change History}}% + \markboth{{Change History}}{{Change History}}% + }% +} + +% From doc.dtx +\def\APACdocindex{% + \ifhave@multicol + \renewenvironment{theindex} + {\begin{multicols}\c@IndexColumns[\index@prologue][\IndexMin]% + \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}% + {\end{multicols}} + \else + \typeout{Can't find multicol.sty -- will use normal index layout if + necessary.} + \def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi + \columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[\index@prologue]% + \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces} + \def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} + \fi +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% CITATIONS TO THE BIBLE +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% The APA manual gives some rules how the Bible and other classic +% works should be cited. These rules are not implemented in standard +% apacite, so I provide a workaround here. + +%%% To define which Bible version you used. +\def\bibleversion#1{\gdef\@bibleversion{#1}} +\def\@bibleversion{Revised Standard Version} + +\def\bibleciteA#1{% + % If this is the first citation, add bible version. + {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}% + {\fullbibleciteA{#1}}% + {\shortbibleciteA{#1}}% + }% +} + +\def\fullbibleciteA#1{% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + { \BBOP\@bibleversion\BBCP}% + % Flag that bible has been cited. + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\shortbibleciteA#1{% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?). + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\biblecite#1{% + % If this is the first citation, add bible version. + {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}% + {\fullbiblecite{#1}}% + {\shortbiblecite{#1}}% + }% +} + +\def\fullbiblecite#1{% + % Open parenthesis. + {\BBOP}% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Add bible version. + {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}% + % Close parenthesis. + {\BBCP}% + % Flag that bible has been cited. + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\shortbiblecite#1{% + % Open parenthesis. + {\BBOP}% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Close parenthesis. + {\BBCP}% + % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?). + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\bibleciteNP#1{% + % If this is the first citation, add bible version. + {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}% + {\fullbibleciteNP{#1}}% + {\shortbibleciteNP{#1}}% + }% +} + +\def\fullbibleciteNP#1{% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Add bible version. + {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}% + % Flag that bible has been cited. + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\shortbibleciteNP#1{% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?). + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% COMMANDS TO CITE SONGS. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% The APA manual gives some rules how songs should be cited. These +% rules require some tweaking of standard apacite. This is done here. + +\newcommand{\bibsong}[4]{} + +\newcommand{\citeAsong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\fullciteAsong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \fullciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\shortciteAsong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \shortciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\citesong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\fullcitesong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \fullciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\shortcitesong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \shortciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\citesongNP}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}% + }% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\fullcitesongNP}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}% + }% + \fullciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\shortcitesongNP}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}% + }% + \shortciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% COMMANDS TO CITE DSM. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% The APA manual gives some rules how the DSM should be cited, which +% is a bit different from ordinary citations. These rules are not +% implemented in standard apacite, so I provide a workaround here. + +\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibDSM}[4]{#1} +% author, title, edition, abbreviated title +% Default prints author, so you get something decent if +% an ordinary cite is used. +\def\origbibDSM{} +\let\origbibDSM\bibDSM + +\newcommand{\DSMauthor}[1]{% + \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##1}% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM +} + +\newcommand{\DSMfulltitle}[1]{% + \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##2}% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM +} + +\newcommand{\DSMshorttitle}[1]{% + \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##4}% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM +} + +\newcommand{\DSMedition}[1]{% + \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##3}% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM +} + +\newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{% + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + % Removes a possible space before the citation key + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % Is this the first citation? + \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\DSMfullciteA{#1}}% + {\DSMshortciteA{#1}}% + }% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{% + % \emph{Full Title} (edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year) + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}} + \BBOP + \DSMedition{#1}; + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}; + \citeNP{#1}% + \BBCP +} + +\newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{% + % \emph{Short Title} + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{% + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + % Removes a possible space before the citation key + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % Is this the first citation? + \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\DSMfullcite{#1}}% + {\DSMshortcite{#1}}% + }% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{% + % (\emph{Full Title}, edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year) + \BBOP + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}}, + \DSMedition{#1}; + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}; + \citeNP{#1}% + \BBCP +} + +\newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{% + % (\emph{Short Title}) + \BBOP\APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}\BBCP +} + +\newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{% + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + % Removes a possible space before the citation key + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % Is this the first citation? + \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\DSMfullciteNP{#1}}% + {\DSMshortciteNP{#1}}% + }% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{% + % (\emph{Full Title}, edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year) + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}}, + \DSMedition{#1}; + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}; + \citeNP{#1}% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{% + % (\emph{Short Title}) + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}% +} + +% \newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{% +% \@for\@citec:=#1\do{% +% % Check whether citation is defined. +% \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}% +% {\citeA{\@citec}}% +% {\citeauthor{\@citec}}% +% }% +% } +% +% \newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{% +% \fullciteA{#1}% +% } +% +% \newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{% +% \shortciteauthor{#1}% +% } +% +% \newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{% +% {\BBOP}% +% \@for\@citec:=#1\do{% +% % Check whether citation is defined. +% \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}% +% {\citeNP{\@citec}}% +% {\citeauthor{\@citec}}% +% }% +% {\BBCP}% +% } +% +% \newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{% +% \fullcite{#1}% +% } +% +% \newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{% +% {\BBOP}\shortciteauthor{#1}{\BBCP}% +% } +% +% \newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{% +% \@for\@citec:=#1\do{% +% % Check whether citation is defined. +% \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}% +% {\citeNP{\@citec}}% +% {\citeauthor{\@citec}}% +% } +% } +% +% \newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{% +% \fullciteNP{#1}% +% } +% +% \newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{% +% \shortciteauthor{#1}% +% } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% These are some commands that are used in this document, but are +% presumably not especially relevant for users. + +\@ifundefined{BibTeX}{% + \def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em + T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}% copied from bibtex.web +}{} +\newcommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}} +\newcommand{\latextohtml}{\textup{\LaTeX2\texttt{HTML}}}% from html.sty +\newcommand{\LaTeXrtf}{\textup{\LaTeX2RTF}}% +\newcommand{\TeXht}{\textup{\TeX4ht}}% +\newcommand{\Perl}{\textsl{Perl}}% + +% My comments accompanying the examples. +\newcommand{\EM}{\ensuremath{\triangleright\quad}} + +% The date of a version of apacite. Makes it easy to search the document +% for these dates. The \relax is a safety measure (probably not needed), +% which ensures that the square brackets are never interpreted as an +% optional argument. +\newcommand{\APACversiondate}[1]{\relax [#1]} + +\newcommand{\LC}{\mbox{${}^{\dag}$}}% \LaTeX{} Companion +\newcommand{\X}{\ensuremath{\times}}% for one table +\newcommand{\Y}{\ensuremath{c}}% for one table + +\newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}% package name +\newcommand{\fname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% file name +\newcommand{\fieldname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% field name +\newcommand{\entryname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% entry type name +\newcommand{\pkgoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% package option +\newcommand{\envirname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% environment name + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{cmd}{% + \newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}% command, incl. `\' + }{}% +} + +% Some trickery with backslashes and @ signs. +\newcommand{\bs}{{\ttfamily \@backslashchar}}% backslash +\newcommand{\opt}[1]{$\langle${\itshape #1}$\rangle$}% generic text + +% For \nocite{keys}: +\newcommand{\cmdtwo}[2]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1\{}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{\}}}}% +% For \cite[post]{keys}: +\newcommand{\cmdthree}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{]\{}\opt{#3}% + \texttt{\}}}}% +% For \cite<pre>{keys}: +\newcommand{\cmdthreepre}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{>\{}\opt{#3}% + \texttt{\}}}}% +% For \usepackage[options]{apacite}: +\newcommand{\cmdthreealt}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{]\{#3\}}}}% +% For all \cite<pre>[post]{keys} variants: +\newcommand{\cmdfour}[4]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{>[}\opt{#3}% + \texttt{]\{}\opt{#4}% + \texttt{\}}}}% + +% It is not clear where and how the \flqq command is defined, so provide +% an escape if it is not available. Use definitions from fguill.sty, +% included here to avoid requiring a package that may not be available. +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{flqq}{% + \newcommand{\flqq}{% + {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{19}}}% + \newcommand{\frqq}{% + {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{20}}}% + }{}% +}% +\newcommand{\simpleguillemots}{% + \renewcommand{\flqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{\tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{<\!\!<}}}}}% + \renewcommand{\frqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{\tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{>\!\!>}}}}}% +}% + + +\newcommand{\APACdocPageLayout}{% + \normalsize + \let\oldhoffset\hoffset + \let\oldvoffset\voffset + \let\oldoddsidemargin\oddsidemargin + \let\oldevensidemargin\evensidemargin + \let\oldtopmargin\topmargin + \let\oldheadheight\headheight + \let\oldheadsep\headsep + \let\oldtextheight\textheight + \let\oldfootskip\footskip + \let\oldtextwidth\textwidth + \let\oldlinewidth\linewidth + \let\oldmarginparsep\marginparsep + \let\oldmarginparwidth\marginparwidth + \let\oldmarginparpush\marginparpush +% + \setlength{\hoffset}{-1in} % top-left reference point is + \setlength{\voffset}{-1in} % the top-left corner of the page + \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{1.3in} + \setlength{\evensidemargin}{1.3in} + \setlength{\topmargin}{1.35in} + %\setlength{\headheight}{\baselineskip} + \setlength{\headheight}{0.12in} + \setlength{\headsep}{0.24in} + \setlength{\textheight}{7.9in} + \setlength{\footskip}{30pt} + \setlength{\textwidth}{5.9in} + \setlength{\linewidth}{\textwidth} + \setlength{\marginparsep}{0pt} + \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0pt} + \setlength{\marginparpush}{0pt} +} + +\newcommand{\APACcodePageLayout}{% + \let\hoffset\oldhoffset + \let\oddsidemargin\oldoddsidemargin + \let\evensidemargin\oldevensidemargin + \let\textwidth\oldtextwidth + \let\linewidth\oldlinewidth + \let\marginparsep\oldmarginparsep + \let\marginparwidth\oldmarginparwidth + \let\marginparpush\oldmarginparpush +} + +% Start with doc page layout +\APACdocPageLayout +%% +%</docpkg> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{Language definition files} +% +% This section describes the code for the language-specific files +% supplied with \pkg{apacite}. +% +% \subsection{\fname{english.apc}} +% +% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} +% for the English language and its ``dialects'' in \pkg{babel} +% terminology. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*english> +%% +%% english.apc - english version of apacite elements +%% Written by Erik Meijer +%% Changes since the [2005/06/01] version: +%% - Uncommented all the \renewcommand's, so that the file can be +%% \input to override previous definitions. +%% - Replaced `.{}' by `.\hbox{}', with the same goal (but now it works) +%% of tricking TeX to make sure the abbreviation period is not +%% interpreted as a sentence-ending period. +%% - Inserted many percent signs to make sure no undesired space is +%% put into the document when this file is read. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}% % ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{and}% % between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{in press}% % used as year for in-press citations +\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % for ``In '' editor... +\renewcommand{\Bby}{by}% % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints) +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapters +\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}% % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}% % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}}% % translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}}% % translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}% % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}% % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}% % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}% % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}}% % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}}% % numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}% % edition +\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% % pages +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}}% % (default) technical report type name +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}% +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}% (default) master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}% Used if publisher = author +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List +\renewcommand{\refname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + References marked with an asterisk indicate studies + included in the meta-analysis.}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}% +%% +%</english> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{\fname{dutch.apc}} +% +% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} +% for the Dutch language. The \pkg{babel} package considers Afrikaans +% as a ``dialect'' of Dutch, but my limited knowledge of Afrikaans +% suggests that most words are spelt differently (though are phonetically +% similar), and many other words are simply different. So I doubt if this +% file can be directly applied to Afrikaans. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*dutch> +%% +%% dutch.apc - dutch translation of apacite elements +%% Written by Erik Meijer +%% +%% For compiling the translated elements, the following sources were +%% used: +%% +%% (1) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "De Psycholoog" +%% (indicated below as "[DP]"): +%% +%% Uitgebreide richtlijnen voor het aanleveren van kopij [Extensive +%% guidelines for the submission of manuscripts]. (2001). +%% Retreived January 3, 2005, from +%% http://upload.lectric.nl/data/nip7/Richtlijnen%20voor%20auteurs.pdf +%% +%% (2) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "Nederlands Tijdschrift +%% voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden" +%% (indicated below as "[NTPG]"): +%% +%% Aanwijzingen voor auteurs [Directions for authors]. (2004). +%% Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden, +%% 59, inside back cover. +%% +%% (3) Instructions (pp. 404-410) from the following well-known book +%% (indicated below as "[SW]"): +%% +%% Renkema, J. (2002). Schrijfwijzer [Writing indicator] (4th ed.). +%% Den Haag, The Netherlands: Sdu. +%% +%% These three all state that their rules are adapted from the APA manual. +%% For translations that are not explicitly mentioned in these sources, +%% I used the extensive reference list from the following article: +%% +%% (4) Schrooten, M. G. S., & Smulders, F. T. Y. (2004). Een experimentele +%% kijk op angst: Aandacht en automatisme in de verwerking van +%% bedreigende stimuli +%% [Anxiety from an experimental point of view: Attention and +%% automaticity in the processing of threatening stimuli]. +%% Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden, +%% 59, 135-149. +%% +%% Finally, I consulted the following dictionary: +%% +%% (5) Groot woordenboek Engels-Nederlands [Large dictionary English-Dutch] +%% (2nd ed.). (1989). Utrecht, The Netherlands: Van Dale. +%% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Bericht}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramma}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Handleiding van computerprogramma}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramma en handleiding}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computersoftware}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Handleiding van computersoftware}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computersoftware en handleiding}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmeertaal}% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{z.~j.\hbox{}}% [SW] (``zonder jaartal'') +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{en}% +% +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP] +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP] +%% NTPG requires the following, SW allows both variants: +%\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}% % [NTPG] +%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}% % [NTPG] +% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{te verschijnen}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% +\renewcommand{\Bby}{door}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% +% +%% Editor(s) is almost impossible to get right in Dutch, because SW +%% and DP require the translation of ``editor(s)'' to be dependent on +%% the language in which the referenced work is written: +%% ``Red.'' (or ``red.'') for referenced works in Dutch +%% ``Ed.''/``Eds.'' for referenced works in English +%% ``Hrsg.'' for referenced works in German +%% ``edt.'' for referenced works in French +%% NTPG does not give an explicit rule for this, but only an example +%% in which an English work is referenced and ``Ed.'' is used. +%% +%% For the moment, I think it makes most sense to give the Dutch versions here: +\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'') +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}% % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'') +% +%% Translators should not be mentioned according to DP. +%% NTPG does not explain how to format this. +%% SW gives a completely different format: ``Vertaald door: '' +%% followed by the name of the translator, or if the translator is unknown: +%% ``Vertaling van: '' followed by the original title. +%% This is much too complicated, so I'll choose a simple alternative: +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{vert.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{vert.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{vert.\hbox{}}% +% +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{voorz.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{voorz.\hbox{}}% +% +% [SW]. NTPG gives an example with ``Vol.'' but this is presumably +% dependent on the language of the referenced work as well. +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Dl.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Dl.\hbox{}}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BEd}{dr.\hbox{}}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% % [SW]. [DP] gives ``p.'', [NTPG] both. +% Literally translating ``Tech.'' as ``Technisch'' does not make sense. +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport}% +% Schrooten & Smulders use ``dissertatie'' +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% +% There is no Dutch ``DAI'' and the distinction between ``published'' and +% ``unpublished'' would generally be interpreted as ``published as a book +% with an official publisher'' vs. ``privately published''. All PhD theses +% in the Netherlands are required to be published with an ISBN number. +% Therefore, it is better in my view to keep the same term here. +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% +% Again, there is no official forum to publish abstracts of master's theses, +% but, unlike PhD theses, they are (generally) unpublished. +% The term used here refers to the Dutch educational system until ca. 2003. +% Since ca. 2004, universities are gradually converting to a bachelor - +% master system, so it's likely that this term will have to be adapted +% in the near future. +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Auteur}% +% [DP]. They also require the original title after the originalyear. +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Oorspronkelijke editie}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Overgenomen uit}% +% +% SW gives the following general names: +% ``Literatuuropgave'' [literally approx. ``Literature specification''] +% ``Literatuurlijst'' [literally ``Literature list''] +% For more specific applications, SW gives the following names: +% ``Bibliografie'' [``Bibliography'', ``a more or less complete survey +% of publications in a certain area''] +% ``Geraadpleegde literatuur'' [``Consulted literature''] +% ``Aangehaalde literatuur'' [``Referenced literature''] +\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG] +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG] +% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Met een asterisk gemarkeerde referenties betreffen studies die in de + meta-analyse zijn gebruikt.}% +% +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Auteursindex}% +% +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma. +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma. +% +%% +%</dutch> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{\fname{finnish.apc}} +% +% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} +% for the Finnish language. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*finnish> +%% +%% finnish.apc - finnish version of apacite elements +%% +%% Reference: Appendix E from book +%% +%% -------------------------------------------------------------------- +%% Kansallinen luetteloinnin ohjausryhm\"a. (2006). Monografioiden +%% kuvailu, Suomalaiset luettelointis\"a\"ann\"ot. Helsinki: BTJ +%% Kirjastopalvelu. +%% -------------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +%% Written by Kari Pyykk\"o +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +% +% Msg +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Sanoma}% +% +% Computer program +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Tietokoneohjelma}% +% +% Computer program manual +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Tietokoneohjelman k\"asikirja}% +% +% Computer program and manual +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Tietokoneohjelma ja k\"asikirja}% +% +% Computer software +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Ohjelmisto}% +% +% Computer software manual +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Ohjelmiston k\"asikirja}% +% +% Computer software and manual +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Ohjelmisto ja k\"asikirja}% +% +% Programming language +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Ohjelmointikieli}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +% +% n.d. +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.a.\hbox{}}% % ``no date'', ``sine anno'' +% +% and +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{ja}% % between authors in text +% +% et al. +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains a + % dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list +% +% et al. +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% + % ``others'', the argument contains + % a dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list. The difference + % with \BOthers is that, if another + % string is used to define \BOthers, + % this one should always finish with a + % period and the previous one not + % necessarily (e.g., if explicit + % ``others'' is used). +% +% in press +\renewcommand{\BIP}{painossa}% % used as year for in-press citations +% +% In +\renewcommand{\BIn}{Teoksessa}% % for ``In '' editor... +% +% chap. +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{luku{}}% % chapter +% +% chap. +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{luvut{}}% % chapters +% +% Ed. +\renewcommand{\BED}{toim.\hbox{}}% % editor +% +% Eds. +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{toim.\hbox{}}% % editors +% +% Trans. +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translator +% +% Trans. +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translators +% +% trans. +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{k\"a\"an.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field +% +% Chair +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{pj.\hbox{}}% % chair of symposium +% +% Chairs +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{pj.\hbox{}}% % chairs +% +% Vol. +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{osa}% % volume +% +% Vols. +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{osat}% % volumes +% +% No. +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nro}% % number +% +% Nos. +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nro}% % numbers +% +% ed. +\renewcommand{\BEd}{p.\hbox{}}% % edition +% +% p. +\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% % page +% +% pp. +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}% % pages +% +% Tech.\ Rep. +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tekn.\ rap.\hbox{}}% (default) technical report type name +% +% Doctoral dissertation +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{V\"ait\"oskirja}% (default) PhD thesis type name +% +% Unpublished doctoral dissertation +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Julkaisematon v\"ait\"oskirja}% + % (default) unpublished PhD thesis + % type name +% +% Master's thesis +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Pro gradu -tutkielma}% + % (default) master's thesis type name +% +% Unpublished master's thesis +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Julkaisematon pro gradu -tutkielma}% + % (default) unpublished + % master's thesis type name +% +% Original work published +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Alkuaan julk.\hbox{}}% +% +% Reprinted from +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Uudelleen julk.\hbox{}}% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List +\renewcommand{\refname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list +% when a meta-analysis is reported. +% +% +% References marked with an asterisk indicate studies included in the +% meta-analysis. +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + \refname merkitty t\"ahtimerkeill\"a osoittaen opintojen + sis\"altymist\"a meta-analyysiin.}% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +% +% Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Tekij\"ahakemisto}% +% +%% +%</finnish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{\fname{german.apc} and \fname{ngerman.apc}} +% +% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} +% for the German language. There is the traditional orthography (`german') +% and the new orthography (`ngerman'), which are treated as completely +% different languages by \pkg{babel} (unlike, e.g., the two Norwegian +% languages), which presumably has technical reasons. We start with `german'. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*german> +%% +%% german.apc - Deutsche Uebersetzung der Apacite-Elemente +%% Written by Andreas Poege. +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Deutsche Anpassung der Interpunktion und Formatierung +%\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape}%% Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \cite usw, \citeA usw + % \citeNP) +%\renewcommand{\BAastyle}{\scshape}% Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \citeauthor usw. +%\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% % Einleitende Klammer (default "(") +%\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% % Abschliessende Klammer (default ")") +%\renewcommand{\BAP}{}% % Zeichen zw. Prefix und Zitat (default Leerzeichen) +%\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% % Zwischen Autoren in Klammern (default "\&") +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{und}% % Zwischen Autoren im Text +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% % Zwischen Autoren und Jahr(en) (default ",") +%\renewcommand{\BBC}{;{}}% % Zwischen Autoren (mehrere Zitate) (default ";") +%\renewcommand{\BBN}{,{}}% % Zwischen Zitat und Postfix (default ",") +%\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% % Einleitung v. Titel v. Artikel (default "") +%\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% % Abschluss v. Titel. von Artikel (default "") +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% % Zwischen 2 Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",") +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% % Zwischen 3 o. mehr Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",") +%\renewcommand{\BAnd}{}% % Zwischen Hg. und Uebers., falls gleich (default "\&") +% Formatierung des Zusatzes bei Werken vom selben Autor aus +% einem Jahr (default "\alph{BibCnt}") +%\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}}}% +% Zitation eines Titels (Artikel o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg. +% (default in Anfόhrungszeichen) +%\renewcommand{\APACiteatitle}{}% +% Zitation eines Titels (Buch o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg. +% (default ist \emph) +%\renewcommand{\APACitebtitle}{}% +% Auszeichnung eines Werkes im Lit.verz. wenn in Metaanalyse +% (default "*") +%\renewcommand{\APACmetastar}{}% +% Verhalten von "\bibnewpage" (default "\clearpage") +%\renewcommand{\bibnewpage}{\newpage}% +% Zwischen Jahren, wenn ein Author und mehrere Jahre +% (default "\BBAY") +%\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Formatierung des Literaturverzeichnisses +% Schriftgrφίe Literaturverz. (default "\normalsize") +%\renewcommand{\bibliographytypesize}{\footnotesize}% +%\setlength{\bibleftmargin}{2.5em}% % Einzug beim Lit.verz. 2. Zeile (default "2.5em") +%\setlength{\bibindent}{-\bibleftmargin}% Einzug beim Lit.verz. 1. Zeile (default "-\bibleftmargin") +%\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip}%% vert. Abstand zwischen Eintrδgen im Lit.verz. (default "0pt") +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Befehle fόr die speziellen @misc-Eintrδge. +%%% Diese Befehle werden von apacite.bst berόcksichtigt. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg.\hbox{}}% Fόr misc-Literaturtyp bei type, Newsgroup-, Internet-Messages +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramm}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Programm-Handbuch}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramm und Handbuch}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Software-Handbuch}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Software und Handbuch}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmiersprache}% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Weitere Labels +% Bei Techreport, falls type-Ang. unterdrόckt werden soll (default " ") +%\renewcommand{\bibnotype}{ }% +% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im +% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im +% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken. +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{in Druck}% % Jahresangabe bei im Druck bef. Werken +\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % fuer "`In"' Herausgeber... +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel +\renewcommand{\BED}{Hg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(in) +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Hg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(innen) +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}%% Uebersetzer(in) +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzer(innen) +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzung (bei der Jahresangabe) +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}% % Chair (bei Konferenzen) +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}% % Chairs (bei Konferenzen) +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Bd.\hbox{}}% % Band +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Bde.\hbox{}}% % Baende +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{Nr.\hbox{}}% % Nummer +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nr.\hbox{}}% % Nummern +\renewcommand{\BEd}{Aufl.\hbox{}}% % Auflage +\renewcommand{\BPG}{S.\hbox{}}% % Seite +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{S.\hbox{}}% % Seiten +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Bericht}% % (default) Bezeichnung fuer "`technical report"' +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Dissertation}% % (default) Bezeichnung fuer Dissertation +% (default) Bezeichnung fuer unveroeffentlichte Dissertation +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unver\"offentlichte Dissertation}% +% (default) Bezeichnung fόr Abschlussarbeit +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Diplomarbeit}% +% (default) Bezeichnung fόr unveroeffentlichte Abschlussarbeit +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unver\"offentlichte Diplomarbeit}% +% +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Originalausgabe}% % Originalausgabe +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Nachdruck von}% % Nachdruck von +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{o.\,J.\hbox{}}% "`ohne Jahresangabe"' +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Literaturverzeichnisses +% Bezeichnung fόr das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Section +\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatur}% +% Bezeichnung fόr das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Chapter +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literaturverzeichnis}% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Kommando zwischen "Literaturverzeichnis" und den Eintraegen direkt +%%% nach \bibliographytypesize +%\renewcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{}% default nichts +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Bemerkung vor Literaturangeaben, falls eine Metaanalyse angegeben wurde +% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{Literaturangaben mit Stern kennzeichnen + Studien der Metaanalyse.}% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Autorenverzeichnisses +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Autorenregister}% +% +%% +%</german> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% Now, the file for the new orthography. Apparently, \fname{german.apc} +% can also be used for the new orthography, so this is a very brief one: +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ngerman> +%% +%% ngerman.apc - german translation of apacite elements (new orthography) +%% Written by Erik Meijer, based on instructions of Andreas Poege. +% +%% According to Andreas Poege, his file german.apc can also be used +%% for the new orthography, so I'll just do this: +% +\input{german.apc}% +% +%% +%</ngerman> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{\fname{greek.apc}} +% +% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} +% for the Greek language. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*greek> +%% +%% greek.apc - Greek version of apacite elements +%% Greek translations by Athanassios Protopapas and Ioannis Dimakos +% +%% NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! +%% The Greek strings are in ISO-8859-7 encoding. +\RequirePackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Μήνυμα}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Λογισμικό}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Εγχειρίδιο λογισμικού}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Λογισμικό και εγχειρίδιο}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Λογισμικό}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Εγχειρίδιο λογισμικού}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Λογισμικό και εγχειρίδιο}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Γλώσσα προγραμματισμού}% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{χωρίς ημερομηνία}% ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{και}% % between authors in text +% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one +% in the reference list +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{κ.\ συν.\hbox{}}% +% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one +% in the reference list. The difference with \BOthers is that, if another +% string is used to define \BOthers, this one should always finish with a +% period and the previous one not necessarily (e.g., if explicit +% ``others'' is used). +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{κ.\ συν.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{υπό έκδοση}% % used as year for in-press citations +\renewcommand{\BIn}{Στο}% % for ``In '' editor... +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{κεφ.\hbox{}}% % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{κεφ.\hbox{}}% % chapters +\renewcommand{\BED}{Επιμ.\hbox{}}% % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Επιμ.\hbox{}}% % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Μτφ.\hbox{}}% % translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Μτφ.\hbox{}}% % translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{μτφ.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Πρόεδρος}% % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Πρόεδροι}% % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{τ.\hbox{}}% % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{τ.\hbox{}}% % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{αρ.\hbox{}}% % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{αρ.\hbox{}}% % numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{έκδ.\hbox{}}% % edition +\renewcommand{\BPG}{σελ.\hbox{}}% % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{σελ.\hbox{}}% % pages +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Τεχ.\ έκθ.\hbox{}}% % (default) technical report type name +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Διδακτορική διατριβή}% (default) PhD thesis type name +% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Αδημοσίευτη διδακτορική διατριβή}% +% (default) master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Μεταπτυχιακή διπλωματική εργασία}% +% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Αδημοσίευτη μεταπτυχιακή διπλωματική εργασία}% +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Πρώτη έκδοση πρωτοτύπου}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Ανατύπωση από}% +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List +\renewcommand{\refname}{Βιβλιογραφία}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Βιβλιογραφία}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list +% when a meta-analysis is reported. +% +%\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% +% References marked with an asterisk indicate studies +% included in the meta-analysis.} +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Ευρετήριο συγγραφέων}% +% +%% +%</greek> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{\fname{norsk.apc}} +% +% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} +% for both Norwegian languages (Bokm{\aa}l and Nynorsk). In \pkg{babel}'s +% setup, `norsk' is Bokm{\aa}l and `nynorsk' is a dialect of `norsk'. +% This does not seem to reflect the relation between these languages +% very well, but for compatibility with \pkg{babel} we use the same +% file stricture, i.e., \fname{norsk.apc} defines both languages. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*norsk> +%% +%% norsk.apc - Norwegian Bokmal & Nynorsk versions of apacite elements. +%% Version 1.0. +%% Written by Karl Ove Hufthammer. +%% +%% Note: To be in line with Norwegian rules of punctuation +%% a comma is never used before '&' or 'and', and there +%% is no space between initials. The macro for these +%% modifications can be found at the end of this file. +%% Remove them to use a more 'APA-like' style. +%% +%% There are no official Norwegian translations of APA. +%% Some ideas for this translation have been taken from the following sources: +%% +%% http://www.ub.uib.no/felles/IK/APA.pdf +%% http://www.uio.no/studier/emner/medisin/isv/SYKVIT4400/v07/REV_normer_skriftl_arb.pdf + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{innlegg} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{dataprogram} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramh\aa{}ndbok} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukerh\aa{}ndbok} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{programvare} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvareh\aa{}ndbok} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukerh\aa{}ndbok} +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringssprΓ₯k} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.d.\hbox{}} % ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{og} % between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a + % dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains + % a dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list. The difference + % with \BOthers is that, if another + % string is used to define \BOthers, + % this one should always finish with a + % period and the previous one not + % necessarily (e.g., if explicit + % ``others'' is used). +\renewcommand{\BIP}{under publisering} % used as year for in-press citations +\renewcommand{\BIn}{I} % for ``In '' editor... +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}} % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}} % chapters +\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}} % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}} % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{oms.\hbox{}} % translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{oms.\hbox{}} % translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{oms.\hbox{}} % translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrer} % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrere} % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}} % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}} % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}} % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}} % numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{utg.\hbox{}} % edition +\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}} % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}} % pages +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Teknisk rapport} % (default) technical report type name +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Akademisk avhandling} + % (default) PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Upublisert akademisk avhandling} + % (default) unpublished PhD thesis + % type name +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppgave}% (default) master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppgave}% + % (default) unpublished + % master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publisert} +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fra} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List +\renewcommand{\refname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list +% when a meta-analysis is reported. +% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% +Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfatterregister} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{} % No comma before & when we have two authors. +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{} % No comma before & when we have three or more authors. +\renewcommand{\BPBI}{.} % Period between initials. No space. + +% Differences between norsk (bokmal) and nynorsk. +\edef\APACnynorsk{\string nynorsk} +\ifx\languagename\APACnynorsk + \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramhandbok} + \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukarhandbok} + \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvarehandbok} + \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukarhandbok} + \renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrar} % chair of symposium + \renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrarar} % chairs + \renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppg\aa{}ve}% (default) master's thesis type name + \renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppg\aa{}ve}% + \renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fr\aa{}} + \renewcommand{\refname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. + \renewcommand{\bibname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. + \renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Referansar merkte med ei stjerne viser til studiar som er med i metaanalysen.} + \renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfattarregister} +\fi +\let\APACnynorsk\undefined +% +%% +%</norsk> +% \end{macrocode} +% + + + +% +% \subsection{\fname{spanish.apc}} +% +% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} +% for the Spanish language. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*spanish> +%% +%% spanish.apc - Versiσn espaρola de elementos en apacite +%% Escrito por Jorge Lσpez Puga + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Comandos para tipos especνficos de entradas @misc. +%%% Estos comandos son reconocidos por apacite.bst. +%\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Programa informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Manual de programa informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Programa informαtico y manual} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Manual de software informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Manual y software informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Lenguaje de programaciσn} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Otras etiquetas +%\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}} % ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{y} % Entre autores en el texto +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}} % ``y colaboradores'', El argumento contiene un punto, por tanto, %evita poner uno adicional en la lista de referencias. No obstante %algunas revistas aceptan "et al." que es lo que aparece por defecto +%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains + % a dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list. The difference + % with \BOthers is that, if another + % string is used to define \BOthers, + % this one should always finish with a + % period and the previous one not + % necessarily (e.g., if explicit + % ``others'' is used). +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{y} % Letra que va entre los autores en las referencias (por defecto "\&") +\renewcommand{\BIP}{en prensa} % Usado como aρo para citas "en prensa" +\renewcommand{\BIn}{En} % Para ``En '' editor... +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{cap.\hbox{}} % capνtulo +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{caps.\hbox{}} % capνtulos +%\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}} % editor +%\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}} % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Traduc.\hbox{}} % traductor +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Traducs.\hbox{}} % traductores +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{traduc.\hbox{}} % traducciσn, para el campo aρo +%\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair} % chair of symposium +%\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs} % chairs +%\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}} % volume +%\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}} % volumes +%\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}} % number +%\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}} % numbers +%\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}} % edition +%\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}} % page +%\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}} % pages +%\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}} % (default) technical report type name +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Tesis Doctoral} + % (por defecto) PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Tesis doctoral no publicada} + % (por defecto) unpublished PhD thesis + % type name +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Tesis de master}% (por defecto) master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Tesis de master no publicada}% + % (por defecto) unpublished + % master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Trabajo original publicado en} +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reimpresiσn de} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% El nombre (del encabezado) de la Lista Referencias +\renewcommand{\refname}{Referencias}% Nombbre de la lista de ref. si es una secciσn. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referencias}% Nomber de la lista de refs. si es un capνtulo. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + %Nota previa usada justo antes de la lista de referencias si un meta-anαlisis es usado. +% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Las referencias marcadas con un asterisco indican estudios incluidos en el meta-anαlisis.} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% El nombre (del encabezado) del Νndice de Autores. +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Νndice de Autores} +%% +%</spanish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{\fname{swedish.apc}} +% +% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} +% for the Swedish language. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*swedish> +%% +%% swedish.apc - swedish translation of apacite elements +%% Written by Stefan Bjork. +%% Small adaptations by Erik Meijer +%% $Revision: 1.3 $ +%% +%% Translation of APA elements into swedish is not obvious. Ideas of +%% which terms to use have been taken from the following sources: +%% +%% Eriksson, M. G. (2001). Att skriva litteraturreferenser enligt +%% Harvard-systemet. Retreived December 9, 2004, from: +%% http://www.ida.his.se/ida/kurser/exjobb/kursmaterial/referenser.pdf +%% Jonsson, Mattias. (n.d.). Lathund for referensskrivning. Retreived +%% December 9, 2004, from: +%% http://www.ped.gu.se/users/berner/htmarkiv/referens.html +%% Referensskrivning. (1994). Retreived December 9, 2004, from +%% Gothenburg University Web site: +%% http://www.ped.gu.se/forskarutbildning/Referens_skrivning.htm +%% +% +%% Punctuations +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{och}% +% +%% Labels +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{under tryckning}% +\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red:er}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordf\"orande}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordf\"orande}% +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BEd}{upplagan}% +\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{ss.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTR}{teknisk rapport}% +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{diss.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{opublicerad diss.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{examensuppsats}% +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{opublicerad examensuppsats}% +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publicerat}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{\AA{}terutgivning fr\aa{}n}% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Referenser markerade med stj\"arna avser studier inkluderade i + meta-analys.}% +% +%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{meddelande}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{datorprogram}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{handbok till datorprogram}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{mjukvara}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{handbok till mjukvara}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr\aa{}k}% +% +%% Publication date unknown +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.\thinspace\aa{}.\hbox{}}% +% +%% Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{F\"orfattarindex}% +% +%% +%</swedish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{Bibliography database (\fname{apa5ex.bib})} +% This file includes the reference entries of all examples in the +% APA manual, which are all formatted in the \pkg{apacite} reference +% manual. As such, it shows how ordinary and (especially) difficult +% items can be formatted. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bibdb> +%% +%% apa5ex.bib: References from the 5th edition of the Publication Manual +%% of the APA, plus a few additional references +%% Written by Erik Meijer + +%% Entry labels are section number of the APA manual (5th ed.) +%% plus a sequence number within the section. + +@misc{3.94-1, + author = {Walker}, + year = {2000}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.95-1, + author = {Wasserstein and Zappulla and Rosen and Gerstman and Rock}, + year = {1994}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.95-2, + author = {Bradley and Ramirez and Soo}, + year = {1994}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.95-3, + author = {Bradley and Soo and Ramirez and Brown}, + year = {1994}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.95-4, + author = {Kosslyn and Koenig and Barrett and Cave and Tang and Gabrieli}, + year = {1996}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.95-5, + author = {Kosslyn and Koenig and Gabrieli and Tang and Marsolek and Daly}, + year = {1996}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.95-6, + author = {Nightlinger and Littlewood}, + year = {1993}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@book{3.95-7, + author = {J{\"{o}}reskog, K[arl] G. and S{\"{o}}rbom, D[ag]}, + year = {1989}, + title = {{LISREL} 7: {A} Guide to the Program and Applications}, + edition = {2}, + address = {Chicago}, + publisher = {SPSS} +} + +@misc{3.96-1, + author = {{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}, + firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}}, + key = {{NIMH}}, + year = {1999}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.96-2, + author = {{\bibcorporate{University of Pittsburgh}}}, + year = {1993}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@book{3.96-3, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, + firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond [KNSB]}}, + key = {{KNSB}}, + year = {2002}, + title = {Jaarverslag 2002}, + englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002}, + address = {Amsterdam}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, + note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with + same key, but with different firstkey.} +} + +@book{3.96-4, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, + firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond [KNSB]}}, + key = {{KNSB}}, + year = {2003}, + title = {Jaarverslag 2003}, + englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003}, + address = {Amsterdam}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, + note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with + same key, but with different firstkey.} +} + +@book{3.96-5, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, + firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond [KNSB]}}, + key = {{KNSB}}, + year = {2002}, + title = {Jaarverslag 2002}, + englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002}, + address = {Amsterdam}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, + note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with + same key, but with different firstkey.} +} + +@book{3.96-6, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, + firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond [KNSB]}}, + key = {{KNSB}}, + year = {2003}, + title = {Jaarverslag 2003}, + englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003}, + address = {Amsterdam}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, + note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with + same key, but with different firstkey.} +} + +@magazine{3.97-1, + key = {{\APACciteatitle{Study Finds}}}, + year = {1982}, + month = apr, + title = {Study Finds Free Care Used More}, + journal = {{APA} Monitor}, + pages = {14} +} + +@book{3.97-2, + year = {1979}, + title = {College Bound Seniors}, + address = {Princeton, NJ}, + publisher = {College Board Publications} +} + +@misc{3.97-3, + author = {Anonymous}, + year = {1998}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@newspaper{3.97-4, + year = {2002}, + month = mar, + day = {3}, + title = {Editorial}, + journal = {The Edited Newspaper}, + pages = {2}, + note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without + author, but with the same title.} +} + +@newspaper{3.97-5, + year = {2003}, + month = feb, + day = {12}, + title = {Editorial}, + journal = {The Edited Newspaper}, + pages = {2}, + note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without + author, but with the same title.} +} + +@newspaper{3.97-6, + year = {2003}, + month = jan, + day = {24}, + title = {Editorial}, + journal = {The Edited Newspaper}, + pages = {2}, + note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without + author, but with the same title.} +} + +@book{3.98-1, + author = {Luce, R. Duncan}, + year = {1959}, + title = {Individual Choice Behavior}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {Wiley} +} + +@misc{3.98-2, + author = {Luce, P. A.}, + year = {1986}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.98-3, + author = {Goldberg, J. M. and Neff}, + year = {1961}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.98-4, + author = {Goldberg, M. E. and Wurtz}, + year = {1972}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-1, + author = {Edeline and Weinberger}, + year = {1991}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-2, + author = {Edeline and Weinberger}, + year = {1993}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-3, + author = {Gogel}, + year = {1984}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-4, + author = {Gogel}, + year = {1990}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-5, + author = {Gogel}, + year = {\BIP}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-6, + author = {Johnson}, + year = {1991}, + title = {Aaa} +} + +@misc{3.99-7, + author = {Johnson}, + year = {1991}, + title = {Bbb} +} + +@misc{3.99-8, + author = {Johnson}, + year = {1991}, + title = {Ccc} +} + +@misc{3.99-9, + author = {Singh}, + year = {1983}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-10, + author = {Singh}, + year = {\BIP}, + title = {Aaa} +} + +@misc{3.99-11, + author = {Singh}, + year = {\BIP}, + title = {Bbb} +} + +@misc{3.99-12, + author = {Balda}, + year = {1980}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-13, + author = {Kamil}, + year = {1988}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-14, + author = {Pepperberg and Funk}, + year = {1990}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-15, + author = {Minor}, + year = {2001}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-16, + author = {Adams}, + year = {1999}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.99-17, + author = {Storandt}, + year = {1997}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.100-1, + author = {Author}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown}, + note = {no example, but rule given in text} +} + +@misc{3.100-1b, + author = {Author}, + year = {2003 version}, + type = {Unknown}, + note = {no example, but rule given in text} +} + +@book{3.100-2, + author = {Aristotle}, + year = {1931}, + title = {Unknown}, + translator = {Someone}, + originalyear = {\bibnodate} +} + +@book{3.100-3, + author = {James}, + year = {1983}, + title = {Unknown}, + originalyear = {1890} +} + +@misc{3.101-1, + author = {Cheek and Buss}, + year = {1981}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.101-2, + author = {Shimamura}, + year = {1989}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.101-3, + author = {Myers}, + year = {2000}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.101-4, + author = {Beutler}, + year = {2000}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{3.103-1, + author = {Hashtroudi and Chrosniak and Schwartz}, + year = {1991}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-t1, + author = {Brown, J. R.}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-t2, + author = {Browning, A. R.}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-t3, + author = {MacArthur}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-t4, + author = {McAllister}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-t5, + author = {MacNeil}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-t6, + author = {M'Carthy}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-t7, + author = {DeBase}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-t8, + author = {De Vries, J.}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-t9, + author = {von Helmholtz, H. L. F.}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@article{4.04-t10, + year = {2003}, + title = {{\APACSortNoop{Two-Thousand and Three}}2003 Hottest Summer Ever}, + journal = {Journal of Meteorology}, + note = {This is a fake entry, used for didactical purposes.} +} + +@misc{4.04-1, + author = {Hewlett, L. S.}, + year = {1996}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-2, + author = {Hewlett, L. S.}, + year = {1999}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-3, + author = {Alleyne, R. L.}, + year = {2001}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-4, + author = {Alleyne, R. L. and Evans, A. J.}, + year = {1999}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-5, + author = {Gosling, J. R. and Jerald, K. and Belfar, S. F.}, + year = {2000}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-6, + author = {Gosling, J. R. and Tevlin, D. F.}, + year = {1996}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-7, + author = {Hayward, D. and Firsching, A. and Brown, J.}, + year = {1999}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-8, + author = {Hayward, D. and Firsching, A. and Smigel, J.}, + year = {1999}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-9, + author = {Cabading, J. R. and Wright, K.}, + year = {2000}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-10, + author = {Cabading, J. R. and Wright, K.}, + year = {2001}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@article{4.04-11, + author = {Baheti, J. R.}, + year = {2001}, + title = {Control {\ldots}} +} + +@article{4.04-12, + author = {Baheti, J. R.}, + year = {2001}, + title = {Roles of {\ldots}} +} + +@misc{4.04-13, + author = {Mathur, A. L. and Wallston, J.}, + year = {1999}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@misc{4.04-14, + author = {Mathur, S. E. and Ahlers, R. J.}, + year = {1998}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@book{4.05-1, + author = {Bandura, A. J.}, + year = {1977}, + title = {Social Learning Theory}, + address = {Englewood Cliffs, NJ}, + publisher = {Prentice Hall} +} + +@article{4.05-2, + author = {Bretschneider, J. G. and McCoy, N. L.}, + year = {1968}, + title = {Sexual Interest and Behavior in Healthy + 80- to 102-Year-Olds}, + journal = {Archives of Sexual Behavior}, + volume = {14}, + pages = {343--350} +} + +@article{4.08-1, + author = {Kernis, M. H. and Cornell, D. P. and Sun, C.-R. + and Berry, A. and Harlow, T.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {There's More to Self-Esteem than Whether it is High + or Low: {T}he Importance of Stability of Self-Esteem}, + journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, + volume = {65}, + pages = {1190--1204} +} + +@book{4.08-2, + editor = {Robinson, D. N.}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Social Discourse and Moral Judgment}, + address = {San Diego, CA}, + publisher = {Academic Press} +} + +@misc{4.08-3, + author = {Bulatao, E. {\protect\bibliteral{(with + Winford, C.~A.)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + type = {Unknown} +} + +@article{4.09-1, + author = {Fowers, B. J. and Olson, D. H.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {{ENRICH} {Marital} {Satisfaction} {Scale}: + {A} Brief Research and Clinical Tool}, + journal = {Journal of Family Psychology}, + volume = {7}, + pages = {176--185} +} + +@article{4.10-1, + author = {Deutsch, F. M. and Lussier, J. B. and Servis, L. J.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Husbands At Home: Predictors of Paternal Participation + in Childcare and Housework}, + journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, + volume = {65}, + pages = {1154--1166} +} + +@incollection{4.10-2, + author = {O'Neil, J. M. and Egan, J.}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Men's and Women's Gender Role Journeys: + Metaphor for Healing, Transition, and Transformation}, + editor = {Wainrib, B. R.}, + booktitle = {Gender Issues Across the Life Cycle}, + pages = {107--123}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {Springer} +} + +@article{4.11-1, + author = {Buss, D. M. and Schmitt, D. P.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Sexual Strategies Theory: An Evolutionary Perspective + on Human Mating}, + journal = {Psychological Review}, + volume = {100}, + pages = {204--232} +} + +@magazine{4.11-2, + author = {Henry, III, W. A.}, + year = {1990}, + month = apr, + day = {9}, + title = {Beyond the Melting Pot}, + journal = {Time}, + volume = {135}, + pages = {28--31} +} + +@book{4.12-1, + author = {Saxe, G. B.}, + year = {1991}, + title = {Cultural and Cognitive Development: Studies in + Mathematical Understanding}, + address = {Hillsdale, NJ}, + publisher = {Erlbaum} +} + +@incollection{4.13-1, + author = {Baker, F. M. and Lightfoot, O. B.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Psychiatric Care of Ethnic Elders}, + editor = {Gaw, A. C.}, + booktitle = {Culture, Ethnicity, and Mental Illness}, + pages = {517--552}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + publisher = {American Psychiatric Press} +} + +@incollection{4.13-2, + author = {Merikle, Philip M.}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Subliminal Perception}, + editor = {Kazdin, Alan E. and Blanchard, Edward B. and + Bootzin, Richard R. and Bower, Gordon and + Close Conoley, Jane and Deaux, Kay and Fox, Ronald E. and + Harmon, Lenore W. and Howell, William C. and + Marsella, Anthony J. and Price, Richard H. and + Roediger, III, Henry L. and Rosenthal, Robert and + Schmitt, Neal W. and Singer, Jerome L. and Squire, Larry R. and + Zahn-Waxler, Carolyn}, + booktitle = {Encyclopedia of Psychology}, + volume = {7}, + pages = {497--499}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {Oxford University Press} +} + +@misc{4.15-1, + key = {{\APACcitebtitle{Electronic Reference Formats}}}, + title = {Electronic Reference Formats Recommended by the + {American} {Psychological} {Association}}, + year = {2000}, + month = oct, + day = {12}, + lastchecked = {October 23, 2000}, + URL = {http://www.apa.org/journals/webref.html} +} + +@article{4.15-2, + author = {Eid, M. and Langeheine, R.}, + year = {1999}, + title = {The Measurement of Consistency and Occasion Specificity + with Latent Class Models: A New Model and its + Application to the Measurement of Affect}, + journal = {Psychological Methods}, + volume = {4}, + pages = {100--116}, + howpublished = {Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database} +} + +% +% The rest is from section 4.16. Section number is omitted, +% but A-I are used instead. For the numbered examples, these +% letters are also omitted in favor of ``ex''. +% + +@article{A-1, + author = {Herman, L. M. and Kuczaj, III, S. A. and Holder, M. D.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Responses to Anomalous Gestural Sequences by a + Language-Trained Dolphin: {E}vidence for Processing + of Semantic Relations and Syntactic Information}, + journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology: General}, + volume = {122}, + pages = {184--194} +} + +@article{ex1, + author = {Mellers, B. A.}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Choice and the Relative Pleasure of Consequences}, + journal = {Psychological Bulletin}, + volume = {126}, + pages = {910--924} +} + +@article{ex2, + author = {Klimoski, R. and Palmer, S.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {The {ADA} and the Hiring Process in Organizations}, + journal = {Consulting Psychology Journal: Practice and Research}, + volume = {45}, + number = {2}, + pages = {10--36} +} + +@article{ex3, + author = {Saywitz, K. J. and Mannarino, A. P. and Berliner, L. + and Cohen, J. A.}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Treatment for Sexually Abused Children and Adolescents}, + journal = {American Psychologist}, + volume = {55}, + pages = {1040--1049} +} + +@article{ex4, + author = {Wolchik, S. A. and West, S. G. and Sandler, I. N. and + Tein, J. and Coatsworth, D. and Lengua, L. and others}, + year = {2000}, + title = {An Experimental Evaluation of Theory-Based Mother and + Mother-Child Programs for Children of Divorce}, + journal = {Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology}, + volume = {68}, + pages = {843--856} +} + +@article{ex4-2, + author = {Swait, Joffre and Adamowicz, Wiktor and Hanemann, Michael + and Diederich, Adele and Krosnick, Jon and Layton, David + and Provencher, William and Schkade, David and Tourangeau, Roger}, + year = {2002}, + title = {Context Dependence and Aggregation + in Disaggregate Choice Analysis}, + journal = {Marketing Letters}, + volume = {13}, + pages = {195--205} +} + +@article{ex5, + author = {Zuckerman, M. and Kieffer, S. C.}, + year = {\BIP}, + title = {Race Differences in Face-ism: {D}oes Facial Prominence + Imply Dominance?}, + journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology} +} + +@magazine{ex6, + author = {Kandel, E. R. and Squire, L. R.}, + year = {2000}, + month = nov, + day = {10}, + title = {Neuroscience: {B}reaking Down Scientific Barriers to the + Study of Brain and Mind}, + journal = {Science}, + volume = {290}, + pages = {1113--1120} +} + +@article{ex7, + author = {Brown, L. S.}, + year = {1993}, + month = spring, + title = {Antidomination Training as a Central Component of + Diversity in Clinical Psychology Education}, + journal = {The Clinical Psychologist}, + volume = {46}, + pages = {83--87} +} + +@article{ex8, + year = {1993}, + month = aug # "/" # sep, + title = {The New Health-Care Lexicon}, + journal = {Copy Editor}, + volume = {4}, + pages = {1--2} +} + +@newspaper{ex9, + key = {{\APACciteatitle{New Drug}}}, + year = {1993}, + month = jul, + day = {15}, + title = {New Drug Appears to Sharply Cut Risk of Death from + Heart Failure}, + journal = {The Washington Post}, + pages = {A12} +} + +@newspaper{ex10, + author = {Schwartz, J.}, + year = {1993}, + month = sep, + day = {30}, + title = {Obesity Affects Economic, Social Status}, + journal = {The Washington Post}, + pages = {A1, A4} +} + +@newspaper{ex11, + author = {Berkowitz, A. D.}, + year = {2000}, + month = nov, + day = {24}, + title = {How to Tackle the Problem of Student Drinking}, + type = {Letter to the editor}, + journal = {The Chronicle of Higher Education}, + pages = {B20} +} + +@article{ex12, + editor = {Barlow, D. H.}, + year = {1991}, + title = {Diagnoses, Dimensions, and \emph{DSM-IV}: + The Science of Classification}, + type = {Special issue}, + journal = {Journal of Abnormal Psychology}, + volume = {100}, + number = {3} +} + +@article{ex13, + author = {Harris, P. L. and Kavanaugh, R. D.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Young Children's Understanding of Pretense}, + journal = {Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development}, + volume = {58}, + number = {1, Serial No.~231}, +} + +@article{ex14, + author = {Battig, W. F. and Montague, W. E.}, + year = {1969}, + title = {Category Norms for Verbal Items in 56 Categories: + A Replication and Extension of the {Connecticut} + Category Norms}, + journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology Monographs}, + volume = {80}, + number = {3, Pt.~2} +} + +@article{ex15, + author = {Ganster, D. C. and Schaubroeck, J. and Sime, W. E. + and Mayes, B. T.}, + year = {1991}, + title = {The Nomological Validity of the {Type}~{A} Personality + Among Employed Adults}, + type = {Monograph}, + journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology}, + volume = {76}, + pages = {143--168} +} + +@article{ex16, + author = {Woolf, N. J. and Young, S. L. and Fanselow, M. S. and + Butcher, L. L.}, + year = {1991}, + title = {{MAP}-2 Expression in Cholinoceptive Pyramidal Cells + of Rodent Cortex and Hippocampus is Altered by + {Pavlovian} Conditioning}, + type = {Abstract}, + journal = {Society for Neuroscience Abstracts}, + volume = {17}, + pages = {480} +} + +@article{ex17, + author = {Nakazato, K. and Shimonaka, Y. and Homma, A.}, + year = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}}, + title = {Cognitive Functions of Centenarians: The {Tokyo} + {Metropolitan} {Centenarian} {Study}}, + journal = {Japanese Journal of Developmental Psychology}, + volume = {3}, + pages = {9--16}, + howpublished = {Abstract obtained from + {\APACcitebtitle{PsycSCAN: Neuropsychology}}, + 1993, \emph{2}, Abstract No.~604} +} + +@article{ex18, + author = {Regier, A. A. and Narrow, W. E. and Rae, D. S.}, + year = {1990}, + title = {The Epidemiology of Anxiety Disorders: The Epidemiologic + Catchment Area ({ECA}) Experience}, + journal = {Journal of Psychiatric Research}, + volume = {24}, + number = {Suppl.~2}, + pages = {3--14} +} + +@article{ex19, + author = {Fiske, S. T.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Social Cognition and Social Perception}, + journal = {Annual Review of Psychology}, + volume = {44}, + pages = {155--194} +} + +@article{ex20, + author = {Ising, M.}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Intensit{\"{a}}tsabh{\"{a}}ngigkeit evozierter {Potenzial} im + {EEG}: Sind impulsive {Personen} {Augmenter} oder + {Reducer}?}, + englishtitle = {Intensity Dependence in Event-Related {EEG} Potentials: + Are Impulsive Individuals Augmenters or Reducers?}, + journal = {Zeitschrift f{\"{u}}r Differentielle und Diagnostische + Psychologie}, + volume = {21}, + pages = {208--217} +} + +@article{ex21, + author = {Stutte, H.}, + year = {1972}, + title = {Transcultural Child Psychiatry}, + journal = {Acta Paedopsychiatrica}, + volume = {38}, + number = {9}, + pages = {229--231} +} + +@article{ex22, + author = {Coltheart, M. and Curtis, B. and Atkins, P. and Haller, M.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Models of Reading Aloud: Dual-Route and + Parallel-Distributed-Processing Approaches}, + journal = {Psychological Review}, + volume = {100}, + pages = {589--608} +} + +@book{B-1, + author = {Beck, C. A. J. and Sales, B. D.}, + year = {2001}, + title = {Family Mediation: Facts, Myths, and Future Prospects}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + publisher = {American Psychological Association} +} + +@book{ex23, + author = {Mitchell, T. R. and Larson, Jr.\hbox{}, J. R.}, + year = {1987}, + title = {People in Organizations: An Introduction to + Organizational Behavior}, + edition = {3}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {McGraw-Hill} +} + +@book{ex24, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}}, + year = {1991}, + title = {Estimated Resident Population by Age and Sex in + Statistical Local Areas, {New} {South} {Wales}, + {June} 1990}, + number = {3209.1}, + address = {Canberra, Australian Capital Territory}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}} +} + +@book{ex25, + editor = {Gibbs, J. T. and Huang, L. N.}, + year = {1991}, + title = {Children of Color: Psychological Interventions with + Minority Youth}, + address = {San Francisco}, + publisher = {Jossey-Bass} +} + +@book{ex25-t1, + author = {Vygotsky, L. S.}, + year = {1978}, + title = {Mind in Society: {T}he Development of Higher Mental + Processes}, + editor = {Rice, Edgar}, + translator = {Rice, Edgar}, + address = {Cambridge, MA}, + publisher = {Harvard University Press}, + originalyear = {1930, 1933, 1935} +} + +@book{ex25-t2, + author = {J{\"{o}}reskog, Karl G. and S{\"{o}}rbom, Dag}, + year = {1979}, + title = {Advances in Factor Analysis + and Structural Equation Models}, + editor = {Magidson, Jay}, + address = {Cambridge, MA}, + publisher = {Abt Books} +} + +@book{ex26, + year = {1993}, + title = {Merriam-{Webster}'s Collegiate Dictionary}, + edition = {10}, + address = {Springfield, MA}, + publisher = {Merriam-Webster} +} + +@book{ex27, + author = {Rosenthal, R.}, + year = {1987}, + title = {Meta-Analytic Procedures for Social Research}, + edition = {Rev.\hbox{}}, + address = {Newbury Park, CA}, + publisher = {Sage} +} + +@book{ex28, + editor = {Koch, S.}, + year = {1959--1963}, + title = {Psychology: {A} Study of Science}, + volume = {1--6}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {McGraw-Hill} +} + +@book{ex29, + key = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric + Association}{Diagnostic and Statistical Manual + of Mental Disorders}{4th ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}}, + author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}}, + year = {1994}, + title = {Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders}, + edition = {4}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}} +} + +@book{ex30, + editor = {Sadie, S.}, + year = {1980}, + title = {The New {G}rove Dictionary of Music and Musicians}, + edition = {6}, + volume = {1--20}, + address = {London}, + publisher = {Macmillan} +} + +@book{ex30-2, + editor = {Kazdin, Alan E. and Blanchard, Edward B. and + Bootzin, Richard R. and Bower, Gordon and + Close Conoley, Jane and Deaux, Kay and Fox, Ronald E. and + Harmon, Lenore W. and Howell, William C. and + Marsella, Anthony J. and Price, Richard H. and + Roediger, III, Henry L. and Rosenthal, Robert and + Schmitt, Neal W. and Singer, Jerome L. and Squire, Larry R. and + Zahn-Waxler, Carolyn}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Encyclopedia of Psychology}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {Oxford University Press} +} + +@book{ex31, + author = {Piaget, J. and Inhelder, B.}, + year = {1951}, + title = {La Gen{\`{e}}se de l'Id{\'{e}}e de Hasard chez l'Enfant}, + englishtitle = {The Origin of the Idea of Chance in the Child}, + address = {Paris}, + publisher = {Presses Universitaires de France} +} + +@book{ex32, + author = {Laplace, P.-S.}, + year = {1951}, + title = {A Philosophical Essay on Probabilities}, + translator = {Truscott, F. W. and Emory, F. L.}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {Dover}, + originalyear = {1814} +} + +@book{ex33, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Research and Training Center on + Independent Living}}}, + firstkey = {{Research and Training Center on Independent Living [RTCIL]}}, + key = {RTCIL}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Guidelines for Reporting and Writing About People + with Disabilities}, + edition = {4}, + type = {Brochure}, + address = {Lawrence, KS}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Research and Training Center on + Independent Living}}} +} + +@incollection{B-2, + author = {Massaro, D.}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Broadening the Domain of the Fuzzy Logical Model of Perception}, + editor = {Pick, Jr.\hbox{}, H. L. and van den Broek, P. and Knill, D. C.}, + booktitle = {Cognition: Conceptual and Methodological Issues}, + pages = {51--84}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + publisher = {American Psychological Association} +} + +@incollection{ex34, + author = {Bjork, R. A.}, + year = {1989}, + title = {Retrieval Inhibition as an Adaptive Mechanism in Human Memory}, + editor = {Roediger, III, H. L. and Craik, F. I. M.}, + booktitle = {Varieties of Memory \& Consciousness}, + pages = {309--330}, + address = {Hillsdale, NJ}, + publisher = {Erlbaum} +} + +@incollection{ex35, + author = {Auerbach, J. S.}, + year = {\BIP}, + title = {The Origins of Narcissism and Narcissistic Personality + Disorder: A Theoretical and Empirical Reformulation}, + editor = {Masling, J. M. and Bornstein, R. F.}, + booktitle = {Empirical Studies of Psychoanalytic Theories: + {Vol}.~4. {Psychoanalytic} Perspectives on Psychopathology}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + publisher = {American Psychological Association} +} + +@incollection{ex36, + author = {Maccoby, E. E. and Martin, J.}, + year = {1983}, + title = {Socialization in the Context of the Family: + Parent-Child Interaction}, + editor = {Mussen (Series Ed.\hbox{}), P. H. and + Hetherington{\bibeditortype{Vol.\ Ed.\hbox{}}}, E. M.}, + booktitle = {Handbook of Child Psychology: + {Vol}.~4. {Socialization}, Personality, and Social Development}, + edition = {4}, + pages = {1--101}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {Wiley} +} + +@incollection{ex37, + author = {Davydov, V. V.}, + year = {1972}, + title = {De Introductie van het Begrip Grootheid in de Eerste + Klas van de Basisschool: Een Experimenteel Onderzoek}, + englishtitle = {The Introduction of the Concept of Quantity in the + First Grade of the Primary School: An Experimental Study}, + editor = {Van Parreren, C. F. and Carpay, J. A. M.}, + booktitle = {Sovjetpsychologen aan het Woord}, + pages = {227--289}, + address = {Groningen, The Netherlands}, + publisher = {Wolters-Noordhoff} +} + +@incollection{ex38, + author = {Bergmann, P. G.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Relativity}, + booktitle = {The New Encyclopaedia {Britannica}}, + volume = {26}, + pages = {501--508}, + address = {Chicago}, + publisher = {Encyclopaedia Britannica} +} + +@incollection{ex39, + author = {Freud, Sigmund}, + year = {1961}, + title = {The Ego and the Id}, + editor = {Strachey, J.}, + translator = {Strachey, J.}, + booktitle = {The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological + Works of {Sigmund} {Freud}}, + volume = {19}, + pages = {3--66}, + address = {London}, + publisher = {Hogarth Press}, + originalyear = {1923} +} + +@incollection{ex40, + author = {Piaget, J.}, + year = {1988}, + title = {Extracts from {Piaget}'s Theory}, + translator = {Gellerier, G. and Langer, J.}, + editor = {Richardson, K. and Sheldon, S.}, + booktitle = {Cognitive Development to Adolescence: A Reader}, + pages = {3--18}, + address = {Hillsdale, NJ}, + publisher = {Erlbaum}, + originalbooktitle = {Manual of Child Psychology}, + originalpages = {703--732}, + originaleditor = {Mussen, P. H.}, + originalyear = {1970}, + originaladdress = {New York}, + originalpublisher = {Wiley} +} + +@incollection{ex40-t1, + author = {Browne, M[ichael] W.}, + year = {1977}, + title = {Generalized Least Squares Estimators in the Analysis + of Covariance Structures}, + editor = {Aigner, D[ennis] J. and Goldberger, A[rthur] S.}, + booktitle = {Latent Variables in Socio-Economic Models}, + pages = {205--226}, + address = {Amsterdam}, + publisher = {North Holland}, + originalyear = {1974}, + originaljournal = {South African Statistical Journal}, + originalvolume = {8}, + originalpages = {1--24}, +} + + +@techreport{C-1, + author = {Mazzeo, J. and Druesne, B. and Raffeld, P. C. + and Checketts, K. T. and Muhlstein, A.}, + year = {1991}, + title = {Comparability of Computer and Paper-and-Pencil Scores + for Two {CLEP} General Examinations}, + type = {College Board Rep.}, + number = {91-5}, + address = {Princeton, NJ}, + institution = {Educational Testing Service} +} + +@techreport{ex41, + author = {{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}, + firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}}, + key = {{NIMH}}, + year = {1990}, + title = {Clinical Training in Serious Mental Illness}, + type = {{DHHS} Publication}, + number = {ADM 90-1679}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + institution = {U.S. Government Printing Office} +} + +@techreport{ex42, + author = {Osgood, D. W. and Wilson, J. K.}, + year = {1990}, + title = {Covariation of Adolescent Health Problems}, + type = {\bibnotype}, + address = {Lincoln}, + institution = {University of Nebraska}, + note = {NTIS No.\hbox{} PB~91-154~377/AS} +} + +@techreport{ex43, + author = {Mead, J. V.}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Looking at Old Photographs: Investigating the Teacher + Tales that Novice Teachers Bring with Them}, + type = {Report}, + number = {NCRTL-RR-92-4}, + address = {East Lansing, MI}, + institution = {National Center for Research on Teacher Learning}, + note = {ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.\hbox{} ED346082} +} + +@techreport{ex44, + author = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and + Human Services}}}, + firstkey = {{U.S. Department of Health and Human Services [DHHS]}}, + key = {{DHHS}}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Pressure Ulcers in Adults: Prediction and Prevention}, + type = {AHCPR Publication}, + number = {92-0047}, + address = {Rockville, MD}, + institution = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and + Human Services}}} +} + +@intechreport{ex45, + author = {Matthews, K. A.}, + year = {1985}, + title = {Assessment of {Type}~{A} Behavior, Anger, and Hostility + in Epidemiologic Studies of Cardiovascular Disease}, + editor = {Ostfield, A. M. and Eaker, E. D.}, + booktitle = {Measuring Psychological Variables in Epidemiologic Studies + of Cardiovascular Disease}, + type = {NIH Publication}, + number = {85-2270}, + pages = {153--183}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + institution = {U.S. Department of Health and Human Services} +} + +@techreport{ex46, + author = {Broadhurst, R. G. and Maller, R. A.}, + year = {1991}, + title = {Sex Offending and Recidivism}, + number = {3}, + address = {Nedlands}, + institution = {University of Western Australia, Crime Research Centre} +} + +@techreport{ex47, + editor = {Shuker, R. and Openshaw, R. and Soler, J.}, + year = {1990}, + title = {Youth, Media, and Moral Panic in {New} {Zealand}: + From Hooligans to Video Nasties}, + type = {Delta Research Monograph}, + number = {11}, + address = {Palmerston North, New Zealand}, + institution = {Massey University, Department of Education} +} + +@techreport{ex48, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}}, + firstkey = {{Employee Benefit Research Institute [EBRI]}}, + key = {{EBRI}}, + year = {1992}, + month = feb, + title = {Sources of Health Insurance and Characteristics of the + Uninsured}, + type = {Issue Brief}, + number = {123}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + institution = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}} +} + +@incollection{ex49, + author = {Deci, E. L. and Ryan, R. M.}, + year = {1991}, + title = {A Motivational Approach to Self: + Integration in Personality}, + editor = {Dienstbier, R.}, + booktitle = {Nebraska {Symposium} on {Motivation}: Vol.~38. + {Perspectives} on Motivation}, + pages = {237--288}, + address = {Lincoln}, + publisher = {University of Nebraska Press} +} + +@article{ex50, + author = {Cynx, J. and Williams, H. and Nottebohm, F.}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Hemispheric Differences in Avian Song Discrimination}, + journal = {Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, USA}, + volume = {89}, + pages = {1372--1375} +} + +@lecture{ex51, + author = {Lichstein, K. L. and Johnson, R. S. and Womack, T. D. + and Dean, J. E. and Childers, C. K.}, + year = {1990}, + month = jun, + title = {Relaxation Therapy for Polypharmacy Use in Elderly + Insomniacs and Noninsomniacs}, + chair = {Rosenthal, T. L.}, + symposium = {Reducing Medication in Geriatric Populations}, + howpublished = {Symposium conducted at the meeting of the First + International Congress of Behavioral Medicine}, + address = {Uppsala, Sweden} +} + +@lecture{ex52, + author = {Lanktree, C. and Briere, J.}, + year = {1991}, + month = jan, + title = {Early Data on the {Trauma} {Symptom} {Checklist} + for {Children} ({TSC-C})}, + howpublished = {Paper presented at the meeting of the American + Professional Society on the Abuse of Children}, + address = {San Diego, CA} +} + +@lecture{ex53, + author = {Ruby, J. and Fulton, C.}, + year = {1993}, + month = jun, + title = {Beyond Redlining: Editing Software that Works}, + howpublished = {Poster session presented at the annual meeting of the + Society for Scholarly Publishing}, + address = {Washington, DC} +} + +@phdthesis{ex54, + author = {Bower, D. L.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Employee Assistant Programs Supervisory Referrals: + Characteristics of Referring and Nonreferring + Supervisors}, + journal = {Dissertation Abstracts International}, + volume = {54}, + number = {01}, + pages = {534B}, + note = {UMI No.~9315947} +} + +@phdthesis{ex55, + author = {Ross, D. F.}, + year = {1990}, + title = {Unconscious Transference and Mistaken Identity: When + a Witness Misidentifies a Familiar but Innocent Person + from a Lineup}, + school = {Cornell University}, + originalyear = {1990}, + journal = {Dissertation Abstracts International}, + volume = {51}, + pages = {417} +} + +@phdthesis{ex56, + author = {Wilfley, D. E.}, + year = {1989}, + title = {Interpersonal Analyses of Bulimia: Normalweight + and Obese}, + school = {University of Missouri}, + address = {Columbia} +} + +@mastersthesis{ex57, + author = {Almeida, D. M.}, + year = {1990}, + title = {Fathers' Participation in Family Work: Consequences + for Fathers' Stress and Father--Child Relations}, + school = {University of Victoria}, + address = {Victoria, British Columbia, Canada} +} + +@unpublished{ex58, + author = {Stinson, C. and Milbrath, C. and Reidbord, S. and Bucci, W.}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Thematic Segmentation of Psychotherapy Transcripts for + Convergent Analyses}, + howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript} +} + +@unpublished{ex59, + author = {D{\'{e}}pret, E. F. and Fiske, S. T.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Perceiving the Powerful: Intriguing Individuals Versus + Threatening Groups}, + howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript}, + organization = {University of Massachusetts at Amherst} +} + +@unpublished{ex60, + author = {McIntosh, D. N.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Religion as Schema, with Implications for the Relation + Between Religion and Coping}, + howpublished = {Manuscript submitted for publication} +} + +@unpublished{ex61, + author = {Bordi, F. and LeDoux, J. E.}, + year = {1993}, + type = {Auditory response latencies in rat auditory cortex}, + howpublished = {Unpublished raw data} +} + +@misc{ex62, + editor = {Klombers, N.}, + year = {1993}, + month = spring, + title = {{ADAA} {Reporter}}, + note = {Available from the Anxiety Disorders Association of + America, 6000 Executive Boulevard, Suite 513, + Rockville, MD 20852} +} + +@article{G-1, + author = {Mroczek, D. K.}, + year = {2000}, + title = {The Emerging Study of Midlife}, + type = {Review of the book {\APACcitebtitle{Life in the middle: + Psychological and social development in middle age}}}, + journal = {Contemporary Psychology: APA Review of Books}, + volume = {45}, + pages = {482--485} +} + +@article{ex63, + author = {Schatz, B. R.}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Learning by Text or Context?}, + type = {Review of the book + {\APACcitebtitle{The social life of information}}}, + journal = {Science}, + volume = {290}, + pages = {1304} +} + +@article{ex64, + author = {Kraus, S. J.}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Visions of Psychology: A Videotext of Classic Studies}, + type = {Review of the motion picture + {\APACcitebtitle{Discovering Psychology}}}, + journal = {Contemporary Psychology}, + volume = {37}, + pages = {1146--1147} +} + +@misc{ex65-1, + author = {Scorsese, M. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot} + and Lonergan, K. + {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer/Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, + year = {2000}, + title = {You Can Count On Me}, + type = {Motion picture}, + address = {United States}, + publisher = {Paramount Pictures} +} + +@misc{ex65-2, + author = {Harrison, J. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot} + and Schmiechen, R. + {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Changing Our Minds: The Story of {Evelyn} {Hooker}}, + type = {Motion picture}, + note = {Available from Changing Our Minds, Inc., 170 West End + Avenue, Suite 25R, New York, NY 10023} +} + +@misc{ex65-3, + author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association (Producer)}}}, + firstkey = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}}, + key = {{APA}}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Responding Therapeutically to Patient Expressions of + Sexual Attraction: A Stimulus Training Tape}, + type = {Motion picture}, + note = {Available from the American Psychological Association, + 750 First Street, NE, Washington, DC 20002-4242} +} + +@misc{ex66, + author = {Crystal, L. {\protect\bibliteral{(Executive + Producer)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, + year = {1993}, + month = oct, + day = {11}, + title = {The {MacNeil}/{Lehrer} News Hour}, + type = {Television broadcast}, + address = {New York and Washington, DC}, + publisher = {Public Broadcasting Service} +} + +@misc{ex67, + editor = {Miller, {\bibinitial{R\bibeditortype{Producer}}}}, + year = {1989}, + title = {The Mind}, + type = {Television series}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {WNET} +} + +@incollection{ex68, + author = {Hall, B. {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot} + and Bender, J. + {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, + year = {1991}, + title = {The Rules of the Game}, + type = {Television series episode}, + editor = {Sander{\bibeditortype{Producer}}, J.}, + booktitle = {I'll Fly Away}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {New York Broadcasting Company} +} + +@incollection{ex69-1, + key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked}{1992}{Over the + Waterfall}{track~5}}}, + author = {Shocked, Michelle}, + year = {1992}, + title = {Over the Waterfall{\bibInstring{\BOn}}}, + booktitle = {Arkansas Traveler {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}}, + address = {New York}, + publisher = {PolyGram Music} +} + +@incollection{ex69-2, + key = {{\protect\bibsong{Goodenough}{1982}{Tails + and Trotters}{track~5}}}, + author = {Goodenough, J. B.}, + year = {1982}, + title = {Tails and Trotters{\bibInstring{\BOn}}}, + type = {Recorded by G. Bok, A. Mayo, \& E. Trickett}, + booktitle = {And So Will We Yet {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}}, + address = {Sharon, CT}, + publisher = {Folk-Legacy Records}, + note = {1990} +} + +@misc{ex70, + author = {Costa, Jr.\hbox{} {\protect\bibliteral{(Speaker)}}, P. T.}, + year = {1988}, + title = {Personality, Continuity, and Changes of Adult Life}, + type = {Cassette Recording}, + number = {207-433-88A-B}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + publisher = {American Psychological Association} +} + +@article{ex71-1, + author = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.}, + year = {2001}, + title = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources + by Psychology Undergraduates}, + type = {Electronic version}, + journal = {Journal of Bibliographic Research}, + volume = {5}, + pages = {117--123} +} + +@article{ex71-2, + author = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.}, + year = {2001}, + title = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources + by Psychology Undergraduates}, + journal = {Journal of Bibliographic Research}, + volume = {5}, + pages = {117--123}, + lastchecked = {October 13, 2001}, + url = {http://jbr.org/articles.html} +} + +@article{ex72, + author = {Fredrickson, B. L.}, + year = {2000}, + month = mar, + day = {7}, + title = {Cultivating Positive Emotions to Optimize Health + and Well-Being}, + journal = {Prevention \& Treatment}, + volume = {3}, + pages = {Article 0001a}, + lastchecked = {November 20, 2000}, + url = {http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume3/pre0030001a.html} +} + +@article{ex73, + author = {Crow, T. J.}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Did \emph{Homo} {\emph{Sapiens}} Speciate on the + {\emph{Y}} Chromosome?}, + journal = {Psycoloquy}, + volume = {11}, + lastchecked = {March 25, 2001}, + url = {ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/ + 2000.volume.11/psyc.00.11.001. + language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow} +} + +@article{ex74, + author = {Glueckauf, R. L. and Whitton, J. and Baxter, J. and Kain, J. + and Vogelgesang, S. and Hudson, M. and others}, + year = {1998}, + month = jul, + title = {Videocounseling for Families of Rural Teens with + Epilepsy---{P}roject Update}, + journal = {Telehealth News}, + volume = {2}, + number = {2}, + lastchecked = {June 6, 2000}, + url = {http://www.telehealth.net/subscribe/newslettr_4a.html#1} +} + +@misc{ex75, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy + Community 2000, + Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues}}}, + firstkey = {{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy Community 2000, + Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues [TFTAI]}}, + key = {{TFTAI}}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + title = {Who Has Time for a Family Meal? {You} Do!}, + lastchecked = {October 5, 2000}, + url = {http://www.familymealtime.org} +} + +@incollection{ex76, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Benton Foundation}}}, + year = {1998}, + month = jul, + day = {7}, + title = {Barriers to Closing the Gap}, + booktitle = {Losing Ground Bit by Bit: Low-Income Communities in the + Information Age}, + chapter = {2}, + lastchecked = {August 18, 2001}, + url = {http://www.benton.org/Library/Low-Income/two.html}, +} + +@misc{ex77, + year = {\bibnodate}, + title = {{GVU}'s 8th {WWW} User Survey}, + lastchecked = {August 8, 2000}, + url = {http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/survey-1997-10/} +} + +@misc{ex78, + author = {Chou, L. and McClintock, R. and Moretti, F. and Nix, D. H.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Technology and Education: New Wine in New Bottles: + Choosing Pasts and Imagining Educational Futures}, + howpublished = {Retrieved August 24, 2000, from Columbia University, + Institute for Learning Technologies Web site: + \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/ + publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}} +} + +@misc{ex79, + author = {{\bibcorporate{University of California, San Francisco, + Institute for Health and Aging}}}, + firstkey = {{University of California, San Francisco, Institute for + Health and Aging [UCSF-IHA]}}, + key = {{UCSF-IHA}}, + year = {1996}, + month = nov, + title = {Chronic Care in {A}merica: {A} 21st Century Challenge}, + howpublished = {Retrieved September 9, 2000, from the Robert Wood Johnson + Foundation Web site: + \url{http://www.rwjf.org/library/chrcare/}\bibnodot{.}} +} + +@misc{ex80, + author = {{\bibcorporate{United States Sentencing Commission}}}, + firstkey = {{United States Sentencing Commission [USSC]}}, + key = {{USSC}}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + title = {{\APACSortNoop{Nineteen Ninety-Seven}}1997 Sourcebook of + Federal Sentencing Statistics}, + lastchecked = {December 8, 1999}, + url = {http://www.ussc.gov/annrpt/1997/sbtoc97.htm} +} + +@misc{ex81, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Canarie, Inc.}}}, + year = {1997}, + month = sep, + day = {27}, + title = {Towards a {Canadian} Health {IWAY}: Vision, Opportunities + and Future Steps}, + lastchecked = {November 8, 2000}, + url = {http://www.canarie.ca/press/publications/pdf/ + health/healthvision.doc} +} + +@techreport{ex82, + author = {Kruschke, J. K. and Bradley, A. L.}, + year = {1995}, + title = {Extensions to the Delta Rule of Associative Learning}, + type = {Indiana University Cognitive Science Research Report}, + number = {14\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}, + lastchecked = {October 21, 2000}, + url = {http://www.indiana.edu/~kruschke/deltarule_abstract.html}, +} + +@lecture{ex83, + author = {Cutler, L. D. and Fr{\"{o}}lich, B. and Hanrahan, P.}, + year = {1997}, + month = jan, + day = {16}, + title = {Two-Handed Direct Manipulation on the Responsive + Workbench}, + howpublished = {Paper presented at the 1997 Symposium on Interactive 3D + Graphics\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}, + lastchecked = {June 12, 2000}, + url = {http://www.graphics.stanford.edu/papers/twohanded/}, +} + +@lecture{ex84, + author = {Tan, G. and Lewandowsky, S.}, + year = {1996}, + title = {A Comparison of Operator Trust in Humans Versus Machines}, + howpublished = {Paper presented at the CybErg 96 virtual conference}, + lastchecked = {May 16, 2000}, + url = {http://www.curtin.edu.au/conference/cyberg/ + centre/outline.cgi/frame?dir=tan}, +} + +@misc{ex85, + author = {Chalmers, D.}, + year = {2000}, + month = nov, + day = {17}, + title = {Seeing with Sound}, + type = {\bibmessage}, + number = {1}, + url = {news://sci.psychology.consciousness} +} + +@misc{ex86, + author = {Simons, D. J.}, + year = {2000}, + month = jul, + day = {14}, + title = {News Resources for Visual Cognition}, + type = {\bibmessage}, + number = {31}, + url = {http://groups.yahoo.com/group/visualcognition/message/31} +} + +@misc{ex87, + author = {Hammond, T.}, + year = {2000}, + month = nov, + day = {20}, + title = {{YAHC}: {Handle} {Parameters}, {DOI} {Genres}, etc.}, + type = {\bibmessage}, + howpublished = {Message posted to Ref-Links electronic mailing list, + archived at \url{http://www.doi.org/mail-archive/ + ref-link/msg00088.html}\bibnodot{.}} +} + +@article{ex88, + author = {Borman, W. C. and Hanson, M. A. and Oppler, S. H. and + Pulakos, E. D. and White, L. A.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {Role of Early Supervisory Experience in Supervisor Performance}, + journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology}, + volume = {78}, + pages = {443--449}, + howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database} +} + +@newspaper{ex89, + author = {Hilts, P. J.}, + year = {1999}, + month = feb, + day = {16}, + title = {In Forecasting Their Emotions, Most People Flunk Out}, + journal = {New York Times}, + lastchecked = {November 21, 2000}, + url = {http://www.nytimes.com} +} + +@article{ex90, + author = {Fournier, M. and {\lowercase{D}}e Ridder, D. and Bensing, J.}, + year = {1999}, + title = {Optimism and Adaptation to Multiple Sclerosis: What Does + Optimism Mean?}, + journal = {Journal of Behavioral Medicine}, + volume = {22}, + pages = {303--326}, + howpublished = {Abstract retrieved October 23, 2000, from PsycINFO database} +} + +@techreport{ex91, + author = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. General Accounting Office}}}, + year = {1997}, + month = feb, + title = {Telemedicine: Federal Strategy is Needed to Guide Investments}, + type = {Publication}, + number = {GAO/NSAID/HEHS-97-67}, + howpublished = {Retrieved September 15, 2000, from General Accounting Office + Reports Online via GPO Access: + \url{http://www.access.gpo.gov/su_docs/aces/ + aces160.shtml?/gao/index.html}\bibnodot{.}} +} + +@misc{ex92, + author = {Miller, M. E.}, + year = {1993}, + title = {The {Interactive} {Tester}}, + edition = {Version~4.0\noedition\ignorespaces}, + type = {\bibcomputersoftware}, + address = {Westminster, CA}, + publisher = {Psytek Services} +} + +@misc{ex93, + author = {Schwarzer, R.}, + year = {1989}, + title = {Statistics Software for Meta-Analysis}, + type = {\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}, + lastchecked = {March 23, 2001}, + url = {http://www.yorku.ca/faculty/academic/schwarze/meta_e.htm} +} + +@manual{ex93-t1, + author = {{\bibcorporate{R Development Core Team}}}, + year = {2004}, + title = {R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing}, + address = {Vienna, Austria}, + publisher = {R Foundation for Statistical Computing}, + url = {http://www.r-project.org} +} + +@misc{ex94, + key = {{\APACcitebtitle{National Health Interview Survey}}}, + title = {National {Health} {Interview} {Survey}---{Current} Health + Topics: 1991---{Longitudinal} Study of Aging}, + edition = {Version~4\noedition\ignorespaces}, + type = {Data file}, + year = {\bibnodate}, + address = {Hyattsville, MD}, + publisher = {National Center for Health Statistics} +} + +@misc{ex95, + author = {{\bibcorporate{Department of Health and Human Services, + National Center for Health Statistics}}}, + firstkey = {{Department of Health and Human Services, + National Center for Health Statistics [DHHS-NCHS]}}, + key = {{DHHS-NCHS}}, + year = {1991}, + title = {National {Health} {Provider} {Inventory}: Home Health + Agencies and Hospices, 1991}, + type = {Data file}, + howpublished = {Available from National Technical Information Service + Web site, \url{http://www.ntis.gov}\bibnodot{.}} +} + +% +% Additional references. +% + +@book{APAManual3, + author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}}, + firstkey = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}}, + key = {{APA}}, + year = {1984}, + title = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological} + {Association}}, + edition = {3}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}}, + note = {with revisions}, +} + +@book{APAManual, + author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}}, + firstkey = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}}, + key = {{APA}}, + year = {2001}, + title = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological} + {Association}}, + edition = {5}, + address = {Washington, DC}, + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}}, +} + +@book{chicago, + title = {The {Chicago} Manual of Style}, + edition = {15}, + year = {2003}, + address = {Chicago}, + publisher = {The University of Chicago Press}, +} + +@book{LaTeXbook, + author = {Lamport, Leslie}, + year = {1994}, + title = {{\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}: A Document Preparation System. + {User}'s Guide and Reference Manual}, + edition = {2}, + address = {Reading, MA}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, +} + +@book{KoDa04, + author = {Kopka, Helmut and Daly, Patrick W.}, + year = {2004}, + title = {Guide To {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}}, + edition = {4}, + address = {Boston, MA}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, +} + +@book{TLC2, + author = {Mittelbach, Frank and Goossens, Michel}, + year = {2004}, + title = {The {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX} Companion}, + edition = {2}, + address = {Boston, MA}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, +} + +@book{meijer1998, + author = {Meijer, Erik}, + year = {1998}, + title = {Structural Equation Models for Nonnormal Data}, + address = {Leiden, The Netherlands}, + publisher = {DSWO Press}, +} + +@book{WaMe00, + author = {Wansbeek, Tom and Meijer, Erik}, + year = {2000}, + title = {Measurement Error and Latent Variables in Econometrics}, + address = {Amsterdam}, + publisher = {North-Holland}, +} + +@unpublished{APA-3rd-ed-ex53, + author = {Gottfredson, G. D.}, + year = {1978}, + title = {Why Don't Vocational Interests Predict Job + Satisfaction Better Than They Do?}, + howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript}, + organization = {Johns Hopkins University, Center for Social + Organization of Schools}, + address = {Baltimore}, +} + +%% +%</bibdb> +% \end{macrocode} +% \section{\BibTeX\ style (\fname{apacite.bst}, \fname{apacitex.bst})} +% The program in \BibTeX's language that formats the reference list. +% These two files are almost identical, but \fname{apacitex.bst} +% generates information that can be used to generate an author index +% as well. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<bibstyle>%% apacite.bst : reference list according to APA manual +%<xbibstyle>%% apacitex.bst : reference list according to APA manual +%<xbibstyle>%% with author indexing information +%<*bibstyle|xbibstyle> +%% Written by Erik Meijer + +FUNCTION {identify.apacite.version} +{ % Put identifying string in the .blg file +%</bibstyle|xbibstyle> +%<bibstyle> "apacite.bst" +%<xbibstyle> "apacitex.bst" +%<bibstyle> " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style]" +%<xbibstyle> " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info]" +%<*bibstyle|xbibstyle> + * top$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% DECLARATION OF FIELDS, INTEGERS, AND STRINGS FOR EACH % +% ENTRY % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +ENTRY + { address + annote % not used + author + booktitle % for articles in books + chair % for lectures + chapter % for incollection, esp. internet documents + day + edition + editor + englishtitle % english translation of title in other language + firstkey % key for first citation + howpublished + institution % for technical reports + journal + key % key for second and later citations, or all + % citations if firstkey is missing + lastchecked % for URL's + month + note + number % number of journal or report + organization % for unpublished + % + % for reprints, translations, etc. + % + originaladdress + originalbooktitle + originaledition + originaleditor + originaljournal + originalnumber + originalpages + originalpublisher + originalvolume + originalyear + % + % back to normal + % + pages + publisher + school % for theses + series % not used + symposium % for lectures + text % for literals + title + translator % translator of book (or article) + type % type of phdthesis (e.g., Doctoral dissertation) + % or type of article (e.g., Letter to the editor) + % etc. + url + volume + year + } + { title.number % for sorting titles + cite.initials % dummy (0-1) indicating whether or not + % initials of the 1st author must + % be used for citing + cite.num.names.full % number of names to be cited for full and + cite.num.names.short % short cite + add.to.year % For a, b, c, etc. after year + % in multiple citations with same author-year + } + { year.label % For sorting entries by year + author.year.sort.label % For sorting entries and checking whether + % initials should be added, how many authors + % should be cited and whether a, b, etc. + % after year is necessary + title.sort.label % for sorting titles + type.2 % Replacement for type with misc entries and + % entries that revert to misc. + } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% DECLARATION OF GLOBAL INTEGERS AND STRINGS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +INTEGERS { len pos name.max old.number numnames numnames.old + nameptr lastname format.num.names cite.initials.old + cite.num.names.old add.to.year.old forward + multiresult dot brace.level + } + +STRINGS { s t u old.label field + aut1f aut1s aut1f.old aut1s.old + aut2 aut2.old + aut3 aut3.old + aut4 aut4.old + aut5 aut5.old + aut6 aut6.old + year.label.old + } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% A small function for testing purposes. + +FUNCTION {test} { #0 } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% A small function that indicates whether index entries must be +% generated. This is the only line that is different between +% apacite.bst and apacitex.bst + +%</bibstyle|xbibstyle> +%<bibstyle>FUNCTION {make.index} { #0 } +%<xbibstyle>FUNCTION {make.index} { #1 } +%<*bibstyle|xbibstyle> + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% MONTH MACROS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Use numbers now, along with a LaTeX function, which translates +% them into words. This allows language-specific deviations. + +MACRO {jan} {"{\APACmonth{01}}"} + +MACRO {feb} {"{\APACmonth{02}}"} + +MACRO {mar} {"{\APACmonth{03}}"} + +MACRO {apr} {"{\APACmonth{04}}"} + +MACRO {may} {"{\APACmonth{05}}"} + +MACRO {jun} {"{\APACmonth{06}}"} + +MACRO {jul} {"{\APACmonth{07}}"} + +MACRO {aug} {"{\APACmonth{08}}"} + +MACRO {sep} {"{\APACmonth{09}}"} + +MACRO {oct} {"{\APACmonth{10}}"} + +MACRO {nov} {"{\APACmonth{11}}"} + +MACRO {dec} {"{\APACmonth{12}}"} + +MACRO {winter} {"{\APACmonth{13}}"} + +MACRO {spring} {"{\APACmonth{14}}"} + +MACRO {summer} {"{\APACmonth{15}}"} + +MACRO {fall} {"{\APACmonth{16}}"} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% LOGICAL `NOT', `AND', AND `OR' % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Logical 'not': +% If the first element on the stack is A then this function +% does the following: +% push { #0 } +% push { #1 } +% So now the first 3 elements of the stack are +% { #1 } { #0 } A +% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if': +% If A > 0 then { #0 } is executed, else { #1 } is executed: +% if A > 0 +% then 0 +% else 1 +% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false, +% then this does +% (if A then false else true) +% which is a logical 'not'. + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Logical 'and': +% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B +% then this function does the following: +% push 'skip$ +% push { pop$ #0 } +% So now first 4 elements are +% { pop$ #0 } 'skip$ A B +% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of +% the stack): +% If A > 0 then 'skip$ is executed, else { pop$ #0 } is executed: +% if A > 0 +% then (B stays on top of stack) +% else (B is popped and #0 is pushed) +% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false, +% then this does +% (if A then B else false) +% which is a logical 'and'. + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Logical 'or': +% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B +% then this function does the following: +% push { pop$ #1 } +% push 'skip$ +% So now first 4 elements are +% 'skip$ { pop$ #1 } A B +% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of +% the stack): +% If A > 0 then { pop$ #1 } is executed, else 'skip$ is executed: +% if A > 0 +% then (B is popped and #1 is pushed) +% else (B stays on top of stack) +% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false, +% then this does +% (if A then true else B) +% which is a logical 'or'. + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR FORMATTING % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % issues warning if field is empty + % call with + % "field" field warning.if.empty + % Note that the first field must be between quotes + % because it is the fieldname for use in the warning message. + % +FUNCTION {warning.if.empty} +{ empty$ + { "No " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + { pop$ } + if$ +} + + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % issues warning if title, type, and howpublished are empty + % +FUNCTION {check.relevant.fields} +{ title empty$ + type empty$ and + howpublished empty$ and + { "No title, type, and howpublished in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % delivers 1 if (both editor and translator + % not empty and not equal to each other) + % 0 if (editor or translator empty) or + % (editor = translator) + % +FUNCTION {editor.ne.trans} +{ translator empty$ + { #0 } + { editor empty$ + { #0 } + { translator editor = + { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Convert integer to string, assume that integer < 100,000 + +FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str} +{ duplicate$ #10 < + { "0000" swap$ int.to.str$ * } + { duplicate$ #100 < + { "000" swap$ int.to.str$ * } + { duplicate$ #1000 < + { "00" swap$ int.to.str$ * } + { duplicate$ #10000 < + { "0" swap$ int.to.str$ * } + { int.to.str$ } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Delivers 1 if possibly editor in author position +% 2 if editor not in author position +% 3 if not applicable: use key +% 0 if unknown type + +FUNCTION {ref.type} +{ type$ "article" = + type$ "magazine" = + type$ "newspaper" = + type$ "book" = + type$ "techreport" = + type$ "unpublished" = + type$ "misc" = + type$ "booklet" = + type$ "manual" = + type$ "proceedings" = + or + or + or + or + or + or + or + or + or + { #1 } + { type$ "incollection" = + type$ "phdthesis" = + type$ "mastersthesis" = + type$ "lecture" = + type$ "inbook" = + type$ "inproceedings" = + type$ "conference" = + type$ "intechreport" = + or + or + or + or + or + or + or + { #2 } + { type$ "literal" = + { #3 } + { #0 } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Delivers 1 if title is formatted as an "article"-type, +% 0 otherwise + +FUNCTION {is.atype} +{ type$ "article" = + type$ "magazine" = + type$ "newspaper" = + type$ "incollection" = + type$ "inbook" = + type$ "inproceedings" = + type$ "conference" = + type$ "intechreport" = + type$ "manual" = + or + or + or + or + or + or + or + or + { #1 } + { journal empty$ not + % + type$ "phdthesis" = + type$ "mastersthesis" = + or + % + and + { #1 } + { type$ "misc" = + type empty$ not and + { type "\bibmessage" = + type "\bibcomputerprogram" = + type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" = + type "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" = + type "\bibcomputersoftware" = + type "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" = + type "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" = + type "\bibprogramminglanguage" = + or + or + or + or + or + or + or + { #1 } + { #0 } + if$ + } + { #0 } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % connects two strings with connect string + % if one of them empty, then connect string + % is left out + % + % call with S1 S2 connectstring connect.check + % +FUNCTION {connect.check} +{ 'u := + % + % if S2 = "" + % + duplicate$ empty$ + % + % then remove S2 + % + { pop$ + % + % S1 is on top of stack. + % if it is empty, it is replaced by the empty string "" + % + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + % + % else swap S1 and S2 so that S1 can be checked + % + { swap$ + % + % if S1 is empty, remove S1 so that S2 is left on the + % stack and is the result is given + % + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ } + % + % now the real work starts: + % push the connect string "C" + % so that top of stack is "C" "S1" "S2" + % concatenate, so that top of stack is + % "S1+C" "S2" + % + { u * + % + % swap and concatenate + % + swap$ * + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % connects two strings with space ("\ ") + % if length of second is 4 or larger, + % connects them with non-breaking space ("tie", "~") + % if length of second smaller than 4 + % + % call with S1 S2 tie.or.space.connect + % result: "S1\ S2" or "S1~S2" + % +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #4 < + { "~" } + { "\ " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % connects two strings with comma (", ") + % if one of them is empty, the comma is left out + % + % call with S1 S2 connect.with.comma.check + % result: "S1, S2" + % +FUNCTION {connect.with.comma.check} +{ ", " connect.check } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % connects two strings with semicolon ("; ") + % if one of them is empty, semicolon is left out + % + % call with S1 S2 connect.with.semicolon.check + % result: "S1; S2" + % +FUNCTION {connect.with.semicolon.check} +{ "; " connect.check } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % connects two strings with colon (": ") + % if one of them is empty, colon is left out + % + % call with S1 S2 connect.with.colon.check + % result: "S1: S2" + % +FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check} +{ ": " connect.check } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % connects two strings with space ("\ ") + % + % call with S1 S2 connect.with.space.check + % result: "S1\ S2" + % +FUNCTION {connect.with.space.check} +{ "\ " connect.check } + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % encloses string in pre- and postfix string + % call with + % prefix postfix S enclose.check + % delivers empty string if S empty + % +FUNCTION {enclose.check} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ pop$ pop$ + "" + } + { swap$ * * } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % emphasizes top of stack + % call with + % "string" emphasize.check + % +FUNCTION {emphasize.check} +{ "\Bem{" swap$ + "}" swap$ + enclose.check +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % brackets top of stack + % call with + % "string" bracket + % +FUNCTION {bracket.check} +{ "[" swap$ + "]" swap$ + enclose.check +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % parenthesizes top of stack + % call with + % "string" parenthesize + % +FUNCTION {parenthesize.check} +{ "(" swap$ + ")" swap$ + enclose.check +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % checks whether argument is "multiresult": + % whether it contains '-', '+', or ',' characters + % used with pages to check whether pp. or p. must be used + % +FUNCTION {multi.result.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + % + % while (not multiresult) and (length(t) > 1) do + % + { multiresult not + t text.length$ #1 > + and + } + % + % if t(1-2) = "--" or t(1) = "+" or "," + % then multiresult = 1 + % else t = t(2-last) + % + { t #1 #2 substring$ 's := + "--" s = + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #1 #1 substring$ 's := + "+" s = + "," s = + or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % Checks whether an author is a corporate author, i.e., + % whether the field starts with "{\bibcorporate". + % Call with + % field is.bibcorporate + % +FUNCTION {is.bibcorporate} +{ #1 #14 substring$ "{\bibcorporate" = } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Remove non-alphanumeric characters +% and change to lower case . + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Remove spaces from a string. Used for sorting. +% +% Call with +% string remove.spaces +% +% E.g., +% "fine old day" remove.spaces +% gives "fineoldday" . + +FUNCTION {remove.spaces} +{ % Remove spaces from string. + % Works best if string only contains alphanumeric characters and spaces. + 's := % The original string + s text.length$ 'len := % Its length (no. of characters) + "" 't := % Initialize the transformed string + #0 'pos := + % + % while (pos < len) do + % + { pos len < } + { pos #1 + 'pos := + s pos #1 substring$ 'u := + % + % u is the pos-th character in s + % If it is a space, move to next character, + % else copy character to output. + % + u " " = + 'skip$ + { t u * 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + % + % Now push the result back on the stack + t +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% BASIC OUTPUT FUNCTIONS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack, + % starting a new line and adding some extra space or + % whatever is more defined in \newblock + % +FUNCTION {output.end.block} +{ write$ + newline$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack, + % starting a new line and adding some extra space or + % whatever is more defined in \newblock + % +FUNCTION {output.new.block} +{ output.end.block + "\newblock" write$ + newline$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack, + % starting a new line and adding some extra space or + % whatever is more defined in \newblock + % +FUNCTION {output.dot.new.block} +{ add.period$ + output.new.block +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Starting new block assuming that stack is empty. +% Starting a new line and adding some extra space or +% whatever is more defined in \newblock + +FUNCTION {start.new.block} +{ newline$ + "\unskip\ " write$ newline$ + "\newblock " write$ newline$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % finish current entry + % by writing what's left on the stack and starting a new line + % +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ output.end.block + "\PrintBackRefs{\CurrentBib}" write$ newline$ + test + { "\vspace{\baselineskip}" write$ newline$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING BY AUTHOR (OR SUBSTITUTE), YEAR, % +% TITLE % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +FUNCTION {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{ f{}}{ vv{}}{ jj{}}" } + +FUNCTION {cite.name.format} { "{ll}" } + +FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } + +FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" } + +FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } + +FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Check whether initials must be added (1). +% Initialization. + +FUNCTION {init.initials} +{ "yyyyy" 'aut1f.old := + "yyyyy" 'aut1s.old := + #0 'cite.initials.old := +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Check whether initials must be added (2). +% Update when author, editor, and key fields are not used. +% +% Call with +% field update.no.initials + +FUNCTION {update.no.initials} +{ 'field := + field 'aut1f.old := + field 'aut1s.old := + #0 'cite.initials.old := +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Check whether initials must be added (3). + +FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut} +{ % + % If last name is equal to previous last name + % but initials are different, then initials should + % be cited. If initials are also the same, initials + % should be cited if that is the case for the previous + % author . + % + aut1s aut1s.old = + { aut1f aut1f.old = + { cite.initials.old 'cite.initials := } + { #1 'cite.initials := + aut1f 'aut1f.old := + aut1s 'aut1s.old := + cite.initials 'cite.initials.old := + } + if$ + } + { % + % Different last name. + aut1f 'aut1f.old := + aut1s 'aut1s.old := + cite.initials 'cite.initials.old := + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Check whether initials must be added (4). +% Call with +% field check.add.initials.field + +FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field} +{ 'field := + field #1 cite.initials.name.format format.name$ 'aut1f := + field #1 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut1s := + % + % Now do the actual work + % + check.add.initials.aut +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Check whether initials must be added (4). + +FUNCTION {check.add.initials} +{ % + % Check whether author or editor or other field acts as author. + % Initials are only relevant with author or editor. + % + firstkey empty$ not + { key empty$ not + { % + % Both key and firstkey are nonempty. + % Then, key is treated as last name of first author, + % and firstkey is treated as last name + initials of + % first author . + % + firstkey sortify remove.spaces 'aut1f := + key sortify remove.spaces 'aut1s := + check.add.initials.aut + } + { firstkey sortify remove.spaces update.no.initials } + if$ + } + { key empty$ not + { key sortify remove.spaces update.no.initials } + { % + % No key or firstkey, so find out which field + % to use as author. + % + % Check reference type: + % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author + % 2 then editor does not act as author + % 3 then key should have been used + % 0 then unknown reference type + ref.type #2 = + { % + % Format first author with and without initials + author empty$ + { title.sort.label update.no.initials } + { author check.add.initials.field } + if$ + } + { % + % Format first author with and without initials + author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { title.sort.label update.no.initials } + { editor check.add.initials.field } + if$ + } + { author check.add.initials.field } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (1). +% Call with +% field tentative.cite.num.names.field + +FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field} +{ 'field := + field num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames #3 < + { % + % 1 or 2 names: always cite all of them. + numnames 'cite.num.names.full := + numnames 'cite.num.names.short := + } + { numnames #6 < + { % + % 3-5 names: cite all of them the first time, + % only the first name later times + numnames 'cite.num.names.full := + #1 'cite.num.names.short := + } + { % + % 6 or more names: cite only the first name + #1 'cite.num.names.full := + #1 'cite.num.names.short := + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (2). + +FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names} +{ % + % Check whether author or editor or other field acts as author. + % Number of names is only relevant with author or editor. + % + firstkey empty$ not + { + #1 'cite.num.names.full := + #1 'cite.num.names.short := + } + { key empty$ not + { + #1 'cite.num.names.full := + #1 'cite.num.names.short := + } + { % + % No key or firstkey, so find out which field + % to use as author. + % + % Check reference type: + % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author + % 2 then editor does not act as author + % 3 then key should have been used + % 0 then unknown reference type + ref.type #2 = + { % + % Format first author with and without initials + author empty$ + { + #1 'cite.num.names.full := + #1 'cite.num.names.short := + } + { author tentative.cite.num.names.field } + if$ + } + { % + % Format first author with and without initials + author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { + #1 'cite.num.names.full := + #1 'cite.num.names.short := + } + { editor tentative.cite.num.names.field } + if$ + } + { author tentative.cite.num.names.field } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Initialize "number of names to be cited" before +% looping over entries. + +FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names} +{ #0 'cite.num.names.old := + #0 'numnames.old := + "yyyy" 'year.label.old := + #0 'add.to.year.old := + "" 'aut1f.old := + "" 'aut2.old := + "" 'aut3.old := + "" 'aut4.old := + "" 'aut5.old := + "" 'aut6.old := +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Update "number of names to be cited" . + +FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names} +{ cite.num.names.short 'cite.num.names.old := + numnames 'numnames.old := + year.label 'year.label.old := + add.to.year 'add.to.year.old := + aut1f 'aut1f.old := + aut2 'aut2.old := + aut3 'aut3.old := + aut4 'aut4.old := + aut5 'aut5.old := + aut6 'aut6.old := +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Format (maximally) 6 authors for comparison issues +% to determine number of authors that must be cited. +% It is assumed that the 'field' and 'numnames' variables +% have already been defined. + +FUNCTION {format.6.authors} +{ % + % First author: with initials. + % + field #1 cite.initials.name.format format.name$ 'aut1f := + % + % Second and later authors: without initials. + % + numnames #1 > + name.max #1 > + and + { % + % 2nd author + field #2 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut2 := + % + numnames #2 > + name.max #2 > + and + { % + % 3nd author + field #3 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut3 := + % + numnames #3 > + name.max #3 > + and + { % + % 4th author + field #4 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut4 := + % + numnames #4 > + name.max #4 > + and + { % + % 5th author + field #5 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut5 := + % + numnames #5 > + name.max #5 > + and + { % + % 6th author + field #6 cite.name.format format.name$ 'aut6 := + } + { % + % 5 authors: 6 is empty + % + "" 'aut6 := + } + if$ + } + { % + % 4 authors: 5-6 are empty + % + "" 'aut5 := + "" 'aut6 := + } + if$ + } + { % + % 3 authors: 4-6 are empty + % + "" 'aut4 := + "" 'aut5 := + "" 'aut6 := + } + if$ + } + { % + % 2 authors: 3-6 are empty + % + "" 'aut3 := + "" 'aut4 := + "" 'aut5 := + "" 'aut6 := + } + if$ + } + { % + % Only 1 author: 2-6 are empty + % + "" 'aut2 := + "" 'aut3 := + "" 'aut4 := + "" 'aut5 := + "" 'aut6 := + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited +% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1). +% a's or b's are necessary: update add.to.year variable + +FUNCTION {change.add.to.year} +{ + forward #1 = + { % + % Moving forward: this add.to.year number must be 1 higher than + % previous. + % + add.to.year.old #0 > + { add.to.year.old #1 + 'add.to.year := } + { #2 'add.to.year := } + if$ + } + { % + % Moving backward: this add.to.year number must be 1 lower than + % previous. + % + add.to.year.old #1 - 'add.to.year := + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited +% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1). +% Current and/or previous entry has 1 or 2 authors +% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the +% same year. The number of authors does not need to be changed +% in this case, but a's or b's may be necessary. + +FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2} +{ % + numnames numnames.old = + { % + % Same number of names: ambiguity could arise. Check whether current + % and previous have the same author(s). + % + aut1f aut1f.old = + { % + % Same first author: if the second author is also the same or if + % there is only one author, a's and b's should be added. + % + aut2 aut2.old = + numnames #2 = + and + % + numnames #1 = + or + { % + % Same author(s): add to year. + % + change.add.to.year + } + { % + % Different second author: no ambiguity possible. + % + skip$ + } + if$ + } + { % + % Different first author: no ambiguity possible. + % + skip$ + } + if$ + } + { % + % Different number of names: no ambiguity possible. + % + skip$ + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited +% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (2). +% Both current and previous entries have 3 or more authors +% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the +% same year. + +FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more} +{ % + % Check whether current and previous have the same first author. + % + aut1f aut1f.old = + { % + % Same first author: check second author + % + aut2 aut2.old = + { % + % Same 1st & 2nd author: check 3rd. + % + aut3 aut3.old = + { % + % Same 1st-3rd authors: check 4th. + % + numnames.old #3 = + { numnames #3 = + { % + % Both current and previous have 3 authors, which are + % the same, so both have identical author-year + % combinations, so ambiguity should be resolved by + % a's and b's. Check whether more authors were + % necessary for previous one. + % + change.add.to.year + cite.num.names.short cite.num.names.old < + { cite.num.names.old + 'cite.num.names.short := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { % + % Previous has 3 authors, current has more, with same + % first 3, so at least 4 must be used for current to + % make a difference. + % + cite.num.names.short #4 < + { #4 'cite.num.names.short := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + } + { numnames #3 = + { % + % Current has 3 authors, previous has more, with same + % first 3, so all 3 of current must be used. + % + numnames 'cite.num.names.short := + } + { % + % Same 1st-3rd author and both current and previous + % have at least 4 authors: check 4th. + % + aut4 aut4.old = + { % + % Same 1st-4th authors: check 5th. + % + numnames.old #4 = + { numnames #4 = + { % + % Both current and previous have 4 authors, + % which are the same, so both have + % identical author-year combinations, so + % ambiguity should be resolved by a's and + % b's. Check whether more authors were + % necessary for previous one. + % + change.add.to.year + cite.num.names.short cite.num.names.old < + { cite.num.names.old + 'cite.num.names.short := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { % + % Previous has 4 authors, current has more, + % with same first 4, so at least 5 must be + % used for current to make a difference. + % + cite.num.names.short #5 < + { #5 'cite.num.names.short := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + } + { numnames #4 = + { % + % Current has 4 authors, previous has more, + % with same first 4, so all 4 of current + % must be used. + % + numnames 'cite.num.names.short := + } + { % + % Same 1st-4th author and both current and + % previous have at least 5 authors: check + % 5th. + % + aut5 aut5.old = + { % + % Same 1st-5th authors: check 6th. + % + numnames.old #5 = + { numnames #5 = + { % + % Both current and previous + % have 5 authors, which are the + % same, so both have identical + % author-year combinations, so + % ambiguity should be resolved + % by a's and b's. Check whether + % more authors were necessary + % for previous one. + % + change.add.to.year + cite.num.names.short + cite.num.names.old < + { cite.num.names.old + 'cite.num.names.short := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { % + % Previous has 5 authors, + % current has more, with same + % first 5, so at least 6 must + % be used for current to make + % a difference. + % + cite.num.names.short #6 < + { #6 'cite.num.names.short := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + } + { numnames #5 = + { % + % Current has 5 authors, + % previous has more, with same + % first 5, so all 5 of current + % must be used. + % + numnames 'cite.num.names.short := + } + { % + % Same 1st-5th author and both + % current and previous have at + % least 6 authors. If one has + % 6 authors and the other has + % more or the 6th is different, + % 6 should be used (which is + % the maximum). + % + numnames #6 > + numnames.old #6 = + and + % + numnames #6 = + numnames.old #6 > + and + % + or + % + aut6 aut6.old = + not + % + or + { #6 cite.num.names.short < + { #6 + 'cite.num.names.short + := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { % + % The first 6 authors are + % the same and either both + % have 6 or both have more. + % So for all practical + % purposes they have + % identical author-year + % combination, so ambiguity + % should be resolved by a's + % and b's. Check whether + % more authors were + % necessary for previous + % one. + % + change.add.to.year + cite.num.names.short + cite.num.names.old + < + { cite.num.names.old + 'cite.num.names.short + := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { % + % Different 4th author: citing 4 authors is + % sufficient for this comparison. + % + cite.num.names.short #4 < + { #4 'cite.num.names.short := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { % + % Different 3rd author: citing 3 authors is sufficient for this + % comparison. + % + cite.num.names.short #3 < + { #3 'cite.num.names.short := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + } + { % + % Different 2nd author: citing 2 authors is sufficient for this + % comparison. + % + cite.num.names.short #2 < + { #2 'cite.num.names.short := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + } + { % + % Different first author: no ambiguity, move to next entry. + % + skip$ + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited +% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (3). +% Current entry has an author or editor acting as author. +% +% Call with +% field definitive.cite.num.names.field +% +% What should we do with explicit "others"? Is now ignored. +% If this causes ambiguity that could be resolved, the user +% should have added additional author names. + +FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field} +{ 'field := + field num.names$ 'numnames := + % + % Format authors + % + format.6.authors + % + % Now compare authors with authors of previous entry. + % + cite.num.names.short numnames.old > + { % + % The previous entry has less authors than already defined + % necessary to be cited. No ambiguity is possible and we're ready. + % + skip$ + } + { % + % Both previous and current entry have at least one author . + % + year.label year.label.old = + { % + % Same year label: possibly ambiguous citation. + % + % First check: current and/or previous have 1 or + % 2 authors. + % + numnames #3 < + numnames.old #3 < + or + % + { definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2 } + { definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more } + if$ + } + { % + % Different year label: everything's fine, + % move to next entry. + % + skip$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + % + % If during the previous process the name maximum is exceeded + % (which was not checked), correct this. NOTE: If the name + % maximum is smaller than 6, this could lead to ambiguous + % citations if, e.g., the year and the first 5 authors are + % the same, but the 6th author is different. + % + cite.num.names.short name.max > + { name.max 'cite.num.names.short := } + 'skip$ + if$ + % + % For a "full" cite, the number of names should always be at least + % as large as for a "short" cite. + % + cite.num.names.full cite.num.names.short < + { cite.num.names.short 'cite.num.names.full := } + 'skip$ + if$ + % + % Update "old" variables for next entry. + % + update.cite.num.names +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (4) +% and especially whether a's and b's should be added. +% This function is for the situation when author or editor +% are not used and firstkey, key, or something else is +% used to cite the referenced work. +% +% Call with +% formatted.field definitive.cite.no.names + +FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names} +{ % + % The formatted field that acts as author is on top + % of the stack. + 'aut1f := + "" 'aut2 := + "" 'aut3 := + "" 'aut4 := + "" 'aut5 := + "" 'aut6 := + #1 'numnames := + % + year.label year.label.old = + { % + % Same year label: possibly ambiguous citation. + % + definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2 + } + { % + % Different year label: everything's fine, + % move to next entry. + % + skip$ + } + if$ + % + % Update "old" variables for next entry. + % + update.cite.num.names +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (5). + +FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names} +{ % + % Check whether author or editor or other field acts as author. + % Number of names is only relevant with author or editor. + % + firstkey empty$ not + { firstkey sortify remove.spaces definitive.cite.no.names } + { key empty$ not + { key sortify remove.spaces definitive.cite.no.names } + { % + % No key or firstkey, so find out which field + % to use as author. + % + % Check reference type: + % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author + % 2 then editor does not act as author + % 3 then key should have been used + % 0 then unknown reference type + ref.type #2 = + { % + % Format first author with and without initials + author empty$ + { title.sort.label definitive.cite.no.names } + { author definitive.cite.num.names.field } + if$ + } + { % + % Format first author with and without initials + author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { title.sort.label definitive.cite.no.names } + { editor definitive.cite.num.names.field } + if$ + } + { author definitive.cite.num.names.field } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make a tentative year sorting label (without `a' and `b'). + +FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label} +{ % + % Implicit or explicit ``no date'' is put at the front + % (the year zero; years B.C. will imply complications) + % because these are possibly old works. + % ``In press'' is put at the end. + % + year empty$ + { "0000" 'year.label := } + { year "\bibnodate" = + year "n.d." = + or + { "0000" 'year.label := } + { year "\BIP" = + { "9999" 'year.label := } + { % It is not checked whether the year field + % makes sense. + year sortify remove.spaces 'year.label := + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + % + % Push year sort label on the stack + year.label +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Give month and day when available. + +FUNCTION {month.number.day} +{ month empty$ + { "" } + { month sortify remove.spaces + % + % Add the day when available. + day empty$ + 'skip$ + { "/" * + day sortify remove.spaces * + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make tentative sort label with names in field on top of +% the stack. +% +% Call with +% field make.name.sort.label +% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role. + +FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label} +{ % + % Author or editor-acting-as-author available. + % => Make tentative "short cite with initials" author + % label (L1) of one of the forms + % "Last1 F1" + % "Last1 F1 Last2" + % "Last1 F1 zzzz" ("zzzz" representing et al.) + % => If more than 2 'authors': make label (L2) for 2nd-6th authors + % of one of the forms + % "Last2 Last3" + % "Last2 Last3 Last4" + % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5" + % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5 Last6" + % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5 Last6 zzzz" + % + % Then format year label (L3) of one of the forms: + % "0000" (missing year or explicit 'no date') + % "9999" ('in press') + % year (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet) + % + % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert + % to string, which gives title label (L4) . + % + % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a + % concatenation of + % L1 + % " " + % L3 + % " " + % L2 + % " " + % L4 + % + % The name field is on top of the stack. + 'field := + % + % numnames is the total number of names contained in field + field num.names$ 'numnames := + % + % Format first author + field #1 sort.name.format format.name$ + % + % Format the second author if there are two, or else "zzzz" = et al. + numnames #1 = + 'skip$ + { numnames #2 = + { % + % Two authors: format second author + field #2 "{ll{}}" format.name$ 's := + s "others" = + { " zzzz" * } % Add "et al."-substitute + { " " * s * } % Add second author + if$ + } + { " zzzz" * } % 3 or more authors: add "et al."-substitute + if$ + } + if$ + " " * % Add spaces + make.tentative.year.sort.label * % Add year (L3). + " " * % Add spaces + % + % Now build up L2 if applicable + numnames #3 < + 'skip$ + { % + % Treat last author slightly differently + numnames name.max > + { name.max 'lastname := + " zzzz" % Push "et al."-substitute on stack + } + { numnames 'lastname := + "" % Push empty string on stack + } + if$ + % + % Names 2 to "last" - 1 + "" % Push empty string on stack + #2 'nameptr := + { nameptr lastname < } + { % Add name no. nameptr + field nameptr "{ll{}}" format.name$ * + " " * + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + } + while$ + % + % "Last" author + field lastname "{ll{}}" format.name$ 's := + s "others" = + { "zzzz" * } % Add "et al."-substitute + { s * } % Add last author + if$ + % + swap$ * % Add the previously formatted empty string or + % "et al."-substitute if there are many authors. + * % Add L2 to the earlier labels. + } + if$ + % + " " * % Add spaces + title.number conv.int.to.str * % Add sorted title number (L4). + sortify % Clean up and convert to lowercase + " " * % Add spaces + month.number.day * % Add month and day when available + 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative +% sort label if key or firstkey is available or author and +% editor are empty or unusable. +% +% Call with +% field make.field.year.sort.label +% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role, +% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the +% beginning. + +FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label} +{ % + % 'field' acts as first author (L1), subsequent authors + % are empty (L2). + % + % Then format year label (L3) of one of the forms: + % "0000" (missing year or explicit 'no date') + % "9999" ('in press') + % year (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet) + % + % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert + % to string, which gives title label (L4) . + % + % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a + % concatenation of + % L1 + % " " + % L3 + % " " + % L2 + % " " + % L4 + % + % 'field' is on top of the stack. It is already supposed to be cleaned + % (i.e., sortified and space-removed), so this is already L1. + " " * % Add spaces to L1 + make.tentative.year.sort.label * % Add year (L3). + " " * % Add spaces + " " * % L2 is empty, add spaces + title.number conv.int.to.str * % Add sorted title number (L4). + sortify % Clean up and convert to lowercase + " " * % Add spaces + month.number.day * % Add month and day when available + 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative +% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and +% author or editor may be used + +FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { % + % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label + % as author substitute . + title.sort.label make.field.year.sort.label + } + { editor make.name.sort.label } + if$ + } + { author make.name.sort.label } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative +% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and +% author (but not editor) may be used + +FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label} +{ author empty$ + { % + % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label + % as author substitute . + title.sort.label make.field.year.sort.label + } + { author make.name.sort.label } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make tentative label for citing and sorting and do some +% preprocessing. + +FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label} +{ % + %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % General strategy: + % + % Ordinary situation: author or editor-acting-as-author + % available. + % => Make tentative "short cite with initials" author + % label (L1) of one of the forms + % "Last1 F1" + % "Last1 F1 Last2" + % "Last1 F1 zzzz" ("zzzz" representing et al.) + % => If more than 2 'authors': make label (L2) for 2nd-6th authors + % of one of the forms + % "Last2 Last3" + % "Last2 Last3 Last4" + % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5" + % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5 Last6" + % "Last2 Last3 Last4 Last5 Last6 zzzz" + % When key is available (overrules author and editor fields): + % => L1 = key, L2 = "" + % No author, editor, and key: define title or substitute as key + % and format as key. + % + % Then format year label (L3) of one of the forms: + % "0000" (missing year or explicit 'no date') + % "9999" ('in press') + % year (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet) + % + % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert + % to string, which gives title label (L4) . + % + % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a + % concatenation of + % L1 + % " " + % L3 + % " " + % L2 + % " " + % L4 + % + % This can then be sorted, from which it can be derived + % whether initials are necessary, how many names must + % be used for short and full citations, and whether "a"'s and + % "b"'s etc. are necessary behind the year labels. + %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % key and firstkey overrule author information + % + firstkey empty$ not + { key empty$ not + { % + % Both key and firstkey available: + % for sorting and checking initials, treat key as last + % name and firstkey as initials. + % + key sortify remove.spaces + " " * + firstkey sortify remove.spaces * + make.field.year.sort.label + } + { firstkey sortify remove.spaces make.field.year.sort.label } + if$ + } + { key empty$ not + { key sortify remove.spaces make.field.year.sort.label } + { % + % No key or firstkey, so find out which field + % to use as author. + % + % Check reference type: + % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author + % 2 then editor does not act as author + % 3 then key should have been used + % 0 then unknown reference type + ref.type + duplicate$ #1 = + { pop$ + make.author.editor.sort.label + } + { duplicate$ #2 = + { pop$ + make.author.sort.label + } + { #3 = + { "no key in " cite$ * warning$ + make.author.editor.sort.label + } + { make.author.editor.sort.label } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + % + author.year.sort.label 'sort.key$ := +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make final sort label with names in field on top of +% the stack. +% +% Call with +% field make.definitive.name.sort.label +% +% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role. + +FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label} +{ % + % Author or editor-acting-as-author available. + % => Make author-with-initials label (L1) of one of the forms + % "Last1 F1 Last2 F2 ... LastN FN" + % "Last1 F1 Last2 F2 ... Last6 F6 zzzz" + % (where N <= 6 is the total number of authors, and + % "zzzz" represents et al. if there are more than 6 authors) + % No author, editor, and key: define title or substitute as sort key. + % + % The name field is on top of the stack. + 'field := + % + % numnames is the total number of names contained in field + field num.names$ 'numnames := + % + % If there are more than 6 authors, only 6 are mentioned. + numnames name.max > + { name.max 'format.num.names := } + { numnames 'format.num.names := } + if$ + % Initialize stack with empty string + "" + % + % Cycle over authors. + #1 'nameptr := + { nameptr format.num.names < } + { % Format author and add spaces + field nameptr sort.name.format format.name$ * + " " * + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + } + while$ + % Format last author that must be formatted + field nameptr sort.name.format format.name$ * + % Add et al. if necessary + nameptr numnames < + { " zzzz" * } + 'skip$ + if$ + sortify % Clean up and change case + " " * % Add spaces + year.label * % Add year + " " * % Add spaces + title.number conv.int.to.str * % Add sorted title number + " " * % Add spaces + month.number.day * % Add month and day when available + 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Called to make definitive sort label if author and +% editor are empty or unusable. +% +% Call with +% field make.definitive.field.year.sort.label +% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role, +% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the +% beginning. + +FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label} +{ % + % 'field' acts as author (L1). + % + % Then format year label (L2) of one of the forms: + % "0000" (missing year or explicit `no date') + % "9999" (`in press') + % year (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet) + % + % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert + % to string, which gives title label (L3) . + % + % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a + % concatenation of + % L1 + % " " + % L2 + % " " + % L3 + % + % 'field' is on top of the stack. It is already supposed to be cleaned + % (i.e., sortified and space-removed), so this is already L1. + " " * % Add spaces + year.label * % Add year + " " * % Add spaces + title.number conv.int.to.str * % Add sorted title number + " " * % Add spaces + month.number.day * % Add month and day when available + 'author.year.sort.label := % Assign result to sort label. +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Called by make.final.sort.key if author or editor +% may be used. + +FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { % + % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label + % as author substitute . + title.sort.label make.definitive.field.year.sort.label + } + { editor make.definitive.name.sort.label } + if$ + } + { author make.definitive.name.sort.label } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Called by make.final.sort.key if author but not editor +% may be used. + +FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label} +{ author empty$ + { % + % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label + % as author substitute . + title.sort.label make.definitive.field.year.sort.label + } + { author make.definitive.name.sort.label } + if$ +} + + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make final sort key . + +FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key} +{ % + %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % General strategy: + % + % Ordinary situation: author or editor-acting-as-author + % available. + % => Make author-with-initials label (L1) of one of the forms + % "Last1 F1 Last2 F2 ... LastN FN" + % "Last1 F1 Last2 F2 ... Last6 F6 zzzz" + % (where N <= 6 is the total number of authors, and + % "zzzz" represents et al. if there are more than 6 authors) + % No author, editor, and key: define title or substitute as sort key. + % + % Then format year label (L2) of one of the forms: + % "0000" (missing year or explicit `no date') + % "9999" (`in press') + % year (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet) + % Add "/"month"/"day to the latter when available. + % + % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert + % to string, which gives title label (L3) . + % + % Then final sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a + % concatenation of + % L1 + % " " + % L2 + % " " + % L3 + % + % This can then be sorted. + %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % + % Find out which field + % to use as author. + % + % Check reference type: + % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author + % 2 then editor does not act as author + % 3 then key should have been used + % 0 then unknown reference type + ref.type #2 = + { make.definitive.author.sort.label } + { make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label } + if$ + % + author.year.sort.label 'sort.key$ := +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% FUNCTIONS THAT ALLOW SORTING BY TITLE % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Remove first N characters of string if they are equal to +% teststring . +% +% Call with +% teststring N string chop.word +% +% E.g., +% "A " #2 "A fine old day" chop.word +% gives "fine old day" +% and +% "A " #2 "The fine old day" chop.word +% gives "The fine old day". + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + { s } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from beginning of string. +% +% Call with +% string chop.articles + +FUNCTION {chop.articles} +{ 's := + "a " #2 + "an " #3 + "the " #4 + s + chop.word + chop.word + chop.word +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Format title and other non-name/date entries for sort key. +% +% Call with +% field format.sort.title +% +% Make sure that field is not empty, this is not checked here! + +FUNCTION {format.sort.title} +{ % + % Remove non-alphanumeric characters and change to lower case . + sortify + % + % Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from the front . + chop.articles #1 entry.max$ substring$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make title sorting label or substitute. + +FUNCTION {make.sort.title} +{ title empty$ + { text empty$ + { type empty$ + { howpublished empty$ + { note empty$ + { url empty$ + { " " } + { url format.sort.title } + if$ + } + { note format.sort.title } + if$ + } + { howpublished format.sort.title } + if$ + } + { type format.sort.title } + if$ + } + { text format.sort.title } + if$ + } + { title format.sort.title } + if$ + remove.spaces + 'title.sort.label := + title.sort.label 'sort.key$ := +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make title number: rank number of sorted title . + +FUNCTION {make.title.number} +{ title.sort.label old.label = + { % + % A tie: old and new label are the same . + old.number 'title.number := + } + { % + % The usual situation: titles are different. + old.number #1 + 'title.number := + title.number 'old.number := + title.sort.label 'old.label := + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% NAME FORMATTING % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% In order to support removal of spaces between the initials, +% we have to split the formatting of the constituent parts, +% because something like "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" removes +% the hyphens between initials as well. + +FUNCTION {last.part.name.format} { "{ll}" } + +FUNCTION {initials.with.space.name.format} { "{f.}" } + +FUNCTION {von.last.junior.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{ jj}" } + +FUNCTION {von.junior.name.format} { "{ vv}{, jj}" } + +FUNCTION {one.complete.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% text.length$ views "special characters" as 1, whereas +% substring$ looks at the number of actual characters. +% So +% "{\TeX}" text.length$ = 1 +% "{TeX}" text.length$ = 3 +% but +% "{\TeX}" #4 #2 substring$ = "eX" +% "{TeX}" #4 #2 substring$ = "X}" +% Therefore, it is convenient to have a string length function +% that uses the same numbering as substring$: +% "{\TeX}" string.length = 6 +% "{TeX}" string.length = 5 + +FUNCTION {string.length} +{ #0 'pos := + % If the next character exists, i.e., is not empty, + % add 1 to the string length. + % We cannot use empty$ because " " empty$ is true. + { duplicate$ pos #1 + #1 substring$ "" = not } + { pos #1 + 'pos := } + while$ + pop$ pos +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Replace ". " and ".~" with "\BPBI " (period between initials) +% and ".-" with "\BHBI " (hyphen between initials) +% but only at brace level 0. + +FUNCTION {transform.spaces.and.hyphens} +{ 's := % The original string + s string.length 'len := % Its length (no. of characters) + "" 't := % Initialize the transformed string + #1 'pos := + #0 'brace.level := + % + % while (pos < len) do + % + { pos len < } + { % First, check whether we are at brace level 0 + brace.level #0 = + { + % At least two characters left: check for ". ", ".~", and ".-". + % If so, replace and shift two positions. + s pos #2 substring$ ". " = + s pos #2 substring$ ".~" = or + { t "\BPBI " * 't := + pos #2 + 'pos := + } + { s pos #2 substring$ ".-" = + { t "\BHBI " * 't := + pos #2 + 'pos := + } + { % neither is true, copy one character and shift one position + t s pos #1 substring$ * 't := + % Check whether we need to increase brace level. + % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture + % \{, \verb+}+, etc. + % Note also that unbalanced braces cause problems. + s pos #1 substring$ "{" = + { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := } + 'skip$ + if$ + pos #1 + 'pos := + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { % Not at brace level 0: copy result literally + t s pos #1 substring$ * 't := + % Check whether we need to increase or decrease brace level. + % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture + % \{, \verb+}+, etc. + s pos #1 substring$ "{" = + { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := } + { s pos #1 substring$ "}" = + { brace.level #1 - 'brace.level := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pos #1 + 'pos := + } + if$ + } + while$ + % + pos len = + { % Last character, copy + t s pos #1 substring$ * 't := + } + { % pos = len + 1, so s ends with ". " or ".-" + % This should not have happened, but make the best out of it. + % Push last two characters of s on the stack, i.e., ". " or ".-". + s len #1 - #2 substring$ + % Remove "\BPBI " or "\BHBI " from t + t text.length$ 'len := % Length of t (no. of characters) + t #1 len #6 - substring$ + % Concatenate and assign to t + swap$ * 't := + } + if$ + % + % Now push the result back on the stack + t +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Format only the initials of a name, retaining hyphens, but +% removing spaces between first names. So "Jean Pierre" becomes "J.P." +% and "Jean-Pierre" becomes "J.-P.". + +FUNCTION {format.initials.with.hyphen} +{ % Format initials. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.initials.with.hyphen + % e.g. + % author #1 format.initials.with.hyphen + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + % First, format initials in the default way, retaining spaces + % and hyphens. + initials.with.space.name.format format.name$ + transform.spaces.and.hyphens +} + +FUNCTION {format.last.part.name} +{ % Format a name with last.part.name.format, + % as part of more complicated things. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.last.part.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.last.part.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + last.part.name.format format.name$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.von.last.junior.name} +{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format, + % for citing or as part of more complicated things. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.von.last.junior.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.von.last.junior.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + von.last.junior.name.format format.name$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.von.junior.name} +{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format, + % for citing or as part of more complicated things. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.von.junior.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.von.junior.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + von.junior.name.format format.name$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.cite.initials.name} +{ % Format a name for citing with initials. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.cite.initials.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.cite.initials.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form, + % and push on the stack. + one.complete.name.format format.name$ + % + % Format the initials and push on the stack. + duplicate$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen + % + % Format the von-last-junior part and push on the stack. + swap$ #1 format.von.last.junior.name + % + % Connect with "~" hyphen (if they're both non-empty). + "~" connect.check +} + +FUNCTION {format.author.name} +{ % Format an author name for the reference list. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.author.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.author.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form, + % and push on the stack. + one.complete.name.format format.name$ + % + % Make two copies of the name, format the last name and push on the stack. + duplicate$ duplicate$ #1 format.last.part.name + % + % Format the initials and push on the stack. + swap$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen + % + % Connect with last name. + connect.with.comma.check + % + % Format the von-junior part and connect with initials. + swap$ #1 format.von.junior.name "" connect.check +} + +FUNCTION {format.editor.name} +{ % Format a name for the reference list as an editor. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.editor.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.editor.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + format.cite.initials.name +} + +FUNCTION {format.index.name} +{ % Format an author name for the index. + % Call with + % field authornumber format.index.name + % e.g. + % author #1 format.index.name + % Instead of field, a string may also be used. + % + format.author.name +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% CITATION LABELS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Some macro strings about commas, etc. between authors + +FUNCTION {comma.between.two} { "\BCBT{}" } + +FUNCTION {comma.between.names} { ", " } + +FUNCTION {comma.before.last} { "\BCBL{}" } + +FUNCTION {and.before.last} { "\ \BBA{} " } + +FUNCTION {et.al.string.cite} { "\ \protect\BOthers{.}" } + +FUNCTION {et.al.string} { "\ \BOthers{.}" } + +FUNCTION {et.al.string.period} { "\ \BOthersPeriod{.}" } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Add author index entry when desired. +% "field" must have been defined before and must contain the +% contents of the relevant author field. +% "nameptr" must also have been defined before. It is the +% number of the author that must be formatted. (So if it is +% #2, then the 2nd author must be formatted.) +% What's on top of the stack (the formatted author) is written +% to the .bbl file. + +FUNCTION {add.name.index} +{ % + % + make.index + { "%" * write$ newline$ + % Check for corporate author + field is.bibcorporate + { "\corporateAX{" } + { "\AX{" } + if$ + write$ + field nameptr sort.name.format format.name$ sortify write$ newline$ + "@" write$ + field nameptr format.index.name + "}%" * write$ newline$ + } + { "%" * write$ newline$ } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Citation labels when author or editor may be used. +% Field is on top of the stack. +% +% Call with +% format.num.names field make.name.cite.label + +FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label} +{ 'field := + 'format.num.names := + % + field num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames is the total number of names + % contained in field + % + % It is implicit in the APA manual that if "et al." would refer + % to exactly one author, then this author should be named + % instead of "et al." + % + format.num.names numnames #1 - = + { numnames 'format.num.names := } + 'skip$ + if$ + % + % Format first author: with or without initials + % + #1 'nameptr := + cite.initials #1 = + { field nameptr format.cite.initials.name } + { field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ } + if$ + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + % + numnames #1 = + 'skip$ + { format.num.names #1 = + { % + % First author et al. + % + et.al.string.cite write$ + } + { numnames #2 = + { % + % Given that format.num.names > 1, it is 2. + % Format second author. + % + #2 'nameptr := + field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ 's := + % + % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others". + % If so, insert "et al." string. + % + s "others" = + { et.al.string.cite write$ } % First et al. + { % + % First \& Second + % + and.before.last write$ + s + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + } + if$ + } + { % + % 3 or more names, 2 or more must be cited + % + % for nameptr := 2 to format.num.names - 1 do + % + #2 'nameptr := + { nameptr format.num.names < } + { % + % Put comma between consecutive authors + % + comma.between.names write$ + % + % Format and add next author + % + field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + % + % Move to next author + % + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + } + while$ + % + % nameptr = format.num.names + % Format this author. + % + field nameptr cite.name.format format.name$ 's := + % + format.num.names numnames = + { % + % This is also the last author. Add (optional) comma. + % + comma.before.last write$ + % + % Check if this author is explicit "others". + % If so, insert "et al." string. + % + s "others" = + { et.al.string.cite write$ } + { and.before.last write$ + s + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + } + if$ + } + { % + % This is not the last author. + % Add comma, author name, and "et al." + % + comma.between.names write$ + s + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + % + comma.before.last et.al.string.cite * write$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Citation labels when no author, editor, firstkey or key +% is available. + +FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label} +{ % + % Formatting: check if formatted as article title or + % as book title, and insert this formatting. + % + is.atype + { "\APACciteatitle{" } + { "\APACcitebtitle{" } + if$ + % + title empty$ + { text empty$ + { type empty$ + { howpublished empty$ + { note empty$ + { url empty$ + { cite$ } + { url } + if$ + } + { note } + if$ + } + { howpublished } + if$ + } + { type } + if$ + } + { text } + if$ + } + { title } + if$ + % + % Connect with formatting. + % + * "}" * + % + % Write to output + % + write$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Citation labels when author or editor may be used. + +FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { % + % No author or editor: + % Use title or other description as citation label. + % + make.title.cite.label + "}{%" write$ newline$ + make.title.cite.label + } + { cite.num.names.full editor make.name.cite.label + "}{%" write$ newline$ + cite.num.names.short editor make.name.cite.label + } + if$ + } + { cite.num.names.full author make.name.cite.label + "}{%" write$ newline$ + cite.num.names.short author make.name.cite.label + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Citation labels when author (but not editor) may be used. + +FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label} +{ author empty$ + { % + % No author: + % Use title or other description as citation label. + % + make.title.cite.label + "}{%" write$ newline$ + make.title.cite.label + } + { cite.num.names.full author make.name.cite.label + "}{%" write$ newline$ + cite.num.names.short author make.name.cite.label + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make "a" or "b" supplement to year label when necessary. + +FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement} +{ % + % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary. + % + add.to.year #0 = + { "" } + { "{\protect" + year empty$ + { "\BCntND" * } + { year "\bibnodate" = + { "\BCntND" * } + { year "\BIP" = + { "\BCntIP" * } + { "\BCnt" * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + "{" * add.to.year int.to.str$ * "}}" * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Add \protect if year is \BIP or \bibnodate. + +FUNCTION {protect.year} +{ year empty$ + { "{\protect\bibnodate{}}" } + { year "\bibnodate" = + { "{\protect\bibnodate{}}" } + { year "\BIP" = + { "{\protect\BIP{}}" } + { year } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make year label that is used for citations in text. + +FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label} +{ "{\protect\APACyear{" + originalyear empty$ + { protect.year } + { originalyear "\bibnodate" = % date of original publication unknown + { translator empty$ + { protect.year } + { year empty$ + { "{\protect\BTRANSL{}~\protect\bibnodate{}}" } % trans. n.d. + { "{\protect\BTRANSL{}}~" protect.year * } % trans. 1931 + if$ + } + if$ + } + { year empty$ + { originalyear "/{\protect\bibnodate{}}" * } % 1923/n.d. + { originalyear year = + { protect.year } + { originalyear "/" * protect.year * } % 1923/1961 + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + * "}}%" * write$ newline$ + % + % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary. + % + "{\protect\APACexlab{" "}}" + make.definitive.year.supplement enclose.check +} + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Make citation labels: +% - Full formatted author list (or substitute if no author +% available) for first citation; +% - Short formatted author list (ditto) for subsequent +% citations; +% - Year, with originalyear when applicable, and "a" or "b" +% etc. addendum when necessary. + +FUNCTION {make.cite.labels} +{ newline$ + % + % Write a few lines for testing purposes. + % + test + { "\bibitem[]{} \fullciteA{" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$ + "\bibitem[]{} \citeA{" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$ + } + 'skip$ + if$ + % + "\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{%" write$ newline$ + % + % When key or firstkey is available, this takes precedence. + % + firstkey empty$ not + { % + % Full cite: firstkey. + % + firstkey write$ + "}{%" write$ newline$ + % + % Short cite: if key is not empty and cite.initials is 0, + % then key, else firstkey. + % + cite.initials #0 = + key empty$ not + and + { key } + { firstkey } + if$ + write$ + } + { key empty$ not + { % + % No firstkey, but key available: + % Both full and short labels are key. + % + key write$ + "}{%" write$ newline$ + key write$ + } + { % No key or firstkey, so find out which field + % to use as author. + % + % Check reference type: + % if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author + % 2 then editor does not act as author + % 3 then key should have been used + % 0 then unknown reference type + ref.type #2 = + { make.author.cite.label } + { make.author.editor.cite.label } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + "}{%" write$ newline$ + % + % Make year label that's used for citations + % + make.definitive.year.label write$ + "}]{%" write$ newline$ + cite$ write$ + "}%" write$ newline$ + % author.year.sort.label write$ newline$ % for testing purposes + % year.label write$ newline$ % for testing purposes + % + % If the item is used in a meta-analysis, indicate this with + % a star. + % + "\APACinsertmetastar{%" write$ newline$ + cite$ write$ + "}%" write$ newline$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% FORMATTING OF REFERENCE LIST % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% "(Ed.)" or "(Eds.)" postfix. +% editor must not be empty + +FUNCTION {editor.postfix} +{ editor num.names$ #1 > + { "(\BEDS)" } + { "(\BED)" } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% "(Ed. \& Trans.)" postfix +% editor must not be empty + +FUNCTION {editor.trans.postfix} +{ editor num.names$ #1 > + { "(\BEDS{} \BAnd{} \BTRANSS)" } + { "(\BED{} \BAnd{} \BTRANS)" } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % "(Trans.)" postfix + % translator must not be empty + % +FUNCTION {trans.postfix} +{ translator num.names$ #1 > + { "(\BTRANSS)" } + { "(\BTRANS)" } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Format authors (or editors acting as authors) for +% reference list. +% +% Call with +% dot field format.author.names +% where field is the field (string) that contains the authors +% (or editors acting as authors) that must be formatted and +% dot is 1 or 0 indicating whether or not a period must end +% the formatting. + +FUNCTION {format.author.names} +{ 'field := + 'dot := + % + field num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames is the total number of names + % contained in field + numnames 'format.num.names := % Format all authors + format.num.names name.max > % Unless this exceeds the maximum of 6. + { dot + { name.max 'format.num.names := } % Format 6 authors + { cite.num.names.full 'format.num.names := } % Format 1 editor + if$ + } + 'skip$ + if$ + % + % It is kind of explicit in the APA manual that if "et al." would + % refer to exactly one author (the 7th), then this author should + % still be replaced by "et al.", unlike with citations. + % So format.num.names is not adapted. + % + % Format first author + % + #1 'nameptr := + field nameptr format.author.name + % + % Add period if required and if this is the only author. + % + numnames #1 = + dot + and + { add.period$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + % + numnames #1 = + 'skip$ + { format.num.names #1 = + { % + % First author et al. + % + comma.between.two + % + % Add period if required. + % + dot + { et.al.string.period * } + { et.al.string * } + if$ + write$ + } + { numnames #2 = + { % + % Given that format.num.names > 1, it is 2. + % + comma.between.two write$ + % + % Format second author. + % + #2 'nameptr := + field nameptr format.author.name 's := + % + % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others". + % If so, insert "et al." string. + % + s "others" = + { % + % First et al. + % Add period if required. + % + dot + { et.al.string.period } + { et.al.string } + if$ + write$ + } + { % + % First \& Second + % + and.before.last write$ + % + % Add period if required. + % + dot + { s add.period$ } + { s } + if$ + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + } + if$ + } + { % + % 3 or more names, 2 or more must be cited + % + % for nameptr := 2 to format.num.names - 1 do + % + #2 'nameptr := + { nameptr format.num.names < } + { % + % Put comma between consecutive authors + % + comma.between.names write$ + % + % Format and add next author + % + field nameptr format.author.name + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + % + % Move to next author + % + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + } + while$ + % + % nameptr = format.num.names + % Format this author. + % + field nameptr format.author.name 's := + % + format.num.names numnames = + { % + % This is also the last author. Add (optional) comma. + % + comma.before.last write$ + % + % Check if this author is explicit "others". + % If so, insert "et al." string. + % + s "others" = + { % + % Add period if required. + % + dot + { et.al.string.period } + { et.al.string } + if$ + write$ + } + { and.before.last write$ + % + % Add period if required. + % + dot + { s add.period$ } + { s } + if$ + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + } + if$ + } + { % + % This is not the last author. + % Add comma, author name, and "et al." + % + comma.between.names write$ + s + add.name.index % Add index entry when desired. + % + comma.before.last + % + % Add period if required. + % + dot + { et.al.string.period * } + { et.al.string * } + if$ + write$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Format authors in reference list, where it is given that +% the author field is not empty. + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ #1 author format.author.names + "%" write$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Format editors in reference list in case editors act as +% authors (such as reference to entire edited book) +% +% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds.). +% or +% Letheridge, S. (Ed.). (if only 1 editor) +% +% editor must not be empty + +FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors} +{ #0 editor format.author.names + "\ " editor.postfix * add.period$ write$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Format editors in reference list in case editors are also +% translators and act as authors (such as reference to entire +% edited book of translated articles) +% +% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds. and Trans.). +% or +% Letheridge, S. (Ed. and Trans.). (if only 1 editor) +% +% editor must not be empty + +FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors} +{ #0 editor format.author.names + "\ " editor.trans.postfix * add.period$ write$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Format a list of names with the initials before the +% last names (i.e., names in the editor position), +% commas between names (not between 2), +% and ampersand (\&) before last name. +% These names are not put in the author index. +% +% Call with +% field format.editor.names + +FUNCTION {format.editor.names} +{ 'field := + % + field num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames is the total number of names + % contained in field + numnames 'format.num.names := % Format all authors + format.num.names name.max > % Unless this exceeds the maximum of 6. + { #1 'format.num.names := } % Then it becomes 1 (First et al.) + 'skip$ + if$ + % + % Format first editor + % + field #1 format.editor.name + % + numnames #1 = + 'skip$ + { format.num.names #1 = + { et.al.string * } % First editor et al., no comma. + { numnames #2 = + { % + % Given that format.num.names > 1, it is 2. + % No comma. Format second editor. + % + field #2 format.editor.name 's := + % + % Check if 2nd editor is explicit "others". + % If so, insert "et al." string. + % + s "others" = + { et.al.string * } % First et al. + { and.before.last * s * } % First \& Second + if$ + } + { % + % 3 or more names, 2 or more must be cited + % + % for nameptr := 2 to format.num.names - 1 do + % + #2 'nameptr := + { nameptr format.num.names < } + { % + % Put comma between consecutive editors + % + comma.between.names * + % + % Format and add next editor + % + field nameptr format.editor.name * + % + % Move to next editor + % + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + } + while$ + % + % nameptr = format.num.names + % Format this editor. + % + field nameptr format.editor.name 's := + % + format.num.names numnames = + { % + % This is also the last editor. Add (optional) comma. + % + comma.before.last * + % + % Check if this editor is explicit "others". + % If so, insert "et al." string. + % + s "others" = + { et.al.string * } + { and.before.last * s * } + if$ + } + { % + % This is not the last editor. + % Add comma, editor name, and "et al." + % + comma.between.names * s * + comma.before.last * et.al.string * + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format editors in case editors do not act as authors + % (such as reference to chapter in edited book) + % + % L. W. Poon (Ed.) (1 editor) + % or + % A. S. Gurman \& D. P. Kniskern (Eds.) (2 editors) + % or + % L. Poon, A. Jones, \& D. P. Smith (Eds.) (>2 editors) + % + % editor must not be empty + % +FUNCTION {format.editors.in.line} +{ editor format.editor.names + editor.postfix connect.with.space.check +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format editors in case editors are also translators + % and do not act as authors + % (such as reference to chapter in edited book + % of translated articles) + % + % L. W. Poon (Ed. and Trans.) (1 editor) + % or + % A. S. Gurman \& D. P. Kniskern (Eds. and Trans.) (2 editors) + % or + % L. Poon, A. Jones, \& D. P. Smith (Eds. and Trans.) (>2 editors) + % + % editor must not be empty + % +FUNCTION {format.editors.trans.in.line} +{ editor format.editor.names + editor.trans.postfix connect.with.space.check +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format translators in case translators act as editors + % (such as reference to chapter in translated book) + % + % L. W. Poon (Trans.) (1 translator) + % or + % A. S. Gurman \& D. P. Kniskern (Trans.) (2 translators) + % or + % L. Poon, A. Jones, \& D. P. Smith (Trans.) (>2 translators) + % + % translator must not be empty + % +FUNCTION {format.translators.in.line} +{ translator format.editor.names + trans.postfix connect.with.space.check +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format translators in case translator does not act as editor + % (such as reference to translated book) + % + % L. Solotaroff, Trans. + % +FUNCTION {format.translators.in.paren.check} +{ translator empty$ + { "" } + { translator format.editor.names + translator num.names$ #1 > + { ", \BTRANSS{}" * } + { ", \BTRANS{}" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format editors and translators in case neither act as editor + % (such as reference to edited or translated book with a + % a single author) + % + % L. Solotaroff, Ed. + % L. Solotaroff, Ed. \& Trans. + % L. Solotaroff, Trans. + % L. Solotaroff, Ed. \& S. Prokofieff, Trans. + % +FUNCTION {format.editors.translators.in.paren.check} +{ editor empty$ + { translator empty$ + { "" } + { translator format.editor.names + translator num.names$ #1 > + { ", \BTRANSS{}" * } + { ", \BTRANS{}" * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { editor format.editor.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", \BEDS{}" * } + { ", \BED{}" * } + if$ + translator empty$ + 'skip$ + { editor translator = + { editor num.names$ #1 > + { " \BAnd{} \BTRANSS" * } + { " \BAnd{} \BTRANS" * } + if$ + } + { " \BAnd{} " * + translator format.editor.names * + translator num.names$ #1 > + { ", \BTRANSS{}" * } + { ", \BTRANS{}" * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % translator of article + % +FUNCTION {format.atrans.check} +{ format.translators.in.paren.check parenthesize.check } + + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format "In editor (Ed.), " + % +FUNCTION {format.in.editors} +{ "\BIn{} " + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { format.editors.in.line * ", " * } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format "In translator (Trans.)," + % +FUNCTION {format.in.trans} +{ "\BIn{} " + translator empty$ + 'skip$ + { format.translators.in.line * ", " * } + if$ +} + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format "In editor (Ed. and Trans.)" + % or "In editor (Ed.)" if editor not equal to translator + % +FUNCTION {format.in.editors.trans} +{ "\BIn{} " + editor empty$ + { translator empty$ + 'skip$ + { format.translators.in.line * ", " * } + if$ + } + { translator empty$ + { format.editors.in.line * } + { editor translator = + { format.editors.trans.in.line * } + { format.editors.in.line * } + if$ + } + if$ + ", " * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% DATE % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Formats year (+ extra label) between parentheses (which +% may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP). +% Extra label can be used for +% Bentler, P. M. (1983a) <article 1> +% Bentler, P. M. (1983b) <article 2> + +FUNCTION {format.year.check} +{ "\APACrefYear{" + year empty$ + { "\bibnodate{}" * } + { year * } + if$ + % + % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary. + % + make.definitive.year.supplement * + "}" * +} + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Formats year (+ extra label) + month + day between +% parentheses (which may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP). +% Extra label can be used for +% Bentler, P. M. (1983a, June 7) <article 1> +% Bentler, P. M. (1983b, April 4) <article 2> + +FUNCTION {format.year.month.day.check} +{ "\APACrefYearMonthDay{" + year empty$ + { "\bibnodate{}" * } + { year * } + if$ + % + % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary. + % + make.definitive.year.supplement * + "}{" * + % + % Add month and day when present. + % + month empty$ + 'skip$ + { month * } + if$ + "}{" * + day empty$ + 'skip$ + { day * } + if$ + "}" * +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% TITLE FORMATTING % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title of article in journal or book + % no finishing period + % field must be on top of stack + % (so englishtitle can be handled also) + % +FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot} +{ "\BBOQ{}" swap$ + "\BBCQ{}" swap$ + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ + % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ + "t" change.case$ + * "}" * + } + if$ + enclose.check +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title of article in journal or book + % with finishing period + % field must be on top of stack + % (so englishtitle can be handled also) + % +FUNCTION {format.atitle.dot} +{ "\BBOQ{}" swap$ + "\BBCQ{}" swap$ + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ + % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ + "t" change.case$ + * "}" * add.period$ + } + if$ + enclose.check +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title of article in journal or book + % field must be on top of stack + % second element on stack must be connected: + % if that is empty, then atitle.dot + % else atitle.no.dot, connect, and add period + % +FUNCTION {format.atitle.connect} +{ swap$ + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ + format.atitle.dot + } + { swap$ + format.atitle.no.dot + swap$ connect.with.space.check + add.period$ + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title of book or so, without period + % call with + % field format.btitle.no.dot + % +FUNCTION {format.btitle.no.dot} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ + % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefbtitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ + "t" change.case$ + * "}" * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title of book or so, with period + % call with + % field format.btitle.dot + % +FUNCTION {format.btitle.dot} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { add.period$ format.btitle.no.dot } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title of book and similar + % field must be on top of stack + % second element on stack must be connected: + % if that is empty, then btitle.dot + % else btitle.no.dot, connect, and add period + % +FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect} +{ swap$ + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ + format.btitle.dot + } + { swap$ + format.btitle.no.dot + swap$ connect.with.space.check + add.period$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title of book and similar + % field must be on top of stack + % second element on stack must be connected + % +FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect.no.dot} +{ swap$ + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ + format.btitle.no.dot + } + { swap$ + format.btitle.no.dot + swap$ connect.with.space.check + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format englishtitle (of nonenglish article, etc.) + % +FUNCTION {format.aetitle.check} +{ englishtitle empty$ + { "" } + { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefaetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" * + englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format englishtitle (of nonenglish book, etc.) + % +FUNCTION {format.betitle.check} +{ englishtitle empty$ + { "" } + { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case + "\APACrefbetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" * + englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format type (of article, etc.) + % +FUNCTION {format.atype.check} +{ type bracket.check } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format title and englishtitle (of article, etc.) + % +FUNCTION {format.atitle.check} +{ format.aetitle.check + title format.atitle.connect +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format title, englishtitle, and type + % (of article, etc.) + % +FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.check} +{ format.aetitle.check + format.atype.check connect.with.space.check + title format.atitle.connect +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format title, englishtitle, + % and translator (of article, etc.) + % +FUNCTION {format.atitle.trans.check} +{ format.aetitle.check + format.atrans.check connect.with.space.check + title format.atitle.connect +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format title, englishtitle, type, + % and translator (of article, etc.) + % +FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check} +{ format.aetitle.check + format.atype.check connect.with.space.check + format.atrans.check connect.with.space.check + title format.atitle.connect +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% JOURNAL FORMATTING % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format journal, volume, number and pages + % call with + % formatted.pages format.journal.vol.num.pages.check + % +FUNCTION { format.journal.vol.num.pages.check } +{ "journal" journal warning.if.empty + duplicate$ empty$ + journal empty$ and + volume empty$ and + number empty$ and + { pop$ "" } + { "\APACjournalVolNumPages{" journal "" connect.check + "}{" * volume "" connect.check + "}{" * number "" connect.check + "}{" * swap$ "" connect.check + "}" * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% BOOK VOLUME, EDITION, AND OTHER SUPPLEMENTARY INFO % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % volume of book, checks whether + % "Volume" or "Volumes" + % + % call with + % field format.bvolume.check + % +FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ multi.result.check + { "\BVOLS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BVOL" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % edition of book, must not be empty + % call with + % field format.edition.check + % +FUNCTION {format.edition.check} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { "\PrintCardinal{" swap$ * "}" * + "\BEd" connect.with.space.check + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % volume and edition of book + % +FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.check} +{ edition format.edition.check + volume format.bvolume.check + connect.with.comma.check +} + + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % volume and edition of book + % +FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition} +{ format.bvol.edition.check + parenthesize.check +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % volume and edition and translator of translated book + % +FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.trans} +{ format.bvol.edition.check + format.translators.in.paren.check connect.with.semicolon.check + parenthesize.check +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % volume, edition, editor, and translator of (translated) book + % +FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.editor.trans} +{ format.bvol.edition.check + format.editors.translators.in.paren.check connect.with.semicolon.check + parenthesize.check +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % formats pages by first checking if 1 or more pages + % and prefixing pages with "p." or "pp." (these strings + % are given in the commands \BPG and \BPGS, respectively), + % whichever is applicable, and do a tie or space connect + % + % call with + % field format.bpages.check + % +FUNCTION {format.bpages.check} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ multi.result.check + { "\BPGS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BPG~" swap$ * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % formats chapters by first checking if 1 or more chapters + % and prefixing pages with "chap." (this string + % is given in the commands \BCHAP and \BCHAPS, respectively), + % whichever is applicable, and do a tie or space connect + % + % call with + % field format.bchapter.check + % +FUNCTION {format.bchapter.check} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ multi.result.check + { "\BCHAPS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BCHAP" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % volume, edition, and pages or chapter of article in book etc. + % +FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.pages} +{ format.bvol.edition.check + pages empty$ + { chapter format.bchapter.check connect.with.comma.check } + { pages format.bpages.check connect.with.comma.check } + if$ + parenthesize.check +} + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title, volume, edition of book + % +FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition} +{ format.betitle.check + format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check + title format.btitle.connect.no.dot +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title, volume, edition, and translator of book + % +FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans} +{ format.betitle.check + format.bvol.edition.trans connect.with.space.check + title format.btitle.connect.no.dot +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title, volume, edition, editor, and translator of book + % +FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans} +{ format.betitle.check + format.bvol.edition.editor.trans connect.with.space.check + title format.btitle.connect.no.dot +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% ADDRESS AND PUBLISHER % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format address and publisher of book etc. + % + % New York: Wiley + % or + % Wiley (if address empty) + % or + % New York (if publisher empty) + % +FUNCTION {format.address.publisher} +{ % + % If publisher = author or publisher = "author" or publisher = "Author" + % then hand over the final choice how to format this to \LaTeX. + % (I could imagine similar code for editors, but the APA manual does + % not mention it and then we'd have to check whether the editor is in + % the author position, so let's keep it simple until someone complains.) + % + author empty$ + publisher empty$ or + { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" } + { author publisher = + "author" publisher = or + "Author" publisher = or + { author "\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth{" } + { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" } + if$ + } + if$ + address "" connect.check "}{" * + % Recover publisher that was pushed onto the stack previously. + swap$ "" connect.check "}" * +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format address and publisher of book etc. + % + % New York: Wiley + % or + % Wiley (if address empty) + % or + % New York (if publisher empty) + % + % warning if no publisher or no address + % +FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.check} +{ "publisher" publisher warning.if.empty + "address" address warning.if.empty + publisher empty$ + address empty$ + and + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.address.publisher + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% TYPE AND NUMBER OF A REPORT % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format number as in reports: No. 2017 + % call with + % field format.rnumber.check + % +FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ multi.result.check + { "\BNUMS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + { "\BNUM" swap$ tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format type and number of a standalone item + % call with + % format.type.number + % +FUNCTION { format.type.number } +{ type empty$ + { type.2 } + { type } + if$ + number empty$ + { bracket.check } + { number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check + parenthesize.check + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% HOWPUBLISHED % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format howpublished if not empty, + % for various entry types + % call with + % format.howpublished + % +FUNCTION {format.howpublished} +{ howpublished empty$ + 'skip$ + { % clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + { output.dot.new.block } + if$ + "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format howpublished if not empty, + % for misc + % call with + % output.howpublished + % +FUNCTION {output.howpublished} +{ howpublished empty$ + 'skip$ + { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * + output.dot.new.block + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% URL FORMATTING FUNCTIONS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % begin and end of url environment + % +FUNCTION {begin.end.url.env} +{ " \begin{APACrefURL} " + % For "Retrieved <date>, from" + lastchecked empty$ + 'skip$ + { "[{" * lastchecked * "}]" * } + if$ + " \end{APACrefURL} " +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % begin and end of message environment + % +FUNCTION {begin.end.msg.env} +{ " \begin{APACrefURLmsg} " + " \end{APACrefURLmsg} " +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format url given that it is not empty, + % for various entry types + % call with + % format.url + % +FUNCTION {format.url} +{ % First format begin and end of the enclosing environment. + % With posted messages, a different environment is used. + type.2 empty$ + { begin.end.url.env } + { type.2 "\bibmessage" = + { begin.end.msg.env } + { begin.end.url.env } + if$ + } + if$ + % The url string. + "\url{" url * "}" * + % Enclose in begin and end environment + enclose.check +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% NOTE FORMATTING FUNCTIONS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format optional note + % +FUNCTION {format.note} +{ "\APACrefnote{" "}" note enclose.check } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format original year of publication and note + % (reprint or translation) + % +FUNCTION {format.orig.year.note} +{ originalyear empty$ + { format.note } + { "\APACorigyearnote{" + originalyear "" connect.check "}{" * + note "" connect.check "}" * + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format original journal of publication and note + % (reprint or translation) + % +FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note} +{ "\APACorigjournalnote{" + originalyear "" connect.check "}{" * + originaljournal "" connect.check "}{" * + originalvolume "" connect.check "}{" * + originalnumber "" connect.check "}{" * + originalpages "" connect.check "}{" * + note "" connect.check "}" * +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format original book of publication and note + % (reprint or translation) + % +FUNCTION {format.orig.book.note} +{ "\APACorigbooknote{" originalyear "" connect.check "}{" * + % + originaleditor empty$ + 'skip$ + { originaleditor num.names$ #1 > + { "\APACorigEDS{" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * } + { "\APACorigED{" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * } + if$ + } + if$ + % + "}{" * + originalbooktitle format.btitle.no.dot "" connect.check "}{" * + originaledition format.edition.check "" connect.check "}{" * + originalvolume format.bvolume.check "" connect.check "}{" * + originalpages format.bpages.check "" connect.check "}{" * + originaladdress "" connect.check "}{" * + originalpublisher "" connect.check "}{" * + note "" connect.check "}" * +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format information about original publication of reprint + % and format optional note + % +FUNCTION {format.orig.note} +{ originaljournal empty$ + { originalbooktitle empty$ + { note empty$ + { originalyear empty$ + 'skip$ + { originalyear "\bibnodate" = + 'skip$ + { output.new.block + format.orig.year.note + } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { output.new.block + format.orig.year.note + } + if$ + } + { output.new.block + format.orig.book.note + } + if$ + } + { output.new.block + format.orig.journal.note + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% PERIODICALS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % article in periodical: journal, magazine, newspaper, ... + % + % call with + % formatted.pages formatted.date periodical + % +FUNCTION {periodical} +{ % + % author or editor, year, title, englishtitle, type + % + author empty$ + % + % no author: possibly special issue with editors as authors + % (APA manual, ex. 11, p. 121) + % + { editor empty$ + % + % no author or editor: title serves as author. + % title formatted as article title (APA manual not consistent in this, + % compare statement on p. 119: ``treat as book title'' and + % example 8, p. 121: no underlining => article title) + % + { format.atitle.type.trans.check output.new.block + % + % now formatted date on top of stack + % + output.dot.new.block + } + % + % format editor and year, and check if year is present + % format article title and check if title or type present + % + { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block + % + % now formatted date on top of stack + % + output.dot.new.block + format.atitle.type.trans.check output.new.block + } + if$ + } + % + % format author and year, and check if year is present + % format article title and check if title or type present + % + { format.authors start.new.block + % + % now formatted date on top of stack + % + output.dot.new.block + format.atitle.type.trans.check output.new.block + } + if$ + % + % format journal name, volume and issue number, and pages + % and check if journal not empty + % + format.journal.vol.num.pages.check + % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if article is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % + % possible reprint and optional note + % + format.orig.note + fin.entry +} + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % journal article + % +FUNCTION {article} +{ pages format.year.month.day.check periodical } + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % magazine article + % +FUNCTION {magazine} +{ pages format.year.month.day.check periodical } + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % newspaper article + % +FUNCTION {newspaper} +{ pages format.bpages.check format.year.month.day.check periodical } + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % (translation of) entire book + % +FUNCTION {book} +{ % + % author or editor, + % year, title, englishtitle, translator + % + author empty$ + % + % no author: possibly edited book with editors as authors + % + { editor empty$ + % + % no author or editor: title serves as author. + % title formatted as book title + % + { format.btitle.vol.edition.trans + format.type.number connect.with.space.check + output.dot.new.block + format.year.check add.period$ + } + % + % format editor and year, and check if year is present + % format booktitle, volume, and edition and check if title present + % + { translator empty$ + { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block + format.year.check output.dot.new.block + format.btitle.vol.edition + } + % + % format translator correctly + % + { translator editor = + not + { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block + format.year.check output.dot.new.block + format.btitle.vol.edition.trans + } + { format.ed.trans.as.authors start.new.block + format.year.check output.dot.new.block + format.btitle.vol.edition + } + if$ + } + if$ + format.type.number connect.with.space.check + add.period$ + } + if$ + } + % + % format author and year, and check if year is present + % format booktitle, volume, and edition and check if title present + % + { format.authors start.new.block + format.year.check output.dot.new.block + format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans + format.type.number connect.with.space.check + add.period$ + } + if$ + % + % format address and publisher, check if address and publisher present + % + format.address.publisher.check + % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if book is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % + % format original publication (of reprint/translation) + % and optional note + % + format.orig.note + fin.entry +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % (translated) article or chapter in edited book + % +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ author empty$ + % + % no author: title serves as author. + % title formatted as article title (APA manual not consistent in this, + % compare statement on p. 119: ``treat as book title'' and + % example 8, p. 121: no underlining => article title) + % + { editor.ne.trans + { format.atitle.type.trans.check } + { format.atitle.type.check } + if$ + output.new.block + % + % format month and day as well when available + % esp. for ``collections'' that are not books, + % such as parts of internet documents + % + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ + } + % + % format author and year, and check if year is present + % format article title and check if title or type present + % + { format.authors start.new.block + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + editor.ne.trans + { format.atitle.type.trans.check } + { format.atitle.type.check } + if$ + } + if$ + % + % format "In " editor " (Ed. \& Trans.), " + % booktitle, volume, edition, pages + % + output.new.block + format.in.editors.trans + format.bvol.edition.pages + booktitle format.btitle.connect * add.period$ + % + % format address and publisher, check if publisher present + % + format.address.publisher.check + % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if article is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % + % format original publication (of reprint/translation) + % and optional note + % + format.orig.note + fin.entry +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% REPORTS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % technical report number + % +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "\BTR{}" } + { type "\bibnotype" = + { "" } + { type } + if$ + } + if$ + number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title, volume, edition, report number + % +FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number} +{ format.betitle.check + % Single out the situation in which there is no number + % and type = {\bibnotype}, i.e., no type as well. + % (Why not use book then?) + type empty$ + { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a + % number, a type, a volume, or an edition. + "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" * + format.tr.number * "}" * + } + { type "\bibnotype" = + number empty$ + volume empty$ + edition empty$ + and + and + and + { "" } + { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a + % number, a type, a volume, or an edition. + "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" * + format.tr.number * "}" * + } + if$ + } + if$ + connect.with.space.check + title format.btitle.connect +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % format address and institution of reports etc. + % + % Washington, DC: National Institute of Education + % or + % National Institute of Education (if address empty) + % + % warning if no institution + % +FUNCTION {format.address.institution.check} +{ "institution" institution warning.if.empty + "address" address warning.if.empty + institution empty$ + address empty$ + and + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + % + % If institution = author or institution = "author" + % or institution = "Author" then hand over the final choice how to + % format this to \LaTeX. See also format.address.publisher + % + author empty$ + institution empty$ or + { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" } + { author institution = + "author" institution = or + "Author" institution = or + { author "\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth{" } + { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" } + if$ + } + if$ + address "" connect.check "}{" * + % Recover institution that was pushed onto the stack previously. + swap$ "" connect.check "}" * + } + if$ +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % reports + % +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ author empty$ + % + % no author: possibly edited report with editors as authors + % + { editor empty$ + % + % no author or editor: title serves as author. + % title formatted as book title + % + { format.tr.title.number output.dot.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ + } + % + % format editor and year, and check if year is present + % format report title and check if title present + % format volume, edition, type, and number + % + { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.tr.title.number add.period$ + } + if$ + } + % + % format author and year, and check if year is present + % format report title and check if title present + % format volume, edition, type, and number + % + { format.authors start.new.block + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.tr.title.number add.period$ + } + if$ + % + % format address and institution, check if institution present + % + format.address.institution.check + % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if report is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % + % format optional note + % + note empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.note + } + if$ + fin.entry +} + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % (translated) article or chapter in report + % +FUNCTION {intechreport} +{ author empty$ + % + % no author: title serves as author. + % title formatted as article title (APA manual not consistent in this, + % compare statement on p. 119: ``treat as book title'' and + % example 8, p. 121: no underlining => article title) + % + { editor.ne.trans + { format.atitle.trans.check } + { format.atitle.check } + if$ + output.new.block + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + } + % + % format author and year, and check if year is present + % format article title and check if title or type present + % + { format.authors start.new.block + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + editor.ne.trans + { format.atitle.trans.check } + { format.atitle.check } + if$ + output.new.block + } + if$ + % + % format "In " editor " (Ed. \& Trans.), " + % booktitle, volume, edition, pages + % + format.in.editors.trans + % + % volume, edition, report type and number, pages + % + "\APACbVolEdTRpgs{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" * + format.tr.number * + "}{" * pages format.bpages.check * + "}" * + % + booktitle format.btitle.connect * + add.period$ + % + % format address and publisher, check if publisher present + % + format.address.institution.check + % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if report is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % + % format original publication (of reprint/translation) + % and optional note + % + format.orig.note + fin.entry +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % papers presented at conferences etc. + % +FUNCTION {lecture} +{ author empty$ + { "author" author warning.if.empty } + { format.authors start.new.block } + if$ + % + % format year, month, and day, and check if year present + % format title and check if title present + % format howpublished and check if howpublished present + % + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + symposium empty$ + { format.betitle.check + title format.btitle.connect output.new.block + howpublished empty$ + { "symposium and howpublished missing in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * } + if$ + address connect.with.comma.check + } + { format.atitle.type.check output.new.block + "\BIn{} " + chair empty$ + 'skip$ + { chair format.editor.names + chair num.names$ #1 > + { "(\BCHAIRS)" } + { "(\BCHAIR)" } + if$ + connect.with.space.check * ", " * + } + if$ + symposium format.btitle.no.dot * + format.howpublished + address connect.with.comma.check + } + if$ + add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % + % format optional note + % + note empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.note + } + if$ + fin.entry +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% THESES % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % default thesis type is on top of stack + % now, if type field is empty, this default is used + % else default is removed and replaced by value of + % type field + % +FUNCTION {format.type.school} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ + school connect.with.comma.check +} + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % phd theses, etc. + % call with + % "default.published.thesis" "default.unpublished.thesis" thesis + % +FUNCTION {thesis} +{ author empty$ + { "author" author warning.if.empty } + { format.authors start.new.block } + if$ + % + % format year and check if year present + % + format.year.check output.dot.new.block + % + % format title and check if title present + % journal empty => unpublished PhD thesis + % journal not empty => published (e.g., Dissertation Abstracts Int.) + % + journal empty$ + { format.btitle.vol.edition output.dot.new.block + % + % pop default unpublished thesis, top is default published thesis + % + swap$ pop$ + format.type.school + address connect.with.comma.check + } + % + % pop default published thesis, top is default unpublished thesis + % + { pop$ + type empty$ + school empty$ + originalyear empty$ + and + and + { pop$ + "" + } + { format.type.school + originalyear connect.with.comma.check + parenthesize.check + } + if$ + format.aetitle.check + swap$ connect.with.space.check + "title" title warning.if.empty + title format.atitle.connect output.new.block + pages format.journal.vol.num.pages.check + } + if$ + % + % if not empty, insert howpublished. + % (used if thesis is retrieved from the internet) + % + format.howpublished add.period$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % + % format optional note + % + note empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.note + } + if$ + fin.entry +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % phd theses, etc. + % +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ "\BPhD" "\BUPhD" thesis } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % master's theses, etc. + % +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ "\BMTh" "\BUMTh" thesis } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% OTHER % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title of something (used in unpublished and misc) + % english translation of title + % type and number of something + % +FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num} +{ format.betitle.check + format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check + format.type.number + connect.with.space.check + title empty$ + { add.period$ } + { title format.btitle.connect } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title of message or software-related thing (used in misc) + % english translation of title + % type and number of something + % +FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num} +{ format.aetitle.check + format.bvol.edition connect.with.space.check + type.2 "\bibmessage" = + { number empty$ + 'skip$ + { type.2 number tie.or.space.connect + bracket.check + connect.with.space.check + } + if$ + } + { format.type.number + connect.with.space.check + } + if$ + title empty$ + { add.period$ } + { title format.atitle.connect } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % title, english translation of title, + % type and number of something (used in misc) + % +FUNCTION {output.misctitle.type.num} +{ type.2 empty$ + { format.btitle.type.num } + { type.2 "\bibmessage" = + type.2 "\bibcomputerprogram" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputersoftware" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" = or + type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" = or + type.2 "\bibprogramminglanguage" = or + { format.mtitle.type.num } + { format.btitle.type.num } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % unpublished manuscripts, etc. + % +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ check.relevant.fields + author empty$ + % + % no author: possibly edited book with editors as authors + % + { editor empty$ + % + % no author or editor: title serves as author. + % title formatted as book title + % + { format.btitle.type.num output.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ + } + % + % format editor and year, and check if year is present + % format book title, volume, and edition and check if title present + % + { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.btitle.type.num + } + if$ + } + % + % format author and year, and check if year is present + % format book title, volume, and edition + % and check if title or type present + % + { format.authors start.new.block + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + format.btitle.type.num + } + if$ + howpublished empty$ + organization empty$ and + address empty$ and + 'skip$ + { output.new.block + "\APAChowpublished{" "}" howpublished enclose.check + organization connect.with.comma.check + address connect.with.comma.check + add.period$ + } + if$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % + % format optional note + % + note empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.note + } + if$ + fin.entry +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % nonprint media and other things that don't fit + % +FUNCTION {misc} +{ % + % To handle @manual: use type.2 instead of type. + type.2 empty$ + type empty$ not and + { type 'type.2 := } + 'skip$ + if$ + % + author empty$ + % + % no author: possibly edited item with editors as authors + % + { editor empty$ + % + % no author or editor: title/type serves as author. + % title formatted as book title + % + % if no title and no type, howpublished is title + % + { title empty$ + type.2 empty$ and + { howpublished empty$ + { "No author, editor, title, type, and howpublished in " + cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * add.period$ } + if$ + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ + } + { output.misctitle.type.num output.new.block + format.year.month.day.check add.period$ + format.howpublished add.period$ + } + if$ + } + % + % format editor and year, and check if year is present + % format book title, volume, and edition and check if title present + % + { format.editors.as.authors start.new.block + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + output.misctitle.type.num + format.howpublished add.period$ + } + if$ + } + % + % format author and year, and check if year is present + % format book title, volume, and edition + % and check if title or type present + % + { format.authors start.new.block + format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block + output.misctitle.type.num + format.howpublished add.period$ + } + if$ + % + address empty$ + publisher empty$ and + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.address.publisher add.period$ + } + if$ + % + % format url + % + url empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.url + } + if$ + % + % format optional note + % + note empty$ + 'skip$ + { % Clear the stack + duplicate$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { output.new.block } + if$ + format.note + } + if$ + fin.entry +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % for legal cases and other cases that need to be + % done by hand + % +FUNCTION {literal} +{ "key" key warning.if.empty + "text" text warning.if.empty + text empty$ + { "" } + { text } + if$ + fin.entry +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % technical documentation + % +FUNCTION {manual} +{ % + % If type is empty, assume that it is a computer software manual. + % + type empty$ + { "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" 'type.2 := } + 'skip$ + if$ + misc +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % following functions not used for APA Manual examples + % + + + + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % booklet + % +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ misc } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % part of a book + % +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ incollection } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % article in proceedings + % +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ incollection } + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % article in proceedings (Kopka & Daly, 2004, p. 230) + % +FUNCTION {conference} +{ inproceedings } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % proceedings + % +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ misc } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + % + % unknown types + % +FUNCTION {default.type} +{ misc } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% INITIALIZATION FUNCTIONS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +FUNCTION {initialize} +{ % + % Maximum number of names to be formatted . + #6 'name.max := +% #250 'entry.max$ := +% #5000 'global.max$ := +} + +FUNCTION {init.old.number} +{ % + % For numbering the entries according to current sorting order. + #0 'old.number := +} + +FUNCTION {init.old.label} +{ % + % For comparing labels across entries . + "zzzzzz" 'old.label := +} + +FUNCTION {init.cite.initials.add.to.year} +{ % + % Initialize "cite initials" indicator for all entries. + #0 'cite.initials := + % + % Initialize "add to year", i.e., whether a, b, etc. must + % be added to the year in citation, to "no". + #0 'add.to.year := + % +} + +FUNCTION {move.forward} +{ % + % Indicates that we're moving forward (ITERATE) through the entry list . + #1 'forward := +} + +FUNCTION {move.backward} +{ % + % Indicates that we're moving backward (REVERSE) through the entry list . + #0 'forward := +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% BASIC BIBLIOGRAPHY OUTPUT FUNCTIONS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Beginning of the thebibliography environment: +% Write preamble if there is one, write \begin command + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Write \end{thebibliography} command + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Write the citation labels and reference list entry to +% the .bbl file. + +FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry} +{ % + % Output \bibitem and \citeauthoryear command. + % + make.cite.labels + % + % Format and output reference list entry. + % + call.type$ +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% READ AND PROCESS ENTRIES, MAKE THEBIBLIOGRAPHY % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Read entries . + +READ + +% Write version info to .blg file + +EXECUTE { identify.apacite.version } + +% Some initializations . + +EXECUTE { initialize } + +% Sort items by title in order to replace each title by +% its number in later sorting . + +ITERATE { make.sort.title } + +SORT + +EXECUTE { init.old.number } + +EXECUTE { init.old.label } + +ITERATE { make.title.number } + +% Now generate some tentative author-year labels and do some +% preprocessing for the later definitive author and year +% labels. + +ITERATE { make.tentative.sort.label } + +SORT + +% Now check whether initials must be added to first author, +% how many authors must be formatted, whether an "a", "b", +% etc., must be added to the year label. + +ITERATE { init.cite.initials.add.to.year } + +EXECUTE { init.initials } + +ITERATE { check.add.initials } + +EXECUTE { init.initials } + +REVERSE { check.add.initials } + +ITERATE { tentative.cite.num.names } + +EXECUTE { init.cite.num.names } + +EXECUTE { move.forward } + +ITERATE { definitive.cite.num.names } + +EXECUTE { init.cite.num.names } + +EXECUTE { move.backward } + +REVERSE { definitive.cite.num.names } + + +% Make final sorting label and do definitive sorting . + +ITERATE { make.final.sort.key } + +SORT + +% Write preamble and \begin{thebibliography}{} statement + +EXECUTE { begin.bib } + +% Make final cite labels, format reference list entry, +% and write to .bbl file. + +ITERATE { write.bbl.entry } + + +% Write \end{thebibliography} statement + +EXECUTE { end.bib } + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% DONE % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% +%</bibstyle|xbibstyle> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \Finale +\endinput +% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.ins new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..eb16002b110 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.ins @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ +%% +%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation +%% driver files from apacite.dtx when run through LaTeX. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. + +\input docstrip.tex +\keepsilent + +\declarepreamble\mainpreamble + +This is a generated file. + +Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +elsewhere in this file. + +This file is part of the `apacite' package. +------------------------------------------- + +It may be distributed and/or modified under the +conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +version. The latest version of this license is in: + + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + +and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. + +The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. + +This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' + +The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer + +This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +the generated files. + +\endpreamble + +\declarepreamble\drvpreamble + +This is a generated file. + +Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +elsewhere in this file. + +This file is part of the `apacite' package. +------------------------------------------- + +It may be distributed and/or modified under the +conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +version. The latest version of this license is in: + + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + +and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. + +The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. + +This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' + +The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer + +This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +the generated files. + +You are allowed to make changes to this file, in order to generate +the user's manual with your preferred settings (e.g., to choose +whether or not to include the documented source code). Please +do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. + +\endpreamble + +\edef\noendinputpostamble{% + \MetaPrefix ^^J% + \MetaPrefix\space End of file `\outFileName'.% +} + +\askonceonly +\generate{% + \usepreamble\mainpreamble + \file{apacite.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{package}} + \file{apacdoc.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{docpkg}} + \file{english.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{english}} + \file{dutch.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{dutch}} + \file{finnish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{finnish}} + \file{german.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{german}} + \file{ngerman.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{ngerman}} + \file{greek.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{greek}} + \file{norsk.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{norsk}} + \file{spanish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{spanish}} + \file{swedish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{swedish}} + \usepreamble\drvpreamble + \file{apacite.drv}{\from{apacite.dtx}{driver}} + \usepreamble\mainpreamble + \usepostamble\noendinputpostamble + \file{apa5ex.bib}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibdb}} + \file{apacite.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle}} + \file{apacitex.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle}} +} + +\obeyspaces +\Msg{*****************************************************} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the *} +\Msg{* following files into a directory searched by TeX: *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* All *.apc, *.sty *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* and to move the following files into a directory *} +\Msg{* searched by BibTeX: *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* All *.bib, *.bst *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* To produce the documentation, run the following *} +\Msg{* script (or something similar, depending on your *} +\Msg{* operating system): *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* bibtex apacite *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* pdflatex apacite.drv *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* See the README file for a brief explanation and *} +\Msg{* the file apacite.drv for how to customize the *} +\Msg{* manual (e.g., to include the documented source *} +\Msg{* code. *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* Happy TeXing! *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{*****************************************************} + +\endbatchfile diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacdoc.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacdoc.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..95b16aedbbc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacdoc.sty @@ -0,0 +1,594 @@ +%% +%% This is file `apacdoc.sty', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `docpkg') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01] +\ProvidesPackage{apacdoc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation style] + +%% +%% apacdoc.sty : Style package that is used for the apacite documentation. +%% Written by Erik Meijer + +\newif\if@APACdoc@AX +\DeclareOption{makeAX}{\@APACdoc@AXtrue}% +\@APACdoc@AXfalse +\ProcessOptions + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS THAT MAY BE USEFUL FOR WIDER USE. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}} +%%\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{#1} +%%\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}} +%% This is the result of lots of trial and error. If I change something +%% in another part, I typically have to change something here as well. +%% The \space is necessary because in the current setup, an additional +%% space is inserted in the bibliography, and MakeIndex is space-sensitive. +\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral\space{#1}} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibinitial}[1]{\string#1} + +\newcommand{\bibnodot}[1]{} + +\newcommand{\BOn}{On} + +\newcommand{\SwapArgs}[2]{#2#1} + +\newcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{#2} + +\newcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{#2} + +\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{\relax }% +\def\renewbibeditortype{% + \def\oldBED{}% + \def\oldBEDS{}% + \DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{% + \global\let\oldBED\BED + \global\let\oldBEDS\BEDS + \global\def\BED{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}% + \global\def\BEDS{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}% + }% +} + +\newcommand{\bibInstring}[1]{% + \global\let\oldBIn\BIn + \global\def\BIn{#1\global\let\BIn\oldBIn}% +} + +\global\def\BAbstractRetrieved#1{Abstract retrieved {#1}, from\ }% +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}{% + \global\def\oldBRetrieved{}% + \global\let\oldBRetrieved\BRetrieved + \global\def\BRetrieved##1{% + \BAbstractRetrieved{##1}% + \global\let\BRetrieved\oldBRetrieved% + }% +} + +\DeclareRobustCommand{\noedition}{% + \global\def\oldBEd{}% + \global\let\oldBEd\BEd + \global\def\BEd{% + \unskip + \global\let\BEd\oldBEd + }% +} + +\def\swallownext#1{\relax} +\def\swallowdot{% + \@ifnextchar.% + {\swallownext}% + {\relax}% +} + +\def\bibskipbracenodot{\noexpand\bibskipbracenodot} +\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot} + +\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeBib}{% + % Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography. + \renewcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{##1}% + \renewcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{##1}% + \renewbibeditortype + \global\let\oldbibskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot + \global\def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot}% + \global\let\oldbibliteral\bibliteral + \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{##1}% + \global\let\oldbibinitial\bibinitial + \renewcommand{\bibinitial}[1]{##1}% +} + +\def\APACbibstyle{% + \if@APAC@index + apacitex% with index option + \else + apacite% without index option + \fi +} + +\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeIndex}{% + \clearpage + % Redefine commands that should be different in the author index. + \renewcommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{}% + \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\unskip}% + \global\let\indexskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot +} + +\newcommand{\APACmanAfterIndex}{% + % Revert to old definitions of commands. + \global\let\bibskipbracenodot\oldbibskipbracenodot + \global\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot}% + \APACdocindex +} + + +\@ifundefined{IndexPrologue}{}{% + \IndexPrologue{\clearpage\section*{{Code Index}}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Code Index}% + \markboth{{Code Index}}{{Code Index}}% + Numbers written in italic refer to the page + where the corresponding entry is described; + numbers underlined refer to the + \ifcodeline@index + code line of the + \fi + definition; numbers in roman refer to the + \ifcodeline@index + code lines + \else + pages + \fi + where the entry is used. + }% +} +\@ifundefined{GlossaryPrologue}{}{% + \GlossaryPrologue{\section{{Change History}}% + \markboth{{Change History}}{{Change History}}% + }% +} + +\def\APACdocindex{% + \ifhave@multicol + \renewenvironment{theindex} + {\begin{multicols}\c@IndexColumns[\index@prologue][\IndexMin]% + \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}% + {\end{multicols}} + \else + \typeout{Can't find multicol.sty -- will use normal index layout if + necessary.} + \def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi + \columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[\index@prologue]% + \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces} + \def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} + \fi +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% CITATIONS TO THE BIBLE +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%% To define which Bible version you used. +\def\bibleversion#1{\gdef\@bibleversion{#1}} +\def\@bibleversion{Revised Standard Version} + +\def\bibleciteA#1{% + % If this is the first citation, add bible version. + {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}% + {\fullbibleciteA{#1}}% + {\shortbibleciteA{#1}}% + }% +} + +\def\fullbibleciteA#1{% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + { \BBOP\@bibleversion\BBCP}% + % Flag that bible has been cited. + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\shortbibleciteA#1{% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?). + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\biblecite#1{% + % If this is the first citation, add bible version. + {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}% + {\fullbiblecite{#1}}% + {\shortbiblecite{#1}}% + }% +} + +\def\fullbiblecite#1{% + % Open parenthesis. + {\BBOP}% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Add bible version. + {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}% + % Close parenthesis. + {\BBCP}% + % Flag that bible has been cited. + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\shortbiblecite#1{% + % Open parenthesis. + {\BBOP}% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Close parenthesis. + {\BBCP}% + % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?). + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\bibleciteNP#1{% + % If this is the first citation, add bible version. + {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}% + {\fullbibleciteNP{#1}}% + {\shortbibleciteNP{#1}}% + }% +} + +\def\fullbibleciteNP#1{% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Add bible version. + {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}% + % Flag that bible has been cited. + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +\def\shortbibleciteNP#1{% + % Insert relevant chapter and verse. + {#1}% + % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?). + {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% COMMANDS TO CITE SONGS. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\newcommand{\bibsong}[4]{} + +\newcommand{\citeAsong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\fullciteAsong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \fullciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\shortciteAsong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \shortciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\citesong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\fullcitesong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \fullciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\shortcitesong}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}% + }% + \shortciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\citesongNP}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}% + }% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\fullcitesongNP}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}% + }% + \fullciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +\newcommand{\shortcitesongNP}[1]{% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{% + \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}% + }% + \shortciteauthor{#1}% + \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% COMMANDS TO CITE DSM. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibDSM}[4]{#1} +\def\origbibDSM{} +\let\origbibDSM\bibDSM + +\newcommand{\DSMauthor}[1]{% + \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##1}% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM +} + +\newcommand{\DSMfulltitle}[1]{% + \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##2}% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM +} + +\newcommand{\DSMshorttitle}[1]{% + \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##4}% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM +} + +\newcommand{\DSMedition}[1]{% + \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##3}% + \citeauthor{#1}% + \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM +} + +\newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{% + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + % Removes a possible space before the citation key + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % Is this the first citation? + \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\DSMfullciteA{#1}}% + {\DSMshortciteA{#1}}% + }% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{% + % \emph{Full Title} (edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year) + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}} + \BBOP + \DSMedition{#1}; + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}; + \citeNP{#1}% + \BBCP +} + +\newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{% + % \emph{Short Title} + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{% + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + % Removes a possible space before the citation key + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % Is this the first citation? + \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\DSMfullcite{#1}}% + {\DSMshortcite{#1}}% + }% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{% + % (\emph{Full Title}, edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year) + \BBOP + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}}, + \DSMedition{#1}; + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}; + \citeNP{#1}% + \BBCP +} + +\newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{% + % (\emph{Short Title}) + \BBOP\APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}\BBCP +} + +\newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{% + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + % Removes a possible space before the citation key + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % Is this the first citation? + \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\DSMfullciteNP{#1}}% + {\DSMshortciteNP{#1}}% + }% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{% + % (\emph{Full Title}, edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year) + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}}, + \DSMedition{#1}; + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}; + \citeNP{#1}% +} + +\newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{% + % (\emph{Short Title}) + \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}% +} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\@ifundefined{BibTeX}{% + \def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em + T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}% copied from bibtex.web +}{} +\newcommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}} +\newcommand{\latextohtml}{\textup{\LaTeX2\texttt{HTML}}}% from html.sty +\newcommand{\LaTeXrtf}{\textup{\LaTeX2RTF}}% +\newcommand{\TeXht}{\textup{\TeX4ht}}% +\newcommand{\Perl}{\textsl{Perl}}% + +\newcommand{\EM}{\ensuremath{\triangleright\quad}} + +\newcommand{\APACversiondate}[1]{\relax [#1]} + +\newcommand{\LC}{\mbox{${}^{\dag}$}}% \LaTeX{} Companion +\newcommand{\X}{\ensuremath{\times}}% for one table +\newcommand{\Y}{\ensuremath{c}}% for one table + +\newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}% package name +\newcommand{\fname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% file name +\newcommand{\fieldname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% field name +\newcommand{\entryname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% entry type name +\newcommand{\pkgoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% package option +\newcommand{\envirname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% environment name + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{cmd}{% + \newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}% command, incl. `\' + }{}% +} + +\newcommand{\bs}{{\ttfamily \@backslashchar}}% backslash +\newcommand{\opt}[1]{$\langle${\itshape #1}$\rangle$}% generic text + +\newcommand{\cmdtwo}[2]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1\{}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{\}}}}% +\newcommand{\cmdthree}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{]\{}\opt{#3}% + \texttt{\}}}}% +\newcommand{\cmdthreepre}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{>\{}\opt{#3}% + \texttt{\}}}}% +\newcommand{\cmdthreealt}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{]\{#3\}}}}% +\newcommand{\cmdfour}[4]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}% + \texttt{>[}\opt{#3}% + \texttt{]\{}\opt{#4}% + \texttt{\}}}}% + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{flqq}{% + \newcommand{\flqq}{% + {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{19}}}% + \newcommand{\frqq}{% + {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{20}}}% + }{}% +}% +\newcommand{\simpleguillemots}{% + \renewcommand{\flqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{\tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{<\!\!<}}}}}% + \renewcommand{\frqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{\tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{>\!\!>}}}}}% +}% + +\newcommand{\APACdocPageLayout}{% + \normalsize + \let\oldhoffset\hoffset + \let\oldvoffset\voffset + \let\oldoddsidemargin\oddsidemargin + \let\oldevensidemargin\evensidemargin + \let\oldtopmargin\topmargin + \let\oldheadheight\headheight + \let\oldheadsep\headsep + \let\oldtextheight\textheight + \let\oldfootskip\footskip + \let\oldtextwidth\textwidth + \let\oldlinewidth\linewidth + \let\oldmarginparsep\marginparsep + \let\oldmarginparwidth\marginparwidth + \let\oldmarginparpush\marginparpush + \setlength{\hoffset}{-1in} % top-left reference point is + \setlength{\voffset}{-1in} % the top-left corner of the page + \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{1.3in} + \setlength{\evensidemargin}{1.3in} + \setlength{\topmargin}{1.35in} + %\setlength{\headheight}{\baselineskip} + \setlength{\headheight}{0.12in} + \setlength{\headsep}{0.24in} + \setlength{\textheight}{7.9in} + \setlength{\footskip}{30pt} + \setlength{\textwidth}{5.9in} + \setlength{\linewidth}{\textwidth} + \setlength{\marginparsep}{0pt} + \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0pt} + \setlength{\marginparpush}{0pt} +} + +\newcommand{\APACcodePageLayout}{% + \let\hoffset\oldhoffset + \let\oddsidemargin\oldoddsidemargin + \let\evensidemargin\oldevensidemargin + \let\textwidth\oldtextwidth + \let\linewidth\oldlinewidth + \let\marginparsep\oldmarginparsep + \let\marginparwidth\oldmarginparwidth + \let\marginparpush\oldmarginparpush +} + +\APACdocPageLayout +%% + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `apacdoc.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacite.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacite.sty index 8a0cb810d61..3944dfd5454 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacite.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacite.sty @@ -1,128 +1,100 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% This is file `apacite.sty'. -% -% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed -% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the `apacite' package. -% ------------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a -% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'. -% -% \fi +%% +%% This is file `apacite.sty', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `package') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01] +\ProvidesPackage{apacite} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA citation] +%% %% apacite.sty : citation and reference list according to APA manual -%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl> +%% Written by Erik Meijer %% %% Contains code adapted from %% index.sty [1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)], %% hyperref.dtx [6.71, 2000/10/04], %% babel.def [2001/03/01, v3.7h], %% backref.dtx [1.20, 2002/06/09], -%% and code (used with permission) provided by others: -%% Ross Moore, Stefan Bj\"ork. - -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1998/06/01] % Should this be a later one? -\ProvidesPackage{apacite}[2005/06/08 APA citation] - - +%% ltbibl.dtx [2004/02/15 v1.1q LaTeX Kernel (Bibliography)], +%% bibtopic.dtx [2002/08/22 v1.0k], +%% multibib.dtx [2004/01/28 v1.3 Multiple bibliographies for one document.], +%% multibbl.dtx [2004/07/27 v1.1], +%% amsrefs.dtx [2004/06/30 v2.0] +%% ltidxglo.dtx [1996/01/20 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Index and Glossary)] +%% doc.dtx [2004/02/09 v2.1b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)] +%% and code (used with permission) provided by: +%% Stefan Bj\"ork. +%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%% Default. The ``old'' version %%% \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3} %%% cannot exist jointly with this, so has to be moved to an option. \def\@year@\citeauthoryear#1#2#3{#3} -\DeclareOption{BCAY}{% kept for compatibility with previous versions +\DeclareOption{BCAY}{% kept for compatibility with old versions \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3}% } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%% Accent fix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\DeclareOption{accentfix}{% - % - % A cedilla accent (\c{c}) in an author name used to lead - % to errors, only due to the checking whether subsequent authors - % in the same citation are equivalent. The same problem is - % anticipated with the \b{...} accent and the \d{...} accent - % and the \copyright symbol (will the latter turn up in an - % author name?), due to the same use of \crcr, cf. The TeXbook, p. 356. - % - % This fix therefore redefines these to sensible alternatives, - % only for comparison of authors, not for any real formatting. - % Therefore, the user should not notice this, apart from the - % lack of errors, of course. Therefore, it is also a default - % option. However, because I haven't tested this thoroughly, I give - % the user the option to turn it off (noaccentfix). The user - % is then responsible for fixing any error messages generated - % by such characters. - % - \def\b@APAC#1{#1\_}% bar-under accent - \def\c@APAC#1{\accent'30 #1}% cedilla accent - \def\d@APAC#1{#1.}% dot-under accent - \def\copyright@APAC#1{copyright}% copyright symbol - \def\@pre@accentfix{% - % - % store original definitions - \let\old@b@APAC\b - \let\old@c@APAC\c - \let\old@d@APAC\d - \let\old@copyright@APAC\copyright - % - % redefine them - \let\b\b@APAC - \let\c\c@APAC - \let\d\d@APAC - \let\copyright\copyright@APAC - }% - \def\@post@accentfix{% - % - % restore original definitions - \let\b\old@b@APAC - \let\c\old@c@APAC - \let\d\old@d@APAC - \let\copyright\old@copyright@APAC - }% -} - -\DeclareOption{noaccentfix}{% - % - % See accentfix above for description. - % - \let\@pre@accentfix\relax% - \let\@post@accentfix\relax% -} -%%% End Accent fix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - - %%%%%% No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% The \if is necessary because packages can not be required here, so -% we must handle the consequences of the index and noindex options -% later. -% \newif\if@APAC@index \DeclareOption{noindex}{\@APAC@indexfalse}% -% %%%%%% End No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \DeclareOption{index}{\@APAC@indextrue}% -% %%%%%% End Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%% Include Corporate Authors in index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newif\if@APAC@include@corporate +\DeclareOption{includecorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatetrue}% +\DeclareOption{suppresscorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatefalse}% +%%%%%% End Corporate Author options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%%%%% Use index package or standard LaTeX index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newif\if@APAC@index@package +\DeclareOption{indexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagetrue}% +\DeclareOption{noindexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagefalse}% +%%%%%% End index package options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + %%%%%% Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %% %% Standard index: from the index package @@ -134,6 +106,10 @@ %% i.e., without table of contents entry. %% \ExecuteOptions{index}% + %% + %% This option requires the index package + \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% + %% \AtEndOfPackage{% \@ifclassloaded{article}{% \renewenvironment{theindex}{% @@ -198,13 +174,16 @@ }% }% }% -% \DeclareOption{tocindex}{% %% %% Index style as with the stdindex option, but with an %% added table of contents entry. %% \ExecuteOptions{index}% + %% + %% This option requires the index package + \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% + %% \AtEndOfPackage{% \@ifclassloaded{article}{% \renewenvironment{theindex}{% @@ -277,12 +256,15 @@ }% }% } -% \DeclareOption{emindex}{% %% %% My (EM) own favorite index style. Maybe you like it too. %% \ExecuteOptions{index}% + %% + %% This option requires the index package + \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% + %% \AtEndOfPackage{% %% %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section @@ -312,11 +294,54 @@ }% }% }% +\DeclareOption{ltxemindex}{% + %% + %% Variation on emindex, without the `index' package + %% + \ExecuteOptions{index}% + %% + %% This option drops the index package + \ExecuteOptions{noindexpackage}% + %% + \AtEndOfPackage{% + %% + %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section + %% title is generated, with a corresponding table of contents + %% entry. theindex is now in multicol environment. + %% + \RequirePackage{multicol} + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + % The index naming scheme of the `index' package is also absent, + % therefore try to guess an index name. + \@ifundefined{currentindexname}{% + \@ifundefined{indexname}{% + \edef\@indexname{Index}% + }{\edef\@indexname{\indexname}}% + }{\edef\@indexname{\currentindexname}}% + \@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\section*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}% + }% + {\chapter*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}% + }% + \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% do we need this? + \def\pfill{\relax{}}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + \setlength{\columnsep}{2em} + \small + \begin{multicols}{2} + \raggedright + }% + {\end{multicols}\normalsize + }% + }% +} %%%%%% End Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%% Some options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \newif\if@numberedbib \DeclareOption{numberedbib}{% % @@ -394,120 +419,158 @@ \let\@bibnewpage\relax } - %%%%%% End options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%%%%% Hyperref compatibility option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% (This does not work completely satisfactory, so -% is only a non-default option.) -% -\newif\if@hyper@APA@comp +%%%%%% Obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \DeclareOption{hyper}{% - \@hyper@APA@comptrue % hyperref compatibility option is on + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `hyper' ignored}% } -%%%%%% End Hyperref compatibility option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%%%%% No Hyperref compatibility option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% If the hyperref compatibility code is not desired. -% \DeclareOption{nohyper}{% - \@hyper@APA@compfalse % hyperref compatibility option is off + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `nohyper' ignored}% } -%%%%%% End No Hyperref compatibility option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%% End obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%% Obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\DeclareOption{accentfix}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `accentfix' ignored}% +} +\DeclareOption{noaccentfix}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `noaccentfix' ignored}% +} +%%%%%% End obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% Execute default options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -\ExecuteOptions{accentfix,noindex,nohyper,unnumberedbib,tocbib,% - nobibnewpage} +\ExecuteOptions{noindex,indexpackage,unnumberedbib,tocbib,% + nobibnewpage,suppresscorporate} %%%%%% Execute user-requested options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \ProcessOptions %%%%%% Define author indexing stuff when requested -% \newcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index} \if@APAC@index - % - % Author index requested. - % Load \pkg{index} package. - % - \RequirePackage{index}[1995/09/28] - % - % Define Author Index. - % This may be changed in the preamble of the - % document (or in a user-provided package) - % by a \renewindex command. - % - \newindex{autx}{adx}{and}{\authorindexname} - % - % Author indexing command - % - \def\AX#1{% - \write\@auxout% - {\string\@writefile{autx}{% - \string\indexentry{\string#1}{\thepage}}}% -% \expandafter\string\expandafter\indexentry{#1}{\thepage}}}% - } - % + % + % Author index requested. + % + \if@APAC@index@package + % + % Load \pkg{index} package. + \RequirePackage{index}[1995/09/28] + % + % Define Author Index. + % This may be changed in the preamble of the + % document (or in a user-provided package) + % by a \renewindex command. + % + \newindex{autx}{adx}{and}{\authorindexname} + % + % Author indexing command + % + \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{% + \if@filesw{% + \protected@write\@auxout{}{% + \string\protected@write\string\tf@autx{}{% + \string\string\string + \indexentry{\string#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}}% + }% + \fi + }% + \else + % + % Without \pkg{index} package (experimental). + % A bit of code adapted from ltidxglo.dtx + \newwrite\@AXfile + \immediate\openout\@AXfile=\jobname.adx + \typeout + {Writing author index file \jobname.adx }% + % + \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{% + \protected@write\@AXfile{}% + {\string\indexentry{\string#1}{\thepage}}% + }% + % + % Some code adapted from doc.dtx + \def\PrintAX{\edef\currentindexname{\authorindexname}% + \@input@{\jobname.and}% + \global\let\PrintAX\@empty + }% + % + % Do some hacking to make sure both \printindex and \printindex[autx] are defined + % As yet untested. + \AtBeginDocument{% + % Make sure \printindex is defined. + \@ifundefined{printindex}{\makeindex}{}% + % Now, redefine \printindex to accommodate both \printindex and \printindex[autx] + \let\orig@printindex\printindex + \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\APAC@printindex}{% + \orig@printindex}}% + % + \def\APAC@printindex[autx]{\PrintAX}% + }% + \fi + % + % Index corporate authors? + \if@APAC@include@corporate + % Include corporate authors in index. + \let\corporateAX\AX + \else + % Swallow argument (do not index). + \let\corporateAX\@gobble + \fi + % \else - % - % No author index. - % - % Wait till \begin{document} for checking whether another - % package is loaded that defines \printindex. - % - \AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{printindex}% - {%% \printindex not defined. Define \printindex so that it - % suppresses the indexes. - \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{% - \check@printindex[]}}% - % - \def\check@printindex[#1]{\relax }% - }% - {% \printindex defined, so save its definition. - \let\orig@printindex\printindex - % - % Redefine \printindex so that it suppresses the author index - % but does not change other indexes. - % 1. If there is no optional argument, use the original - % definition. - \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{\orig@printindex}}% - % - % 2. If there is an optional argument, check whether it is - % equal to `autx'. If so, suppress this (author) index. - % If not, use the original definition. - \def\check@printindex[#1]{% - % Use a clumsy way to check whether #1 = autx - % but seemingly more elegant ways somehow didn't work. - \expandafter\def\csname APAC@#1\endcsname{DUMMY}% - \@ifundefined{APAC@autx}% - {\orig@printindex[#1]}% - {\let\APAC@autx\@undefined}% - }% - }% - }% - % - % Empty author indexing command - % - \def\AX#1{} - % + % + % No author index. + % + % Wait till \begin{document} for checking whether another + % package is loaded that defines \printindex. + % + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{printindex}% + {%% \printindex not defined. Define \printindex so that it + % suppresses the indexes. + \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{% + \check@printindex[]}}% + % + \def\check@printindex[#1]{\relax }% + }% + {% \printindex defined, so save its definition. + \let\orig@printindex\printindex + % + % Redefine \printindex so that it suppresses the author index + % but does not change other indexes. + % 1. If there is no optional argument, use the original + % definition. + \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{\orig@printindex}}% + % + % 2. If there is an optional argument, check whether it is + % equal to `autx'. If so, suppress this (author) index. + % If not, use the original definition. + \def\check@printindex[#1]{% + % Use a clumsy way to check whether #1 = autx + % but seemingly more elegant ways somehow didn't work. + \expandafter\def\csname APAC@#1\endcsname{DUMMY}% + \@ifundefined{APAC@autx}% + {\orig@printindex[#1]}% + {\let\APAC@autx\@undefined}% + }% + }% + }% + % + % Empty author indexing commands + % + \let\AX\@gobble + \let\corporateAX\@gobble + % \fi - %%%%%% Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% From the instructions of the chapterbib package. \@ifundefined{@extra@b@citeb}{\def\@extra@b@citeb{}}{} \gdef\@extra@binfo{} %%%%%% End Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. %%% These are recognized by apacite.bst. @@ -521,25 +584,23 @@ \newcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Command for corporate authors. +%%% This is recognized by apacite.bst. +\let\bibcorporate\relax + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%% The following commands are recognized by apacite.bst. %%% They denote that the publication date is unknown, %%% and that the type should be left empty (for @techreport, where %%% ``Tech. Rep.'' is the default type if the field is left empty). -\newcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.{}} +\newcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}} \newcommand{\bibnotype}{} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% cite punctuations % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% text style of authors in-text citation -% (\cite, \shortcite, \fullcite, -% \citeA, \shortciteA, \fullciteA, -% \citeNP, \shortciteNP, \fullciteNP) \newcommand{\BAstyle}{}% -% text style of authors in-text citation -% (\citeauthor, \shortciteauthor, \fullciteauthor) \newcommand{\BAastyle}{}% \newcommand{\BBOP}{(} % open parenthesis @@ -553,14 +614,13 @@ \newcommand{\BBN}{, } % before note \newcommand{\BBOQ}{} % open quote for article title \newcommand{\BBCQ}{} % closing quote for article title -% \newcommand{\BCBT}{,} % comma between authors in ref. sec % when no. of authors = 2 \newcommand{\BCBL}{,} % comma before last author \newcommand{\BAnd}{\&} % for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list -% +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials \newcommand{\BBA}{\BBAA} -% \let\Bem\emph \newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''}% Format as article title in text @@ -571,97 +631,60 @@ % the argument of this command, but the % argument is never displayed. -% Two commands that are used to trick natbib. \newcommand{\APACyear}[1]{{#1}}% \newcommand{\APACexlab}[1]{{#1}}% -% -% For multiple citations with same author-year. -% (Kruskal, 1964a, 1964b) -% The \protect is necessary when natbib is used. -% \newcounter{BibCnt} \renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{\alph{BibCnt}} \newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\protect\theBibCnt} -% -% In press, no date. -% The \mbox prevents a line break at the hyphen. -% \newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}} \newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Labels, mostly for reference list % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\newcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a - % dot to suppress an additional one - % in the reference list -\newcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.{}}% ``others'', the argument contains a - % dot to suppress an additional one - % in the reference list. The difference - % with \BOthers is that, if another - % string is used to define \BOthers, - % this one should always finish with a - % period and the previous one not - % necessarily (e.g., if explicit - % ``others'' is used). +\newcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} +\newcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} \newcommand{\BIP}{in press} % used as year for in-press citations \newcommand{\BIn}{In} % for ``In '' editor... -\newcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.{}} % chapter -\newcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.{}} % chapters -\newcommand{\BED}{Ed.{}} % editor -\newcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.{}} % editors -\newcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.{}} % translator -\newcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.{}} % translators -\newcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.{}} % translation, for the year field +\newcommand{\Bby}{by} % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints) +\newcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapter +\newcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapters +\newcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}} % editor +\newcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}} % editors +\newcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translator +\newcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translators +\newcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}} % translation, for the year field \newcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair} % chair of symposium \newcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs} % chairs -\newcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.{}} % volume -\newcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.{}} % volumes -\newcommand{\BNUM}{No.{}} % number -\newcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.{}} % numbers -\newcommand{\BEd}{ed.{}} % edition -\newcommand{\BPG}{p.{}} % page -\newcommand{\BPGS}{pp.{}} % pages -\newcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.{}} % (default) technical report type name -\newcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation} - % (default) PhD thesis type name +\newcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}} % volume +\newcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}} % volumes +\newcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}} % number +\newcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}} % numbers +\newcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}} % edition +\newcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}} % page +\newcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}} % pages +\newcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}} % (default) technical report type name +\newcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name \newcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation} - % (default) unpublished PhD thesis - % type name \newcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis} % (default) master's thesis type name -\newcommand{\BUMTh}% - {Unpublished master's thesis} % (default) unpublished - % master's thesis type name +\newcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis} +\newcommand{\BAuthor}{Author} % Used if publisher = author \newcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published} \newcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from} - +\newcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }% Websites; note the space. +\newcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% Websites; note the space. +\newcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }% Messages; note the space. \def\refname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. \def\bibname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. -% -% An optional note just before the references in the reference list. -% Defaults to nothing, but can be changed to a list of commands -% (e.g., if author formatting should be different in the reference -% list) and/or text (e.g., for an explanatory note). -% \newcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{} -% -% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list -% when a meta-analysis is reported. -% \newcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% References marked with an asterisk indicate studies included in the meta-analysis.} -% -% The star that's put in front of the entries used in the meta-analysis -% -\newcommand{\APACmetastar}{$\star$\ } +\newcommand{\APACmetastar}{\ensuremath{{}^\ast}} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Load language dependent sections from an external file. -% (Based on code by Stefan Bj\"ork, 2004/12/25.) %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \AtBeginDocument{% @@ -679,35 +702,6 @@ \@ifundefined{iflanguage}% {\relax }% {% % - % Define a modification of \iflanguage that executes the "true" - % code if the language is defined and equal to the current - % language and does nothing otherwise. (Just \iflanguage gives - % an error if the language is not loaded.) - % - \def\APAC@iflang#1#2{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \else - \ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language - {#2}% - \fi - \fi - }% - % Define language support file. The \def instead of a direct \input - % is done to provide a mechanism to check whether a language file - % has been defined. The language files that are shipped with the - % current release are defined explicitly. If the requested language - % is not in this list, \languagename.apc is loaded if it exists. - % - \APAC@iflang{dutch}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{dutch.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{english}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{german}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{german.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{ngerman}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{ngerman.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{greek}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{greek.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{swedish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{swedish.apc}}% - % - \@ifundefined{APAC@apcfile}{% - \def\APAC@apcfile{\languagename.apc}}{\relax}% - % % My teTeX under Cygwin automatically loads babel with % default language "nohyphenation", so this language should % revert to doing nothing. Strangely enough \iflanguage @@ -719,76 +713,352 @@ \edef\APAC@tmp{nohyphenation}% \ifx\languagename\APAC@tmp \else - \InputIfFileExists{\APAC@apcfile}{}{% - \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{% - Language definition file \APAC@apcfile\space not found.}}% + \InputIfFileExists{\languagename.apc}{}{% + % + % \languagename.apc does not exist; try whether the current + % language is a dialect of one of the known languages. This + % is not perfect, because languages for which no hyphenation + % patterns have been found revert to the default language, + % so that the wrong language file may be loaded here in that + % case. + % + % Define a modification of \iflanguage that executes the "true" + % code if the language is defined and equal to the current + % language and does nothing otherwise. (Just \iflanguage gives + % an error if the language is not loaded.) + % + \def\APAC@iflang##1##2{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname l@##1\endcsname\relax + \else + \ifnum\csname l@##1\endcsname=\language + {##2}% + \fi + \fi + }% + % Define language support file. The \def instead of a direct \input + % is done to provide a mechanism to check whether a language file + % has been defined. + % + \APAC@iflang{dutch}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{dutch.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{finnish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{finnish.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{german}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{german.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{ngerman}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{ngerman.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{greek}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{greek.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{norsk}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{norsk.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{spanish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{spanish.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{swedish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{swedish.apc}}% + % + % The default English as last one. + \APAC@iflang{english}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}% + % + \@ifundefined{APAC@apcfile}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{% + No suitable language definition file (\languagename.apc) found}% + }{% + \InputIfFileExists{\APAC@apcfile}{}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{% + Language definition file \APAC@apcfile\space not found}% + }% + }% + \let\APAC@apcfile\@undefined + }% \fi \let\APAC@tmp\@undefined }% + \let\APAC@iflang\@undefined } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Bibliography style parameters. %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\bibnewpage{\clearpage}% apa.cls uses \newpage, change with \renewcommand \let\bibliographytypesize\normalsize -% %%% declare four parameters \newskip{\bibleftmargin} \newskip{\bibindent} \newskip{\bibparsep} \newskip{\bibitemsep} -% %%% and give them default values \bibleftmargin=2.5em \bibindent=-\bibleftmargin \bibparsep=0pt% \bibitemsep\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax -% -% To force another order (in Part 1, Part 2 cases) -% Actually, this is the same as \SortNoop used in the examples, -% so I do not discuss this in the documentation. It should -% not be considered part of apacite, but I keep it for backwards -% compatibility. \newcommand{\bibphant}[1]{} -% -% Around 1998, I got error messages with accented characters -% in author names. After some trial and error, I found out that -% this works. However, later it was apparently not necessary anymore -% (tests without it worked well), but I keep it because it's harmless -% and I'm not sure enough. -% -\@ifundefined{accent@spacefactor}{\def\accent@spacefactor{}}{} +\def\APAC@extra@b@citeb{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@b@citeb}% +\def\APAC@extra@binfo{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@binfo}% -%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% citations % -%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{% \def\BBA{\BBAA}% - \item[\@biblabel{#1}]% + % For compatibility with chapterbib, bibunits, backref, and hyperref. + % Adapted from natbib.dtx. + \item[\hyper@natanchorstart{#2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + \@biblabel{#1}% + \hyper@natanchorend]% \if@filesw{% \def\BBA{\string\BBA}% - \def\protect##1{\string ##1}% - \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}% + \let\protect\noexpand + % bibunits redefines \bibcite through \AtBeginDocument + % in a way that is incompatible with apacite's definition. + % The simplest way to get things working automatically + % seems to be introducing the parallel \APACbibcite command. + % This should also solve many other compatibility problems. + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}% + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\APACbibcite{#2}{#1}}% \def\BBA{\BBAA}% }% - \fi% - \ignorespaces% + \fi + \ignorespaces +} + +\def\APACbibcite#1#2{% + \global\expandafter + \def\csname b@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{#2}% names + \global\expandafter + \def\csname Y@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{\@year@#2}% year } +\let\bibcite\APACbibcite + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BABEL %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% +%% COMMENTS FROM hyperref.dtx: +%% +%% Package |babel| redefines \cmd{\bibcite} with +%% macro \cmd{\bbl@cite@choice}. It needs to be overwritten +%% to avoid the warning ``Label(s) may have changed.''. +%% +%% END COMMENTS +%% +%% Here, a slightly adapted version of the code mentioned above is inserted. +%% The other \bibcite-restoring compatibility code above does something +%% similar, but does not do the job correctly if babel is loaded (why?). +%% Clearly, this only works if babel is loaded before apacite, but +%% putting it in a \AtBeginDocument does not work well. + +\@ifundefined{bbl@cite@choice}{}{% + \g@addto@macro\bbl@cite@choice{% + \let\bibcite\APACbibcite + }% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBTOPIC %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{bibtopic}{% + % + % Somewhat rudely disable this command to prevent an undesired + % error message of bibtopic. + \renewcommand*\bt@change@thb{\relax}% + }{% + % + % These bibtopic hooks are included in the thebibliography + % environment, so bibtopic should work correctly. If bibtopic is + % not loaded, they should do nothing. + \providecommand{\bt@beg@thb@hook}{\relax} + \providecommand{\bt@end@thb@hook}{\relax} + }% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBUNITS %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\AtEndOfPackage{% + \let\APACstd@cite\cite + \let\APACstd@nocite\nocite + \let\APACstd@lbibitem\@lbibitem +} + +\@ifundefined{APAC@bu}{\def\APAC@bu{}}{} + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{bibunits}{% + % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.). + \def\APAC@bu{% + \ifx\cite\std@cite + % Outside a bibunit; the `@APACbu' strings are intended to + % minimize the possibility of wrong matches, such as + % \b@ex11 = ex11 from the global aux + % or + % \b@ex11 = ex1 from bibunit 1, + % and the last `@' is similarly intended to avoid confusion + % if both bibunits and chapterbib are loaded (`11@1' = 11th + % bibunit, 1st chapterbib unit; `1@11' = 1st bibunit, 11th + % chapterbib unit). It seems unlikely that both packages would + % be used at the same time, but safety first. + @APACbu0@% + \else + % Within a bibunit: use bibunit number to distinguish the bibunits. + @APACbu\the\@bibunitauxcnt @% + \fi + }%% + % Standard apacite definition of \cite and \nocite commands. + \let\std@cite\APACstd@cite + % This is mainly necessary to avoid incorrect `Citation undefined' + % warnings. + \let\std@nocite\APACstd@nocite + % Restore apacite definition of \bibitem, mainly because of the + % \@newciteauxhandle instead of \@auxout. + \def\std@lbibitem[#1]#2{% + \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@bibunitaux + \APACstd@lbibitem[#1]{#2}% + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout + }%% + % To make sure everything works whether bibunits is loaded + % before or after apacite. + \let\@lbibitem\std@lbibitem + % + }{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBBL %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\@ifundefined{APAC@curr@aux}{\def\APAC@curr@aux{}}{} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{multibbl}{% + % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.). + \def\APAC@def@curr@aux#1{\def\APAC@curr@aux{@APACaux@#1@}}% + % Ditto. This puts the \bibcite commands in #1.aux instead + % of in the main aux file, so that the flags can be differentiated. + % This also means that the aux file has to be read by LaTeX + % before it is overwritten. + \def\newbibliography#1{% + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% + \@input@{#1.aux}% + \begingroup + \if@filesw + \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname + \expandafter\immediate\openout + \csname #1@auxfile\endcsname #1.aux\relax + \typeout{Writing auxiliary file #1.aux }% + \fi + \endgroup + }%% + % Add the flag to the bibliography. + \let\APAC@mbbl@bibliography\bibliography + \def\bibliography#1#2#3{% + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% + \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle + \def\@APACtemp{\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname}% + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp + \APAC@mbbl@bibliography{#1}{#2}{#3}% + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout + }%% + % Add an extra argument to \@@cite. + \let\@orig@@cite\@@cite + \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3#4{% + \nocite{#3}{#4}% + \let\@temp@nocite\nocite + \let\nocite\@gobble + % + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#3}% + \@orig@@cite<#1>[#2]{#4}% + % + \let\nocite\@temp@nocite + \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined + }%% + % + % Add an extra argument to \nocite. + \let\@orig@nocite\nocite + \def\nocite#1#2{% + % Define a flag. + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% + % + % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite, + % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite. + \@bsphack + \ifx\@onlypreamble\document + % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations: + \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib + % #1@auxfile for compatibility with multibbl + \@ifundefined{#1@auxfile}{% + \if@filesw + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% + \fi + }{\if@filesw + \expandafter\immediate% + \write\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% + \fi + }% + % + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{% + \edef\B@my@dummy{*}% + \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy + \else + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% + \fi + }{}% + }% + \else + % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work + % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested + % in ltbibl.dtx: + \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}{#2}}% + \fi + \@esphack + % + % For compatibility with multibib. + \@restore@auxhandle + }%% + % + % Add an extra argument to \nocitemeta. + \let\@orig@@nocitemeta\nocitemeta + \def\nocitemeta#1#2{% + \nocite{#1}{#2}% + \let\@temp@nocite\nocite + \let\nocite\@gobble + % + \@orig@@nocitemeta{#2}% + % + \let\nocite\@temp@nocite + \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined + }% + }{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBIB %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\providecommand\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout} +\def\@restore@auxhandle{\gdef\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}} +\def\@mb@citenamelist{% + cite,fullcite,shortcite,citeNP,fullciteNP,shortciteNP,% + citeA,fullciteA,shortciteA,citeauthor,fullciteauthor,shortciteauthor,% + citeauthorNP,fullciteauthorNP,shortciteauthorNP,% + citeyear,citeyearNP,nocite,nocitemeta% +}% +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{newcites}{\global\let\@restore@auxhandle\relax}{}% +} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH SPLITBIB %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Year is separately handled by \Y@<citation key> -\def\bibcite#1#2{% - \global\expandafter\def\csname b@#1\@extra@binfo\endcsname{#2}% names - \global\expandafter\def\csname Y@#1\@extra@binfo\endcsname{\@year@#2}% year +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{splitbib}{% + % Presumably, this doesn't hurt without splitbib as well. + \def\citeauthoryear{\string\citeauthoryear}% + }{}% } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %% COMPATIBILITY WITH NATBIB %% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + \AtBeginDocument{% \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% % @@ -803,119 +1073,187 @@ % is necessary and therefore I do this here. % \def\NAT@parse@date#1#2#3#4#5#6@@{% - \def\NAT@year{{#1}}\def\NAT@exlab{{#2}}% + \def\NAT@year{{#1}}\def\NAT@exlab{{#2}}% + }% + % + % natbib redefines \thebibliography, which interferes a little + % with our purposes. Therefore, add some patches. + % + \let\@oldbibpreamble\bibpreamble + \def\bibpreamble{% This goes wrong if \bibpreamble is redefined + % later on, i.e., by the user, but I haven't thought + % of a better hack yet. + \@oldbibpreamble% + \bibliographytypesize% + \bibliographyprenote% + \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {}% skip + {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% }% + \let\@old@endthebibliography\endthebibliography + \def\endthebibliography{\@old@endthebibliography% + \normalsize}% }{}% } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %% COMPATIBILITY WITH HYPERREF %% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Include experimental hyperref-compatibility code provided by Ross Moore, -% if the hyper option is requested. -\if@hyper@APA@comp% hyperref compatibility option is on - % - % accommodate both APA and other (e.g. hyperref) patchings of \bibcite - % - \def\bibcite@APA@other#1#2{% - \bibcite@other{#1}{#2}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname Y@#1\endcsname{\@year@#2}}% - \let\bibcite@APA\bibcite % record the APA-only definition of \bibcite - % - % check via \AtBeginDocument as to whether \bibcite has been changed; - % if so, then correct the patching when the .aux file is read. - % - \AtBeginDocument{% - \ifx\bibcite\bibcite@APA\else - \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\install@other@APA}% - \fi }% - % - \def\install@other@APA{% - \ifx\bibcite\bibcite@APA\else - \let\bibcite@other\bibcite - \let\bibcite\bibcite@APA@other - \fi \let\install@other@APA\relax }% - % - % This command should not be needed; it allows the patch to be - % forced at an earlier time, if desired. - % - \def\installhyperAPA{% - \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{\install@other@APA}% - {\AtBeginDocument{\install@other@APA}}% - }% -\fi + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{NAT@parse}{% + \def\NAT@parse{This is a fake natbib command to fool hyperref.}}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkstart}{% + \let\hyper@natlinkstart\@gobble}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkend}{% + \let\hyper@natlinkend\relax}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorstart}{% + \let\hyper@natanchorstart\@gobble}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorend}{% + \let\hyper@natanchorend\relax}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyperpage}{% + \def\hyperpage#1{#1}}{}% +} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% + % The next should always be true, but just to be sure... + \@ifpackageloaded{url}{% + % Is obeyspaces option requested? If not, then... + \ifx\@empty\Url@ObeySp\@empty + % remove spaces from hyperlinks. + \def\url@#1{\def\@tmp@arg{\string#1}% + \HyPsd@Subst{ }{}{\@tmp@arg}% + \hyper@linkurl{\Hurl{#1}}{\@tmp@arg}}% + \fi + }{}% + }{}} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BABEL %% +%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BACKREF %% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %% -%% COMMENTS FROM hyperref.dtx: -%% -%% Package |babel| redefines \cmd{\bibcite} with -%% macro \cmd{\bbl@cite@choice}. It needs to be overwritten -%% to avoid the warning ``Label(s) may have changed.''. -%% -%% END COMMENTS -%% -%% Here, I (EM) literally insert the code mentioned above. -%% Are the \begingroup and \endgroup necessary or even useful? -%% The hyperref-compatibility patch above does a similar thing with -%% \bibcite. -%% - -\let\Hy@bibcite\bibcite -\begingroup - \@ifundefined{bbl@cite@choice}{}{% - \g@addto@macro\bbl@cite@choice{% - \let\bibcite\Hy@bibcite +%% A bit of code that makes life a little easier +%% (adapted from amsrefs.dtx). +\def\back@cite{}% +\def\CurrentBib{}% +\def\PrintBackRefs{}% +\def\APACrestorebibitem{}% +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{% + % Make sure that \ifBR@verbose is defined. + \@ifundefined{ifBR@verbose}{% + \let\ifBR@verbose\iffalse + \let\fi\fi}{}% + % A backcite command that makes the code of other commands better + % readable. + \def\back@cite#1{% + \ifBR@verbose + \PackageInfo{backref}{back cite \string`#1\string'}% + \fi + \Hy@backout{#1\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + }%% + % Adaptation of the \bibitem command so that backref does not + % scan the whole entry. The placement of the backrefs is explicitly + % done through \PrintBackRefs. + \def\APACrestorebibitem{% + \def\BR@@lbibitem[##1]##2{% + \BRorg@bibitem[{##1}]{##2}% + \def\CurrentBib{##2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + }%% }% + % Printing the backrefs: revert to the standard backrefs macro. + \def\PrintBackRefs#1{\BR@backref{#1}}% + }{%%% + % backref not loaded. + \let\back@cite\@gobble + \let\PrintBackRefs\@gobble }% -\endgroup +} + +\def\BR@@lbibitem[#1]#2#3\par{% + \BRorg@bibitem[#1]{#2}#3% + \BR@backref{#2}% +}% + +\def\makehashother{\catcode`\#=12\relax}% +\def\makehashmacropar{\catcode`\#=6\relax}% -%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BACKREF %% +%% FOR USE WITH THE URL PACKAGE (AND HYPERREF) %% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -%% some code from backref.dtx, adapted by EM -%% \AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{% - \global\let\BRorg@citeapa\@@cite % EM - \global\let\@@cite\BR@citeapa % EM + \@ifpackageloaded{url}{% + % To circumvent an ``undefined'' error + \@ifundefined{Url@force@Tilde}{\def\Url@force@Tilde{\relax}}{}% + % + % The original dot. (Simply using `.' causes an infinite loop. + % This command is used below, so that encoding-issues can be resolved + % easier by redefining \Url@APACdot.) + \def\Url@APACdot{\mathchar"2E }% + \def\Url@APACcomma{\mathchar"2C }% + \def\Url@APACquestionmark{\mathchar"3F }% + \def\Url@APACexclamation{\mathchar"21 }% + \def\Url@APAChyphen{\mathchar"2D }% + \def\Url@APACunderscore{\_}% + % + % APA-definitions. + \def\APACurlBreaks{% + % Remove dot and slash from ordinary breaks. + \def\UrlBreaks{\do\@\do\\\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]\do\)\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#}% + % Add slash to big breaks, so that http:// is broken after the second + % slash instead of after the colon. + \def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\/\do\:\do@url@hyp}% + % These are the default ones. Repeat them to get a complete style and + % we don't have to rely on what is the default (which might change). + \def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}% + \def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\~\do\'\do\"}% + % Define a dot as an empty binary relation (after which a break may + % occur) followed by a dot-symbol (after which no break may occur). + % The Chicago Manual of Style requests the same treatment of + % a couple of other punctuation marks, different from url.sty's + % default behavior. + \def\UrlSpecials{% + \do\.{\mathbin{}\Url@APACdot }\do\,{\mathbin{}\Url@APACcomma }% + \do\-{\mathbin{}\Url@APAChyphen }% + \do\?{\mathbin{}\Url@APACquestionmark }% + \do\!{\mathbin{}\Url@APACexclamation }% + \do\_{\mathbin{}\Url@APACunderscore }% + \do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}% + \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tilde + }%% + % Change underscore for when a non-tt font is used. + \def\Url@OTnonTT{\do\<{\langle}\do\>{\mathbin{\rangle}}\do + \_{\mathbin{}\_}\do\|{\mid}\do\{{\lbrace}\do\}{\mathbin{\rbrace}}\do + \\{\mathbin{\backslash}}\UrlTildeSpecial} + + % Now define four APA url-styles, based on the standard styles in + % url.sty. + \def\url@APACttstyle{\def\UrlFont{\ttfamily}\APACurlBreaks }% + \def\url@APACrmstyle{\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}\APACurlBreaks }% + \def\url@APACsfstyle{\def\UrlFont{\sffamily}\APACurlBreaks }% + \def\url@APACsamestyle{\def\UrlFont{}\APACurlBreaks }% + % + % Use APACtt-style by default. + \urlstyle{APACtt}% }{}% } -\def\BR@citeapa<#1>[#2]#3{% % EM - \BRorg@citeapa<#1>[#2]{#3}% % EM - \ifBR@verbose - \PackageInfo{backref}{back cite \string`#3\string'}% EM - % Am I allowed to define an info message of another package? - % It seems strange. But it's also strange to change `backref' - % into `apacite', because backref does the backreferencing, - % and the command is merely an adaptation of the corresponding - % backref command. - \fi - \Hy@backout{#3}% + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{url}{% + \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}% + }{}% } -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% THE CITATION COMMANDS %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% First citation in multi-citation. \newif\if@F@cite\@F@citetrue -% Two flags to denote whether only author or year must be cited or both. \newif\if@A@cite\@A@citefalse \newif\if@Y@cite\@Y@citefalse - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \cite<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \fullcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \shortcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces (prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix) -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\cite{% @@ -949,13 +1287,6 @@ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \citeNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \fullciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \shortciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\citeNP{% @@ -989,9 +1320,6 @@ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% second layer of \cite command -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\@cite<#1>{% @@ -1014,13 +1342,6 @@ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \citeA<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \fullciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \shortciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces prefix Authors1 (Year1), ..., AuthorN (YearN, postfix) -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\citeA{% @@ -1048,16 +1369,13 @@ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% second layer of \citeA command -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\@citeA<#1>{% % % definition of some parameters % - \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis. \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation \def\@BBA{\BBAB}% % `and' between authors \def\@BBAY{ \BBOP}%% between author and year @@ -1075,13 +1393,6 @@ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \citeauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \fullciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \shortciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces prefix Authors1, ..., AuthorsN, postfix -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\citeauthor{% @@ -1108,10 +1419,31 @@ {\@citeauthor<>}% } +\def\citeauthorNP{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeauthorNP}% + {\@citeauthorNP<>}% +} + +\def\fullciteauthorA{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeauthorNP}% + {\@citeauthorNP<>}% +} + +\def\shortciteauthorA{% + \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions + \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% + \@ifnextchar<% %> + {\@citeauthorNP}% + {\@citeauthorNP<>}% +} + %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% second layer of \citeauthor command -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\@citeauthor<#1>{% @@ -1135,16 +1467,28 @@ {\@@cite<#1>[]}% } +\def\@citeauthorNP<#1>{% + % + % definition of some parameters + % + \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis + \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation + \def\@BBA{\BBAA}% % `and' between authors + \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year + \def\@BAY{}% % after year + \def\@BBY{}% % between years of multiple citations with same author + \def\@BBC{\BBC}% % between cites + \def\@BBN{\BBN}% % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2] + \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis + \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors + \@A@citetrue% % cite authors + \@Y@citefalse% % do not cite years + \@ifnextchar[% % ] + {\@@cite<#1>}% + {\@@cite<#1>[]}% +} + %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \citeyear<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces (prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix) -% -% \citeyearNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\citeyear{% @@ -1168,9 +1512,6 @@ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% second layer of \citeyear command -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\@citeyear<#1>{% @@ -1210,7 +1551,7 @@ %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%% Code to be executed if current author(s) equal previous -\def\@ifauthorsequalc@de{% +\def\@ifauthorsequalc@de#1{% \if@F@cite% \@F@citefalse% \else% @@ -1219,12 +1560,14 @@ \fi% \fi% \if@Y@cite% - {\csname Y@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}% + {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \hyper@natlinkend \fi% } %%% Code to be executed if current author(s) do not equal previous -\def\@ifauthorsunequalc@de{% +\def\@ifauthorsunequalc@de#1{% \if@F@cite% \@F@citefalse% \else% @@ -1236,34 +1579,35 @@ \edef\@cite@undefined{?}% \def\BBA{\@BBA}% \if@A@cite% - {\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}% + {\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \hyper@natlinkend \if@Y@cite% {\@BBAY}% \fi% \fi% \if@Y@cite% - {\csname Y@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}% + {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \hyper@natlinkend \fi% \let\BBA\relax% } \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3{% % - % write citation(s) to .aux file + % Write citation(s) to .aux file(s) % - \if@filesw{% - \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#3}}% - }% - \fi% + \nocite{#3}% % % the previous cite, for multiple citations with same author % \edef\@citeP{}% % - % open parenthesis and precitation - % - {\@BBOP}% - \ifx\@empty#1% + % open parenthesis and pre-note + % The \mbox is to avoid hyperref problems if a \citeA follows an \item. + \mbox{\@BBOP}% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty \else% {\ignorespaces #1\@BAP}% \fi% @@ -1271,15 +1615,22 @@ % loop over citation entries % \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{% + % Removes a possible space before the citation key, so that + % e.g. \cite{key1, key2} can be done. + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % For backref. + \back@cite{\@citeb}% % % check whether citation is defined % - \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}% - {\expandafter\def\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}% - \expandafter\def\csname Y@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}% - \@warning{Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage\space undefined}% + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\expandafter\def\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}% + \expandafter\def\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}% + % The following is now handled by \nocite + %\G@refundefinedtrue + %\@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% }%% - % if citation is defined: + % If citation is defined: % check whether flag is set that identifies that % this is not the first citation to the work % if flag is not set, it will be set to DUMMY @@ -1287,9 +1638,9 @@ % the full citation is used; else the short version % is used % - {\@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}% + {\@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% {\global\expandafter - \def\csname flag@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}% + \def\csname flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}% \def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##1}}% }% {\def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##2}}% @@ -1300,48 +1651,26 @@ % and a \@BBY (probably comma and space) is inserted between % the two years. % - % Code differs depending on whether hyperref-compatibility - % option is loaded. - \if@hyper@APA@comp - % hyperref-compatibility option on - % (code provided by Ross Moore) - \expandafter\def\expandafter\B@my@dummy - \expandafter{\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter - \ifx\expandafter\@citeP\B@my@dummy\relax% - \@ifauthorsequalc@de - \else% - \@ifauthorsunequalc@de - \fi% - % define previous citation-author as current - % - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@citeP - \expandafter{\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% - % + % The \protected@edef fixes the problem with authors with accents + % (e.g., J{\"{o}}reskog). Previous versions of apacite solved this + % less elegantly (accentfix option). This fix provided by Robert Schlicht. + % See also the new definition of \@citeP below. + \protected@edef\B@my@dummy{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy% + \@ifauthorsequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% \else% - % else: hyperref-compatibility option off - % (code dating from theapa.sty) - \@pre@accentfix% fix problems with cedilla-type accents - \edef\B@my@dummy{\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% - \@post@accentfix% return to old definitions - \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy% - \@ifauthorsequalc@de - \else% - \@ifauthorsunequalc@de - \fi% - % define previous citation-author as current - % - \@pre@accentfix% fix problems with cedilla-type accents - \edef\@citeP{\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% - \@post@accentfix% return to old definitions + \@ifauthorsunequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + \fi% + % define previous citation-author as current + % + \protected@edef\@citeP{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% % - \fi \let\BCA\relax% }%% % end loop over citation entries % add note [=#2] and closing parenthesis % - \ifx\@empty#2% + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty \else% {\@BBN #2}% \fi% @@ -1356,92 +1685,79 @@ } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \nocite{key} : entry in reference list, not in text -% -% This is a little different from \@@cite with -% \@A@citefalse and \@Y@citefalse -% because of the `*' variant (cite all entries in bibfile) -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\nocite#1{% - \@bsphack% - \if@filesw{% - \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#1}}}% - \fi% + % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite, + % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite. + \@bsphack + \ifx\@onlypreamble\document + % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations: \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% - \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}% - {\edef\B@my@dummy{*}% - \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy% - \else% - \@warning{Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage\space undefined}% - \fi% - }% - {}% Removed flag-setting: a no-cite is not a cite, - % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite. + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib + \if@filesw + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% + \fi + % + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{% + \edef\B@my@dummy{*}% + \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy + \else + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% + \fi + }{}% }% - \@esphack% + \else + % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work + % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested + % in ltbibl.dtx: + \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}}% + \fi + \@esphack + % + % For compatibility with multibib. + \@restore@auxhandle } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \nocitemeta{key} : entry in reference list, not in text, -% for entries that are used in a meta-analysis. -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\nocitemeta#1{% + \nocite{#1}% \@bsphack% - \if@filesw{% - \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#1}}}% - \fi% - % - \global\def\APAC@metaprenote{\APACmetaprenote}% + \expandafter\global\expandafter\def + \csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{% + \APACmetaprenote}% + % \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% - \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}% - {\edef\B@my@dummy{*}% - \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy% - \else% - \@warning{Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage\space undefined}% - \fi% - }% - { % Define meta-analysis flag for current item - % - \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}% - {\global\expandafter - \def\csname flagmeta@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}% - }% - {}% - }% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + % Define meta-analysis flag for current item + \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {\global\expandafter + \def\csname flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}% + }% + {}% }% \@esphack% } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \APACinsertmetastar{key}: insert an asterisk before the names in the -% reference list for entries that are used in a meta-analysis. -% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\APACinsertmetastar#1{% - \@bsphack% - \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% - \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}% - {}% skip - {{\APACmetastar}}% - }% - \@esphack% + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {}% skip + {{\APACmetastar}}% + }% } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% No labels in the bibliography. -% \def\@biblabel#1{} -% \def\st@rtbibsection{% \@bibnewpage% start a new page if desired \if@numberedbib% @@ -1457,7 +1773,6 @@ % \fi% }% -% \def\st@rtbibchapter{% % here no \@bibnewpage, because it is assumed that % the \chapter starts a new page @@ -1472,19 +1787,15 @@ % \fi% }% -% -% \def\thebibliography#1{% % % Start the bibliography section or chapter % \@ifundefined{chapter}% {\st@rtbibsection}% -% else: chapter is defined {\@ifundefined{@sectionbibtrue}% we have to guess {\@ifundefined{@mainmatterfalse}% check if mainmatter exists {\st@rtbibchapter}% -% else: mainmatter is defined {\if@mainmatter% \st@rtbibsection% typically, a chapter-specific bibliogr. \else% @@ -1504,47 +1815,335 @@ % \bibliographytypesize% e.g., to put the bibliography in \small type \bibliographyprenote% some explanatory note before the references - \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote} + % + \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% {}% skip - {\APAC@metaprenote} + {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% % \list{\relax}{\labelsep=0em% -% \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax \parsep=\bibparsep% \itemsep=\bibitemsep% \leftmargin=\bibleftmargin% \itemindent=\bibindent}% changed to cope with 4th ed. - \def\newblock{\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% + \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000 \sfcode`\.=1000\relax + % For compatibility with bibtopic. + \bt@beg@thb@hook + % To overrule backref. + \APACrestorebibitem } -\def\endthebibliography{\endlist\normalsize} -% -% natbib redefines \thebibliography, which interferes a little -% with our purposes. Therefore, add some patches. -% -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% - \let\@oldbibpreamble\bibpreamble - \def\bibpreamble{% This goes wrong if \bibpreamble is redefined - % later on, i.e., by the user, but I haven't thought - % of a better hack yet. - \@oldbibpreamble% - \bibliographytypesize% - \bibliographyprenote% - \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote} - {}% skip - {\APAC@metaprenote}% - }% - \let\@old@endthebibliography\endthebibliography - \def\endthebibliography{\@old@endthebibliography% - \normalsize} +\def\endthebibliography{% + % For compatibility with bibtopic. + \bt@end@thb@hook + % + \def\@noitemerr{% + \@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}% + }% + \endlist\normalsize +} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% REFERENCE LIST FORMATTING COMMANDS %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newcommand{\APACrefYear}[1]{% + % Should never be empty. + {\BBOP}{#1}{\BBCP}% +} +\newcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or January\or February\or March\or + April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or + November\or December\or Winter\or Spring\or Summer\or Fall\else + {#1}\fi} +\newcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + % year (+ addendum) + {\BBOP}{#1}% + % month + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% + \fi + % day + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip\ {#3}% + \fi + {\BBCP}% +} +\newcommand{\APACrefatitle}[2]{#2} +\newcommand{\APACrefbtitle}[2]{\Bem{#2}} +\newcommand{\APACrefaetitle}[2]{[#2]} +\newcommand{\APACrefbetitle}[2]{[#2]} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\let\@xp\expandafter +\newcommand{\PrintCardinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@cardinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +} +\def\print@cardinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??th% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +} +\newcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + th% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1th\or st\or nd\or rd\else th\fi + \fi +} +\def\keep@last@digit#1#2{% + \ifx\relax#2% + \@xp\@gobbletwo + \else + #1=#2\relax + \fi + \keep@last@digit#1% +} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newcommand{\APACjournalVolNumPages}[4]{% + % journal + \Bem{#1}% + % volume + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, \Bem{#2}% + \fi + % issue number + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip({#3})% + \fi + % pages + \ifx\@empty#4\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#4}% + \fi +} +\newcommand{\APACaddressPublisher}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + % publisher + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + {#2}% + \fi + % + \else + % address + {#1}% + % publisher + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip: {#2}% + \fi + % + \fi +} +\let\APACaddressInstitution\APACaddressPublisher +\newcommand{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + % Publisher. This cannot be empty, because it is equal to the author. + {\BAuthor{}}% + % + \else + % Address and publisher. These are not empty. + {#1\unskip: \BAuthor{}}% + % + \fi +} +\let\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth +\let\APAChowpublished\relax +\newenvironment{APACrefURL}[1][]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \BAvailFrom + \else + \BRetrieved{#1}% + \fi +}{} +\newenvironment{APACrefURLmsg}{% + \BMsgPostedTo +}{} +\newcommand{\APACorigED}[1]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else + % ``by E. D. Itor (Ed.)'' + \Bby\ {#1}, \BED{}% + \fi +} +\newcommand{\APACorigEDS}[1]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else + % ``by E. D. Itor \& A. N. Other (Eds.)'' + \Bby\ {#1}, \BEDS{}% + \fi +} +\newcommand{\APACrefnote}[1]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else + ({#1})% + \fi +} +\newcommand{\APACorigyearnote}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + % Original year empty: format note. + \APACrefnote{#2}% + \else + % Check for \bibnodate. I think the following command does not check + % whether #1 = `\bibnodate', but expands them, but that should + % also be OK and saves a lot of juggling with \expandafter commands. + \ifx\bibnodate#1\@empty + % Original year unknown: format (only) note. + \APACrefnote{#2}% + \else + % Original year has been given: ``Original work published''. + (\BOWP{} {#1}% + % Note + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip; {#2}% + \fi + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + % + \fi + \fi +} +\newcommand{\APACorigjournalnote}[6]{% + % "(Reprinted from " (note the space) + (\BREPR{} % + % Journal (should not be empty) + \Bem{#2}% + % Year + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#1}% + \fi + % Volume + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip, \Bem{#3}% + \fi + % Issue number + \ifx\@empty#4\@empty + \else + \unskip{[#4]}% + \fi + % Pages + \ifx\@empty#5\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#5}% + \fi + % Note + \ifx\@empty#6\@empty + \else + \unskip; {#6}% + \fi + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + % +} +\def\@connect@with@commas#1{% + % Commas should only be inserted if both sides are nonempty. + \def\@comma@space{\unskip, }% + \let\@connect@string\relax + % Loop over elements. + \@for\@element@:=#1\do{% + \ifx\@empty\@element@% + \else + % Not empty: insert connect string (nothing for the first + % nonempty element, a comma and space afterwards). + \@connect@string\@element@% + \let\@connect@string\@comma@space + \fi }% - {}% -}% - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% EOF apacite.sty -% + \let\@connect@string\@undefined + \let\@comma@space\@undefined +} +\newcommand{\APACorigbooknote}[9]{% + % + % "(Reprinted from " (note the space) + (\BREPR{} % + % + % Title, edition, volume, pages, editor, year, address: publisher + % These should not all be empty, but this is not checked here + % (because it's done in the .bst file). + \@connect@with@commas{% + {#3},{#4},{#5},{#6},{#2},{#1},{\APACaddressPublisher{#7}{#8}}% + }%% + % + % Add optional note. + \ifx\@empty#9\@empty + \else + ; #9% + \fi + % + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + % +} +\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTR}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + % (Technical Report No.\ <no>) + {(#2)}% + \fi + \else + % (2nd ed., Vol.~1 + ({#1}% + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + % ; Technical Report No.\ <no> + \unskip; {#2}% + \fi + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + \fi +} +\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}[3]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + % (pp. 10--30) + {(#3)}% + \fi + \else + % (Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30) + (\@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}})% + \fi + \else + % (2nd ed., Vol.~1 + ({#1}% + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + % ; pp. 10--30 + \unskip; {#3}% + \fi + \else + % ; Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30 + \unskip; \@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}}% + \fi + % Final parenthesis. + )%% + \fi +} +%% +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `apacite.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/dutch.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/dutch.apc index 1624229e010..a5bbe586658 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/dutch.apc +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/dutch.apc @@ -1,188 +1,166 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `dutch.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{dutch.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% dutch.apc - dutch translation of apacite elements
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-%%
-%% For compiling the translated elements, the following sources were
-%% used:
-%%
-%% (1) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "De Psycholoog"
-%% (indicated below as "[DP]"):
-%%
-%% Uitgebreide richtlijnen voor het aanleveren van kopij [Extensive
-%% guidelines for the submission of manuscripts]. (2001).
-%% Retreived January 3, 2005, from
-%% http://upload.lectric.nl/data/nip7/Richtlijnen%20voor%20auteurs.pdf
-%%
-%% (2) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "Nederlands Tijdschrift
-%% voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden"
-%% (indicated below as "[NTPG]"):
-%%
-%% Aanwijzingen voor auteurs [Directions for authors]. (2004).
-%% Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden,
-%% 59, inside back cover.
-%%
-%% (3) Instructions (pp. 404-410) from the following well-known book
-%% (indicated below as "[SW]"):
-%%
-%% Renkema, J. (2002). Schrijfwijzer [Writing indicator] (4th ed.).
-%% Den Haag, The Netherlands: Sdu.
-%%
-%% These three all state that their rules are adapted from the APA manual.
-%% For translations that are not explicitly mentioned in these sources,
-%% I used the extensive reference list from the following article:
-%%
-%% (4) Schrooten, M. G. S., & Smulders, F. T. Y. (2004). Een experimentele
-%% kijk op angst:
-%% [Anxiety from an experimental point of view: Attention and
-%% automaticity in the processing of threatening stimuli].
-%% Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden,
-%% 59, 135-149.
-%%
-%% Finally, I consulted the following dictionary:
-%%
-%% (5) Groot woordenboek Engels-Nederlands [Large dictionary English-Dutch]
-%% (2nd ed.). (1989). Utrecht, The Netherlands: Van Dale.
-%%
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
-%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
-\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Bericht}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramma}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Handleiding van computerprogramma}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramma en handleiding}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computersoftware}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Handleiding van computersoftware}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computersoftware en handleiding}
-\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmeertaal}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Other labels
-\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{z.~j.{}} % [SW] (``zonder jaartal'')
-\renewcommand{\BBAB}{en}
-
-\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.{}} % [DP]
-\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.{}} % [DP]
-%% NTPG requires the following, SW allows both variants:
-%\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{e.~a.{}} % [NTPG]
-%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{e.~a.{}} % [NTPG]
-
-\renewcommand{\BIP}{te verschijnen} % [SW]
-\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{hfdst.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{hfdst.{}}
-
-%% Editor(s) is almost impossible to get right in Dutch, because SW
-%% and DP require the translation of ``editor(s)'' to be dependent on
-%% the language in which the referenced work is written:
-%% ``Red.'' (or ``red.'') for referenced works in Dutch
-%% ``Ed.''/``Eds.'' for referenced works in English
-%% ``Hrsg.'' for referenced works in German
-%% ``edt.'' for referenced works in French
-%% NTPG does not give an explicit rule for this, but only an example
-%% in which an English work is referenced and ``Ed.'' is used.
-%%
-%% For the moment, I think it makes most sense to give the Dutch versions here:
-\renewcommand{\BED}{red.{}} % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
-\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.{}} % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
-
-%% Translators should not be mentioned according to DP.
-%% NTPG does not explain how to format this.
-%% SW gives a completely different format: ``Vertaald door: ''
-%% followed by the name of the translator, or if the translator is unknown:
-%% ``Vertaling van: '' followed by the original title.
-%% This is much too complicated, so I'll choose a simple alternative:
-\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{vert.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{vert.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{vert.{}}
-
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{voorz.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{voorz.{}}
-
-\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Dl.{}} % [SW]. NTPG gives an example with
- % ``Vol.'' but this is presumably
- % dependent on the language of the
- % referenced work as well.
-\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Dl.{}} % [SW]
-
-\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.{}} % [SW]
-\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.{}} % [SW]
-
-\renewcommand{\BEd}{dr.{}} % [SW]
-\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.{}} % [SW]. [DP] gives ``p.'', [NTPG] both.
-\renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport} % Literally translating ``Tech.'' as
- % ``Technisch'' does not make sense.
-\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}
- % Schrooten & Smulders use ``dissertatie''
-\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}
- % There is no Dutch ``DAI'' and the
- % distinction between ``published'' and
- % ``unpublished'' would generally be
- % interpreted as ``published as a book
- % with an official publisher'' vs.
- % ``privately published''. All PhD theses
- % in the Netherlands are required to be
- % published with an ISBN number.
- % Therefore, it is better in my view to
- % keep the same term here.
-\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}%
-\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% Again, there is no official forum
- % to publish abstracts of master's theses,
- % but, unblike PhD theses, they are
- % (generally) unpublished.
- % The term used here refers to the Dutch
- % educational system until ca. 2003.
- % Since ca. 2004, universities are
- % gradually converting to a bachelor -
- % master system, so it's likely that
- % this term will have to be adapted
- % in the near future.
-\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Oorspronkelijke editie}% [DP]. They also require the
- % original title after the originalyear.
-\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Overgenomen uit}
-
-\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG]
-\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG]
- % SW gives the following general names:
- % ``Literatuuropgave'' [literally approx. ``Literature specification'']
- % ``Literatuurlijst'' [literally ``Literature list'']
- % For more specific applications, SW gives the following names:
- % ``Bibliografie'' [``Bibliography'', ``a more or less complete survey
- % of publications in a certain area'']
- % ``Geraadpleegde literatuur'' [``Consulted literature'']
- % ``Aangehaalde literatuur'' [``Referenced literature'']
-
-\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
- Met een asterisk gemarkeerde referenties betreffen studies die in de
- meta-analyse zijn gebruikt.}
-
-\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Auteursindex}
-
-\newcommand{\BCBT}{} % [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma.
-\newcommand{\BCBL}{} % [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma.
-
+%% +%% This is file `dutch.apc', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `dutch') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\ProvidesFile{dutch.apc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] + +%% +%% dutch.apc - dutch translation of apacite elements +%% Written by Erik Meijer +%% +%% For compiling the translated elements, the following sources were +%% used: +%% +%% (1) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "De Psycholoog" +%% (indicated below as "[DP]"): +%% +%% Uitgebreide richtlijnen voor het aanleveren van kopij [Extensive +%% guidelines for the submission of manuscripts]. (2001). +%% Retreived January 3, 2005, from +%% http://upload.lectric.nl/data/nip7/Richtlijnen%20voor%20auteurs.pdf +%% +%% (2) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "Nederlands Tijdschrift +%% voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden" +%% (indicated below as "[NTPG]"): +%% +%% Aanwijzingen voor auteurs [Directions for authors]. (2004). +%% Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden, +%% 59, inside back cover. +%% +%% (3) Instructions (pp. 404-410) from the following well-known book +%% (indicated below as "[SW]"): +%% +%% Renkema, J. (2002). Schrijfwijzer [Writing indicator] (4th ed.). +%% Den Haag, The Netherlands: Sdu. +%% +%% These three all state that their rules are adapted from the APA manual. +%% For translations that are not explicitly mentioned in these sources, +%% I used the extensive reference list from the following article: +%% +%% (4) Schrooten, M. G. S., & Smulders, F. T. Y. (2004). Een experimentele +%% kijk op angst: Aandacht en automatisme in de verwerking van +%% bedreigende stimuli +%% [Anxiety from an experimental point of view: Attention and +%% automaticity in the processing of threatening stimuli]. +%% Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden, +%% 59, 135-149. +%% +%% Finally, I consulted the following dictionary: +%% +%% (5) Groot woordenboek Engels-Nederlands [Large dictionary English-Dutch] +%% (2nd ed.). (1989). Utrecht, The Netherlands: Van Dale. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Bericht}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramma}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Handleiding van computerprogramma}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramma en handleiding}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computersoftware}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Handleiding van computersoftware}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computersoftware en handleiding}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmeertaal}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{z.~j.\hbox{}}% [SW] (``zonder jaartal'') +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{en}% +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP] +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP] +%% NTPG requires the following, SW allows both variants: +\renewcommand{\BIP}{te verschijnen}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% +\renewcommand{\Bby}{door}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% +%% Editor(s) is almost impossible to get right in Dutch, because SW +%% and DP require the translation of ``editor(s)'' to be dependent on +%% the language in which the referenced work is written: +%% ``Red.'' (or ``red.'') for referenced works in Dutch +%% ``Ed.''/``Eds.'' for referenced works in English +%% ``Hrsg.'' for referenced works in German +%% ``edt.'' for referenced works in French +%% NTPG does not give an explicit rule for this, but only an example +%% in which an English work is referenced and ``Ed.'' is used. +%% +%% For the moment, I think it makes most sense to give the Dutch versions here: +\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'') +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}% % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'') +%% Translators should not be mentioned according to DP. +%% NTPG does not explain how to format this. +%% SW gives a completely different format: ``Vertaald door: '' +%% followed by the name of the translator, or if the translator is unknown: +%% ``Vertaling van: '' followed by the original title. +%% This is much too complicated, so I'll choose a simple alternative: +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{vert.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{vert.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{vert.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{voorz.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{voorz.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Dl.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Dl.\hbox{}}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BEd}{dr.\hbox{}}% % [SW] +\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% % [SW]. [DP] gives ``p.'', [NTPG] both. +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport}% +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Auteur}% +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Oorspronkelijke editie}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Overgenomen uit}% +\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG] +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG] +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Met een asterisk gemarkeerde referenties betreffen studies die in de + meta-analyse zijn gebruikt.}% +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Auteursindex}% +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma. +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma. +%% + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dutch.apc'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/english.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/english.apc index b173155000a..d9349ddb47f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/english.apc +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/english.apc @@ -1,107 +1,116 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `english.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{english.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% english.apc - dummy english version of apacite elements
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-
-%% NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE!
-%% If you use this as a template for other languages,
-%% don't forget to uncomment the commands!
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
-%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
-%\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}
-%\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Other labels
-%\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.{}} % ``no date''
-%\renewcommand{\BBAB}{and} % between authors in text
-%\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a
- % dot to suppress an additional one
- % in the reference list
-%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.{}}% ``others'', the argument contains
- % a dot to suppress an additional one
- % in the reference list. The difference
- % with \BOthers is that, if another
- % string is used to define \BOthers,
- % this one should always finish with a
- % period and the previous one not
- % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
- % ``others'' is used).
-%\renewcommand{\BIP}{in press} % used as year for in-press citations
-%\renewcommand{\BIn}{In} % for ``In '' editor...
-%\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.{}} % chapter
-%\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.{}} % chapters
-%\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.{}} % editor
-%\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.{}} % editors
-%\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.{}} % translator
-%\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.{}} % translators
-%\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.{}} % translation, for the year field
-%\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair} % chair of symposium
-%\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs} % chairs
-%\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.{}} % volume
-%\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.{}} % volumes
-%\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.{}} % number
-%\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.{}} % numbers
-%\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.{}} % edition
-%\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.{}} % page
-%\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.{}} % pages
-%\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.{}} % (default) technical report type name
-%\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}
- % (default) PhD thesis type name
-%\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}
- % (default) unpublished PhD thesis
- % type name
-%\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}% (default) master's thesis type name
-%\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}%
- % (default) unpublished
- % master's thesis type name
-%\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}
-%\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
-%\renewcommand{\refname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
-%\renewcommand{\bibname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list
-% when a meta-analysis is reported.
-%
-%\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
-% References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
-% included in the meta-analysis.}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
-%\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}
+%% +%% This is file `english.apc', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `english') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\ProvidesFile{english.apc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] + +%% +%% english.apc - english version of apacite elements +%% Written by Erik Meijer +%% Changes since the [2005/06/01] version: +%% - Uncommented all the \renewcommand's, so that the file can be +%% \input to override previous definitions. +%% - Replaced `.{}' by `.\hbox{}', with the same goal (but now it works) +%% of tricking TeX to make sure the abbreviation period is not +%% interpreted as a sentence-ending period. +%% - Inserted many percent signs to make sure no undesired space is +%% put into the document when this file is read. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}% % ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{and}% % between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{in press}% % used as year for in-press citations +\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % for ``In '' editor... +\renewcommand{\Bby}{by}% % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints) +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapters +\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}% % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}% % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}}% % translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}}% % translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}% % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}% % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}% % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}% % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}}% % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}}% % numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}% % edition +\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% % pages +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}}% % (default) technical report type name +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}% +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}% (default) master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}% Used if publisher = author +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List +\renewcommand{\refname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + References marked with an asterisk indicate studies + included in the meta-analysis.}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}% +%% + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `english.apc'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/finnish.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/finnish.apc new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..14da9396c61 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/finnish.apc @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ +%% +%% This is file `finnish.apc', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `finnish') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\ProvidesFile{finnish.apc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] + +%% +%% finnish.apc - finnish version of apacite elements +%% +%% Reference: Appendix E from book +%% +%% -------------------------------------------------------------------- +%% Kansallinen luetteloinnin ohjausryhm\"a. (2006). Monografioiden +%% kuvailu, Suomalaiset luettelointis\"a\"ann\"ot. Helsinki: BTJ +%% Kirjastopalvelu. +%% -------------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +%% Written by Kari Pyykk\"o +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Sanoma}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Tietokoneohjelma}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Tietokoneohjelman k\"asikirja}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Tietokoneohjelma ja k\"asikirja}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Ohjelmisto}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Ohjelmiston k\"asikirja}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Ohjelmisto ja k\"asikirja}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Ohjelmointikieli}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.a.\hbox{}}% % ``no date'', ``sine anno'' +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{ja}% % between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains a + % dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% + % ``others'', the argument contains + % a dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list. The difference + % with \BOthers is that, if another + % string is used to define \BOthers, + % this one should always finish with a + % period and the previous one not + % necessarily (e.g., if explicit + % ``others'' is used). +\renewcommand{\BIP}{painossa}% % used as year for in-press citations +\renewcommand{\BIn}{Teoksessa}% % for ``In '' editor... +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{luku{}}% % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{luvut{}}% % chapters +\renewcommand{\BED}{toim.\hbox{}}% % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{toim.\hbox{}}% % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{k\"a\"an.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{pj.\hbox{}}% % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{pj.\hbox{}}% % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{osa}% % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{osat}% % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nro}% % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nro}% % numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{p.\hbox{}}% % edition +\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}% % pages +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tekn.\ rap.\hbox{}}% (default) technical report type name +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{V\"ait\"oskirja}% (default) PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Julkaisematon v\"ait\"oskirja}% + % (default) unpublished PhD thesis + % type name +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Pro gradu -tutkielma}% + % (default) master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Julkaisematon pro gradu -tutkielma}% + % (default) unpublished + % master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Alkuaan julk.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Uudelleen julk.\hbox{}}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List +\renewcommand{\refname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + \refname merkitty t\"ahtimerkeill\"a osoittaen opintojen + sis\"altymist\"a meta-analyysiin.}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Tekij\"ahakemisto}% +%% + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `finnish.apc'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/german.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/german.apc index 9eb2ae01041..8e8f1c16520 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/german.apc +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/german.apc @@ -1,142 +1,117 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `german.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{german.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% german.apc - Deutsche Uebersetzung der Apacite-Elemente
-%% Written by Andreas Poege <poge@uni-muenster.de>
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Deutsche Anpassung der Interpunktion und Formatierung
-%\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape} % Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \cite usw, \citeA usw
- % \citeNP)
-%\renewcommand{\BAastyle}{\scshape} % Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \citeautor usw.
-%\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(} % Einleitende Klammer (default "(")
-%\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)} % Abschliessende Klammer (default ")")
-%\renewcommand{\BAP}{} % Zeichen zw. Prefix und Zitat (default Leerzeichen)
-%\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&} % Zwischen Autoren in Klammern (default "\&")
-\renewcommand{\BBAB}{und} % Zwischen Autoren im Text
-\renewcommand{\BBAY}{ } % Zwischen Autoren und Jahr(en) (default ",")
-%\renewcommand{\BBC}{;{}} % Zwischen Autoren (mehrere Zitate) (default ";")
-%\renewcommand{\BBN}{,{}} % Zwischen Zitat und Postfix (default ",")
-%\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{} % Einleitung v. Titel v. Artikel (default "")
-%\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{} % Abschluss v. Titel. von Artikel (default "")
-\renewcommand{\BCBT}{} % Zwischen 2 Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
-\renewcommand{\BCBL}{} % Zwischen 3 o. mehr Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
-%\renewcommand{\BAnd}{} % Zwischen Hg. und Uebers., falls gleich (default "\&")
-%\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}}}
- % Formatierung des Zusatzes bei Werken vom selben Autor aus
- % einem Jahr (default "\alph{BibCnt}")
-%\renewcommand{\APACiteatitle}{} % Zitation eines Titels (Artikel o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg.
- % (default in Anfόhrungszeichen)
-%\renewcommand{\APACitebtitle}{} % Zitation eines Titels (Buch o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg.
- % (default ist \emph)
-%\renewcommand{\APACmetastar}{} % Auszeichnungg eines Werkes im Lit.verz. wenn in Metaanalyse
- % (default "*")
-%\renewcommand{\bibnewpage}{\newpage} % Verhalten von "\bibnewpage" (default "\clearpage")
-%\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, } % Zwischen Jahren, wenn ein Author und mehrere Jahre (
- % NEU, default "\BBAY")
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Formatierung des Literaturverzeichnisses
-%\renewcommand{\bibliographytypesize}{\footnotesize}
- % Schriftgrφίe Literaturverz. (default "\normalsize")
-%\setlength{\bibleftmargin}{2.5em} % Einzug beim Lit.verz. 2. Zeile (default "2.5em")
-%\setlength{\bibindent}{-\bibleftmargin} % Einzug beim Lit.verz. 1. Zeile (default "-\bibleftmargin")
-%\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip} % vert. Abstand zwischen Eintrδgen im Lit.verz. (default "0pt")
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Befehle fόr die speziellen @misc-Eintrδge.
-%%% Diese Befehle werden von apacite.bst berόcksichtigt.
-\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg.} % Fόr misc-Literaturtyp bei type, Newsgroup-, Internet-Messages
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramm}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Programm-Handbuch}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramm und Handbuch}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Software-Handbuch}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Software und Handbuch}
-\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmiersprache}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Weitere Labels
-%\renewcommand{\bibnotype}{ } % Bei Techreport, falls type-Ang. unterdrόckt werden soll (default " ")
-\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.{}} % "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet
- % einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im
- % Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken
-\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.{}} % "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet
- % einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im
- % Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken
- % The difference
- % with \BOthers is that, if another
- % string is used to define \BOthers,
- % this one should always finish with a
- % period and the previous one not
- % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
- % ``others'' is used).
-\renewcommand{\BIP}{in Druck} % Jahresangabe bei im Druck bef. Werken
-\renewcommand{\BIn}{In} % fuer "`In"' Herausgeber...
-\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{Kap.{}} % Kapitel
-\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{Kap.{}} % Kapitel
-\renewcommand{\BED}{Hg.{}} % Herausgeber(in)
-\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Hg.{}} % Herausgeber(innen)
-\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"Ubers.{}} % Uebersetzer(in)
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"Ubers.{}} % Uebersetzer(innen)
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"Ubers.{}} % Uebersetzung (bei der Jahresangabe)
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair} % Chair (bei Konferenzen)
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs} % Chairs (bei Konferenzen)
-\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Bd.{}} % Band
-\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Bde.{}} % Baende
-\renewcommand{\BNUM}{Nr.{}} % Nummer
-\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nr.{}} % Nummern
-\renewcommand{\BEd}{Aufl.{}} % Auflage
-\renewcommand{\BPG}{S.{}} % Seite
-\renewcommand{\BPGS}{S.{}} % Seiten
-\renewcommand{\BTR}{Bericht} % (default) Bezeichnung fuer "`technical report"'
-\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Dissertation} % (default) Bezeichnung fuer Dissertation
-\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unver\"offentlichte Dissertation}
- % (default) Bezeichnung fuer unveroeffentlichte Dissertation
-\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Diplomarbeit} % (default) Bezeichnung fόr Abschlussarbeit
-\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unver\"offentlichte Diplomarbeit}
- % (default) Bezeichnung fόr unveroeffentlichte Abschlussarbeit
-\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Originalausgabe} % Originalausgabe
-\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Nachdruck von} % Nachdruck von
-\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{o.\,J.{}} % "`ohne Jahresangabe"'
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Literaturverzeichnisses
-\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatur} % Bezeichnung fόr das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Section
-\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literaturverzeichnis}
- % Bezeichnung fόr das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Chapter
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Kommando zwischen "Literaturverzeichnis" und den Eintraegen direkt nach \bibliographytypesize
-%\renewcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{} % default nichts
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Bemerkung vor Literaturangeaben, falls eine Metaanalyse angegeben wurde
-%
-\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{Literaturangaben mit Stern kennzeichnen Studien der Metaanalyse.}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Autorenverzeichnisses
-\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Autorenregister}
+%% +%% This is file `german.apc', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `german') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\ProvidesFile{german.apc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] + +%% +%% german.apc - Deutsche Uebersetzung der Apacite-Elemente +%% Written by Andreas Poege. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Deutsche Anpassung der Interpunktion und Formatierung + % \citeNP) +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{und}% % Zwischen Autoren im Text +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% % Zwischen Autoren und Jahr(en) (default ",") +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% % Zwischen 2 Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",") +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% % Zwischen 3 o. mehr Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",") +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Formatierung des Literaturverzeichnisses +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Befehle fόr die speziellen @misc-Eintrδge. +%%% Diese Befehle werden von apacite.bst berόcksichtigt. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg.\hbox{}}% Fόr misc-Literaturtyp bei type, Newsgroup-, Internet-Messages +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramm}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Programm-Handbuch}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramm und Handbuch}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Software-Handbuch}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Software und Handbuch}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmiersprache}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Weitere Labels +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{in Druck}% % Jahresangabe bei im Druck bef. Werken +\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % fuer "`In"' Herausgeber... +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel +\renewcommand{\BED}{Hg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(in) +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Hg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(innen) +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}%% Uebersetzer(in) +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzer(innen) +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzung (bei der Jahresangabe) +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}% % Chair (bei Konferenzen) +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}% % Chairs (bei Konferenzen) +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Bd.\hbox{}}% % Band +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Bde.\hbox{}}% % Baende +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{Nr.\hbox{}}% % Nummer +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nr.\hbox{}}% % Nummern +\renewcommand{\BEd}{Aufl.\hbox{}}% % Auflage +\renewcommand{\BPG}{S.\hbox{}}% % Seite +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{S.\hbox{}}% % Seiten +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Bericht}% % (default) Bezeichnung fuer "`technical report"' +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Dissertation}% % (default) Bezeichnung fuer Dissertation +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unver\"offentlichte Dissertation}% +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Diplomarbeit}% +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unver\"offentlichte Diplomarbeit}% +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Originalausgabe}% % Originalausgabe +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Nachdruck von}% % Nachdruck von +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{o.\,J.\hbox{}}% "`ohne Jahresangabe"' +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Literaturverzeichnisses +\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatur}% +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literaturverzeichnis}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Kommando zwischen "Literaturverzeichnis" und den Eintraegen direkt +%%% nach \bibliographytypesize +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Bemerkung vor Literaturangeaben, falls eine Metaanalyse angegeben wurde +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{Literaturangaben mit Stern kennzeichnen + Studien der Metaanalyse.}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Autorenverzeichnisses +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Autorenregister}% +%% + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `german.apc'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/greek.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/greek.apc index ddd2e2edcca..f7a5f4e1349 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/greek.apc +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/greek.apc @@ -1,109 +1,106 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `greek.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{greek.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% greek.apc - Greek version of apacite elements
-%% Original (English) written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-%% Greek translations by Athanassios Protopapas <protopap@ilsp.gr>
-%% and Ioannis Dimakos <idimakos@upatras.gr>
-
-%% NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE!
-%% The Greek strings are in ISO-8859-7 encoding.
-\RequirePackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
-%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
-\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Μήνυμα}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Λογισμικό}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Εγχειρίδιο λογισμικού}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Λογισμικό και εγχειρίδιο}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Λογισμικό}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Εγχειρίδιο λογισμικού}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Λογισμικό και εγχειρίδιο}
-\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Γλώσσα προγραμματισμού}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Other labels
-\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{χωρίς ημερομηνία} % ``no date''
-\renewcommand{\BBAB}{και} % between authors in text
-\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{κ.\ συν.{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a
- % dot to suppress an additional one
- % in the reference list
-\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{κ.\ συν.{}}% ``others'', the argument contains
- % a dot to suppress an additional one
- % in the reference list. The difference
- % with \BOthers is that, if another
- % string is used to define \BOthers,
- % this one should always finish with a
- % period and the previous one not
- % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
- % ``others'' is used).
-\renewcommand{\BIP}{υπό έκδοση} % used as year for in-press citations
-\renewcommand{\BIn}{Στο} % for ``In '' editor...
-\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{κεφ.{}} % chapter
-\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{κεφ.{}} % chapters
-\renewcommand{\BED}{Επιμ.{}} % editor
-\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Επιμ.{}} % editors
-\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Μτφ.{}} % translator
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Μτφ.{}} % translators
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{μτφ.{}} % translation, for the year field
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Πρόεδρος} % chair of symposium
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Πρόεδροι} % chairs
-\renewcommand{\BVOL}{τ.{}} % volume
-\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{τ.{}} % volumes
-\renewcommand{\BNUM}{αρ.{}} % number
-\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{αρ.{}} % numbers
-\renewcommand{\BEd}{έκδ.{}} % edition
-\renewcommand{\BPG}{σελ.{}} % page
-\renewcommand{\BPGS}{σελ.{}} % pages
-\renewcommand{\BTR}{Τεχ.\ έκθ.{}} % (default) technical report type name
-\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Διδακτορική διατριβή}
- % (default) PhD thesis type name
-\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Αδημοσίευτη διδακτορική διατριβή}
- % (default) unpublished PhD thesis
- % type name
-\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Μεταπτυχιακή διπλωματική εργασία}% (default) master's thesis type name
-\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Αδημοσίευτη μεταπτυχιακή διπλωματική εργασία}%
- % (default) unpublished
- % master's thesis type name
-\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Πρώτη έκδοση πρωτοτύπου}
-\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Ανατύπωση από}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
-\renewcommand{\refname}{Βιβλιογραφία}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
-\renewcommand{\bibname}{Βιβλιογραφία}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list
-% when a meta-analysis is reported.
-%
-%\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
-% References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
-% included in the meta-analysis.}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
-\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Ευρετήριο συγγραφέων}
+%% +%% This is file `greek.apc', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `greek') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\ProvidesFile{greek.apc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] + +%% +%% greek.apc - Greek version of apacite elements +%% Greek translations by Athanassios Protopapas and Ioannis Dimakos +%% NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! +%% The Greek strings are in ISO-8859-7 encoding. +\RequirePackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Μήνυμα}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Λογισμικό}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Εγχειρίδιο λογισμικού}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Λογισμικό και εγχειρίδιο}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Λογισμικό}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Εγχειρίδιο λογισμικού}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Λογισμικό και εγχειρίδιο}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Γλώσσα προγραμματισμού}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{χωρίς ημερομηνία}% ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{και}% % between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{κ.\ συν.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{κ.\ συν.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{υπό έκδοση}% % used as year for in-press citations +\renewcommand{\BIn}{Στο}% % for ``In '' editor... +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{κεφ.\hbox{}}% % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{κεφ.\hbox{}}% % chapters +\renewcommand{\BED}{Επιμ.\hbox{}}% % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Επιμ.\hbox{}}% % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Μτφ.\hbox{}}% % translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Μτφ.\hbox{}}% % translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{μτφ.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Πρόεδρος}% % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Πρόεδροι}% % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{τ.\hbox{}}% % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{τ.\hbox{}}% % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{αρ.\hbox{}}% % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{αρ.\hbox{}}% % numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{έκδ.\hbox{}}% % edition +\renewcommand{\BPG}{σελ.\hbox{}}% % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{σελ.\hbox{}}% % pages +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Τεχ.\ έκθ.\hbox{}}% % (default) technical report type name +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Διδακτορική διατριβή}% (default) PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Αδημοσίευτη διδακτορική διατριβή}% +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Μεταπτυχιακή διπλωματική εργασία}% +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Αδημοσίευτη μεταπτυχιακή διπλωματική εργασία}% +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Πρώτη έκδοση πρωτοτύπου}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Ανατύπωση από}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List +\renewcommand{\refname}{Βιβλιογραφία}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Βιβλιογραφία}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Ευρετήριο συγγραφέων}% +%% + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `greek.apc'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/ngerman.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/ngerman.apc index 06ddc0a3827..0a0bbb786c3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/ngerman.apc +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/ngerman.apc @@ -1,33 +1,56 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `ngerman.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-%% ngerman.apc - german translation of apacite elements (new orthography)
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>, based on instructions of
-%% Andreas Poege.
-
-\ProvidesFile{ngerman.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% According to Andreas Poege, his file german.apc can also be used
-%% for the new orthography, so I'll just do this:
-
-\input{german.apc}
+%% +%% This is file `ngerman.apc', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `ngerman') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\ProvidesFile{ngerman.apc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] + +%% +%% ngerman.apc - german translation of apacite elements (new orthography) +%% Written by Erik Meijer, based on instructions of Andreas Poege. +%% According to Andreas Poege, his file german.apc can also be used +%% for the new orthography, so I'll just do this: +\input{german.apc}% +%% + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `ngerman.apc'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/norsk.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/norsk.apc new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..398cd6c9981 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/norsk.apc @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +%% +%% This is file `norsk.apc', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `norsk') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\ProvidesFile{norsk.apc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] + +%% +%% norsk.apc - Norwegian Bokmal & Nynorsk versions of apacite elements. +%% Version 1.0. +%% Written by Karl Ove Hufthammer. +%% +%% Note: To be in line with Norwegian rules of punctuation +%% a comma is never used before '&' or 'and', and there +%% is no space between initials. The macro for these +%% modifications can be found at the end of this file. +%% Remove them to use a more 'APA-like' style. +%% +%% There are no official Norwegian translations of APA. +%% Some ideas for this translation have been taken from the following sources: +%% +%% http://www.ub.uib.no/felles/IK/APA.pdf +%% http://www.uio.no/studier/emner/medisin/isv/SYKVIT4400/v07/REV_normer_skriftl_arb.pdf + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{innlegg} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{dataprogram} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramh\aa{}ndbok} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukerh\aa{}ndbok} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{programvare} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvareh\aa{}ndbok} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukerh\aa{}ndbok} +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringssprΓ₯k} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.d.\hbox{}} % ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{og} % between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a + % dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains + % a dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list. The difference + % with \BOthers is that, if another + % string is used to define \BOthers, + % this one should always finish with a + % period and the previous one not + % necessarily (e.g., if explicit + % ``others'' is used). +\renewcommand{\BIP}{under publisering} % used as year for in-press citations +\renewcommand{\BIn}{I} % for ``In '' editor... +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}} % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}} % chapters +\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}} % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}} % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{oms.\hbox{}} % translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{oms.\hbox{}} % translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{oms.\hbox{}} % translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrer} % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrere} % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}} % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}} % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}} % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}} % numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{utg.\hbox{}} % edition +\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}} % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}} % pages +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Teknisk rapport} % (default) technical report type name +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Akademisk avhandling} + % (default) PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Upublisert akademisk avhandling} + % (default) unpublished PhD thesis + % type name +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppgave}% (default) master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppgave}% + % (default) unpublished + % master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publisert} +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fra} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List +\renewcommand{\refname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% +Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfatterregister} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{} % No comma before & when we have two authors. +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{} % No comma before & when we have three or more authors. +\renewcommand{\BPBI}{.} % Period between initials. No space. + +\edef\APACnynorsk{\string nynorsk} +\ifx\languagename\APACnynorsk + \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramhandbok} + \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukarhandbok} + \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvarehandbok} + \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukarhandbok} + \renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrar} % chair of symposium + \renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrarar} % chairs + \renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppg\aa{}ve}% (default) master's thesis type name + \renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppg\aa{}ve}% + \renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fr\aa{}} + \renewcommand{\refname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. + \renewcommand{\bibname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. + \renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Referansar merkte med ei stjerne viser til studiar som er med i metaanalysen.} + \renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfattarregister} +\fi +\let\APACnynorsk\undefined +%% + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `norsk.apc'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/spanish.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/spanish.apc new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..88de1763212 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/spanish.apc @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +%% +%% This is file `spanish.apc', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `spanish') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\ProvidesFile{spanish.apc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] + + +%% +%% spanish.apc - Versiσn espaρola de elementos en apacite +%% Escrito por Jorge Lσpez Puga + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Comandos para tipos especνficos de entradas @misc. +%%% Estos comandos son reconocidos por apacite.bst. +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Programa informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Manual de programa informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Programa informαtico y manual} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Manual de software informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Manual y software informαtico} +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Lenguaje de programaciσn} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% Otras etiquetas +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{y} % Entre autores en el texto +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}} % ``y colaboradores'', El argumento contiene un punto, por tanto, %evita poner uno adicional en la lista de referencias. No obstante %algunas revistas aceptan "et al." que es lo que aparece por defecto + % a dot to suppress an additional one + % in the reference list. The difference + % with \BOthers is that, if another + % string is used to define \BOthers, + % this one should always finish with a + % period and the previous one not + % necessarily (e.g., if explicit + % ``others'' is used). +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{y} % Letra que va entre los autores en las referencias (por defecto "\&") +\renewcommand{\BIP}{en prensa} % Usado como aρo para citas "en prensa" +\renewcommand{\BIn}{En} % Para ``En '' editor... +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{cap.\hbox{}} % capνtulo +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{caps.\hbox{}} % capνtulos +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Traduc.\hbox{}} % traductor +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Traducs.\hbox{}} % traductores +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{traduc.\hbox{}} % traducciσn, para el campo aρo +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Tesis Doctoral} + % (por defecto) PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Tesis doctoral no publicada} + % (por defecto) unpublished PhD thesis + % type name +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Tesis de master}% (por defecto) master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Tesis de master no publicada}% + % (por defecto) unpublished + % master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Trabajo original publicado en} +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reimpresiσn de} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% El nombre (del encabezado) de la Lista Referencias +\renewcommand{\refname}{Referencias}% Nombbre de la lista de ref. si es una secciσn. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referencias}% Nomber de la lista de refs. si es un capνtulo. + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + %Nota previa usada justo antes de la lista de referencias si un meta-anαlisis es usado. +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Las referencias marcadas con un asterisco indican estudios incluidos en el meta-anαlisis.} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% El nombre (del encabezado) del Νndice de Autores. +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Νndice de Autores} +%% +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `spanish.apc'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/swedish.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/swedish.apc index 9615c949366..57e78862253 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/swedish.apc +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/swedish.apc @@ -1,93 +1,115 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `swedish.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{swedish.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% swedish.apc - swedish translation of apacite elements
-%% Written by Stefan Bjork <stefan@raggmunk.nu>
-%% $Revision: 1.2 $
-%%
-%% Translation of APA elements into swedish is not obvious. Ideas of
-%% which terms to use have been taken from the following sources:
-%%
-%% Eriksson, M. G. (2001). Att skriva litteraturreferenser enligt
-%% Harvard-systemet. Retreived December 9, 2004, from:
-%% http://www.ida.his.se/ida/kurser/exjobb/kursmaterial/referenser.pdf
-%% Jonsson, Mattias. (n.d.). Lathund for referensskrivning. Retreived
-%% December 9, 2004, from:
-%% http://www.ped.gu.se/users/berner/htmarkiv/referens.html
-%% Referensskrivning. (1994). Retreived December 9, 2004, from
-%% Gothenburg University Web site:
-%% http://www.ped.gu.se/forskarutbildning/Referens_skrivning.htm
-%%
-
-%% Punctuations
-\renewcommand{\BBAB}{och}
-
-%% Labels
-\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.}
-\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.}
-\renewcommand{\BIP}{under tryckning}
-\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.}
-\renewcommand{\BED}{red.}
-\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red:er}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"overs.}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"overs.}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"overs.}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordf\"orande}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordf\"orande}
-\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.}
-\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.}
-\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.}
-\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.}
-\renewcommand{\BEd}{upplagan}
-\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.}
-\renewcommand{\BPGS}{ss.}
-\renewcommand{\BTR}{teknisk rapport}
-\renewcommand{\BPhD}{diss.}
-\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{opublicerad diss.}
-\renewcommand{\BMTh}{examensuppsats}
-\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{opublicerad examensuppsats}
-\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publicerat}
-\renewcommand{\BREPR}{\AA{}terutgivning fr\aa{}n}
-\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
-Referenser markerade med stj\"arna avser studier inkluderade i
-meta-analys.}
-
-%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
-\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{meddelande}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{datorprogram}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{handbok till datorprogram}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{mjukvara}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{handbok till mjukvara}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}
-\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr\aa{}k}
-
-%% Publication date unknown
-\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.\thinspace\aa{}.}
-
-%% Author Index
-\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{F\"orfattarindex}
+%% +%% This is file `swedish.apc', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% apacite.dtx (with options: `swedish') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% elsewhere in this file. +%% +%% This file is part of the `apacite' package. +%% ------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later +%% version. The latest version of this license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: +%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, +%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the +%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and +%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without +%% the generated files. +%% +\ProvidesFile{swedish.apc} + [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] + + +%% +%% swedish.apc - swedish translation of apacite elements +%% Written by Stefan Bjork. +%% Small adaptations by Erik Meijer +%% $Revision: 1.3 $ +%% +%% Translation of APA elements into swedish is not obvious. Ideas of +%% which terms to use have been taken from the following sources: +%% +%% Eriksson, M. G. (2001). Att skriva litteraturreferenser enligt +%% Harvard-systemet. Retreived December 9, 2004, from: +%% http://www.ida.his.se/ida/kurser/exjobb/kursmaterial/referenser.pdf +%% Jonsson, Mattias. (n.d.). Lathund for referensskrivning. Retreived +%% December 9, 2004, from: +%% http://www.ped.gu.se/users/berner/htmarkiv/referens.html +%% Referensskrivning. (1994). Retreived December 9, 2004, from +%% Gothenburg University Web site: +%% http://www.ped.gu.se/forskarutbildning/Referens_skrivning.htm +%% +%% Punctuations +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{och}% +%% Labels +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{under tryckning}% +\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red:er}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordf\"orande}% +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordf\"orande}% +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BEd}{upplagan}% +\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{ss.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BTR}{teknisk rapport}% +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{diss.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{opublicerad diss.\hbox{}}% +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{examensuppsats}% +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{opublicerad examensuppsats}% +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publicerat}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{\AA{}terutgivning fr\aa{}n}% +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Referenser markerade med stj\"arna avser studier inkluderade i + meta-analys.}% +%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{meddelande}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{datorprogram}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{handbok till datorprogram}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{mjukvara}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{handbok till mjukvara}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr\aa{}k}% +%% Publication date unknown +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.\thinspace\aa{}.\hbox{}}% +%% Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{F\"orfattarindex}% +%% +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `swedish.apc'. |